Registration No. 333            

Filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on February 14, 2020.

Registration No. 333-            

 

 

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORMS-3

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

 

 

AXA EQUITABLE LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

NEW YORK

(State or other jurisdiction of

incorporation or organization)

13-5570651

(I.R.S. Employer

Identification No.)

1290 AVENUE OF THE AMERICAS, NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10104

(212)554-1234

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number,

including area code, of registrant’s principal executive offices)

SHANE DALY

VICE PRESIDENT AND ASSOCIATE GENERAL COUNSEL

AXA EQUITABLE LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY

1290 AVENUE OF THE AMERICAS, NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10104

(212) 554-1234

(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number,

including area code, of agent for service)

 

 

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: As soon after the effective date of this Registration Statement as is practicable.

If the only securities being registered on this Form are being offered pursuant to dividend or interest reinvestment plans, please check the following box.  ☐

If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, other than securities offered only in connection with dividend or interest reinvestment plans, check the following box:  ☒

If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box and list the Securities Act Registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  ☐

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.  ☐

If this Form is a registration statement pursuant to General Instruction I.D. or a post-effective amendment thereto that shall become effective upon filing with the commission pursuant to Rule 462(e) under the Securities Act, check the following box.  ☐

If this Form is a post-effective amendment to a registration statement filed pursuant to General Instruction I.D. filed to register additional securities or additional classes of securities pursuant to Rule 413(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box.  ☐

Pursuant to Rule 429 under the Securities Act of 1933, the prospectusprospectuses contained herein also relatesrelate to Registration Statement No.No. 333-229588.333-223706. Upon effectiveness, this Registration Statement, which is a new Registration Statement, will also act as apost-effective amendment to such earlier Registration Statement.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, anon-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

Large accelerated filer [ ] Accelerated filer [ ]
Non-accelerated filer 

   (do not check if a smaller reporting company)

 Smaller reporting company [ ]
  Emerging growth company 

If an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act. [_]Act .  ☐

 

 

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

 

TITLE OF EACH CLASSTitle of each class

OF SECURITIES TO BE REGISTEREDof securities to be registered

 

AMOUNTAmount

TO BEto be

REGISTERED (1)registered(1)

Proposed

maximum

offering price

per unit

Proposed

maximum

aggregate

offering price

 PROPOSEDAmount of
MAXIMUM
OFFERING PRICE
PER UNIT (1)
PROPOSED
MAXIMUM
AGGREGATE
OFFERING PRICE (1)
AMOUNT OF
REGISTRATION
FEE (2)registration fee(2)

Interests in Structured Investment OptionVariable Indexed Options

 $[1] NAN/A NAN/A $[0]

AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company

None

 

(1)

An indeterminate number or amount of interests in the Structured Capital Strategies(R) 16Market Stabilizer Option/(R)/ of AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company that may from time to time be issued at indeterminate prices, in U.S. dollars. Units of interest are only sold in U.S. dollar amounts. In no event will the aggregate maximum offering price of all securities issued pursuant to this registration statement exceed $[3,057,550,784]154,454,234].

(2)

Prior to the filing of this Registration Statement, $[3,057,550,784]154,454,234] of securities of the registrant remained registered and unsold, pursuant to Registration Statement File No. 333-229588333-223706 on Form S-3 and are being carried forward pursuant to Rule 415(a)(6).

 

The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933 or until this Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.


Structured Capital StrategiesIncentive Life Optimizer® 16II

 

AAn individual flexible premium variable life insurance policy issued by Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company (the “Company”, “we”, “our” and index-linked deferred annuity contract“us”), formerly AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company with variable investment options offered under the Company’s Separate Account FP.

 

Prospectus dated May 1, 2020

 

Please read this prospectus and keep this Prospectusit for future reference. It contains important information that you should know before purchasing, or taking any other action under your contract. Youa policy. This prospectus supersedes all prior prospectuses and supplements. Also, you should read the prospectuses for each Trust, which contain important information about the portfolios.Portfolios.

 

 

 

What is Structured Capital Strategies® 16?

Structured Capital StrategiesThis prospectus describes the Incentive Life Optimizer® 16II policy, but is not itself a variable and index-linked deferred annuity contract issued byEquitable Financial Life Insurance Company (the “Company”, “we”, “our” and “us”), formerly AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company. The Structured Capital Strategies® contract is offered in various classes, called Series B, Series C and Series ADV. The contracts provide for the accumulation of retirement savings. The contract also offers a number of payout options. You invest to accumulate value on atax-deferred basis in one or more of our variable investment options, in one or more of the Segments comprising the Structured Investment Option or in our Dollar Cap Averaging Program. See “Definition of key terms” later in this Prospectus for a more detailed explanation of terms associated with the Structured Investment Option.

policy. This Prospectusprospectus is a disclosure document and describes all of the contract’spolicy’s material features, benefits, rights and obligations, as well as other information. The description of the contract’spolicy’s material provisions in this Prospectusprospectus is current as of the date of this Prospectus.prospectus. If certain material provisions under the contractpolicy are changed after the date of this Prospectusprospectus in accordance with the contract,policy, those changes will be described in a supplement to this Prospectus.prospectus. You should carefully read this Prospectusprospectus in conjunction with any applicable supplements. The contract should also be read carefully.

The contractCertain optional features and benefits described in the prospectus may not currently be available in all states. In addition, certain features described in this Prospectus may vary in your state. Not all Indices are available in all states. For astate-by-state description of all material variations to this contract, see “Appendix II” later in this Prospectus. We can refuse to accept any application or contribution from you at anythe time including after you purchase the contract.

policy. We reserve the right to discontinuerestrict availability of any optional feature or benefit. In addition, not all optional features and benefits may be available in combination with other optional features and benefits. To make this prospectus easier to read, we sometimes use different words than the acceptance of, and/policy. The Company or place additional limitations on, contributions into certainyour financial professional can provide any further explanation about your policy.

This policy is no longer sold. This prospectus is for current policy owners only. You should note that your policy features and charges, and your investment options, including any may vary depending on the state and/or all of the Segments comprisingdate on which you purchased your policy. For more information about the Structured Investment Option. If we exercise this right,particular options, features and charges applicable to you, please contact your abilityfinancial professional and/or refer to invest in your contract, increase your account value and, consequently, increase your death benefit will be limited.policy.

 

For information about income, estate and gift taxes in connection with life insurance policies as well as possible estate and gift tax consequences, please see the Tax information section later in this prospectus, including the information under “Estate, gift, and generation-skipping taxes”.

 

Please refer to page 15 of this Prospectus for a discussion of risk factors.What is Incentive Life Optimizer® II?

 

Incentive Life Optimizer® II provides life insurance coverage, plus the opportunity for you to earn a return in our guaranteed interest option, the Market Stabilizer Option® and/or one or more of the following variable investment options:

Our

Variable investment options

1290 VT Convertible Securities

1290 VT DoubleLine Dynamic Allocation

1290 VT DoubleLine Opportunistic Bond

1290 VT Equity Income

1290 VT GAMCO Mergers & Acquisitions

1290 VT GAMCO Small Company Value

1290 VT Small Cap Value(3)

1290 VT SmartBeta Equity

1290 VT Socially Responsible

American Funds Insurance Series® Global Small Capitalization Fund

American Funds Insurance Series® New World Fund®

EQ/400 Managed Volatility

EQ/500 Managed Volatility

EQ/2000 Managed Volatility

EQ/AB Small Cap Growth

EQ/All Asset Growth(2)

EQ/American Century Mid Cap Value(3)

EQ/Balanced Strategy(1)

EQ/BlackRock Basic Value Equity

EQ/Capital Group Research(2)(3)

EQ/ClearBridge Large Cap Growth

EQ/Common Stock Index

EQ/Conservative Growth Strategy(1)

EQ/Conservative Strategy(1)

EQ/Core Bond Index

EQ/Core Plus Bond(2)

EQ/Equity 500 Index

EQ/Fidelity Institutional AM® Large Cap

EQ/Franklin Rising Dividends

Variable investment options

EQ/Franklin Strategic Income

EQ/Global Bond PLUS

EQ/Global Equity Managed Volatility

EQ/Goldman Sachs Mid Cap Value

EQ/Growth Strategy(1)

EQ/Intermediate Government Bond

EQ/International Core Managed Volatility

EQ/International Equity Index

EQ/International Managed Volatility

EQ/International Value Managed Volatility

EQ/Invesco Comstock

EQ/Invesco Global Real Estate

EQ/Invesco International Growth

EQ/Janus Enterprise(3)

EQ/JPMorgan Value Opportunities

EQ/Large Cap Core Managed Volatility

EQ/Large Cap Growth Index

EQ/Large Cap Growth Managed Volatility

EQ/Large Cap Value Index

EQ/Large Cap Value Managed Volatility

EQ/Lazard Emerging Markets Equity

EQ/Loomis Sayles Growth

EQ/MFS International Growth

EQ/MFS Mid Cap Focused Growth

EQ/MFS Technology II

EQ/MFS® International Intrinsic Value(2)

EQ/Mid Cap Index

EQ/Mid Cap Value Managed Volatility

EQ/Moderate Growth Strategy(1)

EQ/Money Market

EQ/ Morgan Stanley Small Cap Growth(3)

EQ/PIMCO Real Return

EQ/PIMCO Total Return

EQ/PIMCO Ultra Short Bond

EQ/Quality Bond PLUS

EQ/Small Company Index

EQ/T. Rowe Price Growth Stock

EQ/Wellington Energy

Fidelity® VIP Growth & Income

Fidelity® VIP Mid Cap

Franklin Mutual Shares VIP

Franklin Small Cap Value VIP

Invesco V.I. Mid Cap Core Equity

Invesco V.I. Small Cap Equity

Ivy VIP High Income

Ivy VIP Small Cap Growth

MFS® Investors Trust

MFS® Massachusetts Investors Growth Stock

Multimanager Aggressive Equity

Multimanager Core Bond

Multimanager Technology

PIMCO CommodityRealReturn® Strategy

Target 2025 Allocation

Target 2035 Allocation

Target 2045 Allocation

Target 2055 Allocation

T. Rowe Price Equity Income II

Templeton Developing Markets VIP

Templeton Global Bond VIP

Templeton Growth VIP

VanEck VIP Global Hard Assets

(1)

Also referred to as an “EQ Strategic Allocation investment option” in this prospectus.

(2)

This is the variable investment option’s new name. Please see “About the Portfolios of the Trusts” later in this prospectus for the variable investment option’s former name which may continue to be used in certain documents for a period of time after the date of the prospectus.

(3)

This is the surviving variable investment option of a Portfolio merger. Please see “About the Portfolios of the Trust” later in this prospectus for the name of the acquired variable investment option which may continue to be used in certain documents for a period of time after the date of this prospectus.

Amounts that you allocate under your policy to any of the variable investment options are subaccounts offered through Separate Account No. 49. Each variable investment option, in turn, investsinvested in a corresponding securities portfolio (“portfolio”)“Portfolio” that is part of one of the EQ Advisors Trusttrusts (the “Trust”“Trusts”)., which are mutual funds. Please see “About the Portfolios of the Trusts” for more detailed information about the Portfolios and the Trusts. Your investment results in a variable investment option will depend on the investment performancethose of the related portfolio. Below is a complete list of the variable investment options:

Variable investment options

EQ/Core Bond Index

EQ/Equity 500 Index

EQ/Money Market

We also offer our Structured Investment Option, which permits you to invest in one or more Segments, each of which provides performance

tied to the performance of a securities index or exchange-traded fund for a set period (1 year, 3 years or 5 years). The Structured Investment Option does not involve an investment in any underlying portfolio. Instead, it is an obligation of the Company. Unlike an index fund, the Structured Investment Option provides a return at Segment maturity designed to provide a combination of protection against certain decreases in the index and a limitation on participation in certain increases in the index through the use of Performance Cap Rates. Our minimum Performance Cap Rates for 1, 3, and 5-year Standard Segments are 2%, 6%, and 10% respectively. Our minimum Performance Cap Rate for 5-year Choice Segments is 10%.Our minimum Performance Cap Rate for Annual Lock Segments is 2%. We will not open a Segment with a Performance Cap Rate below the applicable minimum Performance Cap Rate. The extent of the downside protection at Segment maturity varies by segment, ranging from the first 10%, 15%, 20%, 25% or 30% of loss.All guarantees are subject to the Company’s claims paying ability. There is a risk of a substantial loss of your principal because you agree to absorb all losses to the extent they exceed the downside protection provided by the Structured Investment Option at segment maturity. If you would like a guarantee of principal, we offer other products that provide such guarantees.

The total amount earned on an investment in a Segment of the Structured Investment Option is only applied at Segment maturity. If you take a withdrawal from a Segment on any date prior to Segment maturity, we calculate the interim value of the Segment as described in “Appendix III — Segment Interim Value.” This amount may be less than the amount invested and may be less than the amount you would receive had you held the investment until Segment maturity. The Segment Interim ValuePortfolio. Any gains will generally be negatively affected by increases intax deferred and the expected volatility of index prices, interest rate increases, and by poor market performance. All other factors being equal, the Segment Interim Value would be lower the earlier a withdrawal or surrender is made during a Segment. Also, participation in upside performance for early withdrawals ispro-rated based on the period those amounts were invested in a Segment. This means you participate to a lesser extent in upside performance the earlier you take a withdrawal.life

 

The Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) has not approved or disapproved these securities or determined if this Prospectusprospectus is accurate or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense. The contractspolicies are not insured by the FDIC or any other agency. They are not deposits or other obligations of any bank and are not bank guaranteed. They are subject to investment risks and possible loss of principal.

 

SCSCatalog No. 145327 (5/18)

#825521#844004/AA & ADLL


We currently offerinsurance benefits we pay if the Structured Investment Option usingpolicy’s insured person dies will generally be income tax free. If you are the following Indices:policy’s owner and the insured person, the death benefit will generally be includible in your estate for purposes of federal estate tax.

 

IndicesThe Market Stabilizer Option®

.  The Market Stabilizer Option® (“MSO”) is an investment option that is also available under this policy. The option provides for participation in the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index which excludes dividends, (the “Index”) up to the Growth Cap Rate that we set on the Segment Start Date. On the Segment Maturity Date, we will apply the Index-Linked Rate of Return to the Segment Account Value based on the performance of the Index. If the performance of the Index

Russell 2000® Price has been positive for the Segment Term and equal to or below the Growth Cap Rate, we will apply to the Segment Account Value an Index-Linked Rate of Return equal to the full Index performance. If the performance of the Index has been positive for the Segment Term and above the Growth Cap Rate, we will apply an Index-Linked Rate of Return equal to the Growth Cap Rate. If the Index has negative performance, the Index-Linked Rate of Return will be 0% unless the Index performance goes below-25% for the Segment Term. In that case only the negative performance in excess of-25% will be applied to the Segment Account Value. Please see “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” for more information and definitions of terms associated with the MSO.

MSCI EAFE Price Return Index

NASDAQ-100 Price Return Index

MSCI Emerging Markets Price Return Index

iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund

Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund

Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund

SPDR® Gold Shares

iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF

 

 

Types of contracts.Please note that you will not be credited with any positive Index performance with respect to amounts that are removed from a Segment prior to the Segment Maturity Date. Even when the Index performance has been positive, such early removals will cause you to lose some principal. Please see “Early Distribution Adjustment” later in this prospectus.  We offer the contracts for use as:

 

A nonqualified annuity (“NQ”) forafter-tax contributions only.

An individual retirement annuity (“IRA”), either traditional IRA or Roth IRA.

An annuity that is an investment vehicle for a qualified plan (“QP”) (whether defined contribution or defined benefit; transfer contributions only).

A minimum contribution of $25,000 is required to purchase a contract.

 

Other choices you have.  You have considerable flexibility to tailor the policy to meet your needs. For example, subject to our rules, you can purchase this contract in one(1) choose when and how much you contribute (as “premiums”) to your policy, (2) pay certain premium amounts to guarantee that your insurance coverage will continue for at least a certain number of three ways: (i) as a Series B contract, which has withdrawal charges, (ii) as a Series C contract, which has no withdrawal charges,policy years, regardless of investment performance, (3) borrow or (iii) as a Series ADV contract,withdraw amounts you have accumulated, (4) choose between two life insurance death benefit options, (5) increase or decrease the amount of insurance coverage, (6) elect

to receive an insurance benefit if you are a participant in an account established under afee-based program sponsored by a registered investment adviserthe insured person becomes terminally ill, and (7) obtain certain optional benefits that we accept, which has no withdrawal charges.

The principal underwriters of the contract are Equitable Advisors, LLC and Equitable Distributors, LLC. The offering of the contract is intendedoffer by “riders” to be continuous.your policy.

 

Registration statements relating to this offering have been filed with the SEC. The statementOther policies.  We offer a variety of additional information (“SAI”) dated May 1, 2020, is a part of the registration statement filed on FormN-4. The SAI is available free of charge. You may request one by writing to our processing office at P.O. Box 1547, Secaucus, NJ 07096-1547 or calling1-800-789-7771. The SAI is incorporatedfixed and variable life insurance policies which offer policy features, including investment options, that are different from those offered by this reference into this Prospectus. This Prospectus and the SAIprospectus. Not every policy or feature is offered through your financial professional. Replacing existing insurance with Incentive Life Optimizer® II or another policy may not be to your advantage. You can also be obtained from the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. The table of contents for the SAI appears at the back of this Prospectus.contact us to find out more about any other insurance policy.

 

Electronic delivery of shareholder reports (pursuant to Rule 30e-3).Beginning on January 1, 2021, as permitted by regulations adopted by the SEC, paper copies of the shareholder reports for portfolio companies available under your contractpolicy will no longer be sent by mail, unless you specifically request paper copies of the reports from the Company or from your financial intermediary. Instead, the reports will be made available on a website,web-site, and you will be notified by mail each time a report is posted and provided with a website link to access the report.

 

If you already elected to receive shareholder reports electronically, you will not be affected by this change and you need not take any action. You may elect to receive shareholder reports and other communications electronically from the Company by calling 1-800-789-77711-800-777-6510 or by calling your financial intermediary.

 

You may elect to receive all future reports in paper free of charge. You can inform the Company or your financial intermediary that you wish to continue receiving paper copies of your shareholder reports by calling1-877-522-5035, by sending an email request to EquitableFunds@dfinsolutions.com, or by calling your financial intermediary. Your election to receive reports in paper will apply to all portfolio companies available under your contract.policy.

The Market Stabilizer Option® is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Standard & Poor’s (“S&P”) or its third party licensors. Neither S&P nor its third party licensors makes any representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of the Market Stabilizer Option® or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Market Stabilizer Option® particularly or the ability of the S&P 500 Price Return index (the “Index”) to track general stock market performance. S&P’s and its third party licensor’s only relationship to the Company is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of S&P and the third party licensors and of the Index which is determined, composed and calculated by S&P or its third party licensors without regard to the Company or the Market Stabilizer Option®. S&P and its third party licensors have no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the owners of the Market Stabilizer Option® into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the Index. Neither S&P nor its third party licensors is responsible for and has not participated in the determination of the prices and amount of the Market Stabilizer Option® or the timing of the issuance or sale of the Market Stabilizer Option® or in the determination or calculation of the equation by which the Market Stabilizer Option® is to be converted into cash. S&P has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Market Stabilizer Option®.

    

 


Contents of this Prospectus

 

 

    

The CompanyDefinitions of Key Terms

  5

Definitions of key terms

6

Structured Capital Strategies® at a glance — key features

8
Fee table12

Examples

13

Condensed financial information

14
  

1. Risk factorsRisk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay

  7

Tables of policy charges

7

How we allocate charges among your investment options

10

Changes in charges

10

2. Risk/benefit summary: Policy features, benefits and risks

  1511

How you can pay for and contribute to your policy

11

The minimum amount of premiums you must pay

11

You can guarantee that your policy will not terminate before a certain date

12

You can elect a “paid up” death benefit guarantee

13

CybersecurityYou can receive an accelerated death benefit under theLong-Term Care ServicesSM Rider

13

Investment options within your policy

13

About your life insurance benefit

15

Alternative higher death benefit in certain cases

15

You can increase or decrease your insurance coverage

16

Accessing your money

17

Risks of investing in a policy and the Market Stabilizer Option®

18

How the Incentive Life Optimizer® II variable life insurance policy is available

  19
  

2. How to reach us3. The Company

  20

How to reach us

21

About our Separate Account FP

21

About Separate Account No. 67

22

Your voting privileges

22

About the Trusts

22
  
4. About the Portfolios of the Trusts23

3. Contract features and benefitsPortfolios of the Trusts

  22

How you can purchase and contribute to your contract

22

Owner and annuitant requirements

25

How you can make your contributions

25

Allocating your contributions

26

What are your investment options under the contract?

26

Portfolios of the Trust

27

Structured Investment Option

28

Dollar Cap Averaging Program

38

Your right to cancel within a certain number of days

39

4. Determining your contract’s value

40

Your account value and cash value

40

Your contract’s value in the variable investment options, Segment Type Holding Accounts and Dollar Cap Averaging Account

40

Your contract’s value in the Structured Investment Option

40

5. Transferring your money among investment options

42

Transferring your account value

42

Disruptive transfer activity

4224
 

 

“Financial professional” means the registered representative of either Equitable Advisors or an unaffiliated broker dealer which has entered into a selling agreement with Equitable Distributors who is offering you this policy.

 

When we address the reader of this Prospectus with words such as “you““you” and “your, we mean the person who hasor persons having the right or responsibility that the Prospectusprospectus is discussing at that point. This usually is usually the contractpolicy’s owner. If a policy has more than one owner, all owners must join in the exercise of any rights an owner has under the policy, and the word “owner” therefore refers to all owners.

When we use the word “contract“ it“state” we also includes certificatesmean any other local jurisdiction whose laws or regulations affect a policy.

This prospectus does not offer Incentive Life Optimizer® II anywhere such offers are not lawful. The Company does not authorize any information or representation about the offering other than that are issued under group contractscontained or incorporated in some states.this prospectus, in any current supplements thereto, or in any related sales materials authorized by the Company.

 

 

3


6. Accessing your money5. About the Market Stabilizer Option® (applicable only if allocating amounts to the MSO)

  4433

Definitions

33

Withdrawing your account valueDescription of the Market Stabilizer Option®

  44

How withdrawals are taken from your account value

45

Surrendering your contract to receive its cash value

45

Withdrawals treated as surrenders

46

When to expect payments

46

Signature Guarantee

46

Your annuity payout options

4634
  

7. Charges and expenses6. Determining your policy’s value

  4843

Charges that the Company deductsYour policy account value

  48

Charges under the contracts

48

Charges that the Trust deducts

50

Group or sponsored arrangements

50

Other distribution arrangements

5043
  

8. Payment of death benefit7. Transferring your money among our investment options

  5144

Your beneficiary and payment of benefitTransfers you can make

  5144

Non-spousal joint owner contract continuationHow to make transfers

  5145

Spousal continuationOur automatic transfer service

  5245

Beneficiary continuation optionOur asset rebalancing service

  5245
  

9. Tax information8. Accessing your money

  5546

OverviewBorrowing from your policy

  5546

Buying a contract to fund a retirement arrangementLoan extension (for guideline premium test policies only)

  5547

Transfers among investment optionsMaking withdrawals from your policy

  5548

Taxation of nonqualified annuitiesSurrendering your policy for its net cash surrender value

  5548

Individual retirement arrangements (“IRAs”)Your option to receive a terminal illness living benefit under the Living Benefits Rider

  57

Traditional individual retirement annuities (“traditional IRAs”)

58

Roth individual retirement annuities (“Roth IRAs”)

62

Tax withholding and information reporting

65

Impact of taxes to the Company

6649
  

10. More9. Tax information

  6750

Basic income tax treatment for you and your beneficiary

50

Tax treatment of distributions to you (loans, partial withdrawals, and full surrender)

50

Tax treatment of Living Benefits Rider or Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider under a policy with the applicable rider

51

Business and employer owned policies

52

Requirement that we diversify investments

52

Estate, gift, and generation-skipping taxes

53

Pension and profit-sharing plans

53

Split-dollar and other employee benefit programs

53

ERISA

53

3.8% Tax on Net Investment Income or “NII”

53

Our taxes

53

Tax withholding and information reporting

53

Possibility of future tax changes and other tax information

54

10. More information about policy features and benefits

55

About Separate Account No. 49Guarantee premium test for theno-lapse guarantees

55

Paid up death benefit guarantee

55

Other benefits you can add by rider

56

Customer loyalty credit

61

Variations among Incentive Life Optimizer® II policies

62

Your options for receiving policy proceeds

62

Your right to cancel within a certain number of days

62

11. More information about certain policy charges

63

Deducting policy charges

63

Charges that the Trusts deduct

  67

About Separate Account No. 6812. More information about procedures that apply to your policy

  6768

About the Trust

67

About the general accountDates and prices at which policy events occur

  68

About other methods of payment

68

Dates and prices at which contract events occur

68

About your voting rightsPolicy issuance

  69

Statutory complianceWays to make premium and loan payments

  69

About legal proceedingsAssigning your policy

  69

Financial statements

69

Transfers of ownership, collateral assignments, loans, and borrowingYou can change your policy’s insured person

  70

About Custodial IRAsRequirements for surrender requests

  70

Distribution of the contractsGender-neutral policies

70

Future policy exchanges

70

Broker transaction authority

  70
  

11.13. More information about other matters

71

About our general account

71

Transfers of your policy account value

71

Telephone and Internet requests

72

Cybersecurity

73

Suicide and certain misstatements

73

When we pay policy proceeds

73

Changes we can make

73

Reports we will send you

74

Distribution of the policies

74

Legal proceedings

76

14. Financial statements of Separate Account FP and the Company

77

15. Incorporation of certain documents by reference

  7378

16. Personalized illustrations

79

Illustrations of policy benefits

79

Appendices

I   

Condensed financial informationMSO Early Distribution Adjustment Examples

  I-1
II   

State contract availability and/or variations of certain features and benefitsCalculating the alternate death benefit

  II-1
III   

Segment Interim ValuePolicy variations

  III-1
IV   

Index PublishersState policy availability and/or variations of certain features and benefits

  IV-1
V

Segment Maturity Date and Segment Start Date examples

V-1
VI

Purchase considerations for defined benefit and defined contribution plans

VI-1
   

Requesting more information

Statement of additional informationAdditional Information

Table of contents

   
 

 

4


Definitions of Key Terms

Alternative Death Benefit— the alternate higher death benefit is based upon the life insurance qualification test that you choose. We will automatically pay an alternative death benefit if it is higher than the basic death benefit option you have selected.

Amount at Risk— our amount at risk on any date is the difference between (a) the death benefit that would be payable if the insured person died on that date and (b) the then total account value under the policy.

Beneficiary— the person or entity you designate to receive the death benefit payable at the death of the Insured.

Business Day— is generally any day the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) is open for regular trading and generally ends at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time (or as of an earlier close of regular trading). A business day does not include a day on which we are not open due to emergency conditions determined by the Securities and Exchange Commission. We may also close early due to such emergency conditions. Premium payments will be applied and any other transaction requests will be processed when they are received along with all the required information unless another date applies as indicated below.

If your premium payment, transfer or any other transaction request containing all the required information reaches us on any of the following, we will use the next business day:

on anon-business day;

after 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on a business day; or

after an early close of regular trading on the NYSE on a business day.

Cash Surrender Value— the cash surrender value is equal to the difference between your policy account value and any surrender charges that are in effect under your policy.

Cost of Insurance Charge— the monthly cost of insurance charge is determined by multiplying the cost of insurance rate that is then applicable to your policy by the amount we have at risk under your policy divided by $1,000.

Cost of Insurance Rates— the cost of insurance rates vary depending on a number of factors, including, but not limited to, the individual characteristics of the insured, the face amount and the policy year.

Customer Loyalty Credit— a customer loyalty credit is provided for policies that have been in force for more than 8 years. This is added to your policy account value each month.

Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee— the enhanced no lapse guarantee is an optional rider that may be elected at issue at no additional charge that provides a longer guarantee period than described below with a possible higher and/or longer premium requirement, provided that you allocate all of your policy account value to any of the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options.

Face Amount— represents the amount of insurance coverage you want on the life of the insured person.

Guaranteed Interest Account— is a fixed account that is part of our General Account.

Guarantee Premium— you can generally guarantee that your policy will not terminate for a number of years by paying at least certain specified amounts of premiums. We call these amounts “guarantee premiums” and they will be set forth in your policy.

Insured— the person on whose life we base this policy.

Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider— subject to our eligibility requirements, this is an optional rider that may be elected at issue that provides for the acceleration of the policy death benefit as a payment of a portion of the policy’s death benefit each month as a result of the insured person being a chronically ill individual who is receiving qualified long-term care services.

Market Stabilizer Option® (“MSO”)— the MSO is an optional rider that provides a rate of return tied to the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return Index.

Net Cash Surrender Value— The net cash surrender value equals your policy account value, minus any outstanding loan and unpaid loan interest, minus any amount of your policy account value that is “restricted” as a result of previously distributed terminal illness living benefits, and further reduced for any monthly benefit payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider, and minus any surrender charge that then remains applicable. If you have any policy account value in the MSO, the Segment Distribution Value and not the Segment Account Value will be used to calculate your policy account value for the purpose of determining your net cash surrender value.

Net Policy Account Value— your “net policy account value” is the total of (i) your amounts in our variable investment options, (ii) your Segment Account Value(s), (iii) your amounts in our guaranteed interest option, (iv) plus any interest credited on loaned amounts, minus any interest accrued on outstanding loans and minus any “restricted” amounts that we hold in the guaranteed interest option as a result of any payment received under a Living Benefits Rider.

No-Lapse Guarantee— provides a guarantee against policy termination for a specific period of time.

Owner— the owner of the policy. “You” or “your” refers to the owner.

Paid Up Death Benefit Guarantee— the “paid up” death benefit provides an opportunity to lock in all or a portion of your policy’s death benefit without making additional premium payments.

Policy— the policy with any attached application(s), any riders, and any endorsements.

Policy Account Value— your policy account value is the total of (i) your amounts in our variable investment options, (ii) your Segment

5


Account Value(s), (iii) your amounts in our guaranteed interest option (other than in (iv)), and (iv) any amounts that we are holding to secure policy loans that you have taken (including any interest on those amounts which has not yet been allocated to the investment options).

Premium Payments— We call the amounts you contribute to your policy “premiums” or “premium payments.”

Register date — Your policy’s “register date” will be shown in your policy and is the date from which we measure the months, years and anniversaries of your policy. Your register date is determined as described in“Policy issuance” under “More information about procedures that apply to your policy” later in this prospectus.

Segment Maturity GIO Limitation — A specified percentage limitation on the amount of your Segment Maturity Value that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. The Company reserves the right to implement a specified percentage limitation on the amount of your Segment Maturity Value that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. The specified percentage limitation can be changed at anytime, but it will never be less than 5% of your Segment Maturity Value. We will transfer any portion of your Segment Maturity Value that is allocated to the guaranteed interest option in excess of the Segment Maturity GIO Limitation to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option unless we receive your instructions prior to the Segment Maturity Date that the Segment Maturity Value should be allocated to the MSO Holding Account or to any other available variable investment option. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

Segment Maturity Date — The date on which a Segment Term is completed and the Index-Linked Return for that Segment is applied to a Segment Account Value.

Segment Maturity Value — This is the Segment Account Value adjusted by the Index-Linked Return for that Segment.

Segment Start Date — The Segment Start Date is the day on which a Segment is created.

Segment Term — The duration of a Segment. The Segment Term for each Segment begins on its Segment Start Date and ends on its Segment Maturity Date one year later. We are currently only offering Segment Terms of approximately one year. We may offer different durations in the future.

6


1. Risk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay

 

 

Tables of policy charges

The following tables describe the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning and surrendering the policy.

The first table shows the charges that we deduct under the terms of your policy when you buy and each time you contribute to your policy, surrender the policy, reduce the face amount or transfer policy account value among investment options.All charges are shown on a guaranteed maximum basis. The current charges may be lower than the guaranteed maximum for certain charges.(1)

Transaction Fees
ChargeWhen charge is deductedMaximum amount that may be deducted
Premium chargeFrom each premium6% of each premium(2)
Surrender (turning in) of your policy during its first 10 years or the first 10 years after you have requested an increase in your policy’s face
amount(3)(5)
Upon surrender

Initial surrender charge per $1,000 of initial base policy face amount or per $1,000 of requested base policy face amount increase:(4)

Highest: $45.91

Lowest: $8.71

Representative: $16.62(6)

Request a decrease in your policy’s face amount(3)Effective date of the decreaseA pro rata portion of the charge that would apply to a full surrender at the time of the decrease.
Transfers among investment optionsUpon transfer$25 per transfer.(7)

Special services charges

•   Wire transfer charge(8)

•   Express mail charge(8)

•   Policy illustration charge(9)

•   Duplicate policy charge(9)

•   Policy history charge(9)(10)

•   Charge for returned payments(9)

At the time of the transaction

At the time of the transaction

At the time of the transaction

At the time of the transaction

At the time of the transaction

At the time of the transaction

Current and Maximum Charge: $90

Current and Maximum Charge: $35

Current Charge: $0

Maximum Charge: $25

Current and Maximum Charge: $35

Current and Maximum Charge: $50

Current and Maximum Charge: $25

This table shows the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time that you own the Policy, not including underlying Trust portfolio fees and expenses.

Periodic charges other than underlying trust portfolio operating expenses
ChargeWhen charge is deductedMaximum amount that may be deducted
Administrative charge(3)(11)Monthly

(1)  Policy Year

Amount deducted

   1

   2+

$15(12)

$10(12)

plus

(2)  Charge per $1,000 of the initial base policy face amount and any requested base policy face amount increase that exceeds the highest previous face amount:

     Highest: $0.34

     Lowest: $0.09

     Representative: $0.11(6)

Cost of insurance charge(3)(11)(13)MonthlyCharge per $1,000 of the amount for which we are at risk:(14)

Highest: $83.34

Lowest: $0.02

Representative: $0.09(15)

7


Periodic charges other than underlying trust portfolio operating expenses
ChargeWhen charge is deductedMaximum amount that may be deducted
Mortality and expense risk chargeMonthly

Policy Year

Annual % of your value in our variable investment options and MSO

1-10

11+

1.00%

0.50%

Loan interest spread(16)On each policy anniversary (or on loan termination, if earlier)1% of loan amount.
Optional rider chargesWhen charge is deductedMaximum amount that may be deducted
Children’s Term InsuranceMonthly (while the rider is in effect)Charge per $1,000 of rider benefit amount:
$0.50
Disability Deduction Waiver(3)Monthly (while the rider is in effect)Percentage of all other monthly charges:
Highest: 132%
Lowest: 7%
Representative: 12%(15)

Disability Premium Waiver(3)

(Initial base policy face amount(18))

Monthly (while the rider is in effect)Charge for Disability Premium Waiver per $1,000 of benefit for which such rider is purchased:(17)
Highest: $0.60
Lowest: $0.01
Representative: $0.06(15)

Disability Premium Waiver(3)

(Children’s Term Insurance)

Monthly (while the rider is in effect)Charge for Disability Premium Waiver per $1,000 of benefit for which such rider is purchased:(17)
Highest: $0.03
Lowest: $0.01
Representative: $0.01(15)

Disability Premium Waiver(3)

(Long-Term Care ServicesSMRider)

Monthly (while the rider is in effect)Charge for Disability Premium Waiver per $1,000 of benefit for which such rider is purchased:(17)
Highest: $0.02
Lowest: $0.0009
Representative: $0.003(15)

Disability Premium Waiver(3)

(Option To Purchase Additional Insurance)

Monthly (while the rider is in effect)Charge for Disability Premium Waiver per $1,000 of benefit for which such rider is purchased:(17)
Highest: $0.07
Lowest: $0.02
Representative: $0.03(15)
Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider(3)(11)(24)MonthlyCharge per $1,000 of the amount for which we are at risk:(19)

With the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit:

Highest: $2.94

Lowest: $0.25

Representative: $0.53(20)

Without the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit:

Highest: $2.67

Lowest: $0.22

Representative: $0.49(20)

Option To Purchase Additional Insurance(3)Monthly (while the rider is in effect)Charge per $1,000 of rider benefit amount:
Highest: $0.17
Lowest: $0.04
Representative: $0.16(20)
Cash Value Plus Rider(21)Monthly (while the rider is in effect)Charge per $1,000 of the initial base policy face amount:
$0.04
Adding Living Benefits RiderAt the time of the transaction$100 (if elected after policy issue)
Exercising Living Benefits RiderAt the time of the transaction$250

There is no additional charge for the Charitable Legacy Rider or the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider.

8


Periodic charges other than underlying trust portfolio operating expenses
MSO rider charges††When charge is deductedMaximum amount that may be deducted
Market Stabilizer Option® (MSO)Please see “Definitions” under “About the Market Stabilizer Option® “ later in this prospectus for key words and phrases related to the MSO, as well as the meaning of special terms that are relevant to the MSO.
Loan Interest Spread(16) for Amounts of Policy Loans Allocated to an MSO SegmentOn each policy anniversary (or on loan termination, if earlier)

2% for New York and Oregon policies

5% for all other policies

MSO Early Distribution AdjustmentOn surrender or other distribution (including loan) from an MSO Segment prior to its Segment Maturity Date75% of Segment Account Value(22)
Variable Index Benefit Charge(25)On Segment Start Date0.75%
Variable Index Segment Account Charge(25)At the beginning of each policy month during the Segment Term1.65%(23)
Total2.40%

††  Please see “Charges” and “Charge Reserve Amount” under “About the Market Stabilizer Option® “ for more information on how charges are deducted.

(1)

For more information about some of these charges, see “Deducting policy charges” under “More information about certain policy charges” later in this prospectus. The illustrations of Policy Benefits that your financial professional will provide will show the impact of the actual current and guaranteed maximum rates, if applicable, of the policy charges, based on various assumptions (except for the loan interest spread, where we use current rates in all cases).

(2)

Currently, we reduce this charge to 4% after an amount equal to two”target premiums” has been paid. The “target premium” is actuarially determined for each policy, based on that policy’s specific characteristics, and death benefit option, as well as the policy’s face amount, among other factors. A similar charge applies to premiums attributed to requested face amount increases that are above your highest previous face amount. If your policy includes the Cash Value Plus Rider, a portion of the premium charge will be refunded upon surrender within the first three policy years, subject to a cumulative premium-based cap on the rider benefits (see “Cash Value Plus Rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus).

(3)

This charge varies based on individual characteristics of the insured, and for the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider on the benefit percentage you choose and may not be representative of the charge that you will pay. In particular, the initial amount of the surrender charge depends on each insured’s specific characteristics. Your financial professional can provide you with more information about these charges as they relate to the insured’s particular characteristics. See “Deducting policy charges” under “More information about certain policy charges.”

(4)

If your policy includes the Cash Value Plus Rider, the surrender charges are reduced, subject to a cumulative premium-based cap on the rider benefits (see “Cash Value Plus Rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus).

(5)

The surrender charge attributable to each increase in your policy’s face amount is in addition to any remaining surrender charge attributable to the policy’s initial face amount.

(6)

This representative amount is the rate we guarantee for a representative insured male age 35 at issue or at the time of a requested face amount increase, in the preferred elitenon-tobacco user risk class.

(7)

No charge, however, will ever apply to a transfer of all of your variable investment option amounts to our guaranteed interest option, or to any transfer pursuant to our automatic transfer service or asset rebalancing service as discussed later in this prospectus. Nor will this charge apply to any transfers to or from any MSO Holding Account that we make available in connection with any Market Stabilizer Option® available as an investment option. Please see “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus for information about the MSO and the related “Holding Account.”

(8)

Unless you specify otherwise, this charge will be deducted from the amount you request.

(9)

The charge for this service must be paid using funds outside of your policy. Please see “Deducting policy charges” under “More Information about certain policy charges” for more information.

(10)

The charge for this service may be less depending on the policy history you request. Please see “Deducting policy charges” under “More Information about certain policy charges” for more information.

(11)

Not applicable after the insured person reaches age 121.

(12)

Not applicable if the minimum face amount stated in your policy is $10,000. Please see “Your policy’s face amount” under “About your life insurance benefit” in “Risk/ benefit summary: Policy features, benefits and risks” later in this prospectus.

(13)

Insured persons who present particular health, occupational or vocational risks may be charged other additional charges as specified in their policies.

(14)

Our amount “at risk” is the difference between the amount of death benefit and the policy account value as of the deduction date.

(15)

This representative amount is the rate we guarantee in the first policy year for a representative insured male age 35 at issue in the preferred elitenon-tobacco user risk class.

(16)

We charge interest on policy loans but credit you with interest on the amount of the policy account value we hold as collateral for the loan. The rate is the greater of (a) 3% or (b) the “Monthly Average Corporate” yield published by Moody’s Corporate Bond Yield Averages for the month that ends two months before the interest rate is set. The loan interest spread is the excess of the interest rate we charge over the interest rate we credit, which will not exceed 1%. For more information on the maximum rate see “Borrowing from your policy — Loan interest we charge” in “Accessing your money” later in this prospectus. However, for MSO Segments, the guaranteed maximum spread is higher as noted above. This spread is the maximum difference between the annual interest rate we credit and the annual loan interest rate we charge on the amount of any loan deducted from a Segment. See “Loans” and “How we deduct monthly charges during a Segment Term” under “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus for more information about how loan interest is deducted from your policy.

9


(17)

Amount charged equals the total sum of Disability Premium Waiver rider charges corresponding to the base policy, any Children’s Term Insurance, Option To Purchase Additional Insurance and/or any Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider that you have added to your policy and to any base policy face amount increases.

(18)

The monthly charges corresponding to the base policy will be adjusted proportionately to any face amount reduction made at your request or resulting from a partial withdrawal under death benefit Option A.

(19)

Our amount “at risk” for this rider depends on the death benefit option selected under the policy. See “More information about policy features and benefits — Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider” later in this prospectus.

(20)

This representative amount is the rate we guarantee in any policy year while the rider is in effect for a representative insured male age 35 at issue in the preferred elitenon-tobacco user risk class.

(21)

This rider is not available if you elect the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information on the charge applicable under the prior version of this rider. This rider was available beginning May 2, 2011.

(22)

The actual amount of an Early Distribution Adjustment is determined by a formula that depends on, among other things, how the Index has performed since the Segment Start Date, as discussed in detail in “Early Distribution Adjustment” under “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus. The maximum amount of the adjustment would occur if there is a total distribution at a time when the Index has declined to zero.

(23)

Currently we deduct this charge at an annual rate of 0.65%, rather than at the maximum rate shown.

(24)

This rider is not available if you elect the Cash Value Plus Rider.

(25)

These charges represent annual rates.

You also bear your proportionate share of all fees and expenses paid by a Portfolio that corresponds to any variable investment option you are using. This table shows the lowest and highest total operating expenses currently charged by any of the Portfolios that you will pay periodically during the time that you own the Policy. These fees and expenses are reflected in the Portfolio’s net asset value each day. Therefore, they reduce the investment return of the Portfolio and the related variable investment option. Actual fees and expenses are likely to fluctuate from year to year.More detail concerning each Portfolio’s fees and expenses is contained in the Trust prospectus for that Portfolio.

Portfolio operating expenses expressed as an annual percentage of daily net assets

Total Annual Portfolio Operating Expenses (expenses that are deducted from Portfolio assets including management fees,12b-1 fees, service fees and/or other expenses)(1)Lowest

        %

Highest

        %

(1)

“Total Annual Portfolio Operating Expenses” may be based, in part, on estimated amounts of such expenses. Pursuant to a contract, Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC has agreed to make payments or waive its management, administrative and other fees to limit the expenses of certain affiliated Portfolios through April 30, 2021 (“Expense Limitation Arrangement”) (unless the Trust’s Board of Trustees consents to an earlier revision or termination of this agreement). The Expense Limitation Arrangement may be terminated by Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC at any time after April 30, 2021. The range of expenses in the table above does not include the effect of any Expense Limitation Arrangement. The range of expense in the table below includes the effect of the Expense Limitation Arrangements.

                                                 Portfolio operating expenses expressed as an annual percentage of daily net assets

Total Annual Portfolio Operating Expenses after the effect of Expense Limitation Arrangements(*)Lowest

        %

Highest

        %

(*)

“Total Annual Portfolio Operating Expenses” may be based, in part, on estimated amounts of such expenses.

How we allocate charges among your investment options

In your application for a policy, you tell us from which investment options you want us to take the policy’s monthly deductions as they fall due. You can change these instructions at any time. If we cannot deduct the charge as your most current instructions direct, we will allocate the deduction among your investment options proportionately to your value in each. If the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider or the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect, we will allocate the deduction among the investment options available with these guarantees, proportionately to your value in each.

Substantially different procedures apply, however, if you allocate any of your policy account value to the MSO investment option. In that case, for example, you will be required to maintain a certain amount of policy account value in the policy’s guaranteed interest option, from which we will make the policy’s monthly deductions. Please see “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus for more information about these procedures, including the procedure we will follow if amounts in the guaranteed interest option are insufficient to pay the deductions.

Changes in charges

We reserve the right in the future to (1) make a charge for certain taxes or reserves set aside for taxes (see “Our taxes” under “Tax information” later in this prospectus) that might be imposed on us; (2) make a charge for the operating expenses of our variable investment options (including, without limitation, SEC registration fees and related legal counsel fees and auditing fees); or (3) change our other current policy charges (in no event will they exceed the maximum charges guaranteed in your policy).

Any changes that we make in our current charges or charge rates will be on a basis that is equitable to all policies belonging to a given class, and will be determined based on reasonable assumptions as to expenses, mortality, investment income, lapses and policy and contract claims associated with morbidity. These assumptions include taxes, the cost of hedging, longevity, volatility, other market conditions, surrenders, persistency, conversions, disability, accident, illness, inability to perform activities of daily living, and cognitive impairment, if applicable. Any changes in charges may apply to then in force policies, as well as to new policies. You will be notified in writing of any changes in charges under your policy.

10


2.Risk/benefit summary: Policy features, benefits and risks

Incentive Life Optimizer® II is a variable life insurance policy that provides you with flexible premium payment plans and benefits to meet your specific needs. The basic terms of the policy require you to make certain payments in return for life insurance coverage. The payments you can make and the coverage you can receive under this “base policy” are described below.

Riders to your base policy can increase the benefits you receive and affect the amounts you pay in certain circumstances. Available riders are listed in “Other benefits you can add by rider” under “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus.

In addition, depending on when you purchased your policy, certain variations may apply to your policy which differ from the information contained in this section. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

How you can pay for and contribute to your policy

Premium payments.  We call the amounts you contribute to your policy “premiums” or “premium payments.” The amount we require as your first premium varies depending on the specifics of your policy and the insured person. Each subsequent premium payment must be at least $50, although we can increase this minimum if we give you advance notice. Otherwise, with a few exceptions mentioned below, you can make premium payments at any time and in any amount.

Section 1035 exchanges of policies with outstanding loans.  If we approve, you may purchase an Incentive Life Optimizer® II policy through an assignment and exchange of another life insurance policy with a cash surrender value pursuant to a valid exchange under Section 1035 of the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”). If such other policy is subject to a policy loan, we may permit you to carry over all or a portion of such loan to the Incentive Life Optimizer® II policy, subject to our administrative rules then in effect. In this case, we will treat any cash paid, plus any loaned amount carried over to the Incentive Life Optimizer® II policy, as premium received in consideration of our issuing the policy. If we allow you to carry over all or a portion of any such outstanding loan, then we will hold amounts securing such loan in the same manner as the collateral for any other policy loan, and your policy also will be subject to all our other rules regarding loans (see “Borrowing from your policy” later in this prospectus).

You can generally pay premiums at such times and in such amounts as you like before the policy anniversary nearest to the insured’s 121st birthday, so long as you don’t exceed certain limits determined by the federal income tax laws applicable to life insurance.

Your choice of a life insurance qualification test and limits on premium payments.  A policy must satisfy either of two testing methods to qualify as a life insurance contract for tax purposes under Section 7702 of the Code. In your application, you may choose either the guideline premium/cash value corridor test (“guideline premium test”) or the cash value accumulation test. If you do not choose a life insurance qualification test, your policy will be issued using the guideline premium test. Once your policy is issued, the qualification method cannot be changed.

The qualification method you choose will depend upon your objective in purchasing the policy. Generally, under the cash value accumulation test, you have the flexibility to pay more premiums in the earlier years than under the guideline premium test for the same face amount and still qualify as life insurance for federal income tax purposes. Under the guideline premium test, the federal tax law definition of “life insurance” limits your ability to pay certain high levels of premiums (relative to your policy’s insurance coverage) but increases those limits over time. We will return any premium payments that exceed these limits.

You should note, however, that the alternative death benefit under the cash value accumulation test may be higher in earlier policy years than under the guideline premium test, which will result in higher charges. Under either test, if at any time your policy account value (as defined under “Determining your policy’s value,” later in the prospectus) is high enough that the alternative higher death benefit would apply, we reserve the right to limit the amount of any premiums that you pay, unless the insured person provides us with evidence of insurability satisfactory to us.

Regardless of which life insurance qualification test you choose, if your premium payments exceed certain other amounts specified under the Code, your policy will become a “modified endowment contract,” which may subject you to additional taxes and penalties on any distributions from your policy. See “Tax information” later in this prospectus. We may return any premium payments that would cause your policy to become a modified endowment contract if we have not received a satisfactory modified endowment contract acknowledgment from you.

You can ask your financial professional to provide you with an illustration of Policy Benefits that shows you the amount of premiums you can pay, based on various assumptions, without exceeding applicable tax law limits. The tax law limits can change as a result of certain changes you make to your policy. For example, a reduction in the face amount of your policy may reduce the amount of premiums that you can pay and may impact whether your policy is a modified endowment contract.

You should discuss your choice of life insurance qualification test and possible limitations on policy premiums with your financial professional and tax advisor before purchasing the policy.

Planned periodic premiums.  Page 3 of your policy will specify a “planned periodic premium.” This is the amount that you request us to bill you. However, payment of these or any other specific amounts of premiums is not mandatory. You need to pay only the amount of premiums (if any) necessary to keep your policy from lapsing and terminating as discussed below.

The minimum amount of premiums you must pay

Policy “lapse” and termination.  Your policy will lapse (also referred to in your policy as “default”) if your “net policy account

11


value” is not enough to pay your policy’s monthly charges when due unless:

you have paid sufficient premiums to maintain one of our available guarantees against termination, the guarantee is still in effect and any outstanding loan and accrued loan interest does not exceed the policy account value (see “You can guarantee that your policy will not terminate before a certain date” below);

you are receiving monthly benefit payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider (see “Other benefits you can add by rider” under “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus);

you have elected the paid up death benefit guarantee and it remains in effect and any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest does not exceed the policy account value. (see “You can elect a “paid up” death benefit guarantee” below); or

your policy has an outstanding loan that would qualify for “loan extension.”

(“Policy account value” and “net policy account value” are explained under “Determining your policy’s value” later in this prospectus.)

We will mail a notice to you at your last known address if your policy lapses. You will have a 61-day grace period to pay at least an amount prescribed in your policy which would be enough to keep your policy in force for approximately three months (without regard to investment performance). You may not make any transfers or request any other policy changes during a grace period. If we receive the requested amount before the end of the grace period, it will be treated as a loan repayment to the extent it is less than or equal to any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest. The remainder of the payment, if any, will be treated as a premium payment. If the guaranteed interest option limitation is in effect, we may limit you from allocating a portion of your payment to the guaranteed interest option as described elsewhere in this prospectus. Any such portion of the payment will be allocated to the variable investment options in proportion to any payment amounts for the variable investment options that you have specified with that payment. Otherwise, any such portion of the payment will be allocated in proportion to the premium allocation percentages for the variable investment options then in effect. If you have not specified any payment amounts for the variable investment options and if there are no premium allocation percentages for any variable investment options then in effect, any such portion of the payment will be refunded to you except for any minimum amount necessary to keep the policy from terminating, which will be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. If your policy account value is still insufficient to cover total monthly deductions, we will send a written notice that a new 61-day grace period has begun and request an additional payment. If we do not receive your payment by the end of the grace period, your policy (and all riders to the policy) will terminate without value and all coverage under your policy will cease. We will mail an additional notice to you if your policy terminates. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

If the insured person dies during a grace period, we will pay the death benefit, less any overdue charges (but not more than the guarantee premium amount required to maintain one of the available guarantees against termination), policy loans or liens and accrued loan or lien interest, to the beneficiary you have named.

Your policy will terminate if you don’t pay enough premiums (i) to pay the charges we deduct, or (ii) to maintain one of our no lapse guarantees that can keep your policy from terminating. However, we will first send you a notice and give you the opportunity to pay any shortfall.

You may owe taxes if your policy terminates while you have a loan outstanding, even though you receive no additional money from your policy at that time. See “Tax information,” later in this prospectus.

Restoring a terminated policy.  To have your policy “restored” (put back in force), you must apply within three years after the date of termination. You must also (i) present evidence of insurability satisfactory to us and (ii) pay at least the amount of premium that we require. The amount of payment will not be more than an amount sufficient to cover total monthly deductions for 3 months, calculated from the effective date of restoration, and the premium charge. We will determine the amount of this required payment as if no interest or investment performance were credited to or charged against your policy account. Your policy contains additional information about the minimum amount of this premium and about the values and terms of the policy after it is restored and the effective date of such restoration. You may only restore your policy if it has terminated without value. You may not restore a policy that was given up for its net cash surrender value. Anyno-lapse guarantee also terminates and cannot be restored after the policy terminates.

You can guarantee that your policy will not terminate before a certain date

No Lapse Guarantee.  You can generally guarantee that your policy will not terminate for a number of years by paying at least certain specified amounts of premiums. We call these amounts “guarantee premiums”and they will be set forth on page 3 of your policy. We call this guarantee against termination our“no-lapse guarantee.” The length of your policy’s guarantee period will range from 5 to 20 years depending on the insured’s age when we issue the policy. Under the No Lapse Guarantee provision, the policy is guaranteed not to lapse during a no lapse guarantee period of 20 years for issue ages0-55, the number of years to attained age 75 for issue ages56-69, and 5 years for issue ages 70 and over. In some states, this guarantee may be referred to by a different name.

Your policy will not terminate, even if your net policy account value is not sufficient to pay your monthly charges, as long as:

You have satisfied the “guarantee premium test” (discussed in “guarantee premium test for theno-lapse guarantee” under “More information about policy benefits” later in this prospectus); and

Any outstanding loan and accrued loan interest does not exceed the policy account value.

There is no extra charge for this guarantee.

Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider.  An optional rider may be elected at issue at no additional charge that provides a longer guarantee period than described above with a possible higher and/or longer premium requirement, provided that you allocate all of your policy account value to any of the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options. The length of your policy’s guarantee period will range from

12


15 to 30 years, depending on the insured’s age when we issue the policy. Under the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider, the policy is guaranteed not to lapse during the enhanced no lapse guarantee period of 30 years for issue ages0-55, or to age 85 for issue ages56-70. For issue ages over 70, the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider is not available. You can terminate this rider at any time but it cannot be reinstated once terminated. For more information about this rider, see “Optional benefits you can add by rider” under “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus.

If you pay at least certain prescribed amounts of premiums, and any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest do not exceed the policy account value, your policy will not lapse for a number of years, even if the value in your policy becomes insufficient to pay the monthly charges.

The Market Stabilizer Option® is not available if you elect the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider.

You can elect a “paid up” death benefit guarantee

Provided certain requirements are met, and subject to our approval, you may elect to take advantage of our “paid up” death benefit guarantee at any time after the fourth year of your policy if the insured’s attained age is 120 or less. If you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee, we may reduce your base policy’s face amount. Thereafter, your policy will not lapse so long as the paid up death benefit guarantee remains in effect. Also, if you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee, you will be required to reallocate your existing policy account value to a limited number of variable investment options (currently the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options) that we make available at our discretion. The guaranteed interest option will also be available; however, we will limit the amount that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option at any time. If the policy guaranteed interest option limitation is in effect at the time you elect the “paid up” death benefit guarantee, it will no longer apply while the paid up death benefit guarantee remains in effect. The limitation amounts applicable under the “paid up” death benefit guarantee may permit you to allocate different amounts into the guaranteed interest option. Our paid up death benefit guarantee is not available if you received benefit payments under the Living Benefits Rider at any time. Our paid up death benefit guarantee is not available if you received monthly benefit payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider prior to continuing coverage under any Nonforfeiture Benefit. Also, election of a paid up death benefit guarantee will terminate any Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider subject to any Nonforfeiture Benefit, if elected. Please also see Appendix III later in this prospectus for policy and/or rider variations.

The guarantee will terminate if (i) at any time following the election, the sum of any outstanding policy loan and accrued interest, exceeds your policy account value, (ii) if we make a payment under the Living Benefits Rider or Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider prior to continuing coverage under any Nonforfeiture Benefit, or (iii) you request that we terminate the election. For more information about the circumstances under which you can elect the paid up death benefit, the possible reduction in face amount after this guarantee is elected (including the possible imposition of surrender charges upon such reduction), restrictions on allocating your policy account value and other effects of this guarantee on your policy, see “Paid up death benefit guarantee” under “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus.

The Market Stabilizer Option® is not available while the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect.

You can receive an accelerated death benefit under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider

In states where approved and subject to our eligibility requirements, the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider may be added to your policy at issue that provides an acceleration of the policy’s death benefit in the form of monthly payments if the insured becomes chronically ill and is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care. The long-term care specified amount at issue must be at least $100,000. The monthly rate for this rider varies based on the individual characteristics of the insured and the benefit percentage you select and whether you select the rider with or without the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. You can terminate this rider after your first policy year. For more information about this rider, see “Other benefits you can add by rider” under “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus. Please also see Appendix III later in this prospectus for rider variations.

You can receive a terminal illness living benefit under the Living Benefits Rider.  Subject to our insurance underwriting guidelines and availability in your state, your policy will automatically include our Living Benefits Rider if you apply for a face amount of at least $100,000 unless it is issued as a result of an Option To Purchase Additional Insurance election or a conversion from a term life policy or term rider. This feature enables you to receive a portion (generally the lesser of 75% or $500,000) of the policy’s death benefit (excluding death benefits payable under certain other policy riders), if the insured person has a terminal illness (as defined in the rider). The maximum aggregate amount of payments that will be paid under this Living Benefits Rider for all policies issued by the Company or an affiliate company on the life of the same insured person is $500,000. We make no additional charge for the rider, but we will deduct aone-time administrative charge of up to $250 from any living benefit we pay.

If you tell us that you do not wish to have the Living Benefits Rider added at issue, but you later ask to add it, there will be a $100 administrative charge. Also, we will need to evaluate the insurance risk at that time, and we may decline to issue the rider.

For more information about that rider, see “Your option to receive a terminal illness living benefit under the Living Benefits Rider” under

“Accessing your money” later in this prospectus.

Investment options within your policy

Except as set forth in the next paragraph, we will initially put all unloaned amounts which you have allocated to variable investment options into such options on the later of the business day that we receive the full minimum initial premium at our Administrative Office or the register date of your policy (the “Investment Start Date”). Before this date, your initial premium will be held in anon-interest bearing account. See “Policy issuance” in “More information about procedures that apply to your policy” later in this prospectus.

In those states that require us to return your premium without adjustment for investment performance within a certain number of days (see “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days,” later in this prospectus), we will initially put all amounts which you have allocated to the variable investment options into our EQ/Money

13


Market investment option as of the later of the Investment Start Date and the issue date for 20 calendar days (the “Money MarketLock-in Period”). On the first business day following the Money MarketLock-in Period, we will reallocate that investment in accordance with your premium allocation instructions then in effect. For policies issued in these states, the “Allocation Date” is the first business day following the Money MarketLock-in Period. For all other policies, the Allocation Date is the Investment Start Date, and there is no automatic initial allocation to the EQ/Money Market investment option. Please also see “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” under “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus for the procedures that apply if the MSO is elected.

You give such allocation instructions in your application to purchase a policy. You can change the premium allocation percentages at any time, but this will not affect any prior allocations. The allocation percentages that you specify must always be in whole numbers and total exactly 100%.

However, if the policy guaranteed interest option limitation is in effect, we will limit you from allocating more than a specified percentage of any premium payment to the guaranteed interest option. Any portion of the premium payment in excess of the limitation amount will be allocated to the variable investment options in proportion to any premium payment amounts for the variable investment options that you have specified with that premium payment. Otherwise, the excess will be allocated in proportion to the premium allocation percentages for the variable investment options then in effect. If you have not specified any premium payment amounts for the variable investment options and if there are no premium allocation percentages for any variable investment options then in effect, any portion of the premium payment in excess of the limitation amount will be refunded to you (except for any minimum amount necessary to keep the policy from terminating, which will be allocated to the guaranteed interest option). The specified percentage limitation on premium payments allocated to the guaranteed interest option can be changed at any time, but it will never be less than 5%. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

The policy is between you and the Company. The policy is not an investment advisory account, and the Company is not providing any investment advice or managing the allocations under your policy. In the absence of a specific written arrangement to the contrary, you, as the owner of the policy, have the sole authority to make investment allocations and other decisions under the policy. Your Equitable Advisors’ financial professional is acting as a broker-dealer registered representative, and is not authorized to act as an investment advisor or to manage the allocations under your policy. If your financial professional is a registered representative with a broker-dealer other than Equitable Advisors, you should speak with him/her regarding any different arrangements that may apply.

You can choose among variable investment options.

Variable investment options.  The available variable investment options are listed on the front cover of this prospectus. (Your policy and other supplemental materials may refer to these as “Investment Funds.”) The investment results you will achieve in any one of these options will depend on the investment performance of the corresponding Portfolio that shares the same name as that option. That Portfolio follows investment practices, policies and objectives

that are appropriate to the variable investment option you have chosen. You can lose your principal when investing in the variable investment options. In periods of poor market performance, the net return, after charges and expenses, may result in negative yields, including for the EQ/Money Market variable investment option.

The advisers who make the investment decisions for each Portfolio are set forth later in the prospectus under “About the Portfolios of the Trusts.”

You will find other important information about each Portfolio in the separate prospectuses for each Trust which accompany this prospectus, including a comprehensive discussion of the risks of investing in each Portfolio.To obtain copies of Trust prospectuses that do not accompany this prospectus, you may call one of our customer service representatives at1-800-777-6510 (for U.S. residents) or 1-704-341-7000 (outside of the U.S.).We may add or delete variable investment options or Portfolios at any time.

If you elect at issue the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider or subsequently exercise the paid up death benefit guarantee, your choice of variable investment options will be limited to the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options, or those investment options we are then making available under the rider. Please see “Other benefits you can add by rider” under “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus.

Guaranteed interest option.  You can also allocate some or all of your policy’s value to our guaranteed interest option. We, in turn, invest such amounts as part of our general assets. Periodically, we declare a fixed rate of interest (2% minimum) on amounts that you allocate to our guaranteed interest option. We credit and compound the interest daily at an effective annual rate that equals the declared rate. The rates we are declaring on existing policies at any time may differ from the rates we are then declaring for newly issued policies. (The guaranteed interest option is part of what your policy and other supplemental material may refer to as the “Guaranteed Interest Account.”)

Upon advance notification, the Company has the right to implement the policy guaranteed interest option limitation. If the policy guaranteed interest option limitation is in effect, the Company has the right to limit you from allocating more than a specified percentage of your premium to the guaranteed interest option. We may also reject any transfer you request from the variable investment options to the unloaned portion of the guaranteed interest option if the transfer would result in the unloaned portion of the guaranteed interest option exceeding a specified percentage of the total unloaned policy account value. Finally, we may limit you from allocating more than a specified percentage of any additional loan repayment to the guaranteed interest option after you have repaid any loaned amounts that were taken from the guaranteed interest option. The specified percentage limitation on allocations of premium payments, additional loan repayments, and requested transfers to the guaranteed interest option can be changed at any time, but it will never be less than 5%.

If you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee, we will restrict the amount of the policy account value that can be transferred or allocated to the guaranteed interest option. The policy guaranteed interest option limitation will not apply while the paid up death benefit guarantee remains in effect. The limitation amounts applicable under the paid up death benefit guarantee may permit you to allocate different amounts into the guaranteed interest option. If you elect the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider at issue, and while it remains in

14


effect, you are required to allocate all of your policy account value to any of the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options. Therefore, you may not allocate any amounts to the guaranteed interest option whether or not the guaranteed interest option limitation is in effect at that time. For more information on these restrictions, see “Paid up death benefit guarantee” and “Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider” under “More information about policy features and benefits” and “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus.

We will pay at least 2% annual interest on our guaranteed interest option.

Market Stabilizer Option®.  The MSO is a rider that provides you with an investment option linked to the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index, which excludes dividends, up to a Growth Cap Rate. While the Growth Cap Rate is set at the Company’s sole discretion, the Growth Cap Rate will not change during a Segment Term and the Growth Cap Rate will always be at least 6%. Additionally, the MSO provides a specified level of protection against declines in the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index of up to negative 25%. Please see “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus for a more detailed explanation about the provisions and terms used for the MSO.

Please note that you will not be credited with any positive Index performance with respect to amounts that are removed from a Segment prior to the Segment Maturity Date. Even when the Index performance has been positive, such early removals will cause you to lose some principal. Please see “Early Distribution Adjustment” later in this prospectus.

About your life insurance benefit

Your policy’s face amount.  In your application to buy an Incentive Life Optimizer® II policy, you tell us how much insurance coverage you

want on the life of the insured person. We call this the “face amount” of the base policy. Generally, $100,000 is the minimum amount of coverage you can request. If you have elected the Charitable Legacy Rider, the minimum face amount is $1 million. If you have elected the Cash Value Plus Rider, the minimum face amount is $250,000 per life when one or two policies are purchased on the lives of members of an insured group and $100,000 per life when policies are purchased on the lives of three or more members. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information on the prior version of this rider. If you are exercising the Option To Purchase Additional Insurance under another policy, or a conversion from certain term life policies or term riders, the minimum face amount is $25,000. For: 1) policies that exceed our Disability Deduction Waiver or Disability Premium Waiver maximum coverage limit 2) face amount increases issued on a less favorable underwriting basis than the base policy 3) policy owners of certain discontinued the Company variable life products where a requested increase in coverage involves the issuance of an additional variable life policy or 4) face amount increases on a 1980 CSO product issued on a less favorable underwriting basis than the base policy, the minimum face amount is $10,000.

If the insured person dies, we pay a life insurance benefit to the “beneficiary” you have named. The amount we pay depends on whether you have chosen death benefit Option A or death benefit Option B. (See “Your options for receiving policy proceeds” under “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus.)

Your policy’s “death benefit” options.  In your policy application, you also choose whether the basic amount (or “benefit”) we will pay if the insured person dies is:

Option A —The policy’s face amounton the date of the insured person’s death. The amount of this death benefit doesn’t change over time, unless you take any action that changes the policy face amount;

-or-

Option B —The face amount plus the “policy account value”on the date of death. Under this option, the amount of the death benefit generally changes from day to day, because many factors (including investment performance, charges, premium payments and withdrawals) affect your policy account value.

Your “policy account value” is the total amount that at any time is earning interest for you or being credited with investment gains and losses under your policy. For any amounts invested in an MSO Segment, your policy account value will reflect the Segment Account Value. (Policy account value is discussed in more detail under “Determining your policy’s value” later in this prospectus.)

Under Option B, your policy’s death benefit will tend to be higher than under Option A, assuming the same policy face amount and policy account value. As a result, the monthly insurance charge we deduct will also be higher to compensate us for our additional risk. If you have elected the paid up death benefit guarantee or your policy has been placed on loan extension, the death benefit option will be Option A and must remain Option A thereafter.

Alternative higher death benefit in certain cases

Your policy is designed to always provide a minimum level of insurance protection relative to your policy account value, in part to meet the Code’s definition of “life insurance.”

We will automatically pay an alternative death benefit if it ishigherthan the basic Option A or Option B death benefit you have selected. The alternate higher death benefit is based upon the life insurance qualification test that you choose. For the guideline premium test, this alternative death benefit is computed by multiplying your policy account value on the insured person’s date of death by a percentage specified in your policy. Representative percentages are as follows:

If the account value in your policy is high enough, relative to the face amount, the life insurance benefit will automatically be greater than the Option A or Option B death benefit you have selected.

Age:* 40 and under 45 50 55 60 65
%: 250% 215% 185% 150% 130% 120%
Age: 70 75-90 91 92 93 94- Over
%: 115% 105% 104% 103% 102% 101%
*

For the then-current policy year.

For example, if the guideline premium test is selected, if the insured is age 65 at the time of death and has a policy with the face amount of $100,000, an account value of $85,000, and a death benefit percentage of 120%, then the death benefit under Option A is the alternative death benefit of $102,000 and the death benefit under Option B is the death benefit of $185,000. For more details regarding

15


how we calculate that death benefit under Option A and Option B, please see “Appendix II: Calculating the alternate death benefit” later in this prospectus.

For the cash value accumulation test, the alternate death benefit is the greater of the minimum death benefit as determined under the Code under this test or 101% of the policy account value. The death benefit must be large enough to ensure that the policy’s cash surrender value (as computed under section 7702 of the Code) is never larger than the net single premium needed to fund future policy benefits. The net single premium varies based upon the insured’s age, sex and risk class and is calculated using an interest rate of 4% and mortality charges based upon the 2001 Commissioner’s Standard Ordinary Mortality Tables.

For example, if the cash value accumulation test is selected, if the insured is age 65 at the time of death and has a policy with the face amount of $100,000, an account value of $85,000, and a death benefit percentage of 185.7%, then the death benefit under Option A is the alternative death benefit of $157,845 and the death benefit under Option B is the death benefit of $185,000. For more details regarding how we calculate that death benefit under Option A and Option B, please see “Appendix II: Calculating the alternate death benefit” later in this prospectus.

These higher alternative death benefits expose us to greater insurance risk than the regular Option A and B death benefit. Because the cost of insurance charges we make under your policy are based in part on the amount of our risk, you will pay more cost of insurance charges for any periods during which a higher alternative death benefit is the operative one.

The operative period for the higher alternative death benefit is generally determined in connection with the requirements of the Code. The calculation of the death benefit is built into the monthly calculation of the cost of insurance charge, which is based on the net amount at risk. The need for the higher alternative death benefit is assessed on each monthly anniversary date, and on the death of the insured. Each policy owner receives an annual statement showing various policy values.

The annual statement shows the death benefit amount as of the policy anniversary, and that amount would reflect the alternative higher death benefit amount, if applicable at that time. This annual statement also reflects the monthly cost of insurance charge for the policy year, reflecting a higher net amount at risk in those months when the higher alternative death benefit is in effect.

Other adjustments to death benefit.  We will increase the death benefit proceeds by the amount of any other benefits we owe upon the insured person’s death under any optional riders which are in effect.

We will reduce the death benefit proceeds by the amount of any outstanding policy loan and unpaid loan interest, as well as any amount of monthly charges under the policy that remain unpaid because the insured person died during a grace period. We also reduce the death benefit if we have already paid part of it under a Living Benefits Rider. We reduce it by the amount of the living benefits payment plus interest. See “Your option to receive a terminal illness living benefit under the Living Benefits Rider” later in this prospectus. Under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider, any monthly benefit payments will be treated as a lien against the death benefit and reduce your death benefit, unless benefits are being paid under the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. Please see “Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider” later in this prospectus.

Death benefit if your policy is on loan extension.  Your policy offers an additional feature against policy termination due to an outstanding loan, called “loan extension.” Availability of this feature is subject to certain terms and conditions, including that you must have elected the guideline premium test and have had your policy in force for at least 20 years. If your policy is on loan extension, the death benefit payable under the policy will be determined differently. For more information on loan extension, see “Borrowing from your policy” under “Accessing your money.”

You can request a change in your death benefit option from Option B any time after the fifth year of the policy or from Option A any time after the second year of the policy and before the policy anniversary nearest to the insured’s 121st birthday.

Change of death benefit option.  If you change your death benefit option, we will adjust your policy’s face amount. The adjustment will be in the amount (up or down) necessary so that your death benefit amount immediately after the change is equal to your death benefit amount immediately before the change.

The following rules apply if the alternative death benefit (referenced above) isnothigher than the base policy’s death benefit at the time of the change in the death benefit option. If you change from Option B to Option A, we automatically increase your base policy’s face amount by an amount equal to your policy account value at the time of the change. If you change from Option A to Option B, we will automatically reduce your base policy’s face amount by an amount equal to your policy account value at the time of the change. You can request a change from Option A to Option B any time after the second policy year or from Option B to Option A any time after the fifth policy year. Any request to change an Option must occur before the policy anniversary nearest the insured’s 121st birthday.

If the alternative death benefit (referenced above) is higher than the base policy’s death benefit at the time of the change in death benefit option, we will determine the new base policy face amount somewhat differently from the general procedures described above. See “Alternative higher death benefit in certain cases” earlier in this section.

We may refuse a change from Option A to Option B if the policy’s face amount would be reduced below $100,000. A change from Option A to Option B is not permitted (a) beyond the policy year in which the insured person reaches the attained age 120, (b) if the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect, or (c) your policy is on loan extension.

We will not deduct or establish any amount of surrender charge as a result of a change in death benefit option. You may not request a change of the death benefit option from Option A to Option B under the policy while the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider is in effect. You may request a change from Option B to Option A. Please see Appendix III later in this prospectus for rider variations. Please also refer to “Tax information” later in this prospectus, to learn about certain possible income tax consequences that may result from a change in death benefit option, including the effect of an automatic increase or decrease in face amount.

You can increase or decrease your insurance coverage

After the first policy year while this policy is in force, you may request an increase in life insurance coverage under your policy. You may

16


request a decrease in your policy’s face amount any time after the second year of your policy but before the policy year in which the insured person reaches age 121. The requested increase or decrease must be at least $10,000. Please refer to “Tax information” for certain possible tax consequences and limitations of changing the face amount of your policy.

We can refuse or limit any requested increase or decrease. We will not approve any increase or decrease if (i) we are at that time being required to waive charges or pay premiums under any optional disability waiver rider that is part of the policy; (ii) the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect; or (iii) your policy is on loan extension. Also, we will not approve a face amount increase if (i) the insured person has reached the maximum issue age for a face amount increase as described in their policy (or age 71 if the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider is in effect); or (ii) while the Cash Value Plus Rider is in effect or, while the Long-Term Care ServicesSMRider is in effect, unless coverage has been continued under the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. Further, if the underwriting class for the insured person is changed after issue, the maximum age at which the insured person may apply for a face amount increase will be the maximum issue age for the underwriting class for the insured person at the time the increase is requested (which may be different than it was previously). We will not accept a request for a face amount decrease while you are receiving monthly benefit payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider.

Certain policy changes, including increases and decreases in your insurance coverage, may also affect the guarantee premiums under the policy.

The following additional conditions also apply:

Face amount increases.  We treat an increase in face amount in many respects as if it were the issuance of a new policy. For example, you must submit satisfactory evidence that the insured person still meets our requirements for coverage. Also, we establish additional amounts of surrender charge and guarantee premiums under your policy for the face amount increase, reflecting the additional amount of coverage.

In most states, you can cancel the face amount increase within 10 days after you receive a new policy page showing the increase. If you cancel, we will reverse any charges attributable to the increase and recalculate all values under your policy to what they would have been had the increase not taken place.

The monthly cost of insurance charge we make for the amount of the increase will be based on the underwriting classification of the insured person when the original policy was issued, provided the insured qualifies for the same underwriting classification. An additional 10 year surrender charge and an additional administrative charge will apply to the face amount that exceeds the highest previous face amount. If the insured qualifies for a less favorable underwriting classification than the base policy, we may offer to issue a separate policy based on the rating class for the increase. See “Risk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay.”

If you elect the MSO, the same conditions as described above for a face amount increase will apply while any Segment is in effect. However, the Charge Reserve Amount will be recalculated on the effective date of the requested face amount increase so that the amount in the Unloaned GIO is sufficient to cover the estimated

monthly deductions for the policy during the longest remaining Segment Term. If the Charge Reserve Amount requirement is not satisfied, the requested Face Amount Increase will be declined. Please see “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus for a more detailed explanation about when the Charge Reserve Amount may be insufficient and the provisions and terms used for the MSO.

Face amount decreases.  You may not reduce the face amount below the minimum stated in your policy. Nor will we permit a decrease that would cause your policy to fail the Internal Revenue Code’s definition of life insurance. Guarantee premiums, as well as our monthly deductions for the cost of insurance coverage, will generally decrease from the time you reduce the face amount.

If you reduce the face amount during the first 10 years of your policy, or during the first 10 years after a face amount increase you have requested, we will deduct all or part of the remaining surrender charge from your policy account. Assuming you have not previously changed the face amount, the amount of the surrender charge we will deduct will be determined by dividing the amount of the decrease by the initial face amount and multiplying that fraction by the total amount of surrender charge that still remains applicable to your policy. We deduct the charge from the same investment options as if it were part of a regular monthly deduction under your policy.

In some cases, we may have to make a distribution to you from your policy at the time we decrease your policy’s face amount or change your death benefit option. This may be necessary in order to preserve your policy’s status as life insurance under the Internal Revenue Code. We may also be required to make such distribution to you in the future on account of a prior decrease in face amount or change in death benefit option. The distribution may be taxable.

Accessing your money

You can access the money in your policy in different ways. You may borrow up to 90% of the cash surrender value, less any outstanding loan and accrued loan interest before the policy year in which the insured reaches age 75 (100% thereafter). In your policy, the cash surrender value is equal to the difference between your policy account value and any surrender charges that are in effect under your policy. However, the amount you can borrow will be reduced by any amount that we hold on a “restricted” basis following your receipt of a terminal illness living benefits payment, as well as by any other loans and accrued loan interest you have outstanding. The cash surrender value available for loans is also reduced on a pro rata basis for the portion of the policy death benefit amount accelerated to date but not by more than the accumulated benefit lien amount. See “More information about policy features and benefits: Other benefits you can add by rider: Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider” later in this prospectus. We will charge interest on the amount of the loan. See “Borrowing from your policy” later in this prospectus for more information.

You can also make a partial withdrawal of $500 or more of your net cash surrender value (defined later in this prospectus under “Surrendering your policy for its net cash surrender value”) at any time after the first year of your policy and before the policy anniversary nearest to the insured’s 121st birthday. Partial withdrawals are not permitted if you have elected the paid up death benefit guarantee, your policy is on loan extension, or you are receiving monthly benefit payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider before

17


coverage is continued under the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. See “Making withdrawals from your policy” later in this prospectus for more information.

If you elected the MSO, different procedures and restrictions apply to withdrawals. See “Withdrawals” under “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus for additional information about withdrawals if you elected the MSO.

Finally, you can surrender (turn in) your policy for its net cash surrender value at any time. See “Surrendering your policy for its net cash surrender value” later in this prospectus. See “Tax information” later in this prospectus, for the tax treatment of the various ways in which you can access your money.

Risks of investing in a policy and the Market Stabilizer Option®

The policy is unsuitable as a short-term savings vehicle. Some of the principal risks of investing in a policy are as follows:

If the investment options you choose perform poorly, you could lose some or all of the premiums you pay.

If the investment options you choose do not make enough money to pay for the policy charges, except to the extent provided by any no lapse guarantee, paid up death benefit guarantee or loan extension feature you may have, you could have to pay more premiums to keep your policy from terminating.

If any policy loan and any accrued loan interest either equals or exceeds the policy account value, your policy will terminate subject to the policy’s Grace Period provision and any Loan Extension Endorsement you may have.

We can increase, without your consent and subject to any necessary regulatory approvals, any charge that you currently pay at less than the maximum amount. We will not increase any charge beyond the highest maximum noted in the tables in “Tables of policy charges” under “Risk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay” earlier in this prospectus.

You may have to pay a surrender charge and there may be adverse tax consequences if you wish to discontinue some or all of your insurance coverage under a policy.

Partial withdrawals from your policy are available only after the first policy year and must be at least $500 and no more than the net cash surrender value. Under certain circumstances, we will automatically reduce your policy’s face amount as a result of a partial withdrawal.

Your policy permits other transactions that also have risks. These and other risks and benefits of investing in a policy are discussed in detail throughout this prospectus.

A comprehensive discussion of the risks of each investment option may be found in the Trust prospectus for that investment option.

MSO risk factors

There are risks associated with some features of the Market Stabilizer Option®:

There is a risk of a substantial loss of your principal because you agree to absorb all losses from the portion of any negative Index performance that exceeds-25%.

Your Index-Linked Return is also limited by the Growth Cap Rate, which could cause your Index-Linked Return to be lower than it would otherwise be if you participated in the full performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index.

You will not know what the Growth Cap Rate is before the Segment starts. Therefore, you will not know in advance the upper limit on the return that may be credited to your investment in a Segment.

Negative consequences apply if, for any reason, amounts you have invested in a Segment are removed before the Segment Maturity Date. Specifically, with respect to the amounts removed early, you would (1) forfeit any positive Index performance and (2) be subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment that exposes you to a risk of potentially substantial loss of principal. This exposure is designed to be consistent with the treatment of losses on amounts held to the Segment Maturity Date.Even when the Index performance has been positive, the EDA will cause you to lose some principal on an early removal.

The following types of removals of account value from a Segment will result in the above-mentioned consequences to you, if the removals occur prior to the Segment Maturity Date: (a) a surrender of your policy; (b) a loan from your policy; (c) a distribution in order to enable your policy to continue to qualify as life insurance under the federal tax laws; (d) certain transfers in connection with the exercise of a rider available under your policy; and (e) a charge or unpaid policy loan interest that we deduct from your Segment Account Value because the Charge Reserve Amount and other funds are insufficient to cover them in their entirety. The Charge Reserve Amount may become insufficient because of policy changes that you request, additional premium payments, investment performance, policy loans, policy partial withdrawals from other investment options besides the MSO, and any increases we make in current charges for the policy (including for the MSO and optional riders).

Certain of the above types of early removals can occur (and thus result in penalties to you) without any action on your part. Examples include (i) certain distributions we might make from your Segment Account Value to enable your policy to continue to qualify as life insurance and (ii) deductions we might make from your Segment Account Value to pay charges if the Charge Reserve Amount becomes insufficient.

Any applicable EDA will generally be affected by changes in both the volatility and level of the S&P 500 Price Return index. Any EDA applied to any Segment Account Value is linked to the estimated value of a put option on the S&P 500 Price Return index as described in “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus. The estimated value of the put option and, consequently, the amount of the EDA will generally be higher after increases in market volatility or after the Index experiences a negative return following the Segment Start Date.

Once policy account value is in a Segment, you cannot transfer out of a Segment. You can only make withdrawals out of a Segment if you surrender your policy. This would result in the imposition of any applicable surrender charges and EDAs.

18


We may not offer new Segments so there is also the possibility that a Segment may not be available for a Segment Renewal at the end of your Segment Term(s).

We also reserve the right to substitute an alternative index for the S&P 500 Price Return index, which could reduce the Growth Cap Rates we can offer.

No company other than the Company has any legal responsibility to pay amounts that the Company owes under the policies.

You do not have any rights in the securities underlying the index, including, but not limited to, (i) interest payments, (ii) dividend payments or (iii) voting rights.

Your Segment Maturity Value is dependent on the performance of the index on the Segment Maturity Date.

Upon advance notification, the Company reserves the right to implement a Segment Maturity GIO Limitation. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

Past performance of the index is no indication of future performance.

The amounts required to be maintained in the Unloaned GIO for the Charge Reserve Amount during the Segment Term may earn a return that is less than the return you might have earned on those amounts in another investment option had you not invested in a Segment.

Please see “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this prospectus for more detailed information about this investment option.

How the Incentive Life Optimizer® II variable life insurance policy is available

Incentive Life Optimizer® II is primarily intended for purchasers other than retirement plans. However, we do not place limitations on its use. Please see “Tax information” for more information. Incentive Life Optimizer® II is available for issue ages 0 to 85.

19


3. The Company

 

    

We are Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company, a New York stock life insurance corporation. We have been doing business since 1859. TheCompanyThe Company is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of Equitable Holdings, Inc. No other company has any legal responsibility to pay amounts that the Company owes under the contracts. TheCompanypolicies. The Company is solely responsible for paying all amounts owed to you under your contract.policy.

 

Equitable Holdings, Inc. and its consolidated subsidiaries managed approximately $734.4 billion in assets as of December 31, 2019. For more than 160 years the Company has been among the largest insurance companies in the United States. We are licensed to sell life insurance and annuities in all fifty states, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Our home office is located at 1290 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10104.

 

 

5


Definitions of key terms

Account Value — Your “account value” is the total of: (i) the values you have in the variable investment options, (ii) the values you have in the Segment Type Holding Accounts and (iii) your Segment Interim Values.

Annual Lock Anniversary— The end of each Annual Lock Period.

Annual Lock AnniversaryEndingAmount — The amount on an Annual Lock Anniversary calculated for the first Annual Lock Period by adding the Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount to the Segment Investment, as adjusted for any withdrawals from that Segment. For subsequent Annual Lock Periods the amount is calculated by adding the Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount to the previous Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount, as adjusted for any withdrawals from that Segment. The Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount is used solely to calculate the Segment Maturity Value for Annual Lock Segments. The Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount is not credited to the contract, is not the Segment Interim Value and cannot be received upon surrender or withdrawal.

Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount — The Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount for the first Annual Lock Period is equal to the Segment Investment, as adjusted for any withdrawals from that Segment. For subsequent Annual Lock Periods, it is equal to the Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount for the prior Annual Lock Period, as adjusted for any withdrawals from that Segment. The Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount is not credited to the contract, is not the Segment Interim Value and cannot be received upon surrender or withdrawal.

Annual Lock Period— Each of the one-year periods during an Annual Lock Segment.

Annual Lock Segment— Any multi-year duration Segment belonging to a Segment Type whose name includes “Annual Lock”. Unlike other Segments, your return is cumulatively calculated based on Index performance each Annual Lock Period subject to the Performance Cap Rate and Segment Buffer.

Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return— The Rate of Return for an Annual Lock Segment during an Annual Lock Period as calculated on the Annual Lock Anniversary. If the Index Performance Rate is positive, then the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return is a rate equal to the Index Performance Rate, but not more than the Performance Cap Rate. If the Index Performance Rate is negative, but declines by a percentage less than or equal to the Segment Buffer, then the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return is 0%. If the Index Performance Rate is negative, and declines by more than the Segment Buffer, then the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return is negative, but will not reflect the amount of the Segment Buffer (i.e., the first -10% of downside performance).

Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount— Equals the Segment Investment multiplied by the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for the first Annual Lock Period. For subsequent Annual Lock Periods, it is equal to the Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount multiplied by the corresponding Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return.

Annuitant— The “annuitant” is the person who is the measuring life for determining the contract’s maturity date. The annuitant is not necessarily the contract owner. Where the owner of a contract isnon-natural, the annuitant is the measuring life for determining contract benefits.

Business Day— Our “business day” is generally any day the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) is open for regular trading and generally ends at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time (or as of an earlier close of regular trading). If the SEC determines the existence of emergency conditions on any day, and consequently, the NYSE does not open, then that day is not a business day.

Cash Value— At any time before annuity payments begin, your contract’s cash value is equal to the account value less any applicable withdrawal charges.

Choice Cost — a charge applicable to investments in Choice Segments only. The Choice cost is an amount equal to 1% of the Segment Investment on the Segment Start Date for each year of the Segment Duration. On the Segment Maturity Date, we deduct the Choice cost from the Index Performance Rate of a Choice Segment, but only if the Index Performance Rate is positive for that Segment. Additionally, when we calculate the Segment Rate of Return, if the Index Performance Rate is positive for a Choice Segment but less than the applicable Choice cost, the amount of the Choice cost deducted will be the maximum amount that will not cause the Segment Maturity Value to be less than the Segment Investment. The Segment Interim Value for a Choice Segment will reflect application of a portion of the Choice cost.

Choice Segment— any Segment belonging to a Segment Type whose name begins with “Choice”. Unlike other Segments, Choice Segments are subject to application of the Choice cost. Choice Segments are riders to the contract and may not be available for certain contracts.

Contract Date— The “contract date” is the effective date of a contract. This usually is the business day we receive the properly completed and signed application, along with any other required documents, and your initial contribution. Your contract date will be shown in your contract.

Contract date anniversary— The end of each 12 month period is your “contract date anniversary.” For example, if your contract date is May 1, your contract date anniversary is April 30.

Contract Year— The 12 month period beginning on your contract date and each 12 month period after that date is a “contract year.”

Dollar Cap Averaging Program — Our Dollar Cap Averaging Program allows for the systematic transfer of amounts in the dollar cap averaging account into the Segment Type Holding Accounts.

Index — An Index is used to determine the Segment Rate of Return for a Segment. We currently offer Segment Types based on the performance of (1) securities indices or (2) exchange-traded funds. Throughout this Prospectus, we refer to these indices and exchange-traded funds using the term “Index” or, collectively, “Indices.” In the future, we may offer Segment Types based on other types of Indices.

620


Index Performance Rate— For a Segment, the percentage change in the value of the related Index from the Segment Start Date to the Segment Maturity Date or from the Segment Start Date to the first Annual Lock Anniversary (and thereafter from one Annual Lock Anniversary to the next) for Annual Lock Segments. The Index Performance Rate may be positive, negative or zero.

IRA — Individual retirement annuity contract, either traditional IRA or Roth IRA (may also refer to an individual retirement account or an individual retirement arrangement).

IRS— Internal Revenue Service.

NQ Contract — Nonqualified contract.

Owner— The “owner” is the person who is the named owner in the contract and, if an individual, is the measuring life for determining contract benefits.

Performance Cap Rate — For Standard Segments and Choice Segments the Performance Cap Rate is the highest Segment Rate of Return that can be credited on a Segment Maturity Date. For Annual Lock Segments the Performance Cap Rate is the highest Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return that can be applied on an Annual Lock Anniversary. The Performance Cap Rate is not an annual rate of return.

Performance Cap Threshold— A minimum rate you may specify as a participation requirement that the Performance Cap Rate for a new Segment must equal or exceed in order for amounts to be transferred from a Segment Type Holding Account into a new Segment.

QP Contract — An annuity contract that is an investment vehicle for a qualified plan.

Segment— An investment option we establish with the Index, Segment Duration and Segment Buffer of a specific Segment Type, and for which we also specify a Segment Maturity Date and Performance Cap Rate. We currently offer Standard Segments, Annual Lock Segments and Choice Segments.

Segment Buffer— The portion of any negative Index Performance Rate that the Segment Buffer absorbs on a Segment Maturity Date or each Annual Lock Anniversary for a particular Segment. Any percentage decline in a Segment’s Index Performance Rate in excess of the Segment Buffer reduces your Segment Maturity Value and any Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount. We currently offer Segment Buffers of-10%,-20% and-30% for Standard Segments, -10% for Annual Lock Segments and -10%,-15% and -25% for Choice Segments.

Segment Business Day— A business day that all Indices underlying available Segments are scheduled to be open and to publish prices. A scheduled holiday for any one Index disqualifies that day from being scheduled as a Segment Business Day for all Segments. We use Segment Business Days in this manner so that, based on published holiday schedules, we mature all Segments on the same day and start all new Segments on a subsequent day. This design, among other things, facilitates the roll over of maturing Segment Investments into new Segments.

Segment Duration— The period from the Segment Start Date to the Segment Maturity Date. We currently offer Segment Durations of 1 year, 3 years or 5 years.

Segment Interim Value— The value of your investment in a Segment prior to the Segment Maturity Date.

Segment Investment— The amount transferred to a Segment on its Segment Start Date, as adjusted for any withdrawals from that Segment.

Segment Maturity Date— The Segment Business Day on which a Segment ends.

Segment Maturity Date Requirement— You will not be permitted to invest in a Segment if the Segment Maturity Date is later than your contract maturity date.

Segment Maturity Value— The value of your investment in a Segment on the Segment Maturity Date.

Segment Option — Comprises all Standard Segments, Annual Lock Segments or Choice Segments.

Segment Participation Requirements— The requirements that must be met before we transfer amounts from a Segment Type Holding Account to a new Segment on a Segment Start Date.

Segment Rate of Return— The rate of return earned by a Segment as calculated on the Segment Maturity Date. The Segment Rate of Return is calculated differently for Standard Segments, Annual Lock Segments and Choice Segments.

Segment Return Amount —Equals the Segment Investment multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return.

Segment Start Date— The Segment Business Day on which a new Segment is established.

Segment Type— Comprises a Segment Option having the same Index, Segment Duration and Segment Buffer. Each Segment Type has a corresponding Segment Type Holding Account.

Segment Type Holding Account— An account that holds all contributions and transfers allocated to a Segment Type pending investment in a Segment. There is a Segment Type Holding Account for each Segment Type. The Segment Type Holding Accounts are part of the EQ/Money Market variable investment option.

Standard Segment — Any Segment belonging to a Segment Type whose name includes “Standard”.

Structured Investment Option— An investment option that permits you to invest in various Segments, each tied to the performance of an Index, and participate in the performance of that Index.

7


Structured Capital Strategies® at a glance — key features

Three Contract SeriesThis Prospectus describes three contract series of Structured Capital Strategies® — Series B, Series C and Series ADV. Series B contracts are subject to a withdrawal charge schedule, while the Series C and Series ADV contracts are not subject to a withdrawal charge schedule.
Currently, you may purchase a Series ADV contract only if you are a participant in an account established under a fee-based program sponsored and maintained by a registered broker-dealer or other financial intermediary we approve (including Equitable Advisors, LLC, one of the distributors of the contracts and an affiliate of the Company). We may, in the future, offer Series ADV contracts through other means. The fees and expenses of your fee-based program are separate from and in addition to the fees and expenses of the contract and generally provide for various brokerage services. We do not create or approve these fee-based programs, which are the sole responsibility of the registered investment adviser that maintains them. If you purchase a Series ADV contract through a fee-based program and later terminate the program, your contract will continue in force. There may be charges associated with the fee-based program should you decide to no longer participate in the program. Please consult with your program sponsor for more details about your fee-based program.
Each series provides for the accumulation of retirement savings and income, and provides for the payment of account value to your beneficiary upon death, and offers various payout options.
Each series has different expenses and withdrawal charge periods. While certain series have no withdrawal charge periods, these series typically have higher separate account expenses and other fees. You should consider the cumulative impact of these higher expenses and other fees over time when deciding which series to purchase. For details, please see the “Fee table” and “Charges and expenses” sections later in this Prospectus. Additionally, certain Segments have Segment Durations that extend beyond the withdrawal charge period. So there may be instances when the withdrawal charge period has expired but the Segment Maturity Date has not been reached. Please see “Accessing your money” for more information regarding withdrawals and surrenders before the Segment Maturity Date.
Throughout the Prospectus, any differences in the series are identified. Also see “Definition of key terms”
earlier in this Prospectus for a more detailed explanation of terms associated with the Structured Investment Option.
You should work with your financial professional to decide which series of the contract may be appropriate for you based on a thorough analysis of your particular insurance needs, financial objectives, investment goals, time horizons and risk tolerance.
While Series C contracts do not have withdrawal charges, you should be aware that you will pay a higher variable investment option fee than if you purchase a Series B or Series ADV contract. If you plan to hold your Series C contract for an extended period of time or invest in segment durations of 5 years, you may be better off in a Series B or Series ADV contract. You should consider this possibility before purchasing the contract.
Not all contract series may be available in your state. Please see “Appendix II: State contract availability and/or variations of certain features and benefits” later in this prospectus.
Variable investment options

Structured Capital Strategies® variable investment options invest in portfoliossub-advised by professional investment advisers. The contract currently offers three variable investment options. Depending upon the performance of the variable investment options, you could lose money by investing in one or more variable investment options.

Structured Investment OptionSee “Definition of key terms” on the prior page and “Contract features and benefits” later in this Prospectus for more detailed explanations of terms associated with the Structured Investment Option.

•  We currently offer a total of 30 Segment Types, of which 30 are offered under Series B contracts and 20 are offered under Series C and Series ADV contracts.

•   Investments in Segments are not investments in underlying mutual funds; Segments are not “index funds.” Each Segment Type offers an opportunity to invest in a Segment that is tied to the performance of a Securities Index or exchange-trade fund. Throughout this Prospectus, we refer to these indices and exchange-traded funds using the term “Index” or, collectively, “Indices.” You participate in the performance of that Index by investing in the Segment. You do not participate in the investment results of any assets we hold in relation to the Segments. We hold assets in a “non-unitized” separate account we have established under the New York Insurance Law to support our obligations under the Structured Investment Option. We calculate the results of an investment in a Segment pursuant to one or more formulas described later in this Prospectus. Depending upon the performance of the Indices, you could lose money by investing in one or more Segments.

•  The return on an investment in a Choice Segment is subject to application of the Choice cost.

•  An“Index” is used to determine the Segment Rate of Return for a Segment. We currently offer Segment Types based on the performance of (1) securities indices and (2) exchange-traded funds. In the future, we may offer Segment Types based on other types of Indices. The Indices are as follows:

—  S&P 500 Price Return Index;

—  Russell 2000® Price Return Index;

—  MSCI EAFE Price Return Index;

—  NASDAQ-100 Price Return Index;

—  MSCI Emerging Markets Price Return Index;

—  iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund;

—  Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund;

—  Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund;

—  SPDR® Gold Shares; and

—  iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF.

8


Structured Investment Option (continued)

•  The Segment Return Amount will only be applied on the Segment Maturity Date.

•  The Segment Rate of Return could be positive, zero, or negative.There is a risk of a substantial loss of your principal because you agree to absorb all losses to the extent they exceed the applicable Segment Buffer.

•  We will usually declare a Performance Cap Rate for each Segment on the Segment Start Date. The Performance Cap Rate for the same Segment may be different for Owners who elect that Segment during their first Contract Year than for Owners who are in their second or later Contract Year. The Performance Cap Rate is the maximum Segment Rate of Return that can be credited on the Segment Maturity Date or used to calculate the maximum Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return on an Annual Lock Anniversary for that Segment. The Performance Cap Rate may limit your participation in any increases in the underlying Index associated with a Segment. Our minimum Performance Cap Rates for 1, 3, and 5-year Standard Segments are 2%, 6%, and 10%, respectively.Our minimum Performance Cap Rate for 5-year Choice Segments is 10%. Our minimum Performance Cap Rate for Annual Lock Segments is 2%. We will not open a Segment with a Performance Cap Rate below the applicable minimum Performance Cap Rate. In some cases, we may decide not to declare a Performance Cap Rate for a Segment, in which case there is no maximum Segment Rate of Return for that Segment.

•   On any date prior to segment maturity, we calculate the Segment Interim Value for each Segment as described in “Appendix III — Segment Interim Value”. This amount may be less than the amount invested, may be less than the Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on each Annual Lock Anniversary and may be less than the amount you would receive had you held the investment until Segment maturity. For Choice Segments, the Segment Interim Value will also reflect application of a portion of the Choice cost. The Segment Interim Value will generally be negatively affected by increases in the expected volatility of index prices, interest rate increases, and by poor market performance. All other factors being equal, the Segment Interim Value would be lower the earlier a withdrawal or surrender is made during a Segment. Also, participation in upside performance for early withdrawals is pro-rated based on the period those amounts were invested in a Segment. This means you participate to a lesser extent in upside performance the earlier you take a withdrawal.

•   You can set a Performance Cap Threshold for any Segment Type in which you plan to invest. By doing so, amounts you allocate to a Segment Type Holding Account will only be transferred into a new Segment if the Performance Cap Rate we declare for that Segment is equal to or exceeds your Performance Cap Threshold.

    A Performance Cap Threshold will remain in effect through the first scheduled Segment Start Date that is at least two months after your Performance Cap Threshold election (the “PCT Expiry Date”). For example, if a Performance Cap Threshold becomes effective on Tuesday, August 1st, it is effective through Thursday, October 5th. If a Performance Cap Threshold becomes effective on December 29th, 30th, 31st, or July 31st, then the PCT Expiry Date will be the day of the first scheduled Segment Start Date in March or October, respectively. This means that if the declared Performance Cap Rate for a Segment has not matched or exceeded your Performance Cap Threshold on any of the scheduled Segment Start Dates on or before the PCT Expiry Date, any amounts in the applicable Segment Type Holding Account (including any funds transferred to that holding account after the Performance Cap Threshold becomes effective) on the business day immediately preceding the next scheduled Segment Start Date after the PCT Expiry Date will automatically be transferred into the Segment created on that Segment Start Date, unless you specify a new Performance Cap Threshold prior to that date.

   If you do not specify a Performance Cap Threshold, or your Performance Cap Threshold expires, you run the risk that you will be automatically transferred into a Segment with a Performance Cap Rate that is not acceptable to you. Performance Cap Thresholds are not available if you invest in the Dollar Cap Averaging Program. For more information about the operation of Performance Cap Thresholds, see “Segment Participation Requirements” in “Contract features and benefits” later in this Prospectus.

•  The following chart provides a comparison of certain differences between Segment Types.

Segment

Type

  

Segment

Durations

  

Segment

Buffers

  

Minimum

Performance

Cap Rates

  

Fee

Standard  1, 3, 5 year  -10%, -20%, -30%  2%, 6%, 10%  none
Annual Lock  5 year  -10%  2%  none
Choice  5 year  -10%, -15%, -25%  10%  yes

•   Both the Performance Cap Rate and the Segment Buffer are rates of return from the Segment Start Date to the Segment Maturity Date or from the Segment Start Date to the first Annual Lock Anniversary (and thereafter from each Annual Lock Anniversary to the next) for Annual Lock Segments, not annual rates of return, even if the Segment Duration is longer than one year. Your Performance Cap Threshold is also not an annual rate of return.

•   The highest level of protection on a Segment Maturity Date is the -30% Segment Buffer and lowest level of protection is the -10% Segment Buffer.

•   This product generally offers greater upside potential, but less downside protection, on a Segment Maturity Date than fixed indexed annuities, which provide a guaranteed minimum return.

9


Tax considerations

•  On earnings inside the contract

No tax until you make withdrawals from your contract or receive annuity payments.

•  On transfers inside the contract

No tax on transfers among investment options, including on a Segment Maturity Date.
If you are purchasing an annuity contract as an Individual Retirement Annuity (IRA) or to fund an employer retirement plan (QP or Qualified Plan), you should be aware that such annuities do not provide tax deferral benefits beyond those already provided by the Internal Revenue Code for individual retirement arrangements. Before purchasing this contract, you should consider whether its features and benefits beyond tax deferral meet your needs and goals. You may also want to consider the relative features, benefits and costs of this contract with any other investment that you may use in connection with your individual retirement arrangement. You should also be aware that income received under the contract is taxable as ordinary income and not as capital gain. For more information, see “Tax information” later in this Prospectus.
Contribution amounts

•  NQ

$25,000 (initial) (minimum)

$500 (subsequent) (minimum)

•  Traditional or Roth IRA

$25,000 (initial) (minimum)

$50 (subsequent) (minimum)

•  QP (defined contribution or defined benefit)

$25,000 (initial) (minimum)

$500 (subsequent) (minimum)

•  Maximum contribution limitations apply to all contracts.

In general, contributions are limited to $1.5 million under all Structured Capital Strategies® contracts with the same owner or annuitant and $2.5 million under all our annuity accumulation contracts with the same owner or annuitant. Higher contributions may only be made with our prior approval. If we permit a contract to be funded with initial contribution of $25 million or higher, we will waive withdrawal charges for that contract. Upon advance notice to you, we may exercise certain rights we have under the contract regarding contributions, including our rights to (i) change minimum and maximum contribution requirements and limitations, and (ii) discontinue acceptance of contributions including contributions in general, or to particular investment options. In addition, we may, at any time, exercise our right to limit or terminate transfers into any variable investment option. For more information, see “How you can purchase and contribute to your contract” in “Contract features and benefits” later in this Prospectus. For contracts issued to qualified plans, see “Appendix VI” later in this Prospectus.
Access to your money

•  Partial withdrawals

•  Contract surrender

•  You may be subject to tax on any income you receive and, unless you are age 591/2 or another exception applies, an additional 10% federal income tax penalty. For Series B, you may also incur a withdrawal charge for certain withdrawals or if you surrender your contract.

Additional features

•  Dollar Cap Averaging Program

Fees and chargesPlease see “Fee table” later in this section for complete details.
Owner and annuitant issue ages0-85 (20-75 for QP contracts)
Your right to cancelTo exercise your cancellation right you must notify us, with a signed letter of instruction electing this right, to our processing office within 10 days after you receive your contract. If state law requires, this “free look” period may be longer. See “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” in “Contract features and benefits” later in this Prospectus for more information.

The table above summarizes only certain current key features of the contract. The table also summarizes certain current limitations, restrictions and exceptions to those features that we have the right to impose under the contract and that are subject to change in the future. In some cases, other limitations, restrictions and exceptions may apply. The contract may not currently be available in all states. All Segment Types may not be available in all states. For astate-by-state description of all material variations to this contract, see “Appendix II” later in this Prospectus.

For more detailed information, we urge you to read the contents of this Prospectus, as well as your contract. This Prospectus is a disclosure document and describes all of the contract’s material features, benefits, rights and obligations, as well as other information. The Prospectus should be read carefully before investing. Please feel free to speak with your financial professional, or call us, if you have any questions.

10


Other contracts

We offer a variety of fixed and variable annuity contracts. They may offer features, including investment options, and have fees and charges, that are different from those in the contracts offered by this Prospectus. Not every contract we issue is offered through every selling broker-dealer. Some selling broker-dealers may not offer and/or limit the offering of certain features or options, as well as limit the availability of the contracts, based on issue age or other criteria established by the selling broker-dealer. Upon request, your financial professional can show you information regarding our other annuity contracts that he or she distributes. You can also contact us to find out more about the availability of any of our annuity contracts.

You should work with your financial professional to decide whether this contract is appropriate for you based on a thorough analysis of your particular insurance needs, financial objectives, investment goals, time horizons and risk tolerance.

11


Fee table

The following tables describe the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering the contract. Each of the charges and expenses is more fully described in “Charges and expenses” later in this Prospectus.

The first table describes fees and expenses that you will pay at the time that you surrender the contract, make certain withdrawals, request special services or make certain transfers and exchanges. Charges designed to approximate certain taxes that may be imposed on us, such as premium taxes in your state, may also apply.(1)

Charges we deduct from your account value at the time you request certain transactions

Maximum withdrawal charge as a percentage of contributions withdrawn (deducted if you surrender your contract or make certain withdrawals or apply your cash value to certain payout options).Series B(2)

5.00%

Series C

N/A

Series ADV

N/A

Charge for each additional transfer in excess of 12 transfers per contract year:(3)Maximum Charge: $35

Current Charge: $0

Special services charges

•  Wire transfer charge

Current and Maximum Charge:$90

•  Express mail charge

Current and Maximum Charge:$35

•  Duplicate contract charge

Current and Maximum Charge:$35(5)

•  Check preparation charge(4)

Maximum Charge

Current Charge

$85

$0

•  Charge for third-party transfer or exchange(4)

Maximum Charge

Current Charge

$125

$65(5)

The following tables describe the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time that you own the contract, not including underlying Trust portfolio fees and expenses.

Charges we deduct from your variable investment options (including the Segment Type Holding Accounts) expressed as an annual percentage of daily net assets

Separate account annual expenses:    Series B    Series C    Series ADV
Variable Investment Option fee(6)    1.25%    1.65%    0.25%(7)

This fee does not apply to amounts held in a Segment.

 

            

Adjustments for early surrender or withdrawal from a Segment

When calculation is made

Maximum amount that may be lost(8)
-10% Buffer-15% Buffer-20% Buffer-25% Buffer-30% Buffer
Segment Interim Value is applied on surrender or withdrawal from a Segment prior to its Segment Maturity Date90% of Segment
Investment
85% of Segment
Investment
80% of Segment
Investment
75% of Segment
Investment
70% of Segment
Investment

Amounts invested in a Choice Segment are subject to deduction of the Choice cost, as described in the following table:

Charges we deduct from your investment in a Choice Segment

The Choice cost is applicable to Choice Segments only. The Choice cost is an amount equal to 1% of the Segment Investment for each year of the Segment Duration.

Segment TypeChoice Cost

Choice Segments with 5-year Segment Duration

5.00%

On the Segment Maturity Date, we deduct the Choice cost from the Index Performance Rate of a Choice Segment, but only if the Index Performance Rate is positive for that Segment. Additionally, if the Index Performance Rate is positive for a Choice Segment but less than the applicable Choice cost, the Choice cost deducted will be the maximum amount that will not cause the Segment Maturity Value to be less than the Segment Investment(9). The Segment Interim Value for a Choice Segment will reflect the application of a portion of the Choice cost, as described in more detail in Appendix III.

12


Please note that if, on a Segment Start Date, we determine that the Performance Cap Rate for a Choice Segment will not exceed the Performance Cap Rate for a comparable Standard Segment (i.e., with the same Index, Segment Duration, Segment Buffer and Segment Start Date) by an amount that is at least equal to the Choice cost, we will waive the Choice cost and declare a Performance Cap Rate for the Choice Segment that is equal to the Performance Cap Rate for the Standard Segment.

You also bear your proportionate share of all fees and expenses paid by a “portfolio” that corresponds to any variable investment option you are using. This table shows the lowest and highest total operating expenses charged by any of the portfolios that you will pay periodically during the time that you own the contract. These fees and expenses are reflected in the portfolio’s net asset value each day. Therefore, they reduce the investment return of the portfolio and the related variable investment option. Actual fees and expenses are likely to fluctuate from year to year. More detail concerning each portfolio’s fees and expenses is contained in the Trust Prospectus for the portfolio.

Portfolio operating expenses expressed as an annual percentage of daily net assets

Total Annual Portfolio Operating Expenses (expenses that are deducted from portfolio assets including management fees,12b-1 fees, service fees, and/or other expenses)(10)Lowest
0.58%
Highest

0.71%

(1)

The current tax charge that might be imposed varies by jurisdiction and currently ranges from 0% to 3.5%.

(2)

Deducted upon a withdrawal of amounts in excess of the 10% free withdrawal amount. Important exceptions and limitations may eliminate or reduce this charge.

The withdrawal charge percentage we use is determined by the contract year in which you make the withdrawal, surrender your contract to receive its cash value, or surrender your contract to apply your cash value to anon-life contingent annuity payment option. For each contribution, we consider the contract year in which we receive that contribution to be “contract year 1”.

Contract Year

    

1

   5.00% 

2

   5.00% 

3

   5.00% 

4

   4.00% 

5

   3.00% 

6+

   0.00% 

Withdrawal charges will not apply to contracts purchased with an initial contribution of $25 million or more.

(3)

Currently, we do not charge for transfers among variable investment options under the contract. However, we reserve the right to charge for transfers in excess of 12 transfers per contract year. We will charge no more than $35 for each variable transfer at the time each transfer is processed. See “Transfer charge” in “Charges and expenses” later in this Prospectus. We will not count transfers from Segment Type Holding Accounts into Segments on a Segment Start Date, or the allocation of Segment Maturity Value on a Segment Maturity Date in calculating the number of transfers subject to this charge.

(4)

The charge will not exceed 2% of the amount disbursed or transferred.

(5)

This charge is currently waived. This waiver may be discontinued at any time, with or without notice.

(6)

On anon-guaranteed basis, we may waive any portion of the variable investment option fee as it applies to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option (including any amounts in the dollar cap averaging account) to the extent that the fee exceeds the income distributed by the underlying EQ/Money Market Portfolio. This waiver is limited to the variable investment option fee, and it is not a fee waiver or performance guarantee for the underlying EQ/Money Market Portfolio. See “Variable Investment Option fee” in “Charges and expenses” later in this Prospectus.

(7)

The variable investment option fee prior to May 22, 2017 was 0.65%.

(8)

The actual amount of the Segment Interim Value is determined by a formula that depends on, among other things, the Segment Buffer and how the Index has performed since the Segment Start Date, as discussed in “Appendix III” later in this Prospectus. The maximum loss would occur if there is a total distribution for a Segment with a -10%, -15%, -20%, -25% or -30% buffer at a time when the Index price has declined to zero. For Annual Lock Segments, this is the maximum amount you could lose during each Annual Lock Period. The maximum loss for an Annual Lock Segment could be greater than 90%. If you surrender or cancel your contract, die or make a withdrawal from a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date, the Segment Buffer will not necessarily apply to the extent it would on the Segment Maturity Date or Annual Lock Anniversary, any upside performance will be limited to a percentage lower than the Performance Cap Rate and, for Choice Segments only, the Segment Interim Value will reflect the application of a portion of the Choice cost.

(9)

For example, if you invested $1,000 in a Choice Segment with a 5-year Segment Duration, your investment will be subject to a Choice cost of 5%. However, if on the Segment Maturity Date the Index Performance Rate is 2%, the Choice Cost deduction will be limited to 2% and your Segment Maturity Value will be equal to your $1,000 initial investment.

(10)

“Total Annual Portfolio Operating Expenses” may be based, in part, on estimated amounts of such expenses.

Examples

These examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include contract owner transaction expenses, separate account annual expenses, and underlying Trust fees and expenses (including underlying portfolio fees and expenses). These examples do not reflect charges for any special service you may request. For a complete description of portfolio charges and expenses, please see the prospectuses for the Trust.

13


The examples below show the expenses that a hypothetical contract owner would pay in the situations illustrated under a Series B contract, a Series C contract and under a Series ADV contract.

The Dollar Cap Averaging Program is not covered by the fee table and examples. While there is no fee for using the Dollar Cap Averaging Program, any applicable variable investment option fee amount and withdrawal charges do apply to amounts residing in the dollar cap averaging account.

You can find examples illustrating the Structured Investment Option under “Structured Investment Option” in “Contract Features and Benefits.” Withdrawal charges, if any, also apply to the Structured Investment Option.

These examples should not be considered a representation of past or future expenses for any variable investment option. Actual expenses may be greater or less than those shown. Similarly, the annual rate of return assumed in the examples is not an estimate or guarantee of future investment performance.

The examples assume that you invest $10,000 in the contract for the time periods indicated and that your investment has a 5% return each year. The examples also assume (i) the total annual expenses of the portfolios set forth in the previous tables; and (ii) there is no waiver of any withdrawal charge. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be:

   Series B                    
   If you surrender your contract at the
end of the applicable time period
  If you do not surrender your
contract at the end of the applicable
time period
 
   1 year  3 years  5 years  10 years  1 year   3 years   5 years   10 years 

EQ/CoreBond Index

 $702  $1,123  $1,370  $2,309  $202   $623   $1,070   $2,309 

EQ/Equity500 Index

 $692  $1,094  $1,322  $2,211  $192   $594   $1,022   $2,211 

EQ/MoneyMarket

 $706  $1,136  $1,391  $2,353  $206   $636   $1,091   $2,353 
   Series C                    
   If you surrender your contract at the
end of the applicable time period
  If you do not
surrender your contract at the end of
the applicable time period
 
   1 year  3 years  5 years  10 years  1 year   3 years   5 years   10 years 

EQ/CoreBond Index

 $244  $750  $1,282  $2,737  $244   $750   $1,282   $2,737 

EQ/Equity500 Index

 $234  $721  $1,235  $2,642  $234   $721   $1,235   $2,642 

EQ/MoneyMarket

 $248  $762  $1,303  $2,779  $248   $762   $1,303   $2,779 
   Series ADV                    
   If you surrender your contract at the
end of the applicable time period
  If you do not
surrender your contract at the end of
the applicable time period
 
   1 year  3 years  5 years  10 years  1 year   3 years   5 years   10 years 

EQ/CoreBond Index

 $97  $302  $524  $1,162  $97   $302   $524   $1,162 

EQ/Equity500 Index

 $87  $272  $473  $1,053  $87   $272   $473   $1,053 

EQ/MoneyMarket

 $101  $315  $546  $1,210  $101   $315   $546   $1,210 

Condensed financial information

Please see Appendix I at the end of this Prospectus for the unit values and the number of units outstanding as of the end of the periods shown for each of the variable investment options available as of December 31, 2019.

14


1. Risk factors

This section discusses risks associated with some features of the contract. See “Definition of key terms” earlier in this Prospectus and “Contract features and benefits” later in this Prospectus for more detailed explanations of terms associated with the Structured Investment Option.

There is a risk of a substantial loss of your principal because you agree to absorb all losses from the portion of any negative Index Performance Rate that exceeds the Segment Buffer on the Segment Maturity Date or Annual Lock Anniversary. The highest level of protection provided by a single Segment Investment Option is the -30% Segment Buffer (only available on certain Segments) and the lowest level of protection is the -10% Segment Buffer.

For Standard Segments and Choice Segments. For example, the -10% Segment Buffer protects your Segment Investment against the first 10% of loss. If the Index Performance Rate declines by more than the Segment Buffer, you will lose an amount equal to 1% of your Segment Investment for every 1% that the Index Performance Rate declines below the Segment Buffer. This means that you could lose up to 70% of your principal with a-30% Segment Buffer, up to 80% of your principal with a -20% Segment Buffer and up to 90% of your principal with a -10% Segment Buffer. Each time you roll over your Segment Maturity Value into a new Standard Segment or Choice Segment you are subject to the same risk of loss as described above.

For Annual Lock Segments. The -10% Segment Buffer protects against the first 10% of loss each Annual Lock Period. If the Index Performance Rate declines by more than the Segment Buffer during an Annual Lock Period, you will lose an amount equal to 1% of your Segment Investment (if the decline occurs during the first Annual Lock Period and of your Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount thereafter) for every 1% that the Index Performance Rate declines below the Segment Buffer. This means that during an Annual Lock Period you could lose up to 90% of your Segment Investment (if the decline occurs during the first Annual Lock Period and of your Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount thereafter) with the -10% Segment Buffer. The cumulative result means that you could lose more than 90% of your principal in an Annual Lock Segment. Each time you roll over your Segment Maturity Value into a new Annual Lock Segment you are subject to the same risk of loss as described above.

For Standard Segment and Choice Segments, your Segment Rate of Return for any Segment is limited by its Performance Cap Rate, which could cause your Segment Rate of Return to be lower than it would otherwise be if you invested in a mutual fund or exchange-traded fund designed to track the performance of the applicable Index. For Annual Lock Segments, your Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for any Segment is limited by its Performance Cap Rate, which could cause your Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return and Segment Rate of Return to be lower than it would otherwise be if you invested in a mutual fund or exchange-traded fund designed to track the performance of the applicable Index.

We declare a Performance Cap Rate for each Segment, which is the maximum Segment Rate of Return that can be credited on the Segment Maturity Date or used to calculate the maximum Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return on each Annual Lock Anniversary for that Segment. The Performance Cap Rate may limit your participation in any increases in the underlying Index associated with a Segment. Our minimum Performance Cap Rates for 1, 3, and 5-year Standard Segments are 2%, 6%, and 10%, respectively. Our minimum Performance Cap Rate for 5-year Choice Segments is 10%. Our minimum Performance Cap Rate for Annual Lock Segments is 2%.We will not open a Segment with a Performance Cap Rate below the applicable minimum Performance Cap Rate. In some cases, we may decide not to declare a Performance Cap Rate for a Segment, in which case there is no maximum Segment Rate of Return for that Segment.

The Performance Cap Rate is determined on the Segment Start Date. The Performance Cap Rate for the same Segment may be higher for Owners who elect that Segment during their first Contract Year than for Owners who are in their second or later Contract Year. You will not know the rate in advance. Prior to the Segment Start Date, you may elect a Performance Cap Threshold. The threshold represents the minimum Performance Cap Rate you find acceptable for a particular Segment. If we declare a cap that is lower than the threshold you specify, you will not be invested in that Segment and your contribution will remain in that Segment Type Holding Account, for as long as the Performance Cap Threshold is in effect.

A Performance Cap Threshold will be in effect until the PCT Expiry Date. This means that if the declared Performance Cap Rate for a Segment has not matched or exceeded your Performance Cap Threshold on any of the scheduled Segment Start Dates before the PCT Expiry Date, any amounts in the applicable Segment Type Holding Account (including any funds transferred to that holding account after your election) on the business day immediately preceding the next scheduled Segment Start Date after your PCT Expiry Date will be transferred into the Segment created on that Segment Start Date, unless you specify a new the Performance Cap Threshold prior to that date. YOU MUST SET A NEW PERFORMANCE CAP THRESHOLD PRIOR TO THE NEXT SCHEDULED SEGMENT START DATE AFTER YOUR PERFORMANCE CAP THRESHOLD EXPIRES TO AVOID HAVING AMOUNTS AUTOMATICALLY TRANSFERRED INTO THE ASSOCIATED SEGMENT, WHICH MAY HAVE A PERFORMANCE CAP RATE THAT DOES NOT MEET YOUR INVESTMENT OBJECTIVES. In addition, if your Performance Cap Threshold was satisfied on a scheduled Segment Start Date before the PCT Expiry Date and amounts in the applicable Segment Type Holding Account were transferred into a Segment, the Performance Cap Threshold will continue to apply to any amounts you subsequently transfer into that Segment Type Holding Account until the PCT Expiry Date. A “scheduled Segment Start Date” includes any date on which a

15


Segment was scheduled to start but was not offered as of that date. A suspension of the Segment Type will not extend the PCT Expiry Date.

If you do not specify a threshold or your Performance Cap Threshold has expired, you risk the possibility that the Performance Cap Rate established will have a lower cap than you would find acceptable. Performance Cap Thresholds are not available if you invest in the Dollar Cap Averaging Program. The Performance Cap Rate is a rate of return from the Segment Start Date to the Segment Maturity Date or from the Segment Start Date to the first Annual Lock Anniversary (and thereafter from each Annual Lock Anniversary to the next), NOT an annual rate of return, even if the Segment Duration is longer than one year.

The method we use in calculating your Segment Interim Value may result in an amount lower than your Segment Investment, even if the corresponding Index has experienced positive investment performance since the Segment Start Date. Also, this amount may be less than the amount you would receive had you held the investment until the Segment Maturity Date.

If you take a withdrawal, including required minimum distributions, and there is insufficient value in the variable investment options, the Segment Type Holding Accounts and the dollar cap averaging account, we will withdraw amounts from any active Segments in your contract. Amounts withdrawn from active Segments will be valued using the formula for calculating the Segment Interim Value and will reduce your Segment Investment.

If you die or cancel or surrender your contract before the Segment Maturity Date, we will pay the Segment Interim Value.

Any calculation of the Segment Interim Value will generally be affected by changes in both the volatility and level of the relevant Index, as well as interest rates. The calculation of the Segment Interim Value is linked to various factors, including the value of hypothetical fixed instruments and derivatives as described in “Appendix III” of this Prospectus. The Segment Interim Value will generally be negatively affected by increases in the expected volatility of index prices, interest rate increases, and by poor market performance. Prior to the Segment Maturity Date you will not receive the full potential of the Performance Cap since the participation in upside performance for early withdrawals is pro-rated based on the period those amounts were invested in a Segment or Annual Lock Period. Generally, you will not receive the full protection of the Segment Buffer prior to the Segment Maturity Date because the Segment Interim Value only reflects a portion of the downside protection expected to be provided on the Segment Maturity Date or Annual Lock Anniversary. As a Segment moves closer to the Segment Maturity Date or Annual Lock Anniversary, the Segment Interim Value would generally reflect higher realized gains of the Index performance or, in the case of negative performance, increased downside Segment Buffer protection. All other factors being equal, the Segment Interim Value would be lower the earlier a withdrawal or surrender is made during a Segment or Annual Lock Period. This means you

participate to a lesser extent in upside performance and downside protection the earlier you take a withdrawal.

You cannot transfer out of a Segment prior to its maturity to another investment option. You can only make withdrawals out of a Segment or surrender your contract. The amount you would receive would be calculated using the formula for the Segment Interim Value.

We may not offer new Segments of any or all Segment Types, so a Segment may not be available for you to transfer your Segment Maturity Value into after the Segment Maturity Date.

We have the right to substitute an alternative index prior to Segment Maturity if the publication of one or more Indices is discontinued or at our sole discretion we determine that our use of such Indices should be discontinued or if the calculation of one or more of the Indices is substantially changed. If we substitute an index for an existing Segment, we would not change the Segment Buffer or Performance Cap Rate. We would attempt to choose a substitute index that has a similar investment objective and risk profile to the replaced index.

If a Segment cannot be matured until after the scheduled Segment Start Date, we may create new Segments of Segment Types that utilize unaffected Indices on the scheduled Segment Start Date. This may occur if the Segment Maturity Date for a Segment is delayed more than once because the value for the relevant underlying Index of the Segment is not published on the designated Segment Maturity Date. If your instructions include an allocation from a Segment whose Segment Maturity Date has been delayed to a new Segment whose underlying Index is unaffected, we will not be able to transfer that portion of your Segment Maturity Value from the affected Segment to the unaffected Segment. We will use reasonable efforts to allocate your Segment Maturity Value in accordance with your instructions, which may include holding amounts in Segment Type Holding Accounts until the next Segment Start Date.

The amounts held in a Segment Type Holding Account may earn a return that is less than the return you might have earned if those amounts were held in another variable investment option.

Standard Segment Types with greater protection tend to have lower Performance Cap Rates than other Standard Segment Types that use the same Index and duration but provide less protection.

Choice Segment Types with greater protection tend to have lower Performance Cap Rates than other Choice Segment Types that use the same Index and duration but provide less protection.

The value of your variable investment options will fluctuate and you could lose some or all of your account value.

The level of risk you bear and your potential investment performance will differ depending on the investments you choose.

If your account value falls below the applicable minimum account size as a result of a withdrawal, the contract will terminate.

For Series B contracts only, if you surrender your contract, any applicable withdrawal charge is calculated as a percentage of contributions, not account value. It is possible that the percentage of account value withdrawn could exceed the applicable withdrawal charge percentage. For example, assume you make

16


a onetime contribution of $1,000 at contract issue. If your account value is $800 in contract year 3 and you surrender your contract, a withdrawal charge percentage of 5% is applied. The withdrawal charge would be $50 (5% of the $1,000 contribution). This is a 6.25% reduction of your account value, which results in a cash value of $750 paid to you.

No company other than the Company has any legal responsibility to pay amounts that the Company owes under the contract. An owner should look to the financial strength of the Company for its claims-paying ability.

The Segments track the performance of an Index. By investing in the Structured Investment Option, you are not actually invested in an index, an exchange-traded fund that tracks an index, or any underlying securities or commodities.

Your Segment Maturity Value is subject to application of the Performance Cap Rate, the Segment Buffer and (for Choice Segments only) the Choice cost. For Standard and Choice Segments, your Segment Maturity Value is not affected by the price of the Index on any date between the Segment Start Date and the Segment Maturity Date. For Annual Lock Segments, your Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount is not affected by the price of the Index on any date between the Segment Start Date and the first Annual Lock Anniversary (and thereafter from each Annual Lock Anniversary to the next).

As an investor in the Segment, you will not have voting rights or rights to receive cash dividends or other distributions or other rights that holders of the shares of the funds or holders of securities comprising the indices would have.

Values of securities and commodities can fluctuate, and sometimes wildly fluctuate, in response to changes in the financial condition of a company as well as general market, economic or political conditions.

Foreign securities involve risks not associated with U.S. securities. Foreign markets may be less liquid, more volatile and subject to less government supervision than domestic markets. Differences between U.S. and foreign legal, political and economic systems, regulatory regimes and market practices also may impact security values. There are greater risks involved with investments linked to emerging market countries and/or their securities markets. Investments in these countries and/or markets may present market, credit, currency, liquidity, legal, political, technical and other risks different from, or greater than, the risks of investing in developed countries.

The price of commodities may be affected by a variety of factors, including the global supply and demand, activities of speculative communities, and investor’s expectations. Developments affecting the value of commodities may have significant impact on the investments that are linked to the value of such commodities. Commodity markets may be subject to sharp price fluctuations, which may lead to significant price fluctuations in investments that are linked to the value of such commodities.

If you invest in a Segment that provides performance tied to the performance of the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund, you should consider the following:

The performance of the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund may not replicate the performance of, and may underperform the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index (the “underlying index”). The price of the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund will reflect expenses and fees that will reduce its relative performance. Moreover, it is also possible that the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund may not fully replicate or may, in certain circumstances, diverge significantly from the performance of the underlying index. Because the return on your Segment Investment (subject to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund and not the underlying index, the return on your Segment Investment may be less than that of an alternative investment linked directly to the underlying index or the components of the underlying index.

The investment objective and strategies of the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund are potentially subject to change.

There are risks associated with the real estate industry. The iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund invests in companies that invest in real estate, such as REITs or real estate holding companies. The value of real estate and, consequently, companies that invest in real estate may be affected by many complex factors that interrelate with each other in complex and unpredictable ways.

If you invest in a Segment that provides performance tied to the performance of the Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund, you should consider the following:

The performance of the Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund may not replicate the performance of, and may underperform The Financial Select Sector Index (the “underlying index”). The price of the Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund will reflect expenses and fees that will reduce its relative performance. Moreover, it is also possible that the Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund may not fully replicate or may, in certain circumstances, diverge significantly from the performance of the underlying index. Because the return on your Segment Investment (subject to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund and not the underlying index, the return on your Segment Investment may be less than that of an alternative investment linked directly to the underlying index or the components of the underlying index.

The investment objective and strategies of the Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund are potentially subject to change.

There are risks associated with the financial services sector. The Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund invests in companies that operate in the financial services sector. Developments affecting the financial and capital markets may negatively impact the companies operating in these markets.

17


If you invest in a Segment that provides performance tied to the performance of the Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund, you should consider the following:

The performance of the Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund may not replicate the performance of, and may underperform The Energy Select Sector Index (the “underlying index”). The price of the Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund will reflect expenses and fees that will reduce its relative performance. Moreover, it is also possible that the Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund may not fully replicate or may, in certain circumstances, diverge significantly from the performance of the underlying index. Because the return on your Segment Investment (subject to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund and not the underlying index, the return on your Segment Investment may be less than that of an alternative investment linked directly to the underlying index or the components of the underlying index.

The investment objective and strategies of the Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund are potentially subject to change.

There are risks associated with the energy sector. The Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund invests in companies that operate in the energy sector. Developments affecting the supply and demand for energy products, the price of oil and gas, exploration and production spending, government regulation, world events, exchange rates and economic conditions may negatively impact the companies operating in energy sector.

If you invest in a Segment that provides performance tied to the performance of the SPDR® Gold Shares, you should consider the following:

The performance of the SPDR® Gold Shares relates directly to the price of gold bullion, less the expenses of the SPDR® Gold Trust operations. The price of the SPDR® Gold Shares relates directly to the value of the gold held by the Trust and fluctuations in the price of gold could materially adversely affect an investment in the SPDR® Gold Shares. Moreover, it is also possible that the SPDR® Gold Shares may not fully replicate or may, in certain circumstances, diverge significantly from the performance of the price of gold. Because the return on your Segment Investment (subject to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the SPDR® Gold Shares and not directly the price of gold, the return on your Segment Investment may be less than that of an alternative investment linked directly to the price of gold.

There are risks associated with the investing in gold. The price of gold, which is a commodity, has fluctuated widely over the past several years. Several factors may affect the price of gold, including: global gold supply and demand; global or regional political, economic or financial events and situations; investors’ expectations with respect to the rate of inflation; currency exchange rates; and interest rates.

The amount of gold represented by the SPDR® Gold Shares will continue to be reduced during the life of the trust due to the sales of gold necessary to pay the trust’s expenses irrespective of whether the trading price of the SPDR® Gold

Shares rises or falls in response to changes in the price of gold. Assuming a constant gold price, the trading price of the SPDR® Gold Shares is expected to gradually decline relative to the price of gold as the amount of gold represented by the SPDR® Gold Shares gradually declines.

If you invest in a Segment that provides performance tied to the performance of the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF, you should consider the following:

The performance of the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF may not replicate the performance of, and may underperform the MSCI EAFE Index (the “underlying index”). The price of the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF will reflect expenses and fees that will reduce its relative performance. Moreover, it is also possible that the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF may not fully replicate or may, in certain circumstances, diverge significantly from the performance of the underlying index. Because the return on your Segment Investment (subject to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF and not the underlying index, the return on your Segment Investment may be less than that of an alternative investment linked directly to the underlying index or the components of the underlying index.

The investment objective and strategies of the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF are potentially subject to change.

The iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF invests in foreign securities. Foreign securities involve risks not associated with U.S. securities. Foreign markets may be less liquid, more volatile and subject to less government supervision than domestic markets. Differences between U.S. and foreign legal, political and economic systems, regulatory regimes and market practices also may impact security values. There are greater risks involved with investments linked to emerging market countries and/or their securities markets. Investments in these countries and/or markets may present market, credit, currency, liquidity, legal, political, technical and other risks different from, or greater than, the risks of investing in developed countries.

Investments in Choice Segments are subject to application of the Choice cost. As a result:

The Segment Rate of Return for a Choice Segment will always be less than (a) the Performance Cap Rate and (b) the Index Performance Rate, if positive, for that Segment.

The Segment Rate of Return for a Choice Segment may be less than the Segment Rate of Return for a Standard Segment based on the same Index, Segment Buffer and Segment Duration. This will occur if the applicable Index Performance Rate is positive but less than the sum of (a) the Performance Cap Rate for the Standard Segment and (b) the Choice cost.

The Segment Interim Value for a Choice Segment may be less than the Segment Interim Value for a Standard Segment based on the same Index, Segment Buffer and Segment Duration. This could occur if the performance of the applicable Index through the date of calculation of the Segment

18


Interim Value is less than the sum of (a) the prorated Performance Cap Rate for the Standard Segment and (b) the applicable Choice cost amount. See Appendix II for more information about how the Choice cost is built in to the Segment Interim Value calculation for Choice Segments.

Past performance of an index is not an indication of its future performance.

Cybersecurity

We rely heavily on interconnected computer systems and digital data to conduct our variable product business. Because our variable product business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners, our business is vulnerable to disruptions from utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g., hardware and software malfunctions), and cyber-attacks. These risks include, among other things, the theft, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, interference with or denial of service, attacks on websites and other operational disruption and unauthorized use or abuse of confidential customer information. Such systems failures and cyber-attacks affecting us, any third party administrator, the underlying funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service providers may adversely affect us and your account value. For instance, systems failures and cyber-attacks may interfere with our processing of contract transactions, including the processing of orders from our website or with the underlying funds, impact our ability to calculate account unit values, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information, impede order processing, subject us and/or our service providers and intermediaries to regulatory fines and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. Cybersecurity risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the underlying funds invest, which may cause the funds underlying your contract to lose value. While there can be no assurance that we or the underlying funds or our service providers will avoid losses affecting your contract due to cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future, we take reasonable steps to mitigate these risks and secure our systems from such failures and attacks.

19


2. How to reach us

 

PleaseTo obtain (1) any forms you need for communicating with us, (2) unit values and other values under your policy, and (3) any other information or materials that we provide in connection with your policy or the Portfolios, you may communicate with us at the mailing addressesour Administrative Office as listed below for the purposes described. You can also use our Online Account Access systemPlease refer to access information about your account“Telephone and to complete certainInternet requests” for effective dates for processing telephone, Internet and fax requests, through the Internet. Certain methods of contacting us, such as by telephone or electronically, may be unavailable or delayed. For example, our facsimile service may not be available at all times and/or we may be unavailable due to emergency closing. In addition, the level and type of service available may be restricted based on criteria established by us. In order to avoid delayslater in processing, please send your correspondence and check to the appropriate location, as follows:this prospectus.

 

For correspondence with checks:By mail:

 

For contributions sent by regular mail:At the Post Office Box for our Administrative Office:

 

Retirement Service SolutionsEquitable Financial Life Insurance Company — Life Operations Center

P.O. Box 15771047

Secaucus, NJ 07096-1577Charlotte, North Carolina 28201-1047

 

For contributions sent byBy express delivery:

Retirement Service Solutions

500 Plaza Drive, 6th Floor

Secaucus, NJ 07094

For correspondence without checks:delivery only:

 

For all other communications (e.g., requestsAt the Street Address for transfers, withdrawals, or required notices) sent by regular mail:our Administrative Office:

 

Retirement Service SolutionsEquitable Financial Life Insurance Company — Life Operations Center

P.O. Box 15478501 IBM Drive, Suite 150

Secaucus, NJ 07096-1547Charlotte, North Carolina 28262-4333

1-704-341-7000 (for express delivery purposes only)

By Phone:

Monday through Thursday, 8:00 am to 7:00 pm and Friday, 8:00 am to 5:30 pm, Eastern Time:1-800-777-6510 (for U.S. residents) or 1-704-341-7000 (outside of the U.S.).

Bye-mail:

life-service@equitable.com

By fax:

1-855-268-6378

By Internet:

You may register for online account access at www.equitable.com for those outside the U.S. Our website provides access to account information and customer service. After registering, you can view account details, perform certain transactions, print customer service forms and find answers to common questions.

 

For all other communications (e.g., requests for transfers, withdrawals, or required notices) sent by express delivery:Required Forms.  

Retirement Service Solutions

500 Plaza Drive, 6th Floor

Secaucus, NJ 07094

Your correspondence will be picked up at the mailing address noted above and delivered to our processing office. Your correspondence, however, is not considered received by us until it is received at our processing office. Where this Prospectus refers to the day when we receive a contribution, request, election, notice, transfer or any other transaction request from you, we mean the day on which that item (or the last thing necessary for us to process that item) arrives in complete and proper form at our processing office or via the appropriate telephone or fax number if the item is a type we accept by those means. There are two main exceptions: if the item arrives (1) on a day that is not a business day or (2) after the close of a business day, then, in each case, we are deemed to have received that item on the next business day. Our processing office is: 500 Plaza Drive, 6th Floor, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094.

Reports we provide:

written confirmation of financial transactions and certainnon-financial transactions, including when money is transferred into a Segment from a Segment Type Holding Account; when

money is not transferred from a Segment Type Holding Account into a Segment on a Segment Start Date for any reason; when a Segment matures; when you change a Performance Cap Threshold; or when you change your current instructions; and

at the close of each calendar quarter and statement of your contract values at the close of each calendar year.

See “Definition of key terms” earlier in this Prospectus for a more detailed explanation of terms associated with the Structured Investment Option.

Online Account Access system:

Online Account Access is designed to provide you withup-to-date information through the Internet. You can obtain information on:

your current account value;

your current allocation percentages;

your Performance Cap Threshold;

your instructions on file for allocating the Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date;

the number of units you have in the variable investment options and the Segment Type Holding Accounts;

the daily unit values for the variable investment options and the Segment Type Holding Accounts; and

performance information regarding the variable investment options.

You can also:

change your allocation percentages and/or transfer among the variable investment options (not available for transfers to Segment Type Holding Accounts);

change your password;

elect to receive certain contract statements electronically;

change your address;

elect or change your Performance Cap Threshold; and

access “Frequently Asked Questions” and certain service forms.

Online Account Access is normally available seven days a week, 24 hours a day. You may use Online Account Access by visiting our website at www.equitable.com and clicking on Online Account Access. Of course, for reasons beyond our control, this service may sometimes be unavailable.

We have established procedures to reasonably confirm that the instructions communicated through the Internet are genuine. For example, we will require certain personal identification information before we will act on Internet instructions and we will provide written confirmation of your transfers. If we do not employ reasonable

20


procedures to confirm the genuineness of Internet instructions, we may be liable for any losses arising out of any act or omission that constitutes negligence, lack of good faith, or willful misconduct. In light of our procedures, we will not be liable for following Internet instructions we reasonably believe to be genuine.

We reserve the right to limit access to this service if we determine that you engaged in a disruptive transfer activity such as “market timing” (see “Disruptive transfer activity” in “Transferring your money among investment options” later in this Prospectus).

Customer service representative:

You may also use our toll-free number(1-877-899-3743) to speak with one of our customer service representatives. Our customer service representatives are available on the following business days.

Monday through Thursday from 8:30 a.m. until 7:00 p.m., Eastern time.

Friday from 8:30 a.m. until 5:30 p.m., Eastern time.

We require that the following types of communications be on specific forms we provide for that purpose:

 

(1)

authorizationrequest for transfers, including transfers of your Segment Maturity Value on a Segment Maturity Date, by your financial professional;our automatic transfer service (our dollar cost averaging service);

 

(2)

conversion of a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA contract;request for our asset rebalancing service;

 

(3)

tax withholding elections (see withdrawal request form)transfers among investment options (if submitted by e-mail);

 

(4)

electiondesignation of the beneficiary continuation option;new policy owner(s); and

 

(5)

electiondesignation of a predetermined form of death benefit payout;

(6)

IRA contribution recharacterizations;

(7)

Section 1035 exchanges;

(8)

direct transfers and specified direct rollovers;

(9)

death claims;

(10)

change in ownership (NQ only, if available under your contract);

(11)

purchase by, or change of ownership to, anon-natural owner;

(12)

requests to transfer,re-allocate, make subsequent contributions and change your future allocations (except that certain transactions may be permitted through the Online Account Access systems);

(13)

establishing and changing a Performance Cap Threshold;

(14)

providing instructions for allocating the Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date;

(15)

requests for withdrawals, including withdrawals of the Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date; and

(16)

requests for contract surrender.

To cancel or change any of the following, we require written notification generally at least seven calendar days before the next scheduled transaction:

(1)

instructions on file for allocating the Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date; and

(2)

instructions to withdraw your Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date.new beneficiary(ies).

 

Other Requests.We also have specific forms that we recommend you use for the following types of requests:following:

 

(1)(a)

beneficiary changes;policy surrenders;

(b)

transfers among investment options (not submitted by e-mail);

(c)

changes in allocation percentages for premiums and deductions;

(d)

electing the paid up death benefit guarantee; and

 

(2)(e)

dollar cap averaging.electing the MSO and any MSO transactions.

 

To cancel You can also change your allocation percentages, transfer among investment options and/or change any ofyour address (1) by phone (2) over the following, we require written notification generally at least seven calendar days beforeInternet, through www.equitable.com for those outside the next scheduled transaction:

(1)

the date annuity payments are to begin; and

(2)

dollar cap averaging.

You must sign and date all these requests. Any written request that is not on one ofU.S., or (3) by writing our forms must include your name and your contract number along with adequate detailsAdministrative Office. For more information about the notice you wish to give or the action you wish us to take. Sometransaction requests may be completed online; you can use our Online Account Access systemmake by phone or over the Internet, see “How to contact usmake transfers” and to complete such requests through the Internet.“Telephone and Internet requests” later in this prospectus. In the future, we may require that certain requests be completed online.over the Internet.

Certain methods of contacting us, such as by telephone or electronically, may be unavailable or delayed (for example our fax service may not be available at all times and/or we may be unavailable due to emergency closing). In addition, the level and type of service available may be restricted based on criteria established by us.

We reserve the right to limit access to these services if we determine that you are engaged in a disruptive transfer activity, such as “market timing.” (See “Disruptive transfer activity” in “More information about other matters.”)

 

Signatures:Formal Requirements.  Except for properly authorized telephone or Internet transactions, any notice or request that does not use our standard form must be in writing. It must be dated and signed by you and should also specify your name, title (if applicable), the insured person’s name (if different), your policy number and adequate details about the notice you wish to give or other action you wish us to take. We may require you to return your policy to us before we make certain policy changes that you may request.

 

The proper person to sign forms, notices and requests would normally be the owner.owner or any other person that our procedures permit to exercise the right or privilege in question. If there are joint owners bothall must sign. Any irrevocable beneficiary or assignee that we have on our records also must sign certain types of requests.

You should send all requests, notices and payments to our Administrative Office at the addresses specified above. We will also accept requests and notices by fax at the above number, if we believe them to be genuine. We reserve the right, however, to require an original signature before acting on any faxed item. You must send premium payments after the first one to our Administrative Office at the above addresses; except that you should send any premiums for which we have billed you to the address on the billing notice.

 

eDelivery:eDelivery

 

You can register to receive statements and other documents electronically. You can do so by visiting our website at www.equitable.com.

About our Separate Account FP

Each variable investment option is a part (or “subaccount”) of our Separate Account FP. We established Separate Account FP under special provisions of the New York Insurance Law. These provisions prevent creditors from any other business we conduct from reaching the assets we hold in our variable investment options for owners of our variable life insurance policies. We are the legal owner of all of the assets in Separate Account FP and may withdraw any amounts that exceed our reserves and other liabilities with respect to variable investment options under our policies. For example, we may withdraw amounts from

 

 

21


3. Contract featuresSeparate Account FP that represent our investments in Separate Account FP or that represent fees and benefits

charges under the policies that we have earned. Income, gains and losses credited to, or charged against Separate Account FP reflect its own investment experience and not the investment experience of the Company’s other assets.

 

Separate Account FP is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and is registered and classified under that act as a “unit investment trust.” The SEC, however, does not manage or supervise the Company or Separate Account FP. Although the Separate Account is registered, the SEC does not monitor the activity of Separate Account FP on a daily basis. The Company is not required to register, and is not registered, as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940.

 

How you can purchaseEach subaccount (variable investment option) of Separate Account FP available under Incentive Life Optimizer® II invests solely in the applicable class of shares issued by the corresponding Portfolio of the applicable Trust. Separate Account FP immediately reinvests all dividends and contribute to your contractother distributions it receives from a Portfolio in additional shares of that class in that Portfolio.

 

You may purchaseThe Trusts sell their shares to the Company separate accounts in connection with the Company’s variable life insurance and/or annuity products, and to separate accounts of insurance companies, both affiliated and unaffiliated with the Company. EQ Advisors Trust and EQ Premier VIP Trust also sell their shares to the trustee of a contract by making payments to us that we call “contributions.” We can refuse to accept any contribution from you at any time, including after you purchase the contract. We require a minimum contribution amount for each type of contract purchased. Maximum contribution limitations also apply. The following table summarizes our current rules regarding contributions to your contract, which rules are subject to change. For a traditional IRA contract, your initial contribution must be a direct transfer from another traditional IRA or a rollover from an eligible retirement plan (including another traditional IRA). For a Roth IRA contract, your initial contribution must be a direct transfer from another Roth IRA or a rollover from an eligible retirement plan including traditional IRA or another Roth IRA. For a QP contract, your initial contribution and any subsequent contributions must be a direct transfer from other investments within an existing qualified plan trust. Bothfor the owner and annuitant named in the contract must meet the issue age requirements shown in the table, and contributions are based on the age of the older of the original owner and annuitant. Subsequent contributions may not be permitted in your state. Please see Appendix II later in this Prospectus for any applicable state variations.

We reserve the right to change our current limitations on your contributions and to discontinue acceptance of contributions.

Company. We currently do not acceptforesee any contributiondisadvantages to our policy owners arising out of these arrangements. However, the Board of Trustees or Directors of each Trust intends to monitor events to identify any material irreconcilable conflicts that may arise and to determine what action, if (i) the aggregate contributions under one or more Structured Capital Strategies® contracts with the same owner or annuitant would then total more than $1,500,000; or (ii) the aggregate contributions under allany, should be taken in response. If we believe that a Board’s response insufficiently protects our annuity accumulation contracts with the same owner or annuitant would then total more than $2,500,000. We may waive these and other contribution limitations based on certain criteriapolicyowners, we determine, including issue age, aggregate contributions, variable investment option allocations and selling broker-dealer compensation. These and other contribution limitations may not be applicable in your state. Pleasewill see Appendix II later in this Prospectus for more information on state variations.to it that appropriate action is taken to do so.

About Separate Account No. 67

 

Upon advance noticeAmounts allocated to you,the MSO are held in a “non-unitized” separate account we have established under the New York Insurance Law. We own the assets of the separate account, as well as any favorable investment performance on those assets. You do not participate in the performance of the assets held in this separate account. We may, subject to state law that applies, transfer all assets allocated to the separate account to our general account. These assets are also available to the insurer’s general creditors and an owner should look to the financial strength of the Company for its claims-paying ability. We guarantee all benefits relating to your value in the MSO, regardless of whether assets supporting the MSO are held in a separate account or our general account.

Our current plans are to invest separate account assets in fixed-income obligations, including corporate bonds, mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, and government and agency issues. Futures, options and interest rate swaps may be used for hedging purposes.

Although the above generally describes our plans for investing the assets supporting our obligations under MSO, we are not obligated to invest those assets according to any particular plan except as we may exercise certain rights we have under the contract regarding contributions, including our rights to:be required to by state insurance laws.

Change our contribution requirements and limitations and our transfer rules, including to:

increase or decrease our minimum contribution requirements and increase or decrease our maximum contribution limitations;

discontinue the acceptance of subsequent contributions to the contract;

discontinue the acceptance of subsequent contributions and/or transfers into one or more of the variable investment options; and

discontinue the acceptance of subsequent contributions and/or transfers into one or more of the Segment Type Holding Accounts or the Segments.

Further limit the number of Segment Type Holding Accounts and Segments you may invest in at any one time.

Limit or terminate new contributions or transfers to any variable investment option, Segment Type Holding Account or Segment (“investment options”).

We reserve the right in our sole discretion to discontinue the acceptance of, and/or place additional limitations on contributions and transfers into certain investment options, including any or all of the Segment Types. If we exercise this right, your ability to invest in your contract, increase your account value and, consequently, increase your death benefit will be limited.Your voting privileges

 

22Voting of Portfolio shares.  As the legal owner of any Portfolio shares that support a variable investment option, we will attend (and have the right to vote at) any meeting of shareholders of the Portfolio (or the Trusts). To satisfy currently-applicable legal requirements, however, we will give you the opportunity to tell us how to vote the number of each Portfolio’s shares that are attributable to your policy. The number of full and fractional votes you are entitled to will be determined by dividing the policy account value (minus any policy indebtedness) allocable to an investment option by the net asset value per unit for the Portfolio underlying that investment option. We will vote shares attributable to policies for which we receive no instructions in the same proportion as the instructions we do receive from all policies that participate in our Separate Account FP (discussed below). With respect to any Portfolio shares that we are entitled to vote directly (because we do not hold them in a separate account or because they are not attributable to policies), we will vote in proportion to the instructions we have received from all holders of variable annuity and variable life insurance policies who are using that Portfolio. One effect of proportional voting is that a small number of policy owners may control the outcome of a vote.


Series B, Series C & Series ADV
Contract typeAvailable for owner and
annuitant issue ages
Minimum contributionsSource of contributionsAdditional limitations on
contributions to your contract(1)
NQ0 through 85

•  $25,000 (initial)

•  $500 (subsequent)

•  After-tax money.

•  Paid to us by check or transfer of contract value in a tax deferred exchange under Section 1035 of the Internal Revenue Code.

•  You may make subsequent contributions to the contract until the later of attained age 86 or, if later, the first contract date anniversary.

Traditional IRA0 through 85

• $25,000 (initial)

• $50 (subsequent)

•  Eligible rollover distributions from 403(b) plans, qualified plans and governmental employer 457(b) plans.

•  Rollovers from another traditional individual retirement arrangement.

•  Direct custodian-to- custodian transfers from another traditional individual retirement arrangement.

•  Regular IRA contributions.

•  Additional catch-up contributions.

•  You may make rollover or direct transfer contributions until the later of attained age 86 or the first contract date anniversary.

•  Contributions made after age 701/2 must be net of required minimum distributions.

•  Although we accept regular IRA contributions (limited to $6,000 per calendar year) under traditional IRA contracts, we intend that the contract be used primarily for rollover and direct transfer contributions.

•  Subsequent catch-up contributions of up to $1,000 per calendar year where the owner is at least age 50 but under age 701/2 at any time during the calendar year for which the contribution is made.

(1)

Subsequent contributions may not be permitted under certain conditions in your state. Please see Appendix II later in this Prospectus for more information on contribution limitations in your state. In addition to the limitations described here, we also reserve the right to refuse to accept any contribution under the contract at any time or change our contribution limits and requirements. We further reserve the right to discontinue the acceptance of, or place additional limitations on, contributions to the contract or contributions and/or transfers into any investment option at any time.

Under current legal requirements, we may disregard the voting instructions we receive from policy owners only in certain narrow circumstances prescribed by SEC regulations. If we do, we will advise you of the reasons in the next annual or semiannual report we send to you.

 

23Voting as policy owner.  


Series B, Series C & Series ADV (continued)

Contract typeAvailable for owner and
annuitant issue ages
Minimum contributionsSource of contributionsAdditional limitations on
contributions to your contract(1)
Roth IRA0 through 85

•  $25,000 (initial)

•  $50 (subsequent)

•  Rollovers from another Roth IRA.

•  Rollovers from a designated Roth contribution account under specified retirement plans.

•  Conversion rollovers from a traditional IRA or other eligible retirement plan.

•  Direct custodian-to-custodian transfers from another Roth individual retirement arrangement.

•  Regular Roth IRA contributions.

•  Additional catch-up contributions.

•  You may make rollover or direct transfer contributions until the later of attained age 86 or the first contract date anniversary.

•  Conversion rollovers after age 701/2 must be net of required minimum distributions for the traditional IRA or other eligible retirement plan that is the source of the conversion rollover.

•  Although we accept Roth IRA contributions (limited to $6,000 per calendar year) under Roth IRA contracts, we intend that the contract be used primarily for rollover and direct transfer contributions.

•  Subsequent catch-up contributions of up to $1,000 per calendar year where the owner is at least 50 at any time during the calendar year for which the contribution is made.

QP (defined benefit and defined contribution)20-75

•  $25,000 (initial)

•  $500 (subsequent)

•  Only transfer contributions from other investments within an existing qualified plan trust.

•  The plan must be qualified under Section 401(a) of the Internal Revenue Code.

•  For 401(k) plans, transferred contributions may not include any after-tax contributions, including designated Roth contributions.

•  We do not accept contributions directly from the employer.

•  We reserve the right to limit aggregate contributions made each contract year after the first contract year to 100% of the first contract year contributions.

(1)

Subsequent contributions may not be permitted under certain conditions in your state. Please see Appendix II later in this Prospectus for more information on contribution limitations in your state. In addition to the limitations described here, we also reserve the right to refuse to accept any contribution under the contract at any time or change our contribution limits and requirements. We further reserve the right to discontinue the acceptance of, or place additional limitations on, contributions to the contract or contributions and/or transfers into any investment option at any time.

24


OwnerIn addition to being able to instruct voting of Portfolio shares as discussed above, policy owners that use our variable investment options may in a few instances be called upon to vote on matters that are not the subject of a shareholder vote being taken by any Portfolio. If so, you will have one vote for each $100 of policy account value in any such option; and annuitant requirementswe will vote our interest in Separate Account FP in the same proportion as the instructions we receive from holders of Incentive Life Optimizer® II and other policies that Separate Account FP supports.

 

Under NQ contracts,About the annuitant can be different from the owner. Only natural persons can be joint owners. This means that an entity such as a corporation cannot be a joint owner. We reserve the right to prohibit availability of this contract to anynon-natural owner.Trusts

 

Owners whichThe Trusts are not individuals may be requiredregistered under the Investment Company Act of 1940. They are classified as “open-end management investment companies,” more commonly called mutual funds. Each Trust issues different shares relating to complete the appropriate Form W-8 describing the entity type to avoid 30% FATCA withholding from U.S.-source income.each Portfolio.

 

For NQ contracts (with a single owner, joint owners,The Trusts do not impose sales charges or anon-natural owner) we permit“loads” for buying and selling their shares. All dividends and other distributions on the namingTrusts’ shares are reinvested in full. The Board of joint annuitants only when the contract is purchased through an exchange that is intended not to be taxable under Section 1035Trustees of the Internal Revenue Code and only where the joint annuitants are spouses.

Under all IRA contracts, the owner and annuitant must be the same person. In some cases, an IRA contract may be held in a custodial individual retirement accounteach Trust serves for the benefit of each Trust’s shareholders. The Board of Trustees may take many actions regarding the individual annuitant.

ForPortfolios (for example, the Spousal continuation featureBoard of Trustees can establish additional Portfolios or eliminate existing Portfolios; change Portfolio investment objectives; and change Portfolio investment policies and strategies). In accordance with applicable law, certain of these changes may be implemented without a shareholder vote and, in certain instances, without advanced notice. More detailed information about certain actions subject to apply,notice and shareholder vote for each Trust, and other information about the spouses must either be joint owners, or, for single owner contracts, the surviving spouse must be the sole primary beneficiary. The determinationPortfolios, including portfolio investment objectives, policies, restrictions, risks, expenses, its Rule 12b-1 plan and other aspects of spousal status is made under applicable state law. However,its operations, appears in the event of a conflict between federal and state law, we follow federal rules. Certainsame-sex civil union and domestic partners may not be eligibleprospectuses for tax benefits under federal law and may be required to take post-death distributions.

In general, we will not permit a contract to be owned by a minor unless it is pursuant to the Uniform Gift to Minors Acteach Trust, which generally accompany this prospectus, or the Uniform Transfers to Minors Act in your state.

Under QP contracts, the owner must be the qualified plan trust and the annuitant must be the plan participant/employee. See Appendix VI later in this Prospectus for more information on QP contracts.

In certain states, where QP contractstheir respective SAIs, which are not available we permit defined benefit and defined contribution plan trusts to use pooled plan assets to purchase NQ contracts. See “Appendix VI: Purchase considerations for defined benefit and defined contribution plans” later in this Prospectus.

In this Prospectus, when we use the termsowner andjoint owner, we intend these to be references toannuitant andjoint annuitant, respectively, if the contract has anon-natural owner. Unless otherwise stated, if the contract is jointly owned or is issued to anon-natural owner, benefits are based on the age of the older joint owner or older joint annuitant, as applicable.

Purchase considerations for a charitable remainder trust

If you are purchasing the contract to fund a charitable remainder trust and allocate any account value to the Structured Investment Option, you should strongly consider “split-funding”: that is the trust holds investments in addition to this Structured Capital Strategies® contract. Charitable remainder trusts are required to make specific distributions. The charitable remainder trust annual distribution requirement may be equal to a percentage of the donated amount or a percentage of the current value of the donated amount. If your Structured Capital Strategies® contract is the only source for such distributions, you may need to take withdrawals from Segments before their Segment Maturity Dates. See the discussion of the Structured Investment Option later in this section.

How you can make your contributions

Except as noted below, contributions must be by check drawn on a U.S. bank, in U.S. dollars, and made payable to the Company. We may also apply contributions made for NQ contracts, pursuant to an intended Section 1035tax-free exchange or for IRA contracts, pursuant to a direct transfer. For a traditional IRA contract, your initial contribution must be a direct transfer from another traditional IRA or a rollover from an eligible retirement plan (including a traditional IRA). For a Roth IRA contract, your initial contribution must be a direct transfer from another Roth IRA or a rollover from an eligible retirement plan including a traditional IRA or another Roth IRA. For QP contracts, all contributions must be transfers from another investment within an existing qualified plan trust. We do not accept starter checks or travelers’ checks. All checks are subject to our ability to collect the funds. We reserve the right to reject a payment if it is received in an unacceptable form or not in accordance with our administrative procedures.

For your convenience, we will accept initial and subsequent contributions by wire transmittal from certain broker-dealers who have agreements with us for this purpose, including circumstances under which such contributions are considered received by us when your order is taken by such broker-dealers. These methods of payment are discussed in detail in “More information” later in this Prospectus.

If your contract is sold by a financial professional of Equitable Advisors, Equitable Advisors will direct us to hold your initial contribution, whether received via check or wire, in anon-interest bearing “Special Bank Account for the Exclusive Benefit of Customers” while Equitable Advisors ensures your application is complete and that suitability standards are met. Equitable Advisors will either complete this process or instruct us to return your contribution to you within the time requirements set by applicable rules of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”). Upon timely and successful completion of this review, Equitable Advisors will instruct us to transfer your contribution into ournon-interest bearing suspense account and transmit your application to us, so that we can consider your application for processing. If the period for obtaining this information extends through a Segment Start Date, your initial investment will not be allocated to new Segments until the next Segment Start Date.

If your application is in good order when we receive it from Equitable Advisors for application processing purposes, your contribution will be applied within two business days. If any information we require to issue your contract is missing or unclear, we will hold your contribution while we try to obtain this information. If we are unable to obtain all of the information we require within five business days after we receive an incomplete application or form, we will inform the financial professional submitting the application on your behalf. We will then return the contribution to you, unless you or your financial professional acting on your behalf, specifically direct us to keep your contribution until we receive the required information. The contribution will be applied as of the date we receive the missing information. If the period for obtaining this information extends through a Segment Start Date, your initial investment will not be allocated to new Segments until the next Segment Start Date.

If your financial professional is with a selling broker-dealer other than Equitable Advisors, your initial contribution must generally be accompanied by a completed application and any other form we need to process the payments. If any information is missing or unclear, we will hold the contribution, whether received via check or wire, in anon-interestupon request.

 

 

25


bearing suspense account while we try to obtain this information. If we are unable to obtain all of the information we require within five business days after we receive an incomplete application or form, we will inform the financial professional submitting the application on your behalf. We will then return the contribution to you unless you or your financial professional on your behalf, specifically direct us to keep your contribution until we receive the required information. The contribution will be applied as of the date we receive the missing information. If the period for obtaining this information extends through a Segment Start Date, your initial investment will not be allocated to new Segments until the next Segment Start Date.

Allocating your contributions

Your allocation instructions determine how your contributions are allocated, which may be among one or more of the investment options. The current maximum number of Segments that may be active in your contract at any time is 136. The maximum number of active Segments we allow at any one time may change and, in the future, it may be lower than the current number disclosed herein. If a transfer from a Segment Type Holding Account into a Segment will cause a contract to exceed this limit, such transfers will be defaulted to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. If there are multiple Segments scheduled to be established on a Segment Start Date, new Segments will be established in the order of those that would have the largest initial Segment Investment first until the limit is reached. Any remaining amount that is not transferred into a Segment will then be defaulted to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. Allocations must be in whole percentages and you may change your allocation percentages at any time. However, the total of your allocations must equal 100%. Once your contributions are allocated to the investment options they become part of your account value. Subsequent contributions are allocated according to instructions on file unless you provide new instructions. We discuss account value in “Determining your contract’s value” later in this Prospectus.

The contract is between you and the Company. The contract is not an investment advisory account, and the Company is not providing any investment advice or managing the allocations under your contract. In the absence of a specific written arrangement to the contrary, you, as the owner of the contract, have the sole authority to make investment allocations and other decisions under the contract. Your Equitable Advisors financial professional is acting as a broker-dealer registered representative, and is not authorized to act as an investment advisor or to manage the allocations under your contract. Certain Equitable Advisors financial professionals who are registered as investment advisory representatives (IARs) of Equitable Advisors may enter into a separate agreement with you to provide investment advice for a fee regarding the management of your Series ADV contract. That arrangement will be governed by a separate investment advisory contract, and different terms and conditions will apply (as set forth in that separate investment advisory contract and related disclosures, such as pertinent Forms ADV Part 2A). If your financial professional is a registered representative with a broker-dealer other than Equitable Advisors, you should speak with him/her regarding any different arrangements that may apply, particularly with regard to anyfee-based arrangement you may have in connection with your Series ADV contract.

What are your investment options under the contract?

Your investment options are the variable investment options, the Segments comprising the Structured Investment Option and the Dollar Cap Averaging Program. The term variable investment options includes the Segment Type Holding Accounts unless otherwise noted. The Segment Type Holding Accounts are part of the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. The Structured Investment Option and the Segment Type Holding Accounts are discussed later in this section under “Structured Investment Option.” The Dollar Cap Averaging Program invests in the dollar cap averaging account, which is part of the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. See “Dollar Cap Averaging Program” later in this section for more information.

Variable investment options

Your investment results in any one of the variable investment options will depend on the investment performance of the underlying portfolios. Because the variable investment options are not Segments, they are not subject to any Segment Buffer. You can lose all of your principal when investing in the variable investment options. In periods of poor market performance, the net return, after charges and expenses, may result in negative yields, including for the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. Listed below are the currently available portfolios, their investment objectives, and theirsub-advisers. We may, at any time, exercise our rights to limit or terminate your contributions, allocations and transfers into any of the variable investment options and to limit the number of variable investment options you may elect.

2622


4. About the Portfolios of the TrustTrusts

 

We offer anboth affiliated Trust,and unaffiliated Trusts, which in turn offersoffer one or more Portfolios. Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC (“Equitable IMG”), a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, serves as the investment adviser of the Portfolios of EQ Premier VIP Trust and EQ Advisors Trust. For some affiliated Portfolios, Equitable IMG has entered intosub-advisory agreements with one or more other investment advisers (the “sub-advisers”) to carry out investment decisions for the Portfolios. As such, among other responsibilities, Equitable IMG oversees the activities of the sub-advisers with respect to the Trustaffiliated Trusts and is responsible for retaining or discontinuing the services of thosesub-advisers. The chart below indicates thesub-adviser(s) for each Portfolio.Portfolio, if any. The chart below also shows the currently available Portfolios and their investment objectives.

 

You should be aware that Equitable Advisors, LLC and Equitable Distributors, LLC (together, the “Distributors”) directly or indirectly receive12b-1 fees from theaffiliated Portfolios for providing certain distribution and/or shareholder support services. These fees will not exceed 0.25% of the Portfolios’ average daily net assets. The affiliated Portfolios’sub-advisers and/or their affiliates may also contribute to the cost of expenses for sales meetings or seminar sponsorships that may relate to the contracts and/or thesub-advisers’ respective Portfolios. In addition, Equitable IMG, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, receives management fees and administrative fees in connection with the services it provides to the Portfolios. As such, it may be more profitable for us to offer affiliated Portfolios than to offer unaffiliated Portfolios.

The Company or the Distributors may directly or indirectly receive 12b-1 fees and additional payments from certain unaffiliated Portfolios, their advisers, sub-advisers, distributors or affiliates, for providing certain administrative, marketing, distribution and/or shareholder support services. These fees and payments range from 0% to 0.60% of the unaffiliated Portfolios’ average daily net assets. The Distributors may also receive payments from the advisers or sub-advisers of the unaffiliated Portfolios or their affiliates for certain distribution services, including expenses for sales meetings or seminar sponsorships that may relate to the contracts and/or the advisers’ respective Portfolios.

 

As a contractpolicy owner, you may bear the costs of some or all of these fees and payments through your indirect investment in the Portfolios. (See the Portfolios’ prospectuses for more information.) These fees and payments, as well as the Portfolios’ investment management fees and administrative expenses, will reduce the underlying Portfolios’ investment returns. The Company and/or its affiliates may profit from these fees and payments. The Company considers the availability of these fees and payment arrangements during the selection process for the underlying Portfolios. These fees and payment arrangements may create an incentive for us to select Portfolios (and classes of shares of Portfolios) that pay us higher amounts.

 

Some affiliated Portfolios invest in other affiliated Portfolios (the ”EQ Fund of Fund Portfolios”). The EQ Fund of Fund Portfolios offer policy owners a convenient opportunity to invest in other Portfolios that are managed and have been selected for inclusion in the EQ Fund of Fund Portfolios by Equitable IMG. Equitable Advisors, LLC, an affiliated broker-dealer of the Company, may promote the benefits of such Portfolios to policy owners and/or suggest that policy owners consider whether allocating some or all of their account value to such Portfolios is consistent with their desired investment objectives. In doing so, the Company, and/or its affiliates, may be subject to conflicts of interest insofar as the Company may derive greater revenues from the EQ Fund of Fund Portfolios than certain other Portfolios available to you under your policy. Please see “Allocating your contributions” later in this section for more information about your role in managing your allocations.

As described in more detail in the Portfolio prospectuses, the EQ Managed Volatility Portfolios may utilize a proprietary volatility management strategy developed by Equitable IMG (the “EQ volatility management strategy”) and, in addition, certain EQ Fund of Fund Portfolios may invest in affiliated Portfolios that utilize this strategy. The EQ volatility management strategy uses futures and options, such as exchange-traded futures and options contracts on securities indices, to reduce the Portfolio’s equity exposure during periods when certain market indicators indicate that market volatility is above specific thresholds set for the Portfolio. When market volatility is increasing above the specific thresholds set for a Portfolio utilizing the EQ volatility management strategy, the adviser of the Portfolio may reduce equity exposure. Although this strategy is intended to reduce the overall risk of investing in the Portfolio, it may not effectively protect the Portfolio from market declines and may increase its losses. Further, during such times, the Portfolio’s exposure to equity securities may be less than that of a traditional equity portfolio. This may limit the Portfolio’s participation in market gains and result in periods of underperformance, including those periods when the specified benchmark index is appreciating, but market volatility is high.

The EQ Managed Volatility Portfolios that include the EQ volatility management strategy as part of their investment objective and/or principal investment strategy, and the EQ Fund of Fund Portfolios that invest in other Portfolios that use the EQ volatility management strategy, are identified below in the chart by a ““ under the column entitled “Volatility Management.”

Portfolios that utilize the EQ volatility management strategy (or, in the case of certain EQ Fund of Fund Portfolios, invest in other Portfolios that use the EQ volatility management strategy) are designed to reduce the overall volatility of your account value and provide you with risk-adjusted returns over time. During rising markets, the EQ volatility management strategy, however, could result in your account value rising less than would have been the case had you been invested in a Portfolio that does not utilize the EQ volatility management strategy or, in the case of the EQ Fund of Fund Portfolios, that invest exclusively in other Portfolios that do not use the volatility management strategy. Conversely, investing in investment options that feature a managed-volatility strategy may be helpful in a declining market when high market volatility triggers a reduction in the investment option’s equity exposure because during these periods of high volatility, the risk of losses from investing in equity securities may increase. In these instances, your account value may decline less than would have been the case had you not been invested in investment options that feature a volatility management strategy.

Please see the underlying Portfolio prospectuses for more information in general, as well as more information about the EQ volatility management strategy. Please further note that certain other affiliated Portfolios, as well as unaffiliated Portfolios, may utilize volatility management techniques that

Asset Transfer Program.23


differ from the EQ volatility management strategy. Any such unaffiliated Portfolio is not identified under “Volatility Management” below in the chart. Such techniques could also impact your account value in the same manner described above. Please see the Portfolio prospectuses for more information about the Portfolios’ objective and strategies.

Portfolio allocations in certain of our variable annuity contracts with guaranteed benefits are subject to our Asset Transfer Program (ATP) feature. The ATP helps us manage our financial exposure in connection with providing certain guaranteed benefits, by using predetermined mathematical formulas to move account value between the EQ/Ultra Conservative Strategy Portfolio (an investment option utilized solely by the ATP) and the other Portfolios offered under those contracts. You should be aware that operation of the predetermined mathematical formulas underpinning the ATP has the potential to adversely impact the Portfolios, including their performance, risk profile and expenses. This means that Portfolio investments in contracts with no ATP feature, such as yours, could still be adversely impacted. Particularly during times of high market volatility, if the ATP triggers substantial asset flows into and out of a Portfolio, it could have the following effects on all contract owners invested in that Portfolio:

 

(a)

By requiring a Portfolio sub-adviser to buy and sell large amounts of securities at inopportune times, a Portfolio’s investment performance and the ability of the sub-adviser to fully implement the Portfolio’s investment strategy could be negatively affected; and

 

(b)

By generating higher turnover in its securities or other assets than it would have experienced without being impacted by the ATP, a Portfolio could incur higher operating expense ratios and transaction costs than comparable funds. In addition, even Portfolios structured as funds-of-funds that are not available for investment by contract owners who are subject to the ATP could also be impacted by the ATP if those Portfolios invest in underlying funds that are themselves subject to significant asset turnover caused by the ATP. Because the ATP formulas generate unique results for each contract, not all contract owners who are subject to the ATP will be affected by operation of the ATP in the same way. On any particular day on which the ATP is activated, some contract owners may have a portion of their account value transferred to the EQ/Ultra Conservative Strategy Portfolio investment option and others may not. If the ATP causes significant transfers of total account value out of one or more Portfolios, any resulting negative effect on the performance of those Portfolios will be experienced to a greater extent by a contract owner (with or without the ATP) invested in those Portfolios whose account value was not subject to the transfers.

 

Portfolios of the Trusts

EQ AdvisorsPremier VIP Trust(++)
(Class IB Shares)B Shares
Portfolio Name
  Objective  

Investment Adviser


(andSub-Adviser(s), as applicable)

Volatility
Management

EQ/CORE PLUS BOND(*)(1)

Seeks to achieve high total return through a combination of current income and capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

TARGET 2025 ALLOCATION

Seeks the highest total return over time consistent with its asset mix. Total return includes capital growth and income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

TARGET 2035 ALLOCATION

Seeks the highest total return over time consistent with its asset mix. Total return includes capital growth and income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

TARGET 2045 ALLOCATION

Seeks the highest total return over time consistent with its asset mix. Total return includes capital growth and income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

TARGET 2055 ALLOCATION

Seeks the highest total return over time consistent with its asset mix. Total return includes capital growth and income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ Advisors Trust
Class IB Shares

Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser
(andSub-Adviser(s), as applicable)
Volatility
Management

1290 VT CONVERTIBLE SECURITIES

Seeks a high level of total return.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Palisade Capital Management, L.L.C.

1290 VT DOUBLELINE DYNAMIC ALLOCATION

Seeks to achieve total return from long-term capital appreciation and income.

•  DoubleLine Capital LP

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

1290 VT DOUBLELINE OPPORTUNISTIC BOND

Seeks to maximize current income and

total return.

•  DoubleLine Capital LP

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

24


EQ Advisors Trust
Class IB Shares

Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser
(andSub-Adviser(s),as applicableapplicable)
Volatility
Management

1290 VT EQUITY INCOME

Seeks a combination of growth and

income to achieve an above-average and

consistent total return.

•  Barrow, Hanley, Mewhinney & Strauss LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

1290 VT GAMCO MERGERS & ACQUISITIONS

Seeks to achieve capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  GAMCO Asset Management, Inc.

1290 VT GAMCO SMALL COMPANY VALUE

Seeks to maximize capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  GAMCO Asset Management, Inc.

1290 VT SMALL CAP VALUE(**)(1)

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Horizon Kinetics Asset Management LLC

1290 VT SMARTBETA EQUITY

Seeks to achieve long-term capital

appreciation.

•  AXA Rosenberg Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

1290 VT SOCIALLY RESPONSIBLE

Seeks to achieve long-term capital appreciation.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/400 MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/500 MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/2000 MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/AB SMALL CAP GROWTH

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/ALL ASSET GROWTH(*)(2)

Seeks long-term capital appreciation and current income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/AMERICAN CENTURY MID CAP VALUE(**)(2)

Seeks to achieve long-term capital growth. Income is a secondary objective.

•  American Century Investment Management, Inc.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/BALANCED STRATEGY

Seeks long-term capital appreciation and current income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

25


EQ Advisors Trust
Class IB Shares

Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser
(andSub-Adviser(s), as applicable)
Volatility
Management

EQ/BLACKROCK BASIC VALUE EQUITY

Seeks to achieve capital appreciation and secondarily, income.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/CAPITAL GROUP RESEARCH(*)(3)(**)(3)

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital.

•  Capital International

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/CLEARBRIDGE LARGE CAP GROWTH

Seeks to achieve long-term capital growth.

•  ClearBridge Investments, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/COMMON STOCK INDEX

Seeks to achieve a total return before expenses that approximates the total return performance of the Russell 3000® Index, including reinvestment of dividends, at a risk level consistent with that of the Russell 3000® Index.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/CONSERVATIVE GROWTH STRATEGY

Seeks current income and growth of capital, with a greater emphasis on current income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/CONSERVATIVE STRATEGY

Seeks a high level of current income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/CORE BOND INDEX

  Seeks to achieve a total return before expenses that approximates the total return performance of the Bloomberg Barclays U.S. Intermediate Government/Credit Bond Index, including reinvestment of dividends, at a risk level consistent with that of the Bloomberg Barclays U.S. Intermediate Government/Credit Bond Index.  

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  SSgA Funds Management, Inc.

EQ/EQUITY 500 INDEX

  Seeks to achieve a total return before expenses that approximates the total return performance of the Standard & Poor’s 500 Composite Stock Index, including reinvestment of dividends, at a risk level consistent with that of the Standard & Poor’s 500 Composite Stock Index.  

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/FIDELITY INSTITUTIONAL AM® LARGE CAP

Seeks to achieve long-term capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  FIAM LLC

EQ/FRANKLIN RISING DIVIDENDS

Seeks to achieve long-term capital appreciation. Preservation of capital, while not a goal, is also an important consideration.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Franklin Advisers, Inc.

EQ/FRANKLIN STRATEGIC INCOME

Seeks a high level of current income. A secondary goal is long-term capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Franklin Mutual Advisers, LLC

26


EQ Advisors Trust
Class IB Shares

Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser
(andSub-Adviser(s), as applicable)
Volatility
Management

EQ/GLOBAL BOND PLUS

Seeks to achieve capital growth and current income.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Wells Capital Management, Inc.

•  Wells Fargo Asset Management (International) LLC and

EQ/GLOBAL EQUITY MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to achieve long-term capital appreciation with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Invesco Advisers, Inc.

•  Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.

EQ/GOLDMAN SACHS MID CAP VALUE

Seeks to achieve long-term capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.

EQ/GROWTH STRATEGY

Seeks long-term capital appreciation and current income, with a greater emphasis on capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/INTERMEDIATE GOVERNMENT BOND

Seeks to achieve a total return before expenses that approximates the total return performance of the Bloomberg Barclays U.S. Intermediate Government Bond Index, including reinvestment of dividends, at a risk level consistent with that of the Bloomberg Barclays U.S. Intermediate Government Bond Index.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  SSgA Funds Management, Inc.

EQ/INTERNATIONAL CORE MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  EARNEST Partners, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Federated Global Investment Management Corp.

•  Massachusetts Financial Services Company d/b/a MFS Investment Management

EQ/INTERNATIONAL EQUITY INDEX

Seeks to achieve a total return (before expenses) that approximates the total return performance of a composite index comprised of 40% DJ Euro STOXX 50 Index, 25% FTSE 100 Index, 25% TOPIX Index, and 10% S&P/ASX 200 Index, including reinvestment of dividends, at a risk level consistent with that of the composite index.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/INTERNATIONAL MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

27


EQ Advisors Trust
Class IB Shares

Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser
(andSub-Adviser(s), as applicable)
Volatility
Management

EQ/INTERNATIONAL VALUE MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to provide current income and long-term growth of income, accompanied by growth of capital with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Harris Associates L.P.

EQ/INVESCO COMSTOCK

Seeks to achieve capital growth and income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Invesco Advisers, Inc.

EQ/INVESCO GLOBAL REAL ESTATE

Seeks to achieve total return through growth of capital and current income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Invesco Advisers, Inc.

EQ/INVESCO INTERNATIONAL GROWTH

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Invesco Advisers, Inc.

EQ/JANUS ENTERPRISE(**)(4)

Seeks to achieve capital growth.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Janus Capital Management LLC

EQ/JPMORGAN VALUE OPPORTUNITIES

Seeks to achieve long-term capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.

EQ/LARGE CAP CORE MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Capital International

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Thornburg Investment Management, Inc.

•  Vaughan Nelson Investment Management

EQ/LARGE CAP GROWTH INDEX

Seeks to achieve a total return before expenses that approximates the total return performance of the Russell 1000® Growth Index, including reinvestment of dividends at a risk level consistent with the Russell 1000® Growth Index.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/LARGE CAP GROWTH MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to provide long-term capital growth with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  HS Management Partners, LLC

•  Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P.

•  Polen Capital Management, LLC

•  T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.

EQ/LARGE CAP VALUE INDEX

Seeks to achieve a total return before expenses that approximates the total return performance of the Russell 1000® Value Index, including reinvestment of dividends, at a risk level consistent with that of the Russell 1000® Value Index.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

28


EQ Advisors Trust
Class IB Shares

Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser
(andSub-Adviser(s), as applicable)
Volatility
Management

EQ/LARGE CAP VALUE MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital with an emphasis on risk-adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Massachusetts Financial Services Company d/b/a MFS Investment Management

EQ/LAZARD EMERGING MARKETS EQUITY

Seeks to achieve long-term capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Lazard Asset Management LLC

EQ/LOOMIS SAYLES GROWTH

Seeks to achieve capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Loomis, Sayles & Company, L.P.

EQ/MFS INTERNATIONAL GROWTH

Seeks to achieve capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Massachusetts Financial Services Company d/b/a MFS Investment Management

EQ/MFS MID CAP FOCUSED GROWTH

Seeks to provide growth of capital.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Massachusetts Financial Services Company d/b/a MFS Investment Management

EQ/MFS TECHNOLOGY II

Seeks to provide growth of capital.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Massachusetts Financial Services Company d/b/a MFS Investment Management

EQ/MFS® INTERNATIONAL INTRINSIC VALUE(*)(4)

Seeks to achieve capital appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Massachusetts Financial Services Company d/b/a MFS Investment Management

EQ/MID CAP INDEX

Seeks to achieve a total return before expenses that approximates the total return performance of the Standard & Poor’s MidCap 400® Index, including reinvestment of dividends, at a risk level consistent with that of the Standard & Poor’s MidCap 400® Index.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/MID CAP VALUE MANAGED VOLATILITY

Seeks to achieve long-term capital appreciation with an emphasis on risk adjusted returns and managing volatility in the Portfolio.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Diamond Hill Capital Management, Inc.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Wellington Management Company, LLP

EQ/MODERATE GROWTH STRATEGY

Seeks long-term capital appreciation and current income, with a greater emphasis on current income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

29


EQ Advisors Trust
Class IB Shares

Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser
(andSub-Adviser(s), as applicable)
Volatility
Management

EQ/MONEY MARKET(1)(+)

  Seeks to obtain a high level of current income, preserve its assets and maintain liquidity.  

•  BNY Mellon Investment Adviser, Inc.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/MORGAN STANLEY SMALL CAP GROWTH(**)(5)

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital.

•  BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.

EQ/PIMCO REAL RETURN

Seeks to achieve maximum real return, consistent with preservation of capital and prudent investment management.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

EQ/PIMCO TOTAL RETURN

Seeks to achieve maximum total return, consistent with preservation of capital and prudent investment management.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

EQ/PIMCO ULTRA SHORT BOND

Seeks to generate a return in excess of traditional money market products while maintaining an emphasis on preservation of capital and liquidity.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

EQ/QUALITY BOND PLUS

Seeks to achieve high current income consistent with moderate risk to capital.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

EQ/SMALL COMPANY INDEX

Seeks to replicate as closely as possible (before expenses) the total return of the Russell 2000® Index.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

EQ/T. ROWE PRICE GROWTH STOCK

Seeks to achieve long-term capital appreciation and secondarily, income.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.

EQ/WELLINGTON ENERGY

Seeks to provide capital growth and appreciation.

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

• Wellington Management Company LLP

MULTIMANAGER AGGRESSIVE EQUITY

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital.

•  1832 Asset Management U.S. Inc.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  ClearBridge Investments, LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.

•  Westfield Capital Management Company, L.P.

30


EQ Advisors Trust
Class IB Shares

Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser
(andSub-Adviser(s), as applicable)
Volatility
Management

MULTIMANAGER CORE BOND

Seeks to achieve a balance of high current income and capital appreciation, consistent with a prudent level of risk.

•  BlackRock Financial Management, Inc.

•  DoubleLine Capital LP

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

•  SSgA Funds Management, Inc.

MULTIMANAGER TECHNOLOGY

Seeks to achieve long-term growth of capital.

•  AllianceBernstein L.P.

•  Allianz Global Investors U.S. LLC

•  Equitable Investment Management Group, LLC

•  Wellington Management Company, LLP

(1)
AIM Variable Insurance Funds
(Invesco Variable Insurance
Funds) — Series II
Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser (and
Sub-Adviser(s), as applicable)

INVESCO V.I. MID CAP CORE EQUITY FUND

The fund’s investment objective is long-term growth of capital.

• Invesco Advisers, Inc.

INVESCO V.I. SMALL CAP EQUITY FUND

The fund’s investment objective is long-term growth of capital.

•  Invesco Advisers, Inc.

American Funds Insurance Series®
Portfolio Name — Class 4 Shares
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser (and
Sub-Adviser(s), as applicable)

GLOBAL SMALL CAPITALIZATION FUND

The fund’s investment objective is to provide long-term growth of capital.

•  Capital Research and Management Company

NEW WORLD FUND®

The fund’s investment objective is long-term capital appreciation.

•  Capital Research and Management Company

Fidelity® Variable Insurance
Products (VIP) – Service Class 2
Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser (and
Sub-Adviser(s), as applicable)

FIDELITY® VIP GROWTH & INCOME PORTFOLIO

Seeks high total return through a combination of current income and capital appreciation.

• Fidelity Management and Research Company (FMR)

FIDELITY® VIP MID CAP PORTFOLIO

Seeks long-term growth of capital.

• Fidelity Management & Research Company (FMR)

Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance
Products Trust — Class 2

Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser (and Sub-
Adviser(s), as applicable)

FRANKLIN MUTUAL SHARES VIP FUND

Seeks capital appreciation. Its secondary goal is income.

• Franklin Mutual Advisers, LLC

FRANKLIN SMALL CAP VALUE VIP FUND

Seeks long-term total return.

• Franklin Mutual Advisers, LLC

TEMPLETON DEVELOPING MARKETS VIP FUND

Seeks long-term capital appreciation.

• Templeton Asset Management Ltd.

TEMPLETON GLOBAL BOND VIP FUND

Seeks high current income, consistent with preservation of capital. Capital appreciation is a secondary consideration.

• Franklin Advisers, Inc.

TEMPLETON GROWTH VIP FUND

Seeks long-term capital growth.

•  Templeton Global Advisors Limited

Ivy Variable Insurance
Portfolios
Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser (and Sub-
Adviser(s), as applicable)

IVY VIP HIGH INCOME

To seek to provide total return through a combination of high current income and capital appreciation.

• Ivy Investment Management Company (IICO)

IVY VIP SMALL CAP GROWTH

To seek to provide growth of capital.

•  Ivy Investment Management Company (IICO)

31


MFS® Variable Insurance Trusts —
Service Class
Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser (and Sub-
Adviser(s), as applicable)

MFS® INVESTORS TRUST SERIES

The fund’s investment objective is to seek capital appreciation.

• Massachusetts Financial Services Company

MFS® MASSACHUSETTS INVESTORS GROWTH STOCK PORTFOLIO

The fund’s investment objective is to seek capital appreciation.

• Massachusetts Financial Services Company

PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust —
Advisor Class
Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser (and Sub-
Adviser(s), as applicable)

PIMCO COMMODITYREALRETURN® STRATEGY PORTFOLIO

Seeks maximum real return consistent with prudent investment management.

• Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

T. Rowe Price Equity Series, Inc.
Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser (and
Sub-Adviser(s), as applicable)

T. ROWE PRICE EQUITY INCOME PORTFOLIO- II

Seeks a high level of dividend income and long-term capital growth primarily through investments in stocks.

• T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.

VanEck VIP Trust —
Service Class
Portfolio Name
ObjectiveInvestment Adviser (and Sub-
Adviser(s), as applicable)

VANECK VIP GLOBAL HARD ASSETS FUND

Seeks long-term capital appreciation by investing primarily in hard asset securities. Income is a secondary consideration.

• Van Eck Associates Corporation

(+)

The Portfolio operates as a “government money market fund.” The Portfolio will invest at least 99.5% of its total assets in U.S. government securities, cash, and/or repurchase agreements that are fully collateralized by U.S. government securities or cash.

(++)

Formerly known as AXA Premier VIP Trust.

(*)

This information reflects the variable investment option’s name. The chart below reflects the variable investment option’s former name which may continue to be used in certain documents for a period of time after the date of this prospectus. The number in the “FN” column corresponds with the number contained in the table above.

FNVariable Investment Option Name

(1)

Charter Multi-Sector Bond

(2)

All Asset Growth-Alt 20

(3)

EQ/Capital Guardian Research

(4)

EQ/MFS International Value
(**)

This information reflects the merger of variable investment options. The chart below reflects the acquired variable investment which may continue to be used in certain documents for a period of time after the date of this prospectus, and the acquiring variable investment option. The number in the “FN” column corresponds with the number contained in the table above.

FNAcquired Variable Investment OptionAcquiring Variable Investment Option

(1)

Charter Small Cap Value1290 VT Small Cap Value

(2)

Multimanager Mid Cap ValueEQ/American Century Mid Cap Value

(3)

EQ/USB Growth & IncomeEQ/Capital Group Research

(4)

Multimanager Mid Cap GrowthEQ/Janus Enterprise

(5)

Charter Small Cap GrowthEQ/Morgan Stanley Small Cap Growth

 

You should consider the investment objectives, risks, and charges and expenses of the portfoliosPortfolios carefully before investing. The prospectuses for the TrustTrusts contain this and other important information about the portfolios.Portfolios. The prospectuses should be read carefully before investing. In order to obtain copies of the Trust prospectuses that do not accompany this Prospectus,prospectus, you may call one of our customer service representatives at1-877-899-3743.1-800-777-6510 (for U.S. residents) or 1-704-341-7000 (outside of the U.S.).

 

2732


Structured Investment5. About the Market Stabilizer Option® (applicable only if allocating amounts to the MSO)

 

The Structured Investment

We offer a Market Stabilizer Option consists of a number of Segment Types, each of which® that provides a rate of return tied to the performance of a specified Securities Index or exchange-traded fund. You generally have the opportunity to invest in any of the Segment Types described below, subject to the requirements, limitations and procedures disclosed in this section. You participate in the performance of an Index by investing in the corresponding Segment. Investments in Segments are not investments in underlying mutual funds; Segments are not “index funds.”

Segment Types

You can invest in Standard Segment Types, Annual Lock Segment Types and Choice Segment Types. Not all Segment Types (or Segments) are available for each Series. We are not obligated to offer any one particular Segment Type. Also, we are not obligated to offer any Segment Types. Each investment in a Segment Type that starts on a particular Segment Start Date is referred to as a Segment.

A Segment Type refers to a Segment Option that have the same Index, Segment Duration, and Segment Buffer. Each Segment Type has a corresponding Segment Type Holding Account. Please refer to the “Definitions of key terms” section earlier in this Prospectus for a discussion of these terms.

Annual Lock Segments have a 5-year Segment Duration.

Choice Segments provide you access to higher Performance Cap Rates and potentially greater Segment Rates of Return than comparable Standard Segments. Each Choice Segment Type has an associated Choice cost. Choice Segments have a 5-year Segment Duration.

The following chart lists the current Standard Segment Types:

IndexSegment DurationSegment Buffer
S&P 500 Price Return Index1 year-10%
Russell 2000® Price Return Index1 year-10%
MSCI EAFE Price Return Index1 year-10%
NASDAQ-100 Price Return Index1 year-10%
MSCI Emerging Markets Price Return Index1 year-10%
iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund1 year-10%
Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund1 year-10%
Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund1 year-10%
SPDR® Gold Shares1 year-10%
S&P 500 Price Return Index3 year-10%; -20%
IndexSegment DurationSegment Buffer
Russell 2000® Price Return Index3 year-10%; -20%
MSCI EAFE Price Return Index3 year-10%
S&P 500 Price Return Index5 year-10%; -20%; -30%
Russell 2000® Price Return Index5 year-10%; -20%; -30%
MSCI EAFE Price Return Index*5 year-10%; -20%; -30%
*

Not available for Series C and Series ADV.

The following chart lists the current Annual Lock Segment Types:

IndexSegment DurationAnnual Buffer
S&P 500 Price Return Index Annual Lock*5 year-10%
Russell 2000® Price Return Index Annual Lock*5 year-10%
iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF Annual Lock*5 year-10%
*

Not available for Series C and Series ADV.

The following chart lists the current Choice Segment Types:

IndexSegment DurationSegment Buffer
Choice S&P 500 Price Return Index*5 year-10%; -15%; -25%
Choice Russell 2000® Price Return Index*5 year-10%; -15%; -25%
*

Not available for Series C and Series ADV.

On a Segment Maturity Date, the highest level of protection is the-30% Segment Buffer (for Choice Segments, the -25% Segment Buffer) and lowest level of protection is the-10% Segment Buffer.

The Indices are described in more detail below, under the heading “Indices.”

Standard Segment example:  For the S&P 500 Price Return Index/5 year/-20%Index.

Definitions

Charge Reserve Amount — A minimum amount of policy account value in the Unloaned GIO that you are required to maintain in order to approximately cover the estimated monthly charges for the policy (including, but not limited to, the policy’s monthly cost of insurance charge, the policy’s monthly administrative charge, the policy’s monthly mortality and expense risk charge, the MSO’s monthly Variable Index Segment Type,Account Charge and any monthly optional rider charges) during the Segment Term. The Charge Reserve Amount will be determined on each Segment Start Date as an amount projected to be sufficient to cover all of the policy’s monthly deductions during the Segment Term, assuming at the time such calculation is made that no interest or investment performance is credited to or charged against the policy account and that no policy changes or additional premium payments are made. The Charge Reserve Amount will be reduced by each subsequent monthly deduction (but not to less than zero).There is no requirement to maintain a Charge Reserve Amount if you are not in a Segment.Please see “Segments” later in this section for more information about the investment options from which account value could be transferred to the Unloaned GIO on a Segment could be establishedStart Date (or the effective date of a requested face amount increase) in order to meet this requirement.

Downside Protection (also referred to in your policy as S&P 500 Price Return Index/5 year/-20% with a 30% Performance Cap Rate declared on the Segment Start Date.“Segment Loss Absorption Threshold Rate”) This means that you will participate in theis your protection against negative performance of the S&P 500 Price Return Indexindex for five years starting froma Segment held until its Segment Maturity Date. It is currently-25%.The Downside Protection is set on the Segment Start Date. If the Index performs positively during this period, your Segment RateDate and any Downside Protection in excess of Return could be as much as 30% for that Segment Duration. If the Index performs negatively during this period, at maturity you-25%, will be protected fromset at the first 20%Company’s sole discretion.However, the Downside Protection will not change during a Segment Term and at least-25% of the Index’s decline. If the Index performanceDownside Protection will always be provided when a Segment is between -20% and 0%, your Segment Maturity Value onheld until the Segment Maturity Date willDate.

Early Distribution Adjustment (“EDA,” may also be equalreferred to in your policy as the “Market Value Adjustment”) — The EDA is an adjustment that we make to your Segment Investment.Account Value, before a Segment matures, in the event you surrender your policy, take a loan from a Segment or if we should find it necessary to make deductions for monthly charges or any other distribution from a Segment. (Such other distributions would include any distributions from the policy that we deem necessary to continue to qualify the policy as life insurance under applicable tax law, any unpaid loan interest, or any transfer in connection with the exercise of a rider available under your policy.) An EDA that is made will cause you to lose principal, through the application of a Put Option Factor, and that loss could be substantial. However, because of a pro rata refund of certain charges already paid that is included in the EDA , the net effect of the EDA will not always result in the reduction of principal. The EDA will usually result in a reduction in your Segment Account

Value and your other policy values. Therefore, you should give careful consideration before taking any early loan or surrender, or allowing the value in your other investment options to fall so low that we must make any monthly deduction from a Segment. Please see “Early Distribution Adjustment” later in this section for more information.

 

Annual Lock Segment exampleGrowth Cap Rate:  For the S&P 500 Price Return Index Annual Lock/5 year annual lock/-10% Segment Type, — The maximum rate of return that will be applied to a Segment could be established as S&P 500 Price Return Index Annual Lock/5 year annual lock/-10% with a9% PerformanceAccount Value.The Growth Cap Rate declaredis set for each Segment on the Segment Start Date. This means that youWhile the Growth Cap Rate is set at the Company’s sole discretion,the Growth Cap Rate will participate innot change during a Segment Term and the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return Index for 5 one-year periodsGrowth Cap Rate will always be at least 6%.

 

28


starting from the Segment Start Date. If the Index performs positively during an Annual Lock Period, your Rate of Return could be as much as9% for that Annual Lock Period. If the Index performs negatively during an Annual Lock Period, at that Annual Lock Anniversary you will be protected from the first 10% of the Index’s decline. If the Index performance is between-10% and 0% for that Annual Lock Period, your Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on that Annual Lock Anniversary will be equal to the Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount (or Segment Investment for the first Annual Lock Period).

Choice Segment example:  For the Choice S&P 500 Price Return Index/5 year/-10% Segment Type, a Segment could be established as Choice S&P 500 Price Return Index/5 year/-10% with a 65% Performance Cap Rate declared on the Segment Start Date. This means that you will participate in the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return Index for five years starting from the Segment Start Date. If the Index performs positively during this period, your Segment Rate of Return could be as much as 60% for that Segment Duration (65% less the 5% Choice cost). If the Index performs negatively during this period, at maturity you will be protected from the first 10% of the Index’s decline. If the Index performance is between -10% and 0%, your Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date will be equal to your Segment Investment. Similarly, if the Index performance is between 0% and 5%, then, after deduction of the Choice cost, your Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date will be equal to your Segment Investment.

Please note the following:

Standard Segment Types with greater protection tend to have lower Performance Cap Rates than other Standard Segment Types that use the same Index and duration but provide less protection.

Choice Segment Types with greater protection tend to have lower Performance Cap Rates than other Choice Segment Types that use the same Index and duration but provide less protection.

Choice Segments are subject to deduction of the Choice cost. As a result, the Segment Rate of Return for a Choice Segment will always be less than (a) the Performance Cap Rate and (b) the Index Performance Rate, if positive, for that Segment.

Depending on market performance, it is possible that the Segment Rate of Return for a Standard Segment may be higher than that for a Choice Segment that uses the same Index, duration and Segment Buffer. This will occur if the Index Performance Rate applicable to these Segments does not exceed the Performance Cap Rate set for the Standard Segment by more than the Choice cost.

Deduction of the Choice cost on the Segment Maturity Date for a Choice Segment will never cause you to lose principal. If the Index Performance Rate for a Choice Segment is positive but less than the applicable Choice cost, the amount of the Choice cost deducted will not cause your Segment Maturity Value to be less than your Segment Investment.

If, on a Segment Start Date, we determine that the Performance Cap Rate for a Choice Segment will not exceed the Performance Cap Rate for a comparable Standard Segment (i.e., with the same Index, Segment Duration, Segment Buffer and Segment Start Date) by an amount that is at least equal to the Choice cost, we will waive the Choice cost and declare a Performance Cap Rate for the Choice Segment that is equal to the Performance Cap Rate for the Standard Segment.

Both the Performance Cap Rate and the Segment Rate of Return are rates of return from the Segment Start Date to the Segment Maturity Date (or from the Segment Start Date to the first Annual Lock Anniversary and thereafter from each Annual Lock Anniversary to the next for Annual Lock Segments), NOT annual rates of return, even if the Segment Duration is longer than one year. Therefore the Index Performance Rate and the Performance Cap Threshold are also not annual rates.The performance of the Index, the Performance Cap Rate and the Segment Buffer are all measured from the Segment Start Date to the Segment Maturity Date (or from the Segment Start Date to the first Annual Lock Anniversary and thereafter from each Annual Lock Anniversary to the next for Annual Lock Segments), and the Performance Cap Rate and Segment Buffer apply if you hold the Segment until the Segment Maturity Date (or from the Segment Start Date to the first Annual Lock Anniversary and thereafter from each Annual Lock Anniversary to the next for Annual Lock Segments). If you surrender or cancel your contract, die or make a withdrawal from a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date, the Segment Buffer will not necessarily apply to the extent it would on the Segment Maturity Date (or Annual Lock Anniversary for Annual Lock Segments), and any upside performance will be limited to a percentage lower than the Performance Cap Rate. Please see “Your contract’s value in the Structured Investment Option” in “Determining your contract’s value” later in this Prospectus. A partial withdrawal from a Segment does not affect the Performance Cap Rate and Segment Buffer that apply to any remaining amounts that are held in the Segment through the Segment Maturity Date (or from the Segment Start Date to the first Annual Lock Anniversary and thereafter from each Annual Lock Anniversary to the next for Annual Lock Segments).

We reserve the right to offer any or all Segment Types more or less frequently or to stop offering any or all of them or to suspend offering any or all of them temporarily for some or all contracts or Series. Please see “Suspension, termination and changes to Segment Types” later in this section. All Segment Types may not be available in all states. We may also add Segment Types in the future.

Indices

Each Segment Type references an Index that determines the performance of its associated Segments. We currently offer Segment Types based on the performance of (1) securities indices or (2) exchange-traded funds. Throughout this Prospectus, we refer to these indices and exchange-traded funds using the term “Index” or, collectively, “Indices.” Not all Indices may be available under your contract. Please see “Appendix II: State contract availability and/or variations of certain features and benefits” later in this Prospectus.

29


Securities Indices.  The following Securities Indices are currently available:

S&P 500 Price Return Index. The S&P 500 Price Return Index was established by Standard & Poor’s. Theindex, which is the S&P 500 Price Return Indexindex excluding dividends. This index includes 500 leading companies in leading industries ofin the U.S. economy, capturing 75% coverage of U.S. equities. The S&P 500 Price Return Index does not include dividends declared by any of the companies included in this Index.

Russell 2000® Price Return Index. The Russell 2000® Price Return Index was established by Russell Investments. The Russell 2000® Price Return Index measures the performance of thesmall-cap segment of the U.S. equity universe. The Russell 2000® Price Return Index is a subset of the Russell 3000® Index representing approximately 10% of the total market capitalization of that index. It includes approximately 2,000 of the smallest securities based on a combination of their market cap and current index membership. The Russell 2000® Price Return Index does not include dividends declared by any of the companies included in this Index.

MSCI EAFE Price Return Index.  The MSCI EAFE Price Return Index was established by MSCI. The MSCI EAFE Price Return Index is a free float-adjusted market capitalization index that is designed to measure the equity market performance of developed markets, excluding the US and Canada. As of the date of this Prospectus the MSCI EAFE Price Return Index consisted of the following 22 developed market country indices: Australia, Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hong Kong, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Japan, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and the United Kingdom. The MSCI EAFE Price Return Index does not include dividends declared by any of the companies included in this Index.

MSCI Emerging Markets Price Return Index.  The MSCI Emerging Markets Price Return Index was established by MSCI. The MSCI Emerging Markets Price Return Index is a free float-adjusted market capitalization index that is designed to measure equity market performance of emerging markets. As of the date of this prospectus, the MSCI Emerging Markets Price Return Index consists of the following 21 emerging market country indices: Brazil, Chile, China, Colombia, Czech Republic, Egypt, Hungary, India, Indonesia, Korea, Malaysia, Mexico, Morocco, Peru, Philippines, Poland, Russia, South Africa, Taiwan, Thailand, and Turkey. The MSCI Emerging Markets Price Return Index does not include dividends declared by any of the companies included in this Index.

NASDAQ-100Price ReturnIndex.  The NASDAQ-100 Price Return Index (the “NASDAQ-100 Index”) includes securities of 100 of the largest domestic and international non-financial securities listed on The NASDAQ Stock Market based on market capitalization. The Index reflects companies across major industry groups including computer hardware and software, telecommunications, retail/wholesale trade and biotechnology. It does not contain securities of financial companies including investment companies. The NASDAQ-100 Price Return Index does not include dividends declared by any of the companies included in this Index.economy.

 

Exchange-Traded FundsIndex Performance Rate. The following exchange-traded funds are currently available:Index Performance Rate measures the percentage change in the Index during a Segment Term for each Segment. If the Index is discontinued or if the calculation of the Index is substantially changed, we reserve the right to substitute an alternative index. We also reserve the right to choose an alternative index at our discretion. Please see “Change in Index” for more information.

 

iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real EstateThe Index Fund.Performance Rate is calculated by ((b) divided by (a)) minus one, where:

(a)

is the value of the Index at the close of business on the Segment Start Date, and

(b)

is the value of the Index at the close of business on the Segment Maturity Date.

We determine the value of the Index at the close of business, which is the end of a business day. Generally, a business day is any day the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading. If the New York Stock Exchange is not open for trading or if the Index value is, for any other reason, not published on the Segment Start Date or a Segment Maturity Date, the value of the Index will be determined as of the end of the most recent preceding business day for which the Index value is published.

Index-Linked Rate of Return The iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estaterate of return we apply to calculate the Index-Linked Return which is based on the Index Fund seeks investment results that correspond generallyPerformance Rate adjusted to reflect the Growth Cap Rate and protection against negative performance. Therefore, if the performance of the Dow Jones U.S. Real

Estate Index which is zero or positive, we will apply that performance up to the underlying index. The underlying index measuresGrowth Cap Rate. If the performance of the Real Estate industry of the U.S. equity market, including real estate holding and developing and real estate investment trusts (REITS) subsectors. The iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund is an exchange-traded fund. Thenegative, we will apply performance of zero unless the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund may not replicate the performance of, and may underperform the underlying index. The price of the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund will reflect expenses and fees that will reduce its relative performance. Moreover, it is also possible that the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund may not fully replicate or may,decline in certain circumstances, diverge significantly from the performance of the underlying index. BecauseIndex is below-25% in which case negative performance in excess of-25% will apply. Please see the return on your Segment Investment (subject to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund and not the underlying index, the return on your Segment Investment may be less than that of an alternative investment linked directly to the underlying index or the components of the underlying index. The investment performance of the iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Segment is only based on the closing share price of the Index Fund. The iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Segment does not include dividends and other distributions declared by the Index Fund.chart under “Index-Linked Return” for more information.

 

Financial Select Sector SPDRIndex-Linked Return® Fund. The Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund seeks to closely match the returns and characteristics of the Financial Select Sector Index, whichamount that is the underlying index. The underlying index seeks to provide an effective representation of the financial sector of the S&P 500 Index, and includes companies from the following industries: banks, insurance, capital markets, diversified financial services, consumer finance, thrifts and mortgage finance, and mortgage real estate investment trusts. Because the return on your Segment Investment (subjectapplied to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund and not the underlying index, the return on your Segment Investment may be less than that of an alternative investment linked directly to the underlying index or the components of the underlying index. The investment performance of the Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund Segment is only basedAccount Value on the closing share priceSegment Maturity Date that is equal to that Segment’s Index-Linked Rate of the Fund. The Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund Segment does not include dividends and other distributions declaredReturn multiplied by the Fund.

Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund.  The Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund seeks to provide investment results that, before expenses, correspond generally to the price and yield performance of publicly traded equity securities of companies in the Energy Select Sector Index, which is the underlying index. The Energy Select Sector Index includes companies from the following industries: oil, gas and consumable fuels and energy equipment and services. The price of the Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund will reflect expenses and fees that will reduce its relative performance. Because the return on your Segment Investment (subject to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund and not the underlying index, the return on your Segment Investment may be less than that of an alternative investment linked directly to the underlying index or the components of the underlying index. The investment performance of the Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund Segment is only basedAccount Value on the closing share price of the Fund.Segment Maturity Date. The Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund Segment does not include dividends and other distributions declared by the Fund.Index-Linked

 

 

3033


SPDR® Gold Shares.  The SPDR® Gold Shares seek to reflect the performance of the price of gold bullion, less the expenses of the trust’s operations. The value of the gold held by the trust will be determined based on the London Bullion Market Association (LBMA) Gold Price PM USD. The price of the SPDR® Gold Shares will reflect expenses and fees that will reduce its relative performance. The amount of gold represented by the SPDR® Gold Shares will continue to be reduced during the life of the trust due to the sales of gold necessary to pay the trust’s expenses irrespective of whether the trading price of the SPDR® Gold Shares rises or falls in response to changes in the price of gold. Assuming a constant gold price, the trading price of the SPDR® Gold Shares is expected to gradually decline relative to the price of gold as the amount of gold represented by the SPDR® Gold Shares gradually declines. Because the return on your Segment Investment (subject to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the SPDR® Gold Shares and not the performance of the price of gold, the return on your Segment InvestmentReturn may be less thanpositive, negative or zero. In the event that the S&P 500 Price Return index sustains a 100% loss, the maximum loss of an alternative investment linked directly to the performance of the price of gold.principal would be 75%. The investment and trading activities of hedge funds and commodity funds may affect the price of gold. The investment performance of the SPDR® Gold Shares SegmentIndexed-Linked Return is only based onapplied to amounts that remain in a Segment Account Value until the closing share priceSegment Maturity Date. For example, a surrender of the Shares. The SPDR® Gold Sharesyour policy before Segment does not include dividendsmaturity will eliminate any Index-Linked Return and other distributions declared by the Shares.

iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF.  The iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF seeks investment results that correspond generallybe subject to the performance of the MSCI EAFE Index, which is the underlying index. The underlying index is composed of large and mid-capitalization developed market equities, including Europe, Australasia and the Far East and excluding the United States and Canada. The iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF is an exchange-traded fund. The performance of the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF may not replicate the performance of, and may underperform the underlying index. The price of the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF will reflect expenses and fees that will reduce its relative performance. Moreover, it is also possible that the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF may not fully replicate or may, in certain circumstances, diverge significantly from the performance of the underlying index. Because the return on your Segment Investment (subject to the Performance Cap and downside Segment Buffer protection) is linked to the performance of the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF and not the underlying index, the return on your Segment Investment may be less than that of an alternative investment linked directly to the underlying index or the components of the underlying index. The investment performance of the iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF Segment is only based on the closing share price of the Index Fund. The iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF Segment does not include dividends and other distributions declared by the Index Fund.

Please see Appendix IV later in this Prospectus for important information regarding the publishers of the Indices.Early Distribution Adjustment.

 

Initial Segment TypeAccount — The amount initially transferred to a Segment from the MSO Holding AccountsAccount on its Segment Start Date, net of:

 

(a)

the Variable Index Benefit Charge (see “Charges” later in this section)

Any contribution or transfer designated for

and

(b)

the amount, if any, that may have been transferred from the MSO Holding Account to the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount (see “Charge Reserve Amount” later in this section). Such a transfer would be made from the MSO Holding Account to cover the Charge Reserve Amount only (1) if you have given us instructions to make such a transfer or (2) in the other limited circumstances described under “Segments” later in this section.

MSO Holding Account — This is a Segment Type will be allocated to the corresponding Segment Type Holding Account until the Segment Start Date. The Segment Type Holding Accounts are partportion of the EQ/Money Market variable investment option that holds amounts designated by the policy owner for investment in the MSO prior to any transfer into the next available new Segment.

Segment — The portion of your total investment in the MSO that is associated with a specific Segment Start Date. You create a new Segment each time an amount is transferred from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment Account.

Segment Account Value (also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Account”) — The amount of an Initial Segment Account subsequently reduced by any monthly deductions, policy loans and unpaid loan interest, and distributions from the policy that we deem necessary to continue to qualify the policy as life insurance under applicable tax law, which are allocated to the Segment. Any such reduction in the Segment Account Value prior to its Segment Maturity Date will result in a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment, which will cause you to lose principal, and that loss could be substantial. The Segment Account Value is used in determining policy account values, death benefits, and the net amount at risk for monthly cost of insurance calculations of the policy and the new base policy face amount associated with a requested change in death benefit option.

For example, if you put $1,000 into the MSO Holding Account, $992.50 would go into a Segment. This amount represents the Initial Segment Account. The Segment Account Value represents the value in the Segment which gets reduced by any deductions allocated to the Segment, with corresponding EDAs, through the course of the Segment Term. The Segment Distribution Value represents what you would receive upon surrendering the policy and reflects the EDA upon surrender.

Segment Distribution Value (also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Value”) — This is the Segment Account Value minus the Early Distribution Adjustment that would apply on a full surrender of that Segment at any time prior to the Segment Maturity Date. Segment Distribution Values will be used in determining policy value available to cover monthly deductions, proportionate surrender

charges for requested face amount reductions, and other distributions; cash surrender values and maximum loan values subject to any applicable base policy surrender charge. They will also be used in determining whether any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest exceeds the policy account value.

Segment Maturity GIO Limitation A specified percentage limitation on the amount of your Segment Maturity Value that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. The Company reserves the right to implement a specified percentage limitation on the amount of your Segment TypeMaturity Value that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. The specified percentage limitation can be changed at any time, but it will never be less than 5% of your Segment Maturity Value. We will transfer any portion of your Segment Maturity Value that is allocated to the guaranteed interest option in excess of the Segment Maturity GIO Limitation to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option unless we receive your instructions prior to the Segment Maturity Date that the Segment Maturity Value should be allocated to the MSO Holding Accounts haveAccount or to any other available variable investment option. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

Segment Maturity Date — The date on which a Segment Term is completed and the Index-Linked Return for that Segment is applied to a Segment Account Value.

Segment Maturity Value — This is the Segment Account Value adjusted by the Index-Linked Return for that Segment.

Segment Start Date — The Segment Start Date is the day on which a Segment is created.

Segment Term — The duration of a Segment. The Segment Term for each Segment begins on its Segment Start Date and ends on its Segment Maturity Date one year later. We are currently only offering Segment Terms of approximately one year. We may offer different durations in the future.

Description of the Market Stabilizer Option®

MSO Holding Account

The amount of each transfer or loan repayment you make to the MSO, and the balance of each premium payment you make to the MSO after any premium charge under your base policy has been deducted, will first be placed in the MSO Holding Account. The MSO Holding Account is a portion of the regular EQ/Money Market variable investment option that will hold amounts allocated to the MSO until the next available Segment Start Date. The MSO Holding Account has the same rate of return as the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. You must transferWe currently plan on offering new Segments on a monthly basis but reserve the right to offer them less frequently or contribute to thestop offering them or to suspend offering them temporarily.

Before any account value is transferred into a Segment, Type Holding Account for the corresponding Segment Type if you want to invest in a Segment; you cannot transfer or contribute directly to a Segment.

You can transfer amounts from a Segment Typethe MSO Holding Account into other investment options available under your policy at any time subject to any transfer restrictions within your policy. You can transfer into and out of the variable investment options, or another Segment TypeMSO Holding Account at any time up to the close of business on the last business day before the Segment Start Date.

Segment Start Date

Each Segment will have a Segment Start Date. Segments generally start on the first or third Thursday of each month. However, the Segment Start Date may sometimes be a different day under certain circumstances. Please see “Setting the Segment Maturity Date and Segment Start Date” below. Also, we may offer Segments more or less frequently and on different days for some or all contracts or Series.

Performance Cap Rate

The Performance Cap Rate determines the maximum Segment Rate of Return that each Segment will be credited with on the Segment Maturity Date or the maximum Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return on each Annual Lock Anniversary. We will declare a Performance Cap Rate for each Segment on the Segment Start Date. The Performance Cap Rate for each Segment, including each Annual Lock Segment will not change throughout the Segment Duration. The Performance Cap Rate for the same Segment may be higher or lower for Owners who elect that Segment during their first Contract Year than for Owners who are in their second or later Contract Year.

Because we declare the Performance Cap Rate for a Segment on its Segment Start Date, you will not know the Performance Cap Rate for a new Segment until after your account value has been transferred from the corresponding Segment Type Holding Account into the Segment. You may not transfer out of a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date. For more information regarding transfer restrictions, please see “Transferring your account value” later in this Prospectus.

The Performance Cap Rate may limit your participation in any increases in the underlying Index associated with a Segment. Our minimum Performance Cap Rates for 1, 3, and 5-year Standard Segments are 2%, 6%, and 10% respectively. Our minimum Performance Cap Rate for 5-year Choice Segments is 10%. Our minimum Performance Cap Rate for Annual Lock Segments is 2%. We guarantee that for the life of your contract we will not open a Segment with a Performance Cap Rate below the applicable minimum Performance Cap Rate. In some cases, we may decide not to declare a Performance Cap Rate for a Segment, in which case there is no maximum Segment Rate of Return for that Segment and you will receive the Index Performance Rate for that Segment subject to the Segment Buffer. When this happens, the Segment is referred to as uncapped.

Please note that the Performance Cap Rate and Segment Rate of Return are cumulative rates of return from the Segment Start Date to the Segment Maturity Date or from the Segment Start Date to the first Annual Lock Anniversary and thereafter from each Annual Lock Anniversary to the next for Annual Lock Segments, NOT annual rates, even if the Segment Duration is longer than one year. The Performance Cap Rate is set at our sole discretion.

Segment Participation Requirements

Provided that all participation requirements are met, all amounts allocated to a Segment Type that are in the associated Segment Type Holding Account as of the close of business on the business day

31


preceding the Segment Start Date, plus any earnings on those amounts, will be transferred into the new Segment on the Segment Start Date. However, amounts transferred into the Segment Type Holding Account on the Segment Start Date itself will not be included in any new Segment created that day. These amounts will remain in the Segment Type Holding Account until they are transferred out or the next Segment Start Date on which the participation requirements are met for the amounts to be transferred into a new Segment.

The participation requirements are as follows: (1) Segment is available; (2) Segment Maturity Date Requirement is met; and (3) Performance Cap Threshold is met. If these requirements are met, your account value in the Segment Type Holding Account will be transferred into a new Segment. This amount is your initial Segment Investment. Once your account value has been swept from a Segment Type Holding Account into a Segment, transfers into or out of that Segment before its Segment Maturity Date are not permitted.

(1) Segment is available.  The Segment must actually be created on the Segment Start Date as scheduled. We may suspend or terminate any Segment Type, at our sole discretion, at any time. If we terminate a Segment Type, no new Segments of that Segment Type will be created, and the amount that would have been transferred to the Segment will be transferred to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option instead. If we suspend a Segment Type, no new Segments of that Segment Type will be created until the suspension ends, and the amount that would have been transferred to the Segment will remain in the Segment Type Holding Account.

(2) Segment Maturity Date Requirement is met.  The Segment Maturity Date must occur on or before the contract maturity date. If the Segment Maturity Date is after the contract maturity date, your account value in the Segment Type Holding Account will be transferred to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option.

(3) Performance Cap Threshold is met.  When you allocate a contribution or transfer account value to a Segment Type, you may also specify a Performance Cap Threshold. The Performance Cap Threshold represents the minimum Performance Cap Rate you find acceptable for a particular Segment. As long as it remains in effect, the Performance Cap Threshold will prevent your value in the Segment Type Holding Account from being transferred into the corresponding Segment unless the Performance Cap Threshold is equal to or exceeded by the Performance Cap Rate we declare on the Segment Start Date, assuming the other participation requirements are also met. Performance Cap Thresholds are expressed as whole percentage rates.

For example, for a given Segment Type, you may specify a Performance Cap Threshold of 10%. If we set a Performance Cap Rate of 10% or higher for the next available Segment of that Segment Type, then we will transfer your account value in the applicable Segment Type Holding Account to the new Segment on the Segment Start Date provided all other participation requirements are met. However, if we set the Performance Cap Rateyour transfer request is received at 9.9% for that Segment, yourour Administrative Office by such date. For example, you can transfer policy account value will not be transferred tointo the new Segment.

A Performance Cap Threshold applies to a single Segment Type only. If you have allocated amounts to multiple Segment Types, you may specify a different Performance Cap Threshold for each Segment Type. Performance Cap Thresholds will not apply to uncapped Segments.

This means that if you allocate amounts to a Segment TypeMSO Holding Account and we subsequently open an associated Segment without specifying a Performance Cap Rate, those amounts will automatically be transferred to that Segment on the Segment Start Date.

The Performance Cap Threshold operates in the same manner for Standard Segments, Annual Lock Segments and Choice Segments. When determining whether the Performance Cap Threshold for a Choice Segment has been satisfied, we do not take into account the Choice cost associated with that Segment. For example, assume you allocate3rd Friday of June. That policy account value to a 5-year Choice Segment with a 5% Choice cost, and you set a Performance Cap Threshold of 48%. If we set a Performance Cap Rate of 50% for that Segment, your Performance Cap Threshold will be satisfied and your account value will be transferredwould transfer into the Segment even though the maximum Segment Rate of Return you can earn will be 45%.

Performance Cap Thresholds help you manage the risk that your money will not be invested in a Segment with a Performance Cap Rate that is lower than you find acceptable.

If you do not specify a Performance Cap Threshold or your Performance Cap Threshold has expired, we will transfer your account value from the Segment Type Holding Account into a Segment if the other participation requirements are met, regardless of the Performance Cap Rate that we set.

In order for a new Performance Cap Threshold to be effective for a forthcoming Segment, you must set it at least one day prior to the Segment Start Date. Similarly, while you can change an existing Performance Cap Threshold at any time, the revised Performance Cap Threshold will only apply to a Segment if you make the change at least one day prior to the Segment Start Date. This means that if you set a new or change an existing Performance Cap Threshold on a Segment Start Date, that new or revised Performance Cap Threshold will not affect the participation requirements for any Segment created that day. For example if you have a Performance Cap Threshold on file of 12%, but change it to 15% on a Segment Start Date, any amounts in that Segment Type Holding Account will be transferred into a new Segment of that Segment Type that we create that day with a Performance Cap Rate of 13%, if the other participation requirements are met.

Performance Cap Threshold duration

A Performance Cap Threshold will remain in effect until the PCT Expiry Date. This means that if the declared Performance Cap Rate for a Segment has not matched or exceeded your Performance Cap Threshold on any of the scheduled Segment Start Dates before the PCT Expiry Date, any amounts in the applicable Segment Type Holding Account (including any funds transferred to that holding account after your election) on the business day immediately preceding the next scheduled Segment Start Date after the PCT Expiry Date will automatically be transferred into the Segment created on that Segment Start Date, unless you specify a new Performance Cap Threshold prior to that date. You must set a new Performance Cap Threshold prior to the next scheduled Segment Start Date after your Performance Cap Threshold expires to avoid having amounts automatically transferred into the associated Segment, which may have a Performance Cap Rate that does not meet your investment objectives.

In addition, if your Performance Cap Threshold was satisfied on a scheduled Segment Start Date before the PCT Expiry Date and

32


amounts in the applicable Segment Type Holding Account were transferred into a Segment, the Performance Cap Threshold will continue to apply to any amounts you subsequently transfer into that Segment Type Holding Account until the PCT Expiry Date. A “scheduled Segment Start Date” includes any date on which a Segment was scheduled to start but was not offered as of that date. A suspension of the Segment Type will not extend the PCT Expiry Date.

Example 1: Assume you purchase your contract and set a Performance Cap Threshold of 30% for the S&P 500 Price Return Index/5 year/-20% Standard Segment Type on Wednesday March 1st and allocate $25,000 to the holding account for that Segment Type. If on each of the Segment Start Dates before the PCT Expiry Date we declare Performance Cap Rates of less than 30%, your $25,000 allocation will not be transferred to any of those Segments. Your Performance Cap Threshold will then expire on Thursday May 4th and your $25,000 allocation will be transferred to that Segment on the next Segment Start Date regardless of whether the Performance Cap Rate we declare is higher, equal to or lower than 30%.

Example 2: Assume you purchase your contract and set a Performance Cap Threshold of 30% for the S&P 500 Price Return Index/5 year/-20% Standard Segment Type on Wednesday March 1st and allocate $25,000 to the holding account for that Segment Type. If on the next Segment Start Date we declare a Performance Cap Rate of 35% for the Segment, your $25,000 allocation will be transferred to that Segment. Assume you then allocate another $10,000 to the holding account for that Segment Type on March 20th. Your existing Performance Cap Threshold of 30% remains in effect and will not expire until Thursday May 4th. If on the next Segment Start Date after March 20th we declare a Performance Cap Rate of 28% for the Segment, your $10,000 allocation will not be transferred to that Segment.

In all cases, if you complete a new Performance Cap Threshold election, it will override any existing Performance Cap Threshold then in effect. Transferring funds from a Segment Type Holding Account to one of the variable investment options will not terminate a Performance Cap Threshold you may have set for the Segment Type associated with that Segment Type Holding Account.

You can renew a Performance Cap Threshold by completing the appropriate form or using Online Account Access. If you do not renew a Performance Cap Threshold for a Segment, your account value in the associated Segment Type Holding Account will be transferred into a Segment on the next Segment Start Date after the PCT Expiry Date if the other participation requirements are met, even if the Performance Cap Rate that we set does not meet your investment objectives.

You will receive confirmation of any Performance Cap Threshold you set that indicates the date on which the Performance Cap Threshold expires. You can also monitor your Performance Cap Thresholds, including their expiry dates, using Online Account Access. We do not provide you with specific advance notice of the expiry of a Performance Cap Threshold.

If you elect to invest in the Dollar Cap Averaging Program, you may not specify a Performance Cap Threshold and any Performance Cap Threshold previously established will no longer be valid. By making this election, you agree that your investment will be transferred into your selected Segments at any declared Performance Cap Rate, which could include Segments with Performance Cap Rates that are not acceptable to you.

Segment Maturity Date

Your Segment Maturity Date is the Segment Business Day on which a Segment ends. You will receive advance notice of maturing Segments in which you are currently invested in your quarterly statement. You will generally also receive a second advance notice of maturing Segments in which you are currently invested. The additional notice is available by mail or electronically and is generally provided at least 30 days before a Segment Maturity Date. You can instruct us to stop delivering this second notice to you at any time. We reserve the right to discontinue this second notice at any time.

Segment Maturity Instructions. You may specify maturity instructions that tell us how to allocate the Segment Maturity Value among the investment options and you can change these instructions at any time. You may tell us either to follow your instructions on file for new contributions, to withdraw all or part of your Segment Maturity Value, or to transfer your Segment Maturity Value to the next available Segment of the same Segment Type, provided the participation requirements are met. While you may specify or change your maturity instructions for maturing Segments at any time until the close of business on the Segment Maturity Date, we recommend submitting new or revised instructions at least five business days prior to the Segment Maturity Date.

As stated above, you may elect to have maturing Segments invested according to your instructions on file, and those instructions may include allocations to different Segment Types, or you may elect to transfer your Segment Maturity Value to the next available Segment of the same Segment Type in which you are currently invested. If you take either of these steps, then the designated portion of your Segment Maturity Value will be transferred to the corresponding Segment Type Holding Account, as of the close of business on the Segment Maturity Date. Assuming that all participation requirements are met, the designated amounts will be treated like any other amounts in a Segment Type Holding Account. On the next Segment Start Date, the designated amounts in the Segment Type Holding Account will be transferred into the corresponding Segment. Typically, this means the designated amounts would be held in a Segment Type Holding Account for at least one business day.

If you have not provided us with maturity instructions for a maturing Segment, then by default the Segment Maturity Value will be transferred to the Segment Type Holding Account for the same Segment Type as the maturing Segment. Your Segment Maturity Value would then be transferred from that Segment Type Holding Account into the next Segment of that Segment Type on the Segment Start Date except that:

if the next Segment to be created in the Segment Type would not meet the Segment Maturity Date Requirement or that Segment Type has been terminated, we will instead transfer your Segment Maturity Value to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option; and

if you designate a Performance Cap Threshold that is not met on the next Segment Start Date or if the Segment Type has been suspended, your Segment Maturity Value will remain in the Segment Type Holding Account.

If you are impacted by these delays, you may transfer your Segment Maturity Value into another Segment Type Holding Account or any other variable investment option at any time before the next Segment Start Date.

33


Segment Maturity Value

We calculate your Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date. For Standard and Choice Segments we use your Segment Investment and the Segment Rate of Return. For Annual Lock Segments we use your Segment Investment and the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for the first Annual Lock Period and thereafter the Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount and the applicable Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return.

For Standard Segments, the Segment Rate of Return is equal to the Index Performance Rate (the percentage change in the value of the related Index from the Segment Start Date to the Segment Maturity Date), subject to the Performance Cap Rate and Segment Buffer, as follows:

If the Index Performance Rate:Your Segment Rate of Return
will be:

exceeds the

Performance Cap Rate

positive, equal to the Performance Cap Rate
is positive but less than or equal to the Performance Cap Ratepositive, equal to the Index Performance Rate
is flat or negative by a percentage equal to or less than the Segment Bufferequal to 0%
is negative by a percentage greater than the Segment Buffernegative, to the extent of the percentage exceeding the Segment Buffer

For Annual Lock Segments, the Segment Rate of Return is equal to the cumulative result of each successive Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return. The Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return is equal to the Index Performance Rate (the percentage change in the value of the related Index from the Segment Start Date to the first Annual Lock Anniversary and thereafter from one Annual Lock Anniversary to the next), subject to the Performance Cap Rate and Segment Buffer, as follows:

If the Index Performance Rate for
the Annual Lock Period:
Your Annual Lock Yearly Rate of
Return for that Annual Lock Period
will be:

exceeds the

Performance Cap Rate

positive, equal to the Performance Cap Rate
is positive but less than or equal to the Performance Cap Ratepositive, equal to the Index Performance Rate
is flat or negative by a percentage equal to or less than the Segment Bufferequal to 0%
is negative by a percentage greater than the Segment Buffernegative, to the extent of the percentage exceeding the Segment Buffer

For Choice Segments, the Segment Rate of Return is equal to the Index Performance Rate (the percentage change in the value of the related Index from the Segment Start Date to the Segment Maturity Date), subject to the Performance Cap Rate, Segment Buffer and application of the Choice cost, as follows:

If the Index Performance Rate:Your Segment Rate of Return
will be:
exceeds the Performance Cap Ratepositive, equal to the Performance Cap Rate less the Choice cost
is positive and exceeds the Choice cost but is less than or equal to the Performance Cap Ratepositive, equal to the Index Performance Rate less the Choice cost
is positive but does not exceed the Choice costequal to 0%
is flat or negative by a percentage equal to or less than the Segment Bufferequal to 0%
Is negative by a percentage greater than the Segment Buffernegative, to the extent of the percentage exceeding the Segment Buffer

Your Segment Maturity Value is calculated as follows:

For Standard Segments and Choice Segments: We multiply your Segment Investment by your Segment Rate of Return to get your Segment Return Amount. Your Segment Maturity Value is equal to your Segment Investment plus or minus your Segment Return Amount. Your Segment Return Amount may be negative, in which case your Segment Maturity Value will be less than your Segment Investment. All of these values are based on the value of the relevant Index on the Segment Start Date and the Segment Maturity Date. Any fluctuations in the value of the Index between those dates are ignored in calculating the Segment Maturity Value.

For Annual Lock Segments: We multiply your Segment Investment by your Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for the first year (first Annual Lock Period) to get your Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for that year (Annual Lock Period). Your Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount for the first Annual Lock Period is equal to your Segment Investment plus or minus your Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for that Annual Lock Period. Your Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for that period may be negative, in which case your Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount for that period will be less than your Segment Investment. The Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on the first Annual Lock Anniversary is the Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount for the second year (second Annual Lock Period) that we multiply by the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period and so on for the remaining Annual Lock Periods until the Segment Maturity Date (fifth Annual Lock Anniversary). All of these amounts are based on the change in the value of the relevant Index during the relevant Annual Lock Period. Any fluctuation in the value of the Index between a Segment Start Date and the first Annual Lock Anniversary (and between each successive Annual Lock Anniversary thereafter) is ignored when calculating the Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount.

 

 

34


Please note: (i) the Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount is adjusted for any withdrawals from the Segment; (ii) the Annual Lock Anniversary Starting and Ending Amounts are used solely to calculate the Segment Maturity Value for Annual Lock Segments, and are not creditedstarting on that date, subject to the contract, are notconditions mentioned earlier. You can also transfer policy account value out of the Segment Interim Value, and cannot be received upon surrender or withdrawal; and (iii)MSO Holding Account before the Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount onend of the fifth Annual Lock Anniversary is also the Segment Maturity Value.

Standard Segment Examples

Assume that you invest $1,000 in an S&P 500 Price Return Index,5-year Segment with a-20% Segment Buffer, we set the Performance Cap Rate for that Segment at 30%, and you make no withdrawal from the Segment.

If the S&P 500 Price Return Index is 35% higher on the Segment Maturity Date thanbusiness day on the Segment Start Date and that account value would not be swept into the Segment starting on that date. Please refer to the “How to reach us” section under “the Company” earlier in this prospectus for more information regarding contacting us and communicating your instructions. We also have specific forms that we recommend you will receive a 30% Segment Rate of Return,use for electing the MSO and your Segment Maturity Value would be $1,300. We reach that amount as follows:any MSO transactions.

 

The Index Performance Rate (35%) is greater than the Performance Cap Rate (30%), so the Segment Rate of Return (30%) is equal to the Performance Cap Rate.

The Segment Return Amount ($300) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return (30%).

The Segment Maturity Value ($1,300) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) plus the Segment Return Amount ($300).

If the S&P Price Return Index is only 26% higher on the Segment Maturity Date than onOn the Segment Start Date, then youaccount value in the MSO Holding Account, excluding charges and any account value transferred to cover the Charge Reserve Amount, will receivebe transferred into a 26% Segment Rate of Return,if all requirements and your Segment Maturity Value would be $1,260. We reachlimitations are met that amount as follows:are discussed under “Segments” immediately below.

The Index Performance Rate (26%) is less than the Performance Cap Rate (30%), so the Segment Rate of Return (26%) is equal to the Index Performance Rate.

The Segment Return Amount ($260) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return (26%).

The Segment Maturity Value ($1,260) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) plus the Segment Return Amount ($260).

If the S&P Price Return Index is 10% lower on the Segment Maturity Date than on the Segment Start Date, then you will receive a 0% Segment Rate of Return, and your Segment Maturity Value would be $1,000. We reach that amount as follows:

The Index Performance Rate is-10% and the Segment Buffer absorbs the first 20% of negative performance, so the Segment Rate of Return is 0%.

The Segment Return Amount ($0) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return (0%).

The Segment Maturity Value ($1,000) is equal to the Segment

Investment ($1,000) plus the Segment Return Amount ($0).

If the S&P Price Return Index is 30% lower on the Segment Maturity Date than on the Segment Start Date, then you will receive a-10%

Segment Rate of Return, and your Segment Maturity Value would be $900. We reach that amount as follows:

The Index Performance Rate is-30% and the Segment Buffer absorbs the first 20% of negative performance, so the Segment Rate of Return is-10%.

The Segment Return Amount(-$100) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return(-10%).

The Segment Maturity Value ($900) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) plus the Segment Return Amount(-$100).

 

Annual Lock Segment ExampleSegments

 

Assume that you invest $1,000Each Segment will have a Segment Start Date of the 3rd Friday of each calendar month and will have a Segment Maturity Date on the 3rd Friday of the same calendar month in an S&P 500 Price Return Index,5-year Annual Lock Segment with a -10% Segment Buffer, we set the Performance Cap Ratesucceeding calendar year.

In order for that Segment at 12%, and you make no withdrawalany amount to be transferred from the Segment.MSO Holding Account into a new Segment on a Segment Start Date, all of the following conditions must be met on that date:

 

Below is a table summarizing the various Index Performance Rates, Annual Lock Yearly Rates of Return, Annual Lock Yearly Return Amounts and Annual Lock Anniversary Starting and Ending Amounts for the Annual Lock example that is described in greater detail immediately following the table.
(1)

The Growth Cap Rate for that Segment must be equal to or greater than your minimum Growth Cap Rate (Please see “Growth Cap Rate” later in this section).

 

Year Index
Performance
Rate
 Annual
Lock Yearly
Rate of
Return
 Annual
Lock
Anniversary
Starting
Amount
 Annual
Lock Yearly
Return
Amount
  Annual
Lock
Anniversary
Ending
Amount
 
1 13% 12% $1,000.00*  $120.00   $1,120.00 
2 -5%   0% $1,120.00  $    0.00   $1,120.00 
3 10% 10% $1,120.00  $112.00   $1,232.00 
4 -12% -2% $1,232.00  -$  24.64   $1,207.36 
5 15% 12% $1,207.36  $144.88   $1,352.24** 
*(2)

There must be sufficient account value available within the Unloaned GIO and the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account to cover the Charge Reserve Amount as determined by us on such date (Please see “Charge Reserve Amount” later in this section).

(3)

The Growth Cap Rate must be greater than the sum of the annual interest rate we are currently crediting on the Unloaned GIO (“A”), the Variable Index Benefit Charge rate (“B”), the annualized monthly Variable Index Segment Account Charge rate (“C”) and the current annualized monthly mortality and expense risk charge rate (“D”). The Growth Cap Rate must be greater than (A+B+C+D). This is alsoto ensure that the highest possible rate of return that could be received in a Segment after these charges (B+C+D) have been considered exceeds the interest crediting rate currently being offered in the Unloaned GIO.

(4)

It must not be necessary, as determined by us on that date, for us to make a distribution from the policy during the Segment Investment.Term in order for the policy to continue to qualify as life insurance under applicable tax law.

**(5)

This is also the Segment Maturity Value.The total amount allocated to your Segments under your policy on that date must be less than any limit we may have established.

 

If there is sufficient policy account value in the S&P 500 Price ReturnUnloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount, then no transfers from other investment options to the Unloaned GIO will need to be made. If there is insufficient value in the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount and we do not receive instructions from you specifying the investment options from which we should transfer the account value to the Unloaned GIO to meet Charge Reserve Amount requirements at the Segment Start Date, or the transfer instructions are not possible due to insufficient funds, then the required amount will be transferred proportionately from your variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account.

If after any transfers there would be an insufficient amount in the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount or the Growth Cap Rate for the next available Segment does not qualify per your minimum Growth Cap Rate instructions and the conditions listed above, then your amount in the MSO Holding Account will remain there until we receive further instruction from you. We will mail you a notice informing you that your account value did or did not transfer from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment. These notices are mailed on or about the next business day after the applicable Segment Start Date.

Segment Maturity

Near the end of the Segment Term, we will notify you between 15 and 45 days before the Segment Maturity Date that a Segment is about to mature. At that time, you may choose to have all or a part of:

(a)

the Segment Maturity Value rolled over into the MSO Holding Account

(b)

the Segment Maturity Value transferred to the variable investment options available under your policy

(c)

the Segment Maturity Value transferred to the Unloaned GIO subject to any Segment Maturity GIO Limitation that we may impose.

If we do not receive your transfer instructions before the Segment Maturity Date, your Segment Maturity Value will automatically be rolled over into the MSO Holding Account for investment in the next available Segment, subject to the conditions listed under “Segments” above.

However, if we are not offering the MSO at that time, we will transfer the Segment Maturity Value to the investment options available under your policy per your instructions or to the EQ/Money Market investment option if no instructions are received. If the Segment Maturity GIO Limitation is in effect, then you may only allocate up to a specified percentage of your Segment Maturity Value to the guaranteed interest option. That limitation will never be less than 5% of your Segment Maturity Value. Any portion of the Segment Maturity Value that is allocated to the guaranteed interest option in excess of the Segment Maturity GIO Limitation will be allocated to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option unless we receive your instructions prior to the Segment Maturity Date that the Segment Maturity Value should be allocated to any other available variable investment option. Please see “Right to Discontinue and Limit Amounts Allocated to the MSO” and “Segment Maturity GIO Limitation” for more information. Although under the policy we reserve the right to apply a transfer charge up to $25 for each transfer among your investment options, there will be no transfer charges for any of the transfers discussed in this section. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

Growth Cap Rate

By allocating your account value to the MSO, you can participate in the performance of the Index is 13% higher onup to the first Annual Lock Anniversary thanapplicable Growth Cap Rate that we declare on the Segment Start Date,Date.

Please note that this means you will receivenot know the Growth Cap Rate for a 12% Annual Lock Yearly Ratenew Segment until after the account value has been transferred from the MSO Holding Account into the Segment and you are not allowed to transfer the account value out of Return for that Annual Lock Period, and your Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount would be $1,120. We reach that amount as follows:a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date. Please see “Transfers” below.

 

The Index Performance Rate (13%) forEach Segment is likely to have a different Growth Cap Rate. However, the first Annual Lock Period is greater than the PerformanceGrowth Cap Rate (12%), so the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return (12%) for the first Annual Lock Period is equal to the Performance Cap Rate.

The Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount ($120) for the first Annual Lock Period is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000), which is also the first Annual Lock Anniversery Starting Amount, multiplied by the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return (12%) for the first Annual Lock Period.

The Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount ($1,120) on the first Annual Lock Anniversary is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) plus the Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount ($120) for that Annual Lock Period.

The first Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount is also the second Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount ($1,120)will never be less than 6%.

 

 

35


IfYour protection against negative performance for a Segment held until its Segment Maturity Date is currently-25% (“Downside Protection” also referred to in your policy as the S&P Price Return Index is 5% lower during“Segment Loss Absorption Threshold Rate”). We reserve the second Annual Lock Period, then you will receiveright, for new Segments, to increase your Downside Protection against negative performance. For example, if we were to adjust the Downside Protection for a 0% Annual Lock YearlySegment to-100%, the Index-Linked Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period,Segment would not go below 0%. Please note that any increase in the protection against negative performance would likely result in a lower Growth Cap Rate than would otherwise apply. We will provide notice between 15 and 45 days before any change in the Downside Protection is effective. Any change would only apply to new Segments started after the effective date of the change, which (coupled with the15-45 day notice we will give) will afford you the opportunity to decline to participate in any Segment that reflects a change in the Downside Protection.

The Growth Cap Rate and Downside Protection are set at the Company’s sole discretion.  However, the Growth Cap Rate can never be less than 6% and we may only increase your Annual Lock Anniversary Ending AmountDownside Protection from the current-25%.

As part of your initial instructions in selecting the MSO, you will specify what your minimum acceptable Growth Cap Rate is for a Segment. You may specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate from 6% to 10%. If the Growth Cap Rate we set, on the second Annual Lock AnniversarySegment Start Date, is below the minimum you specified then the account value will not be transferred from the MSO Holding Account into that Segment. If you do not specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate then your minimum Growth Cap Rate will be set at 6%. In addition, for account value to transfer into a Segment from the MSO Holding Account, the Growth Cap Rate must be greater than the sum of the annual interest rate we are currently crediting on the Unloaned GIO (“A”), the Variable Index Benefit Charge rate (“B”), the annualized monthly Variable Index Segment Account Charge rate (“C”) and the current annualized monthly mortality and expense risk charge rate (“D”). The Growth Cap Rate must be greater than (A+B+C+D).

For example, assume that the annual interest rate we are currently crediting on the Unloaned GIO were 4%, the Variable Index Benefit Charge rate were 0.75%, the annualized monthly Variable Index Segment Account charge rate were 0.65% and the annualized monthly mortality and expense risk charge rate were 0.85%. Based on those assumptions (which we provide only for illustrative purposes and will not necessarily correspond to actual rates), because these numbers total 6.25%, no amounts would be $1,120. We reachtransferred into any Segment unless we declare a Growth Cap Rate that amount as follows:is higher than 6.25%. Please see “Index-Linked Return” later in this section for more information.

 

As another example, you may specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate of 8%. If we set the Growth Cap Rate at 8% or higher for a Segment then a transfer from the MSO Holding Account will be made into that new Segment provided all other requirements and conditions discussed in this section are met. If we set the Growth Cap Rate below 8% then no transfer from the MSO Holding Account will be made into that Segment. No transfer will be made until a Segment Growth Cap Rate equal to or greater than 8% is set and all requirements are met or you transfer account value out of the MSO Holding Account.

Growth Cap Rate Available During Initial Policy Year

If you allocate policy account value to any Segment that commences during your first policy year, our current practice is to establish a Growth Cap Rate that is at least 15%.

The Index PerformanceWe may terminate or change this 15% initial year minimum Growth Cap Rate (-5%)at any time; but any such change or termination would apply to you only if your policy is issued, after such modification or termination.

After this initial year 15% minimum Growth Cap Rate, the minimum Growth Cap Rate will revert back to 6%.

Index-Linked Return

We calculate the Index-Linked Return for a Segment by taking the second Annual Lock Period is less than the Segment Buffer which absorbs the first 10% of negative performance, so the Annual Lock YearlyIndex-Linked Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period is 0%.

The Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for the Annual Lock Period ($0) is equal to the second Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount ($1,120) multipliedand multiplying it by the Annual Lock YearlySegment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date. The Segment Account Value is net of the Variable Index Benefit Charge described below as well as any monthly deductions, policy loans and unpaid interest, distributions from the policy that we deem necessary to continue to qualify the policy as life insurance under applicable tax law and any corresponding Early Distribution Adjustments. The Segment Account Value does not include the Charge Reserve Amount described later in this section.

The following table demonstrates the Index-Linked Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period (0%).

The Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on the second Annual Lock Anniversary ($1,120) is equal to the second Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount ($1,120) plus the Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for the second Annual Lock Period ($0).

If the S&P Price Return Index is 10% higher during the third Annual Lock Period, then you will receive a 10% Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period, and your Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on the third Annual Lock Anniversary would be $1,232. We reach that amount as follows:

The Index Performance Rate (10%) for the third Annual Lock Period is less than the Performance Cap Rate (12%), so the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return (10%) for that Annual Lock Period is equal to the Index Performance Rate.

The Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for that Annual Lock Period ($112) is equal to the third Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount ($1,120) multiplied by the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period (10%).

The Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on the third Annual Lock Anniversary ($1,232) is equal to the third Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount ($1,120) plus the Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for the third Annual Lock Period ($112).

If the S&P Price Return Index is 12% lower during the fourth Annual Lock Period, then you will receive a -2% Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period, and your Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on the fourth Annual Lock Anniversary would be $1207.36. We reach that amount as follows:

The Index Performance Rate (-12%) for the fourth Annual Lock Period is greater than the Segment Buffer which absorbs the first 10% of negative performance, so the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period is -2%.

The Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for that Annual Lock Period (-$24.64) is equal to the fourth Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount ($1,232) multiplied by the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period (-2%).

The Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on the fourth Annual Lock Anniversary ($1,207.36) is equal to the fourth Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount ($1,232) plus the Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for the fourth Annual Lock Period (-$24.64).

If the S&P Price Return Index is 15% higher during the fifth Annual Lock Period, then you will receive a 12% Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period, and your Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on the fifth Annual Lock Anniversary (which is also the Segment Maturity Date) would be $1,352.24. We reach that amount as follows:

The Index Performance Rate (15%) for the fifth Annual Lock Period is greater than the Performance Cap Rate (12%), so the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period is 12%.

The Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for that Annual Lock Period ($144.88) is equal to the fifth Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount ($1,207.36) multiplied by the Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return for that Annual Lock Period (12%).

The Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on the fifth Annual Lock Anniversary ($1,352.24) is equal to the fifth Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount ($1,207.36) plus the Annual Lock Yearly Return Amount for the fifth Annual Lock Period ($144.88).

The Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount on the fifth Annual Lock Anniversary is also the Segment Maturity Value ($1,352.24).

Theon the Segment RateMaturity Date based upon a hypothetical range of Returnreturns for the above example is 35.2%.

Below is a table summarizing the various Index Performance Rates, Annual Lock Yearly Rates of Return, Annual Lock Yearly Return Amounts and Annual Lock Anniversary Starting and Ending Amounts for an Annual Lock example using different Index Performance Rate assumptions.

Year Index
Performance
Rate
 Annual
Lock
Yearly
Rate of
Return
 Annual
Lock
Anniversary
Starting
Amount
 Annual
Lock
Yearly
Return
Amount
   Annual
Lock
Anniversary
Ending
Amount
 
1 13% 12% $1,000.00*  $120.00    $1,120.00 
2 -5%    0% $1,120.00  $    0.00    $1,120.00 
3 8%    8% $1,120.00  $  89.60    $1,209.60 
4 -20% -10% $1,209.60  -$120.96    $1,088.64 
5 -20% -10% $1,088.64  -$108.86    $   979.78** 
*

This is also the Segment Investment.

**

This is also the Segment Maturity Value.

Choice Segment Examples

Assume that you invest $1,000 in a Choice S&P 500 Price Return Index,5-year Segment with a -10% Segment Buffer and 5% Choice cost, we set the Performance Cap Rate for that Segment at 65%, and you make no withdrawal from the Segment.

If the S&P 500 Price Return index. This example assumes a 15% Growth Cap Rate and a $1,000 investment in the MSO Segment.

Index Performance
Rate of the S&P 500
Price Return index
  Index-Linked Rate
of Return
  Segment Maturity
Value
50%  15%  $1,150
25%  15%  $1,150
10%  10%  $1,100
0%  0%  $1,000
-25%  0%  $1,000
-50%  -25%  $750
-75%  -50%  $500
-100%  -75%  $250

For instance, we may set the Growth Cap Rate at 15%. Therefore, if the Index is 70% higherhas gone up 20% over your Segment Term, you will receive a 15% credit to your Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date. If the Index had gone up by 13% from your Segment Start Date thanto your Segment Maturity Date then you would receive a credit of 13% to your Segment Account Value on the Segment Start Date,Maturity Date.

If the Index had gone down 20% over the Segment Term then you willwould receive a 60%return of 0% to your Segment Rate of Return, andAccount Value on the Segment Maturity Date.

If the Index had gone down by 30% by your Segment Maturity Date then your Segment Account Value would be $1,600. We reach that amount as follows:reduced by 5% on the Segment Maturity Date. The Downside Protection feature of the MSO will absorb the negative performance of the Index up to-25%.

 

The Index Performance Rate (70%) is greater than the Performanceminimum Growth Cap Rate (65%), sois 6%. However, account value will only transfer into a new Segment from the SegmentMSO Holding Account if the Growth Cap Rate of Return (60%) is equal to the Performanceor greater than your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate lessand meets the Choice cost (5%).conditions discussed earlier in the “Growth Cap Rate” section.

 

TheIn those instances where the account value in the MSO Holding Account does not transfer into a new Segment, Return Amount ($600) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return (60%).account value will

 

 

36


The Segment Maturity Value ($1,600) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) plus the Segment Return Amount ($600).

If the S&P Price Return Index is only 50% higher on the Segment Maturity Date than on the Segment Start Date, then you will receive a 45% Segment Rate of Return, and your Segment Maturity Value would be $1,450. We reach that amount as follows:

The Index Performance Rate (50%) is less than the Performance Cap Rate (65%), so the Segment Rate of Return (45%) is equal to the Index Performance Rate less the Choice cost (5%).

The Segment Return Amount ($450) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return (45%).

The Segment Maturity Value ($1,450) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) plus the Segment Return Amount ($450).

If the S&P Price Return Index is only 2% higher on the Segment Maturity Date than on the Segment Start Date, then you will receive a 0% Segment Rate of Return, and your Segment Maturity Value would be equal to your initial Segment Investment of $1,000. We reach that amount as follows:

The Index Performance Rate (2%) is less than both the Performance Cap Rate (65%) and the Choice cost (5%), so the Segment Rate of Return (0%) is equal to the Index Performance Rate less the Choice cost (amount deducted is reduced to 2%).

The Segment Return Amount ($0) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return (0%).

The Segment Maturity Value ($1,000) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) plus the Segment Return Amount ($0).

If the S&P Price Return Index is 5% lower on the Segment Maturity Date than on the Segment Start Date, then you will receive a 0% Segment Rate of Return, and your Segment Maturity Value would be $1,000. We reach that amount as follows:

The Index Performance Rate is -5% and the Segment Buffer absorbs the first 10% of negative performance, so the Segment Rate of Return is 0% (there is no Choice cost deduction).

The Segment Return Amount ($0) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return (0%).

The Segment Maturity Value ($1,000) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) plus the Segment Return Amount ($0).

If the S&P Price Return Index is 30% lower on the Segment Maturity Date than on the Segment Start Date, then you will receive a -20% Segment Rate of Return, and your Segment Maturity Value would be $800. We reach that amount as follows:

The Index Performance Rate is -30% and the Segment Buffer absorbs the first 10% of negative performance, so the Segment Rate of Return is -20% (there is no Choice cost deduction).

The Segment Return Amount (-$200) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by the Segment Rate of Return(-20%).

The Segment Maturity Value ($800) is equal to the Segment Investment ($1,000) plus the Segment Return Amount (-$200).

Setting the Segment Maturity Date and Segment Start Date

There will generally be two or more Segment Maturity Dates and Segment Start Dates each month that the contract is outstanding. The Segment Maturity Date for Segments maturing and the Segment Start Date for new corresponding Segments will generally be scheduled to occur on consecutive Business Days that are also Segment Business Days.

If a Segment Maturity Date falls on a holiday, the Segment Maturity Date will generally be the preceding Segment Business Day. If a Segment Start Date falls on a holiday, the Segment Start Date will generally be the preceding Segment Business Day unless that preceding Segment Business Day is notremain in the same month. In these instances, no Segment will beginMSO Holding Account until the next scheduledavailable, qualifying Segment Start Date. Please see Appendix V later in this prospectus for a demonstrationunless you transfer the account value into the Unloaned GIO and/or other investment option available under your policy subject to any conditions and restrictions.

For instance, if we declare the Growth Cap Rate to be 6% and your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate is 6% but we are currently crediting an annual interest rate on the Unloaned GIO that is greater than or equal to 6% minus the sum of the effects that scheduled holidays can have on the Segment Maturity Date and the Segment Start Date.

Effect of an emergency close.  Segments are scheduled to mature and start on Segment Business Days. The Segment Maturity Date for Segments maturing and the Segment Start Date for new corresponding Segments starting will generally occur on consecutive Business Days that are also Segment Business Days. It is possible that an Index could be affected by an emergency close on a Segment Business Day, thereby affecting the Index’s ability to publish a price and our ability to mature or start Segments based on the affected Index. Emergency closes can have two consequences.

1.

If the NYSE experiences an emergency close and cannot publish any prices, we will delay the maturity or start of all Segments for all Indices.

2.

If any Index other than the NYSE experiences an emergency close, we will delay the maturity and start of the Segments using the affected Index and mature or start Segments for all unaffected Indices.

The emergency closure of anIndex other than the NYSE can have a different effect if it occurs on a Segment Maturity Date rather than a Segment Start Date. We do not currently offer any such Index, but maycharges (B+C+D) discussed in the future.

If an emergency close occurs on a scheduled Segment Maturity Date,Growth Cap Rate section then the Segment Maturity Date for that Segment will be delayed until the next Segment Business Day. The next Segment Business Day would be the Segment Start Date. If the emergency close only lasted that one day, the Segment Start Date and the Segment Maturity Date for the affected Segment would occur on the same day.

If an emergency close occurs on an Index other than the NYSE on a scheduled Segment Start Date,then we would not create Segments that utilize the affected Index. However, on that day we would create Segments that utilize unaffected Indices. Consequently, Segment Maturity Values designated for Segment Types that utilize an affected Index would not be allocated to Segments and would remain in the corresponding Segment Type Holding Account.

If the conditions that cause an emergency close persist, we will use reasonable efforts to calculate the Segment Maturity Value of any affected Segments. If the affected Index cannot be priced within eight days, we will contact a calculating agency, normally a bank we have a contractual relationship with, which will determine a price to reflect a reasonable estimate of the Index level.

37


Suspension, Termination and Changes to Segment Types and Indices

We may decide at any time until the close of business on each Segment Start Date whether to offer any or all of the Segment Types described in this Prospectus on a Segment Start Date for a particular Segment. We may suspend a Segment Type for a week, month or a period of several months, or we may terminate a Segment Type entirely.

If a Segment Type is suspended, your account value will remain in the Segment TypeMSO Holding Account until aon the date the new Segment of that Segment Type is offered orwould have started.

As indicated above, you must transfer account value out of the Segment Type Holding Account. We will provide you with written confirmation when money is not transferred from a Segment TypeMSO Holding Account into a segment duethe Unloaned GIO and/or other investment options available under your policy if you do not want to remain in the suspension of a Segment Type.MSO Holding Account.

 

If a Segment Typewe declare the Growth Cap Rate to be 6% and your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate is terminated, your6% and if the sum of the charges (B+C+D) discussed in the “Growth Cap Rate” section plus the annual interest rate on the Unloaned GIO are less than 6% and all requirements are met then the net amount of the account value in the corresponding Segment TypeMSO Holding Account will be defaultedtransfer into a new Segment.

If you specified a minimum Growth Cap Rate of 10% in the EQ/Money Market variable investment option onabove examples then account value would not transfer into a new Segment from the dateMSO Holding Account because the Growth Cap Rate did not meet your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate.

The Index-Linked Return is only applied to amounts that would have beenremain in a Segment until the Segment StartMaturity Date. For example, a surrender of your policy before Segment maturity will eliminate any Index-Linked Return and be subject to a Early Distribution Adjustment.

 

We haveChange in Index

If the Index is discontinued or if the calculation of the Index is substantially changed, we reserve the right to substitute an alternative index prior to Segment Maturity if the publication of one or more Indices is discontinued or at our sole discretion we determine that our use of such Indices should be discontinued or if the calculation of one or more of the Indices is substantially changed. In addition, weindex. We also reserve the right to use any or all reasonable methodschoose an alternative index at our discretion.

If we were to end any outstanding Segments that use such Indices. We also have the right to add additional Indices under the contractsubstitute an alternative index at any time. Weour discretion, we would provide notice about the use of additional or alternative Indices, as soon as practicable, in a supplement45 days before making that change. The new index would only apply to this Prospectus. Ifnew Segments. Any outstanding Segments would mature on their original Segment Maturity Dates.

With an alternative index, is used, its performance could impact the Index Performance Rate, Segment Rate of Return, Segment Maturity Value, Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return, Annual Lock Anniversary Starting and Ending Amounts and Segment Interim Value. AnDownside Protection would remain the same or greater. However, an alternative index would not changemay reduce the Segment Buffer or PerformanceGrowth Cap Rate for an existing Segment. If a similar index cannot be found,Rates we will end the affected Segments prematurely by applying the Performance Cap Rate and Segment Buffer that were established on the applicable Segment Start Date to the actual gains or losses on the original Index as of the date of termination.can offer. We would attempt to choose a substitute index that has a similar investment objective and risk profile to the replacedS&P 500 Price Return index.

If the S&P 500 Price Return index were to be discontinued or substantially changed, thereby affecting the Index-Linked Return of existing Segments, we will mature the Segments based on the most recently available closing value of the Index before it is discontinued or changed. Such maturity will be as of the date of such most recently available closing value of the Index and we will use that closing value to calculate the Index-linked Return through that date. We would apply the full Index performance to that date subject to the full Growth Cap Rate and Downside Protection. For example, if the Russell 2000Index was up 12% at the time we matured the Segment and the Growth Cap Rate was 8%, we would credit an 8% return to your Segment Account Value. If the Index was down 30% at the time we matured the Segment, we would credit a 5% negative return to your Segment

Account Value. We would provide notice about maturing the Segment, as soon as practicable and ask for instructions on where to transfer your Segment Maturity Value.

If we are still offering Segments at that time, you can request that the Segment Maturity Value be invested in a new Segment, in which case we will hold the Segment Maturity Value in the MSO Holding Account for investment in the next available Segment subject to the same terms and conditions discussed above under MSO Holding Account and Segments.

In the case of any of the types of early maturities discussed above, there would be no transfer charges or EDA applied and you can allocate the Segment Maturity Value to the investment options available under your policy. Please see “Segment Maturity” earlier in this section for more information. If we continued offering new Segments, then such a change in the Index may cause lower Growth Cap Rates to be offered. However, we would still provide a minimum Growth Cap Rate of 6% and minimum Downside Protection of-25%. We also reserve the right to not offer new Segments. Please see “Right to Discontinue and Limit Amounts Allocated to the MSO” later in this section.

Charges

There is a current percentage charge of 1.40% of any policy account value allocated to each Segment. We reserve the right to increase or decrease the charge although it will never exceed 2.40%. Of this percentage charge, 0.75% will be deducted on the Segment Start Date from the amount being transferred from the MSO Holding Account into the Segment as anup-front charge (“Variable Index Benefit Charge”), with the remaining 0.65% annual charge (of the current Segment Account Value) being deducted from the policy account on a monthly basis during the Segment Term (“Variable Index Segment Account Charge”).

MSO Charges  Current Non-
guaranteed
  Guaranteed
Maximum
Variable Index Benefit Charge  0.75%  0.75%
Variable Index Segment Account Charge  0.65%  1.65%
Total  1.40%  2.40%

This fee table applies specifically to the MSO and should be read in conjunction with the “Tables of the policy charges” under “Risk/ benefit summary: charges and expenses you will pay” earlier in this prospectus and also see “Loans” later in this section for information regarding the “spread” you would pay on any policy loan.

The base policy’s mortality and expense risk charge and currentnon-guaranteed Customer Loyalty Credit will also be applicable to a Segment Account Value or any amounts held in the MSO Holding Account. The mortality and expense risk charge is part of the policy monthly charges. Please see “How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term” for more information. The Customer Loyalty Credit offsets some of the monthly charges.

If a Segment is terminated prior to maturity by policy surrender, or reduced prior to maturity by monthly deductions (if other funds are insufficient) or by loans or a Guideline PremiumForce-out as described below, we will refund a proportionate amount of the Variable Index Benefit Charge corresponding to the surrender or reduction and the time remaining until Segment Maturity. The refund will be administered as part of the Early Distribution Adjustment process as described above. This refund will increase your surrender value or remaining Segment Account Value, as appropriate. Please see Appendix I later in this prospectus for an example and further information.

37


Charge Reserve Amount

If you elect the Market Stabilizer Option®, you are required to maintain a minimum amount of policy account value in the Unloaned GIO to approximately cover the estimated monthly charges for the policy, (including, but not limited to, the MSO and any optional riders) for the Segment Term. This is the Charge Reserve Amount.

The Charge Reserve Amount will be determined on each Segment Start Date as an amount projected to be sufficient to cover all of the policy’s monthly deductions during the Segment Term, assuming at the time such calculation is made that no interest or investment performance is credited to or charged against the policy account and that no policy changes or additional premium payments are made. The Charge Reserve Amount on other than a Segment Start Date (or the effective date of a requested face amount increase — please see “Requested Face Amount Increases” below for more information) will be the Charge Reserve Amount determined as of the latest Segment Start Date (or effective date of a face amount increase) reduced by each subsequent monthly deduction during the longest remaining Segment Term, although it will never be less than zero. This means, for example, that if you are in a Segment (Segment A) and then enter another Segment (Segment B) 6 months later, the Charge Reserve Amount would be recalculated on the start date of Segment B. The Charge Reserve Amount would be recalculated to cover all of the policy’s monthly deductions during the Segment Terms for both Segments A and B.

When you select the MSO, as part of your initial instructions, you will be asked to specify the investment options from which we should transfer the account value to the Unloaned GIO to meet Charge Reserve Amount requirements, if necessary. No transfer restrictions apply to amounts that you wish to transfer into the Unloaned GIO to meet the Charge Reserve Amount requirement. If your values in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account and the unloaned portion of our GIO are insufficient to cover the Charge Reserve Amount, no new Segment will be established. Please see “Segments” above for more information regarding the Charge Reserve Amount and how amounts may be transferred to meet this requirement.

Please note that the Charge Reserve Amount may not be sufficient to cover actual monthly deductions during the Segment Term. Although the Charge Reserve Amount will be recalculated on each Segment Start Date, and the amount already present in the Unloaned GIO will be supplemented through transfers from your value in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account, if necessary to meet this requirement, actual monthly deductions could vary up or down during the Segment Term due to various factors including but not limited to requested policy changes, additional premium payments, investment performance, loans, policy partial withdrawals from other investment options besides the MSO, and any changes we might make to current policy charges.

How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term

Under your base variable life insurance policy, monthly deductions are allocated to the variable investment options and the Unloaned GIO according to deduction allocation percentages specified by you or based on a proportionate allocation should any of the individual investment option values be insufficient.

However, if the Market Stabilizer Option® is elected, on the Segment Start Date, deduction allocation percentages will be changed so that

100% of monthly deductions will be taken from the Charge Reserve Amount and then any remaining value in the Unloaned GIO, if the Charge Reserve Amount is depleted, during the Segment Term. In addition, if the value in the Unloaned GIO is ever insufficient to cover monthly deductions during the Segment Term, the base policy’s proportionate allocation procedure will be modified as follows:

1.

The first step will be to take the remaining portion of the deductions proportionately from the values in the variable investment options, including any value in the MSO Holding Account but excluding any Segment Account Values.

2.

If the Unloaned GIO and variable investment options, including any value in the MSO Holding Account, are insufficient to cover deductions in their entirety, the remaining amount will be allocated to the individual Segments proportionately, based on the current Segment Distribution Values.

3.

Any portion of a monthly deduction allocated to an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value.

The effect of those procedures is that account value will be taken out of a Segment to pay a monthly deduction (and an EDA therefore applied) only if there is no remaining account value in any other investment options, as listed in 1. and 2. above.

In addition, your policy will lapse if your net policy account value is not enough to pay your policy’s monthly charges when due (unless one of the available guarantees against termination is applicable). If you have amounts allocated to MSO Segments, the Segment Distribution Value will be used in place of the Segment Account Value in calculating the net policy account value.

These modifications will apply during any period in which a Segment exists and has not yet reached its Segment Maturity Date.

Early Distribution Adjustment

Overview

Before a Segment matures, if you surrender your policy, take a loan from a Segment or if we should find it necessary to make deductions for monthly charges or other distributions from a Segment, we will apply an Early Distribution Adjustment.

The application of the EDA is based on your agreement (under the terms of the MSO) to be exposed to the risk that, at the Segment Maturity Date, the Index will have fallen by more than 25%. The EDA uses what we refer to as a Put Option Factor to estimate the market value, at the time of an early distribution, of the risk that you would suffer a loss if your Segment were continued (without taking the early distribution) until its Segment Maturity Date. By charging you with a deduction equal to that estimated value, the EDA provides a treatment for an early distribution that is designed to be consistent with how distributions at the end of a Segment are treated when the Index has declined over the course of that Segment.

In the event of an early distribution, even if the Index has experienced positive performance since the Segment Start Date, the EDA will cause you to lose principal through the application of the Put Option Factor and that loss may be substantial. That is because there is always some risk that the Index would have declined by the Segment Maturity Date such that you would suffer a loss if the Segment were

38


continued (without taking any early distribution) until that time. However, the other component of the EDA is the proportionate refund of the Variable Index Benefit Charge (discussed below under “Important Considerations”) which is a positive adjustment to you. As a result, the overall impact of the EDA is to reduce your Segment Account Value and your other policy values except in the limited circumstances where the proportionate refund is greater than your loss from the Put Option Factor.

We determine the EDA and the Put Option Factor by formulas that are described below under “Additional Detail.”

Important Considerations

When any surrender, loan, charge deduction or other distribution is made from a Segment before its Segment Maturity Date:

1.

You will forfeit any positive Index performance with respect to these amounts. Instead, any of these pre-Segment Maturity Date distributions will cause an EDA to be applied that will usually result in a reduction in your values. Therefore, you should give careful considerationbefore takingany such early loan or surrender, or allowing the value in your other investment options to fall so low that we must make any monthly deduction from a Segment; and

2.

The EDA will be applied, which means that:

a.

If the Index has fallen more than 25% since the Segment Start Date, the EDA would generally have the effect of charging you for (i) the full amount of that loss below 25%, plus (ii) an additional amount for the risk that the Index might decline further by the Segment Maturity Date. (Please see example III in Appendix I for further information.)

b.

If the Index has fallen since the Segment Start Date, but by less than 25%, the EDA would charge you for the risk that, by the Segment Maturity Date, the index might have declined further to a point more than 25% below what it was at the Segment Start Date. (Please see example I in Appendix I for further information.) This charge would generally be less than the amount by which the Index had fallen from the Segment Start Date through the date we apply the EDA. It also would generally be less than it would be under the circumstances in 2a. above.

c.

If the Index has risen since the Segment Start Date, the EDA would not credit you with any of such favorable investment performance. Instead, the EDA would charge you for the risk that, by the Segment Maturity Date, the index might have declined to a point more than 25% below what it was at the Segment Start Date. (Please see examples II and IV in Appendix I for further information.) This charge would generally be less than it would be under the circumstances in 2a. and 2b. above.

In addition to the consequences discussed in 2. above, the EDA also has the effect of pro rating the Variable Index Benefit Charge. As discussed further below, this means that you in effect would receive a proportionate refund of this charge for the portion of the Segment Term that follows the early surrender, loan, policy distribution, or charge deduction that caused us to apply the EDA. In limited circumstances, this refund may cause the total EDA to be positive.

For the reasons discussed above, the Early Distribution Adjustment to the Segment Account Value will usually reduce the amount you would receive when you surrender your policy prior to a Segment Maturity Date. For loans and charge deductions, the Early Distribution Adjustment would usually further reduce the account value remaining in the Segment Account Value and therefore decrease the Segment Maturity Value.

Additional Detail

For purposes of determining the Segment Distribution Value prior to a Segment Maturity Date, the EDA is:

(a)

the Put Option Factor multiplied by the Segment Account Value

-minus-

(b)

a pro rata portion of the 0.75% Variable Index Benefit Charge attributable to the Segment Account Value. (Please see “Charges” earlier in this section for an explanation of this charge.)

The Put Option Factor multiplied by the Segment Account Value represents, at any time during the Segment Term, the estimated market value of your potential exposure to negative S&P 500 Price Return index performance that is worse than-25%. The Put Option Factor, on any date, represents the estimated value on that date of a hypothetical “put option” (as described below) on the Index having a notional value equal to $1 and strike price at Segment Maturity equal to $0.75 ($1 plus the Downside Protection which is currently-25%). The strike price of the option ($0.75) is the difference between a 100% loss in the S&P 500 Price Return index at Segment Maturity and the 25% loss at Segment Maturity that would be absorbed by the Downside Protection feature of the MSO (please see “Growth Cap Rate” earlier in this section for an explanation of the Downside Protection.) In a put option on an index, the seller will pay the buyer, at the maturity of the option, the difference between the strike price — which was set at issue — and the underlying index closing price, in the event that the closing price is below the strike price. Prior to the maturity of the put option, its value generally will have an inverse relationship with the index. The notional value can be described as the price of the underlying index at inception of the contract. Using a notional value of $1 facilitates computation of the percentage change in the Index and the put option factor.

The Company will utilize a fair market value methodology to determine the Put Option Factor.

For this purpose, we use the Black Scholes formula for valuing a European put option on the S&P 500 Price Return index, assuming a continuous dividend yield, with inputs that are consistent with current market prices.

The inputs to the Black Scholes Model include:

(1)

Implied Volatility of the Index — This input varies with (i) how much time remains until the Maturity Date of the Segment from which an early distribution is being made, which is determined by using an expiration date for the hypothetical put option that corresponds to that time remaining and (ii) the relationship between the strike price of the hypothetical put option and the level of the S&P 500 Price Return index at the time of the early distribution. This relationship is referred to as the “moneyness” of the hypothetical put option described above, and is calculated as the ratio of the $0.75 strike price of that hypothetical put option to what the level

39


of the S&P 500 Price Return index would be at the time of the early distribution if the Index had been $1 at the beginning of the Segment. Direct market data for these inputs for any given early distribution are generally not available, because put options on the Index that actually trade in the market have specific maturity dates and moneyness values that are unlikely to correspond precisely to the Maturity Date and moneyness of the hypothetical put option that we use for purposes of calculating the EDA.

Accordingly, we use the following method to estimate the implied volatility of the index. We receive daily quotes of implied volatility from banks using the same Black Scholes model described above and based on the market prices for certain S&P 500 Price Return put options. Specifically, implied volatility quotes are obtained for put options with the closest maturities above and below the actual time remaining in the Segment at the time of the early distribution and, for each maturity, for those put options having the closest moneyness value above and below the actual moneyness of the hypothetical put option described above, given the level of the S&P 500 Price Return index at the time of the early distribution. In calculating the Put Option Factor, we will derive a volatility input for your Segment’s time to maturity and strike price by linearly interpolating between the implied volatility quotes that are based on the actual adjacent maturities and moneyness values described above, as follows:

(a)

We first determine the implied volatility of a put option that has the same moneyness as the hypothetical put option but with the closest available time to maturity shorter than your Segment’s remaining time to maturity. This volatility is derived by linearly interpolating between the implied volatilities of put options having the moneyness values that are above and below the moneyness value of the hypothetical put option.

(b)

We then determine the implied volatility of a put option that has the same moneyness as the hypothetical put option but with the closest available time to maturity longer than your Segment’s remaining time to maturity. This volatility is derived by linearly interpolating between the implied volatilities of put options having the moneyness values that are above and below the moneyness value of the hypothetical put option.

(c)

The volatility input for your Segment’s time to maturity will then be determined by linearly interpolating between the volatilities derived in steps (a) and (b).

(2)

LIBOR Rate — Key duration LIBOR rates will be retrieved from a recognized financial reporting vendor. LIBOR rates will be retrieved for maturities adjacent to the actual time remaining in the Segment at the time of the early distribution. We will use linear interpolation to derive the exact remaining duration rate needed as the input.

(3)

Index Dividend Yield — On a daily basis we will get the projected annual dividend yield across the entire Index. This value is a widely used assumption and is readily available from recognized financial reporting vendors.

In general, the Put Option Factor has an inverse relationship with the S&P 500 Price Return index. In addition to the factors discussed above, the Put Option Factor is also influenced by time to Segment Maturity. We

determine Put Option Factors at the end of each business day. Generally, a business day is any day the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading. If any inputs to the Black Scholes formula are unavailable on a business day, we would use the value of the input from the most recent preceding business day. The Put Option Factor that applies to a transaction or valuation made on a business day will be the Factor for that day. The Put Option Factor that applies to a transaction or valuation made on anon-business day will be the Factor for the next business day.

Appendix I at the end of this prospectus provides examples of how the Early Distribution Adjustment is calculated.

Transfers

There is no charge to transfer into and out of the MSO Holding Account and you can make a transfer at any time to or from the investment options available under your policy subject to any transfer restrictions within your policy. Any restrictions applicable to transfers between the MSO Holding Account and such investment options would be the same transfer restrictions applicable to transfers between the investment options available under your policy. However, once policy account value has been swept from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment, transfers into or out of that Segment before its Segment Maturity Date will not be permitted. Please note that while a Segment is in effect, before the Segment Maturity Date, the amount available for transfers from the Unloaned GIO will be limited to avoid reducing the Unloaned GIO below the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Thus the amount available for transfers from the Unloaned GIO will not be greater than any excess of the Unloaned GIO over the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Withdrawals

Once policy account value has been swept from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment, you will not be allowed to withdraw the account value out of a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date unless you surrender your policy. You may also take a loan; please see “Loans” later in this section for more information. Any account value taken out of a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date will generate an Early Distribution Adjustment. Please note that while a Segment is in effect, before the Segment Maturity Date, the amount available for withdrawals from the Unloaned GIO will be limited to avoid reducing the Unloaned GIO below the Charge Reserve Amount. Thus, if there is any policy account value in a Segment, the amount which would otherwise be available to you for a partial withdrawal of net cash surrender value will be reduced, by the amount (if any) by which the sum of your Segment Distribution Values and the Charge Reserve Amount exceeds the policy surrender charge.

If the policy owner does not indicate or if we cannot allocate the withdrawal as requested due to insufficient funds, we will allocate the withdrawal proportionately from your values in the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and your values in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account.

Cash Surrender Value, Net Cash Surrender Value and Loan Value

If you have amounts allocated to MSO Segments, the Segment Distribution Values will be used in place of the Segment Account Values in calculating the amount of any cash surrender value, net cash surrender value and maximum amount available for loans. This means an EDA would apply to those amounts. Please see Appendix I for more information.

40


Guideline Premium Force-outs

For policies that use the Guideline Premium Test, a new Segment will not be established or created if we determine, when we process your election, that a distribution from the policy will be required to maintain its qualification as life insurance under federal tax law at any time during the Segment Term.

However, during a Segment Term if a distribution becomes necessary under theforce-out rules of Section 7702 of the Internal Revenue Code, it will be deducted proportionately from the values in the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and in any variable investment option, including any value in the MSO Holding Account but excluding any Segment Account Values.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and variable investment options, including any value in the MSO Holding Account, are insufficient to cover theforce-out in its entirety, any remaining amount required to be forced out will be taken from the individual Segments proportionately, based on the current Segment Distribution Values.

Any portion of aforce-out distribution taken from an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the remaining Charge Reserve Amount), together with the variable investment options including any value in the MSO Holding Account, and the Segment Distribution Values, is still insufficient to cover theforce-out in its entirety, the remaining amount of theforce-out will be allocated to the Unloaned GIO and reduce or eliminate any remaining Charge Reserve Amount under the Unloaned GIO.

Loans

You may specify how your loan is to be allocated among the MSO, the variable investment options and the Unloaned GIO. Any portion of a requested loan allocated to the MSO will be redeemed from the individual Segments and the MSO Holding Account proportionately, based on the value of the MSO Holding Account and the current Segment Distribution Values of each Segment. Any portion allocated to an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value and be subject to a higher guaranteed maximum loan spread (2% for policies with a contract state of New York and Oregon and 5% for other policies).

If you do not specify or if we cannot allocate the loan according to your specifications, we will allocate the loan proportionately from your values in the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and your values in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the remaining amount of the Charge Reserve Amount), together with the variable investment options including any value in the MSO Holding Account, are insufficient to cover the loan in its entirety, the remaining amount of the loan will be allocated to the individual Segments proportionately, based on current Segment Distribution Values.

Any portion of a loan allocated to an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value and be subject to a higher guaranteed maximum loan spread.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the remaining amount of the Charge Reserve Amount), together with the variable investment options including any value in the MSO Holding Account and the Segment Distribution Values, are still insufficient to cover the loan in its entirety, the remaining amount of the loan will be allocated to the Unloaned GIO and will reduce or eliminate the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Loan interest is due on each policy anniversary. If the interest is not paid when due, it will be added to your outstanding loan and allocated on the same basis as monthly deductions. See “How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term.”

Whether or not any Segment is in effect and has not yet reached its Segment Maturity Date, loan repayments will first reduce any loaned amounts that are subject to the higher maximum loan interest spread. Loan repayments will first be used to restore any amounts that, before being designated as loan collateral, had been in the Unloaned GIO. Any portion of an additional loan repayment allocated to the MSO at the policy owner’s direction (or according to premium allocation percentages) will be transferred to the MSO Holding Account to await the next available Segment Start Date and will be subject to the same conditions described earlier in this section.

Please see “Borrowing from your policy” under “Accessing your money” later in this prospectus for information regarding additional policy loan provisions.

Paid Up Death Benefit Guarantee and the No Lapse Guarantees

Please note that the MSO is not available while the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect. The MSO is also not available if you elect the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider.

Requested Face Amount Increases

Please also see “You can increase or decrease your insurance coverage” under Risks/benefits summary: Policy features, benefits and risks earlier in this prospectus for conditions that will also apply for a requested face amount increase.

If you wish to make a face amount increase during a Segment Term, the MSO requires that a minimum amount of policy account value be available to be transferred into the Unloaned GIO (if not already present in the Unloaned GIO), and that the balance after deduction of monthly charges remain there during the longest remaining Segment Term subject to any loans as described above. This minimum amount will be any amount necessary to supplement the existing Charge Reserve Amount so as to be projected to be sufficient to cover all monthly deductions during the longest remaining Segment Term. Such amount will be determined assuming at the time such calculation is made that no interest or investment performance is credited to or charged against the policy account value, and that no further policy changes or additional premium payments are made.

Any necessary transfers to supplement the amount already present in the Unloaned GIO in order to meet this minimum requirement will take effect on the effective date of the face amount increase. There will be no charge for this transfer. Any transfer from the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account will be made in accordance with your directions. Your transfer instructions will be requested as part of the process for requesting the face amount increase. If the requested allocation is not possible due to insufficient

41


funds, the required amount will be transferred proportionately from the variable investment options, as well as the MSO Holding Account. If such transfers are not possible due to insufficient funds, your requested face amount increase will be declined.

Your right to cancel within a certain number of days

Please also see “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” under “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus for more information regarding your right to cancel your policy within a certain number of days. However, the provisions in that section that address when amounts will be allocated to the investment options do not apply to amounts allocated to the MSO.

In those states that require us to return your premium without adjustment for investment performance within a certain number of days, we might usewill initially put all amounts which you have allocated to the NASDAQMSO into our EQ/Money Market investment option. In this case, on the first business day following the later of the twentieth day after your policy is issued or the S&P 400 Price Return Index.Investment Start Date (30th day in most states if your policy is issued as the result of a replacement, 60th day in NY), we will reallocate those amounts to the MSO Holding Account where they will remain until the next available Segment Start Date, at which time such amounts will be transferred to a new Segment of the MSO subject to meeting the conditions described in this section. However, if we have not received all necessary requirements for your policy as of the day your policy is issued, we will reallocate those amounts to the MSO Holding Account on the 20th day (longer if your policy is issued as the result of a replacement) following the date we receive all necessary requirements to put your policy in force at our Administrative Office. Your financial professional can provide further information on what requirements may apply to your policy.

In all other states, any amounts allocated to the MSO will first be allocated to the MSO Holding Account where they will remain for 20 days (unless the policy is issued as the result of a replacement, in which case amounts in the MSO Holding Account will remain there for 30 days (45 days in PA)). Thereafter, such amounts will be transferred to a new Segment of the MSO on the next available Segment Start Date, subject to meeting the conditions described in this prospectus.

Segment Maturity GIO Limitation

Upon advance notification, we reserve the right to limit the amount of your Segment Maturity Value that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. However, that limitation will never be less than 5% of your Segment Maturity Value. We will transfer any portion of your Segment Maturity Value that is allocated to the guaranteed interest option in excess of the Segment Maturity GIO Limitation to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option unless we receive your instructions prior to the Segment Maturity Date that the Segment Maturity Value should be allocated to the MSO Holding Account or to any other available variable investment option. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

Right to Discontinue and Limit Amounts Allocated to the MSO

 

We reserve the right to offerrestrict or terminate future allocations to the MSO at any time. If this right were ever to be exercised by us, all Segments outstanding as of the effective date of the restriction would

be guaranteed to continue uninterrupted until the Segment Maturity Date. As each such Segment matured, the balance would be reallocated to the Unloaned GIO and/or all Segment Types more or less frequently than we have beenvariable investment options per your instructions, or to stop offering any or all of them or tothe EQ/Money Market investment option if no instructions are received. We may also temporarily suspend offering Segments at any or all of them temporarilytime and for some or all contracts or Series. If we stop offering or suspend certain Segment Types, each existing Segment of those Segment Types will remain invested until its respective Segment Maturity Date.any reason including emergency conditions as determined by the Securities and Exchange Commission. We also reserve the right to establish a maximum amount for any single policy that can be allocated to the MSO.

 

Dollar Cap Averaging Program42


6. Determining your policy’s value

Your policy account value

 

Our Dollar Cap Averaging Program (“Program”As set forth earlier in this prospectus, we deduct certain charges from each premium payment you make. We credit the rest of each premium payment to your “policy account value.” You instruct us to allocate your policy account value to one or more of the policy’s investment options indicated on the front cover of this prospectus.

Your policy account value is the total of (i) your amounts in our variable investment options, (ii) your Segment Account Value(s) as described in “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” earlier in this prospectus, (iii) your amounts in our guaranteed interest option (other than in (iv)), and (iv) any amounts that we are holding to secure policy loans that you have taken (including any interest on those amounts which has not yet been allocated to the investment options). See “Borrowing from your policy” later in this prospectus. Your “net policy account value” is the total of (i), (ii) and (iii) above, plus any interest credited on loaned amounts, minus any interest accrued on outstanding loans and minus any “restricted” amounts that we hold in the guaranteed interest option as a result of any payment received under a Living Benefits Rider. (Your policy and other supplemental material may refer to the account that holds the amounts in (iii) and (iv) above as our “Guaranteed Interest Account.”) Your policy account value is an administrative service designedsubject to systematicallycertain charges discussed in “Risk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay” earlier in this prospectus.

Your policy account value will be credited with the same returns as are achieved by the Portfolios that you select and interest credited on amounts in the guaranteed interest option, and is reduced by the amount of charges we deduct under the policy.

Your policy’s value in our variable investment options.  We invest the policy account value that you have allocated to any variable investment option in shares of the corresponding Portfolio. Your value in each variable investment option is measured by “units.”

The number of your units in any variable investment option does not change, absent an event or transaction under your policy that involves moving assets into or out of that option. Whenever any amount is withdrawn or otherwise deducted from one of your policy’s variable investment options, we “redeem” (cancel) the number of units that has a value equal to that amount. This can happen, for example, when all or a portion of monthly deductions and transaction-based charges are allocated to that option, or when loans, transfers, withdrawals and surrenders are made from that option. Similarly, you “purchase” additional units having the same value as the amount of any premium (after deduction of any premium charge), loan repayment, or transfer that you allocate to that option.

The value of each unit will increase or decrease each business day, as though you had invested in the corresponding Portfolio’s shares directly (and reinvested all dividends and distributions from the Portfolio in additional Portfolio shares). On any day, your value in any variable investment option equals the number of units credited to your policy under that option, multiplied by that day’s value for one such unit. The mortality and expense risk charge mentioned earlier in

this prospectus is calculated as a percentage of the available Segments over a period of either three or six months. The Program investsvalue you have in the dollar cap averaging account, which is partvariable investment options and the Segment Account Values of the EQ/Money MarketMSO, and deducted monthly from your policy account based on your deduction allocations unless the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider or the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect. For more information on how we allocate charges, see “How we allocate charges among your investment options” earlier in this prospectus.

Your policy’s value in our guaranteed interest option.  Your policy’s value in our guaranteed interest option includes: (i) any amounts that have been allocated to that option, based on your request, and (ii) any “restricted” amounts that we hold in that option as a result of your election to receive a living benefit. See “Your option to receive a terminal illness living benefit under the Living Benefits Rider,” later in this prospectus. We credit all of such amounts with interest at rates we declare from time to time. We guarantee that these rates will not be less than a 2% effective annual rate. However, we reserve the right to limit the percentage of your premium that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option, or to reject certain requests to transfer amounts to the unloaned portion of your guaranteed interest option as described in greater detail throughout this prospectus. We may also limit the percentage of any additional loan repayments that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option after you have repaid any loaned amounts that were taken from the guaranteed interest option.See “Guaranteed interest option” under “Investment options within your policy” in “Risk/benefit summary: Policy features, benefits and risks” earlier in this prospectus and “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information on such limitation amounts.

Amounts may be allocated to or removed from your policy’s value in our guaranteed interest option for the same purposes as described earlier in this prospectus for the variable investment options. We credit your policy with a number of dollars in that option that equals any amount that is being allocated to it. Similarly, if amounts are being removed from your guaranteed interest option for any reason, we reduce the amount you have credited to that option on adollar-for-dollar basis.

If the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider was elected at issue and is in effect, we will not allow any amount of the policy account value to be transferred or allocated to the guaranteed interest option. In addition, if you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee, we will restrict the amount of the policy account value that can be transferred or allocated to the guaranteed interest option.

Your policy’s value in the Market Stabilizer Option®.  Your policy account value that has been allocated to any Segment of the MSO will not fluctuate daily with investment performance. Each Segment has a Segment Account that is used in the calculation of your policy account values and represents the amount to which the Index-Linked Rate of Return will be applied to on a Segment Maturity Date to determine the Index Linked-Return. The Index-Linked Rate of Return, not to exceed the applicable Growth Cap Rate, is not applied to any Segment Account prior to its Segment Maturity Date. Only the amount in a Segment Account is subject to the “downside protection” on the Segment Maturity Date. Please see “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” earlier in this prospectus for more detailed information.

43


7. Transferring your money among our investment options

Transfers you can make

You can transfer among our variable investment options and into our guaranteed interest option. However, certain restrictions may apply.

After your policy’s Allocation Date, you can transfer amounts from one investment option to another subject to certain restrictions discussed below. Currently, the total of all transfers you make on the same day must be at least $500; except that you may transfer your entire balance in an investment option, even if it is less than $500. We reserve the right to lower this $500 limit upon written notice to you. We also reserve the right to restrict transfers among variable investment options and transfers out of the guaranteed interest option as described in your policy, including limitations on the number, frequency, or dollar cap averagingamount of transfers.

Certain transfer restrictions apply if the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider or the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect. For more information, see “Paid up death benefit guarantee” and the “Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits.” If your policy is placed on loan extension, we will transfer any remaining policy account value in the variable investment options and the Segments in the MSO to the guaranteed interest option. No transfers from the guaranteed interest option are permitted thereafter.

Please see “Investment options within your policy” in “Risk/benefit summary: Policy features, benefits and risks” for more information about your role in managing your allocations.

Restrictions on transfers into the guaranteed interest option.Notwithstanding the above, upon advance notification, the Company has the right to reject any transfer you request from the variable investment options to the unloaned portion of the guaranteed interest option if the transfer would result in the unloaned portion of the guaranteed interest option exceeding a specified percentage of the total unloaned policy account value. The specified percentage limitation on requested transfers to the guaranteed interest option can be changed at any time, but it will never be less than 5%. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

After the first two policy years and if the attained age of the insured is less than 65, we may limit transfers you can make into the unloaned GIO if the current (non-guaranteed) interest crediting rate on the unloaned GIO is equal to the guaranteed minimum interest crediting rate of 2% (annual rate). In this instance, the maximum amount that may be transferred from the variable investment options to the unloaned GIO in a policy year is the greater of: (a) $500 and (b) 25% of the total amount in the variable investment options at the beginning of the policy year. If this amount is exceeded in any policy year during which the transfer limit becomes effective, additional transfers into the unloaned GIO will not be permitted during that policy year while the limit remains in effect.

Additionally, when the paid up death benefit guarantee is exercised, if the EnhancedNo-Lapse Rider is in effect or if there are any Segments of the MSO in effect, restrictions and/or limitations may apply on transfers into the guaranteed interest option. For more information, please see “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” earlier in this prospectus and “More information about policy features and benefits” later in this prospectus.

Current unrestricted transfers out of the guaranteed interest option.  We are relaxing our policy rules so that, beginning on the business day after the Allocation Date and thereafter, you may transfer any amount of unloaned policy account hasvalue out of the guaranteed interest option to any other investment option until further notice. If we decide to change our limitations on transfers out of the guaranteed interest option, we will provide you with notice of at least 30 days.

See the “How to make transfers” section below on how you can request a transfer. In general, transfers take effect on the date the request is received. However, any written, telephone, Internet or facsimile transaction requests received after 4:00 p.m. (Eastern Time) take effect the next business day.

Please note that the ability to make unresticted transfers from the guaranteed interest option does not apply to any amounts that we are holding as collateral for a policy loan or as “restricted” amounts as a result of your election to receive a living benefit, if available under your policy. In addition, if you elect to transfer account value to the Market Stabilizer Option® (“MSO”), if available under your policy, there must be sufficient funds remaining in the guaranteed interest option to cover the Charge Reserve Amount. Finally, there may be a charge for making this transfer. Please see “Risk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay” earlier in this prospectus for more information about charges for this transfer.

If the policy is on loan extension, transfers out of the guaranteed interest option are not permitted.

Transfers under the Market Stabilizer Option® (“MSO”).Although, under the policy, we reserve the right to apply a transfer charge up to $25 for each transfer among your investment options, there is no charge to transfer into and out of the MSO Holding Account and you can make a transfer at any time to or from the investment options available under your policy subject to any transfer restrictions within your policy. Any restrictions applicable to transfers between the MSO Holding Account and such investment options would be the same ratetransfer restrictions applicable to transfers between the investment options available under your policy. However, once policy account value has been swept from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment, transfers into or out of returnthat Segment before its Segment Maturity Date will not be permitted. Please note that while a Segment is in effect, before the Segment Maturity Date, the amount available for transfers from the Unloaned GIO will be limited to avoid reducing the Unloaned GIO below the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Thus the amount available for transfers from the Unloaned GIO will not be greater than any excess of the Unloaned GIO over the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Disruptive transfer activity.  We reserve the right to limit access to the services described below if we determine that you are engaged in a disruptive transfer activity, such as “market timing” (see “Disruptive transfer activity” in “More information about other matters”).

44


How to make transfers

Internet transfers.  Generally, you can make transfers over the EQ/Money market variable investment option.Internet if you are the owner of the policy. You may do this by visiting our www.equitable.com (for those outside the U.S.) website and registering for online account access. This service may not always be available. The Programrestrictions relating to transfers are described below.

Online transfers.  You can make online transfers by following one of two procedures:

For individually owned policies for which you are the owner, by logging onto our website, described under “By Internet” in “How to reach us” earlier in this prospectus; or

For corporation and trust owned policies, we require a special authorization form to obtain access. The form is available on our website www.equitable.com for those outside the U.S., or by contacting our Administrative Office.

For more information, see “Telephone and Internet requests” later in this prospectus. We allow only one request for transfers each day (although that request can cover multiple transfers). If you are unable to reach us via our website, you should send a written transfer request to our Administrative Office.

Transfers through our Administrative Office.  You may submit a written request for a transfer to our Administrative Office. We require a written request for jointly owned policies.

Our automatic transfer service

We offer an automatic transfer service. This service allows you to gradually allocate amounts to available Segment Type Holding Accountsthe variable investment options by periodically transferring approximately the same dollar amount to your selected Segment Type Holding Accounts. Regular allocations to the Segment Type Holding Accountsvariable investment options you select. This will allowcause you to invest inpurchase more units if the Segments at different Performance Cap Rates. This plan of investing, however,unit’s value is low, and fewer units if the unit’s value is high. Therefore, you may achieve a lower average cost per unit over the long-term.

Using the automatic transfer service does not guarantee that you will earn a profit or be protected against losses. We may, at any time, exercise our right to terminate transfers to any of the Segment Type Holding Accounts, limit the number of Segments which you may elect or discontinue offering the Program.

 

Under the Dollar Cap Averaging Program, the following applies:

The minimum initial contribution requiredOur automatic transfer service (also referred to establish a Program is $25,000.

There is no minimum contribution requirement for subsequent contributionsas our “dollar cost averaging service”) enables you to an existing Program. Subsequent contributions do not extend the time period of the Program. Subsequent contributions will increase the amount of each periodic transfer into the designated Segment Type Holding Account(s) for the remainder of the Program.

The Program can be funded from both new contributions to your contract andmake automatic monthly transfers from the investment options, including the EQ/Money Market option to our other variable investment option.

Ifoptions and the MSO. You may elect the automatic transfer service with your policy application or at any later time (provided you elect to invest inare not using the Program at contract issue, 100% of your initial contributionasset rebalancing service described below). At least $5,000 must be allocated to the Program. InEQ/Money Market option to begin using the automatic transfer service. You can choose up to eight other words,variable investment options to receive the automatic transfers, but each transfer to each option must be at least $50.

This service terminates when the EQ/Money Market option is depleted. Also, this service will automatically terminate if you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee or your initial contribution cannotpolicy is placed on loan extension. You can also cancel the automatic transfer service at any time by sending a written request to our Administrative Office. You may not simultaneously participate in the asset rebalancing service and the automatic transfer service.

We will not deduct a transfer charge for any transfer made in connection with our automatic transfer service. This service is not available while the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider is in effect.

Our asset rebalancing service

You may wish us to periodically redistribute the amounts you have in our variable investment options so that the relative amount of your policy account value in each variable option is restored to an asset allocation that you select. You can accomplish this automatically through our asset rebalancing service. The rebalancing may be split between your Program and any otherat quarterly, semiannual, or annual intervals.

You may specify asset allocation percentages for all available variable investment options (excluding the MSO Holding Account) up to a maximum of 50. The allocation percentage you specify for each variable investment option availableselected must be at least 2% (whole percentages only) of the total value you hold under the contract.variable investment options, and the sum of the percentages must equal 100%. You may not simultaneously participate in the asset rebalancing service and the automatic transfer service (discussed above).

 

YourYou may request the asset rebalancing service in your policy application or at any later time by completing our enrollment form. At any time, you may also terminate the rebalancing program or make changes to your allocations under the program. Once enrolled in the rebalancing service, it will remain in effect until you instruct us in writing to terminate the service. Requesting an investment option transfer while enrolled in our asset rebalancing service will not automatically change your allocation instructions for rebalancing your account value. This means that upon the next scheduled rebalancing, we will transfer amounts among your investment options pursuant to the allocation instructions previously on file for your rebalancing service. Changes to your allocation instructions for the Programrebalancing service (or termination of your enrollment in the service) must match your instructions on file on the day the Program is established. If you change your allocation instructions on file, the instructionsbe in writing and sent to our Administrative Office.

We will not deduct a transfer charge for your Programany transfer made in connection with our asset rebalancing service. Also, this service will change to match your new allocation instructions.

You may not specify a Performance Cap Thresholdautomatically terminate if you elect to invest in the Program. This means you will invest inpaid up death benefit guarantee or your policy is placed on loan extension. Certain investment options, such as the Segment(s) based on the Performance Cap Rate declared on the Segment Start Date, which could include Segments with Performance Cap Rates thatguaranteed interest option, are not acceptable to you.

We offer time periods of 3 and 6 months. We may also offer other time periods. You may only have one time periodavailable investment options with the asset rebalancing service. This service is not available while the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider is in effect at any time and once you select a time period, you may not change it.effect.

Currently, your account value will be transferred from the Program into your designated Segment Type Holding Account(s) on a monthly basis (using the first transfer into a Segment as the starting point for the monthly transfers). For example, if the first Segment Start Date is the first Thursday in June, each subsequent Dollar Cap Averaging transfer will generally occur on the first Thursday of the month until the requested duration is met. We may offer the Program in the future with transfers on a different basis. You can learn more about the Program by contacting your financial professional or our processing office.

Transfers from the dollar cap averaging account into the designated Segment Type Holding Account(s) will occur the business day preceding the next Segment Start Date. For example, if

 

 

3845


8. Accessing your money

Borrowing from your policy

You may borrow up to 90% of the cash surrender value, less any outstanding loan and accrued loan interest before the policy year in which the insured reaches age 75 (100% thereafter). In your policy, the cash surrender value is equal to the difference between your policy account value and any surrender charges that are in effect under your policy. However, the amount you can borrow will be reduced by any amount that we hold on a “restricted” basis following your receipt of a terminal illness living benefits payment, as well as by any other loans (and accrued loan interest) you have outstanding and reduced for any monthly payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider. See “More information about policy features and benefits: Other benefits you can add by rider: Long-Term Care ServicesSMRider” later in this prospectus. See “Your option to receive a terminal illness living benefit under the Living Benefits Rider” below. The minimum loan amount generally is $500. Please also see “Loans” under “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” earlier in this prospectus should you borrow from values allocated to the MSO.

You can use policy loans to obtain funds from your policy without surrender charges or, in most cases, paying current income taxes. However, the borrowed amount is no longer credited with the investment results of any of our investment options under the policy.

When you take a policy loan, we remove an amount equal to the loan from one or more of your investment options and hold it as collateral for the loan’s repayment. We hold this loan collateral under the same terms and conditions as apply to amounts supporting our guaranteed interest option, with several exceptions:

you cannot make transfers or withdrawals of the collateral;

we expect to credit different rates of interest to loan collateral than we credit under our guaranteed interest option;

we do not count the collateral when we compute our customer loyalty credit; and

the collateral is not available to pay policy charges.

When you request a loan, you should tell us how much of the loan collateral you wish to have taken from any amounts you have in each of our investment options. Please also see “Loans” under “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” earlier in this prospectus should you borrow from values allocated to the MSO. Please note that any portion of a loan allocated to an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value and be subject to a higher guaranteed maximum loan spread.If you do not give us directions (or if we are making the loan automatically to cover unpaid loan interest), we will take the loan from your investment options in the same proportion as we are taking monthly deductions for charges. If that is not possible, we will take the loan from your investment options in proportion to your value in each. If the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider or the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect and you do not give us directions or the directions cannot be

followed due to insufficient funds (or we are making the loan automatically to cover unpaid loan interest), we will take the loan from your investment options in proportion to your value in each.

Loan interest we charge.  The interest we charge on a policy loan accrues daily at an adjustable interest rate. We determine the rate at the beginning of each year of your policy and that rate applies to all policy loans that are outstanding at any time during the year. The maximum rate is the greater of (a) 3% or (b) the “Monthly Average Corporate” yield published in Moody’s Corporate Bond Yield Averages for the month that ends two months before the interest rate is set. (If that average is no longer published, we will use another average, as the policy provides.) Currently, the loan interest rate is 3% for the first ten policy years and 2% thereafter. We will notify you of the current loan interest rate when you apply for a loan and annually on the annual report, and will notify you in advance of any rate increase.

Loan interest payments are due on each policy anniversary. If not paid when due, we automatically add the interest as a new policy loan.

Interest that we credit on loan collateral.  Under our current rules, the annual interest rate we credit on your loan collateral during any of your policy’s first ten years will be 1% less than the rate we are then charging you for policy loan interest, and, beginning in the policy’s 11th year, equal to the loan interest rate. The elimination of the rate differential is not guaranteed, however. Accordingly, we have discretion to increase the rate differential for any period, including under policies that are already in force (and may have an outstanding loan). We do guarantee that the annual rate of interest credited on your loan collateral will never be less than 2% and that the differential will not exceed 1%. Please also see “Loans” under “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” earlier in this prospectus should you allocate your loan to the MSO.

Because Incentive Life Optimizer® II was first offered in 2010, the interest rate differential has not yet been eliminated under anyin-force policies.

We credit interest on your loan collateral daily. On each anniversary of your policy (or when your policy loan is fully repaid) we transfer that interest to your policy’s investment options in the same proportions as if it were a premium payment. If your policy is on loan extension, we transfer the interest to the unloaned guaranteed interest option. If the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect, we transfer the interest to the investment options in accordance with your allocation instructions on record.

Effects of a policy loan.  If not repaid, the aggregate amount of the outstanding loan and any accrued loan interest will reduce your cash surrender value and your life insurance benefit that might otherwise be payable. We will deduct any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest from your policy’s proceeds if you do not pay it back. Also, a loan can reduce the length of time that your insurance remains in force, because the amount we set aside as loan collateral cannot be used to pay charges as they become due. A loan can also cause any paid up death benefit guarantee to terminate or

46


may cause the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider or theno-lapse guarantee to become unavailable.

A policy loan, repaid or not, has a permanent effect on your cash surrender value. This results because the investment results of each investment option apply only to the amounts remaining in such investment options. The longer the loan is outstanding, the greater the effect on your cash surrender value is likely to be.

Even if a loan is not taxable when made, it may later become taxable, for example, upon termination or surrender. A policy loan can affect your policy account value and death benefit, even if you have repaid the loan. See “Tax information” below for a discussion of the tax consequences of a policy loan.

Paying off your loan.  You can repay all or part of your loan at any time. We normally assume that payments you send us are premium payments unless the policy has lapsed and the payment is received during the61-day grace period. See “Policy ‘lapse’ and termination” in “The minimum amount of premiums you must pay” under “Risk/ benefit summary: Policy features, benefits and risks” for more information. Therefore, you must submit instructions with your payment indicating that it is a loan repayment. If you send us more than all of the loan principal and interest you owe, we will treat the excess as a premium payment. Any payment received while the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect, the policy is on loan extension or you are receiving monthly payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider will be applied as a loan repayment (or refunded if it is in excess of the loan amount and outstanding interest).

When you send us a loan repayment, we will transfer an amount equal to such repayment from your loan collateral back to the investment options under your policy. First we will restore any amounts that, before being designated as loan collateral, had been in the guaranteed interest option under your policy. We will allocate any additional repayments among the investment options as you instruct; or, if you don’t instruct us, in the same proportion as if they were premium payments. However, if the policy guaranteed interest option limitation is in effect, we will limit you from allocating more than a specified percentage of each additional repayment to the guaranteed interest option. Any portion of the additional loan repayment in excess of the limitation amount will be allocated to the variable investment options in proportion to any loan repayment amounts for the variable investment options that you have specified with that loan repayment. Otherwise, the excess will be allocated in proportion to the premium allocation percentages for the variable investment options then in effect. If you have not specified any loan repayment amounts for the variable investment options and if there are no premium allocation percentages for any variable investment options then in effect, any portion of the additional loan repayment in excess of the limitation amount will be refunded to you (except for any minimum amount necessary to keep the policy from terminating, which will be allocated to the guaranteed interest option). The specified percentage limitation on additional loan repayments allocated to the guaranteed interest option can be changed at any time, but it will never be less than 5%. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

If you are to receive monthly benefit payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider, a pro rata portion of the loan and accrued loan interest to that date will be deducted from the monthly benefit payment as a loan repayment. This will reduce the monthly payment otherwise payable to you under the rider.

If the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect, any loan repayment allocated to the unloaned portion of the guaranteed interest option will be limited to an amount so that the value in the unloaned portion of the guaranteed interest option does not exceed 25% of the amount that you have in your unloaned policy account value. Any portion of the loan repayment that we cannot allocate to the guaranteed interest option will be allocated to the variable investment options in proportion to any amounts that you specified for that particular loan repayment. If you did not specify, we will allocate that portion of the loan repayment in proportion to the paid up death benefit guarantee allocation percentages for the variable investment options on record.

If the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider is in effect, any loan repayment will be allocated to the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options in proportion to any amounts that you specified for that particular loan repayment. If you did not specify, we will allocate that portion of the loan repayment in proportion to the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider premium allocation percentages for the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options on record.

Loan extension (for guideline premium test policies only)

Loan extension will protect against lapse of your policy due to an outstanding policy loan in certain circumstances. There is no additional charge for the loan extension feature. Your policy will automatically be placed on “loan extension,” if at the beginning of any policy month on or following the policy anniversary nearest the insured person’s 75th birthday, but not earlier than the 20th policy anniversary, all of the following conditions apply:

The net policy account value is not sufficient to cover the monthly deductions then due;

The amount of any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest is greater than the larger of (a) the current base policy face amount, or (b) the initial base policy face amount;

You have selected Death Benefit Option A;

You have not received a payment under either the Living Benefits Rider or the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider;

The policy is not in a grace period; and

No current or future distributions will be required to be paid from the policy to maintain its qualification as “life insurance” under the Internal Revenue Code.

When a policy goes on loan extension, all of the following will apply:

We will collect monthly deductions due under the policy up to the amount in the unloaned policy account value.

Any policy account value that is invested in our variable investment options will automatically be transferred to our guaranteed interest option; and no transfers out of the guaranteed interest option may thereafter be made into any of our variable investment options.

While a Segment of the MSO is in effect, any Segment Distribution Values will be transferred automatically to the Unloaned GIO and an Early Distribution Adjustment will be applied, and no transfers out of the GIO will be allowed into the MSO.

47


Loan interest will continue to accrue and we will send you a notice of any loan interest due on or about each policy anniversary. If the loan interest is not paid when due, it will be added to the outstanding loan balance.

No additional loans or partial withdrawals may be requested.

No changes in face amount or death benefit option may be requested.

No additional premium payments will be accepted. Any payments received will be applied as loan repayments. If a loan repayment is made, the repaid amount will become part of the unloaned guaranteed interest option. Any payment in excess of the outstanding loan balance will be refunded to you.

All additional benefit riders and endorsements will terminate, including the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider and the MSO.

No future allocations or transfers to the investment options will be accepted.

The paid up death benefit guarantee if applicable, may not be elected.

The policy will not thereafter lapse for any reason.

If the policy is on loan extension, the policy guaranteed interest option limitation will not apply.

On the policy anniversary when the insured attains age 75 and if such policy has been in force for 20 years, and each month thereafter, we will determine whether the policy is on loan extension. You will be sent a letter explaining the transactions that are allowed and prohibited while a policy is on loan extension. Once a policy is on loan extension, it will remain on loan extension during the lifetime of the insured unless the policy is surrendered.

If your policy is on loan extension, the death benefit payable under the policy is the greatest of (a), (b) and (c):

(a)

The greater of the policy account value or the outstanding loan and accrued loan interest on the date of the insured’s death, multiplied by a percentage shown in your policy;

(b)

The outstanding loan and accrued loan interest, plus $10,000; or

(c)

The base policy face amount on the date of death.

Other than as outlined above, all terms and conditions of your policy will continue to apply as if your policy is not on loan extension. If your policy is on loan extension, due to an absence of Internal Revenue Service guidance on such features, there is some uncertainty as to how the tax law might be applied in the future. For example, it is possible that in such circumstances, some or the entire outstanding loan could be treated as a distribution from the policy.

Making withdrawals from your policy

You may make a partial withdrawal of your net cash surrender value (defined below) at any time after the first year of your policy and before the policy anniversary nearest to the insured’s attained age 121, provided the paid up death benefit guarantee is not in effect, the policy is not on loan extension and you are not receiving monthly

benefit payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider. The request must be for at least $500, however, and we have discretion to decline any request. If you do not tell us from which investment options you wish us to take the withdrawal, we will use the same allocation that then applies for the monthly deductions we make for charges; and, if that is not possible, we will take the withdrawal from all of your investment options in proportion to your value in each. If you elected the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider and selected death benefit Option A, a partial withdrawal will reduce the current long-term care specified amount by the amount of the withdrawal, but not to less than the policy account value minus the withdrawal amount. If you selected death benefit Option B, the current long-term care specified amount will not be reduced. We will not deduct a charge for making a partial withdrawal. Please see the “Early Distribution Adjustment” section under “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” earlier in the prospectus for more information about the effect of an EDA on a surrender of your policy.

You can withdraw all or part of your policy’s net cash surrender value, although you may incur tax consequences by doing so.

Effect of partial withdrawals on insurance coverage.  If the Option A death benefit is in effect, a partial withdrawal results in adollar-for-dollar automatic reduction in the policy’s face amount (and, hence, an equal reduction in the Option A death benefit). We will not permit a partial withdrawal that would reduce the face amount below the minimum stated in your policy, or that would cause the policy to no longer be treated as life insurance for federal income tax purposes.

If death benefit Option B is in effect, a partial withdrawal reduces the death benefit on a dollar for dollar basis, but does not affect the face amount.

The result is different, however, during any time when the alternative death benefit (discussed later in this prospectus) would be higher than the Option A or B death benefit you have selected. In that case, a partial withdrawal will cause the death benefit to decrease by more than the amount of the withdrawal. A partial withdrawal reduces the amount of your premium payments that counts toward maintaining theno-lapse guarantee and the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider as well. A partial withdrawal may increase the chance that your policy could lapse because of insufficient value to pay policy charges as they fall due or failure to pass the guarantee premium test for theno-lapse guarantee.

You should refer to “Tax information” below, for information about possible tax consequences of partial withdrawals and any associated reduction in policy benefits. Also, partial withdrawals are not permitted while the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect. Please see “Paid up death benefit guarantee” in “More information about policy features and benefits.”

Surrendering your policy for its net cash surrender value

Upon written request satisfactory to us, you can surrender (give us back) your policy for its “net cash surrender value” at any time. The net cash surrender value equals your policy account value, minus any outstanding loan and unpaid loan interest, minus any amount of your policy account value that is “restricted” as a result of previously distributed terminal illness living benefits, and further reduced for any monthly benefit payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider,

48


and minus any surrender charge that then remains applicable. If you have any policy account value in the MSO, the Segment Distribution Value and not the Segment Account Value will be used to calculate your policy account value for the purpose of determining your net cash surrender value. Please see the “Early Distribution Adjustment” section under “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” earlier in the prospectus for more information about the effect of an EDA on a surrender of your policy. The surrender charge is described in “Charges and expenses you will pay” earlier in this prospectus.

Please refer to “Tax information” below for the possible tax consequences of surrendering your policy.

Your option to receive a terminal illness living benefit under the Living Benefits Rider

Subject to our insurance underwriting guidelines and availability in your state, your policy will automatically include our Living Benefits Rider if you apply for a face amount of at least $100,000 unless it is issued as a result of an Option To Purchase Additional Insurance election or a conversion from a term life policy or term rider. This feature enables you to receive a portion (generally the lesser of 75% or $500,000) of the policy’s death benefit (excluding death benefits payable under certain other policy riders), if the insured person has a terminal illness (as defined in the rider). The maximum aggregate amount of payments that will be paid under this Living Benefits Rider for all policies issued by the Company or an affiliate company on the life of the same insured person is $500,000. We make no additional charge for the rider, but we will deduct aone-time administrative charge of up to $250 from any living benefit we pay.

If you tell us that you do not wish to have the Living Benefits Rider added at issue, but you later ask to add it, there will be a $100 administrative charge. Also, we will need to evaluate the insurance risk at that time, and we may decline to issue the rider.

If you receive a living benefit on account of terminal illness, theLong-Term Care ServicesSM Rider for chronic illness benefits, if elected, and before continuation of coverage under any Nonforfeiture Benefit, will terminate and no further benefits will be payable under theLong-Term Care ServicesSM Rider. Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider charges will also stop. In addition, once you receive a living benefit, you cannot elect the paid up death benefit guarantee and your policy cannot be placed on loan extension. We will deduct the amount of any living benefit we have paid, plus interest (as specified in the rider), from the death benefit proceeds that become payable under the policy if and when the insured person dies. (In your policy we refer to this as a “lien” we establish against your policy.)

When we pay a living benefit, we automatically transfer a pro rata portion of your policy’s net cash surrender value to the policy’s guaranteed interest option regardless of any policy guaranteed interest option limitation in effect. This amount, together with the interest we charge thereon, will be “restricted”— that is, it will not be available for any loans, transfers or partial withdrawals that you may wish to make. In addition, it may not be used to satisfy the charges we deduct from your policy’s value. We also will deduct these restricted amounts from any subsequent surrender proceeds that we pay. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

The receipt of a living benefits payment may qualify for exclusion from income tax. See “Tax information” below. Receipt of a living benefits payment may affect your eligibility for certain government benefits or entitlements.

You can arrange to receive a “living benefit” if the insured person becomes terminally ill.

49


9. Tax information

This discussion is based on current federal income tax law and interpretations. It assumes that the policy owner is a natural person who is a U.S. citizen and resident and has an insurable interest in the insured. The tax effects on corporate taxpayers,non-U.S. residents ornon-U.S. citizens may be different. This discussion is general in nature, and should not be considered tax advice, for which you should consult a qualified tax advisor.

Basic income tax treatment for you and your beneficiary

An Incentive Life Optimizer® II policy will be treated as “life insurance” for federal income tax purposes (a) if it meets the definition of life insurance under Section 7702 of the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”) and (b) as long as the investments made by the underlying Portfolios satisfy certain investment diversification requirements under Section 817(h) of the Code. The following discussion assumes that the policies meet these requirements and, therefore, that generally:

the death benefit received by the beneficiary under your policy will not be subject to federal income tax; and

increases in your policy account value as a result of interest or investment experience will not be subject to federal income tax, unless and until there is a distribution from your policy, such as a surrender, a partial withdrawal, loan or a payment to you.

The IRS, however, could disagree with our position such that certain tax consequences could be other than as described. If it is subsequently determined that a policy does not satisfy the applicable requirements, we may take appropriate steps to bring the policy into compliance with such requirements and we reserve the right to restrict policy transactions in order to do so. There may also be different tax consequences if you assign your policy, transfer an interest therein or designate a new owner. See “Assigning your policy” later in this prospectus. See also special rules below for “Business and employer owned policies,” and for the discussion of insurable interest under “Other information.”

Tax treatment of distributions to you (loans, partial withdrawals, and full surrender)

The federal income tax consequences of a distribution from your policy depend on whether your policy is a “modified endowment contract” (sometimes also referred to as a “MEC”). In all cases, however, the character of any income described below as being taxable to the recipient will be ordinary income (as opposed to capital gain).

Testing for modified endowment contract status.  Your policy will be a “modified endowment contract” if, at any time during the first seven years of your policy, you have paid a cumulative amount of premiums that exceeds the cumulativeseven-pay limit. The cumulativeseven-pay limit is the amount of premiums that you would have paid by that time under a similar fixed-benefit insurance policy that was designed (based on certain assumptions mandated under the Code) to provide for paid up future benefits after the payment of seven equal annual premiums. (“Paid up” means that no future premiums would be required.) This is called the “seven-pay” test.

Whenever there is a “material change” under a policy, the policy will generally be (a) treated as a new contract for purposes of determining whether the policy is a modified endowment contract and (b) subjected to a newseven-pay period and a newseven-pay limit. The newseven-pay limit would be determined taking into account, under a prescribed formula, the policy account value at the time of such change.

A materially changed policy would be considered a modified endowment contract if it failed to satisfy the newseven-pay limit at any time during the newseven-pay period. A “material change” for these purposes could occur as a result of a change in death benefit option, a requested increase in the policy’s face amount or certain other changes.

If your policy’s benefits are reduced during its first seven years (or within seven years after a material change), theseven-pay limit will be redetermined based on the reduced level of benefits and applied retroactively for purposes of theseven-pay test. (Such a reduction in benefits could include, for example, a requested decrease in face amount, the termination of additional benefits under a rider or, in some cases, a partial withdrawal or a change in death benefit option.) If the premiums previously paid during its first seven years (or within seven years after a material change) are greater than the recalculated (lower)seven-pay limit, the policy will become a modified endowment contract.

A life insurance policy that you receive in exchange for a modified endowment contract will also be considered a modified endowment contract.

In addition to the above premium limits for testing for modified endowment status, federal income tax rules must be complied with in order for it to qualify as life insurance. Changes made to your policy, for example, a decrease in face amount (including any decrease that may occur as a result of a partial withdrawal), a change in death benefit option, or other decrease in benefits may impact the maximum amount of premiums that can be paid, as well as the maximum amount of policy account value that may be maintained under the policy. We may also be required to provide a higher death benefit notwithstanding the decrease in face amount in order to assure that your policy continues to qualify as life insurance. Under either test, in some cases, this may cause us to take current or future action in order to assure that your policy continues to qualify as life insurance, including distribution of amounts to you that may be includible as income. See “Changes we can make” later in this prospectus.

Taxation ofpre-death distributions if your policy is not a modified endowment contract.  As long as your policy remains in force as anon-modified endowment contract, policy loans will be treated as indebtedness, and no part of the loan proceeds will generally be subject to current federal income tax. Interest on the loan will generally not be tax deductible, although interest credited on loan collateral may become taxable under the rules below if distributed. However, there is some uncertainty as to the federal tax treatment of policy loans with a small or no spread between the interest rate charged and the interest rate credited on the amount loaned. You should consult a qualified tax adviser as to the federal tax treatment of such loans. Also, see below for taxation of loans upon surrender or termination of your policy.

If you make a partial withdrawal after the first 15 years of your policy, the proceeds will not be subject to federal income tax except to the extent such proceeds exceed your “basis” in your policy. (Your basis

50


generally will equal the premiums you have paid, less the amount of any previous distributions from your policy that were not taxable.) During the first 15 years, however, the proceeds from a partial withdrawal could be subject to federal income tax, under a complex formula, to the extent that your policy account value exceeds your basis.

Upon full surrender, any amount by which the proceeds we pay (including amounts we use to discharge any policy loan and unpaid loan interest) exceed your basis in the policy will be subject to federal income tax.In addition, if a policy terminates after a grace period, the extinguishment of any then-outstanding policy loan and unpaid loan interest will be treated as a distribution and could be subject to tax under the foregoing rules. Finally, if you make an assignment of rights or benefits under your policy, you may be deemed to have received a distribution from your policy, all or part of which may be taxable.

Policy loans.  Policy loans can cause taxable income upon the termination of a policy with no cash payout. In the case of a surrender, the loan amount is taken into account in determining any taxable amount and such income can also exceed the payment received. These events can occur from potential situations which include: (1) amount of outstanding policy debt (loans taken plus unpaid interest amounts added to the outstanding loan) at or near the maximum loan value; (2) unfavorable investment results affecting your policy account value; (3) increasing monthly policy charges due to increasing attained ages of the insured; (4) high or increasing amount of insurance risk, depending on death benefit option and changing account value; and (5) increasing policy loan rates if an adjustable policy loan rate is in effect.

Ideally a policy loan will be paid from income tax free death benefit proceeds if your policy is kept in force until the death of the insured. To avoid policy terminations that may give rise to significant income tax liability, you may need to make substantial premium payments or loan repayments to keep your policy in force.

You can reduce the likelihood that these situations will occur by considering these risks before taking a policy loan. If you take a policy loan, you should monitor the status of your policy with your financial representative and your tax advisor at least annually, and take appropriate preventative action. As indicated above, in the case of a policy that is a modified endowment contract (“MEC”), any loan will be treated as a distribution when made, and thus may be taxable at such time.

Taxation ofpre-death distributions if your policy is a modified endowment contract.  Any distribution from your policy will be taxed on an “income-first” basis if your policy is a modified endowment contract. Distributions for this purpose include a loan (including any increase in the loan amount to pay interest on an existing loan or an assignment or a pledge to secure a loan) or withdrawal. Any such distributions will be considered taxable income to you to the extent your policy account value exceeds your basis in the policy. (For modified endowment contracts, your basis is similar to the basis described above for other policies, except that it also would be increased by the amount of any prior loan under your policy that was considered taxable income to you.)

For purposes of determining the taxable portion of any distribution, all modified endowment contracts issued by the Company (or its affiliates) to the same owner (excluding certain qualified plans) during any calendar year are treated as if they were a single contract.

A 10% penalty tax also will apply to the taxable portion of most distributions from a policy that is a modified endowment contract. The penalty tax will not, however, apply to (i) taxpayers whose actual age is at least 591/2, (ii) distributions in the case of a disability (as defined in the Code) or (iii) distributions received as part of a series of substantially

equal periodic annuity payments for the life (or life expectancy) of the taxpayer or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the taxpayer and his or her beneficiary. The exceptions generally do not apply to life insurance policies owned by corporations or other entities.

If your policy terminates after a grace period, the extinguishment of any then outstanding policy loan and unpaid loan interest will be treated as a distribution(to the extent the loan was not previously treated as such) and could be subject to tax, including the 10% penalty tax, as described above. In addition, upon a full surrender, any excess of the proceeds we pay (including any amounts we use to discharge any loan) over your basis in the policy, will be subject to federal income tax and, unless an exception applies, the 10% penalty tax.

Distributions that occur during a year of your policy in which it becomes a modified endowment contract, and during any subsequent years, will be taxed as described in the four preceding paragraphs. In addition, distributions from a policy within two years before it becomes a modified endowment contract also will be subject to tax in this manner. This means that a distribution made from a policy that is not a modified endowment contract could later become taxable as a distribution from a modified endowment contract. So, for example, if a policy has been collaterally assigned as security for a loan and the policy subsequently becomes a MEC there could be a taxable deemed distribution even though the policy owner has not received any payment from us.

Policy changes.  Changes made to a life insurance policy, for example, a decrease in benefits, a death benefit option change, or the termination or restoration of a terminated policy, may have other effects on your policy, including impacting the maximum amount of premiums that can be paid under the policy. In some cases, this may cause us to take action in order to assure your policy continues to qualify as life insurance, including distribution of amounts that may be includable as income. This action may be required under the tax law even though the policy may not be sufficiently funded to keep it in force for a desired duration. In some cases, premium payments for a policy year could be limited to the amount needed to keep the policy in force until the end of the policy year. You should carefully go over the implications of any policy changes with your advisor before making a change.

Restoration of a terminated policy.  For tax purposes, some restorations of a policy that terminated after a grace period may be treated as the purchase of a new policy. Since tax laws and regulations and their application may have changed by such time, there can be no assurance that we can reinstate the policy to qualify as life insurance under future tax rules.

Tax treatment of Living Benefits Rider orLong-Term Care ServicesSM Rider under a policy with the applicable rider

Living Benefits Rider.  Amounts received under an insurance policy on the life of an individual who is terminally ill, as defined by the tax law, are generally excludable from gross income as an accelerated death benefit. We believe that the benefits provided under our living benefits rider meet the tax law’s definition of terminally ill under section 101(g) of the Code and can qualify for this income tax exclusion.

If the owner and the insured person are not the same, the exclusion for accelerated death benefits for terminal illness or a chronic illness does not apply if the owner (taxpayer) has an insurable interest with respect to the life of the insured person by reason of the insured person being an officer, employee or director of the taxpayer or by reason of the insured person being financially interested in any trade or business carried on by the taxpayer.

51


Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider.  Benefits received under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider are intended to be treated, for Federal income tax purposes, as accelerated death benefits under the Code on the life of a chronically ill insured person receiving qualified long-term care services within the meaning of section 7702B of the Code. The benefits are intended to qualify for exclusion from income subject to the limitations of the Code with respect to a particular insured person. However, receipt of these benefits may be taxable in part and may reduce your investment in the policy. Generally income exclusion for all long-term care type payments from all sources with respect to an insured person will be limited to the higher of the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (“HIPAA”) per day limit or actual costs incurred by the taxpayer on behalf of the insured person.

The Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider is intended to be a qualified long-term care insurance contract under section 7702B(b) of the Code. Charges for the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider are generally not considered deductible for income tax purposes and may be considered distributions for income tax purposes, and may be taxable to the owner to the extent not considered a nontaxable return of premiums paid for the life insurance policy. Assuming the rider qualifies as intended, charges will reduce your investment in the policy for income tax purposes (but not below zero) but will not be taxable. Please see “Policy variations” and “State policy availability and/or variations of certain features and benefits” Appendices later in this prospectus for more information on previously issued riders and state variations.

Any adjustments made to your policy death benefit, face amount and other values as a result of Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider benefits paid will also generally cause us to make adjustments with respect to your policy under federal income tax rules for testing premiums paid, your tax basis in your policy, your overall premium limits and theseven-pay period andseven-pay limit for testing modified endowment contract status.

It is not clear whether the exclusion for accelerated death benefits on account of chronically-ill insureds applies to benefits under a qualified long-term care insurance policy for owners whose insurable interests arise from business-type policies. Please see “Policy variations” and “State policy availability and/or variations of certain features and benefits” Appendices later in this prospectus for more information on previously issued riders and state variations.

Under either rider,  if the owner and insured person are not the same, other tax considerations may also arise in connection with a transfer of benefits received to the insured person, for example, gift taxes in personal settings, compensation income in the employment context and inclusion of life insurance policy proceeds for estate tax purposes in certain trust owned situations. Under certain conditions, a gift tax exclusion may be available for certain amounts paid on behalf of a donee to the provider of medical care.

Business and employer owned policies

Any employer owned life insurance arrangement on an employee or director as well as any corporate, trade, or business use of a policy should be carefully reviewed by your tax advisor with attention to the

rules discussed below. Also, careful consideration should be given to any other rules that may apply, including other possible pending or recently enacted legislative proposals.

Requirements for income tax free death benefits.  Federal tax law imposes additional requirements for employer owned life insurance policies. The provisions can have broad application for contract owners engaged in a trade or business or certain related persons. These requirements include detailed notice and consent rules, annual tax reporting and recordkeeping requirements on the employer and limitations on those employees (including directors) who can be insured under the life insurance policy. Failure to satisfy applicable requirements will result in death benefits in excess of

premiums paid by the owner being includible in the owner’s income upon the death of the insured employee. Notice and consent requirements must be satisfied before the issuance of the life insurance policy or a material change to an existing life insurance policy, otherwise benefits may lose their tax favored treatment.

The rules generally apply to life insurance policies issued after August 17, 2006. Note, however, that material increases in the death benefit or other material changes will generally cause an existing policy to be treated as a new policy and thus subject to the new requirements. The term “material” has not yet been fully defined but is expected to not include automatic increases in death benefits in order to maintain compliance with the life insurance policy tax qualification rules under the Code. An exception for certaintax-free exchanges of life insurance policies pursuant to Section 1035 of the Code may be available but is not clearly defined.

Limitations on interest deductibility for business owned life insurance.  Ownership of a policy by a trade or business can limit the amount of any interest on business borrowings that the entity otherwise could deduct for federal income tax purposes, even though such business borrowings may be unrelated to the policy. To avoid the limit, the insured person must be an officer, director, employee or 20% owner of the trade or business entity when coverage on that person commences.

The limit does not generally apply for policies owned by natural persons (even if those persons are conducting a trade or business as sole proprietorships), unless a trade or business entity that is not a sole proprietorship is a direct or indirect beneficiary under the policy. Entities commonly have such a beneficial interest, for example, inso-called “split-dollar” arrangements. If the trade or business entity has such an interest in a policy, it will be treated the same as if it owned the policy for purposes of the limit on deducting interest on unrelated business income.

The limit generally applies only to policies issued after June 8, 1997 in taxable years ending after such date. However, for this purpose, any material change in a policy will be treated as the issuance of a new policy.

In cases where the above-discussed limit on deductibility applies, thenon-deductible portion of unrelated interest on business loans is determined by multiplying the total amount of such interest by a fraction. The numerator of the fraction is the policy’s average account value (excluding amounts we are holding to secure any policy loans) for the year in question, and the denominator is the average for the year of the aggregate tax bases of all the entity’s other assets. The above limitation is in addition to rules limiting interest deductions on policy loans against business-owned life insurance. Special rules apply to insurance company owners of policies which may be more restrictive.

Uses of policy which may be scrutinized. The IRS may view certain uses of life insurance policies as a tax shelter or as an abusive transaction. Please consult your tax advisor for the most up-to-date information as to IRS “Recognized Abusive and Listed Transactions” and how they may affect your policy.

Requirement that we diversify investments

Under Section 817(h) of the Code, the Treasury Department has issued regulations that implement investment diversification requirements. Failure to comply with these regulations would disqualify your policy as a life insurance policy under Section 7702 of the Code. If this were to occur, you would be subject to federal income tax on any income and gains under the policy and the death benefit proceeds would lose their incometax-free status. These consequences would continue for the period of the disqualification and for subsequent periods. Through the Portfolios, we intend to comply with the applicable diversification requirements, though no assurances can be given in this regard.

52


Estate, gift, and generation-skipping taxes

If the policy’s owner is the insured person, the death benefit will generally be includable in the owner’s estate for purposes of federal estate tax. If the owner is not the insured person, and the owner dies before the insured person, the value of the policy would be includable in the owner’s estate. If the owner is neither the insured person nor the beneficiary, the owner will be considered to have made a gift to the beneficiary of the death benefit proceeds when they become payable.

In general, a person will not owe estate or gift taxes until gifts made by such person, plus that person’s taxable estate, total at least $10 million (this statutory amount is to be indexed for inflation after 2010). A portability rule generally permits a surviving spouse to elect to carry over the unused portion of the deceased spouse’s exclusion amount.

Certain amounts may be deductible or excludable, such as gifts and bequests to a person’s spouse or charitable institutions, as well as for certain gifts per recipient per year ($15,000 for 2020, indexed for inflation).

As a general rule, if you make a “transfer” to a person two or more generations younger than you, a generation-skipping tax may be payable. Generation-skipping transactions would include, for example, a case where a grandparent “skips” his or her children and names his or her grandchildren as a policy’s beneficiaries. In that case, the generation-skipping “transfer” would be deemed to occur when the insurance proceeds are paid. The generation-skipping tax rates are similar to the maximum estate tax rates in effect at the time. Individuals, are generally allowed an aggregate generation-skipping tax exemption of the same amount discussed above for estate and gift taxes, but without portability.

The particular situation of each policyowner, insured person or beneficiary will determine how ownership or receipt of policy proceeds will be treated for purposes of federal estate, gift and generation-skipping taxes, as well as state and local estate, inheritance and other taxes. Because these rules are complex, you should consult with a qualified tax adviser for specific information, especially where benefits are passing to younger generations.

If this policy is used with estate and gift tax planning in mind, you should consult with your tax advisor as to the mostup-to-date information as to federal estate, gift and generation skipping tax rules.

Pension and profit-sharing plans

There are special limits on the amount of insurance that may be purchased by a trust or other entity that forms part of a pension or profit-sharing plan qualified under Section 401(a) or 403 of the Code. In addition, the federal income tax consequences will be different from those described in this prospectus. These rules are complex, and you should consult a qualified tax advisor.

Split-dollar and other employee benefit programs

Complex rules may also apply when a policy is held by an employer or a trust, or acquired by an employee, in connection with the provision of other employee benefits. Employees may have imputed income for the value of any economic benefit provided by the employer. There may be other tax implications, as well. It is possible that certain split-dollar arrangements may be considered to be a form of deferred compensation under Section 409A of the Code, which broadens the definition of deferred compensation plans, and subjects such plans to new requirements. Further, certain split-dollar arrangements may come within the rules for business- and employer-owned policies. Among other issues, policyowners must consider whether the policy was applied for by or issued to a person having an insurable interest under applicable state law and with the insured person’s consent. The lack of an insurable interest

or consent may, among other things, affect the qualification of the policy as life insurance for federal income tax purposes and the right of the beneficiary to receive a death benefit.

If this policy is being or was purchased pursuant to a split-dollar arrangement, you should also consult your tax advisor for advice concerning the effect of the following guidance. In 2002 the IRS issued Notice2002-8 concerning the taxation of split-dollar life insurance arrangements as well as regulations in both 2002 and 2003. They provide for taxation under one of two mutually exclusive regimes depending upon the structure of the arrangement. These are a loan regime and an economic benefit regime. Transition and grandfathering rules, among other items, should be carefully reviewed when considering such arrangements. A material modification to an existing arrangement may result in a change in tax treatment. In addition, public corporations (generally publicly-traded or publicly-reporting companies) and their subsidiaries should consider the possible implications on split-dollar arrangements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 which generally prohibit certain direct or indirect loans to executive officers or directors. At least some split-dollar arrangements could be deemed to involve loans within the purview of that section.

ERISA

Employers and employer-created trusts may be subject to reporting, disclosure and fiduciary obligations under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. There may also be other implications. You should consult a qualified legal advisor.

3.8% Tax on Net Investment Income or “NII”

The 3.8% Medicare tax on certain unearned income of taxpayers whose adjusted incomes exceed certain thresholds applies to all or part of a taxpayer’s NII. As currently interpreted under IRS guidelines, NII includes the taxable portion of an annuitized payment from a life insurance contract. It has not been defined to include taxable amounts from partial withdrawals, surrenders or lapses of life insurance policies subject to loans. You should consult your tax advisor as to the applicability of this tax to you.

Our taxes

The operations of our separate accounts are reported in our federal income tax return. Separate account investment income and capital gains, however, are, for tax purposes, reflected in our variable life insurance policy reserves. Currently we pay no taxes on such income and gains and impose no charge for such taxes. We reserve the right to impose a charge in the future for taxes incurred by us that are allocable to the policies.

We are entitled to certain tax benefits related to the investment of company assets, including assets of the separate accounts. These tax benefits, which may include the foreign tax credit and the corporate dividends received deduction, are not passed back to you, since we are the owner of the assets from which tax benefits may be derived.

Tax withholding and information reporting

Status for income tax purposes; FATCA. In order for us to comply with income tax withholding and information reporting rules which may apply to life insurance policies, we request documentation of “status” for tax purposes. “Status” for tax purposes generally means whether a person is a “U S. person” or a foreign person with respect to the United States; whether a person is an individual or an entity, and if an entity, the type of entity. Status for tax purposes is best documented on the appropriate IRS Form or substitute certification form (IRS Form W-9 for a U.S. person or the appropriate type of IRS Form W-8 for a foreign person). If we do not have appropriate certification or documentation of a person’s status for tax purposes on file, it could affect the rate at which we are required to withhold

53


income tax, and penalties could apply. Information reporting rules could apply not only to specified transactions, but also to life insurance policy ownership. For example, under the Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act (“FATCA”), which applies to certain U.S.-source payments, and similar or related withholding and information reporting rules, we may be required to report policy values and other information for certain policyholders. For this reason, we and our affiliates intend to require appropriate status documentation at purchase, change of ownership, and affected payment transactions, including death benefit payments. FATCA and its related guidance is extraordinarily complex and its effect varies considerably by type of payor, type of payee and type of recipient.

Tax Withholding. Generally, unless you provide us with a satisfactory written election to the contrary prior to the distribution, we are required to withhold income tax from any proceeds we distribute as part of a taxable transaction under your policy. If you do not wish us to withhold tax from the payment, or if we do not withhold enough, you may have to pay later, and you may incur penalties under the estimated income tax rules. In some cases, where generation skipping taxes may apply, we may also be required to withhold for such taxes unless we are provided satisfactory notification that no such taxes are due. States may also require us to withhold tax on distributions to you and may not always follow federal rules.

Special withholding rules apply to United States citizens residing outside of the United States, foreign recipients, and certain U.S. entity recipients which are treated as foreign because they fail to document their U.S. status before payment is made. We do not discuss these rules here in detail. However, we may require additional documentation in the case of payments made to United States persons living abroad and non-United States persons (including U.S. entities treated as foreign) prior to processing any requested transaction. For Puerto Rico and other jurisdictions, income is considered U.S.-source income. We anticipate requiring owners or beneficiaries in Puerto Rico which are not individuals to document their status to avoid 30% FATCA withholding from U.S.-source income.

Possibility of future tax changes and other tax information

The U.S. Congress frequently considers legislation that, if enacted, could change the tax treatment of life insurance policies or increase the taxes we pay in connection with such policies. This could include special rules fortax-exempt entities as well as for corporate or business use of policies. In addition to legislation enacted in December 2017, Congress may also consider further proposals to comprehensively reform or overhaul the United States tax and retirement systems, which if enacted, could affect the tax benefits of a life insurance policy. Legislative proposals could make sweeping changes to many longstanding tax rules including certain tax benefits currently available to newly purchased cash value life insurance policies. Proposals have been considered to eliminate some or all taxable expenditures or tax preferences together with some lowering of tax rates. We cannot predict what if any, legislation will actually be proposed or enacted or what type of grandfathering will be allowed for existing life insurance policies. In addition, the Treasury Department may amend existing regulations, issue regulations on the qualification of life insurance and modified endowment contracts, or adopt new or clarifying interpretations of existing law. Some areas of possible future guidance include new rules for testing for policies issued on a special risk class basis. As a result, there are areas of some uncertainty even under current laws, such that future tax consequences of a policy could be other than as described herein.

State and local tax law or, if you are not a U.S. citizen and resident, foreign tax law, may also affect the tax consequences to you, the insured person or your beneficiary, and are subject to change or change in interpretation. Any changes in federal, state, local or foreign tax law or interpretations could have a retroactive effect both on our taxes and on the way your policy is taxed or the tax benefit of life insurance policies.

The policies described in this Prospectus are tested for qualification as life insurance using the 2001 Commissioners Standard Ordinary (“2001 CSO”) mortality tables. See “Cost of insurance charge” later in this Prospectus. Due to updated State insurance laws and Federal income tax rules new life insurance policies using any mortality tables other than the 2017 Commissioners Standard Ordinary (“2017 CSO”) mortality tables cannot be sold after December 31, 2019.

This change in prevailing mortality tables does not affect existing policies described in this Prospectus, as they were all purchased before January 1, 2020. The policies will continue to be tested for tax purposes using the 2001 CSO mortality tables. The IRS has issued guidance on changes made after December 31, 2019 to policies issued before 2020 which are tested using the 2001 CSO mortality tables. This IRS “safe harbor” guidance permits certain policy changes without losing the ability to use the 2001 CSO mortality tables for testing. If we determine that certain future changes to your policy would cause it to lose its ability to be tax tested under the 2001 CSO mortality tables, we intend to refuse such transactions which might have otherwise been available under your policy, subject to our rules then in effect. We would take such action to help assure that your policy can continue to qualify as life insurance for federal tax testing under the 2001 CSO mortality tables.

Other information

There are a number of tax benefits associated with variable life insurance policies. For tax benefits to be available, the policyowner must have an insurable interest in the life of the insured under applicable state laws. Requirements may vary by state. A failure can, among other consequences, cause the policyowner to lose anticipated favorable federal tax treatment generally afforded life insurance.

For tax benefits to continue, the policy must continue to qualify as life insurance. We reserve the right to restrict transactions that we determine would cause your policy to fail to qualify as life insurance under federal tax law. We also reserve the right to decline to make any change that may cause your policy to lose its ability to be tested for federal income tax purposes under the 2001 Commissioners Standard Ordinary Mortality Tables.

In addition to other requirements, federal tax law requires that the insurer, and not the policyowner, have control of the underlying investment assets for the policy to qualify as life insurance.

You may make transfers among Portfolios of the Separate Account, but you may not direct the investments each Portfolio makes. If the IRS were to conclude that you, as the investor, have control over these investments, then the policy would no longer qualify as life insurance. You would be treated as the owner of separate account assets and be currently taxed on any income or gain the assets generate.

The IRS has provided some guidance on investor control, but many issues remain unclear. One such issue is whether a policyowner can have too much investor control if the variable life policy offers a large number of investment options in which to invest policy account values and/or the ability to make frequent transfers available under the policy. We do not know if the IRS will provide any further guidance on the issue. If guidance is provided, we do not know if it would apply retroactively to policies already in force.

We believe that our variable life policies do not give policyowners investment control over the investments underlying the various investment options; however, the IRS could disagree with our position. The IRS could seek to treat policyowners with a large number of investment options and/or the ability to freely transfer among investment options as the owners of the underlying Portfolio’s shares. Accordingly, we reserve the right to modify your policy as necessary to attempt to prevent you from being considered the owner of your policy’s proportionate share of the assets of the Separate Account.

54


10. More information about policy features and benefits

Guarantee premium test for theno-lapse guarantees

We offer two guarantees against policy lapse that depends on your having paid specified amounts of premiums. We refer to these guarantees as our“no-lapse guarantee” and our optional “Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider” and you can read more about it in “You can guarantee that your policy will not terminate before a certain date” in “Risk/benefit summary: Policy features, benefits and risks,” earlier in this prospectus. You can also read more about our Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider in “Enhanced no lapse guarantee rider” later in this section.

Guarantee premium test.  If your net policy account value is not sufficient to pay a monthly deduction that has become due, we check to see if the cumulative amount of premiums that you have paid to date (less any partial withdrawals) at least equals the cumulative guarantee premiums due to date for theno-lapse guarantee or Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider including any cumulative guarantee premiums for any optional riders that are then in effect. If it does, your policy will not lapse, provided that any policy loan and accrued loan interest does not exceed the policy account value, and provided that the guarantee is still in effect.

Guarantee premiums.  The amount of the guarantee premiums for theno-lapse guarantee and the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider, if elected, are set forth in your policy on a monthly basis. The guarantee premiums are actuarially determined at policy issuance and depend on the age and other insurance risk characteristics of the insured person, as well as the amount of the coverage and additional features you select. The guarantee premiums may change if, for example, the face amount of the policy or the long-term care specified amount changes, or a rider is eliminated, or if there is a change in the insured person’s risk characteristics. We will send you a new policy page showing any change in your guarantee premiums. Any change will be prospective only, and no change will extend theno-lapse guarantee period beyond its original number of years.

Paid up death benefit guarantee

Subject to our approval, you may elect the “paid up” death benefit guarantee at any time after the fourth year. This benefit provides an opportunity to lock in all or a portion of your policy’s death benefit without making additional premium payments. Also, this benefit may be attractive to you if you are concerned about the impact of poor future investment performance or increases in policy charges on your policy’s death benefit and potential policy lapse. You may elect this benefit provided:

the insured’s attained age is not more than 120;

you have death benefit “Option A” in effect (see “About your life insurance benefit” in “Risk/benefit summary: Policy features, benefits and risks,” earlier in this prospectus);

we are not paying policy premiums or waiving monthly charges under the terms of a disability waiver rider and you have not received any payment under a Living Benefits Rider or theLong-Term Care ServicesSM Rider;

the policy is not in default or in a grace period as of the effective date of the paid up death benefit guarantee;

the policy account value after the deduction of any proportionate surrender charge would not be less than any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest;

the policy is not on loan extension. (For more information about loan extension, see “Accessing your money” earlier in this prospectus;

the election would not reduce the face amount (see below) below the minimum stated in your policy;

no current or future distribution from the policy will be required to maintain its qualification as life insurance under the Internal Revenue Code; and

If the paid up death benefit is exercised while any MSO Segment is in effect, an Early Distribution Adjustment will apply and any Segment Distribution Value will be automatically transferred to the Unloaned GIO and the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options as specified by you.

You agree tore-allocate your fund values to the guaranteed interest option and the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options. We reserve the right to change the investment options available to you under the paid up death benefit guarantee. (See “Restrictions on allocations and transfers,” below).

The effective date of the paid up death benefit guarantee will be the beginning of the policy month that next follows the date we approve your request. On the effective date of this guarantee, all additional benefit riders and endorsements will automatically terminate including the MSO, Cash Value Plus Rider and the living benefits rider providing benefits for terminal illness. The policy’s net cash surrender value after the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect will equal the policy account value, less any applicable surrender charges and any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest. The policy death benefit will be Option A. We will continue to deduct policy charges from your policy account value. As explained below, electing the paid up death benefit guarantee may reduce your policy’s face amount, which in turn may result in the deduction of a surrender charge. You can request a personalized illustration that will show you how your policy face amount could be reduced and values could be affected by electing the paid up death benefit guarantee.

If you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee, the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider will automatically terminate subject to any Nonforfeiture Benefit, if elected.

Our paid up death benefit guarantee is not available if you received monthly benefit payments under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider before continuation of coverage under any Nonforfeiture Benefit. Please see Appendix III later in this prospectus for rider variations.

Possible reduction of face amount.  The face amount of your policy after this guarantee is elected is the lesser of (a) the face

55


amount immediately before the election or (b) the policy account value on the effective date of the election divided by a factor based on the then age of the insured person. The factors are set forth in your policy. As a general matter, the factors change as the insured person ages so that, if your policy account value stayed the same, the result of the calculation under clause (b) above would be lower the longer your policy is in force. We will decline your election if the new face amount would be less than the minimum stated in your policy.

If electing the paid up death benefit guarantee causes a reduction in face amount, we will deduct the same portion of any remaining surrender charge as we would have deducted if you had requested that decrease directly (rather than electing the paid up death benefit guarantee). (See “Risk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay” earlier in this prospectus.) In certain cases, a reduction in face amount may cause a policy to become a modified endowment contract. See “Tax treatment of distributions to you (loans, partial withdrawals and full surrender)” under “Tax Information.”

Restrictions on allocations and transfers.  While the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect, you will be restricted as to the investment options available to you under the policy and the amounts that can be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. You will be able to allocate up to 25% of your unloaned policy account value to the guaranteed interest option. Currently, the remainder of your unloaned policy account value must be allocated among the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options. (See “About the Portfolios of the Trusts” for the listing of EQ Strategic Allocation investment options.) When you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee, we require that you provide us with new allocation instructions. In the absence of these instructions, we will be unable to process your request.

Also, transfers from one or more of our EQ Strategic Allocation investment options into the guaranteed interest option will not be permitted if such transfer would cause the value of your guaranteed interest option to exceed 25% of your total unloaned policy account value. Loan repayments allocated to your guaranteed interest option will be limited to an amount that would not cause the value in your guaranteed interest option to exceed 25% of your total unloaned policy account value. If the value in your guaranteed interest option already exceeds 25% of your total unloaned policy account value (including the repayment), no portion of the repayment will be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. Any portion of the loan repayment that is not allocated to the guaranteed interest option will be allocated in proportion to the loan repayment amounts for the variable investment options you have specified. If we do not have instructions, we will use the allocation percentages for the variable investment options you specified when you elected the paid up death benefit guarantee or the most recent instructions we have on record. These restrictions would be lifted if the paid up death benefit guarantee is terminated.

If the policy guaranteed interest option limitation is in effect at the time you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee, it will no longer apply while the paid up death benefit guarantee remains in effect. The limitation amounts applicable under the paid up death benefit guarantee may permit you to allocate different amounts into the guaranteed interest option. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

Other effects of this guarantee.  After you have elected the paid up death benefit guarantee, you may request a policy loan, make a loan repayment or transfer policy account value among the guaranteed

interest option and variable investment options, subject to our rules then in effect. The following transactions, however, are not permitted when this guarantee is in effect:

premium payments

partial withdrawals

changes to the policy’s face amount or death benefit option

any change that would cause the policy to lose its current or future qualification as life insurance under the Internal Revenue Code or require a current or future distribution from the policy to avoid such disqualification. (See “Tax treatment of distributions to you” under “Tax information” earlier in this prospectus.)

Termination of this guarantee.  You may terminate the paid up death benefit guarantee by written request to our Administrative Office. If terminated, the policy face amount will not change. However, premiums may be required to keep the policy from lapsing. If the guarantee terminates due to an outstanding loan and accrued loan interest exceeding the policy account value, a payment will be required to keep the policy and the guarantee in force pursuant to the policy’s grace period provision. If the guarantee terminates for any reason, it cannot be restored at a later date.

Other benefits you can add by rider

When you purchase this policy, you could be eligible for the following other optional benefits we currently make available by rider:

Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider — Described below.

Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider — Described below.

Cash Value Plus Rider — Described below.

Charitable Legacy Rider — Described below.

Disability Deduction Waiver Rider — This rider waives the monthly charges from the policy account value if the insured is totally disabled, as defined in the rider, for at least six consecutive months and the disability began prior to the policy anniversary nearest the insured’s 60th birthday. If total disability begins on or after this date, the monthly charges are waived to the earlier of the policy anniversary nearest the insured’s age 65 or termination of disability. Issue ages are0-59. However, coverage is not provided until the insured’s fifth birthday. The maximum amount of coverage is $3,000,000 for the Company and affiliates’ policiesin-force and applied for.

Disability Premium Waiver Rider — This rider pays the specified premium or waives the monthly charges from the policy account value, if that amount is greater, if the insured is totally disabled, as defined in the rider, for at least six consecutive months and the disability began prior to the policy anniversary nearest the insured’s 60th birthday. If total disability begins on or after this date, the specified premium is paid (or the monthly charges, if greater, are waived) to the earlier of the policy anniversary nearest the insured’s age 65 or termination of disability. Issue ages are0-59. However, coverage is not provided until the insured’s fifth birthday. The maximum amount of coverage is $3,000,000 for the Company and affiliates’ policiesin-force and applied for.

Children’s Term Insurance Rider — This rider provides term insurance on the lives of the insured’s children, stepchildren and legally adopted children who are between the ages of 15 days to 18

56


 

a contractyears. The insured under the base policy must be between the ages of 17 and 55. The maximum amount of coverage is issued on January 10th$25,000 for the Company and the next Segment Start Date is January 16thaffiliates’ policiesin-force and January 15th is a Business Day, the first transfer from the dollar cap averaging account into the designated Segment Type Holding Account(s) will generally occur on January 15th.applied for.

 

Any transfers or withdrawals fromOption To Purchase Additional Insurance Rider — This rider allows you to purchase a new policy for the dollar cap averaging account will terminateamount of the Program. Upon termination, all funds will be transferredoption, on specific dates, without evidence of insurability. The minimum option amount is $25,000 and the maximum amount is $100,000. Issue ages are 0–37. The maximum amount of coverage is $100,000 for the Company and affiliates’ policies inforce and applied for.

We add the following benefits automatically at no charge to the investment options according to your allocation instructions. However, any forced withdrawals from the dollar cap averaging accounteach eligible policy:

Substitution Of Insured Person Rider (Available for policies with a minimum face amount of $100,000 unless it is issued as a result of an RMD will not terminate the Program.Option To Purchase Additional Insurance election or a conversion from a term life policy, see “You can change your policy’s insured person” under “More information about procedures that apply to your policy.”)

 

Living Benefits Rider (See “Your option to receive a terminal illness living benefit under the Living Benefits Rider” under “Accessing your money.”)

Paid Up Death Benefit Guarantee Endorsement (See “Paid up death benefit guarantee” under “More information about policy features and benefits.”)

Loan Extension Endorsement (See “Loan extension (for guideline premium test policies only)” under “Accessing your money.”)

The Company or your financial professional can provide you with more information about these riders. Some of these benefits may be selected only at the time your policy is issued. Some benefits are not available in combination with others or may not be available in your state. The riders provide additional terms, conditions and limitations, and we will furnish samples of them to you on request. We can add, delete, or modify the riders we are making available, at any time before they become effective as part of your policy.

See also “Tax information” earlier in this prospectus for certain possible tax consequences and limitations of deleting riders or changing the death benefits under a rider.

Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider.  An optional rider may be elected at issue subject to our underwriting requirements that provides for a longer no lapse guarantee period than the one in your base policy. The minimum guarantee period is 15 years from the register date, and the maximum period is 30 years from register date if the insured is less than 56 years old or to the insured’s attained age 85 for issue ages56-70. Issue ages are0-70.If you elect this rider at issue, and while the rider is in effect, the investment options available to you will be restricted to the EQ Strategic Allocation investment options. You must provide proper allocation instructions at the time you apply for this policy in order to have your policy issued with this rider. The policy guaranteed interest option will not apply while the extended no lapse guarantee rider remains in effect. The limitation amounts applicable under the extended no lapse guarantee rider may permit you to allocate different amounts into the guaranteed interest option. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information.

This rider, while in force, will prevent your policy from lapsing provided that all of the following conditions apply:

The rider has not terminated;

The guarantee premium test for no lapse guarantees has been satisfied (see “Guarantee premium test for the no lapse guarantees” under “More information about policy features and benefits”); and

Any policy loan and accrued loan interest does not exceed the policy account value.

Rider termination.  The Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider will terminate on the earliest of the following:

the date your policy ends without value at the end of a grace period;

the date you surrender your policy;

the expiration date of the enhanced no lapse guarantee period shown in your policy;

the effective date of the election of the paid up death benefit guarantee;

the date that a new insured person is substituted for the original insured person;

the effective date of a requested increase in face amount during the extended no lapse guarantee period and after attained age 70 of the insured;

the date the policy goes on loan extension; or

the beginning of the policy month that coincides with or next follows the date we receive your written request to terminate the rider.

This rider cannot be restored once it has been terminated.

The Market Stabilizer Option® is not available if you elect the Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider.

Cash Value Plus Rider (rider form no.R11-10 or state variation)

In states where approved, an optional rider may be elected at issue that reduces the surrender charge if the policy is surrendered for its Net Cash Surrender Value in the first eight policy years. In order to elect the rider, the policy must have a minimum face amount of $250,000 per life when one or two policies are purchased on the lives of members of an insured group and $100,000 per life when policies are purchased on the lives of three or more members. We deduct $0.04 per $1,000 of the initial base policy face amount from your policy account value each month, while the rider is in effect.

The rider works by refunding all or a portion of the premium charge and waiving all or a portion of the surrender charge, if the policy is surrendered in full in its early years. The percentage of charges refunded or waived under the rider are as follows:

Surrender In Policy

Year

 

Percent Of Premium

Charge Refunded*

 

Percent Of Surrender

Charges Waived

1 100%     100%    
2 80%   100%    
3 33%   100%    
4 0% 100%    
5 0% 80%  
6 0% 65%  
7 0% 45%  
8 0% 25%  
9 and later 0% 0%
*

The mortality and expense risk charge and other monthly charges are not refunded.

57


The net cash surrender value paid, including the reduction of the surrender charges and refund of a percentage of cumulative premium charges, if a policy is surrendered in full while this rider is in force, will not exceed the greater of:

1.

a cumulative-based premium cap equal to the sum of premiums paid to the date of the surrender minus any partial withdrawals, outstanding loan and accrued loan interest; and

2.

the net cash surrender value on the date of surrender calculated prior to any reduction or refund.

Thus, the cumulative-based premium cap may effectively limit the percentage of surrender charges waived and/or the percentage of premium charge refunded if a policy is surrendered in full while this rider is in force.

The reduction of the surrender charges does not apply if the policy is being exchanged or replaced during the first eight policy years with another life insurance policy or annuity contract on the insured person including (but not limited to) a 1035 exchange, nor does it apply to a proportionate surrender charge resulting from a face amount decrease. There is no refund of the premium charge if during the first three policy years the policy terminates after a grace period, is being exchanged or replaced with another life insurance policy or annuity contract on the insured person including (but not limited to) a 1035 exchange, nor does it apply to a face amount decrease.

Amounts available under the policy for loans and partial withdrawals continue to be calculated as if this rider was not part of the policy.

The premium load refund that would be applicable upon a complete surrender of the policy may increase the death benefit that is calculated when the claim is paid in the first 3 policy years in order for the policy to satisfy the definition of a “life insurance contract” under Section 7702 of the Code.

Restoration after lapse.  If your policy is restored after a lapse, the rider will also be restored unless you made a written request to terminate the rider.

Rider termination.  The rider will terminate on the earliest of the following dates: 1) The end of the eighth policy year; 2) The date the policy ends without value at the end of the Grace Period or otherwise terminates; 3) After the first policy anniversary, the effective date of a policy owner’s written request to terminate this rider; or 4) The date the policyowner exercises the Substitution of Insured Option or Paid Up Death Benefit Guarantee.

This rider is not available if you elect the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider. Please see “Appendices III and IV” later in this prospectus for more information on rider variations.

Long-Term Care ServicesSMRider (Please see Appendices III and IV later in this prospectus for rider variations). The rider provides for the acceleration of all or part of the policy death benefit as a payment each month as a result of the insured person being a chronically ill individual who is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care.(1) Benefits accelerated under this rider will be treated as a lien against the policy death benefit

(1)

For a more complete description of the terms used in this section and conditions of this rider, please consult your rider policy form.

unless benefits are being paid under the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. While this rider is in force and before any continuation of coverage under the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit, if elected, policy face amount increases and death benefit option changes from Option A to Option B are not permitted.

An individual qualifies as “chronically ill” if he has been certified by a licensed health care practitioner as being unable to perform (without substantial assistance from another person) at least two activities of daily living for a period of at least 90 days due to a loss of functional capacity; or requiring substantial supervision to protect such individual from threats to health and safety due to cognitive impairment.

Benefits are payable once we receive: 1) a written certification from a U.S. licensed health care practitioner that the insured person is a chronically ill individual and is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care; 2) proof that the “elimination period,” as discussed below, has been satisfied; and 3) written notice of claim and proof of loss in a form satisfactory to us. In order to continue monthly benefit payments, we require recertification by a U.S. licensed health care practitioner every twelve months from the date of the initial or subsequent certification that the insured person is still a chronically ill individual receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care. Otherwise, unless earlier terminated due to a change in status of the insured or payout of the maximum total benefit amount, benefit payments will terminate at the end of the twelve month period. We also, at our own expense, may have the insured person examined as often as we may reasonably require during a period of coverage. This rider may not cover all of the costs associated with long-term care services during the insured person’s period of coverage.

The monthly rate charged for this rider varies based on the insured person’s sex, issue age, class of risk and tobacco user status, as well as the benefit percentage selected and whether you selected the rider with or without the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. See “Risk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay” earlier in this prospectus for more information on the charges we deduct for this rider.

If the net policy value is insufficient to cover the total monthly deductions for the base policy and any riders while benefits under this rider are being paid, we will not lapse the policy. While monthly benefits under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider are being paid, we will waive the monthly charge for the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider.

We will pay up to the maximum total benefit for qualified long-term care services for the insured person for the duration of a period of coverage. During any period of coverage, the maximum total benefit is determined as of the first day of that period of coverage.

For policies with death benefit Option A, the maximum total benefit is equal to the current long-term care specified amount. For policies with death benefit Option A, the initial long term care specified amount is equal to the face amount of the base policy at issue multiplied by the acceleration percentage. You can select an acceleration percentage between 20% and 100%, subject to the minimum initial long-term care specified amount of $100,000.

For policies with death benefit Option B, the maximum total benefit is equal to the current long-term care specified amount, plus the policy account value. For policies with death benefit Option B, the initial long term care specified amount is equal to the face amount of the base policy multiplied by 100%. You do not select an acceleration percentage.

58


During any period of coverage (see below), the maximum Total Benefit is determined as of the first day of that period of coverage.

The initial long-term care specified amount may change due to subsequent policy transactions and will be reduced at the end of a period of coverage to reflect benefits paid during that period of coverage. Any request for a decrease in the policy face amount may reduce the current long-term care specified amount to an amount equal to the lesser of: (a) the new policy face amount multiplied by the acceleration percentage selected, or (b) the long-term care specified amount immediately prior to the face amount decrease. If you selected death benefit Option A, any partial withdrawal will reduce the current long-term care specified amount by the amount of the withdrawal, but not to less than the policy account value minus the amount of the withdrawal. If you selected death benefit Option B, the current long-term care specified amount will not be reduced.

The maximum monthly benefit is the maximum amount we or an affiliated company will pay in a month for qualified long-term care services for the insured person. Affiliates include Equitable Financial Life and Annuity Company, Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company of America, and U.S. Financial Life Insurance Company. The maximum monthly benefit payment amount that you can purchase from the issuer and its affiliates is limited to $50,000 per month, per insured person. At issue, the maximum monthly benefit is equal to the long-term care specified amount multiplied by the benefit percentage selected. After that, the maximum monthly benefit is equal to the maximum total benefit as of the first day of the first period of coverage, or on the date coverage under the Nonforfeiture Benefit begins, if earlier, multiplied by the benefit percentage selected.

Each month, the monthly benefit payment (a portion of which will be applied to repay any outstanding policy loan) for qualified long-term care services for the insured person is the lesser of:

1.

the maximum monthly benefit (or lesser amount as requested, however, this may not be less than $500); or

2.

the monthly equivalent of 200% of the per day limit allowed by the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act or “HIPAA.” (We reserve the right to increase this percentage.) To find out the current per day limit allowed by HIPAA, go to www.IRS.gov. We may also include this information in your policy’s annual report.

We will pay a proportionate amount of the monthly benefit payment for services rendered for less than a full month.

When benefits are paid under this rider, we establish an accumulated benefit lien. This accumulated benefit lien amount will equal the cumulative amount of rider benefits paid (including any loan repayments) during a period of coverage. We deduct the accumulated benefit lien amount from the base policy death benefit if the insured person dies before the end of a period of coverage. We also reduce the cash surrender value, as described below.

•  Elimination period.  The Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider has an elimination period that is the required period of time while the rider is in force that must elapse before any benefit is available to the insured person under this rider. The elimination period is 90 days, beginning on the first day of any qualified long-term care services that are provided to the insured person. Except as described below, benefits under this rider will not be paid until the elimination period is satisfied, and benefits will not be retroactively paid for the elimination

period. The elimination period can be satisfied by any combination of days of care in a qualified long-term care facility or qualified days of home health care. The days do not have to be continuous, but the elimination period must be satisfied within a consecutive period of 24 months starting with the month in which such services are first provided. If the elimination period is not satisfied within this time period, you must submit a new claim for benefits under this rider. This means that a new elimination period of 90 days must be satisfied within a new 24-month period. The elimination period must be satisfied only once while this rider is in effect.

Furthermore, and solely at our discretion, we may deem the elimination period to be satisfied if the insured person provides proof of care from a U.S. licensed health care provider for at least 60 service days (approximately 5 days a week) within a consecutive period of 90 days starting on the first day on which such services are first provided.

You can request retroactive payment of benefits for the elimination period if a U.S. licensed health care practitioner provides written certification that the insured person is chronically ill and is expected to require qualified long-term care services for the remainder of the insured person’s life, once the elimination period and all other eligibility requirements have been satisfied. The amount of any such retroactive payment will be deducted from the maximum total benefit.

•  Period of coverage.  The period of coverage is the period of time during which the insured person receives services that are covered under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider and for which benefits are payable. This begins on the first day covered services are received after the end of the elimination period. A period of coverage will end on the earliest of the following dates:

1.

the date we receive the notice of release which must be sent to us when the insured person is no longer receiving qualified long-term care services;

2.

the date we discover the insured person is no longer receiving Qualified Long-Term Care Services in accordance with the Plan of Care written for that Period of Coverage;

3.

the date you request that we terminate benefit payments under this rider;

4.

the date the accumulated benefit lien amount equals the maximum total benefit (or if your coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture benefit, the date the maximum total Nonforfeiture Benefit has been paid out);

5.

the date you surrender the policy (except to the extent of any Nonforfeiture Benefit you may have under the rider);

6.

the date we make a payment under the living benefits rider (for terminal illness) if it occurs before coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture Benefit; or

7.

the date of death of the insured person.

During a period of coverage before coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture Benefit:

1.

Partial withdrawals, face amount decreases and premium payments are not permitted.

2.

The policy death benefit will not be less than the maximum total benefit.

59


3.

Each monthly benefit payment will increase the accumulated benefit lien amount by the amount of the payment—including any loan repayment. The accumulated benefit lien amount will be deducted from the policy death benefit in determining the insurance benefit we pay.

4.

For the purposes of determining the cash surrender value of this policy, the policy face amount and the unloaned policy account value will be reduced by a percentage. For policies with death benefit Option A, the percentage will be equal to the accumulated benefit lien amount divided by the policy face amount. For policies with death benefit Option B, the percentage will be equal to the accumulated benefit lien amount divided by the policy face amount plus the unloaned policy account value. For all policies, the percentage will not be more than 100% and the unloaned policy account value will not be reduced by more than the accumulated benefit lien amount. Any applicable surrender charge will be reduced on a pro rata basis for the reduction in the policy face amount.

5.

If there is an outstanding policy loan (and accrued loan interest) at the time we make a benefit payment, an amount equal to a percentage of the loan and accrued loan interest will be deducted from the monthly benefit payment and used as a loan repayment and will reduce the amount otherwise payable to you. This percentage will equal the monthly benefit payment divided by the portion of the maximum total benefit that we have not accelerated to date.

6.

The loan extension and paid up death benefit guarantee endorsements will no longer be applicable at any time once benefits are paid under this rider .

7.

Transfers of any unloaned policy account value allocated to the guaranteed interest option or to the variable investment options are permitted. We do, however, reserve the right to restrict the variable investment options available to you during a period of coverage. If we exercise this right, we will notify you of such restrictions in advance.

After a period of coverage ends before coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture Benefit:

1.

The base policy face amount and the unloaned policy account value will each be reduced by a percentage. For policies with death benefit Option A, the percentage will be equal to the accumulated benefit lien amount divided by the base policy face amount. For policies with death benefit Option B, the percentage will be equal to the accumulated benefit lien amount divided by the base policy face amount plus the unloaned policy account value. For all policies, the percentage will not be more than 100% and the unloaned policy account value will not be reduced by more than the accumulated benefit lien amount.

2.

Any applicable surrender charges will be reduced on a pro rata basis for the reduction in the policy face amount.

3.

The long-term care specified amount will be reduced by a percentage equal to the accumulated benefit lien amount, divided by the maximum total benefit. If after this calculation, the long-term care specified amount would be greater than the base policy face amount, the long-term care specified amount will be further reduced to the base policy face amount.

4.

For any subsequent period of coverage, the maximum monthly benefit will be equal to the maximum monthly benefit during the initial period of coverage.

5.

The premium fund values that are used by us to determine whether a guarantee against policy lapse or a guarantee of death benefit protection is in effect will also be reduced pro rata to the reduction in the base policy face amount.

6.

Any remaining balance for an outstanding loan and accrued loan interest will not be reduced.

7.

The accumulated benefit lien amount is reset to zero.

If any MSO Segments are in effect, they will be terminated with corresponding early distribution adjustments, and the MSO Segment Typevalues will be reallocated to the variable investment options and your GIO based on your premium allocations then in effect.

The reduction in your policy account value will reduce your unloaned value in the guaranteed interest option and your values in the variable investment options in accordance with your monthly deduction allocation percentages then in effect. If we cannot make the reduction in this way, we will make the reduction based on the proportion that your unloaned values in the guaranteed interest option and your values in the variable investment options bear to the total unloaned value in your policy account.

After the period of coverage has ended, we will provide you with notice of the adjusted values.

If the entire maximum total benefit has been paid out, the period of coverage will end, policy values will be adjusted as described above, and this rider will terminate. If the net policy account value is suspended,insufficient to cover the monthly deductions, the policy will terminate subject to the grace period provision.

Rider termination.  This rider will terminate, and no further benefits will be payable (except, where applicable, as may be provided under the “Extension of Benefits” and the “Nonforfeiture Benefit” provisions of this rider), on the earliest of the following:

1.

at any time after the first policy year, on the next monthly anniversary on or following the date we receive your written request to terminate this rider;

2.

upon termination or surrender of the policy;

3.

the date of the insured person’s death;

4.

the date when the accumulated benefit lien amount equals the maximum total benefit amount;

5.

the effective date of the election of the paid up death benefit guarantee;

6.

the date you request payment under a living benefits rider due to terminal illness of the insured person (whether or not monthly benefit payments are being made as of such date) if it occurs before coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture Benefit;

7.

the date the policy goes on loan extension if it occurs before coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture Benefit; or

8.

on the date that a new insured person is substituted for the original insured person under the terms of any substitution of insured rider if it occurs before coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture Benefit.

60


If this rider does not terminate, it will remain in force as long as the policy remains in force. This rider may be restored after termination if certain qualifications for restoration of rider benefits are met.

Extension of benefits.  If your policy lapses, terminating this rider, while the insured person is confined in a long-term care facility but before any rider benefits have been paid for a current period of coverage, benefits for that confinement may be payable provided that the confinement began while this rider was in force and the confinement continues without interruption after rider termination. Benefits may continue until the earliest of the following dates: (a) the date the insured person is discharged from such confinement (in this case, the maximum total benefit will be reduced by rider benefits that have been paid out); (b) the date the maximum total benefit has been paid; or (c) the date of death of the insured person. If benefits are payable under this provision, there will be no death benefit payable to the beneficiary or beneficiaries named in the base policy.

Nonforfeiture Benefit

For a higher monthly charge, you can elect the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider with the Nonforfeiture Benefit. The Nonforfeiture Benefit may continue coverage under the rider in a reduced benefit amount in situations where (a) the dollar cap averaging account destinedLong-Term Care ServicesSM Rider would otherwise terminate; (b) you have not already received benefits (including any loan repayments) that equal or exceed the total charges deducted for that Segmentthe rider; and (c) your policy and Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider were in force for at least three policy years.

While the Nonforfeiture Benefit is in effect, all of the provisions of the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider remain applicable to you. The maximum total Nonforfeiture Benefit will be transferred to the Segment Type Holding Account. Itgreater of:

(a)

One month’s maximum monthly benefit and

(b)

The sum of all charges deducted for the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider (with the Nonforfeiture Benefit). This amount excludes any charges that may have previously been waived while rider benefits were being paid.

The maximum total Nonforfeiture Benefit will remain there untilbe reduced (but not below zero) by all monthly benefit payments paid under the next Segment Start Daterider, including any loan repayments and any payments made under the “Extension of Benefits” and “Nonforfeiture Benefit” provisions. Also, the maximum total Nonforfeiture Benefit will not exceed the maximum total benefit under the rider as of the date coverage under the Nonforfeiture Benefit begins.

Coverage under the Nonforfeiture Benefit begins on which the Segment is not suspended. Ifdate the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider would otherwise terminate for one of the Segment Types is terminated or discontinued,following reasons (unless benefits are being continued under the value in“Extension of Benefits” provision of the terminated Segment Type Holding Account will be moved to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option and the Program will continue.rider):

(1)

We receive your written request to terminate the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider;

(2)

You surrender your policy;

(3)

Your policy terminates without value at the end of a grace period; or

(4)

You elect a Paid Up death benefit guarantee.

 

If benefits are being continued under the “Extension of Benefits” provision of the rider and the maximum total benefit has not been paid out, coverage under the Nonforfeiture Benefit begins on the date the insured is discharged from a long-term care facility.

Once in effect, the Nonforfeiture benefit will continue long-term care coverage under apaid-up status until the earliest of (a) the death of the insured, and (b) the date the maximum total Nonforfeiture Benefit has been paid out and reduced to zero during a period of coverage. If coverage is continued under the Nonforfeiture benefit, you will receive additional information regarding the benefit, including the maximum total Nonforfeiture Benefit amount.

For tax information concerning the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider, see “Tax information” earlier in this prospectus.

Charitable Legacy Rider.  An optional rider may be elected at issue that provides an additional death benefit of 1% of the base policy face amount to the qualified charitable organization(s) chosen by the policy owner at no additional cost. This rider is only available at issue and an accredited charitable beneficiary must be named at that time. The rider is available for base policy face amounts of $1 million and above, where the minimum benefit would be $10,000 and the maximum benefit would be $100,000 (i.e. for face amounts of $10 million and above).

If the base policy face amount is reduced after issue for any reason, the benefit will be payable on the face amount at the time of the insured’s death, provided the face amount is at least $1 million. If the face amount has been decreased below $1 million at the time of death, then no benefit is payable.

The designated beneficiary of this rider must be an organization exempt from federal taxation under Section 501(c) of the Code and listed in Section 170(c) of the Code as an authorized recipient of charitable contributions. See www.IRS.gov for valid organizations.

Rider termination.  The charitable legacy rider will terminate and no further benefits will be paid on the earliest of the following:

the termination of the policy;

the surrender of the policy;

the date we receive the policy owner’s written request to terminate the rider;

the date of the insured’s death; or

the date the policy is placed on loan extension.

If the base policy lapses and is subsequently restored, the rider will be reinstated. The rider will not be terminated if the policy owner executes the Substitution Of Insured Person Rider or elects the paid up death benefit guarantee.

Customer loyalty credit

We provide a customer loyalty credit for policies that have been in force for more than 8 years. This is added to your policy account value each month. The dollar amount of the credit is a percentage of the total amount you then have in your policy account, but excluding any value we are holding as collateral for any policy loans.

The credit begins in the policy’s 9th year. The percentage credit is currently at an annual rate as described in the charts below depending upon the issue age of the insured, the death benefit option you elected at issue, the policy duration and the level at which the policy is funded. If at the end of the first 7 policy years, the cumulative amount of premiums that you have paid to date (less any partial withdrawals) then: (i) if you elected at issue the death benefit Option A and is less than 16 “target premiums” for issue ages 18 – 58 or less than 12 “target premiums” for issue ages 0 – 17 and issue ages 59 and above,or(ii) if you elected at issue the death benefit Option

61


B and is less than 13 “target premiums” for issue ages 18 – 58 or less than 11 “target premiums” for issue ages 0 – 17 and issue ages 59 and above the percentage credit will be as follows:

Issue

Age

  Duration  Credit
Amount
   Duration Credit
Amount
 

  0 – 29

  Policy yrs 9 – 35   0.25%   Policy yrs 36+  0.40% 

30 – 39

  Policy yrs 9 – 25   0.20%   Policy yrs 26+  0.35% 

40 – 49

  Policy yrs 9 – 20   0.15%   Policy yrs 21+  0.30% 

50 – 59

  Policy yrs 9 – 15   0.15%   Policy yrs 16+  0.20% 

60 +    

  Policy yrs 9+   0.15%        

Otherwise, the percentage credit will be as follows:

Issue

Age

  Duration  Credit
Amount
   Duration Credit
Amount
 

  0 – 29

  Policy yrs 9 – 27   0.25%   Policy yrs 28+  0.55% 

30 – 39

  Policy yrs 9 – 18   0.25%   Policy yrs 19+  0.55% 

40 – 49

  Policy yrs 9 – 14   0.30%   Policy yrs 15+  0.55% 

50 – 59

  Policy yrs 9 – 10   0.30%   Policy yrs 11+  0.55% 

60 +    

  Policy yrs 9+   0.30%        

The “target premium” is actuarially determined for each policy, based on that policy’s characteristics, as well as the death benefit option at issue and the policy’s face amount. The illustrations of Policy Benefits that your financial professional will provide will contain more information regarding the amount of premiums that must be paid in order for the higher percentage credit to be applicable to your policy.

This credit is not guaranteed.

Variations among Incentive Life Optimizer® II policies

Time periods and other terms and conditions described in this prospectus may vary due to legal requirements in your state. These variations will be reflected in your policy.

The Company also may vary or waive the charges (including surrender charges) and other terms of Incentive Life Optimizer® II where special circumstances (including certain policy exchanges) result in sales or administrative expenses or mortality risks that are different from those normally associated with Incentive Life Optimizer® II. We will make such variations only in accordance with uniform rules that we establish.

The Company or your financial professional can advise you about any variations that may apply to your policy or see Appendices III and IV later in this prospectus for more information.

Your options for receiving policy proceeds

Beneficiary of death benefit.  You designate your policy’s beneficiary in your policy application. You can change the beneficiary at any other time during the insured person’s life. If no beneficiary is living when the insured person dies, we will pay the death benefit proceeds in equal shares to the insured person’s surviving children. If there are multiple Segments being transferred intono surviving children, we will instead pay the insured person’s estate.

Payment of death benefit.  We will pay any death benefit in a single sum. If the beneficiary is a natural person (i.e., not an entity such as a corporation or a trust) and so elects, death benefit proceeds can be paid through the “Access Account”, which is a draft account that works in certain respects like an interest-bearing checking account. In that case, we will send the beneficiary a draftbook, and the beneficiary will have immediate access to the proceeds by writing a

draft for all or part of the Program andamount of the death benefit proceeds. The Company will retain the funds until a draft is presented for payment. Interest on the first Segment Start Date oneAccess Account is earned from the date we establish the account until the account is closed by your beneficiary or by us if the account balance falls below the minimum balance requirement, which is currently $1,000. The Access Account is part of the Segment TypesCompany’s general account and is suspended,subject to the Suspended Segment Typeclaims of our creditors. We will transfer onreceive any investment earnings during the next Segment Start Dateperiod such amounts remain in the general account. The Access Account is not a bank account or a checking account and all subsequent transfers will generally occur onit is not insured by the same ThursdayFDIC. Funds held by insurance companies in the general account are guaranteed by the respective state guaranty association.

A beneficiary residing outside the U.S., however, cannot elect the Access Account. If the beneficiary is a trust that has two or fewer trustees, death benefit proceeds can be paid through the Access Account.

If a financial professional has assisted the beneficiary in preparing the documents that are required for payment of the month established by the non-suspended transfers.

You may cancel your participation in the Program at any time by notifying us in writing. If you terminate your Program,death benefit, we will transfer any amount remaining insend the dollar cap averaging accountAccess Account checkbook or check to the investment options accordingfinancial professional within the periods specified for death benefit payments under “When we pay policy proceeds,” later in this prospectus. Our financial professionals will take reasonable steps to your allocation instructions.arrange for prompt delivery to the beneficiary.

 

Your right to cancel within a certain number of days

 

IfThis is provided for any reason youinformation purposes only. Since the contracts are not satisfied with your contract, you may exercise your cancellation right under the contractno longer available to receive a refund. To exercisenew purchasers, this cancellation right, you must notify usprovision is no longer applicable.

You may cancel your policy by returning the policy along with a properly signed letter of instruction electing this right,and completed written request for cancellation to our processing office within 10 days after you receive your contract. If state law requires, this “free look” period may be longer. Other state variations may apply. Please contact your financial professional and/Administrative Office or, see Appendix II to find out what applies in your state.

Generally, your refund will equal your account value under the contract on the day we receive written notification of your decision to cancel the contract and will reflect any investment gain or loss in the investment options (less the daily charges we deduct) through the date we receive your contract. This includes the Segment Interim Value for amounts allocated to existing Segments. Some states, however, require that we refund the full amount of your contribution (not reflecting investment gain or loss). In addition, in some states, to the amountagent who sold it to you or any agent of your refund (either your account value or the full amount of your contributions), andCompany, by the length of your “free look” period, depend on whether you purchased the contract as a replacement. Please refer to your contract or supplemental materials or contact us for more information. For any IRA contract returned to us within seven days10th day after you receive it (or such longer period as required under state law). Your coverage will terminate as of the business day we are required toreceive your request at our Administrative Office (or, in some states, as of the business day the agent receives your request).

In most states, we will refund the full amountpolicy account value calculated as of the business day we receive your request for cancellation at our Administrative Office (or, in some states, as of the business day the agent receives your request), plus any charges that were deducted from premiums that were paid and from the policy account value, less any outstanding loan and accrued loan interest. In other states, we will refund the premiums that were paid, less any outstanding loan and accrued loan interest. Your policy will set forth the specific terms of your contribution. When required by applicable law“Right to

return Examine” the full amount of your contribution, we will return the greater of your contribution or your contract’s cash value.policy.

 

We may require that you wait six months before you may apply forPlease also see “Your right to cancel within a contract with us again if:

you cancel your contract duringcertain number of days” under “About the free look period; or

you change your mind before you receive your contract whether we have received your contribution or not.

Please see “Tax information” laterMarket Stabilizer Option®” earlier in this Prospectus for possible consequences of cancelling your contract.

Ifprospectus on how amounts you fully convert an existing traditional IRA contractallocated to a Roth IRA contract, you may cancel your Roth IRA contract and returnthe MSO are returned to a traditional IRA contract. Our processing office, or your financial professional, can provide you with the cancellation instructions.you.

 

In addition to the cancellation right described above, you have the right to surrender your contract,policy, rather than cancel it. Please see “Surrendering your contract to receivepolicy for its net cash value” in “Accessing your money” latersurrender value,” earlier in this Prospectus.prospectus. Surrendering your contractpolicy may yield results different than canceling your contract,policy, including a greater potential for taxable income. In some cases, your cash value upon surrender may be greater than your contributions to the contract.policy. Please see “Tax information,” laterearlier in this Prospectus.prospectus for possible consequences of cancelling your policy.

 

 

3962


411.. Determining your contract’s value More information about certain policy charges

 

 

Deducting policy charges

Your account valuePurposes of policy charges.  The charges under the policies are designed to cover, in the aggregate, our direct and cash valueindirect costs of selling, administering and providing benefits under the policies. They are also designed, in the aggregate, to compensate us for the risks of loss we assume pursuant to the policies. If, as we expect, the charges that we collect from the policies exceed our total costs in connection with the policies, we will earn a profit. Otherwise, we will incur a loss. In addition to the charges described below, there are also charges at the Portfolio level, which are described in the prospectuses of the Portfolios in which the funds invest. For additional information on all policy charges, see “Risk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay.”

Transaction charges

 

Your “account value”On the first day of each policy month, charges for cost of insurance and certain other charges are deducted from your policy account value as specified below (see “Periodic charges” below). In addition, charges may be deducted for transactions such as premium payments, policy surrenders, requested decreases in face amount, or transfers among investment options.

Premium charge.  We deduct an amount not to exceed 6% from each premium payment you send us. Currently, we reduce this charge to 4% after an amount equal to two “target premiums” has been paid. The “target premium” is actuarially determined for each policy, based on that policy’s specified characteristics death benefit option, as well as the total of: (i)policy’s face amount, among other factors. In addition, if your policy includes the valuesCash Value Plus Rider, a portion of the deductions from premiums will be refunded upon surrender within the first three policy years, subject to a cumulative premium-based cap on the rider benefits (see “Cash Value Plus Rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits” earlier in this prospectus). A similar charge applies to premiums attributed to requested face amount increases that are above your highest previous face amount. The premium charge is designed in part to defray sales and tax expenses we incur that are based on premium payments.

Surrender charges.  If you give up this policy for its net cash surrender value before the end of the tenth policy year, or within the first ten years after a face amount increase over the previous highest base policy face amount, we will subtract a surrender charge from your policy account value. The surrender charge in the first policy month of each policy year is shown in your policy. The initial surrender charge will be between $8.71 and $45.91 per $1,000 of initial base policy face amount, or base policy face amount increase. The surrender charge declines uniformly in equal monthly amounts within each policy year until it reaches zero in the twelfth month of policy year ten. The initial amount of surrender charge depends on each policy’s specific characteristics. In addition, if your policy includes the Cash Value Plus Rider, the surrender charges are reduced, subject to a cumulative premium-based cap on the rider benefits (see “Cash Value Plus Rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits” earlier in this prospectus). Changes in the base policy face

amount resulting from a change in death benefit option will not be considered in computing the previous highest face amount.

The surrender charge attributable to each increase in your policy’s face amount is in addition to any remaining surrender charge attributable to the policy’s initial face amount.

The surrender charges are contingent deferred sales charges. They are contingent because you only pay them if you surrender your policy for its net cash surrender value (or request a reduction in its face amount, as described below). They are deferred because we do not deduct them from your premiums. Because the surrender charges are contingent and deferred, the amount we collect in a policy year is not related to actual expenses for that year.

The surrender charges assessed in connection with giving up this policy or with reductions in policy face amount are intended, in part, to compensate us for the fact that it takes us time to make a profit on your policy, and if you give up or reduce the face amount of your policy in its early years, we do not have the time to recoup our costs.

Request a decrease in your policy’s face amount.  If there is a requested base policy face amount reduction within the first ten policy years or within ten years following a face amount increase, or thepaid-up death benefit guarantee is elected for a reduced amount during a surrender charge period, a proportionate surrender charge will be deducted from your policy account value.

Assuming you have not previously changed the base policy face amount, a proportionate surrender charge will be determined by dividing the amount of the reduction in base policy face amount by the variable investment options, (ii)initial base policy face amount of insurance, and then multiplying that fraction by the values you have insurrender charge immediately before the Segment Type Holding Accounts, (iii)reduction. The proportionate surrender charge will not exceed the values you have in the Dollar Cap Averaging Program and (iv) your Segment Interim Values.

Your contract also has a “cash value.” If you have a Series B contract, at any time before annuity payments begin, your contract’s cash value is equal to theunloaned policy account value less any applicable withdrawal charges. Please see “Surrenderat the time of your contract to receive its cash value”the reduction. If a proportionate surrender charge is made, the remaining surrender charge will be reduced proportionately. We will not deduct a proportionate surrender charge if the reduction resulted from a change in “Accessing your money” later in this Prospectus.

For Series C and Series ADV contracts, at any time before annuity payments begin, your contract’s cash value is equal to its account value.death benefit option or a partial withdrawal.

 

If youthere have a Series C or Series ADV contract, disregardbeen prior increases in face amount, the decrease will be deemed to cancel, first, each increase in reverse chronological order (beginning with the most recent) and then the initial face amount. We will deduct from your policy account value any referencessurrender charge that is associated with any portion of the face amount that is thus deemed to “withdrawal charges” or “free withdrawal amount” in this section; these terms only apply to Series B contracts, not Series C or Series ADV contracts.be canceled.

 

Your contract’sTransfers among investment options.  Although we do not currently charge for transfers among investment options, we reserve the right to make a transfer charge up to $25 for each transfer of amounts among your investment options. The transfer charge, if any, is deducted from the amounts transferred from your policy’s value in the variable investment options Segment Type Holding Accounts and in our guaranteed interest option based on the Dollar Cap Averaging Account

Each variable investment option (including Segment Type Holding Accounts andproportion that the dollar cap averaging account) invests in shares of a corresponding portfolio. Your value inamount transferred from each variable investment option is measured by “units.”and from our guaranteed interest option bears to the total amount being transferred. Any such charge

63


would be, in part, to compensate us for our expenses in administering transfers. The valuecharge will never apply to a transfer of all of your unitsvariable investment option amounts to our guaranteed interest option, or to any transfer pursuant to our automated transfer service or asset rebalancing service. Nor will this charge apply to any transfers to or from the “MSO” or any transfers to or from any Holding Account that we make available in connection with the MSO. Please see “About the Market Stabilizer Option®” earlier in this prospectus for information about the MSO and the related “Holding Account.”

Special services charges

We deduct a charge for providing the special services described below. These charges compensate us for the expense of processing each special service. Please note that we may discontinue some or all of these services without notice.

Wire transfer charge.  We charge $90 for outgoing wire transfers. Unless you specify otherwise, this charge will be deducted from the amount you request.

Express mail charge.  We charge $35 for sending you a check by express mail delivery. This charge will be deducted from the amount you request.

Policy illustration charge.  We do not charge for illustrations. We reserve the right to charge in the future.

Duplicate policy charge.  We charge $35 for providing a copy of your policy. The charge for this service can be paid (i) using a credit card acceptable to the Company, (ii) by sending a check to our Administrative Office, or (iii) by any other means we make available to you.

Policy history charge.  We charge a maximum of $50 for providing you a history of policy transactions. If you request a policy history of less than 5 years from the date of your request, there is no charge. If you request a policy history of more than 5 years but less than 10 years from the date of your request, the current charge is $25. For policy histories of 10 years or more, the charge is $50. For all policy histories, we reserve the right to charge a maximum of $50. The charge for this service can be paid (i) using a credit card acceptable to the Company, (ii) by sending a check to our Administrative Office, or (iii) by any other means we make available to you.

Charge for returned payments.  For each payment you make in connection with your policy that is returned for insufficient funds, we will charge a maximum of $25.

Periodic charges

On the first day of each month of the policy, charges for cost of insurance and certain other charges are deducted from your policy account value as specified below.

Administrative charge.  In the first policy year, we deduct $15 from your policy account value at the beginning of each policy month. Currently, in all subsequent policy years we deduct $10 at the beginning of each policy month, but not beyond the policy anniversary when the insured person is attained age 100. We reserve the right to increase or decrease as though you had invested itthis amount in the corresponding portfolio’s shares directly. Yourfuture, although it will never exceed $10 and will never be deducted beyond the policy anniversary when the insured person is attained age 121. In addition

we currently deduct between $0.09 and $0.34 per $1,000 of your initial base policy face amount and any face amount increase above the previous highest face amount at the beginning of each policy month in the first ten policy years and for ten years following a face amount increase. We reserve the right to continue this charge beyond the ten year period previously described, but it will never be deducted beyond the policy anniversary when the insured person is attained age 121. The administrative charge is intended, in part, to compensate us for the costs involved in administering the policy.

Cost of insurance charge.  The cost of insurance rates vary depending on a number of factors, including, but not limited to, the individual characteristics of the insured, the face amount and the policy year. The monthly cost of insurance charge is determined by multiplying the cost of insurance rate that is then applicable to your policy by the amount we have at risk under your policy divided by $1,000. Our amount at risk (also described in your policy as “net amount at risk”) on any date is the difference between (a) the death benefit that would be payable if the insured person died on that date and (b) the then total account value however,under the policy. A greater amount at risk, or a higher cost of insurance rate, will result in a higher monthly charge. The cost of insurance rates are intended, in part, to compensate us for the cost of providing insurance to you under your policy.

Generally, the cost of insurance rate increases from one policy year to the next. This happens automatically because of the insured person’s increasing age.

On a guaranteed basis, we may deduct between $0.02 and $83.34 per $1,000 of the amount for which we are at risk under your policy from your policy account value each month (but not beyond the policy anniversary date when the insured person is attained age 121). As the amount for which we are at risk at any time is the death benefit (calculated as of that time) minus your policy account value at that time, changes in your policy account value resulting from the performance of your investment options can affect your amount at risk, and as a result, your cost of insurance. In addition, our currentnon-guaranteed cost of insurance rates are zero for policy years in which the insured person’s attained age is 100 or older. Our cost of insurance rates are guaranteed not to exceed the maximum rates specified in your policy. For most insured persons at most ages, our current (non-guaranteed) rates are lower than the maximum rates. However, we have the ability to raise these rates up to the guaranteed maximum at any time, subject to any necessary regulatory approvals.

The guaranteed maximum cost of insurance rates for gender neutral Incentive Life Optimizer® II policies for insureds who are age 18 or above are based on the 2001 Commissioner’s Standard Ordinary 80% Male, 20% Female, Smoker or Nonsmoker Ultimate Age Nearest Birthday Mortality Table. The guaranteed maximum cost of insurance rates for gender neutral Incentive Life Optimizer® II policies for insureds who are under age 18 are based on the 2001 Commissioner’s Standard Ordinary 80% Male, 20% Female Composite Ultimate Age Nearest Birthday Mortality Tables. For all other policies, for insureds who are age 18 or above, the guaranteed maximum cost of insurance rates are based on the 2001 Commissioner’s Standard Ordinary Male or Female, Smoker or Nonsmoker Ultimate Age Nearest Birthday Mortality Tables. For insureds who are under age 18, the

64


guaranteed maximum cost of insurance rates are based on the 2001 Commissioner’s Standard Ordinary Male or Female Composite Ultimate Age Nearest Birthday Mortality Tables.

Our cost of insurance rates will generally be lower (except for gender-neutral policies and in connection with certain employee benefit plans) if the insured person is a female than if a male. They also will generally be lower fornon-tobacco users than tobacco users and lower for persons that have other highly favorable health characteristics, as compared to those that do not. On the other hand, insured persons who present particular health, occupational or avocational risks may be charged higher cost of insurance rates and other additional charges as specified in their policies. In addition, the current (non-guaranteed) rates also vary depending on the duration of the policy (i.e., the length of time since the policy was issued).

For policies issued at ages 0–17, an insured person’s cost of insurance rate is not based on that person’s status as a tobacco user ornon-tobacco user. Effective with the policy anniversary when that insured person reaches attained age 18,non-tobacco user cost of insurance rates will be reduced bycharged for that person. That insured person may also be eligible for a more favorable rating, subject to our underwriting rules.

We offer lower rates fornon-tobacco users only if they are at least age 18. You may generally ask us to review the tobacco habits of an insured person issue age 18 or over in order to change the charge from tobacco user rates tonon-tobacco user rates. The change, if approved, may result in lower future cost of insurance rates beginning on the effective date of the change tonon-tobacco user rates.

The change will be based upon our general underwriting rules in effect at the time of application, and may include criteria other than tobacco use status as well as a definition of tobacco use different from that applicable at the time this policy was issued.

Similarly, after the first policy year, you may request us to review the insured person’s rating to see if they qualify for a reduction in future cost of insurance rates. Any such change will be based upon our general underwriting rules in effect at the time of application, and may include various criteria.

For information concerning possible limitations on any changes, please see “Other information” in “Tax information” earlier in this prospectus.

The change in rates, if approved, will take effect at the beginning of the policy month that coincides with or next follows the date we approve your request. This change may have adverse tax consequences.

For policies with a minimum stated face amount of $25,000 which are issued as a result of an Option to Purchase Additional Insurance election or a conversion from a term life policy or rider, our cost of insurance rates also depend on how large the face amount is at the time we deduct the charge. Generally, under these circumstances, the current (non-guaranteed) cost of insurance rates are lower for face amounts of $100,000 and higher. For this purpose, however, we will take into account all face amount decreases, whatever their cause. Therefore, a decrease in face amount may cause your cost of insurance rates to go up.

Mortality and expense risk charge.  We will collect a monthly charge for mortality and expense risk. We are committed to fulfilling our obligations under the policy and providing service to you over the

lifetime of your policy. Despite the uncertainty of future events, we guarantee that monthly administrative and cost of insurance deductions from your policy account value will never be greater than the maximum amounts shown in your policy. In making this guarantee, we assume the mortality risk that insured persons (as a group) will live for shorter periods than we estimated. When this happens, we have to pay a greater amount of death benefit than we expected to pay in relation to the cost of insurance charges we received. We also assume the expense risks that the cost of issuing and administering policies will be greater than we expected. This charge is designed, in part, to compensate us for taking these risks.

We deduct a monthly charge at an annual rate of 0.85% of the value in your policy’s variable investment options and MSO Segments during the first 8 policy years, with no charge in policy year 9 and thereafter. We reserve the right to increase or decrease this charge in the future, although it will never exceed 1.00% during policy years 1 – 10, and 0.50% during policy years 11 and later. This charge will be calculated at the beginning of each policy month as a percentage of the amount of the feespolicy account that is then allocated to the variable investment options and charges that we deduct under the contract.

MSO Segments.

 

Units measureLoan interest spread.  We charge interest on policy loans but credit you with interest on the amount of the policy account we hold as collateral for the loan. The loan interest spread is the excess of the interest rate we charge over the interest rate we credit. The loan interest spread will not exceed 1%. However, for amounts of policy loans allocated to MSO Segments, the loan interest spread may be as high as 5% (2% for New York and Oregon policies). We deduct this charge on each policy anniversary date, or on loan termination, if earlier. For more information on how this charge is deducted, see “Borrowing from your policy” under “Accessing your money” earlier in this prospectus. As with any loan, the interest we charge on the loans is intended, in part, to compensate us for the time value in each variable investment option.of the money we are lending and the risk that you will not repay the loan.

 

Optional rider charges

The unit value

If you elect the following riders, the charge for each variable investment option depends on the investment performance of that option minus daily charges for the variable investment option fee. Each Segment Type Holding Account and the dollar cap averaging account are part of the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. On any day, your value in any variable investment option equals the number of units credited to that option, adjusted for any units purchased for orrider is deducted from your contractpolicy account value on the first day of each policy month that the rider is in effect. The rider charges are designed to offset the cost of providing the benefit under that option, multiplied by that day’sthe rider. The costs of each of the riders below are designed, in part, to compensate us for the additional insurance risk we take on in providing each of these riders and the administrative costs involved in administering them:

Children’s Term Insurance.  If you choose this rider, we deduct $0.50 per $1,000 of rider benefit amount from your policy account value each month until the insured under the base policy reaches age 65, while the rider is in effect. The charge for one unit. The numberthis rider does not vary depending upon the specifics of your contract unitspolicy. However, we will continue to charge you for the rider, even after all of your children, stepchildren and legally adopted children have reached age 25 (when a child’s coverage under the rider terminates), unless you notify us in any variable investment option does not change unless it is:writing that you wish to cancel this rider.

Disability Deduction Waiver.  If you choose this rider, we deduct an amount from your policy account value each month until the insured under the base policy reaches age 65, while the rider is in effect. This amount is between 7% and 132% of all the other monthly charges (including charges for other riders elected) deducted

 

(i)

increased to reflect additional contributions;

65

(ii)

decreased to reflect a withdrawal (including applicable withdrawal charges); or


from your policy account value on a guaranteed basis. The current monthly charges for this rider may be lower than the maximum monthly charges.

(iii)

increased to reflect a transfer into, or decreased to reflect a transfer out of, a variable investment option.

 

•  Disability Premium Waiver.  If you choose this rider, we deduct an amount from your policy account value each month until the insured under the policy reaches age 65 and while the rider is in effect. This amount is between $0.01 and $0.60 per $1,000 of initial base policy face amount on a guaranteed basis. We will establish a similar charge for requested base policy face amount increases. If you also select certain of the other optional riders available under your policy, we will deduct additional amounts from your policy account value per $1,000 of rider benefit amount each month while both the other rider and this rider are in effect. These amounts are in addition to the charges for the riders themselves. The current monthly charges for this rider may be lower than the maximum monthly charges.

•  Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider.  If you choose this rider without the Nonforfeiture Benefit, on a guaranteed basis, we may deduct between $0.22 and $2.67 per $1,000 of the amount for which we are at risk under the rider from your policy account value each month. If you choose this rider with the Nonforfeiture Benefit, on a guaranteed basis, we may deduct between $0.25 and $2.94 per $1,000 of the amount for which we are at risk under the rider. We will deduct this charge until the insured reaches age 121 while the rider is in effect, but not when rider benefits are being paid. The amount at risk under the rider depends on the death benefit option selected under the policy. For policies with death benefit Option A, descriptionthe amount at risk for the rider is the lesser of how unit values are calculated(a) the current policy face amount, minus the policy account value (but not less than zero); and (b) the current long-term care specified amount. For policies with death benefit Option B, the amount at risk for the rider is foundthe current long-term care specified amount. The current monthly charges for this rider may be lower than the maximum monthly charges.

If you continue coverage under the Nonforfeiture Benefit, the charge for the rider will no longer apply.

Option To Purchase Additional Insurance.  If you choose this rider, we deduct between $0.04 and $0.17 per $1,000 of the Option To Purchase Additional Insurance from your policy account value each month until the insured under the base policy reaches age 40 while the rider is in effect.

Charitable Legacy Rider.  There is no additional charge if you choose this rider.

Enhanced No Lapse Guarantee Rider.  There is no additional charge if you choose this rider.

Cash Value Plus Rider.  If you choose this rider, we deduct $0.04 per $1,000 of your initial base policy face amount from your policy account value each month until the SAI.earlier of the end of the eighth policy year or termination of the policy or termination of the rider. The charge for this rider does not vary depending upon the specifics of your policy. The current monthly charge for this rider may be lower than the maximum monthly charge of $0.04 per $1,000 of your initial base policy face amount. You must notify us in writing if you wish to cancel this rider. Please see “Appendix III: Policy variations” later in this prospectus for more information on the charge applicable under the prior version of this rider.

Adding the Living Benefits Rider.  If you elect the Living Benefits Rider after the policy is issued, we will deduct $100 from

your policy account value at the time of the transaction. This fee is designed, in part, to compensate us for the administrative costs involved in processing the request.

Your contract’s valueExercise of option to receive a terminal illness “living benefit.”  If you elect to receive a terminal illness “living benefit,” we will deduct up to $250 from any living benefit we pay. This fee is designed, in part, to compensate us for the Structured Investmentadministrative costs involved in processing the request.

Market Stabilizer Option®

 

YourThere is a current percentage charge of 1.40% of any policy account value inallocated to each Segment on the Segment Maturity Date is calculated as described under “Segment Rate of Return” in “Contract Features and Benefits” earlier in this Prospectus.

In setting the Performance Cap Rate that we use in calculating the Segment Maturity Value or Annual Lock Anniversary Starting and Ending Amounts for Annual Lock Segments, we assume that you are going to hold a Segment until the Segment Maturity Date. However, you haveSegment. We reserve the right underto increase or decrease the contract to access amounts in the Segments before the Segment Maturity Date under certain circumstances. Therefore, we calculate a Segment Interim Valuecharge although it will never exceed 2.40%. Of this percentage charge, 0.75% will be deducted on each business day, which is also a Segment Business Day, between the Segment Start Date from the amount being transferred from the MSO Holding Account into the Segment as anup-front charge (“Variable Index Benefit Charge”), with the remaining 0.65% annual charge (of the current Segment Account Value) being deducted from the policy account on a monthly basis during the Segment Term (“Variable Index Segment Account Charge”).

MSO Charges  Current Non-
guaranteed
  Guaranteed
Maximum
Variable Index Benefit Charge  0.75%  0.75%
Variable Index Segment Account Charge  0.65%  1.65%
Total  1.40%  2.40%

This fee table applies specifically to the MSO and should be read in conjunction with the “Tables of the policy charges” under “Risk/ benefit summary: charges and expenses you will pay” earlier in this prospectus and also see “Loan interest spread” earlier in this section for information regarding the “spread” you would pay on any policy loan.

The base policy’s mortality and expense risk charge and currentnon-guaranteed Customer Loyalty Credit will also be applicable to a Segment Account Value or any amounts held in the MSO Holding Account. The mortality and expense risk charge is part of the policy monthly charges. Please see “How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term” for more information. The Customer Loyalty Credit offsets some of the monthly charges.

If a Segment is terminated prior to maturity by policy surrender, or reduced prior to maturity by monthly deductions (if other funds are insufficient) or by loans or a Guideline PremiumForce-out, we will refund a proportionate amount of the Variable Index Benefit Charge corresponding to the surrender or reduction and the time remaining until Segment Maturity Date.Maturity. The refund will be administered as part of the Early Distribution Adjustment process. This refund will increase your surrender value or remaining Segment Account Value, as appropriate. Please note that all Annual Lock Segmentssee Appendix I later in this prospectus for an example and Choice Segments havefurther information.

Any portion of a 5-yearloan allocated to an individual Segment Duration. The method we use to calculate the Segment Interim Value is different than the method we use to calculate the valuewill generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment on the Segment Maturity Date. PriorAccount Value and be subject to the Segment Maturity Date, we use the Segment Interim Value to calculate (1) your account value; (2) the amount your beneficiary would receive as a death benefit; (3) the amount you would receive if you make a withdrawal from a Segment; (4) the amount you would receive if you surrender your contract; or (5) the amount you would receive if you cancel your contract and return it to ushigher guaranteed maximum loan spread (2% for a refund within your state’s “free look” period (unless your state requires that we refund the full amount of your contribution upon cancellation).

The Segment Interim Value is calculated based on a formula that provides a treatment for an early distribution that is designed to be consistent with how distributions at the end of a Segment are treated. Appendix III later in this Prospectus sets forth the calculation formula as well as numerous hypothetical examples. The formula is calculated by adding the fair value of three components. These components provide uspolicies with a market value estimatecontract state of the risk of lossNew York and the possibility of gain at the end of a Segment. These components are used to calculate the Segment Interim Value. The three components are:Oregon and 5% for other policies).

 

(1)

Fair value of hypothetical fixed instruments; plus

(2)

Fair value of hypothetical derivatives; plus

(3)

Cap calculation factor.

We then compare the sum of the three components above with a limitation based on the Performance Cap Rate. In particular, the Segment Interim Value is never greater than the Segment Investment (or most recent Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount, if applicable) multiplied by the portion of the Performance Cap Rate corresponding to the portion of the Segment Duration (or Annual Lock Period for Annual Lock Segments) that has elapsed. This limitation is imposed to discourage owners from withdrawing from a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date where there may have been significant increases in the relevant Index early in the Segment Duration. For more information, please see Appendix III.

4066


Even ifCharges that the corresponding Index has experienced positive investment performance sinceTrusts deduct

The Trusts deduct charges for the Segment Start Date, becausefollowing types of the factors we take into accountfees and expenses:

Management fees.

12b-1 fees.

Operating expenses, such as trustees’ fees, independent public accounting firms’ fees, legal counsel fees, administrative service fees, custodian fees and liability insurance.

Investment-related expenses, such as brokerage commissions.

These charges are reflected in the calculation above, your Segment Interim Value may be lower than your Segment Investment.daily share price of each portfolio. Since shares of each Trust are purchased at their net asset value, these fees and expenses are, in effect, passed on to the variable investment options and are reflected in their unit values. Certain portfolios available under the contract in turn invest in shares of other portfolios of EQ Premier VIP Trust and EQ Advisors Trust and/or shares of unaffiliated portfolios (collectively, the “underlying portfolios”). The underlying portfolios each have their own fees and expenses, including management fees, operating expenses, and investment related expenses such as brokerage commissions. For more information about these charges, please refer to the prospectuses for the Trusts.

    

 

 

4167


5.12. TransferringMore information about procedures that apply to your money among investment optionspolicy

 

 

This section provides further detail about certain subjects that are addressed in the previous pages. The following discussion generally does not repeat the information already contained in those pages.

Transferring your account valueDates and prices at which policy events occur

 

AtWe describe below the general rules for when, and at what prices, events under your policy will occur. Other portions of this prospectus describe circumstances that may cause exceptions. We generally do not repeat those exceptions below.

Date of receipt.  Where this prospectus refers to the day when we receive a payment, request, election, notice, transfer or any time beforeother transaction request from you, we usually mean the day on which that item (or the last thing necessary for us to process that item) arrives in complete and proper form at our Administrative Office or via the appropriate telephone or fax number if the item is a type we accept by those means. There are two main exceptions: if the item arrives (1) on a day that is not a business day or (2) after the close of a business day, then, in each case, we are deemed to have received that item on the next business day.

Business day.  Our “business day” is generally any day the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) is open for regular trading and generally ends at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time (or as of an earlier close of regular trading). A business day does not include a day on which we are not open due to emergency conditions determined by the Securities and Exchange Commission. We may also close early due to such emergency conditions. We compute unit values for our variable investment options as of the end of each business day.

Payments you make.  The following are reflected in your policy as of the date annuity payments are to begin, you can transfer some or all of your account value among the investment options, subject to the following current limitations:we receive them in complete and proper form:

 

You may not transfer out of a Segment before its Segment Maturity Date (which is 5 years for all Annual Lock Segments and Choice Segments).premium payments received after the policy’s investment start date (discussed below)

 

You may not transfer outloan repayments and interest payments

Requests you make.  The following transactions occur as of a Segment Type Holding Account on a Segment Start Date.the date we receive your request in complete and proper form:

withdrawals

 

A contribution or transfer into a Segment Type Holding Account on a Segment Start Date will not be transferred into the Segment that is created on that Segment Start Date. Your money will be transferred into a Segment on the next Segment Start Date, provided you meet the participation requirements.tax withholding elections

 

You may not contribute or transfer money intoface amount decreases that result from a Segment Type Holding Account and designate a Segment Start Date. The account value in the Segment Type Holding Account will be transferred on the first Segment Start date on which you meet the participation requirements.withdrawal

 

changes of allocation percentages for premium payments or monthly deductions

surrenders

changes of owner

changes of beneficiary

transfers from a variable investment option to the guaranteed interest option

loans

transfers among variable investment options

assignments

termination of paid up death benefit guarantee

The following transactions occur on your policy’s next monthly anniversary that coincides with or follows the date we approve your request:

changes in face amount

election of paid up death benefit guarantee

changes in death benefit option

changes of insured person

restoration of terminated policies

termination of any additional benefit riders you have elected

Automatic transfer service.  Transfers pursuant to our automatic transfer service (dollar-cost averaging) occur as of the first day of each policy month. If you request the automatic transfer service in your original policy application, the first transfer will occur as of the first day of the second policy month after your policy’s initial Allocation Date. If you request this service at any later time, we make the first such transfer as of your policy’s first monthly anniversary that coincides with or follows the date we receive your request.

Asset rebalancing service.  If you request the asset rebalancing service, the first redistribution will be on the date you specify or the date we receive your request, if later. However, no rebalancing will occur before your policy’s Allocation Date. Subsequent periodic rebalancings occur quarterly, semiannually or annually, as you have requested.

Delay in certain cases.  We may delay allocating any payment you make to our variable investment options, or any transfer, for the same reasons stated in “Delay of variable investment option proceeds” later in this prospectus. We may also delay such transactions for any other legally permitted purpose.

Prices applicable to policy transactions.  If a transaction will increase or decrease the amount you have in a variable investment option as of a certain date, we process the transaction using the unit values for that option computed as of that day’s close of business, unless that day is not a business day. In that case, we use unit values computed as of the next business day’s close.

Effect of death or surrender.  You may not contributemake any surrender or transfer intopartial withdrawal request after the insured person has died. Also, all insurance coverage ends on the date as of which we process any request for a Segment Type Holding Account ifsurrender.

68


Policy issuance

Register date.  When we issue a policy, we assign it a “register date,” which will be shown in the Segment Maturity Datepolicy. We measure the months, years, and anniversaries of your policy from your policy’s register date.

If you submit the full minimum initial premium to your financial professional at the time you sign the application and before the policy is issued, and we issue the policy as it was applied for (or on a better risk class than applied for), then the register date will be the later of (a) the date you signed part I, section D of the Segmentpolicy application or (b) the date a medical or paramedical professional signed part II of the policy application.

In general, if we do not receive your full minimum initial premium at our Administrative Office before the issue date or, if we issue the policy on a different (less favorable) basis than you applied for, the register date initially will appear on your policy as the date the policy is issued; however, we will move the register date to the date we deliver the policy provided we received your full minimum initial premium. If your policy was delivered on the 29th, 30th or 31st of the month, we will move the register date to the 1st of the following month. In certain circumstances, even if we issue your policy on a less favorable basis, the premium amount you paid may be sufficient to cover your full minimum initial premium. In this event, we will not move the register date to the delivery date. These procedures are designed to ensure that premiums and charges will commence on the same date as your insurance coverage. We will determine the interest rate applicable to the guaranteed interest option based on the register date. This rate will be createdapplied to funds allocated to the guaranteed interest option as of the date we receive the full minimum initial premium at our Administrative Office.

For Section 1035 exchanges:

If we issue the policy as it was applied for (or on a better risk class than applied for), then the Segment Start Date wouldregister date will be after the maturitylater of (a) the date you signed part I, section D of the policy application or (b) the date a medical professional signed part II of the policy application.

If we do not receive your full minimum initial premium payment at our Administrative Office before the issue date or, if we issue the policy on a different (less favorable) basis than you applied for, the register date will be the date the policy is issued.

We may also permit an earlier than customary register date (a) for employer-sponsored cases, to accommodate a common register date for all employees or (b) to provide a younger age at issue. (A younger age at issue reduces the monthly charges that we deduct under a policy.) The charges and deductions commence as of the register date, even when we have permitted an early register date. We may also permit policy owners to delay a register date (up to three months) in employer-sponsored cases.

Investment start date.  This is the business day your investment first begins to earn a return for you. Generally, this is the later of: (1) the business day we receive the full minimum initial premium at our Administrative Office; and (2) the register date of your contract.policy. Before this date, your initial premium will be held in anon-interest bearing account.

Commencement of insurance coverage.  You must give the full minimum initial premium to your financial professional on or before the day the policy and all amendments are delivered to you. No insurance under your policy will take effect unless (1) the insured person is still living at the time such payment and all delivery requirements are completed and (2) the information in the application continues to be true and complete, without material change, as of the date the policy and all amendments are delivered to you and all delivery requirements have been completed and the full minimum initial premium is paid. If you submit the full minimum initial premium with your application, we may, subject to certain conditions, provide a limited amount of temporary insurance on the proposed insured person. You may request and review a copy of our temporary insurance agreement for more information about the terms and conditions of that coverage.

 

You may not transfer to a Segment if the total number of Segments that would be active in your contract after such transfer would be greater than the current maximum number of active Segments allowed. See “Allocating your contributions” in “Contract features and benefits” for more information. If a transfer from a Segment Type Holding Account into a Segment will cause a contract to exceed this limit, such transfers will be defaulted to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. If there are multiple Segments scheduled to be established on a Segment Start Date, new Segments will be established in the order of those that would have the largest initial Segment Investment first until the limitis reached. Any remaining amount that is not transferred into a Segment will then be defaulted to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option.

Non-issuance.  If, after considering your application, we decide not to issue a policy, we will refund any premium you have paid, without interest.

 

TransfersAge; age at issue.  Unless the context in this prospectus requires otherwise, we consider the insured person’s “age” during any policy year to be his or her age on his or her birthday nearest to the beginning of that policy year. For example, the insured person’s age for the first policy year (“age at issue”) is that person’s age on whichever birthday is closer to (i.e., before or after) the policy’s register date.

Ways to make premium and loan payments

Checks and money orders.  Premiums or loan payments generally must be paid by check or money order drawn on a U.S. bank in U.S. dollars and made payable to “Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company.”

We prefer that you make each payment to us with a single check drawn on your business or personal bank account. We also will accept a single money order, bank draft or cashier’s check payable directly to the Company, although we must report such “cash equivalent” payments to the Internal Revenue Service under certain circumstances. Cash and travelers’ checks, or any payments in foreign currency, are not acceptable. We will accept third-party checks payable to someone other than the Company and endorsed over to the Company only (1) as a direct payment from a Segment Type Holding Accountqualified retirement plan or (2) if they are made out to a Segment will not occur if you do not meettrustee who owns the participation requirements. See “Segment Participation Requirements” in “Contract featurespolicy and benefits” earlier in this Prospectus.endorses the entire check (without any refund) as a payment to the policy.

 

Upon advance notice to you, via a client communication mailing, we may change or establish additional restrictions on transfers among the investment options, including limitations on the number, frequency, or dollar amount of transfers. In addition, we may, at any time, exercise our right to limit or terminate transfers into any of the variable investment options and to limit the number of variable investment options which you may elect. We currently do

not impose any transfer restrictions among the variable investment options. A transfer request does not changeAssigning your allocation instructions on file. Our current transfer restrictions are set forth in the “Disruptive transfer activity” section below.policy

 

You may requestassign (transfer) your rights in a transferpolicy to someone else as collateral for a loan, to effect a change of ownership or for some other reason. Collateral assignments may also sometimes be used in writing usingconnection with dividing the specified form or on line using Online Account Access. Youbenefits of the policy under a split-dollar arrangement, which will also have its own tax consequences. A copy of the assignment must send in all signed written requests directlybe forwarded to our processing office. Transfer requests should specify:Administrative Office. We are not responsible for any payment we make or any action we take before we receive notice of the assignment or for the validity of the assignment. An absolute assignment is a change of ownership.

Certain transfers for value may subject you to income tax and penalties and cause the death benefit to lose itsincome-tax free treatment. Further, a gift of a policy that has a loan outstanding may be treated as part gift and part transfer for value, which could result in both gift

 

(1)

the contract number,

(2)

the dollar amounts or percentage to be transferred, and

(3)

the investment options to and from which you are transferring.

69

We will confirm all transfers


tax and income tax consequences. The IRS issued regulations in writing.both 2002 and 2003 concerning split-dollar arrangements, including policies subject to collateral assignments. The regulations provide both new and interim guidance as to the taxation of such arrangements. These regulations address taxation issues in connection with arrangements which are compensatory in nature, involve a shareholder and corporation, or a donor and donee. See also discussion under “Split-dollar and other employee benefit programs” and “Estate, gift, and generation-skipping taxes” in the “Tax information” section of this prospectus. You should consult your tax advisor prior to making a transfer or assignment.

 

Please see “AllocatingYou can change your contributions”policy’s insured person

Your policy has the Substitution of Insured Person Rider and after the policy’s second year, we will permit you to request that a new insured person replace the existing one subject to our rules then in “Contract featureseffect. This requires that you provide us with adequate evidence that the proposed new insured person meets our requirements for insurance. Other requirements are outlined in your policy.

Upon making this change, the monthly insurance charges we deduct will be based on the new insured person’s insurance risk characteristics. In addition, anyno-lapse guarantee and benefits”Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider will terminate. It may also affect the face amount that a policy will have if you subsequently elect the paid up death benefit guarantee. The change of insured person will not, however, affect the surrender charge computation for more information aboutthe amount of coverage that is then in force.

Substituting the insured person is a taxable event and may, depending upon individual circumstances, have other tax consequences as well. For example, the change could cause the policy to be a “modified endowment contract” or to fail the Internal Revenue Code’s definition of “life insurance,” or in some cases require that we also distribute certain amounts to you from the policy. See “Tax information” earlier in this prospectus. You should consult your roletax advisor prior to substituting the insured person. As a condition to substituting the insured person we may require you to sign a form acknowledging the potential tax consequences. In no event, however, will we permit a change that we believe causes your policy to fail the definition of life insurance or causes the policy to lose its ability to be tested under the 2001 CSO tables. See “Other information” under “Tax information” earlier in managingthis prospectus. Also, if the paid up death benefit guarantee is in effect or your allocations.policy is on loan extension, you may not request to substitute the insured person.

Requirements for surrender requests

Your surrender request must include the policy number, your name, your taxpayer identification number, the name of the insured person, and the address where proceeds should be mailed. The request must be signed by you, as the owner, and by any joint owner, collateral assignee or irrevocable beneficiary. We may also require you to complete specific tax forms, or provide a representation that your policy is not being exchanged for another life or annuity contract.

Gender-neutral policies

Congress and various states have from time to time considered legislation that would require insurance rates to be the same for males

and females. In addition, employers and employee organizations should consider, in consultation with counsel, the impact of Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 on the purchase of Incentive Life Optimizer® II in connection with an employment-related insurance or benefit plan. In a 1983 decision, the United States Supreme Court held that, under Title VII, optional annuity benefits under a deferred compensation plan could not vary on the basis of sex.

There will be no distinctions based on sex in the cost of insurance rates for Incentive Life Optimizer® II policies sold in Montana. We will also make such gender-neutral policies available on request in connection with certain employee benefit plans. Cost of insurance rates applicable to a gender-neutral policy will not be greater than the comparable male rates under a gender specific Incentive Life Optimizer® II policy.

Future policy exchanges

 

We may chargeat some future time, under certain circumstances and subject to applicable law, allow the current owner of this policy to exchange it for a universal life policy we are then offering. The exchange may or may not be advantageous to you, based on all of the circumstances, including a comparison of contractual terms and conditions and charges and deductions. We will provide additional information upon request at such time as exchanges may be permitted.

Broker transaction authority

After your policy has been issued, we may accept transfer chargerequests and changes to your premium allocation instructions or fund transfers by telephone, mail, facsimile or electronically, and requests for automatic transfer service, asset rebalancing service and changes to the minimum growth cap rate for MSO in writing, by mail or facsimile, from your financial professional, provided that we have your prior written authorization to do so on file. Accordingly, the Company will rely on the stated identity of the person placing instructions as authorized to do so on your behalf. The Company will not be liable for any transfers amongclaim, loss, liability or expenses that may arise out of such instructions. The Company will continue to rely on this authorization until it receives your written notification at its processing office that you have withdrawn this authorization. The Company may change or terminate telephone or electronic or overnight mail transfer procedures at any time without prior notice and restrict facsimile, internet telephone and other electronic transfer services because of disruptive transfer activity. The Company may terminate any such authorization at any time without prior notice.

70


13. More information about other matters

About our general account

This policy is offered to customers through various financial institutions, brokerage firms and their affiliate insurance agencies. No financial institution, brokerage firm or insurance agency has any liability with respect to a policy’s account value or any guaranteed benefits with which the policy was issued. The Company is solely responsible to the policy owner for the policy’s account value and such guaranteed benefits. The general obligations and any guaranteed benefits under the policy are supported by the Company’s general account and are subject to the Company’s claims paying ability. An owner should look to the financial strength of the Company for its claims paying ability. Assets in the general account are not segregated for the exclusive benefit of any particular policy or obligation. General account assets are also available to the insurer’s general creditors and the conduct of its routine business activities, such as the payment of salaries, rent and other ordinary business expenses. For more information about the Company’s financial strength, you may review its financial statements and/or check its current rating with one or more of the independent sources that rate insurance companies for their financial strength and stability. Such ratings are subject to change and have no bearing on the performance of the variable investment optionsoptions. You may also speak with your financial representative.

The general account is subject to regulation and supervision by the New York State Department of Financial Services and to the insurance laws and regulations of all jurisdictions where we are authorized to do business. Interests under the policies in excessthe general account have not been registered and are not required to be registered under the Securities Act of 12 transfers in1933 because of exemptions and exclusionary provisions that apply. The general account is not required to register as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and it is not registered as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940. The policy is a contract year. “covered security” under the federal securities laws.

We dohave been advised that the staff of the SEC has not deduct a transfer charge for any transferreviewed the portions of this prospectus that relate to the general account. The disclosure with regard to the general account, however, may be subject to certain provisions of the federal securities law relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in connection with our Dollar Cap Averaging Program. For more information, see “Transfer charge” in “Charges and expenses” later in this Prospectus.prospectuses.

Transfers of your policy account value

 

DisruptiveTransfers not implemented.  If a request cannot be fully administered, only the part that is in good order will be processed. Any part of the request that cannot be processed will be denied and an explanation will be provided to you. This could occur, for example, where the request does not comply with our transfer activitylimitations, or where you request transfer of an amount greater than that currently allocated to an investment option.

 

Similarly, the automatic transfer service will terminate immediately if: (1) your amount in the EQ/Money Market option is insufficient to cover the automatic transfer amount; (2) your policy is in a grace

period; (3) we receive notice of the insured person’s death; or (4) you have either elected the paid up death benefit guarantee or your policy is placed on loan extension. Similarly, the asset rebalancing program will terminate if either (2), (3) or (4) occurs.

Disruptive transfer activity.  You should note that the contractpolicy is not designed for professional “market timing” organizations, or other organizations or individuals engaging in a market timing strategy. The contractpolicy is not designed to accommodate programmed transfers, frequent transfers or transfers that are large in relation to the total assets of the underlying portfolio.

 

Frequent transfers, including market timing and other program trading or short-term trading strategies, may be disruptive to the underlying portfolios in which the variable investment options invest. Disruptive transfer activity may adversely affect performance and the interests of long-term investors by requiring a portfolio to maintain larger amounts of cash or to liquidate portfolio holdings at a disadvantageous time or price. For example, when market timing occurs, a portfolio may have to sell its holdings to have the cash necessary to redeem the market timer’s investment. This can happen when it is not advantageous to sell any securities, so the portfolio’s performance may be hurt. When large dollar amounts are involved, market timing can also make it difficult to use long-term investment strategies because a portfolio cannot predict how much cash it will have to invest. In addition, disruptive transfers or purchases and redemptions of portfolio investments may impede efficient portfolio management and impose increased transaction costs, such as brokerage costs, by requiring the portfolio manager to effect more frequent purchases and sales of portfolio securities. Similarly, a portfolio may bear increased administrative costs as a result of the asset level and investment volatility that accompanies patterns of excessive or short-term trading. Portfolios that invest a significant portion of their assets in foreign securities or the securities ofsmall- andmid-capitalization

42


companies tend to be subject to the risks associated with market timing and short-term trading strategies to a greater extent than portfolios that do not. Securities trading in overseas markets present time zone arbitrage opportunities when events affecting portfolio securities values occur after the close of the overseas market but prior to the close of the U.S. markets. Securities ofsmall- andmid-capitalization companies present arbitrage opportunities because the market for such securities may be less liquid than the market for securities of larger companies, which could result in pricing inefficiencies. Please see the prospectuses for the underlying portfolios for more information on how portfolio shares are priced.

 

We currently use the procedures described below to discourage disruptive transfer activity. You should understand, however, that these procedures are subject to the following limitations: (1) they primarily rely on the policies and procedures implemented by the underlying portfolios; (2) they do not eliminate the possibility that disruptive transfer activity, including market timing, will occur or that portfolio

71


performance will be affected by such activity; and (3) the design of market timing procedures involves inherently subjective judgments, which we seek to make in a fair and reasonable manner consistent with the interests of all contractpolicy owners.

 

We offer investment options with underlying portfolios that are part of theEQ Premier VIP Trust and EQ Advisors Trust (together, the “affiliated trusts”), as well as investment options with underlying portfolios of outside trusts with which the Company has entered participation agreements (the “trust”“unaffiliated trusts” and, collectively with the affiliated trusts, the “trusts”). The trust hasaffiliated trusts have adopted policies and procedures regarding disruptive transfer activity. The trust discouragesThey discourage frequent purchases and redemptions of portfolio shares and will not make special arrangements to accommodate such transactions. The trust aggregatesThey aggregate inflows and outflows for each portfolio on a daily basis. On any day when a portfolio’s net inflows or outflows exceed an established monitoring threshold, the affiliated trust obtains from us contractpolicy owner trading activity. The trustaffiliated trusts currently considersconsider transfers into and out of (or vice versa) the same variable investment option within a five business day period as potentially disruptive transfer activity. In most cases, the trust reserves the right to reject a transfer that it believes, in its sole discretion, is disruptive (or potentially disruptive) to the management of one of its portfolios. Please see the prospectuses for the trust for more information.

 

When a contract ownerpolicy is identified in connection with potentially disruptive transfer activity for the first time, a letter is sent to the contractpolicy owner explaining that there isthe Company has a policy against disruptive transfer activity and that if such activity continues, certain transfer privileges may be eliminated. If and when the contractpolicy owner is identified a second time as engaged in potentially disruptive transfer activity under the contract,policy, we currently prohibit the use of voice, fax and automated transaction services. We currently apply such action for the remaining life of each affected contract.policy. We or a trust may change the definition of potentially disruptive transfer activity, the monitoring procedures and thresholds, any notification procedures, and the procedures to restrict this activity. Any new or revised policies and procedures will apply to all contractpolicy owners uniformly. We do not permit exceptions to our policies restricting disruptive transfer activity.

Each unaffiliated trust may have its own policies and procedures regarding disruptive transfer activity. If an unaffiliated trust advises us that there may be disruptive activity from one of our policy owners, we will work with the unaffiliated trust to review policy owner trading activity. Each trust reserves the right to reject a transfer that it believes, in its sole discretion, is disruptive (or potentially disruptive) to the management of one of its portfolios. Please see the prospectuses for the trusts for more information.

 

It is possible that a trust may impose a redemption fee designed to discourage frequent or disruptive trading by contractpolicy owners. As of the date of this prospectus, the trusts had not implemented such a fee. If a redemption fee is implemented by a trust, that fee, like any other trust fee, will be borne by the contractpolicy owner.

Contract

Policy owners should note that it is not always possible for us and the underlying trusts to identify and prevent disruptive transfer activity. In addition, because we do not monitor for all frequent trading at the separate account level, contractpolicy owners may engage in frequent trading which may not be detected, for example, due to low net inflows or outflows on the particular day(s). Therefore, no assurance can be given that we or the trusts will successfully impose restrictions on all potentially disruptive transfers. Because there is no guarantee that

disruptive trading will be stopped, some contractpolicy owners may be treated differently than others, resulting in the risk that some contractpolicy owners may be able to engage in frequent transfer activity while others will bear the effect of that frequent transfer activity. The potential effects of frequent transfer activity are discussed above.

43


6. Accessing your money

Withdrawing your account value

 

You have two ways to withdraw your account value before annuity payments begin. The table below shows the methods available under each type of contract. More information follows the table. For the tax consequences of taking withdrawals, see “Tax information” later in this Prospectus.Telephone and Internet requests

 

If you haveare a Series C or Series ADV contract, disregard any references to “withdrawal charges” or “free withdrawal amount”properly authorized person, you may make transfers between investment options over the Internet as described earlier in this section; these terms only applyprospectus in “How to Series B contracts, not Series C or Series ADV contracts.make transfers” under “Transferring your money among our investment options.”

 

MethodAlso, you may make the following additional types of Withdrawal

ContractPartialLifetime
required
minimum
distribution
NQYesNo
Traditional IRAYesYes
Roth IRAYesNo
QP(1)YesNo
(1)

All payments are made to the plan trust, as the owner of the contract. See “Appendix VI: Purchase considerations for defined benefit and defined contribution plans” laterrequests by calling the number under “By Phone:” in this Prospectus.

We impose no withdrawal charge for withdrawals from Series C or Series ADV contracts. However, withdrawals, including withdrawals made to pay all or part of any fee that may be associated with afee-based program, may be subject to income tax and, unless the taxpayer is over age 591/2 or another exception applies, an additional 10% federal income tax penalty, as described in “Tax information” later in this Prospectus. In addition, thefee-based program sponsor may apply a charge if you decide to no longer participate in the program. You should consult with your program sponsor for more details about your particularfee-based arrangement.

All requests for withdrawals must be made on a specific form that we provide. Please see “How to reach us” earlier in this Prospectusfrom a touch-tone phone, if the policy is individually owned and you are the owner, or through www.equitable.com for more information.those outside the U.S. if you are the individual owner:

changes of premium allocation percentages

changes of address

request forms and statements

to request a policy loan (loan requests cannot be made online by corporate policy owners)

enroll for electronic delivery and view statements/documents online

to pay your premium or make a loan repayment

For security purposes, all telephone requests are automatically tape-recorded and are invalid if the information given is incomplete or any portion of the request is inaudible. We have established procedures reasonably designed to confirm that telephone instructions are genuine.

 

Partial withdrawals

(All contracts)

You may take partial withdrawals from your account value at any time before annuity payments begin. The minimum amount you may withdraw at any time is $300. If you requestwish to enroll through www.equitable.com for those outside the U.S., you must first agree to the terms and conditions set forth in our www.equitable.com for those outside the U.S. Online Services Agreement, which you can find at our website. We will send you a withdrawalconfirmation letter by first class mail. Additionally, you will be required to use a password and protect it from unauthorized use. We will provide subsequent written confirmation of any transactions. We will assume that leaves you with an account value of less than $500,all instructions received through www.equitable.com for those outside the U.S., are given by you; however, we reserve the right to terminaterefuse to process any transaction and/or block access to www.equitable.com for those outside the contract and pay youU.S., if we have reason to believe the cash value. See “Surrender of your contract to receive its cash value” below.instructions given are unauthorized.

 

For Series B contracts, partial withdrawals in excessIf we do not employ reasonable procedures to confirm the genuineness of the 10% free withdrawal amounttelephone or Internet instructions, we may be subject to a withdrawal charge (see “10% free withdrawal amount” in “Charges and expenses” later in this Prospectus).

Partial withdrawalsliable for any losses arising out of Segments are permitted, subjectany act or omission that constitutes negligence, lack of good faith, or willful misconduct. In light of our procedures, we will not be liable for following telephone or Internet instructions that we reasonably believe to certain restrictions. See “How withdrawals are taken from your account value”

later in this section. A partial withdrawal from a Segment will reduce your Segment Investment in that Segment and, therefore, your Segment Maturity Value for that Segment. For Annual Lock Segments, a partial withdrawal will also reduce each Annual Lock Anniversary Starting and Ending Amount. The reduction in the Segment Investment and each Annual Lock Anniversary Starting and Ending Amount may be greater than the dollar amount of your withdrawal. For more information, see Appendix III.

Lifetime required minimum distribution withdrawals

(Traditional IRA contracts only — See “Tax information” later in this Prospectus.)genuine.

 

We offer our “automatic required minimum distribution (RMD) service”reserve the right to help you meet lifetime required minimum distributions under federal income tax rules. This is not the exclusive way for yourefuse to meet these rules. After consultation with your tax adviser, you may decideprocess any telephone or Internet transactions if we have reason to compute required minimum distributions (we refer to them as “RMDs”) yourself and request partial withdrawals. In such a case, a withdrawal charge could apply. Before electing this account-based withdrawal option, you should consider whether annuitization might be better in your situation. Please refer to “Required minimum distributions” under “Individual Retirement Arrangements (“IRAs”)” in “Tax information” later in this Prospectus.

This service is not available to qualified plan trust owned contracts.

You may elect this service in the calendar year in which you reach age 701/2 or in any later year (other than the first calendar year that your contract is in force). The minimum amount we will pay out is $250. Currently, RMD payments will be made annually each December.

We do not impose a withdrawal charge on the RMD payment taken through our automatic RMD service even if, when added to a partial withdrawal previously taken in the same contract year, the RMD payments exceed the free withdrawal amount.

This service does not generate an automatic RMD payment during the first contract year. Therefore, if you are making a rollover or transfer contribution to the contract after age 701/2, you must take an RMD before the rollover or transfer. If you do not, any withdrawals that you take during the first contract year to satisfy your RMD amount may be subject to withdrawal charges, if applicable, if they exceed the free withdrawal amount.

The RMD amount is based on your entire interest in your traditional IRA contract whether your investments are allocated to one or more variable investment options and/or one or more Segments. We will withdraw your RMD amount from the variable investment options first on a pro rata basis. If there is insufficient account value in the variable investment options, then we will withdraw the balance of the RMD amount from the Segment Type Holding Accounts on a pro rata basis. If there is insufficient value in the variable investment options and the Segment Type Holding Accounts, we will withdraw amounts from the Segments on a pro rata basis.

44


As you approach age 701/2 you should consider the effect of allocations to any Segment. You should consider whether you have a sufficient amount allocated to the variable investment options under this contract and/or sufficient liquidity under other traditional IRAs that you maintain in order to satisfy your RMD for this contract without affecting amounts allocated to a Segment under this contract.

We will send to traditional IRA owners a form outlining the minimum distribution options available in the year you reach age 701/2 (if you have not begun your annuity payments before that time).

How withdrawals are taken from your account value

Withdrawals

Unless you specify otherwise, we will subtract your withdrawals on a pro rata basis from your value in the variable investment options (excluding the Segment Type Holding Accounts and dollar cap averaging account). If there is insufficient value or no value in the variable investment options (excluding the Segment Type Holding Accounts and dollar cap averaging account), any additional amount of the withdrawal required or the total amount of the withdrawal will be taken on a pro rata basis from the Segment Type Holding Accounts. If there are insufficient funds in the Segment Type Holding Accounts, any additional amount of the withdrawal required will be taken from the dollar cap averaging account. If there is insufficient value in the dollar cap averaging account, we will deduct all or a portion of the withdrawal from the Segments on a pro rata basis. A partial withdrawal from the Dollar Cap Averaging Program will terminate the program.

If you specify the investment options from which you want us to deduct your withdrawal, the following restrictions apply: If the amount of your withdrawal is equal to or less than your account value in the variable investment options and Segment Type Holding Accounts, the entire withdrawal must come from the account value in the variable investment options and Segment Type Holding Accounts, and the withdrawal cannot be pro rata; you must specify the dollar amount or percentage withdrawal for the variable investment options and Segment Type Holding Accounts from which to take the withdrawal. In other words, you cannot take a withdrawal from the Segments if there is any value remaining in the variable investment options and Segment Type Holding Accounts.

After 100% of the value has been taken from the variable investment options and Segment Type Holding Accounts, you can specify the dollar amount or percentage of the withdrawal to be taken from any Segment.

If you have amounts in a Segment Type Holding Account and you make a withdrawal on a Segment Start Date, that amount will not be transferred into the Segment created on that date.

Withdrawals prior to your Segment Maturity Date reduce the Segment Investment on a pro rata basis by the same proportionbelieve that the Segment Interim Value is reduced onrequest compromises the dategeneral security and/or integrity of the withdrawal. For Annual Lock Segments, each Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount and Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount is also recalculated. Below is a table summarizing the impactour automated systems (see discussion of a withdrawal during the second Annual Lock Period of an Annual Lock Segment on the Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount (which is equal to the Segment Investment) and Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount that is described in greater detail immediately following the table.

         Before Withdrawal       After Withdrawal
Year 

Index

Perfo
rmance

Rate

 

Annual
Lock

Yearly
Rate

of

Return

 

Segment

 Invest
ment* 

 

Annual
Lock

Anniv
ersary

Ending

Amount

       

Segment

Investment*

 

Annual
Lock

Anniv
ersary

Ending

Amount

1 13% 12% $1,000.00 $1,120.00     $900.00 $1,008.00
1.5 $110.00 withdrawal** (Segment Interim Value at time of withdrawal is $1,100.00)
*

The first Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount is equal to the Segment Investment.

**

$110 is the total amount withdrawn.

Assume $1,000.00 is invested in an Annual Lock Segment. The Index Performance Rate for the first Annual Lock Period is 13% which is greater than the Performance Cap Rate of 12%. Therefore, the first Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount is $1,120.00 ($1,000.00 + ($1,000.00 * 12%)). If a withdrawal of $110.00 is taken during the second Annual Lock Period and the Segment Interim Value on the date of the withdrawal is $1,100.00) then the recalculated first Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount (which is equal to the Segment Investment) is $900.00 ($1,000.00 – ($1,000.00 * ($110.00/$1,100.00))). The recalculated Annual Lock Anniversary Ending Amount is $1,008.00 ($900.00 + ($900.00 * 12%))“Disruptive transfer activity” above).

 

You canAny telephone, Internet or fax transaction request in advance of your Segment Maturity Date, a withdrawal of your Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date, whichthat is not subject tocompleted by the restrictions described above regarding the need to withdraw amounts in variable investment options and Segment Type Holding Accounts before withdrawing amounts from Segments. We will only acceptclose of a request to withdraw your Segment Maturity Value if you submit the request within 12 months of the Segment Maturity Date.

If you have authorized your advisor to take withdrawals of advisory fees from your Series ADV contract, your advisor can elect to withdrawal their advisory fees from your contract at any time. These withdrawals, like all withdrawals, will reduce your Segment Investment on a pro rata basis if taken from a Segmentbusiness day (which may mean that the reduction in the Segment Investment is greater than the dollar amount of the withdrawal). A withdrawal from a Series ADV NQ contract, including a withdrawal to pay the fees of thefee-based program, may be a taxable event. For the tax consequences of withdrawals, see “Tax information” later in this Prospectus.

Surrendering your contract to receive its cash value

You may surrender your contract to receive its cash value at any time while an owner is living (or for contracts withnon-natural owners, while the annuitant is living) and before you begin to receive annuity payments. For a surrender to be effective, we must receive your written request and your contract at our processing office. We will determine your cash value on the date we receive the required information.

You may receive your cash value in a single sum payment or apply it to one or more of the annuity payout options. See “Your annuity payout options” below. For the tax consequences of surrenders, see “Tax information” later in this Prospectus.

When a contract is surrendered in certain states, the free withdrawal amount is not taken into account when calculating the amount of the withdrawal. See “10% free withdrawal amount” under “Charges under the contract” in “Charges and expenses” later in this Prospectus.usually 4:00 p.m.

 

 

4572


Withdrawals treatedEastern Time) will be processed as surrendersof the next business day. During times of extreme market activity, or for other reasons, you may be unable to contact us to make a telephone or Internet request. If this occurs, you should submit a written transaction request to our Administrative Office. We reserve the right to discontinue telephone or Internet transactions, or modify the procedures and conditions for such transactions, without notifying you, at any time.

Cybersecurity

We rely heavily on interconnected computer systems and digital data to conduct our variable life insurance product business. Because our variable life insurance product business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners, our business is vulnerable to disruptions from utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g., hardware and software malfunctions), and cyber-attacks. These risks include, among other things, the theft, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, interference with or denial of service, attacks on websites and other operational disruption and unauthorized use or abuse of confidential customer information. Such systems failures and cyber-attacks affecting us, any third party administrator, the underlying funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service providers may adversely affect us and your policy account value. For instance, systems failures and cyber-attacks may interfere with our processing of policy transactions, including the processing of orders from our website or with the underlying funds, impact our ability to calculate your policy account value, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information, impede order processing, subject us and/or our service providers and intermediaries to regulatory fines and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. Cybersecurity risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the underlying funds invest, which may cause the funds underlying your policy to lose policy account value. While there can be no assurance that we or the underlying funds or our service providers will avoid losses affecting your policy due to cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future, we take reasonable steps to mitigate these risks and secure our systems from such failures and attacks.

Suicide and certain misstatements

 

If you withdrawan insured person commits suicide within certain time periods, the amount of death benefit we pay will be limited as described in the policy. Also, if an application misstated the age or gender of an insured person, we will adjust the amount of any death benefit (and certain rider benefits), as described in the policy (or rider).

When we pay policy proceeds

General.  We will generally pay any death benefit, surrender, withdrawal, or loan within seven days after we receive the request and any other required items.

Clearance of checks.  We reserve the right to defer payment of that portion of your policy account value that is attributable to a premium payment or loan repayment made by check for a reasonable period of time (not to exceed 15 days) to allow the check to clear the banking system.

Delay of guaranteed interest option proceeds.  We also have the right to defer payment or transfers of amounts out of our guaranteed interest option for up to six months. If we delay more than 90% of a contract’s current cash value,30 days in paying you such amounts, we will treat itpay interest of at least 3% per year from the date we receive your request.

Delay of variable investment option proceeds.  We reserve the right to defer payment of any death benefit, transfer, loan or other distribution that is derived from a variable investment option if (a) the New York Stock Exchange is closed (other than customary weekend and holiday closings) or trading on that exchange is restricted; (b) the SEC has declared that an emergency exists, as a requestresult of which disposal of securities is not reasonably practicable or it is not reasonably practicable to surrenderfairly determine the contractpolicy account value; or (c) the law permits the delay for its cash value. the protection of owners. If we need to defer calculation of values for any of the foregoing reasons, all delayed transactions will be processed at the next available unit values.

Delay to challenge coverage.  We may challenge the validity of your insurance policy or any rider based on any material misstatements in an application you have made to us. We cannot make such challenges, however, beyond certain time limits set forth in the policy or rider. If the insured person dies within one of these limits, we may delay payment of any proceeds until we decide whether to challenge the policy.

Changes we can make

In addition to any of the other changes described in this prospectus, we have the right to pay the cash value and terminate the contract if no contributions are made during the last three completed contract years, and the account value is less than $500,modify how we or if you make a withdrawal that would result in a cash value of less than $500.Separate Account FP operate. For the tax consequences of withdrawals, see “Tax information” later in this Prospectus.

When to expect payments

Generally,example, we will fulfill requests for payments out of the investment options within seven calendar days after the date of the transaction to which the request relates. These transactions may include payment of a death benefit, payment of any amount you withdraw (less any withdrawal charge) and, upon surrender or termination, payment of the cash value. We may postpone such payments or applying proceeds for any period during which:

(1)

the NYSE is closed or restricts trading,

(2)

the SEC determines that an emergency exists as a result of which sales of securities or determination of fair value of an investment option’s assets is not reasonably practicable, or

(3)

the SEC, by order, permits us to defer payment to protect people remaining in the variable investment options.

All payments are made by check and are mailed to you (or the payee named in atax-free exchange) by U.S. mail, unless you request that we use an express delivery or wire transfer service at your expense.

Signature Guarantee

As a protection against fraud, we require a signature guarantee (i.e., Medallion Signature Guarantee as required by us) for the following transaction requests:

disbursements, including but not limited to partial withdrawals, surrenders, transfers and exchanges, over $250,000;

any disbursement requested within 30 days of an address change;

any disbursement when we do not have an originating or guaranteed signature on file or where we question a signature or perceive any inconsistency between the signature on file and the signature on the request; and

any other transaction we require.

We may change the specific requirements listed above, or add signature guarantees in other circumstances, at our discretion if we deem it necessary or appropriate to help protect against fraud. For current requirements, please refer to the requirements listed on the appropriate form or call us at the number listed in this prospectus.

You can obtain a Medallion Signature Guarantee from more than 7,000 financial institutions that participate in a Medallion Signature Guarantee program. The best source of a Medallion Signature Guarantee is a bank, brokerage firm or credit union with which you do business.A notary public cannot provide a Medallion Signature Guarantee. Notarization will not substitute for a Medallion Signature Guarantee.

Your annuity payout options

The following description assumes annuitization of your entire contract. For partial annuitization, see “Partial annuitization” below.

Deferred annuity contracts such as Structured Capital Strategies® provide for conversion to payout status at or before the contract’s “maturity date.” This is called annuitization. When your contract is annuitized, your Structured Capital Strategies® contract and all its benefits will terminate and will be converted to a supplemental payout annuity contract (“payout option”) that provides for periodic payments for life or for a specified period of time. In general, the periodic payment amount is determined by the account value or cash value of your Structured Capital Strategies® contract at the time of annuitization, the annuity payout option that you select, and the annuity purchase factor to which that value is applied, as described below. We have the right to require you to provide any information we deem necessary to provide an annuity payout option. If an annuity payout is later found to be based on incorrect information, it will be adjusted on the basis of the correct information.to:

Your Structured Capital Strategies® contract guarantees that upon annuitization, your account value will be applied to a guaranteed annuity purchase factor for a life annuity payout option. We reserve the right, with advance notice to you, to change your annuity purchase factor any time after your fifth contract date anniversary and at not less than five year intervals after the first change. Any change to the annuity purchase factor will only apply to contributions made after the date of the change. (Please see your contract and SAI for more information). In addition, you may apply your account value or cash value, whichever is applicable, to any other annuity payout option that we may offer at the time of annuitization. We may offer other payout options not outlined here. Your financial professional can provide details.

Structured Capital Strategies® currently offers you several choices of annuity payout options.

You can choose from among the annuity payout options listed below. Restrictions may apply, depending on the type of contract you own and the annuitant’s age at contract issue. We reserve the right to add, remove or change these annuity payout options at any time.

Annuity payout options

Fixed annuity payout options

•  Life annuity

•  Life annuity with period certain

•  Life annuity with refund certain

 

 

combine two or more variable investment options or withdraw assets relating to Incentive Life annuity:Optimizer®  An annuity that guarantees payments for the rest of the annuitant’s life. Payments end with the last monthly payment before the annuitant’s death. Because there is no continuation of benefits following the annuitant’s death with this payout II from one investment option it provides the highest monthly payment of any of the life annuity options, so long as the annuitant is living.and put them into another;

 

Life annuity with period certain:  An annuity that guarantees payments for the rest of the annuitant’s life. If the annuitant dies before the end of a selected period of time (“period certain”), payments continue to the beneficiary for the balance of the period certain. The period certain cannot extend beyond the annuitant’s life expectancy or the joint life expectancy of the registration of, orre-register, Separate Account FP under the Investment Company Act of 1940;

 

46operate Separate Account FP under the direction of a “committee” or discharge such a committee at any time;


annuitant and the joint annuitant. A life annuity with period certain is the form of annuity under the contracts that you will receive if you do not elect a different payout option. In this case the period certain will be based on the annuitant’s age and will not exceed 10 years or the annuitant’s life expectancy.

 

Life annuity with refund certain:  An annuity that guarantees payments for the rest of the annuitant’s life. If the annuitant dies before the amount applied to purchase the annuity option has been recovered, payments to the beneficiary will continue until that amount has been recovered.

restrict or eliminate any voting rights or privileges of policy owners (or other persons) that affect Separate Account FP;

 

The life annuity, life annuity with period certain, and life annuity with refund certain payout options are available on a single lifeoperate Separate Account FP, or joint and survivor life basis. The joint and survivor life annuity guarantees payments for the restone or more of the annuitant’s life and, aftervariable investment options, in any other form the annuitant’s death, payments continue to the survivor.

With fixed annuities, we guarantee fixed annuity paymentslaw allows. This includes any form that will be based either on the tables of guaranteed annuity purchase factors in your contract or on our then current annuity purchase factors, whichever is more favorable for you.

The amount applied to purchase an annuity payout option

The amount applied to purchase an annuity payout option varies depending on the payout option that you choose and the timing of your purchase as it relates to any withdrawal charges that apply under your contract.

There is no withdrawal charge imposed if you select a life annuity, life annuity with period certain or life annuity with refund certain. If we are offering non-life contingent forms of annuities, the withdrawal charge will be imposed.

Partial annuitization.  Partial annuitization of nonqualified deferred annuity contracts is permitted under certain circumstances. You may choose from the life-contingent annuity payout options described here. We no longer offer a period certain option for partial annuitization. We require you to elect partial annuitization on the form we specify. For purposes of this contract we will effect any partial annuitization as a withdrawal applied to a payout annuity. See “How withdrawals are taken from your account value” earlier in this section and also the discussion of “Partial annuitization” in “Tax information” for more information.

Selecting an annuity payout option

When you select a payout option, we will issue you a separate written agreement confirming your right to receive annuity payments. We require you to return your contract before annuity payments begin. Unless you choose a different payout option, we will pay annuity payments under a life annuity with a maximum period certain of 10 years. The contract owner and annuitant must meet the issue age and payment requirements.

You can choose the date annuity payments are to begin, but generally it may not be earlier than thirteen months from the Structured Capital Strategies® contract date. You can change the date your annuity payments are to begin any time. The date may not be later than your contract’s maturity date. Your contract’s maturity date is the date by which you must either take a lump sum withdrawal or select an annuity payout option. The maturity date is generally the contract date anniversary that follows the annuitant’s 95th birthday.

We will send you a notice with your contract statement one year prior to your maturity date. Once you have selected an annuity payout option and payments have begun, no change can be made. If you do not respond to the notice within 30 days following your maturity date, your contract will be annuitized automatically.

We currently offer different payment frequencies on certain annuity payout options. In general, the total annual payout will be lower for more frequent payouts (such as monthly) because of the increased administrative expenses associated with more frequent payouts. Also, in general, the longer the period over which we expectallows us to make payments, the lower will be your payment each year.

The amount of the annuity payments will depend on:

(1)

the amount applied to purchase the annuity;

(2)

the type of annuity chosen;

(3)

in the case of a life annuity, the annuitant’s age (or the annuitant’s and joint annuitant’s ages); and

(4)

in certain instances, the sex of the annuitant(s).

The amount applied to provide the annuity payments will be (1) the account valuedirect investments, in which case we may charge Separate Account FP an advisory fee. We may make any legal investments we wish for Separate Account FP. In addition, we may disapprove any life annuity form,change in investment advisers or (2) the cash value for any annuity certain (an annuity form that does not guarantee payments forin investment policy unless a person’s lifetime) except that if the period certain is more than five years, the amount applied will be no less than 95% of the account value.law or regulation provides differently.

 

If at the time you elect a payout option, the amount to be applied is less than $2,000 or the initial payment under the form elected is less than $20 monthly, we reserve the right to pay the account valuetake any action that results in a single sum rather than as payments under the payout option chosen.

Please see Appendix II later in this Prospectus for state variations.

Annuity maturity date

Your contract has a maturity date. The maturity date is based on the age of the original annuitant at contract issue and cannot be changed other than in conformance with applicable law, even if you name a new annuitant. The maturity date is generally the contract date anniversary that follows the annuitant’s 95th birthday (or older joint annuitant’s, if your contract has joint annuitants). The maturity date may not be less than thirteen months from your contract date, unless otherwise stated in your contract. We will send a notice with the contract statement one year prior to the maturity date. The notice will include the date of maturity, describe the available annuity payout options, state the availability of a lump sum payment option, and identify the default payout option if you do not provide an election by the time of your contract maturity date. The default payout option is a life annuity with a maximum period certain of 10 years.

47


7. Charges and expenses

Charges that the Company deducts

We deduct the following charge each day from the net assets of each variable investment option (including the Segment Type Holding Account and dollar cap averaging account). This charge is reflectedmaterial change in the unit valuesunderlying investments of each variable investment option:

a variable investment option, fee.

We deductwe will notify you to the following charge from the performance of your investment (if positive) in a Choice Segment:

the Choice cost.

We deduct the following charges from your account value. When we deduct these charges from your variable investment options, we reduce the number of units credited to your contract:

for Series B contracts, at the time you make certain withdrawals or surrender your contract, or your contract is terminated — a withdrawal charge.

at the time annuity payments are to begin — charges designed to approximate certain taxes that may be imposed on us, such as premium taxes in your state. An annuity administrative fee may also apply.

at the time you request a transfer in excess of 12 transfers in a contract year — a transfer charge (currently, there is no transfer charge).

More information about these charges appears below. We will not increase these charges for the life of your contract, except as noted.extent required by law. We may, reduce certain charges under group or sponsored arrangements. See “Group or sponsored arrangements” below.

To help with your retirement planning, we may offer other annuities with different charges, benefits and features. Please contact your financial professional for more information.

Charges underexample, cause the contracts

Variable Investment Option fee

We deduct a daily charge from the net assets in each variable investment option (including the Segment Type Holding Account and dollar cap averaging account) to compensate us for administrative expenses, sales expenses and certain expense risks we assume under the contracts. Below is the daily charge shown as an annual rate of the net assets in each variable investment option:

Series B:

1.25%

Series C:

1.65%

Series ADV:

0.25%

The expense risk we assume is the risk that our expenses in providing the benefits and administering the contracts will be greater than we expect. To the extent that the expense risk charges are not needed to cover the actual expenses incurred, they may be considered an indirect reimbursement for certain sales and promotional expenses relating to the contracts. This charge also compensates us for administrative expenses and a portion of our sales expenses, under the contract.

On anon-guaranteed basis, we may waive this fee under certain conditions. If the return on the EQ/Money Market variable investment option on any day is positive, but lower than the amount of this fee, then we will waive the difference between the two, so that you do not receive a negative return. If the return on the EQ/Money Market variable investment option on any day is negative, we will waive this fee entirely for that day, although your account value would be reduced by the negative performance of the EQ/Money Market variable investment option itself. We reserve the right to change or cancel this provision at any time.

This fee does not apply to amounts heldinvest in a Segment.

Choice cost

This charge is applicable to investments in Choice Segments only. The Choice cost is an amount equal to 1% of the Segment Investment for each year of the Segment Duration. On the Segment Maturity Date, we deduct the Choice cost from the Index Performance Rate of a Choice Segment, but only if the Index Performance Rate is positive for that Segment. Additionally, if the Index Performance Rate is positive for a Choice Segment but lessmutual fund other than, the applicable Choice cost, the amount of the Choice cost deducted will be the maximum amount that will not cause the Segment Maturity Value to be less than the Segment Investment. The Segment Interim Value for a Choice Segment will reflect application of a portion of the Choice cost, as described in more detail in Appendix III.

Fee-based expenses

(Applicable to Series ADV contracts only)

The fees and expenses of afee-based program are separate from andor in addition to, the fees and expenses ofTrusts. If you then wish to transfer the annuity contract. You should ensureamount you have in that within your fee-based program there are sufficient liquid assets outside of this contract to pay any fees and expenses associated with the program. Please consult with your program sponsor for more details about your fee-based program.

Transfer charge

Currently, we do not charge for transfers among variable investment options under the contract. However, we reserve the right to charge for any transfers among variable investment options in excess of 12 per contract year. We will provide you with advance notice if we decide to assess the transfer charge, which will never exceed $35 per transfer. The transfer charge is designed to compensate the company with respect to adminstering the transaction. The charge is also designed to deter disruptive transfer activity. The transfer charge (if applicable), will be assessed at the time that the transfer is processed. Each time you request a transfer from one variable investment option to another we will assess the transfer charge (if applicable). Separate requests submitted on the same day will each be treated as a separate transfer. Any transfer charge will be deducted from the variable investment options from which the transfer is made. We will not count transfers from Segment Type Holding Accounts into Segments on a Segment Start Date, or the allocation of Segment Maturity Value on a Segment Maturity Date in calculating the number of transfers

48


subject to this charge. We will also not charge for transfers made in connection with our Dollar Cap Averaging Program.

Special services charges

We deduct a charge for providing the special services described below. These charges compensate us for the expense of processing each special service. For certain services, we will deduct from your account value any withdrawal charge that applies and the charge for the special service. Please note that weoption, you may discontinue some or all of these services without notice.

Wire transfer charge.  We charge $90 for outgoing wire transfers. Unless you specify otherwise, this charge will be deducted from the amount you request.

Express mail charge.  We charge $35 for sending you a check by express mail delivery. This charge will be deducted from the amount you request.

Duplicate contract charge.  We charge $35 for providing a copy of your contract. The charge for this service can be paid (i) using a credit card acceptable to us, (ii) by sending a check to our processing office, or (iii) by any other means we make available to you.

Check preparation charge.  The standard form of payment for all withdrawals is direct deposit. If direct deposit instructions are not provided, payment will be made by check. Currently, we do not charge for check preparation, however, we reserve the right to impose a charge, which would be deducted from the amount you request following imposition of such a charge. We reserve the right to charge a maximum of $85.

Charge for third-party transfer or exchange.  Currently, we are waiving the $65 charge for each third-party transfer or exchange; this waiver may be discontinued at any time, with or without notice. Absent this waiver, we deduct a charge from the amount you request for direct rollovers or direct transfers of amounts from your contract to a third party, such as in the case of a trustee-to-trustee transfer for an IRA contract, or if you request that your contract be exchanged for a contract issued by another insurance company. We reserve the right to increase this charge to a maximum of $125.

Withdrawal charge

(Applicable to Series B contracts only)

A withdrawal charge may apply in three circumstances: (1) you make one or more withdrawals during a contract year; (2) you surrender your contract to receive its cash value; or (3) we terminate your contract. The amount of the charge will depend on whether the 10% free withdrawal amount applies, and the availability of one or more exceptions.

The withdrawal charge equals a percentage of the contributions withdrawn. The percentage that applies depends on how long each contribution has been invested in the contract. We determine the withdrawal charge separately for each contribution according to the following table:

Contract year 
    1   2   3   4   5   6+ 

Percentage of contribution

   5%    5%    5%    4%    3%    0% 

For purposes of calculating the withdrawal charge, we treat the contract year in which we receive a contribution as “contract year 1.” Amounts withdrawn that are not subject to the withdrawal charge

are not considered withdrawals of any contribution. We also treat contributions that have been invested the longest as being withdrawn first. We treat contributions as withdrawn before earnings for purposes of calculating the withdrawal charge. However, federal income tax rules treat earnings under most NQ contracts as withdrawn first. See “Tax information” later in this Prospectus.

In order to give you the exact dollar amount of the withdrawal you request, we deduct the amount of the withdrawal and the amount of the withdrawal charge from your account value. Any amount deducted to pay withdrawal charges is also subject to that same withdrawal charge percentage.

We deduct the withdrawal amount and the withdrawal charge pro rata from the variable investment options (excluding the Segment Type Holding Accounts and dollar cap averaging account). If those amounts are insufficient, we will deduct all or a portion of the required amounts pro rata from the Segment Type Holding Accounts. If the amounts in the Segment Type Holding Accounts are still insufficient, we will deduct all or a portion of the required amounts from the dollar cap averaging account. If the amount in the dollar cap averaging account is still insufficient, we deduct all or a portion of the required amounts from the Segments on a pro rata basis. If you specify that your withdrawal be taken from specific investment options, the amount of the withdrawal charge will first be taken from the investment options you specify. If there is insufficient value in those options to pay the withdrawal charge after your withdrawal is deducted, then the remainder of the withdrawal charge is deducted as described above.

Withdrawals from a Segment or a Segment Type Holding Account are subject to the same withdrawal charge calculations as a withdrawal from any other investment option. Any withdrawal from a Segment will reduce the Segment Interim Value. A withdrawal from a Segment Type Holding Account reduces the amount that will be transferred to a Segment. For more information, see “Structured Investment Option” in “Contract features and benefits,” earlier in this Prospectus.

The withdrawal charge does not apply in the circumstances described below.

10% free withdrawal amount.  For Series B contracts, each contract year you can withdraw up to 10% of your account value without paying a withdrawal charge. No withdrawal charge applies to Series C and Series ADV contracts. The 10% free withdrawal amount is determined using your account value at the beginning of the contract year. In the first contract year amounts received within 90 days of the contract date are included for purposes of calculating the free withdrawal amount. When a contract is surrendered in certain states, the free withdrawal amount is not taken into account when calculating the amount of the withdrawal.

Assume you made an initial contribution of $100,000 to a 5-year Segment and a subsequent contribution of $40,000 in contract year 2 to another 5-year Segment. At the beginning of the sixth contract year, if your account value is $200,000, your withdrawal charge free amount is $120,000 ($20,000 from the 10% free withdrawal amount plus $100,000 from contributions which are no longer subject to withdrawal charges). If you withdraw the entire Segment Maturity Value of the first Segment when it matures (assume $150,000), you would pay a withdrawal charge of $900 on the $30,000 of contributions deemed to be withdrawn from the contract (3% of ($150,000 - $20,000 - $100,000)). As this example shows, for purposes of calculating withdrawal charges, all contributions (both initial and subsequent) are deemed withdrawn before any earnings, even earnings from Segments where the associated contributions are no longer subject to withdrawal charges.so.

 

 

4973


Death.  The withdrawal charge doesWe may make any changes in the policy or its riders, require additional premium payments, or make distributions from the policy to the extent we deem necessary to ensure that your policy qualifies or continues to qualify as life insurance for tax purposes. Any such change will apply uniformly to all policies that are affected. We will give you written notice of such changes. Subject to all applicable legal requirements, we also may make other changes in the policies that do not apply if the owner dies and areduce any net cash surrender value, death benefit, policy account value, or other accrued rights or benefits.

Whether to make any of the above discussed changes is payablegenerally within our discretion, although some such changes might require us to obtain regulatory or policy owner approval. Whether regulatory or policy owner approval is required would depend on the beneficiary.nature of the change and, in many cases, the manner in which the change is implemented. You should not assume, therefore, that you necessarily will have an opportunity to approve or disapprove any such changes. We will, of course, comply with applicable legal requirements, including notice to or approval by policy owners where required in particular cases.

It is not possible to foresee all of the circumstances under which we may find it necessary or appropriate to exercise our right to make changes. Such circumstances could, however, include changes in law, or interpretations thereof; changes in financial or investment market conditions; changes in accepted methods of conducting operations in the relevant market; or a desire to achieve material operating economies or efficiencies.

Reports we will send you

 

Disability, terminal illness,Shortly after the end of each year of your policy, we will send you a report that includes information about your policy’s current death benefit, policy account value, cash surrender value (i.e., policy account value minus any current surrender charge), policy loans, policy transactions and amounts of charges deducted. We will send you individual notices to confirm your premium payments, loan repayments, transfers and certain other policy transactions. Please promptly review all statements and confirmations and notify us immediately at1-800-777-6510 (for U.S. residents) or confinement to nursing home.  1-704-341-7000The withdrawal charge also does not apply if:

(i)

An owner (or older joint owner, if applicable) has qualified to receive Social Security disability benefits as certified by the Social Security Administration; or

(ii)

We receive proof satisfactory to us (including certification by a licensed physician) that an owner’s (or older joint owner’s, if applicable) life expectancy is six months or less; or

(iii)

An owner (or older joint owner, if applicable) has been confined to a nursing home for more than 90 days (or such other period, as required in your state) as verified by a licensed physician. A nursing home for this purpose means one that is (a) approved by Medicare as a provider of skilled nursing care service, or (b) licensed as a skilled nursing home by the state or territory in which it is located (it must be within the United States, Puerto Rico, or U.S. Virgin Islands) and meets all of the following:

its main function is to provide skilled, intermediate, or custodial nursing care;

it provides continuous room and board to three or more persons;

it is supervised by a registered nurse or licensed practical nurse;

it keeps daily medical records of each patient;

it controls and records all medications dispensed; and

its primary service is other than to provide housing for residents.

We reserve the right to impose a withdrawal charge, in accordance with your contract and applicable state law, if the conditions described in (i), (ii) or (iii) above existed at the time a contribution was remitted or if the condition began within 12 months (outside of the period following remittance. Some states may not permit us to waive the withdrawal charge in the above circumstances, or may limit the circumstances for which the withdrawal charge may be waived. Your financial professional can provide more information or you may contact our processing office.

Large investors.  Withdrawal charges will not apply to Series B contracts purchased with an initial contribution of $25 million or more.U.S.) if there are any errors.

 

Charges for state premium and other applicable taxes

We deduct a charge designed to approximate certain taxes that may be imposed on us, such as premium taxes in your state. Generally, we deduct the charge from the amount applied to provide an annuity pay out option. The current tax charge that might be imposed varies by jurisdiction and ranges from 0% to 3.5%.

Adjustments with respect to early withdrawals from Segments

We calculate the Segment Interim Value when a withdrawal is taken, whether a partial withdrawal or a full contract surrender, from a Segment prior to the Segment Maturity Date. The Segment Interim Value is calculated based on a formula that provides a treatment for an early distribution that is designed to be consistent with how distributions at

the end of a Segment are treated. For more information on the calculationDistribution of the Segment Interim Value, please see Appendix III.

Charges that the Trust deductspolicies

 

The Trust deducts charges for the following types of fees and expenses:

Management fees.

12b-1 fees.

Operating expenses, such as trustees’ fees, independent auditors’ fees, legal counsel fees, administrative service fees, custodian fees, and liability insurance.

Investment-related expenses, such as brokerage commissions.

These charges are reflected in the daily share price of each portfolio. Since shares of the Trust are purchased at their net asset value, these fees and expenses are, in effect, passed on to the variable investment options and are reflected in their unit values. For more information about these charges, please refer to the prospectuses for the Trusts.

Group or sponsored arrangements

For certain group or sponsored arrangements, we may reduce the withdrawal charge or the variable investment option fee, or change the minimum contribution requirements. We also may change the minimum death benefit or offer variable investment options that invest in shares of a Trust that are not subject to the12b-1 fee. Group arrangements include those in which a trustee or an employer, for example, purchases contracts covering a group of individuals on a group basis. Group arrangements are not available for traditional IRA and Roth IRA contracts. Sponsored arrangements include those in which an employer allows us to sell contracts to its employees or retirees on an individual basis.

Our costs for sales and administration generally vary with the size and stability of the group or sponsoring organization, among other factors. We take all these factors into account when reducing charges. To qualify for reduced charges, a group or sponsored arrangement must meet certain requirements, such as requirements for size and number of years in existence. Group or sponsored arrangements that have been set up solely to buy contracts or that have been in existence less than six months will not qualify for reduced charges.

We will make these and any similar reductions according to our rules in effect when we approve a contract for issue. We may change these rules from time to time. Any variation will reflect differences in costs or services and will not be unfairly discriminatory.

Group or sponsored arrangements may be governed by federal income tax rules, the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, or both. We make no representations with regard to the impact of these and other applicable laws on such programs. We recommend that employers, trustees, and others purchasing or making contracts available for purchase under such programs seek the advice of their own legal and benefits advisers.

Other distribution arrangements

We may reduce or eliminate charges when sales are made in a manner that results in savings of sales and administrative expenses, such as sales through persons who are compensated by clients for recommending investments and who receive no commission or reduced commissions in connection with the sale of the contracts. We will not permit a reduction or elimination of charges where it will be unfairly discriminatory.

50


8. Payment of death benefit

Your beneficiary and payment of benefit

If you have a Series C or Series ADV contract, disregard any references to “withdrawal charges,” “cash value” or “free withdrawal amount” in this section; these terms only apply to Series B contracts, not Series C or Series ADV contracts.

You designate your beneficiary when you apply for your contract. You may change your beneficiary during your lifetime and while the contract is in force. The change will be effective on the date the written request for the change is received in our processing office. We are not responsible for any beneficiary change request that we do not receive. We will send you a written confirmation when we receive your request. Any part of a death benefit for which there is no named or designated beneficiary living at your death will be payable in a single sum to your surviving spouse, if any; if there is no surviving spouse, then to the surviving children in equal shares; if there are no surviving children, then to your estate. Under jointly owned contracts, the surviving owner is considered the beneficiary, and will take the place of any other beneficiary. In a QP contract, the beneficiary must be the plan trust. If the contract is owned by a qualified plan trust or other entity, the death benefit is payable to the entity owner. Where an NQ contract is owned for the benefit of a minor pursuant to the Uniform Gift to Minors Act or the Uniform Transfers to Minors Act, the beneficiary must be the estate of the minor.

Subject to applicable laws and regulations, you may impose restrictions on the timing and manner of the payment of the death benefit to your beneficiary. For example, your beneficiary designation may specify the form of death benefit payout (such as a life annuity), provided the payout you elect is one that we offer both at the time of designation and when the death benefit is payable. In general, the beneficiary will have no right to change the election. However, you should be aware that (i) in accordance with current federal income tax rules, we apply a predetermined death benefit annuity payout election only if payment of the death benefit amount begins within one year following the date of death, which payment may not occur if the beneficiary has failed to provide all required information before the end of that period, (ii) we will not apply the predetermined death benefit payout election if doing so would violate any federal income tax rules or any other applicable law, and (iii) a beneficiary or a successor owner who continues the contract under one of the continuation options described below will have the right to change your annuity payout election.

Death benefit

The death benefit is equal to the account value as of the date we receive satisfactory proof of the owner’s death, any required instructions for the method of payment, and all information and forms necessary to effect payment.

Effect of the owner’s death

In general, if the owner dies while the contract is in force, the contract terminates and the applicable death benefit is paid. If the contract is

jointly owned, the death benefit is payable upon the death of the older owner. If the contract is owned by a non-natural person, the death of the primary annuitant triggers rules regarding the death of an owner.

Once we have received notice of the owner’s death, we will not make any transfers from Segment Type Holding Accounts to Segments. Amounts in the Segment Type Holding Accounts will be defaulted into the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. When Segments mature, the Segment Maturity Value will be transferred to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option.

There are various circumstances, however, in which the contract can be continued by a successor owner or under a Beneficiary continuation option (“BCO”). For contracts with spouses who are joint owners, the surviving spouse will automatically be able to continue the contract under the “Spousal continuation” feature, or under our Beneficiary continuation option, as discussed below. For contracts withnon-spousal joint owners, the joint owner will be able to continue the contract as a successor owner subject to the limitations discussed below under “Non-spousal joint owner contract continuation.” If you are the sole owner and your spouse is the sole primary beneficiary, your surviving spouse can continue the contract as a successor owner, under “Spousal continuation” or under our Beneficiary continuation option, as discussed below.

If the surviving joint owner is not the surviving spouse, or, for single owner contracts, if the beneficiary is not the surviving spouse, federal income tax rules generally require payments of amounts under the contract to be made within five years of an owner’s death (the“5-year rule”). In certain cases, an individual beneficiary ornon-spousal surviving joint owner may opt to receive payments over his/her life (or over a period not in excess of his/her life expectancy) if payments commence within one year of the owner’s death. Any such election must be made in accordance with our rules at the time of death.

Non-spousal joint owner contract continuation

Upon the death of either owner, the surviving joint owner becomes the sole owner.

Any death benefit (if the older owner dies first) or cash value (if the younger owner dies first) must be fully paid to the surviving joint owner within five years, unless one of the exceptions described here applies. The surviving owner may instead elect to take an installment payout or an annuity payout option we may offer at the time under the contract, provided payments begin within one year of the deceased owner’s death. If an annuity or installment payout is elected, the contract terminates and a supplemental contract is issued.

If the older owner dies first, the surviving owner can elect to (1) take a lump sum payment; (2) take an installment payout or an annuity payout option we may offer at the time under the contract within one year; (3) continue the contract for up to five years; or (4) continue the contract under the Beneficiary continuation option discussed below. If the contract continues, withdrawal charges will no longer apply, and no additional contributions will be permitted.

51


If the younger owner dies first, the surviving owner can elect to (1) take a lump sum payment; (2) take an installment payout or annuity within one year; (3) continue the contract for up to five years; or (4) continue the contract under the Beneficiary continuation option discussed below. If the contract continues, withdrawal charges (for Series B contracts) will continue to apply and no additional contributions will be permitted. The death benefit becomes payable to the beneficiary if the older owner dies within five years after the death of the younger owner.

Spousal continuation

If you are the contract owner and your spouse is the sole primary beneficiary or you jointly own the contract with your younger spouse, or if the contract owner is anon-natural person and you and your younger spouse are joint annuitants, your spouse may elect to continue the contract as successor owner upon your death. Spousal beneficiaries (who are not also joint owners) must be 85 or younger as of the date of the deceased spouse’s death in order to continue the contract under Spousal continuation. The determination of spousal status is made under applicable state law. However, in the event of a conflict between federal and state law, we follow federal rules.

Upon your death, the younger spouse joint owner (for NQ contracts only) or the spouse beneficiary (under a single owner contract) may elect to receive the death benefit, continue the contract under our Beneficiary continuation option (as discussed below in this section) or continue the contract, as follows:

In general, withdrawal charges (for Series B contracts) will no longer apply to contributions made before your death. Withdrawal charges will apply if additional contributions are made.

If the deceased spouse was the annuitant, the surviving spouse becomes the annuitant. If the deceased spouse was a joint annuitant, the contract will become a single annuitant contract.

Where an NQ contract is owned by a Living Trust, as defined in the contract, and at the time of the annuitant’s death the annuitant’s spouse is the sole beneficiary of the Living Trust, the Trustee, as owner of the contract, may request that the spouse be substituted as annuitant as of the date of the annuitant’s death. No further change of annuitant will be permitted.

Where an IRA contract is owned in a custodial individual retirement account, and your spouse is the sole beneficiary of the account, the custodian may request that the spouse be substituted as annuitant after your death.

For jointly owned NQ contracts, if the younger spouse dies first no death benefit is paid, and the contract continues as follows:

If the deceased spouse was the annuitant, the surviving spouse becomes the annuitant. If the deceased spouse was a joint annuitant, the contract will become a single annuitant contract.

The withdrawal charge schedule (for Series B contracts) remains in effect.

The transfer restrictions on amounts in Segments prior to election of Spousal continuation remain in place. Any amounts in Segments may not be transferred out of the Segments until their Segment Maturity Dates. The Segment Maturity Value may be reinvested in other investment options.

If you divorce, Spousal continuation does not apply.

Beneficiary continuation option

This feature permits a designated individual, on the contract owner’s death, to maintain a contract with the deceased contract owner’s name on it and receive distributions under the contract, instead of receiving the death benefit in a single sum. We make this option available to beneficiaries under traditional IRA, Roth IRA and NQ contracts, subject to state availability. Please speak with your financial professional or see Appendix II later in this Prospectus for further information.

Where an IRA contract is owned in a custodial individual retirement account, the custodian may reinvest the death benefit in an individual retirement annuity contract, using the account beneficiary as the annuitant. Please speak with your financial professional for further information.

Beneficiary continuation option for traditional IRA and Roth IRA contracts only.  The beneficiary continuation option must be elected by September 30th of the year following the calendar year of your death and before any other inconsistent election is made. Beneficiaries who do not make a timely election will not be eligible for this option.

Generally, payments will be made once a year to the beneficiary over the beneficiary’s life expectancy (determined in the calendar year after your death and determined on a term certain basis). These payments must begin no later than December 31st of the calendar year after the year of your death. For sole spousal beneficiaries, payments may begin by December 31st of the calendar year in which you would have reached age 701/2, if such time is later. For traditional IRA contracts only, if you die before your Required Beginning Date for Required Minimum Distributions, as discussed later in this Prospectus in “Tax information” under “Individual retirement arrangements (IRAs),” the beneficiary may choose the“5-year rule” option instead of annual payments over life expectancy. The5-year rule is always available to beneficiaries under Roth IRA contracts. If the beneficiary chooses this option, the beneficiary may take withdrawals as desired, but the entire account value must be fully withdrawn by December 31st of the calendar year which contains the fifth anniversary of your death.

Under the beneficiary continuation option for IRA and Roth IRA contracts:

The contract continues with your name on it for the benefit of your beneficiary.

The beneficiary replaces the deceased owner as annuitant.

This feature is only available if the beneficiary is an individual. Certain trusts with only individual beneficiaries will be treated as individuals for this purpose.

If there is more than one beneficiary:

each beneficiary’s share will be separately accounted for. It will be distributed over the beneficiary’s own life expectancy, if payments over life expectancy are chosen; and

as of the date we receive satisfactory proof of death, any required instructions, information and forms necessary to effect the beneficiary continuation option feature for the

52


first beneficiary, all Segments will be terminated and all Segment Interim Values will be transferred into the EQ/Money Market variable investment option.

If there is one beneficiary, the transfer restrictions on amounts in Segments prior to election of the beneficiary continuation option remain in place. Any amounts in Segments may not be transferred out of the Segments until their Segment Maturity Dates. The Segment Maturity Value may be reinvested in other investment options. However, if the beneficiary has chosen the“5-year rule,” amounts may not be invested in Segments with Segment Maturity Dates later than December 31st of the calendar year which contains the fifth anniversary of your death.

A beneficiary who chooses to receive annual payments over his life expectancy should consult his tax adviser about selecting Segments that provide sufficient liquidity to satisfy the payout requirements under this option.

The minimum amount that is required in order to elect the beneficiary continuation option is $5,000 for each beneficiary.

The beneficiary may make transfers among the variable investment options but no additional contributions will be permitted.

The beneficiary may choose at any time to withdraw all or a portion of the account value and no withdrawal charges, if any, will apply.

Any partial withdrawal must be at least $300.

Your beneficiary will have the right to name a beneficiary to receive any remaining interest in the contract.

Upon the death of your beneficiary, the beneficiary he or she has named has the option to either continue taking required minimum distributions based on the remaining life expectancy of the deceased beneficiary or to receive any remaining interest in the contract in a lump sum. The option elected will be processed when we receive satisfactory proof of death, any required instructions for the method of payment and any required information and forms necessary to effect payment.

Beneficiary continuation option for NQ contracts only.  This feature may only be elected when the NQ contract owner dies before the annuity maturity date, whether or not the owner and the annuitant are the same person. For purposes of this discussion, “beneficiary” refers to the successor owner or the surviving joint owner who elects this feature. This feature must be elected within 9 months following the date of your death and before any other inconsistent election is made. Beneficiaries who do not make a timely election will not be eligible for this option.

Generally, payments will be made once a year to the beneficiary over the beneficiary’s life expectancy, determined on a term certain basis and in the year payments start. These payments must begin no later than one year after the date of your death and are referred to as “scheduled payments.” The beneficiary may choose the“5-year rule” instead of scheduled payments over life expectancy. If the beneficiary chooses the5-year rule, there will be no scheduled payments. Under the5-year rule, the beneficiary may take withdrawals as desired, but the entire account value must be fully withdrawn by the fifth anniversary of your death.

Under the beneficiary continuation option for NQ contracts:

This feature is only available if the beneficiary is an individual. It is not available for any entity such as a trust, even if all of the beneficiaries of the trust are individuals.

The beneficiary automatically replaces the existing annuitant.

The contract continues with your name on it for the benefit of your beneficiary.

If there is more than one beneficiary:

each beneficiary’s share will be separately accounted for. It will be distributed over the respective beneficiary’s own life expectancy, if scheduled payments are chosen; and

as of the date we receive satisfactory proof of death, any required instructions, information and forms necessary to effect the beneficiary continuation option feature for the first beneficiary, all Segments will be terminated and all Segment Interim Values will be transferred into the EQ/Money Market variable investment option.

If there is one beneficiary, the transfer restrictions on amounts in Segments prior to the election of the beneficiary continuation option remain in place. Any amounts in Segments may not be transferred out of the Segments until their Segment Maturity Dates. The Segment Maturity Value may be reinvested in other investment options. However, if the beneficiary has chosen the“5-year rule,” amounts may not be invested in Segments with Segment Maturity Dates later than the fifth anniversary of your death.

The minimum amount that is required in order to elect the beneficiary continuation option is $5,000 for each beneficiary.

The beneficiary may make transfers among the investment options but no additional contributions will be permitted.

If the beneficiary chooses the“5-year rule,” withdrawals may be made at any time. If the beneficiary instead chooses scheduled payments, the beneficiary may also take withdrawals, in addition to scheduled payments, at any time.

Any partial withdrawals must be at least $300.

Your beneficiary will have the right to name a beneficiary to receive any remaining interest in the contract on the beneficiary’s death.

Upon the death of your beneficiary, the beneficiary he or she has named has the option to either continue taking scheduled payments based on the remaining life expectancy of the deceased beneficiary (if scheduled payments were chosen) or to receive any remaining interest in the contract in a lump sum. We will pay any remaining interest in the contract in a lump sum if your beneficiary elects the5-year rule. The option elected will be processed when we receive satisfactory proof of death, any required instructions for the method of payment and any required information and forms necessary to effect payment.

If the deceased is the owner or older joint owner:

No withdrawal charges will apply to any withdrawals by the beneficiary.

53


If the deceased is the youngernon-spousal joint owner:

The contract’s withdrawal charge schedule will continue to be applied to any withdrawal or surrender other than scheduled payments; the contract’s free withdrawal amount will continue to apply to withdrawals but does not apply to surrenders.

We do not impose a withdrawal charge on scheduled payments except if, when added to any withdrawals previously taken in the same contract year, including for this purpose a contract surrender, the total amount of withdrawals and scheduled payments exceed the free withdrawal amount. See the “Withdrawal charges” in “Charges and expenses” earlier in this Prospectus.

A beneficiary should speak to his or her tax professional about which continuation option is appropriate for him or her. Factors to consider include, but are not limited to, the beneficiary’s age, need for immediate income and a desire to continue the contract.

54


9. Tax information

Overview

In this part of the Prospectus, we discuss the current federal income tax rules that generally apply to Structured Capital Strategies® contracts owned by United States individual taxpayers. The tax rules can differ, depending on the type of contract, whether NQ, traditional IRA Roth IRA or QP, and the characteristics of the owner. Therefore, we discuss the tax aspects of each type of contract separately.

Federal income tax rules include the United States laws in the Internal Revenue Code, and Treasury Department Regulations and IRS interpretations of the Internal Revenue Code. These tax rules may change without notice. We cannot predict whether, when, or how these rules could change. Any change could affect contracts purchased before the change. In addition to legislation enacted in December 2017, Congress may also consider further proposals to comprehensively reform or overhaul the United States tax and retirement systems, which if enacted, could affect the tax benefits of a contract. We cannot predict what, if any, legislation will actually be proposed or enacted.

We cannot provide detailed information on all tax aspects of the contracts. Moreover, the tax aspects that apply to a particular person’s contract may vary depending on the facts applicable to that person. We do not discuss state income and other state taxes, federal income tax and withholding rules fornon-U.S. taxpayers, or federal gift and estate taxes. We also do not discuss the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA). Transfers of the contract, rights or values under the contract, or payments under the contract, for example, amounts due to beneficiaries, may be subject to federal or state gift, estate or inheritance taxes. You should not rely only on this document, but should consult your tax adviser before your purchase.

Buying a contract to fund a retirement arrangement

Generally, there are two types of funding vehicles that are available for Individual Retirement Arrangements (“IRAs”): an individual retirement annuity contract such as the ones offered in this Prospectus, or an individual retirement custodial or trusteed account. Annuity contracts can also be purchased in connection with retirement plans qualified under Section 401(a) of the Code. How these arrangements work, including special rules applicable to each, are noted in the specific sections for each type of arrangement, below. You should be aware that the funding vehicle for atax-qualified arrangement does not provide any tax deferral benefit beyond that already provided by the Code for all permissible funding vehicles. Before choosing an annuity contract, therefore, you should consider the annuity’s features and benefits compared with the features and benefits of other permissible funding vehicles and the relative costs of annuities and other such arrangements. You should be aware that cost may vary depending on the features and benefits made available and the charges and expenses of the investment options you elect.

Transfers among investment options

If permitted under the terms of the contract, you can make transfers among investment options inside the contract without triggering taxable income.

Taxation of nonqualified annuities

Contributions

You may not deduct the amount of your contributions to a nonqualified annuity contract.

Contract earnings

Generally, you are not taxed on contract earnings until you receive a distribution from your contract, whether as a withdrawal or as an annuity payment. However, earnings are taxable, even without a distribution:

if a contract fails investment diversification requirements as specified in federal income tax rules (these rules are based on or are similar to those specified for mutual funds under securities laws);

if you transfer a contract, for example, as a gift to someone other than your spouse (or former spouse);

if you use a contract as security for a loan (in this case, the amount pledged will be treated as a distribution); and

if the owner is other than an individual (such as a corporation, partnership, trust, or othernon-natural person). This provision does not apply to a trust which is a mere agent or nominee for an individual, such as a typical grantor trust.

Federal tax law requires that all nonqualified deferred annuity contracts that the Company and its affiliates issue to you during the same calendar year be linked together and treated as one contract for calculating the taxable amount of any distribution from any of those contracts.

Annuity payments

The following applies to an annuitization of the entire contract. In certain cases, the contract can be partially annuitized. See “Partial annuitization” below.

Annuitization under a Structured Capital Strategies® contract occurs when your entire interest under the contract is or has been applied to one or more payout options intended to amortize amounts over your life or over a period certain generally limited by the period of your life expectancy. (We do not currently offer a period certain option without life contingencies.) Annuity payouts can also be determined on a joint life basis. After annuitization, no further contributions to the contract may be made, the annuity payout amount must be paid at least annually, and annuity payments cannot be stopped except by death or surrender (if permitted under the terms of the contract).

55


Once annuity payments begin, a portion of each payment is taxable as ordinary income. You get back the remaining portion without paying taxes on it. This is your unrecovered investment in the contract. Generally, your investment in the contract equals the contributions you made, less any amounts you previously withdrew that were not taxable.

For fixed annuity payments, thetax-free portion of each payment is determined by (1) dividing your investment in the contract by the total amount you are expected to receive out of the contract, and (2) multiplying the result by the amount of the payment. For variable annuity payments, yourtax-free portion of each payment is your investment in the contract divided by the number of expected payments. If you have a loss on a variable annuity payout in a taxable year, you may be able to adjust thetax-free amount in subsequent years.

Once you have received the amount of your investment in the contract, all payments after that are fully taxable. If payments under a life annuity stop because the annuitant dies, there is an income tax deduction for any unrecovered investment in the contract.

Your rights to apply amounts under this Structured Capital Strategies® contract to an annuity payout option are described elsewhere in this Prospectus. If you hold your contract to the maximum maturity age under the contract we require that a choice be made between taking a lump sum settlement of any remaining account value or applying any such account value to an annuity payout option we may offer at the time under the contract. If no affirmative choice is made, we will apply any remaining account value or interest in the contract to the default option under the contract at such age. While there is no specific federal tax guidance as to whether or when an annuity contract is required to mature, or as to the form of the payments to be made upon maturity, we believe that this Structured Capital Strategies® contract constitutes an annuity contract under current federal tax rules.

Partial annuitization

The consequences described above for annuitization of the entire contract apply to the portion of the contract which is partially annuitized. A nonqualified deferred annuity contract is treated as being partially annuitized if a portion of the contract is applied to an annuity payout option on a life-contingent basis or for a period certain of at least 10 years. In order to get annuity payment tax treatment for the portion of the contract applied to the annuity payout, payments must be made at least annually in substantially equal amounts, the payments must be designed to amortize the amount applied over life or the period certain, and the payments cannot be stopped, except by death or surrender (if permitted under the terms of the contract). The investment in the contract is split between the partially annuitized portion and the deferred amount remaining based on the relative values of the amount applied to the annuity payout and the deferred amount remaining at the time of the partial annuitization. Also, the partial annuitization has its own annuity starting date. We do not currently offer a period certain option without life contingencies.

Withdrawals made before annuity payments begin

If you make withdrawals before annuity payments begin under your contract, they are taxable to you as ordinary income if there are earnings in the contract. Generally, earnings are your account value less your investment in the contract. If you withdraw an amount which is more than the earnings in the contract as of the date of the withdrawal, the balance of the distribution is treated as a reduction

of your investment in the contract and is not taxable. If you have a Series ADV contract, withdrawals made by your investment advisor are taxable to you.

Collateral assignments are taxable to the extent of any earnings in the contract at the time any portion of the contract’s value is assigned as collateral. Therefore, if you assign your contract as collateral for a loan with a third party after the contract is issued, you may have taxable income even though you receive no payments under the contract. The Company will report any income attributable to a collateral assignment on Form1099-R. Also, if the Company makes payments or distributions to the assignee pursuant to directions under the collateral assignment agreement, any gains in such payments may be taxable to you and reportable on Form1099-R even though you do not receive them.

1035 Exchanges

You may purchase a nonqualified deferred annuity through an exchange of another contract. Normally, exchanges of contracts are taxable events. The exchange will not be taxable under Section 1035 of the Internal Revenue Code if:

the contract that is the source of the funds you are using to purchase the nonqualified deferred annuity contract is another nonqualified deferred annuity contract or life insurance or endowment contract.

the owner and the annuitant are the same under the source contract and the contract issued in exchange. If you are using a life insurance or endowment contract the owner and the insured must be the same on both sides of the exchange transaction.

In some cases you may make a tax-deferred 1035 exchange from a nonqualified deferred annuity contract to a “qualified long-term care contract” meeting all specified requirements under the Code or an annuity contract with a “qualified long-term care contract” feature (sometimes referred to as a “combination annuity” contract).

The tax basis, also referred to as your investment in the contract, of the source contract carries over to the contract issued in exchange.

An owner may direct the proceeds of a partial withdrawal from one nonqualified deferred annuity contract to purchase or contribute to another nonqualified deferred annuity contract on a tax-deferred basis. If requirements are met, the owner may also directly transfer amounts from a nonqualified deferred annuity contract to a “qualified long-term care contract” or “combination annuity” in such a partial 1035 exchange transaction. Special forms, agreement between the carriers, and provision of cost basis information may be required to process this type of an exchange.

If you are purchasing your contract through a Section 1035 exchange, you should be aware that the Company cannot guarantee that the exchange from the source contract to the contract you are applying for will be treated as a Section 1035 exchange; the insurance company issuing the source contract controls the tax information reporting of the transaction as a Section 1035 exchange. Because information reports are not provided and filed until the calendar year after the exchange transaction, the insurance company issuing the source contract shows its agreement that the transaction is a 1035 exchange by providing to us the cost basis of the exchanged source contract when it transfers the money to us on your behalf.

56


Even if the contract owner and the insurance companies agree that a full or partial 1035 exchange is intended, the IRS has the ultimate authority to review the facts and determine that the transaction should be recharacterized as taxable in whole or in part.

Section 1035 exchanges are generally not available after the death of the owner. The destination contract must meet specific post-death payout requirements to prevent avoidance of the death of owner rules. See “Payment of death benefit”.

Surrenders

If you surrender or cancel the contract, the distribution is taxable as ordinary income (not capital gain) to the extent it exceeds your investment in the contract.

Death benefit payments made to a beneficiary after your death

For the rules applicable to death benefits, see “Payment of death benefit” earlier in this Prospectus. The tax treatment of a death benefit taken as a single sum is generally the same as the tax treatment of a withdrawal from or surrender of your contract. The tax treatment of a death benefit taken as annuity payments is generally the same as the tax treatment of annuity payments under your contract.

Under the Beneficiary continuation option, the tax treatment of a withdrawal after the death of the owner taken as a single sum or taken as withdrawals under the5-year rule is generally the same as the tax treatment of a withdrawal from or surrender of your contract.

Early distribution penalty tax

If you take distributions before you are age 591/2, a penalty tax of 10% of the taxable portion of your distribution applies in addition to the income tax. Some of the available exceptions to thepre-age 591/2 penalty tax include distributions made:

on or after your death; or

because you are disabled (special federal income tax definition); or

in the form of substantially equal periodic payments made at least annually over your life (or your life expectancy) or over the joint lives of you and your beneficiary (or your joint life expectancies) using anIRS-approved distribution method.

Please note that it is your responsibility to claim the penalty exception on your own income tax return and to document eligibility for the exception to the IRS.

Additional Tax on Net Investment Income

Taxpayers who have modified adjusted gross income (“MAGI”) over a specified amount and who also have specified net investment income in any year may have to pay an additional surtax of 3.8%. (This tax has been informally referred to as the “Net Investment Income Tax” or “NIIT”). For this purpose net investment income includes distributions from and payments under nonqualified annuity contracts. The threshold amount of MAGI varies by filing status: $200,000 for single filers; $250,000 for married taxpayers filing jointly, and $125,000 for married taxpayers filing separately. The tax applies to the lesser of a) the amount of MAGI over the applicable threshold amount or b) the net investment income. You should discuss with your tax adviser the potential effect of this tax.

Investor Control Issues

Under certain circumstances, the IRS has stated that you could be treated as the owner (for tax purposes) of the assets of Separate Account No. 49. If you were treated as the owner, you would be taxed on income and gains attributable to the shares of the underlying portfolios.

The circumstances that would lead to this tax treatment would be that, in the opinion of the IRS, you could control the underlying investment of Separate Account No. 49. Recently, the IRS has said that the owners of variable annuities will not be treated as owning the separate account assets provided the underlying portfolios are restricted to variable life and annuity assets. The variable annuity owners must have the right only to choose among the portfolios, and must have no right to direct the particular investment decisions within the portfolios.

Also we do not believe that these rules apply to the assets of Separate Account No. 68, because contract owners have no interest in the performance of those assets.

Although we believe that, under current IRS guidance, you would not be treated as the owner of the assets of Separate Account No. 49, there are some issues that remain unclear. For example, the IRS has not issued any guidance as to whether having a larger number of portfolios available, or an unlimited right to transfer among them, could cause you to be treated as the owner. We do not know whether the IRS will ever provide such guidance or whether such guidance, if unfavorable, would apply retroactively to your contract. Furthermore, the IRS could reverse its current guidance at any time. We reserve the right to modify your contract as necessary to prevent you from being treated as the owner of the assets of Separate Account No 49.

Individual retirement arrangements (“IRAs”)

General

“IRA” stands for individual retirement arrangement. There are two basic types of such arrangements, individual retirement accounts and individual retirement annuities. In an individual retirement account, a trustee or custodian holds the assets funding the account for the benefit of the IRA owner. The assets typically include mutual funds and/or individual stocks and securities in a custodial account, and bank certificates of deposit in a trusteed account. In an individual retirement annuity, an insurance company issues an annuity contract that serves as the IRA.

There are two basic types of IRAs, as follows:

traditional IRAs, typically funded on apre-tax basis; and

Roth IRAs, funded on anafter-tax basis.

Regardless of the type of IRA, your ownership interest in the IRA cannot be forfeited. You or your beneficiaries who survive you are the only ones who can receive the IRA’s benefits or payments. All types of IRAs qualify for tax deferral, regardless of the funding vehicle selected.

You can hold your IRA assets in as many different accounts and annuities as you would like, as long as you meet the rules for setting up and making contributions to IRAs. However, if you own multiple IRAs, you may be required to combine IRA values or contributions for tax purposes. For further information about individual retirement arrangements, you can read Internal Revenue Service Publications 590-A (“Contributions to Individual Retirement Arrangements (IRAs)”) and590-B (“Distributions from Individual Retirement Arrangements

57


(IRAs)”). These publications are usually updated annually, and can be obtained by contacting the IRS or from the IRS website (www.irs.gov).

The Company designs its IRA contracts to qualify as “individual retirement annuities” under Section 408(b) of the Internal Revenue Code. We offer the Structured Capital Strategies® contract in both traditional IRA and Roth IRA versions.

This Prospectus contains the information that the IRS requires you to have before you purchase an IRA. The first section covers some of the special tax rules that apply to traditional IRAs. The next section covers

Roth IRAs. The disclosure generally assumes direct ownership of the individual retirement annuity contracts. For contracts owned in a custodial individual retirement account, the disclosure will apply only if you terminate your account or transfer ownership of the contract to yourself.

We describe the amount and types of charges that may apply to your contributions under “Charges and expenses” earlier in this Prospectus. We describe the method of calculating payments under “Accessing your money” earlier in this Prospectus. We do not guarantee or project growth in variable income annuitization option payments (as opposed to payments from a fixed income annuitization option).

We have not applied for opinion letters approving the respective forms of the traditional IRA and Roth IRA contracts for use as a traditional and Roth IRA, respectively. This IRS approval is a determination only as to the form of the annuity. It does not represent a determination of the merits of the annuity as an investment.

Your right to cancel within a certain number of days

You can cancel either version of the Structured Capital Strategies® IRA contract (traditional IRA or Roth IRA) by following the directions under “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” in “Contract features and benefits” earlier in this Prospectus. If you cancel a traditional IRA, or Roth IRA contract, we may have to withhold tax, and we must report the transaction to the IRS. A contract cancellation could have an unfavorable tax impact.

Traditional individual retirement annuities (“traditional IRAs”)

Contributions to traditional IRAs.  Individuals may make three different types of contributions to purchase a traditional IRA or as subsequent contributions to an existing IRA:

“regular” contributions out of earned income or compensation; or

tax-free “rollover” contributions; or

directcustodian-to-custodian transfers from other traditional IRAs (“direct transfers”).

When you make a contribution to your IRA, we require you to tell us whether it is a regular contribution, rollover contribution, or direct transfer contribution, and to supply supporting documentation in some cases.

Because the minimum initial contribution the Company requires to purchase this contract is larger than the maximum regular contribution you can make to an IRA for a taxable year, this contract must be purchased through a rollover or direct transfer contribution.

Regular contributions to traditional IRAs

Limits on contributions.  The “maximum regular contribution amount” for any taxable year is the most that can be contributed to

all of your IRAs (traditional and Roth) as regular contributions for the particular taxable year. The maximum regular contribution amount depends on age, earnings, and year, among other things. Generally, $6,000 is the maximum amount that you may contribute to all IRAs (traditional IRAs and Roth IRAs) for 2020, after adjustment for cost-of-living changes. When your earnings are below $6,000, your earned income or compensation for the year is the most you can contribute. This limit does not apply to rollover contributions or directcustodian-to-custodian transfers into a traditional IRA. You cannot make regular traditional IRA contributions for the taxable year in which you reach age 701/2 or any taxable year after that.

If you are at least age 50 at any time during the taxable year for which you are making a regular contribution to your IRA, you may be eligible to make additional “catch up contributions” of up to $1,000 to your traditional IRA.

Special rules for spouses.  If you are married and file a joint federal income tax return, you and your spouse may combine your compensation to determine the amount of regular contributions you are permitted to make to traditional IRAs (and Roth IRAs discussed below). Even if one spouse has no compensation, or compensation under $6,000, married individuals filing jointly can contribute up to $12,000 per year to any combination of traditional IRAs and Roth IRAs. Any contributions to Roth IRAs reduce the ability to contribute to traditional IRAs and vice versa. The maximum amount may be less if earned income is less and the other spouse has made IRA contributions. No more than a combined total of $6,000 can be contributed annually to either spouse’s traditional and Roth IRAs. Each spouse owns his or her traditional IRAs and Roth IRAs even if the other spouse funded the contributions. A working spouse age 701/2 or over can contribute up to the lesser of $6,000 or 100% of “earned income” to a traditional IRA for a nonworking spouse until the year in which the nonworking spouse reaches age 701/2.Catch-up contributions may be made as described above for spouses who are at least age 50 but under age 701/2 at any time during the taxable year for which the contribution is being made.

Deductibility of contributions.  The amount of traditional IRA contributions that you can deduct for a taxable year depends on whether you are covered by anemployer-sponsored-tax-favored retirement plan, as defined under special federal income tax rules. Your FormW-2 will indicate whether or not you are covered by such a retirement plan.

The federal tax rules governing contributions to IRAs made from current compensation are complex and are subject to numerous technical requirements and limitations which vary based on an individual’s personal situation (including his/her spouse). IRS Publication 590-A,(“Contributions to Individual Retirement Arrangements (IRAs)”)which is updated annually and is available at www.irs.gov, contains pertinent explanations of the rules applicable to the current year. The amount of permissible contributions to IRAs, the amount of IRA contributions which may be deductible, and the individual’s income limits for determining contributions and deductions all may be adjusted annually for cost of living.

Nondeductible regular contributions.  If you are not eligible to deduct part or all of the traditional IRA contribution, you may still make nondeductible contributions on which earnings will accumulate on atax-deferred basis. The combined deductible and nondeductible contributions to your traditional IRA (or the nonworking spouse’s

58


traditional IRA) may not, however, exceed the maximum $5,000 per person limit for the applicable taxable year ($6,000 for 2020 after adjustment). The dollar limit is $1,000 higher for people eligible to make age 50-701/2“catch-up” contributions ($7,000 for 2020). You must keep your own records of deductible and nondeductible contributions in order to prevent double taxation on the distribution of previously taxed amounts. See “Withdrawals, payments and transfers of funds out of traditional IRAs” below.

If you are making nondeductible contributions in any taxable year, or you have made nondeductible contributions to a traditional IRA in prior years and are receiving distributions from any traditional IRA, you must file the required information with the IRS. Moreover, if you are making nondeductible traditional IRA contributions, you must retain all income tax returns and records pertaining to such contributions until interests in all traditional IRAs are fully distributed.

When you can make regular contributions.  If you file your tax returns on a calendar year basis like most taxpayers, you have until the April 15 return filing deadline (without extensions) of the following calendar year to make your regular traditional IRA contributions for a tax year. Make sure you designate the year for which you are making the contribution.

Rollover and direct transfer contributions to traditional IRAs

Rollover contributions may be made to a traditional IRA from these “eligible retirement plans”:

qualified plans;

governmental employer 457(b) plans;

403(b) plans; and

other traditional IRAs.

Direct transfer contributions may only be made directly from one traditional IRA to another.

Any amount contributed to a traditional IRA after you reach age 701/2 must be net of your required minimum distribution for the year in which the rollover or direct transfer contribution is made.

Rollovers from “eligible retirement plans” other than traditional IRAs

Your plan administrator will tell you whether or not your distribution is eligible to be rolled over. Spousal beneficiaries and spousal alternate payees under qualified domestic relations orders may roll over funds on the same basis as the plan participant.

There are two ways to do rollovers:

Do it yourself:

You receive a distribution that can be rolled over and you roll it over to a traditional IRA within 60 days after the date you receive the funds. The distribution from your eligible retirement plan will be net of 20% mandatory federal income tax withholding. If you want, you can replace the withheld funds yourself and roll over the full amount.

Direct rollover:

You tell the trustee or custodian of the eligible retirement plan to send the distribution directly to your traditional IRA issuer. Direct rollovers are not subject to mandatory federal income tax withholding.

All distributions from a qualified plan, 403(b) plan or governmental employer 457(b) plan are eligible rollover distributions, unless the distributions are:

“required minimum distributions” after age 701/2 or retirement from service with the employer; or

substantially equal periodic payments made at least annually for your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary; or

substantially equal periodic payments made for a specified period of 10 years or more; or

hardship withdrawals; or

corrective distributions that fit specified technical tax rules; or

loans that are treated as distributions; or

certain death benefit payments to a beneficiary who is not your surviving spouse; or

qualified domestic relations order distributions to a beneficiary who is not your current spouse or former spouse.

You should discuss with your tax adviser whether you should consider rolling over funds from one type of tax qualified retirement plan to another, because the funds will generally be subject to the rules of the recipient plan. For example, funds in a governmental employer 457(b) plan are not subject to the additional 10% federal income tax penalty for premature distributions, but they may become subject to this penalty if you roll the funds to a different type of eligible retirement plan, such as a traditional IRA, and subsequently take a premature distribution.

Rollovers from an eligible retirement plan to a traditional IRA are not subject to the “one-per-year limit” noted later in this section.

Rollovers ofafter-tax contributions from eligible retirement plans other than traditional IRAs

Anynon-Rothafter-tax contributions you have made to a qualified plan or 403(b) plan (but not a governmental employer 457(b) plan) may be rolled over to a traditional IRA (either in a direct rollover or a rollover you do yourself). When the recipient plan is a traditional IRA, you are responsible for recordkeeping and calculating the taxable amount of any distributions you take from that traditional IRA. See “Taxation of payments” later in this Prospectus under “Withdrawals, payments and transfers of funds out of traditional IRAs.”After-tax contributions in a traditional IRA cannot be rolled over from your traditional IRA into, or back into, a qualified plan, 403(b) plan or governmental employer 457(b) plan.

Rollovers from traditional IRAs to traditional IRAs

You may roll over amounts from one traditional IRA to one or more of your other traditional IRAs if you complete the transaction within 60 days after you receive the funds. You may make such a rollover only once in every12-month period for the same funds. We call this the “one-per-year limit.” It is the IRA owner’s responsibility to determine if this rule is met.Trustee-to-trustee orcustodian-to-custodian direct transfers are not rollover transactions. You can make these more frequently than once in every12-month period.

Spousal rollovers and divorce-related direct transfers

The surviving spouse beneficiary of a deceased individual can roll over funds from, or directly transfer funds from, the deceased spouse’s

59


traditional IRA to one or more other traditional IRAs. Also, in some cases, traditional IRAs can be transferred on atax-free basis between spouses or former spouses as a result of a court-ordered divorce or separation decree.

Excess contributions to traditional IRAs

Excess contributions to IRAs are subject to a 6% excise tax for the year in which made and for each year after until withdrawn. The following are excess contributions to IRAs:

regular contributions of more than the maximum regular contribution amount for the applicable taxable year; or

regular contributions to a traditional IRA made after you reach age 701/2; or

rollover contributions of amounts which are not eligible to be rolled over, for example, minimum distributions required to be made after age 701/2.

You can avoid or limit the excise tax by withdrawing an excess contribution (rollover or regular). See Publications 590-A and 590-B for further details.

Recharacterizations

Amounts that have been contributed as traditional IRA funds may subsequently be treated as Roth IRA funds. Special federal income tax rules allow you to change your mind again and have amounts that are subsequently treated as Roth IRA funds, once again treated as traditional IRA funds. You do this by using the forms we prescribe. This is referred to as having “recharacterized” your contribution.

Withdrawals, payments and transfers of funds out of traditional IRAs

No federal income tax law restrictions on withdrawals.  You can withdraw any or all of your funds from a traditional IRA at any time. You do not need to wait for a special event like retirement.

Taxation of payments.  Amounts distributed from traditional IRAs are not subject to federal income tax until you or your beneficiary receive them. Taxable payments or distributions include withdrawals from your contract, surrender of your contract and annuity payments from your contract. Death benefits are also taxable.

We report all payments from traditional IRA contracts on IRS Form1099-R. You are responsible for reporting these amounts correctly on your individual income tax return and keeping supporting records. Except as discussed below, the total amount of any distribution from a traditional IRA must be included in your gross income as ordinary income.

If you have ever made nondeductible (after-tax) IRA contributions to any traditional IRA (it does not have to be to this particular traditional IRA contract), those contributions are recoveredtax-free when you get distributions from any traditional IRA. It is your responsibility to keep permanent tax records of all of your nondeductible contributions to traditional IRAs so that you can correctly report the taxable amount of any distribution on your own tax return. At the end of any year in which you have received a distribution from any traditional IRA, you calculate the ratio of your total nondeductible traditional IRA contributions (less any amounts previously withdrawn tax free) to the total account balances of all traditional IRAs you own at the end of the year plus all traditional IRA distributions made during the year.

Multiply this by all distributions from the traditional IRA during the year to determine the nontaxable portion of each distribution.

A distribution from a traditional IRA is not taxable if:

the amount received is a withdrawal of certain excess contributions, as described in IRS Publications 590-A and 590-B; or

the entire amount received is rolled over to another traditional IRA or other eligible retirement plan which agrees to accept the funds. (See “Rollovers from eligible retirement plans other than traditional IRAs” under “Rollover and direct transfer contributions to traditional IRAs” earlier in this section for more information.)

The following are eligible to receive rollovers of distributions from a traditional IRA: a qualified plan, a 403(b) plan or a governmental employer 457 plan.After-tax contributions in a traditional IRA cannot be rolled from your traditional IRA into, or back into, a qualified plan, 403(b) plan or governmental employer 457 plan. Before you decide to roll over a distribution from a traditional IRA to another eligible retirement plan, you should check with the administrator of that plan about whether the plan accepts rollovers and, if so, the types it accepts. You should also check with the administrator of the receiving plan about any documents required to be completed before it will accept a rollover.

Distributions from a traditional IRA are not eligible for favorableten-year averaging and long-term capital gain treatment available under limited circumstances for certain distributions from qualified plans. If you might be eligible for such tax treatment from your qualified plan, you may be able to preserve such tax treatment even though an eligible rollover from a qualified plan is temporarily rolled into a “conduit IRA” before being rolled back into a qualified plan. See your tax adviser.

IRA distributions directly transferred to charity.  Specified distributions from IRAs directly transferred to charitable organizations may be tax-free to IRA owners age 701/2 or older. We no longer permit you to direct the Company to make a distribution directly to a charitable organization you request, in accordance with an interpretation of recent non-tax regulatory changes.

Required minimum distributions

Background on Regulations — Required Minimum Distributions

Distributions must be made from traditional IRAs according to rules contained in the Code and Treasury Regulations. Certain provisions of the Treasury Regulations require that the actuarial present value of additional annuity contract benefits must be added to the dollar amount credited for purposes of calculating certain types of required minimum distributions from individual retirement annuity contracts. For this purpose additional annuity contract benefits may include, but are not limited to, various guaranteed benefits. This could increase the amount required to be distributed from the contracts if you take annual withdrawals instead of annuitizing. Currently we believe that these provisions would not apply to Structured Capital Strategies® contracts because of the type of benefits provided under the contracts. However, if you take annual withdrawals instead of annuitizing, please consult your tax adviser concerning applicability of these complex rules to your situation.

Lifetime required minimum distributions.  You must start taking annual distributions from your traditional IRAs for the year in which you turn age 701/2.

60


When you have to take the first lifetime required minimum distribution.  The first required minimum distribution is for the calendar year in which you turn age 701/2. You have the choice to take this first required minimum distribution during the calendar year you actually reach age 701/2, or to delay taking it until the first three-month period in the next calendar year (January 1 – April 1). Distributions must start no later than your “Required Beginning Date,” which is April 1st of the calendar year after the calendar year in which you turn age 701/2. If you choose to delay taking the first annual minimum distribution, then you will have to take two minimum distributions in that year — the delayed one for the first year and the one actually for that year. Once minimum distributions begin, they must be made at some time each year.

How you can calculate required minimum distributions.  There are two approaches to taking required minimum distributions — “account-based” or “annuity-based.”

Account-based method.  If you choose an account-based method, you divide the value of your traditional IRA as of December 31st of the past calendar year by a number corresponding to your age from an IRS table. This gives you the required minimum distribution amount for that particular IRA for that year. If your spouse is your sole beneficiary and more than 10 years younger than you, the dividing number you use may be from another IRS table and may produce a smaller lifetime required minimum distribution amount. Regardless of the table used, the required minimum distribution amount will vary each year as the account value, the actuarial present value of additional annuity contract benefits, if applicable, and the divisor change. If you initially choose an account-based method, you may later apply your traditional IRA funds to a life annuity-based payout with any certain period not exceeding remaining life expectancy, determined in accordance with IRS tables.

If you choose an account-based method, the RMD amount for your Structured Capital Strategies® traditional IRA contract is calculated with respect to your entire interest in the contract, including your allocations to one or more variable investment options and one or more of the Segments in the Structured Investment Option.

Annuity-based method.  If you choose an annuity-based method, you do not have to do annual calculations. You apply the account value to an annuity payout for your life or the joint lives of you and a designated beneficiary, or for a period certain not extending beyond applicable life expectancies, determined in accordance with IRS tables.

Do you have to pick the same method to calculate your required minimum distributions for all of your traditional IRAs and other retirement plans?  No. If you want, you can choose a different method for each of your traditional IRAs and other retirement plans. For example, you can choose an annuity payout from one IRA, a different annuity payout from a qualified plan, and an account-based annual withdrawal from another IRA.

Will we pay you the annual amount every year from your traditional IRA based on the method you choose?  We will only pay you automatically if you affirmatively select an annuity payout option or an account-based withdrawal option such as our “automatic required minimum distribution (RMD) service.” Even if you do not enroll in our service, we will calculate the amount of the required minimum distribution withdrawal for you, if you so request

in writing. However, in that case you will be responsible for asking us to pay the required minimum distribution withdrawal to you.

Also, if you are taking account-based withdrawals from all of your traditional IRAs, the IRS will let you calculate the required minimum distribution for each traditional IRA that you maintain, using the method that you picked for that particular IRA. You can add these required minimum distribution amount calculations together. As long as the total amount you take out every year satisfies your overall traditional IRA required minimum distribution amount, you may choose to take your annual required minimum distribution from any one or more traditional IRAs that you own.

If you are at an age where you are required to take lifetime required minimum distributions from traditional IRAs you should consider the effect of allocations to the Structured Investment Option under a Structured Capital Strategies® traditional IRA contract. You should consider whether you have a sufficient amount allocated to the Variable Investment Options under this contract and/or sufficient liquidity under other traditional IRAs that you maintain in order to satisfy your RMD for this contract without affecting amounts allocated to the Structured Investment Option under this contract.

Particularly if you hold any portion of your Structured Capital Strategies® IRA account value in Segments, you should make sure to have money invested in the variable investment options and/or other traditional IRAs in order to have enough liquidity in the contract or elsewhere to satisfy your RMD withdrawals without dipping into a Segment.

What if you take more than you need to for any year?  The required minimum distribution amount for your traditional IRAs is calculated on ayear-by-year basis. There are no carry-back or carry-forward provisions. Also, you cannot apply required minimum distribution amounts you take from your qualified plans to the amounts you have to take from your traditional IRAs and vice versa.

What if you take less than you need to for any year?  Your IRA could be disqualified, and you could have to pay tax on the entire value. Even if your IRA is not disqualified, you could have to pay a 50% penalty tax on the shortfall (required amount for traditional IRAs less amount actually taken). It is your responsibility to meet the required minimum distribution rules. We will remind you when our records show that you are within the age group which must take lifetime required minimum distributions. If you do not select a method with us, we will assume you are taking your required minimum distribution from another traditional IRA that you own.

What are the required minimum distribution payments after you die?  These could vary depending on whether you die before or after your Required Beginning Date for lifetime required minimum distribution payments, and the status of your beneficiary. The following assumes that you have not yet elected an annuity-based payout at the time of your death. If you elect an annuity-based payout, payments (if any) after your death must be made at least as rapidly as when you were alive.

Individual beneficiary.  Regardless of whether your death occurs before or after your Required Beginning Date, an individual death beneficiary calculates annual post-death required minimum distribution payments based on the beneficiary’s life expectancy using the “term certain method.” That is, he or she determines his or her

61


life expectancy using theIRS-provided life expectancy tables as of the calendar year after the owner’s death and reduces that number by one each subsequent year.

If you die before your Required Beginning Date, the rules permit any individual beneficiary, including a spousal beneficiary, to elect instead to apply the“5-year rule.” Under this rule, instead of annual payments having to be made beginning with the first in the year following the owner’s death, the entire account must be distributed by the end of the calendar year which contains the fifth anniversary of the owner’s death. No distribution is required before that fifth year.

Spousal beneficiary.  If you die after your Required Beginning Date, and your death beneficiary is your surviving spouse, your spouse has a number of choices. Post-death distributions may be made over your spouse’s single life expectancy. Any amounts distributed after that surviving spouse’s death are made over the spouse’s life expectancy calculated in the year of his/her death, reduced by one for each subsequent year. In some circumstances, your surviving spouse may elect to become the owner of the traditional IRA and halt distributions until he or she reaches age 701/2, or roll over amounts from your traditional IRA into his/her own traditional IRA or other eligible retirement plan.

If you die before your Required Beginning Date, and the death beneficiary is your surviving spouse, the rules permit the spouse to delay starting payments over his/her life expectancy until the year in which you would have attained age 701/2.

Non-individual beneficiary.  If you die after your Required Beginning Date, and your death beneficiary is anon-individual, such as the estate, the rules permit the beneficiary to calculate post-death required minimum distribution amounts based on the owner’s life expectancy in the year of death.However, note that we need an individual annuitant to keep an annuity contract in force. If the beneficiary is not an individual, we must distribute amounts remaining in the annuity contract after the death of the annuitant.

If you die before your Required Beginning Date for lifetime required minimum distribution payments, and the death beneficiary is anon-individual, such as the estate, the rules continue to apply the5-year rule discussed above under “Individual beneficiary.” Please note that we need an individual annuitant to keep an annuity contract in force. If the beneficiary is not an individual, we must distribute amounts remaining in the annuity contract after the death of the annuitant.

Spousal continuation

If the contract is continued under Spousal continuation, the required minimum distribution rules are applied as if your surviving spouse is the contract owner.

Payments to a beneficiary after your death

IRA death benefits are taxed the same as IRA distributions.

Borrowing and loans are prohibited transactions

You cannot get loans from a traditional IRA. You cannot use a traditional IRA as collateral for a loan or other obligation. If you borrow against your IRA or use it as collateral, itstax-favored status will be lost as of the first day of the tax year in which this prohibited event occurs. If this happens, you must include the value of the traditional IRA in your federal gross

income. Also, the early distribution penalty tax of 10% may apply if you have not reached age 591/2 before the first day of that tax year.

Early distribution penalty tax

A penalty tax of 10% of the taxable portion of a distribution applies to distributions from a traditional IRA made before you reach age 591/2. Some of the available exceptions to thepre-age 591/2 penalty tax include distributions:

made on or after your death; or

made because you are disabled (special federal income tax definition); or

used to pay for certain extraordinary medical expenses (special federal income tax definition); or

used to pay medical insurance premiums for unemployed individuals (special federal income tax definition); or

used to pay certain first-time home buyer expenses (special federal income tax definition — there is a $10,000 lifetime total limit for these distributions from all your traditional and Roth IRAs); or

used to pay certain higher education expenses (special federal income tax definition); or

in the form of substantially equal periodic payments made at least annually over your life (or your life expectancy), or over the joint lives of you and your beneficiary (or your joint life expectancies) using anIRS-approved distribution method.

Please note that it is your responsibility to claim the penalty exception on your own income tax return and document eligibility for the exception to the IRS.

Roth individual retirement annuities (“Roth IRAs”)

This section of the Prospectus covers some of the special tax rules that apply to Roth IRAs. If the rules are the same as those that apply to the traditional IRA, we will refer you to the same topic under “traditional IRAs.”

The Structured Capital Strategies® Roth IRA contracts are designed to qualify as Roth individual retirement annuities under Sections 408A(b) and 408(b) of the Internal Revenue Code.

Contributions to Roth IRAs

Individuals may make four different types of contributions to a Roth IRA:

regularafter-tax contributions out of earnings; or

taxable rollover contributions from traditional IRAs or other eligible retirement plans (“conversion” rollover contributions); or

tax-free rollover contributions from other Roth individual retirement arrangements (or designated Roth accounts under defined contribution plans); or

tax-free directcustodian-to-custodian transfers from other Roth IRAs (“direct transfers”).

If you use the forms we require, we will also accept traditional IRA funds which are subsequently recharacterized as Roth IRA funds following special federal income tax rules.

62


Because the minimum initial contribution the Company requires to purchase this contract is larger than the maximum regular contribution you can make to an IRA for a taxable year, this contract must be purchased through a rollover or direct transfer contribution.

Regular contributions to Roth IRAs

Limits on regular contributions.  The “maximum regular contribution amount” for any taxable year is the most that can be contributed to all of your IRAs (traditional and Roth) as regular contributions for the particular taxable year. The maximum regular contribution amount depends on age, earnings, and year, among other things. Generally, $6,000 is the maximum amount that you may contribute to all IRAs (traditional IRAs and Roth IRAs) for 2020, after adjustment for cost-of-living changes. This limit does not apply to rollover contributions or directcustodian-to-custodian transfers into a Roth IRA. Any contributions to Roth IRAs reduce the ability to contribute to traditional IRAs and vice versa. When your earnings are below $6,000, your earned income or compensation for the year is the most you can contribute. If you are married and file a joint income tax return, you and your spouse may combine your compensation to determine the amount of regular contributions you are permitted to make to Roth IRAs and traditional IRAs. See the discussion above under “Special rules for spouses” earlier in this section under traditional IRAs.

If you or your spouse are at least age 50 at any time during the taxable year for which you are making a regular contribution, you may be eligible to make additionalcatch-up contributions of up to $1,000.

With a Roth IRA, you can make regular contributions when you reach

701/2, as long as you have sufficient earnings. The amount of permissible contributions to Roth IRAs for any year depends on the individual’s income limits and marital status. For example, if you are married and filing separately for any year your ability to make regular Roth IRA contributions is greatly limited. The amount of permissible contributions and income limits may be adjusted annually for cost of living. Please consult IRS Publication 590-A,(“Contributions to Individual Retirement Arrangements (IRAs)”)for the rules applicable to the current year.

When you can make contributions.  Same as traditional IRAs.

Deductibility of contributions.  Roth IRA contributions are not tax deductible.

Rollover and direct transfer contributions to Roth IRAs

What is the difference between rollover and direct transfer transactions?  The difference between a rollover transaction and a direct transfer transaction is the following: in a rollover transaction you actually take possession of the funds rolled over, or are considered to have received them under tax law in the case of a change from one type of plan to another. In a direct transfer transaction, you never take possession of the funds, but direct the first Roth IRA custodian, trustee, or issuer to transfer the first Roth IRA funds directly to the recipient Roth IRA custodian, trustee or issuer. You can make direct transfer transactions only between identical plan types (for example, Roth IRA to Roth IRA). You can also make rollover transactions between identical plan types. However, you can only make rollovers between different plan types (for example, traditional IRA to Roth IRA).

You may make rollover contributions to a Roth IRA from these sources only:

another Roth IRA;

a traditional IRA, including aSEP-IRA or SIMPLE IRA (after atwo-year rollover limitation period for SIMPLE IRA funds), in a taxable conversion rollover (“conversion rollover”);

a “designated Roth contribution account” under a 401(k) plan, 403(b) plan or governmental employer Section 457(b) plan (direct or60-day); or

fromnon-Roth accounts under another eligible retirement plan as described below under “Conversion rollover contributions to Roth IRAs.”

You may make direct transfer contributions to a Roth IRA only from another Roth IRA.

You may make both Roth IRA to Roth IRA rollover transactions and Roth IRA to Roth IRA direct transfer transactions. This can be accomplished on a completelytax-free basis. However, you may make Roth IRA to Roth IRA rollover transactions only once in any12-month period for the same funds. We call this the “one-per-year limit.” It is the Roth IRA owner’s responsibility to determine if this rule is met.Trustee-to-trustee orcustodian-to-custodian direct transfers can be made more frequently than once a year. Also, if you send us the rollover contribution to apply it to a Roth IRA, you must do so within 60 days after you receive the proceeds from the original IRA to get rollover treatment.

The surviving spouse beneficiary of a deceased individual can roll over or directly transfer an inherited Roth IRA to one or more other Roth IRAs. In some cases, Roth IRAs can be transferred on atax-free basis between spouses or former spouses as a result of a court-ordered divorce or separation decree.

Conversion rollover contributions to Roth IRAs

In a conversion rollover transaction, you withdraw (or are considered to have withdrawn) all or a portion of funds from a traditional IRA you maintain and convert it to a Roth IRA within 60 days after you receive (or are considered to have received) the traditional IRA proceeds. Amounts can also be rolled over fromnon-Roth accounts under another eligible retirement plan, including a Code Section 401(a) qualified plan, a 403(b) plan, and a governmental employer Section 457(b) plan.

Unlike a rollover from a traditional IRA to another traditional IRA, a conversion rollover transaction from a traditional IRA or other eligible retirement plan to a Roth IRA is nottax-free. Instead, the distribution from the traditional IRA or other eligible retirement plan is generally fully taxable. If you are converting all or part of a traditional IRA, and you have ever made nondeductible regular contributions to any traditional IRA — whether or not it is the traditional IRA you are converting — a pro rata portion of the distribution istax-free. Even if you are under age 591/2, the early distribution penalty tax does not apply to conversion rollover contributions to a Roth IRA.

Conversion rollover contributions to Roth IRAs are not subject to the “one-per-year limit” noted earlier in this section.

63


You cannot make conversion contributions to a Roth IRA to the extent that the funds in your traditional IRA or other eligible retirement plan are subject to the lifetime annual required minimum distribution rules.

The IRS and Treasury have issued Proposed and Temporary Treasury Regulations addressing the valuation of annuity contracts funding traditional IRAs in the conversion to Roth IRAs. Although these Regulations are not clear, they could require an individual’s gross income on the conversion of a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA to be measured using various actuarial methods and not as if the annuity contract funding the traditional IRA had been surrendered at the time of conversion. This could increase the amount of income reported in certain circumstances.

Recharacterizations

You may be able to treat a contribution made to one type of IRA as having been made to a different type of IRA. This is called recharacterizing the contribution.

How to recharacterize.  To recharacterize a contribution, you generally must have the contribution transferred from the first IRA (the one to which it was made) to the second IRA in a deemedtrustee-to-trustee transfer. If the transfer is made by the due date (including extensions) for your tax return for the year during which the contribution was made, you can elect to treat the contribution as having been originally made to the second IRA instead of to the first IRA. It will be treated as having been made to the second IRA on the same date that it was actually made to the first IRA. You must report the recharacterization, and must treat the contribution as having been made to the second IRA, instead of the first IRA, on your tax return for the year during which the contribution was made.

The contribution will not be treated as having been made to the second IRA unless the transfer includes any net income allocable to the contribution. You can take into account any loss on the contribution while it was in the IRA when calculating the amount that must be transferred. If there was a loss, the net income you must transfer may be a negative amount.

No deduction is allowed for the contribution to the first IRA and any net income transferred with the recharacterized contribution is treated as earned in the second IRA. The contribution will not be treated as having been made to the second IRA to the extent any deduction was allowed with respect to the contribution to the first IRA.

Conversion rollover contributions to Roth IRAs cannot be recharacterized.

To recharacterize a contribution you must use our forms.

Withdrawals, payments and transfers of funds out of Roth IRAs

No federal income tax law restrictions on withdrawals.  You can withdraw any or all of your funds from a Roth IRA at any time; you do not need to wait for a special event like retirement.

Distributions from Roth IRAs

Distributions include withdrawals from your contract, surrender and termination of your contract and annuity payments from your contract. Death benefits are also distributions.

You must keep your own records of regular and conversion contributions to all Roth IRAs to assure appropriate taxation. You may

have to file information on your contributions to and distributions from any Roth IRA on your tax return. You may have to retain all income tax returns and records pertaining to such contributions and distributions until your interests in all Roth IRAs are distributed.

Like traditional IRAs, taxable distributions from a Roth IRA are not entitled to the special favorableten-year averaging and long-term capital gain treatment available in limited cases to certain distributions from qualified plans.

The following distributions from Roth IRAs are free of income tax:

rollovers from a Roth IRA to another Roth IRA;

direct transfers from a Roth IRA to another Roth IRA;

qualified distributions from a Roth IRA; and

return of excess contributions or amounts recharacterized to a traditional IRA.

Qualified distributions from Roth IRAs.  Qualified distributions from Roth IRAs made because of one of the following four qualifying events or reasons are not includable in income:

you are age 591/2 or older; or

you die; or

you become disabled (special federal income tax definition); or

your distribution is a “qualified first-time homebuyer distribution” (special federal income tax definition; $10,000 lifetime total limit for these distributions from all of your traditional and Roth IRAs).

You also have to meet a five-year aging period. A qualified distribution is any distribution made after the five-taxable year period beginning with the first taxable year for which you made any contribution to any Roth IRA (whether or not the one from which the distribution is being made).

Nonqualified distributions from Roth IRAs.  Nonqualified distributions from Roth IRAs are distributions that do not meet both the qualifying event and five-year aging period tests described above. If you receive such a distribution, part of it may be taxable. For purposes of determining the correct tax treatment of distributions (other than the withdrawal of excess contributions and the earnings on them), there is a set order in which contributions (including conversion contributions) and earnings are considered to be distributed from your Roth IRA. The order of distributions is as follows:

(1)

Regular contributions.

(2)

Conversion contributions, on afirst-in-first-out basis (generally, total conversions from the earliest year first). These conversion contributions are taken into account as follows:

(a)

Taxable portion (the amount required to be included in gross income because of conversion) first, and then the

(b)

Nontaxable portion.

(3)

Earnings on contributions.

Rollover contributions from other Roth IRAs are disregarded for this purpose.

64


To determine the taxable amounts distributed, distributions and contributions are aggregated or grouped and added together as follows:

(1)

All distributions made during the year from all Roth IRAs you maintain — within any custodian or issuer — are added together.

(2)

All regular contributions made during and for the year (contributions made after the close of the year, but before the due date of your return) are added together. This total is added to the total undistributed regular contributions made in prior years.

(3)

All conversion contributions made during the year are added together.

Any recharacterized contributions that end up in a Roth IRA are added to the appropriate contribution group for the year that the original contribution would have been taken into account if it had been made directly to the Roth IRA.

Any recharacterized contribution that ends up in an IRA other than a Roth IRA is disregarded for the purpose of grouping both contributions and distributions. Any amount withdrawn to correct an excess contribution (including the earnings withdrawn) is also disregarded for this purpose.

Required minimum distributions

Lifetime minimum distribution requirements do not apply.

Required minimum distributions at death

Same as traditional IRA under “What are the required minimum distribution payments after you die?”, assuming death before the Required Beginning Date.

Payments to a beneficiary after your death

Distributions to a beneficiary generally receive the same tax treatment as if the distribution had been made to you.

Borrowing and loans are prohibited transactions

Same as traditional IRA.

Excess contributions

Generally the same as traditional IRA, except that regular contributions made after age 701/2 are not “excess contributions.”

Excess rollover contributions to Roth IRAs are contributions not eligible to be rolled over.

You can withdraw or recharacterize any contribution to a Roth IRA before the due date (including extensions) for filing your federal income tax return for the tax year. If you do this, you must also withdraw or recharacterize any earnings attributable to the contribution.

Early distribution penalty tax

Same as traditional IRA.

Tax withholding and information reporting

Status for income tax purposes; FATCA.  In order for us to comply with income tax withholding and information reporting rules which may apply to annuity contracts and tax-qualified or tax-favored plan participation, we request documentation of “status” for tax

purposes. “Status” for tax purposes generally means whether a person is a “U S. person” or a foreign person with respect to the United States; whether a person is an individual or an entity, and if an entity, the type of entity. Status for tax purposes is best documented on the appropriate IRS Form or substitute certification form (IRS Form W-9 for a U.S. person or the appropriate type of IRS Form W-8 for a foreign person). If we do not have appropriate certification or documentation of a person’s status for tax purposes on file, it could affect the rate at which we are required to withhold income tax, and penalties could apply. Information reporting rules could apply not only to specified transactions, but also to contract ownership. For example, under the Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act (“FATCA”), which applies to certain U.S.-source payments, and similar or related withholding and information reporting rules, we may be required to report contract values and other information for certain contractholders. For this reason we and our affiliates intend to require appropriate status documentation at purchase, change of ownership, and affected payment transactions, including death benefit payments. FATCA and its related guidance is extraordinarily complex and its effect varies considerably by type of payor, type of payee and type of recipient.

Tax Withholding.  We must withhold federal income tax from distributions from annuity contracts and specified tax-favored savings or retirement plans or arrangements. You may be able to elect out of this income tax withholding in some cases. Generally, we do not have to withhold if your distributions are not taxable. The rate of withholding will depend on the type of distribution and, in certain cases, the amount of your distribution. Any income tax withheld is a credit against your income tax liability. If you do not have sufficient income tax withheld or do not make sufficient estimated income tax payments, you may incur penalties under the estimated income tax rules.

You must file your request not to withhold in writing before the payment or distribution is made. Our processing office will provide forms for this purpose. You cannot elect out of withholding unless you provide us with your correct Taxpayer Identification Number and a United States residence address. You cannot elect out of withholding if we are sending the payment out of the United States.

You should note the following special situations:

we might have to withhold and/or report on amounts we pay under a free look or cancellation.

we are required to withhold on the gross amount of a distribution from a Roth IRA to the extent it is reasonable for us to believe that a distribution is includable in your gross income. This may result in tax being withheld even though the Roth IRA distribution is ultimately not taxable.

Special withholding rules apply to United States citizens residing outside of the United States, foreign recipients, and certain U. S. entity recipients which are treated as foreign because they fail to document their U.S. status before payment is made. We do not discuss these rules here in detail. However, we may require additional documentation in the case of payments made to United States persons living abroad and non-United States persons (including U.S. entities treated as foreign) prior to processing any requested transaction.

Certain states have indicated that state income tax withholding will also apply to payments from the contracts made to residents. Generally,

65


an election out of federal withholding will also be considered an election out of state withholding. In some states, you may elect out of state withholding, even if federal withholding applies. In some states, the income tax withholding is completely independent of federal income tax withholding. If you need more information concerning a particular state or any required forms, call our processing office at the toll-free number.

Federal income tax withholding on periodic annuity payments

Federal tax rules require payers to withhold differently on “periodic” and “non-periodic” payments. Payers are to withhold from periodic annuity payments as if the payments were wages. The annuity contract owner is to specify marital status and the number of withholding exemptions claimed on an IRS FormW-4P or similar substitute election form. If the owner does not claim a different number of withholding exemptions or marital status, the payer is to withhold assuming that the owner is married and claiming three withholding exemptions. If the owner does not provide the owner’s correct Taxpayer Identification Number a payer is to withhold from periodic annuity payments as if the owner were single with no exemptions.

A contract owner’s withholding election remains effective unless and until the owner revokes it. The contract owner may revoke or change a withholding election at any time.

Federal income tax withholding onnon-periodic annuity payments (withdrawals)

Non-periodic distributions include partial withdrawals, total surrenders and death benefits. Payers generally withhold federal income tax at a flat 10% rate from (i) the taxable amount in the case of nonqualified contracts, and (ii) the payment amount in the case of traditional IRAs and Roth IRAs, where it is reasonable to assume an amount is includable in gross income.

Impact of taxes to the Company

The contracts provide that we may charge Separate Account No. 49 for taxes. We do not now, but may in the future set up reserves for such taxes.

We are entitled to certain tax benefits related to the investment of company assets, including assets of the separate account. These tax benefits, which may include the foreign tax credit and the corporate dividends received deduction, are not passed back to you, since we are the owner of the assets from which tax benefits may be derived.

66


10. More information

About Separate Account No. 49

Each variable investment option is a subaccount of Separate Account No. 49. We established Separate Account No. 49 in 1996 under special provisions of the New York Insurance Law. These provisions prevent creditors from any other business we conduct from reaching the assets we hold in our variable investment options for owners of our variable annuity contracts. We are the legal owner of all of the assets in Separate Account No. 49 and may withdraw any amounts that exceed our reserves and other liabilities with respect to variable investment options under our contracts. For example, we may withdraw amounts from Separate Account No. 49 that represent our investments in Separate Account No. 49 or that represent fees and charges under the contracts that we have earned. Also, we may, at our sole discretion, invest Separate Account No. 49 assets in any investment permitted by applicable law. The results of Separate Account No. 49’s operations are accounted for without regard to the Company’s other operations. The amount of some of our obligations under the contracts is based on the assets in Separate Account No. 49. However, the obligations themselves are obligations of the Company.

Separate Account No. 49 is registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and is registered and classified under that act as a “unit investment trust.” The SEC, however, does not manage or supervise the Company or Separate Account No. 49. Although Separate Account No. 49 is registered, the SEC does not monitor the activity of Separate Account No. 49 on a daily basis. The Company is not required to register, and is not registered, as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940.

Each subaccount (variable investment option) within Separate Account No. 49 invests in shares issued by the corresponding Portfolio of its Trust.

We reserve the right subject to compliance with laws that apply:

(1)

to add variable investment options to, or to remove variable investment options from, Separate Account No. 49, or to add other separate accounts;

(2)

to combine any two or more variable investment options;

(3)

to transfer the assets we determine to be the shares of the class of contracts to which the contracts belong from any variable investment option to another variable investment option;

(4)

to operate Separate Account No. 49 or any variable investment option as a management investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (in which case, charges and expenses that otherwise would be assessed against an underlying mutual fund would be assessed against Separate Account No. 49 or a variable investment option directly);

(5)

to deregister Separate Account No. 49 under the Investment Company Act of 1940;

(6)

to restrict or eliminate any voting rights as to Separate Account No. 49;

(7)

to cause one or more variable investment options to invest some or all of their assets in one or more other trusts or investment companies;

(8)

to limit or terminate contributions or transfers into any variable investment option; and

(9)

to limit the number of variable investment options you may select.

If the exercise of these rights results in a material change in the underlying investment of Separate Account No. 49, you will be notified of such exercise, as required by law.

About Separate Account No. 68

We hold assets in a “non-unitized” separate account we have established under the New York Insurance Law to support our obligations under the Structured Investment Option. We own the assets of the separate account, as well as any favorable investment performance on those assets. You do not participate in the performance of the assets held in this separate account. We are obligated to pay all money we owe under the contract. If the obligation exceeds the assets of Separate Account No. 68, funds will be transferred to Separate Account No. 68 from the general account. We may, subject to state law that applies, transfer all assets allocated to the separate account to our general account. We guarantee all benefits relating to your value in the Structured Investment Option, regardless of whether assets supporting the Structured Investment Option are held in a separate account or our general account. An owner should look to the financial strength of the Company for its claims-paying ability. For more information, see “About the general account” below.

Our current plans are to invest separate account assets in fixed-income obligations, including corporate bonds, mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, and government and agency issues. We may also invest in interest rate swaps. Although the above generally describes our plans for investing the assets supporting our obligations under the Structured Investment Option, we are not obligated to invest those assets according to any particular plan except as we may be required to by state insurance laws.

About the Trust

The Trust is registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940. It is classified as an“open-end management investment company,” more commonly called a mutual fund. The Trust issues different shares relating to each of its portfolios.

The Trust does not impose sales charges or “loads” for buying and selling its shares. All dividends and other distributions on the Trust’s shares are reinvested in full. The Board of Trustees of the Trust serves for the benefit of the Trust’s shareholders. The Board of Trustees may take many actions regarding the Portfolios (for example, the Board of

67


Trustees can establish additional Portfolios or eliminate existing Portfolios; change Portfolio investment objectives; and change Portfolio investment policies and strategies). In accordance with applicable law, certain of these changes may be implemented without a shareholder vote and, in certain instances, without advanced notice. More detailed information about certain actions subject to notice and shareholder vote for each Trust, and other information about the Portfolios, including portfolio investment objectives, policies, restrictions, risks, expenses, its Rule 12b-1 plan and other aspects of its operations, appears in the prospectuses for the Trust, which generally accompany this prospectus, or in their respective SAIs, which are available upon request.

About the general account

This contract is offered to customers through various financial institutions, brokerage firms and their affiliate insurance agencies. No financial institution, brokerage firm or insurance agency has any liability with respect to a contract’s account value or the Structured Investment Option with which the contract was issued. The Company is solely responsible to the contract owner for the contract’s account value and the Structured Investment Option. The general obligations and the Structured Investment Option under the contract are supported by the Company’s general account and are subject to the Company’s claims paying ability. An owner should look to the financial strength of the Company for its claims-paying ability. Assets in the general account are not segregated for the exclusive benefit of any particular contract or obligation. General account assets are also available to the insurer’s general creditors and the conduct of its routine business activities, such as the payment of salaries, rent and other ordinary business expenses. For more information about the Company’s financial strength, you may review its financial statements and/or check its current rating with one or more of the independent sources that rate insurance companies for their financial strength and stability. Such ratings are subject to change and have no bearing on the performance of the variable investment options. You may also speak with your financial representative.

The general account is subject to regulation and supervision by the New York State Department of Financial Services and to the insurance laws and regulations of all jurisdictions where we are authorized to do business. Interests in the Structured Investment Option under the contracts in the general account are issued by the Company and are registered under the Securities Act of 1933. The general account is not required to register as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and it is not registered as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940. The contract is a “covered security” under the federal securities laws.

We have been advised that the staff of the SEC has not reviewed the portions of this Prospectus that relate to the general account. The disclosure with regard to the general account, however, may be subject to certain provisions of the federal securities laws relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in prospectuses.

About other methods of payment

Wire transmittals and electronic transactions

We accept initial and subsequent contributions sent by wire to our processing office by agreement with certain broker-dealers. Such transmittals must be accompanied by information we require to allo-

cate your contribution. Wire orders not accompanied by complete information may be retained as described under “How you can make your contributions” under “Contract features and benefits” earlier in this Prospectus.

Even if we accept the wire order and essential information, a contract generally will not be issued until we receive and accept a properly completed application. In certain cases we may issue a contract based on information provided through certain broker-dealers with which we have established electronic facilities. In any such cases, you must sign our Acknowledgement of Receipt form.

Where we require a signed application, the above procedures do not apply and no transactions will be permitted until we receive the signed application and have issued the contract. Where we issue a contract based on information provided through electronic facilities, we require an Acknowledgement of Receipt Form. We may also require additional information. Until we receive the Acknowledgement of Receipt Form, (i.e. withdrawals and surrenders) financial transactions will not be permitted unless you request them in writing, sign the request and have it signature guaranteed. After your contract has been issued, additional contributions may be transmitted by wire.

In general, the transaction date for electronic transmissions is the date on which we receive at our regular processing office all required information and the funds due for your contribution. We may also establishsame-day electronic processing facilities with a broker-dealer that has undertaken to pay contribution amounts on behalf of its customers. In such cases, the transaction date for properly processed orders is the business day on which the broker-dealer inputs all required information into its electronic processing system. You can contact us to find out more about such arrangements.

After your contract has been issued, subsequent contributions may be transmitted by wire.

Dates and prices at which contract events occur

We describe below the general rules for when, and at what prices, events under your contract will occur. Other portions of this Prospectus describe circumstances that may cause exceptions. We generally do not repeat those exceptions below.

Business Day

Our “business day” is generally any day the NYSE is open for regular trading and generally ends at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time (or as of an earlier close of regular trading). If the SEC determines the existence of emergency conditions on any day, and consequently, the NYSE does not open, then that day is not a business day. Contributions will be applied and any other transaction requests will be processed when they are received along with all the required information unless another date applies as indicated below.

If your contribution, transfer or any other transaction request containing all the required information reaches us on any of the following, we will use the next business day:

on anon-business day;

after 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on a business day; or

after an early close of regular trading on the NYSE on a business day.

68


If your transaction is set to occur on the same day of the month as the contract date and that date is the 29th, 30th or 31st of the month, then the transaction will occur on the 1st day of the next month.

When a charge is to be deducted on a contract date anniversary that is anon-business day, we will deduct the charge on the next business day.

If we have entered into an agreement with your broker-dealer for automated processing of contributions and/or transfers upon receipt of customer order, your contribution and/or transfer will be considered received at the time your broker-dealer receives your contribution and/or transfer and all information needed to process your application, along with any required documents. Your broker-dealer will then transmit your order to us in accordance with our processing procedures. However, in such cases, your broker-dealer is considered a processing office for the purpose of receiving the contribution and/or transfer. Such arrangements may apply to initial contributions, subsequent contributions and/or transfers, or both, and may be commenced or terminated at any time without prior notice. If required by law, the “closing time” for such orders will be earlier than 4:00 p.m., Eastern Time.

Contributions, transfers, withdrawals and surrenders

Contributions allocated to the variable investment options (including the Segment Type Holding Accounts and dollar cap averaging account) are invested at the unit value next determined after the receipt of the contribution.

Transfers to or from the variable investment options (including the Segment Type Holding Accounts and dollar cap averaging account) will be made at the unit value next determined after the receipt of the transfer request.

Requests for withdrawals or surrenders from the variable investment options (including the Segment Type Holding Accounts and dollar cap averaging account) will be made at the unit value next determined on the business day that we receive the information that we require.

About your voting rights

As the owner of shares of the Trusts we have the right to vote on certain matters involving the portfolios, such as:

the election of trustees;

the formal approval of independent auditors selected for each Trust; or

any other matters described in the Prospectus for the Trust or requiring a shareholders’ vote under the Investment Company Act of 1940.

We will give contract owners the opportunity to instruct us how to vote the number of shares attributable to their contracts if a shareholder vote is taken. If we do not receive instructions in time from all contract owners, we will vote the shares of a portfolio for which no instructions have been received in the same proportion as we vote shares of that portfolio for which we have received instructions. We will also vote any shares that we are entitled to vote directly because of amounts we have in a portfolio in the same proportions that contract owners vote. One effect of proportional voting is that a small number of contract owners may determine the outcome of a vote.

The Trust sells its shares to the Company separate accounts in connection with the Company’s variable annuity and/or life insurance products, and to separate accounts of insurance companies, both affiliated and unaffiliated with the Company. EQ Advisors Trust also sells its shares to the trustee of a qualified plan for the Company. We currently do not foresee any disadvantages to our contract owners arising out of these arrangements. However, the Board of Trustees or Directors of the Trust intend to monitor events to identify any material irreconcilable conflicts that may arise and to determine what action, if any, should be taken in response. If we believe that a Board’s response insufficiently protects our contract owners, we will see to it that appropriate action is taken to do so.

Separate Account No. 49 voting rights

If actions relating to Separate Account No. 49 require contract owner approval, contract owners will be entitled to one vote for each unit they have in the variable investment options. Each contract owner who has elected a variable annuity payout option may cast the number of votes equal to the dollar amount of reserves we are holding for that annuity in a variable investment option divided by the annuity unit value for that option. We will cast votes attributable to any amounts we have in the variable investment options in the same proportion as votes cast by contract owners.

Changes in applicable law

The voting rights we describe in this Prospectus are created under applicable federal securities laws. To the extent that those laws or the

regulations published under those laws eliminate the necessity to submit matters for approval by persons having voting rights in separate accounts of insurance companies, we reserve the right to proceed in accordance with those laws or regulations.

Statutory compliance

We have the right to change your contract without the consent of any other person in order to comply with any laws and regulations that apply, including but not limited to changes in the Internal Revenue Code, in Treasury Regulations or in published rulings of the Internal Revenue Service and in Department of Labor regulations.

Any change in your contract must be in writing and made by an authorized officer of the Company. We will provide notice of any contract change.

The benefits under your contract will not be less than the minimum benefits required by any state law that applies.

About legal proceedings

The Company and its affiliates are parties to various legal proceedings. In our view, none of these proceedings would be considered material with respect to a contract owner’s interest in Separate Account No. 49, nor would any of these proceedings be likely to have a material adverse effect upon Separate Account No. 49, our ability to meet our obligations under the contracts, or the distribution of the contracts.

Financial statements

The financial statements of Separate Account No. 49, as well as the consolidated financial statements of the Company, are in the SAI. The SAI is part of the registration statement filed on FormN-4. The

69


financial statements of the Company have relevance to the contracts only to the extent that they bear upon the ability of the Company to meet its obligations under the contracts. The SAI is available free of charge. You may request one by writing to our processing office or calling1-800-789-7771.

Transfers of ownership, collateral assignments, loans, and borrowing

You can transfer ownership of an NQ contract at any time before annuity payments begin, subject to our acceptance. We will continue to treat you as the owner until we receive written notification of any change at our processing office. In some cases, an assignment or change of ownership may have adverse tax consequences. See “Tax information” earlier in this Prospectus.

We may refuse to process a change of ownership of an NQ contract without appropriate documentation of status on IRS Form W-9 (or, if IRS Form W-9 cannot be provided because the entity is not a U.S. entity, on the appropriate type of Form W-8).

Following a change of ownership, the existing beneficiary designations will remain in effect until the new owner provides new designations.

You cannot assign or transfer ownership of a traditional IRA or Roth IRA contract except by surrender to us. This rule also generally applies to QP contracts.

In certain circumstances, you may collaterally assign all or a portion of the value of your NQ contract as collateral or security for a loan with a third party lender. The terms of the assignment are subject to our approval. Loans are also not available under your contract. For limited transfers of ownership after the owner’s death see “Beneficiary continuation option” in “Payment of death benefit” earlier in this Prospectus. You may direct the transfer of the values under your traditional IRA or Roth IRA contract to another similar arrangement under federal income tax rules. In the case of such a transfer, which involves a surrender of your contract, we will impose a withdrawal charge if one applies.

About Custodial IRAs

For certain custodial IRA accounts, after your contract has been issued, we may accept transfer instructions by telephone, mail, facsimile or electronically from a broker-dealer, provided that we or your broker-dealer have your written authorization to do so on file. Accordingly, the Company will rely on the stated identity of the person placing instructions as authorized to do so on your behalf. The Company will not be liable for any claim, loss, liability or expenses that may arise out of such instructions. The Company will continue to rely on this authorization until it receives your written notification at its processing office that you have withdrawn this authorization. The Company may change or terminate telephone or electronic or overnight mail transfer procedures at any time without prior written notice and restrict facsimile, internet, telephone and other electronic transfer services because of disruptive transfer activity.

Distribution of the contracts

The contracts are distributed by both Equitable Advisors, LLC (“Equitable Advisors”) and Equitable Distributors, LLC (“Equitable

Distributors”) (together, the “Distributors”). The Distributors serve as principal underwriters of Separate Account No. 49.FP. The offering of the contractspolicies is intended to be continuous.

 

Equitable Advisors is an affiliate of the Company, and Equitable Distributors is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. The Distributors are under the common control of Equitable Holdings, Inc. Their principal business address is 1290 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10104. The Distributors are registered with the SEC as broker-dealers and are members of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, Inc. (“FINRA”). Both broker-dealers also act as distributors for other the Company life and annuity products we issue.

 

The contractspolicies are sold by financial professionals of Equitable Advisors and its affiliates. The contracts maypolicies are also be sold by financial professionals of unaffiliated broker-dealers that have entered into selling agreements with Equitable Distributors (“Selling broker-dealers”).

The Company pays compensation to both Distributors based on contracts sold (except for Series ADV contracts sold through Equitable Distributors).policies sold. The Company may also make additional payments to the Distributors, and the Distributors may, in turn, make additional payments to certain Selling broker-dealers. All payments will be in compliance with all applicable FINRA rules and other laws and regulations.

 

Although the Company takes into account all of its distribution and other costs in establishing the level of fees and charges under its contracts,policies, none of the compensation paid to the Distributors or the Selling broker-dealers discussed in this section of the Prospectusprospectus are imposed as separate fees or charges under your contract.policy. The Company, however, intends to recoup amounts it pays for distribution and other services through the fees and charges of the contractpolicy and payments it receives for providing administrative, distribution and other services to the Portfolios. For information about the fees and charges under the contract,policy, see “Fee table”“Risk/benefit summary: Charges and “Chargesexpenses you will pay” and expenses”“More information about certain policy charges” earlier in this Prospectus.prospectus.

As used below, the “target premium” is actuarially determined for each policy, based on that policy’s specific characteristics, as well as the policy’s face amount and Distributor, among other factors.

 

Equitable Advisors Compensation.  For Series ADV contracts sold through Equitable Advisors, Equitable Advisors will retain 50% of the advisory fee and the financial representative will get the other 50%.

For Series B and Series C contracts, theThe Company pays compensation to Equitable Advisors based on contributionspremium payments made on the contractspolicies sold through Equitable Advisors (“contribution-basedpremium-based compensation”). The contribution-basedpremium-based compensation will generally not exceed 99% of premiums you pay up to one target premium in your policy’s first year, plus 8.5% of total contributions.all other premiums you pay in your policy’s first year; plus 5.8% of all other premiums you pay in policy years two through five; plus 3.8% of all other premiums you pay in policy years six through ten, and 2.5% thereafter. Equitable Advisors, in turn, may pay a portion of the contribution-basedpremium-based compensation received from the Company to the Equitable Advisors financial professional and/or the Selling broker-dealer making the sale. In some instances, aYour Equitable Advisors financial professional or a Selling broker-dealer may elect to receive reduced contribution-basedpremium-based compensation on a contract in combination with ongoing annual compensation of up to 1.0%based on a percentage of the unloaned account value of the contractpolicy sold (“asset-based compensation”). Total compensation paid to a financial professional or a Selling broker-dealer electing to receive both contribution-basedpremium-based and asset-based compensation could over time exceed the total compensation that would otherwise be paid on the basis of contributionspremiums alone. The compensation paid by Equitable Advisors varies among financial professionals and among Selling broker-dealers. Equitable Advisors also pays a portion of the compensation it receives to its managerial personnel. Equitable Advisors also pays its financial professionals and managerial personnel other types of

70


compensation including service fees, expense allowance payments and health and retirement benefits. Equitable Advisors also pays its financial professionals, managerial personnel and Selling broker-dealers sales bonuses (based on selling certain products during specified periods) and persistency bonuses. Equitable Advisors may offer sales incentive programs to financial professionals and Selling broker-dealers who meet specified production levels for the sales of both the Company’s contracts and contracts offered by other companies. These incentives providenon-cash compensation such as stock options awards and/or stock appreciation rights, expense-paid trips, expense-paid education seminars and merchandise.

When a contractpolicy is sold by a Selling broker-dealer, the Selling broker-dealer, not Equitable Advisors, determines the amount and type of compensation paid to the Selling broker-dealer’s financial professional for the sale of the contract.policy. Therefore, you should contractcontact your financial professional for information about the compensation he or she receives and any related incentives, as described immediately below.

 

Equitable Advisors may receive compensation, and, in turn, pay its financial professionals a portion of such fee, from third party investment advisors to whom its financial professionals refer customers for professional management of the assets within their contract.policy.

Equitable Advisors also pays its financial professionals and managerial personnel other types of compensation including service fees, expense allowance payments and health and retirement benefits. Equitable Advisors also pays its financial professionals, managerial personnel and Selling broker-dealers sales bonuses (based on selling

74


certain products during specified periods) and persistency bonuses. Equitable Advisors may offer sales incentive programs to financial professionals and Selling broker-dealers who meet specified production levels for the sales of both the Company’s policies and policies offered by other companies. These incentives providenon-cash compensation such as stock options awards and/or stock appreciation rights, expense-paid trips, expense-paid education seminars and merchandise.

 

Differential compensation.  In an effort to promote the sale of the Company’s products, Equitable Advisors may pay its financial professionals and managerial personnel a greater percentage of contribution-basedpremium-based compensation and/or asset-based compensation for the sale of our contractpolicy than it pays for the sale of a contractpolicy or other financial product issued by a company other than us. Equitable Advisors may pay higher compensation on certain products in a class than others based on a group or sponsored arrangement, or between older and newer versions or series of the same contract.policy. This practice is known as providing “differential compensation.” Differential compensation may involve other forms of compensation to Equitable Advisors personnel. Certain components of the compensation paid to managerial personnel are based on whether the sales involve the Company’s contracts.policies. Managers earn higher compensation (and credits toward awards and bonuses) if the financial professionals they manage sell a higher percentage of the Company’s contractspolicies than products issued by other companies. Other forms of compensation provided to its financial professionals and/or managerial personnel include health and retirement benefits, expense reimbursements, marketing allowances and contribution-basedpremium-based payments, known as “overrides.” For tax reasons, Equitable Advisors financial professionals qualify for health and retirement benefits based solely on their sales of the Company’s contractspolicies and products sponsored by affiliates.

 

The fact that Equitable Advisors financial professionals receive differential compensation and additional payments may provide an incentive for those financial professionals to recommend our contractpolicy over a contractpolicy or other financial product issued by a company not affiliated with the Company. However, under applicable rules of FINRA and other federal and state regulatory authorities, Equitable Advisors financial professionals may only recommend to you products that they reasonably believe are suitable for you and, for certain accounts depending on applicable rules, that are in your best interest, based on the facts that you have disclosed as to your other security holdings, financial situation and needs. In making any recommendation, financial professionals of Equitable Advisors may nonetheless face conflicts of interest because of the differences in

compensation from one product category to another, and because of differences in compensation among products in the same category. For more information, contact your financial professional.

 

Equitable Distributors Compensation.  For Series ADV contracts sold through Equitable Distributors, Equitable Distributors will not receive any compensation.

For Series B and Series C contracts, theThe Company pays contribution-basedpremium-based and asset-based compensation (together, “compensation”) to Equitable Distributors. Contribution-basedPremium-based compensation is paid based on the Company’s contractspolicies sold through Equitable Distributors’ Selling broker-dealers. Asset-based compensation is paid based on the aggregateunloaned account value of contractspolicies sold through certain of Equitable Distributors’Distributor’s Selling broker-dealers. Contribution-compensationPremium-based compensation will generally not exceed 7.0%135% of the total contributions made under the contracts.premiums you pay up to one target premium in your policy’s first year; plus 5% of all other premiums you pay in your policy’s first year; plus 2.8% of all other premiums you pay in policy years two through ten, and 2% thereafter.

Asset-based compensation up to 0.15% in policy years 6-10 and up to 0.10% in policy years 11 and later may also be paid. Equitable Distributors, in turn, pays a portion of the contribution-based compensation it receives on the sale of a contract to the Selling broker-dealer making the sale. In some instances, the Selling broker-dealer may elect to receive reduced contribution-based compensation on the sale of the contract in combination with annual asset-based compensation of up to 1.0% of the account value of the contract sold. If a Selling broker-dealer elects to receive reduced contribution-based compensation on a contract, the contribution-based compensation which the Company pays to Equitable Distributors will be reduced by the same amount, and the Company will pay Equitable Distributors asset-based compensation on the contract equal to the asset-based compensation which Equitable Distributors pays to the Selling broker-dealer. Total compensation paid to a Selling broker-dealer electing to receive both contribution-based and asset-based compensation could over time exceed the total compensation that would otherwise be paid on the basis of contributions alone. The contribution-based and asset-based compensation paid by Equitable Distributors varies among Selling broker-dealers.

 

The Selling broker-dealer, not Equitable Distributors, determines the amount and type of compensation paid to the Selling broker-dealer’s financial professional for the sale of the contract.policy. Therefore, you should contact your financial professional for information about the compensation he or she receives and any related incentives, such as differential compensation paid for various products.

 

The CompanyThese payments above also pays Equitable Distributorsinclude compensation to cover its operating expenses and marketing services under the terms of the Company’s distribution agreements with Equitable Distributors.

 

Additional payments by Equitable Distributors to Selling broker-dealers.Equitable Distributors may pay, out of its assets, certain Selling broker-dealers and other financial intermediaries additional compensation in recognition of services provided or expenses incurred. Equitable Distributors may also pay certain Selling broker-dealers or other financial intermediaries additional compensation for enhanced marketing opportunities and other services (commonly referred to as “marketing allowances”). Services for which such payments are made may include, but are not limited to, the preferred placement of the Company’s products on a company and/or product list; sales personnel training; product training; business reporting; technological support; due diligence and related costs; advertising, marketing and related services; conference; and/or other support services, including some that may benefit the contractpolicy owner. Payments may be based on ongoing sales, on the aggregate account value attributable to contractspolicies sold through a Selling broker-dealer or such

71


payments may be a fixed amount. For certain selling broker-dealers, Equitable Distributors increases the marketing allowance as certain sales thresholds are met. Equitable Distributors may also make fixed payments to Selling broker-dealers, for example in connection with the initiation of a new relationship or the introduction of a new product.

 

Additionally, as an incentive for the financial professionals of Selling broker-dealers to promote the sale of the Company’s products, Equitable Distributors may increase the sales compensation paid to the Selling broker-dealer for a period of time (commonly referred to as “compensation enhancements”). Equitable Distributors also has entered into agreements with certain selling broker-dealers in which the selling broker-dealer agrees to sell certain of our contractspolicies exclusively.

 

These additional payments may serve as an incentive for Selling broker-dealers to promote the sale of the Company’s contractspolicies over contractspolicies and other products issued by other companies. Not all Selling broker-dealers receive additional payments, and the payments vary among Selling broker-dealers. The list below includes the names of Selling broker-dealers that we are aware (as of December 31, 2019) received additional payments. These additional payments ranged from$         to $        . The Company and its affiliates may also have other business relationships with Selling broker-dealers, which may provide an incentive for the Selling broker-dealers to promote the sale of the Company’s contractspolicies over contractspolicies and other products issued by other companies. The list below includes any such Selling broker-dealer. For more information, ask your financial professional.

 

75


1st Global Capital CorporationCorp.

Allstate Financial Services, LLC

American Portfolios Financial Services

Ameriprise Financial Services

BBVA Securities, Inc.

Cambridge Investment Research

Capital Investment Group

Centaurus Financial, Inc.

CETERA Financial Group

Citigroup Global Markets, Inc.

Citizens Investment Services

Commonwealth Financial Network

Community America Financial Solution

CUNA Brokerage Services

CUSO Financial Services, L.P.

DPL Financial Partners

Equity Services Inc.

Farmer’s Financial Solution

Geneos Wealth Management

Gradient Securities, LLC

H. Beck, Inc.

H.D. Vest Investment Securities, Inc.

Huntleigh Securities Corp.

Independent Financial Group, LLC

Infinex Investments Inc.

Investment Professionals, Inc.

Janney Montgomery Scott LLC

Kestra Investment Services, LLC

Key Investment Services LLC

Ladenburg Thalmann Advisor Network, LLC

Lincoln Financial Advisors Corp.

Lincoln Financial Securities Corp.

Lincoln Investment Planning

Lion Street Financial

LPL Network

Lucia Securities, LLC

MML Investors Services, LLC

Morgan Stanley Smith Barney

Mutual of Omaha Investment Services, Inc.

Park Avenue Securities, LLC

PlanMember Securities Corp.

PNC Investments

Primerica Financial Services, Inc.

Prospera Financial Services

Questar Capital Corporation

Raymond James

RBC Capital Markets Corporation

Robert W Baird & Company

Santander Securities CorporationCorp.

SIGMA Financial Corporation

Signator Investors, Inc.

The Advisor Group (AIG)

U.S. Bank Center

UBS Financial Services, Inc.

Valmark Securities, Inc.

Voya Financial Advisors, Inc.

Wells Fargo

Legal proceedings

The Company and its affiliates are parties to various legal proceedings. In our view, none of these proceedings would be considered material with respect to a policy owner’s interest in Separate Account FP, nor would any of these proceedings be likely to have a material adverse effect on Separate Account FP, our ability to meet our obligations under the policies, or the distribution of the policies.

 

 

7276


11.14. Financial statements of Separate Account FP and the Company

The financial statements of Separate Account FP, as well as the consolidated financial statements of the Company, are in the Statement of Additional Information (“SAI”).

The financial statements of the Company have relevance for the policies only to the extent that they bear upon the ability of the Company to meet its obligations under the policies. You may request an SAI by writing to our Administrative Office or by calling1-800-777-6510 (for U.S. residents) or 1-704-341-7000 (outside of the U.S.) and requesting to speak with a customer service representative.

77


15. Incorporation of certain documents by reference

 

 

The Company’s Annual Report on Form10-K for the period ended December 31, 2019 (the “Annual Report”) is considered to be part of this Prospectusprospectus because it is incorporated by reference.

 

The Company files reports and other information with the SEC, as required by law. You may read and copy this information at the SEC’s public reference facilities at Room 1580, 100 F Street, NE, Washington, DC 20549, or by accessing the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. The public may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at1-800-SEC-0330. Under the Securities Act of 1933, the Company has filed with the SEC a registration statement relating to the StructuredMarket Stabilizer Option® (the “Registration Statement”). This prospectus has been filed as part of the Registration Statement and does not contain all of the information set forth in the Registration Statement.

After the date of this prospectus and before we terminate the offering of the securities under the Registration Statement, all documents or reports we file with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (“Exchange Act”), will be considered to become part of this prospectus because they are incorporated by reference.

Any statement contained in a document that is or becomes part of this prospectus, will be considered changed or replaced for purposes of this prospectus if a statement contained in this prospectus changes or is replaced. Any statement that is considered to be a part of this prospectus because of its incorporation will be considered changed or replaced for the purpose of this prospectus if a statement contained in any other subsequently filed document that is considered to be part of this prospectus changes or replaces that statement. After that, only the statement that is changed or replaced will be considered to be part of this prospectus.

We file the Registration Statement and our Exchange Act documents and reports, including our Annual Report on Form 10-K and Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q, electronically according to EDGAR under CIK No.0000727920. The SEC maintains a website that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC. The address of the site is www.sec.gov.

Upon written or oral request, we will provide, free of charge, to each person to whom this prospectus is delivered, a copy of any or all of the documents considered to be part of this prospectus because they are incorporated herein. In accordance with SEC rules, we will provide copies of any exhibits specifically incorporated by reference into the text of the Exchange Act reports (but not any other exhibits). Requests for documents should be directed to Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company, 1290 Avenue of the Americas, New York, New York 10104. Attention: Corporate Secretary (telephone: (212) 554-1234). You can access our website at www.equitable.com.

78


16. Personalized illustrations

Illustrations of policy benefits

Hypothetical and personalized illustrations.  Illustrations are intended to show how different fees, charges and rates of return can affect the values available under a policy. Illustrations are based upon characteristics of a hypothetical insured person as well as other assumed factors. This type of illustration is called ahypothetical illustration.Illustrations can also be based upon some of the characteristics of the insured person under your policy as well as some other policy feature choices you make such as the face amount, death benefit option, premium payment amounts and assumed rates of return (within limits). This type of illustration is called apersonalized illustration.No illustration will ever show you the actual values available under your policy at any given point in time.This is because many factors affect these values including: (i) the insured person’s characteristics; (ii) policy features you choose; (iii) actual premium payments you make; (iv) loans or withdrawals you make; and (v) actual rates of return (including the actual fees and expenses) of the underlying portfolios in which your cash value is invested. Each hypothetical or personalized illustration is accompanied by an explanation of the assumptions on which that illustration is based. Because, as discussed below, these assumptions may differ considerably, you should carefully review all of the disclosure that accompanies each illustration.

Different kinds of illustrations.  Both the hypothetical illustrations in this prospectus and personalized illustrations can reflect the investment management fees and expenses incurred in 2019 (or expected to be incurred in 2020, if such amount is expected to be higher) of the available underlying portfolios in different ways. Anarithmetic illustrationuses the straight average of all of the available underlying portfolios’ investment management fees and expenses. Aweighted illustration computes the average of investment management fees and expenses based upon the aggregate assets in the Portfolios at the end of 2019. You may request a weighted illustration that computes the average of investment management fees and expenses of all portfolios. If you request, a weighted illustration can also illustrate an assumed percentage allocation of policy account values among the available underlying portfolios. Afundspecific illustrationuses only the investment management fees and expenses of a specific underlying portfolio. Ahistorical illustrationreflects the actual performance of one of the available underlying portfolios during a stated period. When reviewing a weighted or fund specific illustration you should keep in mind that the values shown may be higher than the values shown in other illustrations because the fees and expenses that are assumed may be lower than those assumed in other illustrations. When reviewing an historical illustration you should keep in mind that values based upon past performance are no indication of what the values will be based on future performance. You may also request a personalized illustration of the guaranteed interest option and the MSO that assumes a portion of net premiums allocated to the guaranteed interest option and MSO.

The effect of the expense limitation arrangements.The illustrations in this prospectus do not reflect the expense limitation arrangements. Personalized illustrations reflect the expense limitation arrangements that are in effect with respect to certain of the Portfolios. If these fees and expenses were not reduced to reflect the expense limitation arrangements, the values in the personalized illustrations would be lower.

79


Appendix I: MSO Early Distribution Adjustment Examples

Hypothetical Early Distribution Adjustment Examples

A. Examples of Early Distribution Adjustment to determine Segment Distribution Value

The following examples represent a policy owner who has invested in both Segments 1 and 2. They are meant to show how much value is available to a policy owner when there is a full surrender of the policy by the policy owner or other full distribution from these Segments as well as the impact of Early Distribution Adjustments on these Segments. The date of such hypothetical surrender or distribution is the Valuation Date specified below and, on that date, the examples assume 9 months remain until Segment 1’s maturity date and 3 months remain until Segment 2’s maturity date.

Explanation of formulas and derivation of Put Option Factors is provided in notes (1)–(3) below.

Division of MSO into
Segments
 

Segment 1

(Distribution after 3 months)

 

Segment 2

(Distribution after 9 months)

 Total 

Start Date

 3rd Friday of July, Calendar Year Y 3rd Friday of January, Calendar Year Y    

Maturity Date

 3rd Friday of July, Calendar Year Y+1 3rd Friday of January, Calendar Year Y+1    

Segment Term

 1 year 1 year    

Valuation Date

 3rd Friday of October, Calendar Year Y 3rd Friday of October, Calendar Year Y                  

Initial Segment Account

 1,000 1,000  2,000 

Variable Index Benefit Charge

 0.75% 0.75%    

Remaining Segment Term

 9 months / 12 months = 9/12 = 0.75 3 months / 12 months = 3/12 = 0.25    

Example I – The Index is down 10% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value –10% –10% Total 

Put Option Factor

 0.020673 0.003425    
 

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.020673 = 20.67

 

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 /(1 –0.0075)) = 5.67

 

Total EDA:

20.67 – 5.67 = 15.00

 

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.003425 = 3.43

 

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 -0.0075)) = 1.89

 

Total EDA:

3.43 – 1.89 = 1.54

 

Early Distribution Adjustment

      16.54 

Segment Distribution Value

 1000 – 15.00 = 985.00 1000 – 1.54 = 998.46  1,983.46 
% change in principal due to the Put Option Component -2.067% -0.343%    
% change in principal due to the Charge Refund Component 0.567% 0.189%    
Total % change in Segment Account Value due to the EDA -1.50% -0.15%    

I-1


Example II – The Index is up 10% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value 10% 10% Total 

Put Option Factor

 0.003229 0.000037    
 

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.003229 = 3.23

 

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

 

Total EDA:

3.23 – 5.67 = -2.44

 

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.000037 = 0.04

 

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

 

Total EDA:

0.04 – 1.89 = –1.85

 
Early Distribution Adjustment      –4.29 
Segment Distribution Value 1000 – (–2.44) = 1002.44 1000 – (–1.85) = 1001.85  2,004.29 

% change in principal due to

the Put Option Component

 -0.323% -.004%    

% change in principal due to

the Charge Refund Component

 0.567% 0.189%    

Total % change in Segment

Account Value due to the EDA

 0.244% 0.185%    

Example III – The Index is down 40% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value –40% –40% Total 

Put Option Factor

 0.163397 0.152132    
 

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.163397 = 163.40

 

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 /(1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

 

Total EDA:

163.40 – 5.67 = 157.73

 

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.152132 = 152.13

 

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 /(1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

 

Total EDA:

152.13 – 1.89 = 150.24

 
Early Distribution Adjustment      307.97 
Segment Distribution Value 1000 – 157.73 = 842.27 1000 – 150.24 = 849.76  1,692.03 

% change in principal due to

the Put Option Component

 -16.34% -15.213%    

% change in principal due to

the Charge Refund Component

 0.567% 0.189%    

Total % change in Segment

Account Value due to the EDA

 -15.773% -15.024%    

I-2


Example IV – The Index is up 40% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value 40% 40% Total 
Put Option Factor 0.000140 0.000000    
 

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.000140 = 0.14

 

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 /(1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

 

Total EDA:

0.14 – 5.67 = -5.53

 

Put Option Component:

1000 * .000000 = 0.00

 

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 /(1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

 

Total EDA:

0.00 – 1.89 = – 1.89

                     
Early Distribution Adjustment      –7.42 
Segment Distribution Value 1000 – (–5.53) = 1005.53 1000 – (–1.89) = 1001.89  2,007.42 

% change in principal due to

the Put Option Component

 -0.014% 0%    

% change in principal due to

the Charge Refund Component

 0.567% 0.189%    

Total % change in Segment

Account Value due to the EDA

 0.553% 0.189%    
(1)

Early Distribution Adjustment = (Segment Account Value) x [ (Put Option Factor) – (Number of days between Valuation Date and Maturity Date) /( Number of days between Start Date and Maturity Date) x ( 0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075) )]. The denominator of the charge refund component of this formula,i.e.,“(1-0.0075),” is an adjustment that is necessary in order for the pro rata refund of the Variable Index Benefit Charge to be based on the gross amount on which that charge was paid by the policy owner on the Segment Start Date.

(2)

Segment Distribution Value = (Segment Account Value) – (Early Distribution Adjustment).

(3)

Derivation of Put Option Factor: In practice, the Put Option Factor will be calculated based on a Black Scholes model, with input values which are consistent with current market prices. We will utilize implied volatility quotes – the standard measure used by the market to quote option prices – as an input to a Black Scholes model in order to derive the estimated market prices. The input values to the Black Scholes model that have been utilized to generate the hypothetical examples above are as follows: (1) Implied volatility – 25%; (2) Libor rate corresponding to remainder of segment term – 1.09% annually; (3) Index dividend yield – 2% annually.

B.

Example of an Early Distribution Adjustment corresponding to a loan allocated to Segments, for the Segment Distribution Values and Segment Account Values listed above for a change in Index Value of –40%

This example is meant to show the effect on a policy if, rather than a full distribution, you took a loan in the circumstances outlined in Example III above when the Index is down 40%. Thus the policy owner is assumed to have an initial Segment Account Value of 1,000 in each of Segment 1 and Segment 2. It is also assumed that 9 months remain until Segment 1’s maturity date and 3 months remain until Segment 2’s maturity date.

Loan Amount: 750

Loan Date: 3rd Friday of October, Calendar Year Y

Explanation of formulas is provided in notes (a) – (d) below.

The Index is down 40% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  –40%  –40%  Total
Segment Account Value before Loan  1,000.00  1,000.00  2,000.00
Loan Allocation(a)  373.34  376.66  750.00
Early Distribution Adjustment(b)  69.91  66.59  136.55
Segment Account Value after Loan(c)  556.73  556.72  1,113.45
Segment Distribution Value after Loan(d)  468.93  473.10  942.03
(a)

When more than one Segment is being used, we would allocate the loan between the Segments proportionately to the Segment Distribution Value in each. We take the Segment Distribution Value of each Segment (shown in Example III above) and divide it by the total Segment Distribution Values for Segments 1 and 2. This gives us the proportionate amount of the loan that should be allocated to each Segment. For example, for Segment 1, that would be 750 x (842.27/1,692.03) = 373.34.

I-3


(b)

This is the Early Distribution Adjustment that would be deducted from each Segment, as a result of the loan, based on the amount of the loan that is allocated to that Segment. It is equal to a percentage of the Early Distribution Adjustment that would apply if a full distribution from the Segment were being made, rather than only a partial distribution. This percentage would be 44.32545% for Segment 1 in this example: i.e., 373.34 (the amount of reduction in Segment Distribution Value as a result of the loan) divided by 842.27 (the Segment Distribution Value before the loan). Thus, the Early Distribution Adjustment that is deducted for Segment 1 due to the loan in this example would be 69.91 (i.e., 44.32545% of the 157.73 Early Distribution adjustment shown in Example III above that would apply if a full rather than only a partial distribution from the Segment were being made). Of this 69.91, 72.43 would be attributable to the Put Option Component and –2.51 would be attributable to the Charge Refund Component (which are calculated by applying 44.32545% to the 163.40 Put Option Component and the 5.67 Charge Refund Component shown in Example III). Similarly, the Early Distribution Adjustment deducted as a result of the loan from Segment 2 would be 66.59, of which 67.43 would be attributable to the Put Option Component and –0.84 would be attributable to the Charge Refund Component.

(c)

The Segment Account Value after Loan represents the Segment Account Value before Loan minus the Loan Allocation and the Early Distribution Adjustment. For example, for Segment 1, that would be 1,000 – 373.34 – 69.93 = 556.73.

(d)

Segment Distribution Value after Loan represents the amount a policy owner would receive from a Segment if they decided to surrender their policy immediately after this loan transaction. We would take thepre-loan Segment Distribution Value (shown in Example III above) and subtract the Loan Allocation. For example, for Segment 1, that would be 842.27 – 373.34 = 468.93.

I-4


Appendix II: Calculating the alternate death benefit

Using the guideline premium test:

The following examples demonstrate how we calculate the death benefit under Option A and Option B. The examples show an insured under two policies with the same face amount, but account values vary as shown. We assume that each insured is age 65 at the time of death and that there is no outstanding debt. We also assume that the owner selected the guideline premium test. Policy 1 shows what the death benefit would be for a policy with low account value. Policy 2 shows what the death benefit would be for a policy with a higher account value.

The alternate death benefit is equal to the policy account value times the death benefit percentage. If the account value in your policy is high enough, relative to the face amount, the life insurance benefit will automatically be greater than the Option A or Option B death benefit you have selected. In the example below, the alternate death benefit for Policy 1 is $42,000 ($35,000 x 120%) and the alternate death benefit for Policy 2 is $102,000 ($85,000 x 120%). The basic death benefit under Option A is equal to the face amount ($100,000) on the date of death. If the owner of Policy 1 elected Option A, the death benefit would equal the face amount, since the alternate death benefit amount ($42,000) is less than the face amount ($100,000). If the owner of Policy 2 elected Option A, the death benefit would be the alternate death benefit ($102,000), since the alternate death benefit ($102,000) is greater than the face amount ($100,000). The basic death benefit under Option B is equal to the face amount plus the policy account value on the date of death. Based on the example below, the basic death benefit under Option B is greater than the alternate death benefit for both Policy 1 (since $135,000 is greater than $42,000) and Policy 2 (since $185,000 is greater than $102,000).

    Policy 1     Policy 2 
Face Amount   $100,000      $100,000 
Policy Account Value on the Date of Death   $  35,000      $  85,000 
Death Benefit Percentage   120%      120% 
Death Benefit under Option A   $100,000      $102,000 
Death Benefit under Option B   $135,000      $185,000 

Using the cash value accumulation test:

The following examples demonstrate how we calculate the death benefit under Option A and Option B. The examples show an insured under two policies with the same face amount, but account values vary as shown. We assume that each insured is age 65 at the time of death, is a male preferrednon-tobacco user, and that there is no outstanding debt. We also assume that the owner selected the cash value accumulation test. Policy 1 shows what the death benefit would be for a policy with a low account value. Policy 2 shows what the death benefit would be for a policy with a higher account value.

The alternate death benefit is equal to the policy account value times a death benefit percentage which will be specified in your policy, and which varies based upon the insured’s attained age, sex and risk class. If the account value in your policy is high enough, relative to the face amount, the life insurance benefit will automatically be greater than the Option A or Option B death benefit you have selected. In the example below, the alternate death benefit for Policy 1 is $64,995 ($35,000 x 185.7%) and the alternate death benefit for Policy 2 is $157,845 ($85,000 x 185.7%). The basic death benefit under Option A is equal to the face amount on ($100,000) the date of death. If the owner of Policy 1 elected Option A, the death benefit would equal the face amount, since the alternate death benefit amount ($64,995) is less than the face amount ($100,000). If the owner of Policy 2 elected Option A, the death benefit would be the alternate death benefit ($102,000), since the alternate death benefit ($157,845) is greater than the face amount ($100,000). The basic death benefit under Option B is equal to the face amount plus the policy account value on the date of death. Based on the example below, the basic death benefit under Option B is greater than the alternate death benefit for both Policy 1 (since $135,000 is greater than $64,995) and Policy 2 (since $185,000 is greater than $157,845).

    Policy 1     Policy 2 
Face Amount   $100,000      $100,000 
Policy Account Value on the Date of Death   $  35,000      $  85,000 
Death Benefit Percentage   185.7%      185.7% 
Death Benefit under Option A   $100,000      $157,845 
Death Benefit under Option B   $135,000      $185,000 

II-1


Appendix III: Policy variations

You should note that your policy’s options, features and charges may vary from what is described in this prospectus depending on the approximate date on which your purchased your policy. You may not be able to change your policy or its features after issue. This Appendix reflects policy variations that differ from what is described in this prospectus but may have been in effect at the time your policy was issued. If you purchased your policy during the “Approximate Time Period” below, the noted variation may apply to you. Your policy may have been available in your state past the approximate end date indicated below.

For more information about particular options, features and charges available under your policy based on when you purchased it, please contact your financial professional and/or refer to your policy.

Approximate time PeriodFeatureVariation
November 18, 2013 to presentGuaranteed interest option (“GIO”) limitationThe Company will not exercise its right to limit the amounts that may be allocated and or transferred to the guaranteed interest option (“policy guaranteed interest option limitation”). All references to the policy guaranteed interest option limitation in this prospectus, and/or in your policy and/or in the endorsements to your policy, are not applicable.
June 28, 2010-November 18, 2013Guaranteed interest option (“GIO”) limitation

Any implementation by the Company on limiting the amounts that may be allocated and/or transferred to the guaranteed interest option (“policy guaranteed interest option limitation”) is not applicable.

June 28, 2010-January 31, 2014

California

Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider

Benefits received under this rider are intended to be treated, for Federal income tax purposes, as accelerated death benefits under section 101(g) of the Code on the life of a chronically ill insured person receiving qualified long-term care services within the meaning of section 7702B of the Code. It is not intended to be a qualified long-term care insurance contract under section 7702B(b) of the Internal Revenue Code. Charges for this benefit will generally be treated as distributions from the policy for federal income tax purposes.

June 28, 2010-February 14, 2013 and July 22, 2013-February 16, 2014Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider(Rider Form No. R06-90CT)
ConnecticutSee “Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider” under “Other benefits you can add by rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits”

Different monthly charge amounts and rules will apply.

The long-term care specified amount for this rider is as follows:

We will pay up to the long-term care specified amount for qualified long-term care services for the insured person for the duration of a period of coverage. The initial long-term care specified amount is equal to the face amount of the base policy at issue. This amount may change due to subsequent policy transactions and will be reduced at the end of a period of coverage to reflect benefits paid during that period of coverage. Any request for a decrease in the policy face amount will reduce the current long-term care specified amount to an

III-1


Approximate time PeriodFeatureVariation
Connecticut
(continued)

amount equal to the lesser of: (a) the new policy face amount; or (b) the long-term care specified amount immediately prior to the face amount decrease. Any partial withdrawal will reduce the current long-term care specified amount by the amount of the withdrawal, but not to less than the policy account value minus the withdrawal. The maximum monthly benefit in either case will then be equal to the new long-term care specified amount multiplied by the benefit percentage.

The maximum monthly benefit is equal to the long-term care specified amount multiplied by the benefit percentage you have selected. This amount may change due to subsequent policy transactions.
The maximum monthly payment limitation for this rider is as follows:
Each month, the monthly benefit payment (a portion of which will be applied to repay any outstanding policy loan) for qualified long term care services for the insured person is the lesser of:
1. the maximum monthly benefit (or lesser amount as requested, however, this may not be less than $500); or
2. the monthly equivalent of 200% of the per day limit allowed by the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act or “HIPAA” (We reserve the right to increase this percentage.) To find out the current per day limit allowed by HIPAA, go to www.irs.gov. We may also include this information in your policy’s annual report.
For purposes of determining the maximum monthly benefit, the benefit percentage options are 1% or 2% for issue ages 20-70 and 3% for issue ages 20-55.

Benefits are payable once we receive: 1) a written certification from a U.S. licensed health care practitioner that the insured person is a chronically ill individual who is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the rest of his or her life; 2) proof that the “elimination period,” as discussed below, has been satisfied; and 3) written notice of claim and proof of loss in a form satisfactory to us. In order to continue monthly benefit payments, we require recertification by a U.S. licensed health care practitioner every twelve months from the date of the initial or subsequent certification that the insured is still a chronically ill individual receiving qualified

III-2


Approximate time PeriodFeatureVariation
Connecticut
(continued)
long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the remainder of his or her life. Otherwise, unless earlier terminated due to a change in the status of the insured, benefit payments will terminate at the end of the twelve month period. This rider may not cover all of the costs associated with long-term care services during the insured person’s period of coverage.
The following information replaces the “Elimination Period” subsection in this section.

•   Elimination period. The Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider has an elimination period that is the required period of time while the rider is in force that must elapse before any benefit is available to the insured person under this rider. The elimination period is 90 days, beginning on the first day of any qualified long term care services that are provided to the insured person. Generally, benefits under this rider will not be paid until the elimination period is satisfied; and benefits will not be retroactively paid for the elimination period. The 90 days do not have to be continuous, but the elimination period must be satisfied within a consecutive period of 24 months starting with the month in which such services are first provided. If the elimination period is not satisfied within this time period, you must submit a new claim for benefits under this rider. This means that a new elimination period of 90 days must be satisfied within a new 24 month period. The elimination period must be satisfied only once while this rider is in effect.

The Nonforfeiture benefit is not available.
The Maximum total benefit is not applicable.
The Acceleration percentage concept is not applicable.
Death benefit option changes are not permitted.
The “Extension of Benefits” feature is not available.
See “Tax treatment of living benefits rider or Long Term Care ServicesTM Rider under a policy with the applicable rider” in “Tax Information”The tax information for the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider below replaces, in its entirety, the tax information in this section:
Benefits received under the Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider are intended to be treated, for Federal income tax purposes, as accelerated death benefits under section 101(g) of the Code on the life of a chronically ill insured person receiving qualified long-term care services within the meaning of section 7702B of the Code. The benefits are intended to

III-3


Approximate time PeriodFeatureVariation
Connecticut
(continued)
qualify for exclusion from income subject to the limitations of the Code with respect to a particular insured person. Receipt of these benefits may be taxable. Generally income exclusion for all payments from all sources with respect to an insured person will be limited to the higher of the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (“HIPAA”) per day limit or actual costs incurred by the taxpayer on behalf of the insured person.
Charges for the Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider may be considered distributions for income tax purposes, and may be taxable to the owner to the extent not considered a nontaxable return of premiums paid for the life insurance policy. See above for tax treatment of distributions to you. Charges for the Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider are generally not considered deductible for income tax purposes. The Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider is not intended to be a qualified long-term care insurance contract under section 7702B(b) of the Code.
Any adjustments made to your policy death benefit, face amount and other values as a result of Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider benefits paid will also generally cause us to make adjustments with respect to your policy under federal income tax rules for testing premiums paid, your tax basis in your policy, your overall premium limits and the seven-pay period and seven-pay limit for testing modified endowment contract status.
February 15, 2013-July 21, 2013Long Term Care ServicesSM RiderRider Form No. R12-10CT
ConnecticutIn Connecticut, we refer to this rider as the “Long-Term Care Benefits Rider”.
See “Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider” under “Other benefits you can add by rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits”

The following information replaces first three paragraphs in this section.

The rider provides for the acceleration of all or part of the policy death benefit as a payment of a portion of the policy’s death benefit each month as a result of the insured person being a chronically ill individual who is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and who will require continuous care for the remainder of his or her life. Benefits accelerated under this rider will be treated as a lien against the policy death benefit unless benefits are being paid under the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. While this rider is in force and before any continuation of coverage under the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit, if elected, policy face amount increases and death benefit option changes from Option A to Option B are not permitted. For a more complete description of the terms used in this section and conditions of this rider, please consult your policy rider form.

III-4


Approximate time PeriodFeatureVariation

Connecticut

(continued)

An individual qualifies as “chronically ill” if they have been certified by a licensed health care practitioner as being expected to require lifetime confinement in a long-term care facility due to injury or sickness; or requiring substantial supervision to protect such individual from threats to health and safety due to cognitive impairment.

“Qualified long-term care services” means necessary diagnostic, preventive, therapeutic, curing, mitigating, and rehabilitative services that are required by a chronically ill individual and provided in accordance with a plan of care prescribed by a U.S. licensed health care practitioner. Qualified long-term care services do not include home health care services.

Benefits are payable once we receive: 1) a written certification from a U.S. licensed health care practitioner that the insured person is a chronically ill individual who is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the rest of his or her life; 2) proof that the “elimination period,” as discussed below, has been satisfied; and 3) written notice of claim and proof of loss in a form satisfactory to us. In order to continue monthly benefit payments, we require recertification by a U.S. licensed health care practitioner every twelve months from the date of the initial or subsequent certification that the insured person is still a chronically ill individual receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the remainder of his or her life. Otherwise, unless earlier terminated due to a change in status of the insured or payout of the maximum total benefit amount, benefit payments will terminate at the end of the twelve month period. This rider may not cover all of the costs associated with long-term care services during the insured person’s period of coverage.

The “Extension of Benefits” feature is not available.
Also see “Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider” policy variations that may apply in Appendices III and IV.
The following information replaces the “Elimination Period” subsection in this section.

•  Elimination period.The Long-Term Care Benefits Rider has an elimination period that is the required period of time while the rider is in force that must elapse before any benefit is available to the insured person under this rider. The

III-5


Approximate time PeriodFeatureVariation

Connecticut

(continued)

elimination period is 90 days, beginning on the first day of any qualified long-term care services that are provided to the insured person. Generally, benefits under this rider will not be paid until the elimination period is satisfied, and benefits will not be retroactively paid for the elimination period. The 90 days do not have to be continuous, but the elimination period must be satisfied within a consecutive period of 24 months starting with the month in which such services are first provided. If the elimination period is not satisfied within this time period, you must submit a new claim for benefits under this rider. This means that a new elimination period of 90 days must be satisfied within a new 24 month period. The elimination period must be satisfied only once while this rider is in effect.

June 28, 2010-October 20, 2013

New York

Long Term Care ServicesSM RiderRider Form No. R11-80NY (9/20/11-10/20/13)
Rider Form No. R06-90NY (6/28/10-9/20/11)
See “Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider” under “Other benefits you can add by rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits”The maximum monthly payment limitation for this rider is as follows:
Each month, the monthly benefit payment (a portion of which will be applied to repay any outstanding policy loan) for qualified long-term care services for the insured person is the lesser of:

1. the maximum monthly benefit (or lesser amount as requested, however, this may not be less than $500); or

2. the monthly equivalent of 100% of the per day limit allowed by the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act or “HIPAA” (We reserve the right to increase this percentage.) To find out the current per day limit allowed by HIPAA, go to www.irs.gov. We may also include this information in your policy’s annual report.

Benefits are payable once we receive: 1) a written certification from a U.S. licensed health care practitioner that the insured person is a chronically ill individual who is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the rest of his or her life; 2) proof that the “elimination period,” as discussed below, has been satisfied; and 3) written notice of claim and proof of loss in a form satisfactory to us. In order to continue monthly benefit payments, we require recertification by a U.S. licensed health care practitioner every twelve months from the date of the initial or subsequent certification that the insured is still a chronically ill individual receiving qualified

III-6


Approximate time PeriodFeatureVariation

New York

(continued)

long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the remainder of his or her life. Otherwise, unless earlier terminated due to a change in the status of the insured or payout of the maximum total benefit amount, benefit payments will terminate at the end of the twelve month period. This rider may not cover all of the costs associated with long-term care services during the insured person’s period of coverage.
The following information replaces the “Elimination Period” subsection in this section.

•  Elimination period. The Long-Term care Benefits Rider has an elimination period that is the required period of time while the rider is in force that must elapse before any benefit is available to the insured person under this rider. The elimination period is 90 days, beginning on the first day of any qualified long-term care services that are provided to the insured person. Generally, benefits under this rider will not be paid until the elimination period is satisfied; however, benefits will be retroactively paid for the elimination period. The 90 days do not have to be continuous, but the elimination period must be satisfied within a consecutive period of 24 months starting with the month in which such services are first provided. If the elimination period is not satisfied within this time period, you must submit a new claim for benefits under this rider. This means that a new elimination

period of 90 days must be satisfied within a new 24 month period. The elimination period must be satisfied only once while this rider is in effect.

Benefits received under this rider are intended to be treated, for Federal income tax purposes, as accelerated death benefits under section 101(g) of the Code on the life of a chronically ill insured person receiving qualified long-term care services within the meaning of section 7702B of the Code. It is not intended to be a qualified long-term care insurance contract under section 7702B(b) of the Internal Revenue Code. Charges for this benefit will generally be treated as distributions from the policy for federal income tax purposes.

III-7


Approximate time PeriodFeatureVariation

New York

(continued)

The Nonforfeiture benefit is not available.

The Maximum total benefit is not applicable.

The Acceleration percentage concept is not applicable.
Death benefit option changes are not permitted.

The “Extension of Benefits” feature is not available.

June 28, 2010-May 20, 2012

Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider

Rider Form No. R06-90

Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider Monthly charge

Charge per $1,000 of the amount for which we are at risk (our amount “at risk” for this rider is the long-term care specified amount minus your policy account value, but not less than zero):

Highest: $1.18

Lowest: $0.08

Representative: $0.22

This representative amount is the rate we guarantee for a representative insured male age 35 at issue in the preferred elite non-tobacco user risk class. This charge varies based on the individual characteristics of the insured and may not be representative of the charge that you will pay. Your financial professional can provide you with more information about these charges as they relate to the insured’s particular characteristics.

Long-Term Care Specified Amount

Equal to the face amount of the base policy at issue, subject to change due to subsequent policy transactions and will be reduced at the end of a period of coverage to reflect benefits paid during that period of coverage.

The effect of a period of coverage on policy values

The total of monthly benefit payments will be treated as a lien against the policy death benefit, the policy account value and the cash surrender value.

Qualified Long-Term Care Services

Do not include treatment or care for a mental, psychoneurotic, or personality disorder without evidence of organic disease (Alzheimer’s Disease and senile dementia are not excluded from coverage).

III-8


Approximate time PeriodFeatureVariation

New York

(continued)

June 28, 2010-May 20, 2012

Change of death benefit optionYou may not change the death benefit option under the policy while the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider is in effect.
Tax QualificationLong-Term Care ServicesSMRider.Benefits received under this rider are intended to be treated, for Federal income tax purposes, as accelerated death benefits under Section 101(g) of the Code on the life of a chronically ill insured person receiving qualified long-term care services within the meaning of section 7702B of the Code. It is not intended to be a qualified long-term care insurance contract under section 7702B(b) of the Internal Revenue Code. Charges for this benefit will generally be treated as distributions from the policy for federal income tax purposes.

Other variations

The Nonforfeiture is not available.

The Maximum total benefit is not available.
Death benefit option changes are not permitted.
June 28, 2010-May 1, 2011Cash Value Plus Rider (RiderForm No. R07-80 or state variation)

This rider is no longer available for purchase. If you elected this rider when you purchased your contract, your policy had to have a minimum face amount of $1 million with an initial annualized planned periodic premium of at least $50,000.

If this rider was elected, there was aone-time charge of $250 deducted in a lump sum from the initial net premium, after deduction of the premium charge.

The rider will terminate on the earliest of the following dates: 1) The end of the eighth policy year; or 2) The date the policy ends without value at the end of the Grace Period or otherwise terminates.
If the policy is surrendered in full while the rider is in effect, any refund of the premium charge and reduction in the surrender charge will not be subject to a cumulativepremium-based cap on the rider benefits.

III-9


Appendix IV: State policy availability and/or variations of certain features and benefits

The following information is a summary of the states where certain policies or certain features and/or benefits are either not available as of the date of this prospectus or vary from the policy’s features and benefits as previously described in this prospectus. Certain features and/or benefits may have been approved in your state after your policy was issued and cannot be added. Please contact your financial professional for more information about availability in your state. See also Appendix III earlier in this prospectus for information about the availability of certain features under your policy.

States where certain policies features and/or benefits are not available or vary:

StateFeatures and BenefitsAvailability or Variation
CaliforniaLong Term Care ServicesSM RiderIn California, we refer to this rider as the “Comprehensive Long-Term Care Rider” (Rider Form No. R12-10CA).
See “Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider” under “Other benefits you can add by rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits”The following sentence replaces the first sentence of the fourth paragraph of this section in its entirety:
“Benefits are payable once we receive: 1) a written certification from a U.S. licensed health care practitioner that the insured person is a chronically ill individual; 2) a plan of care prescribed by a licensed health care practitioner or a multidisciplinary team under medical direction which describes the insured person’s needs and specifies the type and frequency of qualified long-term care services required by the insured person; 3) proof that the “elimination period,” as discussed below, has been satisfied; and 4) written notice of claim and proof of loss in a form satisfactory to us.

Nonforfeiture Benefit

The first two paragraphs of the “Nonforfeiture Benefit” subsection are replaced in their entirety with the following:

For a higher monthly charge, you can elect the Comprehensive Long-Term Care Rider with the Nonforfeiture Benefit. The Nonforfeiture Benefit may continue coverage under the rider in a reduced benefit amount in situations where (a) the Comprehensive Long-Term Care Rider would otherwise terminate; (b) you have not already received benefits (including any loan repayments) that equal or exceed the total charges deducted for the rider; and (c) your policy and Comprehensive Long-Term Care Rider were inforce for at least four policy years.
While the Nonforfeiture Benefit is in effect, all of the provisions of the Comprehensive Long-Term Care Rider remain applicable to you. The maximum total Nonforfeiture Benefit will be the greater of:

(a) Three month’s maximum monthly benefit and

(b) The sum of all charges deducted for the Comprehensive Long-Term Care Rider (with the Nonforfeiture Benefit). This amount excludes any charges that may have previously been waived while rider benefits were being paid.

Also see “Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider” policy variations that may apply earlier in Appendix III.

IV-1


StateFeatures and BenefitsAvailability or Variation
ConnecticutSee “Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider” under “Other benefits you can add by rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits”The following information replaces first three paragraphs in this section:
The rider provides for the acceleration of all or part of the policy death benefit as a payment of a portion of the policy’s death benefit each month as a result of the insured person being a chronically ill individual who is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and who will require continuous care for the remainder of his or her life. Benefits accelerated under this rider will be treated as a lien against the policy death benefit unless benefits are being paid under the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit. While this rider is in force and before any continuation of coverage under the optional Nonforfeiture Benefit, if elected, policy face amount increases and death benefit option changes from Option A to Option B are not permitted.
An individual qualifies as “chronically ill” if they have been certified by a licensed health care practitioner as being expected to require lifetime confinement in a long-term care facility or in a home due to injury or sickness; or requiring substantial supervision to protect such individual from threats to health and safety due to cognitive impairment.
Benefits are payable once we receive: 1) a written certification from a U.S. licensed health care practitioner that the insured person is a chronically ill individual who is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the rest of his or her life; 2) proof that the “elimination period,” as discussed below, has been satisfied; and 3) written notice of claim and proof of loss in a form satisfactory to us. In order to continue monthly benefit payments, we require recertification by a U.S. licensed health care practitioner every twelve months from the date of the initial or subsequent certification that the insured person is still a chronically ill individual receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the remainder of his or her life. Otherwise, unless earlier terminated due to a change in status of the insured or payout of the maximum total benefit amount, benefit payments will terminate at the end of the twelve month period. This rider may not cover all of the costs associated with long-term care services during the insured person’s period of coverage.
For a more complete description of the terms used in this section and conditions of this rider, please consult your rider policy form.
The “Extension of Benefits” feature is not available.
Also see “Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider” policy variations that may apply earlier in Appendix III.

IV-2


StateFeatures and BenefitsAvailability or Variation

Florida

Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider

In Florida, we refer to this rider as the “Long Term Care Insurance Rider” (Rider Form No. R12-10FL).

See “Long Term Care Services RiderSM” in “Risk/benefit summary: Charges and expenses you will pay”The monthly charge per $1,000 of the amount for which we are at risk is as follows:

With the optional Nonforfeiture benefit:

Highest: $1.19

Lowest: $0.07

Representative: $0.17

Without the optional Nonforfeiture benefit:

Highest: $1.19

Lowest: $0.07

Representative: $0.17

See “Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider” under “Other benefits you can add by rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits”

Elimination Period

The “Elimination Period” subsection is replaced in its entirety with the following:

    Elimination Period. The Long-Term Care Insurance Rider has an elimination period that is the required period of time while the rider is in force that must elapse before any benefit is available to the insured person under this rider. The elimination period is 90 days, beginning on the first day of any qualified long-term care services that are provided to the insured person. Generally, benefits under this rider will not be paid until the elimination period is satisfied, and benefits will not be retroactively paid for the elimination period. The elimination period can be satisfied by any combination of days of a long-term care facility stay or days of home health care, and the days do not have to be continuous. There is no requirement that the elimination period must be satisfied within a consecutive period of 24 months starting with the month in which such services are first provided. The elimination period must be satisfied only once while this rider is in effect.
See “Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider” under “Other benefits you can add by rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits”

Period of Coverage

The first paragraph of the “Period of coverage” subsection is replaced in its entirety with the following:

    Period of coverage. The period of coverage is the period of time during which the insured receives services that are covered under the Long-Term Care Insurance Rider and for which benefits are payable. This begins on the first day covered services are received after the end of the elimination period. A period of coverage will end on the earliest of the following dates:
1. the date we receive the notice of release which must be sent to us when the insured person is no longer receiving qualified long-term care services;
2. the date we determine the insured person is no longer eligible to receive qualified long-term care services under this rider;

IV-3


StateFeatures and BenefitsAvailability or Variation

Florida

(continued)

3. the date you request that we terminate benefit payments under this rider;
4. the date the accumulated benefit lien amount equals the maximum total benefit (or if your coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture benefit, the date the maximum total Nonforfeiture Benefit has been paid out);
5. the date you surrender the policy (except to the extent of any Nonforfeiture Benefit you may have under the rider);
6. the date we make a payment under the living benefits rider (for terminal illness) if it occurs before coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture Benefit; or
7. the date of death of the insured person.

Preexisting condition

No benefits will be provided under this rider during the first 180 days from the effective date of the policy for long-term care services received by the insured person due to a preexisting condition. However, each day of services received by the insured person for a preexisting condition during the first 180 days that this rider is in force will count toward satisfaction of the elimination period.

See “Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider” under “Optional rider charges” in “More information about certain policy charges”The following paragraph replaces the first paragraph in this section in its entirety:

Long-Term CareInsurance Rider. If you choose this rider without the Nonforfeiture Benefit, on a guaranteed basis, we may deduct between $0.07 and $1.19 per $1,000 of the amount for which we are at risk under the rider from your policy account value each month. If you choose this rider with the Nonforfeiture Benefit, on a guaranteed basis, we may deduct between $0.07 and $1.19 per $1,000 of the amount for which we are at risk under the rider. We will deduct this charge until the insured reaches age 121 while the rider is in effect, but not when rider benefits are being paid. The amount at risk under the rider depends on the death benefit option selected under the policy. For policies with death benefit Option A, the amount at risk for the rider is the lesser of (a) the current policy face amount, minus the policy account value (but not less than zero); and (b) the current long-term care specified amount. For policies with death benefit Option B, the amount at risk for the rider is the current long-term care specified amount. The current monthly charges for this rider may be lower than the maximum monthly charges.

IV-4


StateFeatures and BenefitsAvailability or Variation
New YorkSee “Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider” under “Other benefits you can add by rider” in “More information about policy features and benefits”

The following paragraph replaces the third paragraph in this section in its entirety:

Benefits are payable once we receive: 1) a written certification from a U.S. licensed health care practitioner that the insured person is a chronically ill individual who is receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the rest of his or her life; 2) proof that the “eligibility period,” as discussed below, has been satisfied; and 3) written notice of claim and proof of loss in a form satisfactory to us. In order to continue monthly benefit payments, we require recertification by a U.S. licensed health care practitioner every twelve months from the date of the initial or subsequent certification that the insured is still a chronically ill individual receiving qualified long-term care services in accordance with a plan of care and will require continuous care for the remainder of his or her life.

Otherwise, unless earlier terminated due to a change in the status of the insured or payout of the maximum total benefit amount, benefit payments will terminate at the end of the twelve month period. We also, at our own expense, may have the insured person examined as often as we may reasonably require during the period of coverage, but not more frequently than every 90 days. This rider may not cover all of the costs associated with long-term care services during the insured person’s period of coverage.

Maximum monthly payments
The maximum monthly payment limitation for this rider is as follows:
Each month, the monthly benefit payment (a portion of which will be applied to repay any outstanding policy loan) for qualified long term care services for the insured person is the lesser of:

1. the maximum monthly benefit (or lesser amount as requested, however, this may not be less than $500); or

2. the monthly equivalent of 100% of the per day limit allowed by the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act or “HIPAA”. To find out the current per day limit allowed by HIPAA, go to www.irs.gov. We may also include this information in your policy’s annual report.
At issue, the maximum monthly benefit is equal to the long term care specified amount multiplied by the benefit percentage selected. After that, the maximum monthly benefit is equal to the maximum total benefit as of the first day of the period of coverage multiplied by the benefit percentage selected, and will not change thereafter.

Elimination period

The “Elimination Period” subsection is renamed “Eligibility Period”. Accordingly, all references to the “elimination period” are replaced with references to the “eligibility period”. Once the eligibility period has been satisfied, benefits will be retroactively paid for the eligibility period.

Period of coverage

The first paragraph of the “Period of coverage” subsection is replaced in its entirety with the following:

IV-5


StateFeatures and BenefitsAvailability or Variation

New York

(continued)

    Period of coverage. The period of coverage is the period of time during which the insured person receives services that are covered under the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider and for which benefits are payable. This begins on the first day covered services are received after the end of the eligibility period, although benefits are payable retroactively to the beginning of the eligibility period. A period of coverage will end on the earliest of the following dates:
1. the date we receive the notice of release which must be sent to us when the insured person is no longer receiving continuous qualified long-term care services;
2. the date we determine you are no longer eligible to receive benefits under this rider;
3. the date you request that we terminate benefit payments under this rider;
4. the date the accumulated benefit lien amount equals the maximum total benefit;
5. the date you surrender the policy;

6. the date we make a payment under the accelerated death benefits rider (for terminal illness); and

7. the date of death of the insured person.

The effects of a period of coverage ending as described in the “Period of Coverage” subsection also apply if the

contract owner exercises the fixed paid-up option during the period of coverage. It is not anticipated that there will be more than one period of coverage for the term of this rider.

Fixed paid-up option

If you exercise the fixed paid-up option of your policy, your coverage under this policy will be continued in a reduced amount and there will be no further charges for this rider.

If such exercise occurs during the period of coverage, the accumulated benefit lien amount will be reset to zero after policy values have been reduced as described in the Period of Coverage” subsection. The face amount of paid-up insurance will be whatever the resulting net cash surrender value will buy when applied as a net single premium.
If benefits have previously been paid under this rider, the maximum monthly benefit will not change. If benefits have not previously been paid under this rider, the maximum monthly benefit will be equal to the maximum total benefit as determined immediately before the fixed paid-up option went into effect multiplied by the benefit percentage.
When the fixed paid-up option goes into effect, the maximum total benefit will be re-determined as the sum of all monthly charges deducted for this rider since policy issue, excluding any such charges that were not deducted while rider benefits were being paid. This maximum total benefit will be reduced, but not below zero, by all monthly benefit payments made under this rider, including any loan repayments. However, the resulting maximum total benefit will not exceed the lesser of (a) the maximum total benefit of this rider as determined immediately before the fixed paid-up option went into effect, and (b) the face amount of paid-up insurance multiplied by the acceleration percentage.
If you elect to continue coverage as described above, you will receive additional information regarding this benefit, including the available maximum total benefit.

IV-6


StateFeatures and BenefitsAvailability or Variation

New York

(continued)

Other variations

The “Extension of Benefits” feature is not available.

The Nonforfeiture benefit is not available.
The pre-existing condition limitation does not apply.
See “Tax treatment of living benefits rider or Long Term Care ServicesSM Rider under a policy with the applicable rider” in “Tax Information”The benefits paid under this rider are intended to be treated for Federal income tax purposes as accelerated death benefits under section 101 (g) of the Code on the life of a chronically ill insured receiving qualified long-term care services within the meaning of section 7702B of the Code. The benefit is intended to qualify for exclusion from income within the limits of those provisions of the Code in effect at the issuance of this rider. Receipt of these benefits may be taxable. Charges for this rider may be considered distributions for income tax purposes, and may be taxable. This rider is not intended to be a qualified long-term care insurance contract under section 7702B(b) of the Code.
The long term care specified amount for this rider will not be increased by operation of section 7702 of the Code.

IV-7


Requesting more information

The Statement of Additional Information (“SAI”), dated May 1, 2020, is incorporated into this prospectus by reference and is available upon request, free of charge, by calling our toll free number at1-800-777-6510 (for U.S. residents) or 1-704-341-7000 (outside of the U.S.) and requesting to speak with a customer service representative. You may also request one by writing to our operations center at P.O. Box 1047, Charlotte, NC 28201-1047. The SAI includes additional information about the registrant. You can make inquiries about your policy and request personalized illustrations by calling our toll free number at1-800-777-6510 (for U.S. residents) or 1-704-341-7000 (outside of the U.S.), or asking your financial professional.

You may visit the SEC’s web site at www.sec.gov to view the SAI and other information (including other parts of a registration statement) that relates to the Separate Account and the policies. You can also review and copy information about the Separate Account, including the SAI, at the SEC’s Public Reference Room in Washington, D.C. or by electronic request at publicinfo@sec.gov or by writing the SEC’s Public Reference Section, at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. You may have to pay a duplicating fee. To find out more about the Public Reference Room, call the SEC at1-202-551-8090.

SEC File Number:811-04335

Statement of Additional Information

Table of contents

Page
The Company2
Ways we pay policy proceeds2
Distribution of the policies2
Underwriting a policy2
Insurance regulation that applies to the Company2
Custodian2
Independent registered public accounting firm2
Financial statements2

#643317


Market Stabilizer Option® Available Under

Certain Variable Life Insurance Policies Issued by
Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company

Prospectus dated May 1, 2020

Please read and keep this Prospectus for future reference. It contains important information that you should know before purchasing or taking any other action under your policy. This Prospectus supersedes all prior Prospectuses. Also, this Prospectus must be read along with the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus. This Prospectus is in addition to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus and all information in the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus continues to apply unless addressed by this Prospectus.

Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company (the “Company”, “we”, “our” and “us”), formerly AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company) issues the Market Stabilizer Option® described in this Prospectus. The Market Stabilizer Option® is available only under certain variable life insurance policies that we offer and may not be available through your financial professional.

Among the many terms associated with the Market Stabilizer Option® are:

Index-Linked Return for approximately a one year period tied to the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index, which excludes dividends as described below.

Index-Linked Return will be applied at the end of the period (your Segment Term) on the Segment Maturity Date and only to amounts remaining within the segment until the Segment Maturity Date. The Index-Linked Return will not be applied before the Segment Maturity Date.

The Index-Linked Return could be positive, zero or in certain circumstances negative as described below. In the event that the S&P 500 Price Return index sustains a 100% loss, the maximum loss of principal would be 75%.Therefore, there is the possibility of a negative return on this investment at the end of your Segment Term, which could result in a significant loss of principal.

An Early Distribution Adjustment will be made for distributions (including deductions) from the Segment Account Value before the Segment Maturity Date.Any Early Distribution Adjustment that is made will cause you to lose principal through the application of a Put Option Factor, as explained later in this Prospectus, and that loss could potentially be substantial.Therefore you should carefully consider whether to make such distributions and/or maintain enough value in your Unloaned Guaranteed Interest Option (“Unloaned GIO”) and/or variable investment options to cover your monthly deductions. The Unloaned GIO is the portion of the Guaranteed Interest Option (“GIO”) that is not being held to secure policy loans you have taken. As described later in this Prospectus, we will attempt to maintain a reserve (Charge Reserve Amount) to cover your monthly deductions, but it is possible that the Charge Reserve Amount will be insufficient to cover your monthly deductions.

These are only some of the terms associated with the Market Stabilizer Option®. Please read this Prospectus for more details about the Market Stabilizer Option®. Also, this Prospectus must be read along with the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus as well as the appropriate variable life insurance policy and policy rider for this option. Please refer to page 4 of this Prospectus for a Definitions section that discusses these and other terms associated with the Market Stabilizer Option®.Please refer to page 7 of this Prospectus for a discussion of risk factors.

Other Equitable policies.We offer a variety of fixed and variable life insurance policies which offer policy features, including investment options, that are different from those offered by this Prospectus. Not every policy or feature is offered through your financial professional. You can contact us to find out more about any other insurance policy.

What is the Market Stabilizer Option®?

The Market Stabilizer Option® (“MSO”) is an investment option available under certain variable life insurance policies. The option provides for participation in the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index, which excludes dividends (the “Index”) up to the Growth Cap Rate that we set on the Segment Start Date. While the Growth Cap Rate is set at

the Company’s sole discretion, the Growth Cap Rate will not change during a Segment Term and the Growth Cap Rate will always be at least 6%. On the Segment Maturity Date, we will apply the Index-Linked Rate of Return to the Segment Account Value based on the performance of the Index. If the performance of the Index has been positive for the Segment Term and equal to or below the Growth Cap Rate, we will apply to the Segment Account Value an Index-Linked Rate of Return equal to the full Index performance. If the performance of the Index has been positive for the Segment Term and above the Growth Cap Rate, we will apply an Index-Linked Rate of Return equal to the Growth Cap Rate. If the Index has negative performance, the Index-Linked Rate of Return will be 0% unless the Index performance goes below-25% for the Segment Term. In that case only the negative performance in excess of-25% will be applied to the Segment Account Value and you bear the entire risk of loss of principal for the portion of negative performance that exceeds-25%. Please see “Index-Linked Return” in “Description of the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this Prospectus.

Please note that you will not be credited with any positive Index performance with respect to amounts that are removed from a Segment prior to the Segment Maturity Date. Even when the Index performance has been positive, such early removals will cause you to lose some principal. Please see “Early Distribution Adjustment” later in this Prospectus.

Although under the appropriate variable life insurance policy, we reserve the right to apply a transfer charge up to $25 for each transfer among your investment options, there are no transfer charges for transfers into or out of the MSO Holding Account. Please note that once policy account value has been swept from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment, transfers into or out of that Segment before its Segment Maturity Date will not be permitted.

The Market Stabilizer Option® is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Standard & Poor’s (“S&P”) or its third party licensors. Neither S&P nor its third party licensors makes any representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of the Market Stabilizer Option® or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Market Stabilizer Option® particularly or the ability of the S&P 500 Price Return index (the “Index”) to track general stock market performance. S&P’s and its third party licensor’s only relationship to the Company is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of S&P and the third party licensors and of the Index which is determined, composed and calculated by S&P or its third party licensors without regard to the Company or the Market Stabilizer Option®. S&P and its third party licensors have no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the owners of the Market Stabilizer Option® into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the Index. Neither S&P nor its third party licensors is responsible for and has not participated in the determination of the prices and amount of the Market Stabilizer Option® or the timing of the issuance or sale of the Market Stabilizer Option® or in the determination or calculation of the equation by which the Market Stabilizer Option® is to be converted into cash. S&P has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Market Stabilizer Option®.

The SEC has not approved or disapproved these securities or determined if this Prospectus is accurate or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense. The contracts are not insured by the FDIC or any other agency. They are not deposits or other obligations of any bank and are not bank guaranteed. They are subject to investment risks and possible loss of principal.

EVM-442 (5/20)Cat # 142561
NB#844256

IL OPTIMIZER


Contents of this Prospectus

Market Stabilizer Option®

The Company

3

1. Definitions

4

2. Fee Table Summary

6

3. Risk Factors

7

4. Description of the Market Stabilizer Option®

8

5. Distribution of the policies

17

6. Incorporation of certain documents by reference

18
Appendices
I

Early Distribution Adjustment Examples

I-1

When we address the reader of this Prospectus with words such as “you” and “your,” we mean the person who has the right or responsibility that the Prospectus is discussing at that point. This is usually the policy owner.

2


The Company  

We are Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company, a New York stock life insurance corporation. We have been doing business since 1859. The Company is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of Equitable Holdings, Inc. No other company has any legal responsibility to pay amounts that the Company owes under the policies. The Company is solely responsible for paying all amounts owed to you under your policy.

Equitable Holdings, Inc. and its consolidated subsidiaries managed approximately $734.4 billion in assets as of December 31, 2019. For more than 160 years the Company has been among the largest insurance companies in the United States. We are licensed to sell life insurance and annuities in all fifty states, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Our home office is located at 1290 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10104.

How to reach us

Please refer to the “How to reach us” section of the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information regarding contacting us and communicating your instructions. We also have specific forms that we recommend you use for electing the MSO and any MSO transactions.

3


1. Definitions

Charge Reserve Amount — A minimum amount of policy account value in the Unloaned GIO that you are required to maintain in order to approximately cover the estimated monthly charges for the policy (including, but not limited to, the policy’s monthly cost of insurance charge, the policy’s monthly administrative charge, the policy’s monthly mortality and expense risk charge, the MSO’s monthly Variable Index Segment Account Charge and any monthly optional rider charges) during the Segment Term. The Charge Reserve Amount will be determined on each Segment Start Date as an amount projected to be sufficient to cover all of the policy’s monthly deductions during the Segment Term, assuming at the time such calculation is made that no interest or investment performance is credited to or charged against the policy account and that no policy changes or additional premium payments are made. The Charge Reserve Amount will be reduced by each subsequent monthly deduction (but not to less than zero).There is no requirement to maintain a Charge Reserve Amount if you are not in a Segment.Please see “Segments” later in this Prospectus for more information about the investment options from which account value could be transferred to the Unloaned GIO on a Segment Start Date (or the effective date of a requested face amount increase) in order to meet this requirement.

Downside Protection (also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Loss Absorption Threshold Rate”) — This is your protection against negative performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index for a Segment held until its Segment Maturity Date. It is currently-25%.The Downside Protection is set on the Segment Start Date at the Company’s sole discretion.However, the Downside Protection will not change during a Segment Term and at least-25% of Downside Protection will always be provided when a Segment is held until the Segment Maturity Date.

Early Distribution Adjustment (“EDA,” may also be referred to in your policy as the “Market Value Adjustment”) — The EDA is an adjustment that we make to your Segment Account Value, before a Segment matures, in the event you surrender your policy, take a loan from a Segment or if we should find it necessary to make deductions for monthly charges or any other distribution from a Segment. (Such other distributions would include any distributions from the policy that we deem necessary to continue to qualify the policy as life insurance under applicable tax law, any unpaid loan interest, or any distribution in connection with the exercise of a rider available under your policy.) An EDA that is made will cause you to lose principal through the application of a Put Option Factor, and that loss could be substantial. Therefore, you should give careful consideration before taking any early loan or surrender, or allowing the value in your other investment options to fall so low that we must make any monthly deduction from a Segment. Please see “Early Distribution Adjustment” later in this Prospectus for more information.

Growth Cap Rate — The maximum rate of return that will be applied to a Segment Account Value.The Growth Cap Rate is set foreach Segment on the Segment Start Date at the Company’ssole discretion.The Growth Cap Rate will not change during a Segment Term and the Growth Cap Rate will always be at least 6%.

Index — The S&P 500 Price Return index, which is the S&P 500 index excluding dividends. This index includes 500 leading companies in leading industries in the U.S. economy.

Index Performance Rate — The Index Performance Rate measures the percentage change in the Index during a Segment Term for each Segment. If the Index is discontinued or if the calculation of the Index is substantially changed, we reserve the right to substitute an alternative index. We also reserve the right to choose an alternative index at our discretion. Please see “Change in Index” for more information.

The Index Performance Rate is calculated by ((b) divided by (a)) minus one, where:

(a)

is the value of the Index at the close of business on the Segment Start Date, and

(b)

is the value of the Index at the close of business on the Segment Maturity Date.

We determine the value of the Index at the close of business, which is the end of a business day. Generally, a business day is any day the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading. If the New York Stock Exchange is not open for trading or if the Index value is, for any other reason, not published on the Segment Start Date or a Segment Maturity Date, the value of the Index will be determined as of the end of the most recent preceding business day for which the Index value is published.

Index-Linked Rate of Return — The rate of return we apply to calculate the Index-Linked Return which is based on the Index Performance Rate adjusted to reflect the Growth Cap Rate and protection against negative performance. Therefore, if the performance of the Index is zero or positive, we will apply that performance up to the Growth Cap Rate. If the performance of the Index is negative, we will apply performance of zero unless the decline in the performance of the Index is below-25% in which case negative performance in excess of-25% will apply. Please see the chart under “Index-Linked Return” for more information.

Index-Linked Return — The amount that is applied to the Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date that is equal to that Segment’s Index-Linked Rate of Return multiplied by the Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date. The Index-Linked Return may be positive, negative or zero. The Indexed-Linked Return is only applied to amounts that remain in a Segment Account Value until the Segment Maturity Date. For example, a surrender of your policy before Segment maturity will eliminate any Index-Linked Return and be subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment.

Initial Segment Account — The amount initially transferred to a Segment from the MSO Holding Account on its Segment Start Date, net of:

(a)

the Variable Index Benefit Charge (see “Charges” later in this Prospectus)

and

(b)

the amount, if any, that may have been transferred from the MSO Holding Account to the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge

4


Reserve Amount (see “Charge Reserve Amount” later in this Prospectus). Such a transfer would be made from the MSO Holding Account to cover the Charge Reserve Amount only (1) if you have given us instructions to make such a transfer or (2) in the other limited circumstances described under “Segments” later in this Prospectus.

MSO Holding Account — This is a portion of the EQ/Money Market variable investment option that holds amounts designated by the policy owner for investment in the MSO prior to any transfer into the next available new Segment.

Segment — The portion of your total investment in the MSO that is associated with a specific Segment Start Date. You create a new Segment each time an amount is transferred from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment Account.

Segment Account Value (also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Account”) — The amount of an Initial Segment Account subsequently reduced by any monthly deductions, policy loans and unpaid loan interest, and distributions from the policy that we deem necessary to continue to qualify the policy as life insurance under applicable tax law, which are allocated to the Segment. Any such reduction in the Segment Account Value prior to its Segment Maturity Date will result in a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment, which will cause you to lose principal, and that loss could be substantial. The Segment Account Value is used in determining policy account values, death benefits, and the net amount at risk for monthly cost of insurance calculations of the policy and the new base policy face amount associated with a requested change in death benefit option.

For example, if you put $1,000 into the MSO Holding Account, $992.50 would go into a Segment. This amount represents the Initial Segment Account. The Segment Account Value represents the value in the Segment which gets reduced by any deductions allocated to the Segment, with corresponding EDAs, through the course of the Segment Term. The Segment Distribution Value represents what you would receive upon surrendering the policy and reflects the EDA upon surrender.

Segment Distribution Value (also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Value”) — This is the Segment Account Value minus the Early Distribution Adjustment that would apply on a full surrender of that Segment at any time prior to the Segment Maturity Date. Segment Distribution Values will be used in determining policy value available to cover monthly deductions, proportionate surrender charges for requested face amount reductions, and other distributions; cash surrender values and maximum loan values subject to any applicable base policy surrender charge. They will also be used in determining whether any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest exceeds the policy account value.

Segment Maturity Date — The date on which a Segment Term is completed and the Index-Linked Return for that Segment is applied to a Segment Account Value.

Segment Maturity Value — This is the Segment Account Value adjusted by the Index-Linked Return for that Segment.

Segment Start Date — The Segment Start Date is the day on which a Segment is created.

Segment Term — The duration of a Segment. The Segment Term for each Segment begins on its Segment Start Date and ends on its Segment Maturity Date one year later. We are currently only offering Segment Terms of approximately one year. We may offer different durations in the future.

5


2. Fee Table Summary

MSO Charges When Charge is Deducted  Current Non-guaranteed  Guaranteed Maximum
Variable Index Benefit Charge(1) On Segment Start Date  0.75%  0.75%
Variable Index Segment
Account Charge
 At the beginning of each policy month during the Segment Term  0.65%  1.65%
Total    1.40%  2.40%

Other

When Charge is Deducted

Maximum Spread

Percentage that May

be Deducted

Loan Interest Spread(2)

for Amounts of Policy

Loans Allocated to

MSO Segment

On each policy anniversary (or on loan termination, if earlier)New York and Oregon policies: 2%
All other policies: 5%

OtherWhen Charge is Deducted

Maximum Amount

that May be

Deducted

Early Distribution

Adjustment

On surrender or other distribution (including loan) from an MSO Segment prior to its Segment Maturity Date75% of Segment Account Value(3)
(1)

These charges represent annual rates.

(2)

We charge interest on policy loans but credit you with interest on the amount of the policy account value we hold as collateral for the loan. The “spread” is the difference between the interest rate we charge you on a policy loan and the interest rate we credit to you on the amount of your policy account value that we hold as collateral for the loan.

(3)

The actual amount of an Early Distribution Adjustment is determined by a formula that depends on, among other things, how the Index has performed since the Segment Start Date, as discussed in detail under “Early Distribution Adjustment” later in this Prospectus. The maximum amount of the adjustment would occur if there is a total distribution at a time when the Index has declined to zero.

This fee table applies specifically to the MSO and should be read in conjunction with the fee table in the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus.

The base variable life insurance policy’s mortality and expense risk charge and currentnon-guaranteed Customer Loyalty Credit will also apply to a Segment Account Value or any amounts held in the MSO Holding Account. The mortality and expense risk charge is part of the policy monthly charges. Please see “How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term” for more information. The Customer Loyalty Credit offsets some of the monthly charges. Please refer to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information.

Changes in charges

Any changes that we make in our current charges or charge rates will be on a basis that is equitable to all policies belonging to a given class, and will be determined based on reasonable assumptions as to expenses, mortality, investment income, lapses and policy and contract claims associated with morbidity. For the sake of clarity, the assumptions referenced above include taxes, the cost of hedging, longevity, volatility, other market conditions, surrenders, persistency, conversions, disability, accident, illness, inability to perform activities of daily living, and cognitive impairment, if applicable. Any changes in charges may apply to then in force policies, as well as to new policies. You will be notified in writing of any changes in charges under your policy.

6


3.Risk Factors

There are risks associated with some features of the Market Stabilizer Option®:

There is a risk of a substantial loss of your principal because you agree to absorb all losses from the portion of any negative Index performance that exceeds-25%.

Your Index-Linked Return is also limited by the Growth Cap Rate, which could cause your Index-Linked Return to be lower than it would otherwise be if you participated in the full performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index.

You will not know what the Growth Cap Rate is before the Segment starts. Therefore, you will not know in advance the upper limit on the return that may be credited to your investment in a Segment.

Negative consequences apply if, for any reason, amounts you have invested in a Segment are removed before the Segment Maturity Date. Specifically, with respect to the amounts removed early, you would (1) forfeit any positive Index performance and (2) be subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment that exposes you to a risk of potentially substantial loss of principal. This exposure is designed to be consistent with the treatment of losses on amounts held to the Segment Maturity Date.Even when the Index performance has been positive, the EDA will cause you to lose some principal on an early removal.

The following types of removals of account value from a Segment will result in the above-mentioned penalties to you, if the removals occur prior to the Segment Maturity Date: (a) a surrender of your policy; (b) a loan from your policy; (c) a distribution in order to enable your policy to continue to qualify as life insurance under the federal tax laws; (d) certain distributions in connection with the exercise of a rider available under your policy; and (e) a charge or unpaid policy loan interest that we deduct from your Segment Account Value because the Charge Reserve Amount and other funds are insufficient to cover them in their entirety. The Charge Reserve Amount may become insufficient because of policy changes that you request, additional premium payments, investment performance, policy loans, policy partial withdrawals from other investment options besides the MSO, and any increases we make in current charges for the policy (including for the MSO and optional riders).

Certain of the above types of early removals can occur (and thus result in penalties to you) without any action on your part. Examples include (i) certain distributions we might make from your Segment Account Value to enable your policy to continue to qualify as life insurance and (ii) deductions we might make from your Segment Account Value to pay charges if the Charge Reserve Amount becomes insufficient.

Any applicable EDA will generally be affected by changes in both the volatility and level of the S&P 500 Price Return Index. Any EDA applied to any Segment Account Value is linked to the estimated value of a put option on the S&P 500 Price Return index as described later in this Prospectus. The estimated value of the put option and, consequently, the amount of the EDA will generally be higher after increases in market volatility or after the Index experiences a negative return following the Segment Start Date.

Once policy account value is in a Segment, you cannot transfer out of a Segment and you can only make withdrawals out of a Segment if you surrender your policy. This would result in the imposition of any applicable surrender charges and EDA.

We may not offer new Segments so there is also the possibility that a Segment may not be available for a Segment Renewal at the end of your Segment Term(s).

We also reserve the right to substitute an alternative index for the S&P 500 Price Return index, which could reduce the Growth Cap Rates we can offer.

No company other than us has any legal responsibility to pay amounts that the Company owes under the policies.

You do not have any rights in the securities underlying the index, including, but not limited to, (i) interest payments, (ii) dividend payments or (iii) voting rights.

Your Segment Maturity Value is dependent on the performance of the index on the Segment Maturity Date.

Past performance of the index is no indication of future performance.

The amounts required to be maintained in the Unloaned GIO for the Charge Reserve Amount during the Segment Term may earn a return that is less than the return you might have earned on those amounts in another investment option had you not invested in a Segment.

7


4. Description of the Market Stabilizer Option®

We offer a Market Stabilizer Option® that provides a rate of return tied to the performance of the Index.

MSO Holding Account

The amount of each transfer or loan repayment you make to the MSO, and the balance of each premium payment you make to the MSO after any premium charge under your base policy has been deducted, will first be placed in the MSO Holding Account. The MSO Holding Account is a portion of the regular EQ/Money Market variable investment option that will hold amounts allocated to the MSO until the next available Segment Start Date. The MSO Holding Account has the same rate of return as the EQ/Money Market variable investment option. We currently plan on offering new Segments on a monthly basis but reserve the right to offer them less frequently or to stop offering them or to suspend offering them temporarily.

Before any account value is transferred into a Segment, you can transfer amounts from the MSO Holding Account into other investment options available under your policy at any time subject to any transfer restrictions within your policy. You can transfer into and out of the MSO Holding Account at any time up to and including the Segment Start Date provided your transfer request is received at our administrative office by such date. For example, you can transfer policy account value into the MSO Holding Account on the 3rd Friday of June. That policy account value would transfer into the Segment starting on that date, subject to the conditions mentioned earlier. You can also transfer policy account value out of the MSO Holding Account before the end of the business day on the Segment Start Date and that account value would not be swept into the Segment starting on that date. Please refer to the “How to reach us” section of the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information regarding contacting us and communicating your instructions. We also have specific forms that we recommend you use for electing the MSO and any MSO transactions.

On the Segment Start Date, account value in the MSO Holding Account, excluding charges and any account value transferred to cover the Charge Reserve Amount, will be transferred into a Segment if all requirements and limitations are met that are discussed under “Segments” immediately below.

Segments

Each Segment will have a Segment Start Date of the 3rd Friday of each calendar month and will have a Segment Maturity Date on the 3rd Friday of the same calendar month in the succeeding calendar year.

In order for any amount to be transferred from the MSO Holding Account into a new Segment on a Segment Start Date, all of the following conditions must be met on that date:

(1)

The Growth Cap Rate for that Segment must be equal to or greater than your minimum Growth Cap Rate (Please see “Growth Cap Rate” later in this Prospectus).

(2)

There must be sufficient account value available within the Unloaned GIO and the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account to cover the Charge Reserve Amount as determined by us on such date (Please see “Charge Reserve Amount” later in this Prospectus).

(3)

The Growth Cap Rate must be greater than the sum of the annual interest rate we are currently crediting on the Unloaned GIO (“A”), the Variable Index Benefit Charge rate (“B”), the annualized monthly Variable Index Segment Account Charge rate (“C”) and the current annualized monthly mortality and expense risk charge rate (“D”). The Growth Cap Rate must be greater than (A+B+C+D). This is to ensure that the highest possible rate of return that could be received in a Segment after these charges (B+C+D) have been considered exceeds the interest crediting rate currently being offered in the Unloaned GIO.

(4)

It must not be necessary, as determined by us on that date, for us to make a distribution from the policy during the Segment Term in order for the policy to continue to qualify as life insurance under applicable tax law.

(5)

The total amount allocated to your Segments under your policy on that date must be less than any limit we may have established.

If there is sufficient policy account value in the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount, then no transfers from other investment options to the Unloaned GIO will need to be made. If there is insufficient value in the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount and we do not receive instructions from you specifying the investment options from which we should transfer the account value to the Unloaned GIO to meet Charge Reserve Amount requirements at the Segment Start Date, or the transfer instructions are not possible due to insufficient funds, then the required amount will be transferred proportionately from your variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account.

If after any transfers there would be an insufficient amount in the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount or the Growth Cap Rate for the next available Segment does not qualify per your minimum Growth Cap Rate instructions and the conditions listed above, then your amount in the MSO Holding Account will remain there until we receive further instruction from you. We will mail you a notice informing you that your account value did or did not transfer from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment. These notices are mailed on or about the next business day after the applicable Segment Start Date.

Segment Maturity

Near the end of the Segment Term, we will notify you between 15 and 45 days before the Segment Maturity Date that a Segment is about to mature. At that time, you may choose to have all or a part of:

(a)

the Segment Maturity Value rolled over into the MSO Holding Account

8


(b)

the Segment Maturity Value transferred to the variable investment options available under your policy

(c)

the Segment Maturity Value transferred to the Unloaned GIO.

If we do not receive your transfer instructions before the Segment Maturity Date, your Segment Maturity Value will automatically be rolled over into the MSO Holding Account for investment in the next available Segment, subject to the conditions listed under “Segments” above.

However, if we are not offering the MSO at that time, we will transfer the Segment Maturity Value to the investment options available under your policy per your instructions or to the EQ/Money Market investment option if no instructions are received. Please see “Right to Discontinue and Limit Amounts Allocated to the MSO” for more information. Although, under the appropriate variable life insurance policy, we reserve the right to apply a transfer charge up to $25 for each transfer among your investment options there will be no transfer charges for any of the transfers discussed in this section.

Growth Cap Rate

By allocating your account value to the MSO, you can participate in the performance of the Index up to the applicable Growth Cap Rate that we declare on the Segment Start Date.

Please note that this means you will not know the Growth Cap Rate for a new Segment until after the account value has been transferred from the MSO Holding Account into the Segment and you are not allowed to transfer the account value out of a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date. Please see “Transfers” below.

Each Segment is likely to have a different Growth Cap Rate. However, the Growth Cap Rate will never be less than 6%.

Your protection against negative performance for a Segment held until its Segment Maturity Date is currently-25% (“Downside Protection” also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Loss Absorption Threshold Rate”). We reserve the right, for new Segments, to increase your Downside Protection against negative performance. For example, if we were to adjust the Downside Protection for a Segment to-100%, the Index-Linked Rate of Return for that Segment would not go below 0%. Please note that any increase in the protection against negative performance would likely result in a lower Growth Cap Rate than would otherwise apply. We will provide notice between 15 and 45 days before any change in the Downside Protection is effective. Any change would only apply to new Segments started after the effective date of the change, which (coupled with the15-45 day notice we will give) will afford you the opportunity to decline to participate in any Segment that reflects a change in the Downside Protection.

The Growth Cap Rate and Downside Protection are set at the Company’s sole discretion. However, the Growth Cap Rate can never be less than 6% and we may only increase your Downside Protection from the current-25%.

As part of your initial instructions in selecting the MSO, you will specify what your minimum acceptable Growth Cap Rate is for a Segment. You may specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate from 6% to 10%. If the Growth Cap Rate we set, on the Segment Start Date, is below the minimum you specified then the account value will not be transferred from the MSO Holding Account into that Segment. If you

do not specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate then your minimum Growth Cap Rate will be set at 6%. In addition, for account value to transfer into a Segment from the MSO Holding Account, the Growth Cap Rate must be greater than the sum of the annual interest rate we are currently crediting on the Unloaned GIO (“A”), the Variable Index Benefit Charge rate (“B”), the annualized monthly Variable Index Segment Account Charge rate (“C”) and the current annualized monthly mortality and expense risk charge rate (“D”). The Growth Cap Rate must be greater than (A+B+C+D).

For example, assume that the annual interest rate we are currently crediting on the Unloaned GIO were 4.00%, the Variable Index Benefit Charge rate were 0.75%, the annualized monthly Variable Index Segment Account charge rate were 0.65% and the annualized monthly mortality and expense risk charge rate were 0.85%. Based on those assumptions (which we provide only for illustrative purposes and will not necessarily correspond to actual rates), because these numbers total 6.25%, no amounts would be transferred into any Segment unless we declare a Growth Cap Rate that is higher than 6.25%. Please see “Index-Linked Return” later in this Prospectus for more information.

As another example, you may specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate of 8%. If we set the Growth Cap Rate at 8% or higher for a Segment then a transfer from the MSO Holding Account will be made into that new Segment provided all other requirements and conditions discussed in this Prospectus are met. If we set the Growth Cap Rate below 8% then no transfer from the MSO Holding Account will be made into that Segment. No transfer will be made until a Segment Growth Cap Rate equal to or greater than 8% is set and all requirements are met or you transfer account value out of the MSO Holding Account.

Growth Cap Rate Available During Initial Year (Not applicable to VUL OptimizerSM policies)

If you allocate policy account value to any Segment that commences during the first year that the MSO is available to you under your policy, our current practice is to establish a Growth Cap Rate that is at least 15%. This 15% minimum Growth Cap Rate would apply to all Segment Terms that commence:

During the first policy year, if the MSO was available to you as a feature of your policy when the policy was issued; or

Forin-force policies, during the one year period beginning with the date when the MSO was first made available to you after your policy was issued.

We may terminate or change this 15% initial year minimum Growth Cap Rate at any time; but any such change or termination would apply to you only if your policy is issued, or the MSO was first made available to you, after such modification or termination.

After this initial year 15% minimum Growth Cap Rate, the minimum Growth Cap Rate will revert back to 6%.

Index-Linked Return

We calculate the Index-Linked Return for a Segment by taking the Index-Linked Rate of Return and multiplying it by the Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date. The Segment Account Value is net of the Variable Index Benefit Charge described below as well as any monthly deductions, policy loans and unpaid interest,

9


distributions from the policy that we deem necessary to continue to qualify the policy as life insurance under applicable tax law and any corresponding Early Distribution Adjustments. The Segment Account Value does not include the Charge Reserve Amount described later in this Prospectus.

The following table demonstrates the Index-Linked Rate of Return and the Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date based upon a hypothetical range of returns for the S&P 500 Price Return index. This example assumes a 15% Growth Cap Rate and a $1,000 investment in the MSO Segment.

Index Performance
Rate of the S&P 500
Price Return index
 

Index-Linked Rate

of Return

 Segment Maturity
Value
50% 15% $1,150
25% 15% $1,150
10% 10% $1,100
0% 0% $1,000
-25% 0% $1,000
-50% -25% $750
-75% -50% $500
-100% -75% $250

For instance, we may set the Growth Cap Rate at 15%. Therefore, if the Index has gone up 20% over your Segment Term, you will receive a 15% credit to your Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date. If the Index had gone up by 13% from your Segment Start Date to your Segment Maturity Date then you would receive a credit of 13% to your Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date.

If the Index had gone down 20% over the Segment Term then you would receive a return of 0% to your Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date.

If the Index had gone down by 30% by your Segment Maturity Date then your Segment Account Value would be reduced by 5% on the Segment Maturity Date. The Downside Protection feature of the MSO will absorb the negative performance of the Index up to-25%.

The minimum Growth Cap Rate is 6%. However, account value will only transfer into a new Segment from the MSO Holding Account if the Growth Cap Rate is equal to or greater than your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate and meets the conditions discussed earlier in the “Growth Cap Rate” section.

In those instances where the account value in the MSO Holding Account does not transfer into a new Segment, the account value will remain in the MSO Holding Account until the next available, qualifying Segment unless you transfer the account value into the Unloaned GIO and/or other investment option available under your policy subject to any conditions and restrictions.

For instance, if we declare the Growth Cap Rate to be 6% and your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate is 6% but we are currently crediting an annual interest rate on the Unloaned GIO that is greater than or equal to 6% minus the sum of the charges (B+C+D) discussed in the Growth Cap Rate section then your account value will remain in the MSO Holding Account on the date the new Segment would have started.

As indicated above, you must transfer account value out of the MSO Holding Account into the Unloaned GIO and/or other investment options available under your policy if you do not want to remain in the MSO Holding Account.

If we declare the Growth Cap Rate to be 6% and your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate is 6% and if the sum of the charges (B+C+D) discussed in the “Growth Cap Rate” section plus the annual interest rate on the Unloaned GIO are less than 6% and all requirements are met then the net amount of the account value in the MSO Holding Account will transfer into a new Segment.

If you specified a minimum Growth Cap Rate of 10% in the above examples then account value would not transfer into a new Segment from the MSO Holding Account because the Growth Cap Rate did not meet your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate.

The Index-Linked Return is only applied to amounts that remain in a Segment until the Segment Maturity Date. For example, a surrender of your policy before Segment maturity will eliminate any Index-Linked Return and be subject to a Early Distribution Adjustment.

Change in Index

If the Index is discontinued or if the calculation of the Index is substantially changed, we reserve the right to substitute an alternative index. We also reserve the right to choose an alternative index at our discretion.

If we were to substitute an alternative index at our discretion, we would provide notice 45 days before making that change. The new index would only apply to new Segments. Any outstanding Segments would mature on their original Segment Maturity Dates.

With an alternative index, the Downside Protection would remain the same or greater. However, an alternative index may reduce the Growth Cap Rates we can offer. We would attempt to choose a substitute index that has a similar investment objective and risk profile to the S&P 500 Price Return index.

If the S&P 500 Price Return index were to be discontinued or substantially changed, thereby affecting the Index-Linked Return of existing Segments, we will mature the Segments based on the most recently available closing value of the Index before it is discontinued or changed. Such maturity will be as of the date of such most recently available closing value of the Index and we will use that closing value to calculate the Index-linked Return through that date. We would apply the full Index performance to that date subject to the full Growth Cap Rate and Downside Protection. For example, if the Index was up 12% at the time we matured the Segment and the Growth Cap Rate was 8%, we would credit an 8% return to your Segment Account Value. If the Index was down 30% at the time we matured the Segment, we would credit a 5% negative return to your Segment Account Value. We would provide notice about maturing the Segment, as soon as practicable and ask for instructions on where to transfer your Segment Maturity Value.

If we are still offering Segments at that time, you can request that the Segment Maturity Value be invested in a new Segment, in which case we will hold the Segment Maturity Value in the MSO Holding Account for investment in the next available Segment subject to the same terms and conditions discussed above under MSO Holding Account and Segments.

10


In the case of any of the types of early maturities discussed above, there would be no transfer charges or EDA applied and you can allocate the Segment Maturity Value to the investment options available under your policy. Please see “Segment Maturity” earlier in this Prospectus for more information. If we continued offering new Segments, then such a change in the Index may cause lower Growth Cap Rates to be offered. However, we would still provide a minimum Growth Cap Rate of 6% and minimum Downside Protection of-25%. We also reserve the right to not offer new Segments. Please see “Right to Discontinue and Limit Amounts Allocated to the MSO” later in this Prospectus.

Charges

There is a current percentage charge of 1.40% of any policy account value allocated to each Segment. We reserve the right to increase or decrease the charge although it will never exceed 2.40%. Of this percentage charge, 0.75% will be deducted on the Segment Start Date from the amount being transferred from the MSO Holding Account into the Segment as anup-front charge (“Variable Index Benefit Charge”), with the remaining 0.65% annual charge (of the current Segment Account Value) being deducted from the policy account on a monthly basis during the Segment Term (“Variable Index Segment Account Charge”).

MSO Charges  

Current

Non-

guaranteed

  Guaranteed
Maximum
Variable Index Benefit Charge  0.75%  0.75%
Variable Index Segment Account Charge  0.65%  1.65%
Total  1.40%  2.40%

This fee table applies specifically to the MSO and should be read in conjunction with the fee table in the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus. Please also see Loans later in this Prospectus for information regarding the “spread” you would pay on any policy loan.

The base variable life insurance policy’s mortality and expense risk charge and currentnon-guaranteed Customer Loyalty Credit will also be applicable to a Segment Account Value or any amounts held in the MSO Holding Account. The mortality and expense risk charge is part of the policy monthly charges. Please see “How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term” for more information. The Customer Loyalty Credit offsets some of the monthly charges. Please refer to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information.

If a Segment is terminated prior to maturity by policy surrender, or reduced prior to maturity by monthly deductions (if other funds are insufficient) or by loans or a Guideline PremiumForce-out as described below, we will refund a proportionate amount of the Variable Index Benefit Charge corresponding to the surrender or reduction and the time remaining until Segment Maturity. The refund will be administered as part of the Early Distribution Adjustment process as described above. This refund will increase your surrender value or remaining Segment Account Value, as appropriate. Please see Appendix I for an example and further information.

Charge Reserve Amount

If you elect the Market Stabilizer Option®, you are required to maintain a minimum amount of policy account value in the Unloaned GIO to approximately cover the estimated monthly charges for the policy, (including, but not limited to, the MSO and any optional riders) for the Segment Term. This is the Charge Reserve Amount.

The Charge Reserve Amount will be determined on each Segment Start Date as an amount projected to be sufficient to cover all of the policy’s monthly deductions during the Segment Term, assuming at the time such calculation is made that no interest or investment performance is credited to or charged against the policy account and that no policy changes or additional premium payments are made. The Charge Reserve Amount on other than a Segment Start Date (or the effective date of a requested face amount increase — please see “Requested Face Amount Increases” below for more information) will be the Charge Reserve Amount determined as of the latest Segment Start Date (or effective date of a face amount increase) reduced by each subsequent monthly deduction during the longest remaining Segment Term, although it will never be less than zero. This means, for example, that if you are in a Segment (Segment A) and then enter another Segment (Segment B) 6 months later, the Charge Reserve Amount would bere-calculated on the start date of Segment B. The Charge Reserve Amount would bere-calculated to cover all of the policy’s monthly deductions during the Segment Terms for both Segments A and B.

When you select the MSO, as part of your initial instructions, you will be asked to specify the investment options from which we should transfer the account value to the Unloaned GIO to meet Charge Reserve Amount requirements, if necessary. No transfer restrictions apply to amounts that you wish to transfer into the Unloaned GIO to meet the Charge Reserve Amount requirement. If your values in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account and the unloaned portion of our GIO are insufficient to cover the Charge Reserve Amount, no new Segment will be established. Please see “Segments” above for more information regarding the Charge Reserve Amount and how amounts may be transferred to meet this requirement.

Please note that the Charge Reserve Amount may not be sufficient to cover actual monthly deductions during the Segment Term. Although the Charge Reserve Amount will bere-calculated on each Segment Start Date, and the amount already present in the Unloaned GIO will be supplemented through transfers from your value in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account, if necessary to meet this requirement, actual monthly deductions could vary up or down during the Segment Term due to various factors including but not limited to requested policy changes, additional premium payments, investment performance, loans, policy partial withdrawals from other investment options besides the MSO, and any changes we might make to current policy charges.

How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term

Under your base variable life insurance policy, monthly deductions are allocated to the variable investment options and the Unloaned GIO according to deduction allocation percentages specified by you or based on a proportionate allocation should any of the individual investment option values be insufficient.

11


However, if the Market Stabilizer Option® is elected, on the Segment Start Date, deduction allocation percentages will be changed so that 100% of monthly deductions will be taken from the Charge Reserve Amount and then any remaining value in the Unloaned GIO, if the Charge Reserve Amount is depleted, during the Segment Term. In addition, if the value in the Unloaned GIO is ever insufficient to cover monthly deductions during the Segment Term, the base policy’s proportionate allocation procedure will be modified as follows:

1.

The first step will be to take the remaining portion of the deductions proportionately from the values in the variable investment options, including any value in the MSO Holding Account but excluding any Segment Account Values.

2.

If the Unloaned GIO and variable investment options, including any value in the MSO Holding Account, are insufficient to cover deductions in their entirety, the remaining amount will be allocated to the individual Segments proportionately, based on the current Segment Distribution Values.

3.

Any portion of a monthly deduction allocated to an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value.

The effect of those procedures is that account value will be taken out of a Segment to pay a monthly deduction (and an EDA therefore applied) only if there is no remaining account value in any other investment options, as listed in 1. and 2. above.

In addition, your base variable life insurance policy will lapse if your net policy account value (please refer to your base variable life insurance policy prospectus for a further explanation of this term) is not enough to pay your policy’s monthly charges when due (unless one of the available guarantees against termination is applicable). If you have amounts allocated to MSO Segments, the Segment Distribution Value will be used in place of the Segment Account Value in calculating the net policy account.

These modifications will apply during any period in which a Segment exists and has not yet reached its Segment Maturity Date.

Early Distribution Adjustment

Overview

Before a Segment matures, if you surrender your policy, take a loan from a Segment or if we should find it necessary to make deductions for monthly charges or other distributions from a Segment, we will apply an Early Distribution Adjustment.

The application of the EDA is based on your agreement (under the terms of the MSO) to be exposed to the risk that, at the Segment Maturity Date, the Index will have fallen by more than 25%. The EDA uses what we refer to as a Put Option Factor to estimate the market value, at the time of an early distribution, of the risk that you would suffer a loss if your Segment were continued (without taking the early distribution) until its Segment Maturity Date. By charging you with a deduction equal to that estimated value, the EDA provides a treatment for an early distribution that is designed to be consistent with how distributions at the end of a Segment are treated when the Index has declined over the course of that Segment.

In the event of an early distribution, even if the Index has experienced positive performance since the Segment Start Date, the EDA will

cause you to lose principal through the application of the Put Option Factor and that loss may be substantial. That is because there is always some risk that the Index would have declined by the Segment Maturity Date such that you would suffer a loss if the Segment were continued (without taking any early distribution) until that time. However, the other component of the EDA is the proportionate refund of the Variable Index Benefit Charge (discussed below under “Important Considerations”) which is a positive adjustment to you. As a result, the overall impact of the EDA is to reduce your Segment Account Value and your other policy values except in the limited circumstances where the proportionate refund is greater than your loss from the Put Option Factor.

We determine the EDA and the Put Option Factor by formulas that are described below under “Additional Detail.”

Important Considerations

When any surrender, loan, charge deduction or other distribution is made from a Segment before its Segment Maturity Date:

1.

You will forfeit any positive Index performance with respect to these amounts. Instead, any of thesepre-Segment Maturity Date distributions will cause an EDA to be applied that will usually result in a reduction in your values. Therefore, you should give careful consideration before taking any such early loan or surrender, or allowing the value in your other investment options to fall so low that we must make any monthly deduction from a Segment; and

2.

The EDA will be applied, which means that:

a.

If the Index has fallen more than 25% since the Segment Start Date, the EDA would generally have the effect of charging you for (i) the full amount of that loss below 25%, plus (ii) an additional amount for the risk that the Index might decline further by the Segment Maturity Date. (Please see example III in Appendix I for further information.)

b.

If the Index has fallen since the Segment Start Date, but by less than 25%, the EDA would charge you for the risk that, by the Segment Maturity Date, the Index might have declined further to a point more than 25% below what it was at the Segment Start Date. (Please see example I in Appendix I for further information.) This charge would generally be less than the amount by which the Index had fallen from the Segment Start Date through the date we apply the EDA. It also would generally be less than it would be under the circumstances in 2a. above.

c.

If the Index has risen since the Segment Start Date, the EDA would not credit you with any of such favorable investment performance. Instead, the EDA would charge you for the risk that, by the Segment Maturity Date, the Index might have declined to a point more than 25% below what it was at the Segment Start Date. (Please see examples II and IV in Appendix I for further information.) This charge would generally be less than it would be under the circumstances in 2a. and 2b. above.

12


In addition to the consequences discussed in 2. above, the EDA also has the effect of pro-rating the Variable Index Benefit Charge. As discussed further below, this means that you in effect would receive a proportionate refund of this charge for the portion of the Segment Term that follows the early surrender, loan, policy distribution, or charge deduction that caused us to apply the EDA. In limited circumstances, this refund may cause the total EDA to be positive.

For the reasons discussed above, the Early Distribution Adjustment to the Segment Account Value will usually reduce the amount you would receive when you surrender your policy prior to a Segment Maturity Date. For loans and charge deductions, the Early Distribution Adjustment would usually further reduce the account value remaining in the Segment Account Value and therefore decrease the Segment Maturity Value.

Additional Detail

For purposes of determining the Segment Distribution Value prior to a Segment Maturity Date, the EDA is:

(a)

the Put Option Factor multiplied by the Segment Account Value

-minus-

(b)

a pro rata portion of the 0.75% Variable Index Benefit Charge attributable to the Segment Account Value. (Please see “Charges” earlier in this Prospectus for an explanation of this charge.)

The Put Option Factor multiplied by the Segment Account Value represents, at any time during the Segment Term, the estimated market value of your potential exposure to negative S&P 500 Price Return index performance that is worse than-25%. The Put Option Factor, on any date, represents the estimated value on that date of a hypothetical “put option” (as described below) on the Index having a notional value equal to $1 and strike price at Segment Maturity equal to $0.75 ($1 plus the Downside Protection which is currently-25%). The strike price of the option ($0.75) is the difference between a 100% loss in the S&P 500 Price Return index at Segment Maturity and the 25% loss at Segment Maturity that would be absorbed by the Downside Protection feature of the MSO (please see “Growth Cap Rate” earlier in this Prospectus for an explanation of the Downside Protection.) In a put option on an index, the seller will pay the buyer, at the maturity of the option, the difference between the strike price — which was set at issue — and the underlying index closing price, in the event that the closing price is below the strike price. Prior to the maturity of the put option, its value generally will have an inverse relationship with the index. The notional value can be described as the price of the underlying index at inception of the contract. Using a notional value of $1 facilitates computation of the percentage change in the Index and the put option factor.

The Company will utilize a fair market value methodology to determine the Put Option Factor.

For this purpose, we use the Black Scholes formula for valuing a European put option on the S&P 500 Price Return index, assuming a continuous dividend yield, with inputs that are consistent with current market prices.

The inputs to the Black Scholes model include:

(1)

Implied Volatility of the Index — This input varies with (i) how much time remains until the Maturity Date of the Segment from which an early distribution is being made, which is determined by using an expiration date for the hypothetical put option that corresponds to that time remaining and (ii) the relationship between the strike price of the hypothetical put option and the level of the S&P 500 Price Return index at the time of the early distribution. This relationship is referred to as the “moneyness” of the hypothetical put option described above, and is calculated as the ratio of the $0.75 strike price of that hypothetical put option to what the level of the S&P 500 Price Return index would be at the time of the early distribution if the Index had been $1 at the beginning of the Segment. Direct market data for these inputs for any given early distribution are generally not available, because put options on the Index that actually trade in the market have specific maturity dates and moneyness values that are unlikely to correspond precisely to the Maturity Date and moneyness of the hypothetical put option that we use for purposes of calculating the EDA.

Accordingly, we use the following method to estimate the implied volatility of the Index. We receive daily quotes of implied volatility from banks using the same Black Scholes model described above and based on the market prices for certain S&P 500 Price Return put options. Specifically, implied volatility quotes are obtained for put options with the closest maturities above and below the actual time remaining in the Segment at the time of the early distribution and, for each maturity, for those put options having the closest moneyness value above and below the actual moneyness of the hypothetical put option described above, given the level of the S&P 500 Price Return index at the time of the early distribution. In calculating the Put Option Factor, we will derive a volatility input for your Segment’s time to maturity and strike price by linearly interpolating between the implied volatility quotes that are based on the actual adjacent maturities and moneyness values described above, as follows:

(a)

We first determine the implied volatility of a put option that has the same moneyness as the hypothetical put option but with the closest available time to maturity shorter than your Segment’s remaining time to maturity. This volatility is derived by linearly interpolating between the implied volatilities of put options having the moneyness values that are above and below the moneyness value of the hypothetical put option.

(b)

We then determine the implied volatility of a put option that has the same moneyness as the hypothetical put option but with the closest available time to maturity longer than your Segment’s remaining time to maturity. This volatility is derived by linearly interpolating between the implied volatilities of put options having the moneyness values that are above and below the moneyness value of the hypothetical put option.

(c)

The volatility input for your Segment’s time to maturity will then be determined by linearly interpolating between the volatilities derived in steps (a) and (b).

13


(2)

LIBOR Rate — Key duration LIBOR rates will be retrieved from a recognized financial reporting vendor. LIBOR rates will be retrieved for maturities adjacent to the actual time remaining in the Segment at the time of the early distribution. We will use linear interpolation to derive the exact remaining duration rate needed as the input.

(3)

Index Dividend Yield — On a daily basis we will get the projected annual dividend yield across the entire Index. This value is a widely used assumption and is readily available from recognized financial reporting vendors.

In general, the Put Option Factor has an inverse relationship with the S&P 500 Price Return index. In addition to the factors discussed above, the Put Option Factor is also influenced by time to Segment Maturity. We determine Put Option Factors at the end of each business day. Generally, a business day is any day the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading. If any inputs to the Black Scholes formula are unavailable on a business day, we would use the value of the input from the most recent preceding business day. The Put Option Factor that applies to a transaction or valuation made on a business day will be the Factor for that day. The Put Option Factor that applies to a transaction or valuation made on anon-business day will be the Factor for the next business day.

Appendix I at the end of this Prospectus provides examples of how the Early Distribution Adjustment is calculated.

Transfers

There is no charge to transfer into and out of the MSO Holding Account and you can make a transfer at any time to or from the investment options available under your policy subject to any transfer restrictions within your policy. Any restrictions applicable to transfers between the MSO Holding Account and such investment options would be the same transfer restrictions applicable to transfers between the investment options available under your policy. However, once policy account value has been swept from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment, transfers into or out of that Segment before its Segment Maturity Date will not be permitted. Please note that while a Segment is in effect, before the Segment Maturity Date, the amount available for transfers from the Unloaned GIO will be limited to avoid reducing the Unloaned GIO below the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Thus the amount available for transfers from the Unloaned GIO will not be greater than any excess of the Unloaned GIO over the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Withdrawals

Once policy account value has been swept from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment, you will not be allowed to withdraw the account value out of a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date unless you surrender your policy. You may also take a loan; please see “Loans” later in this Prospectus for more information. Any account value taken out of a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date will generate an Early Distribution Adjustment. Please note that while a Segment is in effect, before the Segment Maturity Date, the amount available for withdrawals from the Unloaned GIO will be limited to avoid reducing the Unloaned GIO below the Charge Reserve Amount. Thus, if there is any policy account value in a Segment, the

amount which would otherwise be available to you for a partial withdrawal of net cash surrender value will be reduced, by the amount (if any) by which the sum of your Segment Distribution Values and the Charge Reserve Amount exceeds the policy surrender charge.

If the policy owner does not indicate or if we cannot allocate the withdrawal as requested due to insufficient funds, we will allocate the withdrawal proportionately from your values in the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and your values in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account.

Cash Surrender Value, Net Cash Surrender Value and Loan Value

If you have amounts allocated to MSO Segments, the Segment Distribution Values will be used in place of the Segment Account Values in calculating the amount of any cash surrender value, net cash surrender value and maximum amount available for loans (please refer to your base variable life insurance policy prospectus for a further explanation of these latter terms). This means an EDA would apply to those amounts. Please see Appendix I for more information.

Guideline Premium Force-outs

For policies that use the Guideline Premium Test, a new Segment will not be established or created if we determine, when we process your election, that a distribution from the policy will be required to maintain its qualification as life insurance under federal tax law at any time during the Segment Term.

However, during a Segment Term if a distribution becomes necessary under theforce-out rules of Section 7702 of the Internal Revenue Code, it will be deducted proportionately from the values in the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and in any variable investment option, including any value in the MSO Holding Account but excluding any Segment Account Values.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and variable investment options, including any value in the MSO Holding Account, are insufficient to cover theforce-out in its entirety, any remaining amount required to be forced out will be taken from the individual Segments proportionately, based on the current Segment Distribution Values.

Any portion of aforce-out distribution taken from an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the remaining Charge Reserve Amount), together with the variable investment options including any value in the MSO Holding Account, and the Segment Distribution Values, is still insufficient to cover theforce-out in its entirety, the remaining amount of theforce-out will be allocated to the Unloaned GIO and reduce or eliminate any remaining Charge Reserve Amount under the Unloaned GIO.

Loans

Please refer to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for information regarding policy loan provisions.

You may specify how your loan is to be allocated among the MSO, the variable investment options and the Unloaned GIO. Any portion of a requested loan allocated to the MSO will be redeemed from the

14


individual Segments and the MSO Holding Account proportionately, based on the value of the MSO Holding Account and the current Segment Distribution Values of each Segment. Any portion allocated to an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value and be subject to a higher guaranteed maximum loan spread (2% for policies with a contract state of New York and Oregon and 5% for other policies).

If you do not specify or if we cannot allocate the loan according to your specifications, we will allocate the loan proportionately from your values in the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and your values in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the remaining amount of the Charge Reserve Amount), together with the variable investment options including any value in the MSO Holding Account, are insufficient to cover the loan in its entirety, the remaining amount of the loan will be allocated to the individual Segments proportionately, based on current Segment Distribution Values.

Any portion of a loan allocated to an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value and be subject to a higher guaranteed maximum loan spread.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the remaining amount of the Charge Reserve Amount), together with the variable investment options including any value in the MSO Holding Account and the Segment Distribution Values, are still insufficient to cover the loan in its entirety, the remaining amount of the loan will be allocated to the Unloaned GIO and will reduce or eliminate the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Loan interest is due on each policy anniversary. If the interest is not paid when due, it will be added to your outstanding loan and allocated on the same basis as monthly deductions. See “How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term.”

Whether or not any Segment is in effect and has not yet reached its Segment Maturity Date, loan repayments will first reduce any loaned amounts that are subject to the higher maximum loan interest spread. Loan repayments will first be used to restore any amounts that, before being designated as loan collateral, had been in the Unloaned GIO. Any portion of an additional loan repayment allocated to the MSO at the policy owner’s direction (or according to premium allocation percentages) will be transferred to the MSO Holding Account to await the next available Segment Start Date and will be subject to the same conditions described earlier in this Prospectus.

Paid Up Death Benefit Guarantee

Please note that the MSO is not available while the Paid Up Death Benefit Guarantee is in effect. Please see the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information.

Requested Face Amount Increases

Please refer to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for conditions that will apply for a requested face amount increase.

If you wish to make a face amount increase during a Segment Term, the MSO requires that a minimum amount of policy account value be available to be transferred into the Unloaned GIO (if not already

present in the Unloaned GIO), and that the balance after deduction of monthly charges remain there during the longest remaining Segment Term subject to any loans as described above. This minimum amount will be any amount necessary to supplement the existing Charge Reserve Amount so as to be projected to be sufficient to cover all monthly deductions during the longest remaining Segment Term. Such amount will be determined assuming at the time such calculation is made that no interest or investment performance is credited to or charged against the policy account value, and that no further policy changes or additional premium payments are made.

Any necessary transfers to supplement the amount already present in the Unloaned GIO in order to meet this minimum requirement will take effect on the effective date of the face amount increase. There will be no charge for this transfer. Any transfer from the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account will be made in accordance with your directions. Your transfer instructions will be requested as part of the process for requesting the face amount increase. If the requested allocation is not possible due to insufficient funds, the required amount will be transferred proportionately from the variable investment options, as well as the MSO Holding Account. If such transfers are not possible due to insufficient funds, your requested face amount increase will be declined.

Your right to cancel within a certain number of days

Please refer to the appropriate variable insurance policy prospectus for more information regarding your right to cancel your policy within a certain number of days. However, the policy prospectus provisions that address when amounts will be allocated to the investment options do not apply to amounts allocated to the MSO.

In those states that require us to return your premium without adjustment for investment performance within a certain number of days, we will initially put all amounts which you have allocated to the MSO into our EQ/Money Market investment option. In this case, on the first business day following the later of the twentieth day after your policy is issued or the Investment Start Date (30th day in most states if your policy is issued as the result of a replacement, 60th day in New York), we will reallocate those amounts to the MSO Holding Account where they will remain until the next available Segment Start Date, at which time such amounts will be transferred to a new Segment of the MSO subject to meeting the conditions described in this Prospectus. However, if we have not received all necessary requirements for your policy as of the day your policy is issued, we will reallocate those amounts to the MSO Holding Account on the 20th day (longer if your policy is issued as the result of a replacement) following the date we receive all necessary requirements to put your policy in force at our Administrative Office.

In all other states, any amounts allocated to the MSO will first be allocated to the MSO Holding Account where they will remain for 20 days (unless the policy is issued as the result of a replacement, in which case amounts in the MSO Holding Account will remain there for 30 days (45 days in Pennsylvania)). Thereafter, such amounts will be transferred to a new Segment of the MSO on the next available Segment Start Date, subject to meeting the conditions described in this Prospectus.

15


Right to Discontinue and Limit Amounts Allocated to the MSO

We reserve the right to restrict or terminate future allocations to the MSO at any time. If this right were ever to be exercised by us, all Segments outstanding as of the effective date of the restriction would be guaranteed to continue uninterrupted until the Segment Maturity Date. As each such Segment matured, the balance would be reallocated to the Unloaned GIO and/or variable investment options per your instructions, or to the EQ/Money Market investment option if no instructions are received. We may also temporarily suspend offering Segments at any time and for any reason including emergency conditions as determined by the Securities and Exchange Commission. We also reserve the right to establish a maximum amount for any single policy that can be allocated to the MSO.

About Separate Account No. 67

Amounts allocated to the MSO are held in a “non-unitized” separate account we have established under the New York Insurance Law. We own the assets of the separate account, as well as any favorable investment performance on those assets. You do not participate in the performance of the assets held in this separate account. We may, subject to state law that applies, transfer all assets allocated to the separate account to our general account. We guarantee all benefits relating to your value in the MSO, regardless of whether assets supporting the MSO are held in a separate account or our general account.

Our current plans are to invest separate account assets in fixed-income obligations, including corporate bonds, mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, and government and agency issues. Futures, options and interest rate swaps may be used for hedging purposes.

Although the above generally describes our plans for investing the assets supporting our obligations under MSO, we are not obligated to invest those assets according to any particular plan except as we may be required to by state insurance laws.

16


5.Distribution of the policies

The MSO is only available only under certain variable life insurance policies issued by the Company. Extensive information about the arrangements for distributing the variable life insurance policies, including sales compensation, is included under “Plan of Distribution” in the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus and under “Distribution of the Policies” in the statement of additional information that relates to that prospectus. All of that information applies regardless of whether you choose to use the MSO, and there is no additional plan of distribution or sales compensation with respect to the MSO. There is also no change to the information regarding the fact that the principal underwriter(s) is an affiliate or an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of the Company.

17


6.Incorporation of certain documents by reference

The Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ended December 31, 2019 (the “Annual Report”) is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it is incorporated by reference.

The Company files reports and other information with the SEC, as required by law. You may read and copy this information at the SEC’s public reference facilities at Room 1580, 100 F Street, NE, Washington, DC 20549, or by accessing the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. The public may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. Under the Securities Act of 1933, the Company has filed with the SEC a registration statement relating to the Market Stabilizer Option® (the “Registration Statement”). This Prospectus has been filed as part of the Registration Statement and does not contain all of the information set forth in the Registration Statement.

 

After the date of this Prospectus and before we terminate the offering of the securities under the Registration Statement, all documents or reports we file with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (“Exchange Act”), will be considered to become part of this Prospectus because they are incorporated by reference.

 

Any statement contained in a document that is or becomes part of this Prospectus, will be considered changed or replaced for purposes of this Prospectus if a statement contained in this Prospectus changes or is replaced. Any statement that is considered to be a part of this Prospectus because of its incorporation will be considered changed or replaced for the purpose of this Prospectus if a statement contained in any other subsequently filed document that is considered to be part of this Prospectus changes or replaces that statement. After that, only the statement that is changed or replaced will be considered to be part of this Prospectus.

 

We file the Registration Statement and our Exchange Act documents and reports, including our Annual Report on Form10-K and Quarterly Reports on Form10-Q, electronically according to EDGAR under CIK No. 0000727920.No.0000727920. The SEC maintains a website that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC. The address of the site is www.sec.gov.

 

Upon written or oral request, we will provide, free of charge, to each person to whom this Prospectus is delivered, a copy of any or all of the documents considered to be part of this Prospectus because they are incorporated herein. In accordance with SEC rules, we will provide copies of any exhibits specifically incorporated by reference into the text of the Exchange Act reports (but not any other exhibits). Requests for documents should be directed to theEquitable Financial Life Insurance Company, 1290 Avenue of the Americas, New York, New York 10104. Attention: Corporate Secretary (telephone:(212) 554-1234). You can access our website at www.equitable.com.www.equitable.com for those outside the U.S.

Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

 

The consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules of theEquitable Financial Life Insurance Company incorporated in this Prospectus by reference to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2019 have been so incorporated in reliance on the report of            an independent registered public accounting firm, given on the authority of said firm as experts in auditing and accounting.

 

            provides independent audit services and certain othernon-audit services to the Company as permitted by the applicable SEC independence rules, and as disclosed in the Company’sForm 10-K.            address is 300 Madison Avenue, New York, New York 10017.

 

 

7318


Appendix I: Condensed financial informationEarly Distribution Adjustment Examples

Hypothetical Early Distribution Adjustment Examples

 

A. Examples of Early Distribution Adjustment to determine Segment Distribution Value

 

The unit valuesfollowing examples represent a policy owner who has invested in both Segments 1 and number2. They are meant to show how much value is available to a policy owner when there is a full surrender of units outstanding shownthe policy by the policy owner or other full distribution from these Segments as well as the impact of Early Distribution Adjustments on these Segments. The date of such hypothetical surrender or distribution is the Valuation Date specified below are for contracts offered under Separate Account No. 49 withand, on that date, the same daily asset charges of 1.25%.examples assume 9 months remain until Segment 1’s maturity date and 3 months remain until Segment 2’s maturity date.

 

Unit ValuesExplanation of formulas and numberderivation of units outstanding at year end for each variable investment option, except for those options being offered for the first time after December 31, 2018.Put Option Factors is provided in notes(1)-(3) below.

 

   For the year ending December 31, 
   2018  2017  2016  2015  2014  2013  2012  2011  2010 
EQ/Core Bond Index                                    

Unit value

 $10.02  $10.12  $10.10  $10.09  $10.17  $10.06  $10.35  $10.16  $9.82 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

  844   921   994   612   556   483   362   62   13 
EQ/Equity 500 Index                                    

Unit value

 $22.35  $23.81  $19.92  $18.13  $18.22  $16.33  $12.57  $11.05  $11.02 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

  1,184   1,437   1,484   1,471   1,470   859   466   66   5 
EQ/Money Market                                    

Unit value

 $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

  161,402   166,056   176,931   196,889   109,431   133,824   128,050   43,482   24,335 

The unit values and number of units outstanding shown below are for contracts offered under Separate Account No. 49 with the same daily asset charges of 1.65%.

Division of MSO into
Segments
  

Segment 1

(Distribution after 3 months)

  

Segment 2

(Distribution after 9 months)

  Total

Start Date

  3rd Friday of July, Calendar Year Y  3rd Friday of January, Calendar Year Y   

Maturity Date

  3rd Friday of July, Calendar Year Y+1  3rd Friday of January, Calendar Year Y+1   

Segment Term

  1 year  1 year   

Valuation Date

  3rd Friday of October, Calendar Year Y  3rd Friday of October, Calendar Year Y   

Initial Segment Account

  1,000  1,000  2,000

Variable Index Benefit Charge

  0.75%  0.75%   

Remaining Segment Term

  9 months / 12 months = 9/12 = 0.75  3 months / 12 months = 3/12 = 0.25   

 

Unit Values and numberExample I – The Index is down 10% at the time of units outstanding at year end for each variable investment option, except for those options being offered for the first time after December 31, 2018.Early Distribution Adjustment

 

    For the year ending December 31, 
    2018   2017   2016   2015   2014   2013   2012 
EQ/Core Bond Index                                   

Unit value

  $9.45   $9.59   $9.61   $9.64   $9.76   $9.69   $10.01 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

   33    37    61    28    29    38    1 
EQ/Equity 500 Index                                   

Unit value

  $17.28   $18.48   $15.52   $14.19   $14.32   $12.88   $9.96 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

   154    135    147    135    134    74    3 
EQ/Money Market                                   

Unit value

  $1.00   $1.00   $1.00   $1.00   $1.00   $1.00   $1.00 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

   7,846    8,414    11,380    13,043    11,617    18,408    11,935 

The unit values and number of units outstanding shown below are for contracts offered under Separate Account No. 49 with the same daily asset charges of 0.65%.

Unit Values and number of units outstanding at year end for each variable investment option, except for those options being offered for the first time after December 31, 2018.

   For the year ending December 31, 
   2018  2017  2016  2015  2014  2013  2012  2011  2010 
EQ/Core Bond Index                                    

Unit value

 $10.53  $10.58  $10.49  $10.42  $10.44  $10.26  $10.50  $10.24  $9.84 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

  36   27   21   16   12   27   48       
EQ/Equity 500 Index                                    

Unit value

 $23.49  $24.87  $20.68  $18.72  $18.69  $16.65  $12.75  $11.13  $11.04 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

  39   40   44   59   66   53   5       
EQ/Money Market                                    

Unit value

 $1.01  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00  $1.00 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

  6,283   5,703   5,745   6,515   3,746   10,504   6,456   757    
Change in Index Value  –10%  –10%  Total

Put Option Factor

  0.020673  0.003425   

Early Distribution Adjustment

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.020673 = 20.67

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

Total EDA:

20.67 – 5.67 = 15.00

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.003425 = 3.43

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

Total EDA:

3.43 – 1.89 = 1.54

  16.54

Segment Distribution Value

  1000 – 15.00 = 985.00  1000 – 1.54 = 998.46  1,983.46
% change in principal due to the Put Option Component  -2.067%  -0.343%   
% change in principal due to the Charge Refund Component  0.567%  0.189%   
Total % change in Segment Account Value due to the EDA  -1.50%  -0.15%   

 

I-1


Example II – The unit values and numberIndex is up 10% at the time of units outstanding shown below are for contracts offered under Separate Account No. 49 with the same daily asset chargesEarly Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  10%  10%  Total

Put Option Factor

  0.003229  0.000037   

Early Distribution Adjustment

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.003229 = 3.23

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

Total EDA:

3.23 – 5.67 = –2.44

 

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.000037 = 0.04

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

Total EDA:

0.04 – 1.89 = –1.85

 

  –4.29

Segment Distribution Value

  1000 – (–2.44) = 1002.44  1000 – (–1.85) = 1001.85  2,004.29
% change in principal due to the Put Option Component  -0.323%  -.004%   
% change in principal due to the Charge Refund Component  0.567%  0.189%   
Total % change in Segment Account Value due to the EDA  0.244%  0.185%   

Example III – The Index is down 40% at the time of 0.25%the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  –40%  –40%  Total

Put Option Factor

  0.163397  0.152132   

Early Distribution Adjustment

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.163397 = 163.40

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

Total EDA:

163.40 – 5.67 = 157.73

 

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.152132 = 152.13

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

Total EDA:

152.13 – 1.89 = 150.24

 

  307.97

Segment Distribution Value

  1000 – 157.73 = 842.27  1000 – 150.24 = 849.76  1,692.03
% change in principal due to the Put Option Component  -16.34%  -15.213%   
% change in principal due to the Charge Refund Component  0.567%  0.189%   
Total % change in Segment Account Value due to the EDA  -15.773%  -15.024%   

Example IV – The Index is up 40% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  40%  40%  Total

Put Option Factor

  0.000140  0.000000   

Early Distribution Adjustment

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.000140 = 0.14

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

Total EDA:

0.14 5.67 = –5.53

 

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * .000000 = 0.00

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 0.0075)) = 1.89

Total EDA:

0.00 1.89 = –1.89

 

  –7.42

Segment Distribution Value

  1000 – (–5.53) = 1005.53  1000 – (–1.89) = 1001.89  2,007.42
% change in principal due to the Put Option Component  -0.014%  0%   
% change in principal due to the Charge Refund Component  0.567%  0.189%   
Total % change in Segment Account Value due to the EDA  0.553%  0.189%   
(1)

Early Distribution Adjustment = (Segment Account Value) x [ (Put Option Factor)(Number of days between Valuation Date and Maturity Date)/(Number of days between Start Date and Maturity Date) x ( 0.0075 / (10.0075) )]. The denominator of the charge refund component of this formula,i.e., “(10.0075),” is an adjustment that is necessary in order for the pro rata refund of the Variable Index Benefit Charge to be based on the gross amount on which that charge was paid by the policy owner on the Segment Start Date.

(2)

Segment Distribution Value = (Segment Account Value)(Early Distribution Adjustment).

(3)

Derivation of Put Option Factor: In practice, the Put Option Factor will be calculated based on a Black Scholes model, with input values which are consistent with current market prices. We will utilize implied volatility quotesthe standard measure used by the market to quote option pricesas an input to a Black Scholes model in order to derive the estimated market prices. The input values to the Black Scholes model that have been utilized to generate the hypothetical examples above are as follows: (1) Implied volatility25%; (2) Libor rate corresponding to remainder of segment term1.09% annually; (3) Index dividend yield2% annually.

 

UnitI-2


B. Example of an Early Distribution Adjustment corresponding to a loan allocated to Segments, for the Segment Distribution Values and numberSegment Account Values listed above for a change in Index Value of units outstanding–40%

This example is meant to show the effect on a policy if, rather than a full distribution, you took a loan in the circumstances outlined in Example III above when the Index is down 40%. Thus the policy owner is assumed to have an initial Segment Account Value of 1,000 in each of Segment 1 and Segment 2. It is also assumed that 9 months remain until Segment 1’s maturity date and 3 months remain until Segment 2’s maturity date.

Loan Amount: 750

Loan Date: 3rd Friday of October, Calendar Year Y

Explanation of formulas is provided in notes (a)(d) below.

The Index is down 40% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  –40%  –40%  Total
Segment Account Value before Loan  1,000.00  1,000.00  2,000.00
Loan Allocation(a)     373.34     376.66     750.00
Early Distribution Adjustment(b)       69.91       66.59     136.55
Segment Account Value after Loan(c)     556.73     556.72  1,113.45
Segment Distribution Value after Loan(d)     468.93     473.10     942.03
(a)

When more than one Segment is being used, we would allocate the loan between the Segments proportionately to the Segment Distribution Value in each. We take the Segment Distribution Value of each Segment (shown in Example III above) and divide it by the total Segment Distribution Values for Segments 1 and 2. This gives us the proportionate amount of the loan that should be allocated to each Segment. For example, for Segment 1, that would be 750 x (842.27/1,692.03) = 373.34

(b)

This is the Early Distribution Adjustment that would be deducted from each Segment, as a result of the loan, based on the amount of the loan that is allocated to that Segment. It is equal to a percentage of the Early Distribution Adjustment that would apply if a full distribution from the Segment were being made, rather than only a partial distribution. This percentage would be 44.32545% for Segment 1 in this example: i.e., 373.34 (the amount of reduction in Segment Distribution Value as a result of the loan) divided by 842.27 (the Segment Distribution Value before the loan). Thus, the Early Distribution Adjustment that is deducted for Segment 1 due to the loan in this example would be 69.91 (i.e., 44.32545% of the 157.73 Early Distribution adjustment shown in Example III above that would apply if a full rather than only a partial distribution from the Segment were being made). Of this 69.91, 72.43 would be attributable to the Put Option Component and-2.51 would be attributable to the Charge Refund Component (which are calculated by applying 44.32545% to the 163.40 Put Option Component and the 5.67 Charge Refund Component shown in Example III). Similarly, the Early Distribution Adjustment deducted as a result of the loan from Segment 2 would be 66.59, of which 67.43 would be attributable to the Put Option Component and-0.84 would be attributable to the Charge Refund Component.

(c)

The Segment Account Value after Loan represents the Segment Account Value before Loan minus the Loan Allocation and the Early Distribution Adjustment. For example, for Segment 1, that would be 1,000 – 373.34 – 69.93 = 556.73.

(d)

Segment Distribution Value after Loan represents the amount a policy owner would receive from a Segment if they decided to surrender their policy immediately after this loan transaction. We would take thepre-loan Segment Distribution Value (shown in Example III above) and subtract the Loan Allocation. For example, for Segment 1, that would be 842.27 – 373.34 = 468.93.

I-3


Market Stabilizer Option® Available Under Certain Variable Life Insurance Policies Issued by Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company

Prospectus dated May 1, 2020

Please read and keep this Prospectus for future reference. It contains important information that you should know before purchasing or taking any other action under your policy. This Prospectus supersedes all prior prospectuses. Also, this Prospectus must be read along with the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus. This Prospectus is in addition to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus and all information in the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus continues to apply unless addressed by this Prospectus.

Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company (the “Company”, “we”, “our” and “us”), formerly AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company issues the Market Stabilizer Option® described in this Prospectus. The Market Stabilizer Option® is available only under certain variable life insurance policies that we offer and may not be available through your financial professional.

Among the many terms associated with the Market Stabilizer Option® are:

Index-Linked Return for approximately a one year period tied to the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index, which excludes dividends as described below.

Index-Linked Return will be applied at the end of the period (your Segment Term) on the Segment Maturity Date and only to amounts remaining within the segment until the Segment Maturity Date. The Index-Linked Return will not be applied before the Segment Maturity Date.

The Index-Linked Return could be positive, zero or in certain circumstances negative as described below. In the event that the S&P 500 Price Return index sustains a 100% loss, the maximum loss of principal would be 75%. Therefore, there is the possibility of a negative return on this investment at the end of your Segment Term, which could result in a significant loss of principal.

An Early Distribution Adjustment will be made for distributions (including deductions) from the Segment Account Value before the Segment Maturity Date.Any Early Distribution Adjustment that is made will cause you to lose principal through the application of a Put Option Factor, as explained later in this Prospectus, and that loss could potentially be substantial.Therefore you should carefully consider whether to make such distributions and/or maintain enough value in your Unloaned Guaranteed Interest Option (“Unloaned GIO”) and/or variable investment options to cover your monthly deductions. The Unloaned GIO is the portion of the Guaranteed Interest Option (“GIO”) that is not being held to secure policy loans you have taken. As described later in this Prospectus, we will attempt to maintain a reserve (Charge Reserve Amount) to cover your monthly deductions, but it is possible that the Charge Reserve Amount will be insufficient to cover your monthly deductions.

These are only some of the terms associated with the Market Stabilizer Option®. Please read this Prospectus for more details about the Market Stabilizer Option®. Also, this Prospectus must be read along with the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus as well as the appropriate variable life insurance policy and policy rider for this option. Please refer to page 4 of this Prospectus for a Definitions section that discusses these and other terms associated with the Market Stabilizer Option®.Please refer to page 7 of this Prospectus for a discussion of risk factors.

Other Equitable policies.  We offer a variety of fixed and variable life insurance policies which offer policy features, including investment options, that are different from those offered by this Prospectus. Not every policy or feature is offered through your financial professional. You can contact us to find out more about any other insurance policy.

What is the Market Stabilizer Option®?

The Market Stabilizer Option® (“MSO”) is an investment option available under certain variable life insurance policies. The option provides for participation in the performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index, which excludes dividends (the “Index”) up to the Growth Cap Rate that we set on the Segment Start Date. While the Growth Cap Rate is set

at the Company’s sole discretion, the Growth Cap Rate will not change during a Segment Term and the Growth Cap Rate will always be at least 6%. On the Segment Maturity Date, we will apply the Index-Linked Rate of Return to the Segment Account Value based on the performance of the Index. If the performance of the Index has been positive for the Segment Term and equal to or below the Growth Cap Rate, we will apply to the Segment Account Value an Index-Linked Rate of Return equal to the full Index performance. If the performance of the Index has been positive for the Segment Term and above the Growth Cap Rate, we will apply an Index-Linked Rate of Return equal to the Growth Cap Rate. If the Index has negative performance, the Index-Linked Rate of Return will be 0% unless the Index performance goes below-25% for the Segment Term. In that case only the negative performance in excess of-25% will be applied to the Segment Account Value and you bear the entire risk of loss of principal for the portion of negative performance that exceeds-25%. Please see “Index-Linked Return” in “Description of the Market Stabilizer Option®” later in this Prospectus.

Please note that you will not be credited with any positive Index performance with respect to amounts that are removed from a Segment prior to the Segment Maturity Date. Even when the Index performance has been positive, such early removals will cause you to lose some principal. Please see “Early Distribution Adjustment” later in this Prospectus.

Although under the appropriate variable life insurance policy, we reserve the right to apply a transfer charge up to $25 for each transfer among your investment options, there are no transfer charges for transfers into or out of the MSO Holding Account. Please note that once policy account value has been swept from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment, transfers into or out of that Segment before its Segment Maturity Date will not be permitted.

The Market Stabilizer Option® is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Standard & Poor’s (“S&P”) or its third party licensors. Neither S&P nor its third party licensors makes any representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of the Market Stabilizer Option® or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Market Stabilizer Option® particularly or the ability of the S&P 500 Price Return index (the “Index”) to track general stock market performance. S&P’s and its third party licensor’s only relationship to the Company is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of S&P and the third party licensors and of the Index which is determined, composed and calculated by S&P or its third party licensors without regard to the Company or the Market Stabilizer Option®. S&P and its third party licensors have no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the owners of the Market Stabilizer Option® into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the Index. Neither S&P nor its third party licensors is responsible for and has not participated in the determination of the prices and amount of the Market Stabilizer Option® or the timing of the issuance or sale of the Market Stabilizer Option® or in the determination or calculation of the equation by which the Market Stabilizer Option® is to be converted into cash. S&P has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Market Stabilizer Option®.

The SEC has not approved or disapproved these securities or determined if this Prospectus is accurate or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense. The contracts are not insured by the FDIC or any other agency. They are not deposits or other obligations of any bank and are not bank guaranteed. They are subject to investment risks and possible loss of principal.

EVM-111 (5/20)Cat # 145364
NB#811771

IL Leg II & IL Leg III, IL OPT III NY & PR only, IL‘99, IL 2000, IL Plus, COIL, VUL Opt, VUL Leg, COIL Inst Series all states


Contents of this Prospectus

Market Stabilizer Option®

The Company

3
1. Definitions  4
2. Fee Table Summary  6
3. Risk Factors  7
4. Description of the Market Stabilizer Option®  9
5. Distribution of the policies18
6. Incorporation of certain documents by reference19
Appendices
IEarly Distribution Adjustment ExamplesI-1
IIImpact of MSO Election on Other Policy Riders and/or ServicesII-1

When we address the reader of this Prospectus with words such as “you“ and “your,“ we mean the person who has the right or responsibility that the Prospectus is discussing at that point. This is usually the policy owner.

2


The Company

We are Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company, a New York stock life insurance corporation. We have been doing business since 1859. The Company is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of Equitable Holdings, Inc. No other company has any legal responsibility to pay amounts that the Company owes under the policies. The Company is solely responsible for paying all amounts owed to you under your policy.

Equitable Holdings, Inc. and its consolidated subsidiaries managed approximately $734.4 billion in assets as of December 31, 2019. For more than 160 years the Company has been among the largest insurance companies in the United States. We are licensed to sell life insurance and annuities in all fifty states, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Our home office is located at 1290 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10104.

How to reach us

Please refer to the “How to reach us” section of the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information regarding contacting us and communicating your instructions. We also have specific forms that we recommend you use for electing the MSO and any MSO transactions.

3


1. Definitions

Charge Reserve Amount—A minimum amount of policy account value in the Unloaned GIO (the portion of the Guaranteed Interest Option (“GIO”) that is not being held to secure policy loans you have taken) that you are required to maintain in order to approximately cover all of the estimated monthly charges for the policy (including, but not limited to, the policy’s monthly cost of insurance charge, the policy’s monthly administrative charge, the policy’s monthly mortality and expense risk charge, the MSO’s monthly Variable Index Segment Account Charge (the monthly charge deducted from the policy account) and any monthly optional rider charges (please see “Charges” later in this Prospectus for more information) during the Segment Term. The Charge Reserve Amount will be determined on each Segment Start Date as an amount projected to be sufficient to cover all of the policy’s monthly deductions during the Segment Term, assuming at the time such calculation is made that no interest or investment performance is credited to or charged against the policy account and that no policy changes or additional premium payments are made. The Charge Reserve Amount will be reduced by each subsequent monthly deduction (but not to less than zero).There is no requirement to maintain a Charge Reserve Amount, which would cover approximately all estimated monthly policy charges, if you are not in a Segment.Please see “Segments” later in this Prospectus for more information about the investment options from which account value could be transferred to the Unloaned GIO on a Segment Start Date in order to meet this requirement.

Downside Protection (also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Loss Absorption Threshold Rate”)—This is your protection against negative performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index for a Segment held until its Segment Maturity Date. It is currently-25%.The Downside Protection is set on the Segment Start Date and any Downside Protection in excess of-25% will be set at the Company’s sole discretion.However, the Downside Protection will not change during a Segment Term and at least-25% of Downside Protection will always be provided when a Segment is held until the Segment Maturity Date.

Early Distribution Adjustment (“EDA,” may also be referred to in your policy as the “Market Value Adjustment”)— The EDA is an adjustment that we make to your Segment Account Value, before a Segment matures, in the event you surrender your policy, take a loan from a Segment or if we should find it necessary to make deductions for monthly charges or any other distribution from a Segment. (Such other distributions would include any distributions from the policy that we deem necessary to continue to qualify the policy as life insurance under applicable tax law, any unpaid loan interest, or any distribution in connection with the exercise of a rider available under your policy.)An EDA that is made will cause you to lose principal through the application of a Put Option Factor, which estimates the market value, at the time of an early distribution, of the risk that you would suffer a loss if your Segment were continued (without taking the early distribution) until itsSegment Maturity Dateand that loss

could be substantial. However, because of a pro rata refund of certain charges already paid that is included in the EDA, the net effect of the EDA will not always result in the reduction of principal. The EDA will usually result in a reduction in your Segment Account Value and your other policy values. Therefore, you should give careful consideration before taking any early loan or surrender, or allowing the value in your other investment options to fall so low that we must make any monthly deduction from a Segment. Please see “Early Distribution Adjustment” later in this Prospectus for more information.

Growth Cap RateThe maximum rate of return that will be applied to a Segment Account Value.The Growth Cap Rate is set for each Segment on the Segment Start Date. While the Growth Cap Rate is set at the Company’s sole discretion,the Growth Cap Rate will not change during a Segment Term and the Growth Cap Rate will always be at least 6%.

IndexThe S&P 500 Price Return index, which is the S&P 500 index excluding dividends. This index includes 500 leading companies in leading industries in the U.S. economy.

Index Performance Rate — The Index Performance Rate measures the percentage change in the Index during a Segment Term for each Segment. If the Index is discontinued or if the calculation of the Index is substantially changed, we reserve the right to substitute an alternative index. We also reserve the right to choose an alternative index at our discretion. Please see “Change in Index” for more information.

The Index Performance Rate is calculated by ((b) divided by (a)) minus one, where:

(a)

is the value of the Index at the close of business on the Segment Start Date, and

(b)

is the value of the Index at the close of business on the Segment Maturity Date.

We determine the value of the Index at the close of business, which is the end of a business day. Generally, a business day is any day the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading. If the New York Stock Exchange is not open for trading or if the Index value is, for any other reason, not published on the Segment Start Date or a Segment Maturity Date, the value of the Index will be determined as of the end of the most recent preceding business day for which the Index value is published.

Index-Linked Rate of Return — The rate of return we apply to calculate the Index-Linked Return which is based on the Index Performance Rate adjusted to reflect the Growth Cap Rate and protection against negative performance. Therefore, if the performance of the Index is zero or positive, we will apply that performance up to the Growth Cap Rate. If the performance of the Index is negative, we will apply performance of zero unless the decline in the performance of the Index is below -25% in which case negative performance in excess of -25% will apply. Please see the chart under “Index-Linked Return” for more information.

4


Index-Linked Return — The amount that is applied to the Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date that is equal to that Segment’s Index-Linked Rate of Return multiplied by the Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date. The Index-Linked Return may be positive, negative or zero. The Indexed-Linked Return is only applied to amounts that remain in a Segment Account Value until the Segment Maturity Date. For example, a surrender of your policy before Segment maturity will eliminate any Index-Linked Return and be subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment.

Initial Segment Account — The amount initially transferred to a Segment from the MSO Holding Account on its Segment Start Date, net of:

(a)

the Variable Index Benefit Charge (see “Charges” later in this Prospectus)

and

(b)

the amount, if any, that may have been transferred from the MSO Holding Account to the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount (see “Charge Reserve Amount” later in this Prospectus). Such a transfer would be made from the MSO Holding Account to cover the Charge Reserve Amount only (1) if you have given us instructions to make such a transfer or (2) in the other limited circumstances described under “Segments” later in this Prospectus.

MSO Holding Account — This is a portion of the EQ/Money Market variable investment option exceptthat holds amounts designated by the policy owner for those options being offered forinvestment in the first time after December 31, 2018.MSO prior to any transfer into the next available new Segment.

 

    For the year ending December 31, 
    2018   2017 

EQ/Core Bond Index

          

Unit value

  $10.03   $10.03 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

   21    2 

EQ/Equity 500 Index

          

Unit value

  $10.65   $11.23 

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

   6    6 

EQ/Money Market

          

Unit value

        

Number of units outstanding (000’s)

        

Segment — The portion of your total investment in the MSO that is associated with a specific Segment Start Date. You create a new Segment each time an amount is transferred from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment Account.

Segment Account Value (also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Account”) — The amount of an Initial Segment Account subsequently reduced by any monthly deductions, policy loans and unpaid loan interest, and distributions from the policy that we deem necessary to continue to qualify the policy as life insurance under applicable tax law, which are allocated to the Segment. Any such reduction in the Segment Account Value prior to its Segment Maturity Date will result in a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment, which will cause you to lose principal, and that loss could be substantial. The Segment Account Value is used in determining policy account values, death benefits, and the net amount at risk for monthly cost of insurance calculations of the policy and the new base policy face amount associated with a requested change in death benefit option.

For example, if you put $1000 into the MSO Holding Account, $992.50 would go into a Segment. This amount represents the Initial Segment Account. The Segment Account Value represents the value in the Segment which gets reduced by any deductions allocated to the Segment, with corresponding EDAs, through the course of the Segment Term. The Segment Distribution Value represents what you would receive upon surrendering the policy and reflects the EDA upon surrender.

Segment Distribution Value (also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Value”) — This is the Segment Account Value minus the Early Distribution Adjustment that would apply on a full surrender of that Segment at any time prior to the Segment Maturity Date. Segment Distribution Values will be used in determining policy value available to cover monthly deductions, any applicable proportionate surrender charges for requested face amount reductions, and other distributions; cash surrender values and maximum loan values subject to any applicable base policy surrender charge. They will also be used in determining whether any outstanding policy loan and accrued loan interest exceeds the policy account value.

Segment Maturity GIO Limitation — A specified percentage limitation on the amount of your Segment Maturity Value that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. The Company reserves the right to implement a specified percentage limitation on the amount of your Segment Maturity Value that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. The specified percentage limitation can be changed at anytime, but it will never be less than 5% of your Segment Maturity Value. We will transfer any portion of your Segment Maturity Value that is allocated to the guaranteed interest option in excess of the Segment Maturity GIO Limitation to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option unless we receive your instructions prior to the Segment Maturity Date that the Segment Maturity Value should be allocated to the MSO Holding Account or to any other available variable investment option. See “Appendix II: Impact of MSO Election on Other Policy Riders and/or Services” for more information.

Segment Maturity Date — The date on which a Segment Term is completed and the Index-Linked Return for that Segment is applied to a Segment Account Value.

Segment Maturity Value — This is the Segment Account Value adjusted by the Index-Linked Return for that Segment.

Segment Start Date — The Segment Start Date is the day on which a Segment is created.

Segment Term — The duration of a Segment. The Segment Term for each Segment begins on its Segment Start Date and ends on its Segment Maturity Date one year later. We are currently only offering Segment Terms of approximately one year. We may offer different durations in the future.

 

I-25


Appendix II: State contract availability and/or variations of certain features and benefits2. Fee Table Summary

 

 

The following information is a summary of the states where the Structured Capital Strategies® contracts or certain features and/or benefits are either not available as of the date of this Prospectus or vary from the contract’s features and benefits as previously described in this Prospectus. Certain features and/or benefits may have been approved in your state after your contract was issued and cannot be added. Please contact your financial professional for more information about availability in your state.

States where certain Structured Capital Strategies® features and/or benefits are not available or vary:

MSO Charges 

When Charge is Deducted

 Current Non-guaranteed Guaranteed Maximum
Variable Index Benefit Charge On Segment Start Date 0.75% 0.75%
Variable Index Segment
Account Charge
 At the beginning of each policy month during the Segment Term 0.65% 1.65%
Total   1.40% 2.40%
StateOther Features and benefitsWhen Charge is Deducted  

Availability or variationMaximum Spread

Percentage that May

be Deducted

ArizonaLoan Interest Spread* for Amounts of Policy
Loans Allocated to MSO Segment
 See “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” in “Contract features and benefits”On each policy anniversary (or on loan
termination, if earlier)
  If you reside in the state of Arizona and you purchased your contract as a replacement for a different variable annuity contract or you are age 65 or older at the time the contract is issued, you may return your variable annuity contract within 30 days from the date you receive it and receive a refund of account value. This is also referred to as the “free look” period.
CaliforniaSee “We require that the following types of communications be on specific forms we provide for that purpose” in “How to reach us”You are not required to use our forms when making a transaction request. If a written request contains New York policies: 2%
all the information required to process the request, we will honor it.
See “Contract features and benefits” — “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days”If you reside in California and you are age 60 or older at the time the contract is issued, you may return your variable annuity contract within 30 days from the date that you receive it and receive a refund as described below.
If you allocate your entire initial contribution to the EQ/Money Market option, the amount of your refund will be equal to your contribution, unless you make a transfer, in which case the amount of your refund will be equal to your account value on the date we receive your request to cancel at our processing office. This amount could be less than your initial contribution. If you allocate any portion of your initial contribution to the variable investment options (other than the EQ/Money Market option), your refund will be equal to your account value on the date we receive your request to cancel at our processing office.
“Return of contribution” free look treatment available through certain selling broker-dealers
Certain selling broker-dealers offer an allocation method designed to preserve your right to a return of your contributions during the free look period. At the time of application, you will instruct your financial professional as to how your initial contribution and any subsequent contributions should be treated for the purpose of maintaining your free look right under the contract. Please consult your financial professional to learn more about the availability of “return of contribution” free look treatment.
If you choose “return of contribution” free look treatment of your contract, we will allocate your entire contribution and any subsequent contributions made during the 30 day period following the Contract Date, to the EQ/Money Market investment option. In the event you choose to exercise your free look right under the contract, you will receive a refund equal to your contributions.other policies: 5%

II-1


StateOther Features and benefitsWhen Charge is Deducted  

Availability or variationMaximum Amount

that May be

Deducted

California

(continued)

Early Distribution Adjustment
 On surrender or other distribution (including
loan) from an MSO Segment prior to its Segment
Maturity Date
  If75% of Segment Account Value**
*

We charge interest on policy loans but credit you choose the “return of contribution” free look treatment and your contract is still in effectwith interest on the 30th day (or next business day) followingamount of the Contract Date, we will automatically reallocate yourpolicy account value we hold as collateral for the loan. The “spread” is the difference between the interest rate we charge you on a policy loan and the interest rate we credit to you on the investment options chosenamount of your policy account value that we hold as collateral for the loan.

**

The actual amount of an Early Distribution Adjustment is determined by a formula that depends on, your application.

Any transfers made prior toamong other things, how the expirationIndex has performed since the Segment Start Date, as discussed in detail under “Early Distribution Adjustment” later in this Prospectus. The maximum amount of the 30 day free look will terminate your rightadjustment would occur if there is a total distribution at a time when the Index has declined to “return of contribution” treatment in the event you choose to exercise your free look right under the contract. Any transfer made prior to the 30th day following the Contract Date will cancel the automatic reallocation on the 30th day (or next business day) following the Contract Date described above. If you do not want the Company to perform this scheduled one-time reallocation, you must call one of our customer service representatives at 1 (800) 789-7771 before the 30th day following the Contract Date to cancel.zero.

This fee table applies specifically to the MSO and should be read in conjunction with the fee table in the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus.

The base variable life insurance policy’s mortality and expense risk charge will also apply to a Segment Account Value or any amounts held in the MSO Holding Account. If your policy’s mortality and expense risk charge is deducted on a daily basis, then the same daily rate will be applicable to any amounts held in the MSO Holding Account and an equivalent monthly rate will be applicable to the Segment Account Value. Please see “Charges” later in this Prospectus for more information. Please refer to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information.

Changes in charges

Any changes that we make in our current charges or charge rates will be on a basis that is equitable to all policies belonging to a given class, and will be determined based on reasonable assumptions as to expenses, mortality, investment income, lapses and policy and contract claims associated with morbidity. For the sake of clarity, the assumptions referenced above include taxes, the cost of hedging, longevity, volatility, other market conditions, surrenders, persistency, conversions, disability, accident, illness, inability to perform activities of daily living, and cognitive impairment, if applicable. Any changes in charges may apply to then in force policies, as well as to new policies. You will be notified in writing of any changes in charges under your policy.

6


3. Risk Factors

There are risks associated with some features of the Market Stabilizer Option®:

There is a risk of a substantial loss of your principal because you agree to absorb all losses from the portion of any negative Index performance that exceeds-25%.

Your Index-Linked Return is also limited by the Growth Cap Rate, which could cause your Index-Linked Return to be lower than it would otherwise be if you participated in the full performance of the S&P 500 Price Return index.

You will not know what the Growth Cap Rate is before the Segment starts. Therefore, you will not know in advance the upper limit on the return that may be credited to your investment in a Segment.

Negative consequences apply if, for any reason, amounts you have invested in a Segment are removed before the Segment Maturity Date. Specifically, with respect to the amounts removed early, you would (1) forfeit any positive Index performance and (2) be subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment that exposes you to a risk of potentially substantial loss of principal. This exposure is designed to be consistent with the treatment of losses on amounts held to the Segment Maturity Date.Even when the Index performance has been positive, the EDA will cause you to lose some principal on an early removal.

The following types of removals of account value from a Segment will result in the above-mentioned penalties to you, if the removals occur prior to the Segment Maturity Date: (a) a surrender of your policy; (b) a loan from your policy; (c) a distribution in order to enable your policy to continue to qualify as life insurance under the federal tax laws; (d) certain distributions in connection with the exercise of a rider available under your policy; and (e) a charge or unpaid policy loan interest that we deduct from your Segment Account Value because the Charge Reserve Amount and other funds are insufficient to cover them in their entirety. The Charge Reserve Amount may become insufficient because of policy changes that you request, additional premium payments, investment performance, policy loans, policy partial withdrawals from other investment options besides the MSO, and any increases we make in current charges for the policy (including for the MSO and optional riders).

Certain of the above types of early removals can occur (and thus result in penalties to you) without any action on your part. Examples include (i) certain distributions we might make from your Segment Account Value to enable your policy to continue to qualify as life insurance and (ii) deductions we might make from your Segment Account Value to pay charges if the Charge Reserve Amount becomes insufficient.

Any applicable EDA will generally be affected by changes in both the volatility and level of the S&P 500 Price Return Index. Any EDA applied to any Segment Account Value is linked to the estimated value of a put option on the S&P 500 Price Return index as described later in this Prospectus. The estimated value of the put option and, consequently, the amount of the EDA will generally be higher after increases in market volatility or after the Index experiences a negative return following the Segment Start Date.

Once policy account value is in a Segment, you cannot transfer out of a Segment and you can only make withdrawals out of a Segment if you surrender your policy. This would result in the imposition of any applicable surrender charges and EDA.

We may not offer new Segments so there is also the possibility that a Segment may not be available for a Segment Renewal at the end of your Segment Term(s).

We also reserve the right to substitute an alternative index for the S&P 500 Price Return index, which could reduce the Growth Cap Rates we can offer.

No company other than us has any legal responsibility to pay amounts that the Company owes under the policies. An owner should look to the financial strength of the Company for its claims-paying ability.

You do not have any rights in the securities underlying the index, including, but not limited to, (i) interest payments, (ii) dividend payments or (iii) voting rights.

Your Segment Maturity Value is dependent on the performance of the index on the Segment Maturity Date.

Upon advance notification, the Company reserves the right to implement a Segment Maturity GIO Limitation.

Past performance of the index is no indication of future performance.

The amounts required to be maintained in the Unloaned GIO for the Charge Reserve Amount during the Segment Term may earn a return that is less than the return you might have earned on those amounts in another investment option had you not invested in a Segment.

If your policy has the Loan Extension Endorsement, and your policy goes on Loan Extension while you have amounts invested in MSO, you will forfeit any positive index performance and be subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment with respect to these amounts. In addition, MSO will no longer be available once you go on Loan Extension. Please see ”Appendix II” later in this Prospectus for more information.

If you purchased your contract from a financial professional whose firm submits applications to the Company electronically, the Dollar Cap Averaging Program may not be available at the time your contract is issued. If this is the case and you wish to participate in the program after your contract has been issued, you must make your election on the applicable paper form and submit it to us separately. Depending on when we receive your form, you may miss the first available date on which your account value would otherwise be transferred to your designated Segment Type Holding Accounts.
See “Dollar Cap Averaging Program” and “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” in “Contract features and benefits”If you elect to invest in the Dollar Cap Averaging Program, you will not be eligible for the “return of contribution” free look treatment. By electing the Dollar Cap Averaging Program, you would only be eligible to receive a return of account value if you free look your contract.
See “Charges and expenses”— “Disability, terminal illness, or confinement to a nursing home” (For Series B contracts only)Items (i)-(iii) under this section are deleted in their entirety and replaced with:
 

(i) We receive proof satisfactoryIf your policy allows you to us (including certification byelect the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider, after a U.S. licensed physician) that the Owner hasperiod of coverage ends before coverage is continued as a chronic illness as defined pursuant to either (a) or (b) below;Nonforfeiture Benefit, if any MSO Segments are

(a)   unable to perform two activities of daily living (bathing, continence, dressing, eating, toileting and transferring), meaning the Owner needs human assistance, or needs continual substantial supervision; or

(b)   impairment of cognitive ability, meaning a deterioration or loss of intellectual capacity due to mental illness or disease, including Alzheimer’s disease or related illnesses, that requires continual supervision to protect oneself or others.

7


  

in effect, they will be terminated with corresponding early distribution adjustments. Please see “Appendix II” later in this Prospectus for more information.

You must forgo the additional no lapse guarantee benefit provided by the Extended No Lapse Guarantee Rider, if available with your policy, if you want to allocate to the MSO. Please see ”Appendix II” later in this Prospectus for more information.

If you do not specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate acceptable to you, your account value could transfer into a Segment with a Growth Cap Rate that may be lower than what you would have chosen.

For certain variable life insurance policies, the MSO is not available while the Paid Up Death Benefit Guarantee is in effect. Please see ”Appendix II” later in this Prospectus for more information.

For certain variable life insurance policies, if a paid up death benefit guarantee is included with your policy, and if you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee while any Segment is in effect, all Segments will be terminated with corresponding Early Distribution Adjustments. If this occurs, the Segment Distribution Value will be used in place of the Segment Account Value in the calculation of your policy account value for purposes of determining the paid up death benefit guarantee face amount. Please see ”Appendix II” later in this Prospectus for more information.

If you elect to exercise the Policy Continuation Rider, if available with your policy, all Segments will be terminated subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment. Please see ”Appendix II” later in this Prospectus for more information.

If a Living Benefits Rider or an accelerated death benefit rider (which may be referred to as a “total and permanent disability accelerated death benefit rider” or a “limited life expectancy accelerated death benefit rider”) is included with your policy, the portion of the cash surrender value that is on lien and is allocated to your values in the variable investment options under your policy and investment in the MSO will be transferred to and maintained as part of the Unloaned GIO. Please see ”Appendix II” later in this Prospectus for more information.

You must terminate the enhanced death benefit guarantee rider, if available with your policy, if you want to allocate to the MSO. Please see ”Appendix II” later in this Prospectus for more information.

If your policy has a face amount increase endorsement, term insurance riders, or cost of living riders that schedule or permit an increase in the face amount of your policy and/or the face amount of a term insurance rider, any such increase during a Segment Term will be subject to the “face amount increases” provision of the MSO rider. Please see ”Appendix II” later in this Prospectus for more information.

8


4. Description of the Market Stabilizer Option®

We offer a Market Stabilizer Option® that provides a rate of return tied to the performance of the Index.

MSO Holding Account

The amount of each transfer or loan repayment you make to the MSO, and the balance of each premium payment you make to the MSO after any premium charge under your base policy has been deducted, will first be placed in the MSO Holding Account. The MSO Holding Account is a portion of the regular EQ/Money Market variable investment option that will hold amounts allocated to the MSO until the next available Segment Start Date. The MSO Holding Account has the same rate of return as the EQ/Money Market variable investment option and is subject to the same underlying portfolio operating expenses as that variable investment option. Please refer to “Risk/benefit summary: charges and expenses you will pay” of the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information regarding such expenses. We currently plan on offering new Segments on a monthly basis but reserve the right to offer them less frequently or to stop offering them or to suspend offering them temporarily.

Before any account value is transferred into a Segment, you can transfer amounts from the MSO Holding Account into other investment options available under your policy at any time subject to any transfer restrictions within your policy. You can transfer into and out of the MSO Holding Account at any time up to and including the Segment Start Date provided your transfer request is received at our administrative office by such date. For example, you can transfer policy account value into the MSO Holding Account on the 3rd Friday of June. That policy account value would transfer into the Segment starting on that date, subject to the conditions mentioned earlier. You can also transfer policy account value out of the MSO Holding Account before the end of the business day on the Segment Start Date and that account value would not be swept into the Segment starting on that date. Please refer to the “How to reach us” section of the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information regarding contacting us and communicating your instructions. We also have specific forms that we recommend you use for electing the MSO and any MSO transactions.

On the Segment Start Date, account value in the MSO Holding Account, excluding charges and any account value transferred to cover the Charge Reserve Amount, will be transferred into a Segment if all requirements and limitations are met that are discussed under “Segments” immediately below.

Segments

Each Segment will have a Segment Start Date of the 3rd Friday of each calendar month and will have a Segment Maturity Date on the 3rd Friday of the same calendar month in the succeeding calendar year.

In order for any amount to be transferred from the MSO Holding Account into a new Segment on a Segment Start Date, all of the following conditions must be met on that date:

(1)

(ii)   We receive proof satisfactoryThe Growth Cap Rate for that Segment must be equal to or greater than your minimum Growth Cap Rate (Please see “Growth Cap Rate” later in this Prospectus).

(2)

There must be sufficient account value available within the Unloaned GIO and the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account to cover the Charge Reserve Amount as determined by us (including certification by a U.S. licensed physician)on such date (Please see “Charge Reserve Amount” later in this Prospectus).

(3)

The Growth Cap Rate must be greater than the sum of the annual interest rate we are currently crediting on the Unloaned GIO (“A”), the Variable Index Benefit Charge rate (“B”), the annualized monthly Variable Index Segment Account Charge rate (“C”) and the current annualized monthly mortality and expense risk charge rate (“D”). The Growth Cap Rate must be greater than (A+B+C+D). This is to ensure that the Owner’s life expectancy is twelve months or less.highest possible rate of return that could be received in a Segment after these charges (B+C+D) have been considered exceeds the interest crediting rate currently being offered in the Unloaned GIO.

(4)

It must not be necessary, as determined by us on that date, for us to make a distribution from the policy during the Segment Term in order for the policy to continue to qualify as life insurance under applicable tax law.

(5)

The total amount allocated to your Segments under your policy on that date must be less than any limit we may have established.

If there is sufficient policy account value in the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount, then no transfers from other investment options to the Unloaned GIO will need to be made. If there is insufficient value in the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount and we do not receive instructions from you specifying the investment options from which we should transfer the account value to the Unloaned GIO to meet Charge Reserve Amount requirements at the Segment Start Date, or the transfer instructions are not possible due to insufficient funds, then the required amount will be transferred proportionately from your variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account.

If after any transfers there would be an insufficient amount in the Unloaned GIO to cover the Charge Reserve Amount or the Growth Cap Rate for the next available Segment does not qualify per your minimum Growth Cap Rate instructions and the conditions listed above, then your amount in the MSO Holding Account will remain there until we receive further instruction from you. We will mail you a notice informing you that your account value did or did not transfer from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment. These notices are mailed on or about the next business day after the applicable Segment Start Date. Please see “Requested Face Amount Increases” later in this Prospectus for more information about the investment options from which account value could be transferred to the Unloaned GIO on the effective date of a requested face amount increase.

9


Segment Maturity

Near the end of the Segment Term, we will notify you between 15 and 45 days before the Segment Maturity Date that a Segment is about to mature. At that time, you may choose to have all or a part of:

(a)

the Segment Maturity Value rolled over into the MSO Holding Account

(b)

the Segment Maturity Value transferred to the variable investment options available under your policy

(c)

the Segment Maturity GIO transferred to the Unloaned GIO subject to any Segment Maturity GIO Limitation that we may impose.

If we do not receive your transfer instructions before the Segment Maturity Date, your Segment Maturity Value will automatically be rolled over into the MSO Holding Account for investment in the next available Segment, subject to the conditions listed under “Segments” above.

However, if we are not offering the MSO at that time, we will transfer the Segment Maturity Value to the investment options available under your policy per your instructions or to the EQ/Money Market investment option if no instructions are received. If the Segment Maturity GIO Limitation is in effect, then you may only allocate up to a specified percentage of your Segment Maturity Value to the guaranteed interest option. That limitation will never be less than 5% of your Segment Maturity Value. Any portion of the Segment Maturity Value that is allocated to the guaranteed interest option in excess of the Segment Maturity GIO Limitation will be allocated to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option unless we receive your instructions prior to the Segment Maturity Date that the Segment Maturity Value should be allocated to any other available variable investment option. Please see “Right to Discontinue and Limit Amounts Allocated to the MSO” and “Segment Maturity GIO Limitation” for more information. Although under the appropriate variable life insurance policy we reserve the right to apply a transfer charge up to $25 for each transfer among your investment options, there will be no transfer charges for any of the transfers discussed in this section.

Growth Cap Rate

By allocating your account value to the MSO, you can participate in the performance of the Index up to the applicable Growth Cap Rate that we declare on the Segment Start Date.

Please note that this means you will not know the Growth Cap Rate for a new Segment until after the account value has been transferred from the MSO Holding Account into the Segment and you are not allowed to transfer the account value out of a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date. Please see “Transfers” below.

Each Segment is likely to have a different Growth Cap Rate. However, the Growth Cap Rate will never be less than 6%.

Your protection against negative performance for a Segment held until its Segment Maturity Date is currently-25% (“Downside Protection” also referred to in your policy as the “Segment Loss Absorption Threshold Rate”). We reserve the right, for new Segments, to increase your Downside Protection against negative performance. For example, if we were to adjust the Downside Protection for a Segment to-100%, the Index-Linked Rate of Return for that Segment would not go below 0%. Please note that any increase in the protection against negative performance would likely result in a lower Growth Cap Rate than would otherwise apply. We will provide notice

between 15 and 45 days before any change in the Downside Protection is effective. Any change would only apply to new Segments started after the effective date of the change, which (coupled with the15-45 day notice we will give) will afford you the opportunity to decline to participate in any Segment that reflects a change in the Downside Protection.

Any increases in the Growth Cap Rate above the minimum 6%and increases in Downside Protection from the minimum-25% are set at the Company’s sole discretion. However, the Growth Cap Rate can never be less than 6% and we may only increase your Downside Protection from the current -25%.

As part of your initial instructions in selecting the MSO, you will specify what your minimum acceptable Growth Cap Rate is for a Segment. You may specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate from 6% to 10%. If the Growth Cap Rate we set, on the Segment Start Date, is below the minimum you specified then the account value will not be transferred from the MSO Holding Account into that Segment. If you do not specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate then your minimum Growth Cap Rate will be set at 6%. Therefore, if you do not specify a minimum acceptable Growth Cap Rate, account value could transfer into a Segment with a Growth Cap Rate that may be lower than what you would have chosen. In addition, for account value to transfer into a Segment from the MSO Holding Account, the Growth Cap Rate must be greater than the sum of the annual interest rate we are currently crediting on the Unloaned GIO (“A”), the Variable Index Benefit Charge rate (“B”), the annualized monthly Variable Index Segment Account Charge rate (“C”) and the current annualized monthly mortality and expense risk charge rate (“D”). The Growth Cap Rate must be greater than (A+B+C+D).

For example, assume that the annual interest rate we are currently crediting on the Unloaned GIO were 4.00%, the Variable Index Benefit Charge rate were 0.75%, the annualized monthly Variable Index Segment Account charge rate were 0.65% and the annualized monthly mortality and expense risk charge rate were 0.85%. Based on those assumptions (which we provide only for illustrative purposes and will not necessarily correspond to actual rates), because these numbers total 6.25%, no amounts would be transferred into any Segment unless we declare a Growth Cap Rate that is higher than 6.25%. Please see “Index-Linked Return” later in this Prospectus for more information.

As another example, you may specify a minimum Growth Cap Rate of 8%. If we set the Growth Cap Rate at 8% or higher for a Segment then a transfer from the MSO Holding Account will be made into that new Segment provided all other requirements and conditions discussed in this Prospectus are met. If we set the Growth Cap Rate below 8% then no transfer from the MSO Holding Account will be made into that Segment. No transfer will be made until a Segment Growth Cap Rate equal to or greater than 8% is set and all requirements are met or you transfer account value out of the MSO Holding Account.

Growth Cap Rate Available During Initial Year

(Does not apply to Incentive Life®, Incentive Life® 2000,Incentive Life Plus® and VUL LegacySM policies)

If you allocate policy account value to any Segment that commences during the first year that the MSO is available to you under your policy, our current practice is to establish a Growth Cap Rate that is at least 15%. This 15% minimum Growth Cap Rate would apply to all Segment Terms that commence:

 

II-210


StateFeatures and benefitsAvailability or variation

California

(continued)

(iii)  The Owner is receiving, as prescribed by a physician, registered nurse, or licensed social worker, home care or community-based services (including adult day care, personal care, homemaker services, hospice services or respite care) or, is confined in a skilled nursing facility, convalescent nursing home, or extended care facility, which shall not be defined more restrictively than as in the Medicare program, or is confined in a residential care facility or residential care facility for the elderly, as defined in the Health and Safety Code. Out-of-state providers of services shall be defined as comparable in licensure and staffing requirements to California providers.

See “More information” — “Transfers of ownership, collateral assignments, loans, and borrowing”You can transfer ownership of an NQ contract at any time before annuity payments begin. You may assign your contract, unless otherwise restricted for tax qualification purposes.
ConnecticutSee “Charges for each additional transfer in excess of 12 transfers per contract year” in “Fee table” and “Transfer charge” in “Charges and expenses”The charge for transfers does not apply.
See “Special services charges” in “Fee table” and under “Charges and expenses”The maximum charge for check preparation is $9 per occurrence.
The charge for third-party transfers or exchanges does not apply.
See “Charges and expenses — Disability, terminal illness, or confinement to a nursing home” (For Series B contracts only)Waiver (i) is not available.
FloridaSee “How you can purchase and contribute to your contract” in “Contract features and benefits”In the third paragraph of this section, item (i) now reads: “(i) contributions under a Structured Capital Strategies® contract would then total more than $1,500,000;” and item (ii) regarding the $2,500,000 limitation on contributions is deleted. The remainder of this section is unchanged.
See “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” in “Contract features and benefits”If you reside in the state of Florida, you may cancel your variable annuity contract and return it to us within 21 days from the date that you receive it. You will receive an unconditional refund equal to the greater of the cash surrender value provided in the annuity contract, plus any fees or charges deducted from the contributions or imposed under the contract, or a refund of all contributions paid.
See “Selecting an annuity payout option” under “Your annuity payout options” in “Accessing your money”The following sentence replaces the first sentence of the second paragraph in this section:
You can choose the date annuity payments are to begin, but it may not be earlier than twelve months from the contract date.
See “Special service charges” under “Charges and expenses” (For Series B contracts only)We will not impose a charge for third-party transfers or exchanges.
See “Withdrawal charge” in “Charges and expenses” (For Series B contracts only)If you are age 65 or older at the time your contract is issued, the applicable withdrawal charge will not exceed 10% of the amount withdrawn.
HawaiiSee “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” in “Contract features and benefits”If you live in Hawaii, you will receive a refund of your contributions.
IdahoSee “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” under “Contract features and benefits”If you reside in the state of Idaho, you may return your contract within 20 days from the date that you receive it and receive a refund of your initial contribution.
IllinoisSee “Selecting an annuity payout option” under “Your annuity payout options” in “Accessing your money”You can choose the date annuity payments are to begin, but it may not be earlier than twelve months from the contract date.

During the first policy year, if the MSO was available to you as a feature of your policy when the policy was issued; or

Forin-force policies, during the one year period beginning with the date when the MSO was first made available to you after your policy was issued.

We may terminate or change this 15% initial year minimum Growth Cap Rate at any time; but any such change or termination would apply to you only if your policy is issued, or the MSO was first made available to you, after such modification or termination.

After this initial year 15% minimum Growth Cap Rate, the minimum Growth Cap Rate will revert back to 6%.

Index-Linked Return

We calculate the Index-Linked Return for a Segment by taking the Index-Linked Rate of Return and multiplying it by the Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date. The Segment Account Value is net of the Variable Index Benefit Charge described below as well as any monthly deductions, policy loans and unpaid interest, distributions from the policy that we deem necessary to continue to qualify the policy as life insurance under applicable tax law and any corresponding Early Distribution Adjustments. The Segment Account Value does not include the Charge Reserve Amount described later in this Prospectus.

The following table demonstrates the Index-Linked Rate of Return and the Segment Maturity Value on the Segment Maturity Date based upon a hypothetical range of returns for the S&P 500 Price Return index. This example assumes a 15% Growth Cap Rate and a $1,000 investment in the MSO Segment.

Index Performance
Rate of the S&P 500
Price Return index
  Index-Linked Rate of
Return
  Segment Maturity
Value
50%  15%  $1,150
25%  15%  $1,150
10%  10%  $1,100
0%  0%  $1,000
-25%  0%  $1,000
-50%  -25%  $750
-75%  -50%  $500
-100%  -75%  $250

For instance, we may set the Growth Cap Rate at 15%. Therefore, if the Index has gone up 20% over your Segment Term, you will receive a 15% credit to your Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date. If the Index had gone up by 13% from your Segment Start Date to your Segment Maturity Date then you would receive a credit of 13% to your Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date.

If the Index had gone down 20% over the Segment Term then you would receive a return of 0% to your Segment Account Value on the Segment Maturity Date.

If the Index had gone down by 30% by your Segment Maturity Date then your Segment Account Value would be reduced by 5% on the Segment Maturity Date. The Downside Protection feature of the MSO will absorb the negative performance of the Index up to-25%.

The minimum Growth Cap Rate is 6%. However, account value will only transfer into a new Segment from the MSO Holding Account if the Growth Cap Rate is equal to or greater than your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate and meets the conditions discussed earlier in the “Growth Cap Rate” section.

In those instances where the account value in the MSO Holding Account does not transfer into a new Segment, the account value will remain in the MSO Holding Account until the next available, qualifying Segment unless you transfer the account value into the Unloaned GIO and/or other investment option available under your policy subject to any conditions and restrictions.

For instance, if we declare the Growth Cap Rate to be 6% and your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate is 6% but we are currently crediting an annual interest rate on the Unloaned GIO that is greater than or equal to 6% minus the sum of the charges (B+C+D) discussed in the Growth Cap Rate section then your account value will remain in the MSO Holding Account on the date the new Segment would have started.

As indicated above, you must transfer account value out of the MSO Holding Account into the Unloaned GIO and/or other investment options available under your policy if you do not want to remain in the MSO Holding Account.

If we declare the Growth Cap Rate to be 6% and your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate is 6% and if the sum of the charges (B+C+D) discussed in the “Growth Cap Rate” section plus the annual interest rate on the Unloaned GIO are less than 6% and all requirements are met then the net amount of the account value in the MSO Holding Account will transfer into a new Segment.

If you specified a minimum Growth Cap Rate of 10% in the above examples then account value would not transfer into a new Segment from the MSO Holding Account because the Growth Cap Rate did not meet your specified minimum Growth Cap Rate.

The Index-Linked Return is only applied to amounts that remain in a Segment until the Segment Maturity Date. For example, a surrender of your policy before Segment maturity will eliminate any Index-Linked Return and be subject to a Early Distribution Adjustment.

Change in Index

If the Index is discontinued or if the calculation of the Index is substantially changed, we reserve the right to substitute an alternative index. We also reserve the right to choose an alternative index at our discretion.

If we were to substitute an alternative index at our discretion, we would provide notice 45 days before making that change. The new index would only apply to new Segments. Any outstanding Segments would mature on their original Segment Maturity Dates.

With an alternative index, the Downside Protection would remain the same or greater. However, an alternative index may reduce the Growth Cap Rates we can offer. We would attempt to choose a substitute index that has a similar investment objective and risk profile to the S&P 500 Price Return index.

If the S&P 500 Price Return index were to be discontinued or substantially changed, thereby affecting the Index-Linked Return of existing Segments, we will mature the Segments based on the most

 

II-311


State

recently available closing value of the Index before it is discontinued or changed. Such maturity will be as of the date of such most recently available closing value of the Index and we will use that closing value to calculate the Index-linked Return through that date. We would apply the full Index performance to that date subject to the full Growth Cap Rate and Downside Protection. For example, if the Index was up 12% at the time we matured the Segment and the Growth Cap Rate was 8%, we would credit an 8% return to your Segment Account Value. If the Index was down 30% at the time we matured the Segment, we would credit a 5% negative return to your Segment Account Value. We would provide notice about maturing the Segment, as soon as practicable and ask for instructions on where to transfer your Segment Maturity Value.

If we are still offering Segments at that time, you can request that the Segment Maturity Value be invested in a new Segment, in which case we will hold the Segment Maturity Value in the MSO Holding Account for investment in the next available Segment subject to the same terms and conditions discussed above under MSO Holding Account and Segments.

In the case of any of the types of early maturities discussed above, there would be no transfer charges or EDA applied and you can allocate the Segment Maturity Value to the investment options available under your policy. Please see “Segment Maturity” earlier in this Prospectus for more information. If we continued offering new Segments, then such a change in the Index may cause lower Growth Cap Rates to be offered. However, we would still provide a minimum Growth Cap Rate of 6% and minimum Downside Protection of-25%. We also reserve the right to not offer new Segments. Please see “Right to Discontinue and Limit Amounts Allocated to the MSO” later in this Prospectus.

Features and benefitsAvailability or variation
MarylandSeries C contractsNot available.
Contract exchangesWithdrawal charges will not apply if an eligible contract issued by us is exchanged for a Structured Capital Strategies® contract.
MassachusettsSee “Disability, terminal illness or confinement to nursing home” under “Withdrawal charge” in “Charges and expenses” (For Series B contracts only)This section is deleted in its entirety.
New HampshireSee “Disability, terminal illness, or confinement to a nursing home” under “Withdrawal charge” in “Charges and expenses” (For Series B contracts only)

Waiver (iii) regarding the definition of a nursing home is deleted, and replaced with the following:

You are confined to a nursing home for more than 90 days (or such other period, as required in your state) as verified by a licensed physician. A nursing home for this purpose means one that is (a) approved by Medicare as a provider of skilled nursing care services, or qualified to receive approval of Medicare benefits, or (b) operated pursuant to law as a skilled nursing home by the state or territory in which it is located (it must be within the United States, Puerto Rico, U.S. Virgin Islands, or Guam) and meets all of the following:

•  its main function is to provide skilled, intermediate, or custodial nursing care;

•  it provides continuous room and board;

•  it is supervised by a registered nurse or licensed practical nurse;

•  it keeps daily medical records of each patient;

•  it controls and records all medications dispenses; and

•  its primary service is other than to provide housing for residents.

New JerseySee “Owner and annuitant requirements” in “Contract features and benefits”Joint owners or joint annuitants are not required to be spouses.
See “Withdrawals treated as surrenders” under “Accessing your money”We will not terminate a contract if there have been no contributions made during the last three completed contract years, and the account value is less than $500, or if you make a withdrawal that would result in a cash value of less than $500.
New YorkQP (Defined Benefit and Defined Contribution) contractsNot available.
See “Indices” under “Structured Investment Option” in “Contract features and benefits”The following Indices are not available:

•  Financial Select Sector SPDR® Fund

•  iShares® Dow Jones U.S. Real Estate Index Fund

•  Energy Select Sector SPDR® Fund

•  SPDR® Gold Shares

•  iShares® MSCI EAFE ETF

See “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” in “Contract features and benefits” and also see “Calculation Formula” in “Appendix III: Segment Interim Value”The second paragraph under “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

II-4Charges


StateFeatures and benefitsAvailability or variation

New York

(continued)

Your refund will equal your account value under the contract on the day we receive written notification of your decision to cancel the contract and will reflect any investment gain or loss in the variable investment options (less the daily charges we deduct) through the date we receive your contract. This includes a modified calculation of the Segment Interim Value for amounts allocated to existing Segments. For any IRA contract returned to us within seven days after you receive it, we are required to refund the full amount of your contribution.
Only for the purpose of calculating your refunded amount if you exercise your right to cancel within a certain number of days, your Segment Interim Value is equal to the sum of the following components:

(1) Fair Value of Fixed Instruments; plus

(2) Fair Value of Derivatives; plus

(3) Cap Calculation Factor (computed based on the assumption that we have not incurred any expense).

See “Withdrawals treated as surrenders” in “Accessing your money”The paragraph under “Withdrawals treated as surrenders” is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:
We have the right to pay the cash value and terminate the contract if no contributions are made during the last three completed contract years and you make a withdrawal that would result in a cash value of less than $500. For the tax consequences of withdrawals, see “Tax information” later in this Prospectus.
See “The amount applied to purchase an annuity payout option” in “Accessing your money”If a life contingent annuity payout option is elected, the amount applied to the annuity benefit will be 100% of the account value and any applicable withdrawal charge will be waived.
If a non-life contingent annuity payout option is elected, the amount applied to the annuity benefit is the greater of the cash value or 95% of what the account value would be if no withdrawal charge applied.
See “Owner and annuitant requirements” in “Contract features and benefits”Joint annuitants do not have to be spouses.
See “Disability, terminal illness, or confinement to a nursing home” in “Charges and expenses”Item (i) is deleted and replaced with the following: An owner (or older joint owner, if applicable) has qualified to receive Social Security disability benefits as certified by the Social Security Administration or meets the definition of a total disability as specified in the contract. To qualify, a recertification statement from a physician will be required every 12 months from the date disability is determined.
See “Transfers of ownership, collateral assignments, loans and borrowing” in “More information”You may assign all or a portion of your contract at any time, unless otherwise restricted for tax qualification purposes.
North DakotaSee “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” in “Contract features and benefits”To exercise your cancellation right, you must return the certificate directly to our processing office within 20 days after you receive it.
Pennsylvania

Contributions

See “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” in “Contract features and benefits”

Your contract refers to contributions as premiums.

To exercise your cancellation right, you must return the certificate directly to our processing office within 20 days after you receive it.

There is a current percentage charge of 1.40% of any policy account value allocated to each Segment. We reserve the right to increase or decrease the charge although it will never exceed 2.40%. Of this percentage charge, 0.75% will be deducted on the Segment Start Date from the amount being transferred from the MSO Holding Account into the Segment as anup-front charge (“Variable Index Benefit Charge”), with the remaining 0.65% annual charge (of the current Segment Account Value) being deducted from the policy account on a monthly basis during the Segment Term (“Variable Index Segment Account Charge”).

MSO Charges  Current
Non-
guaranteed
  Guaranteed
Maximum
Variable Index Benefit Charge  0.75%  0.75%
Variable Index Segment Account Charge  0.65%  1.65%
Total  1.40%  2.40%

This fee table applies specifically to the MSO and should be read in conjunction with the fee table in the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus. Please also see Loans later in this Prospectus for information regarding the “spread” you would pay on any policy loan.

The base variable life insurance policy’s mortality and expense risk charge will also be applicable to a Segment Account Value or any amounts held in the MSO Holding Account. If your policy’s mortality

and expense risk charge is deducted on a monthly basis, then the same monthly rate will also be applicable to the Segment Account Value or any amounts held in the MSO Holding Account. If your policy’s mortality and expense risk charge is deducted on a daily basis, then the same daily rate will be applicable to any amounts held in the MSO Holding Account and an equivalent monthly rate will be applicable to the Segment Account Value. Please refer to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for more information.

If a Segment is terminated prior to maturity by policy surrender, or reduced prior to maturity by monthly deductions (if other funds are insufficient) or by loans or a Guideline PremiumForce-out as described below, we will refund a proportionate amount of the Variable Index Benefit Charge corresponding to the surrender or reduction and the time remaining until Segment Maturity. The refund will be administered as part of the Early Distribution Adjustment process as described above. This refund will increase your surrender value or remaining Segment Account Value, as appropriate. Please see Appendix I for an example and further information.

Charge Reserve Amount

If you elect the Market Stabilizer Option®, you are required to maintain a minimum amount of policy account value in the Unloaned GIO to approximately cover the estimated monthly charges for the policy, (including, but not limited to, the MSO and any optional riders) for the Segment Term. This is the Charge Reserve Amount.

The Charge Reserve Amount will be determined on each Segment Start Date as an amount projected to be sufficient to cover all of the policy’s monthly deductions during the Segment Term, assuming at the time such calculation is made that no interest or investment performance is credited to or charged against the policy account and that no policy changes or additional premium payments are made. The Charge Reserve Amount on other than a Segment Start Date (or the effective date of a requested face amount increase — please see “Requested Face Amount Increases” below for more information) will be the Charge Reserve Amount determined as of the latest Segment Start Date (or effective date of a face amount increase) reduced by each subsequent monthly deduction during the longest remaining Segment Term, although it will never be less than zero. This means, for example, that if you are in a Segment (Segment A) and then enter another Segment (Segment B) 6 months later, the Charge Reserve Amount would bere-calculated on the start date of Segment B. The Charge Reserve Amount would bere-calculated to cover all of the policy’s monthly deductions during the Segment Terms for both Segments A and B.

When you select the MSO, as part of your initial instructions, you will be asked to specify the investment options from which we should transfer the account value to the Unloaned GIO to meet Charge Reserve Amount requirements, if necessary. No transfer restrictions apply to amounts that you wish to transfer into the Unloaned GIO to meet the Charge Reserve Amount requirement. If your values in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account and the unloaned portion of our GIO are insufficient to cover the Charge Reserve Amount, no new Segment will be established. Please see “Segments” above for more information regarding the Charge Reserve Amount and how amounts may be transferred to meet this requirement.

Please note that the Charge Reserve Amount may not be sufficient to cover actual monthly deductions during the Segment Term. Although

 

II-512


StateFeatures and benefitsAvailability or variation

Pennsylvania

(continued)

Terminal illnessYour contract refers to “terminal illness” as “6-month life expectancy”.
Required disclosure for Pennsylvania customersAny person who knowingly and with intent to defraud any insurance company or other person files an application for insurance or statement of claim containing any materially false information or conceals for the purpose of misleading, information concerning any fact material thereto commits a fraudulent insurance act, which is a crime and subjects such person to criminal and civil penalties.
Puerto RicoInherited IRANot available.
Beneficiary continuation optionNot available.
QP (Defined Benefit and Defined Contribution) contractsNot available.
IRA and Roth IRAAvailable for direct rollovers from U.S. source 401(a) plans and direct transfers from the same type of U.S. source IRAs.
See footnote 1 in “Fee table” and “Charges for state premium and other applicable taxes” in “Charges and Expenses”There is no premium tax charge imposed.
See “Purchase considerations for a charitable remainder trusts” under “Owner and annuitant requirements” in “Contract features and benefits”We do not offer Structured Capital Strategies® contracts to charitable remainder trusts in Puerto Rico.
See “Taxation of nonqualified annuities” in “Tax information”There are special rules for nonqualified contracts issued in Puerto Rico.
Income from NQ contracts we issue is U.S. source. A Puerto Rico resident is subject to U.S. taxation on such U.S. source income. Only Puerto Rico source income of Puerto Rico residents is excludable from U.S. taxation. Income from NQ contracts is also subject to Puerto Rico tax. The calculation of the taxable portion of amounts distributed from a contract may differ in the two jurisdictions. Therefore, you might have to file both U.S. and Puerto Rico tax returns, showing different amounts of income from the contract for each tax return. Puerto Rico generally provides a credit against Puerto Rico tax for U.S. tax paid. Depending on your personal situation and the timing of the different tax liabilities, you may not be able to take full advantage of this credit.
We require owners or beneficiaries of annuity contracts in Puerto Rico which are not individuals to be required to complete the appropriate Form W-8 describing the entity type to avoid 30% FATCA withholding from U.S.-source income.
Rhode IslandSee “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” under “Contract features and benefits”If you reside in the state of Rhode Island, you may return your contract within 20 days from the date that you receive it and receive a refund of your initial contribution.
TexasSee “How you can purchase and contribute to your contract” in “Contract features and benefits”In the third paragraph of this section, item (i) now reads: “(i) contributions under a Structured Capital Strategies® contract would then total more than $1,500,000.” The $2,500,000 limitation on the sum of all contributions under all our annuity accumulation contracts with the same owner or annuitant does not apply.
See “Your right to cancel within a certain number of days” under “Contract features and benefits”If you reside in the state of Texas, you may return your contract within 20 days from the date that you receive it and receive a refund of your initial contribution.

II-6


StateFeatures and benefitsAvailability or variation

Texas

(continued)

See “Disability, terminal illness or confinement to nursing home” in “Charges and expenses” (For Series B contracts only)There is no 12 month waiting period following a contribution for the Six Month Life Expectancy Waiver. The withdrawal charge can be waived even if the condition begins within 12 months of the remittance of the contribution.

The first sentence in Waiver (iii) regarding the definition of a nursing home is deleted and replaced with the following:

You are confined to a nursing home as verified by a licensed physician.

UtahSee “Transfers of ownership, collateral assignments, loans or borrowing” in “More information”Unless restricted for tax purposes, your contract may be assigned.

II-7


Appendix III: Segment Interim Value

We calculate the Segment Interim Value for each SegmentCharge Reserve Amount will bere-calculated on each Segment Business Day that falls betweenStart Date, and the amount already present in the Unloaned GIO will be supplemented through transfers from your value in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account, if necessary to meet this requirement, actual monthly deductions could vary up or down during the Segment Term due to various factors including but not limited to requested policy changes, additional premium payments, investment performance, loans, policy partial withdrawals from other investment options besides the MSO, and any changes we might make to current policy charges.

Please also refer to the appropriate life insurance policy prospectus for more information.

How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term

Under your base variable life insurance policy, monthly deductions are allocated to the variable investment options and the Unloaned GIO according to deduction allocation percentages specified by you or based on a proportionate allocation should any of the individual investment option values be insufficient.

However, if the Market Stabilizer Option® is elected, on the Segment Start Date, deduction allocation percentages will be changed so that 100% of monthly deductions will be taken from the Charge Reserve Amount and then any remaining value in the Unloaned GIO, if the Charge Reserve Amount is depleted, during the Segment Term. In addition, if the value in the Unloaned GIO is ever insufficient to cover monthly deductions during the Segment Term, the base policy’s proportionate allocation procedure will be modified as follows:

1.

The first step will be to take the remaining portion of the deductions proportionately from the values in the variable investment options, including any value in the MSO Holding Account but excluding any Segment Account Values.

2.

If the Unloaned GIO and variable investment options, including any value in the MSO Holding Account, are insufficient to cover deductions in their entirety, the remaining amount will be allocated to the individual Segments proportionately, based on the current Segment Distribution Values.

3.

Any portion of a monthly deduction allocated to an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value.

The effect of those procedures is that account value will be taken out of a Segment to pay a monthly deduction (and an EDA therefore applied) only if there is no remaining account value in any other investment options, as listed in 1. and 2. above.

In addition, your base variable life insurance policy will lapse if your net policy account value or net cash surrender value (please refer to your base variable life insurance policy prospectus for a further explanation of these terms) is not enough to pay your policy’s monthly charges when due (unless one of the available guarantees against termination is applicable). If you have amounts allocated to MSO Segments, the Segment Distribution Value will be used in place of the Segment Account Value in calculating the net policy account value and net cash surrender value.

These modifications will apply during any period in which a Segment exists and has not yet reached its Segment Maturity Date.

Early Distribution Adjustment

Overview

Before a Segment matures, if you surrender your policy, take a loan from a Segment or if we should find it necessary to make deductions for monthly charges or other distributions from a Segment, we will apply an Early Distribution Adjustment.

The calculation is a formula designed to measureapplication of the fair value of your Segment Investment on the particular interim date, andEDA is based on your agreement (under the downside protection provided byterms of the Segment Buffer,MSO) to be exposed to the limit on participation in investment gain provided by the Performance Cap Rate, and an adjustment for the effect of a withdrawal prior torisk that, at the Segment Maturity Date.Date, the Index will have fallen by more than 25%. The formulaEDA uses what we use, in part, derivesrefer to as a Put Option Factor to estimate the fairmarket value, at the time of hypothetical investments in fixed instruments and derivatives. These values provide us with protection froman early distribution, of the risk that we will have to pay out account value related toyou would suffer a loss if your Segment prior towere continued (without taking the early distribution) until its Segment Maturity Date. The hypothetical put option provides usBy charging you with a marketdeduction equal to that estimated value, of the potential loss at Segment maturity, and the hypothetical call options provide us with a market value of the potential gain at Segment maturity. This formulaEDA provides a treatment for an early distribution that is designed to be consistent with how distributions at the end of a Segment are treated. We are not requiredtreated when the Index has declined over the course of that Segment.

In the event of an early distribution, even if the Index has experienced positive performance since the Segment Start Date, the EDA will cause you to hold such investments in relation to Segmentslose principal through the application of the Put Option Factor and that loss may or may not choose to do so. You are not affectedbe substantial. That is because there is always some risk that the Index would have declined by the performanceSegment Maturity Date such that you would suffer a loss if the Segment were continued (without taking any early distribution) until that time. However, the other component of anythe EDA is the proportionate refund of our investments (or lack thereof) relating to Segments. The formula also includes an adjustment relating to the Cap Calculation Factor. ThisVariable Index Benefit Charge (discussed below under “Important Considerations”) which is a positive adjustment to you. As a result, the overall impact of the percentage of the estimated expenses correspondingEDA is to the portion of the Segment Duration that has not elapsed. Appendix III sets forth the actual calculation formula, an overview of the purposes and impacts of the calculation, and detailed descriptions of the specific inputs into the calculation. You should note that even if a corresponding Index has experienced positive growth, the calculation ofreduce your Segment InterimAccount Value may resultand your other policy values except in an amount lowerthe limited circumstances where the proportionate refund is greater than your Segment Investment. We have included examples of calculations of Segment Interim Values under various hypothetical situations atloss from the end of this Appendix.Put Option Factor.

 

Choice SegmentsWe determine the EDA and the Put Option Factor by formulas that are described below under “Additional Detail.  The Segment Interim Value for a Choice Segment may be less than the Segment Interim Value for a Standard Segment based on the same Index, Segment Buffer and Segment Duration. See “Fair Value of Derivatives” later in this Appendix for more information about how the Choice cost is built into the Segment Interim Value calculation for Choice Segments.

 

Calculation FormulaImportant Considerations

 

YourWhen any surrender, loan, charge deduction or other distribution is made from a Segment Interim Value is equal to the lesser of (A) or (B).before its Segment Maturity Date:

 

(A)1.

equalsYou will forfeit any positive Index performance with respect to these amounts. Instead, any of thesepre-Segment Maturity Date distributions will cause an EDA to be applied that will usually result in a reduction in your values. Therefore, you should give careful consideration before taking any such early loan or surrender, or allowing the sum of the following three components:value in your other investment options to fall so low that we must make any monthly deduction from a Segment; and

2.

The EDA will be applied, which means that:

 

 (1)a.

Fair ValueIf the Index has fallen more than 25% since the Segment Start Date, the EDA would generally have the effect of hypothetical Fixed Instruments;charging you for (i) the full amount of that loss below 25%, plus (ii) an additional amount for the risk that the Index might decline further by the Segment Maturity Date. (Please see example III in Appendix I for further information.)

13


b.

If the Index has fallen since the Segment Start Date, but by less than 25%, the EDA would charge you for the risk that, by the Segment Maturity Date, the Index might have declined further to a point more than 25% below what it was at the Segment Start Date. (Please see example I in Appendix I for further information.) This charge would generally be less than the amount by which the Index had fallen from the Segment Start Date through the date we apply the EDA. It also would generally be less than it would be under the circumstances in 2a. above.

 

 (2)c.

Fair Value of hypothetical Derivatives; plus

(3)

Cap Calculation Factor.

(B)

equalsIf the Index has risen since the Segment Investment (orStart Date, the most recent Annual Lock Anniversary Starting AmountEDA would not credit you with any of such favorable investment performance. Instead, the EDA would charge you for an Annual Lock Segment) multipliedthe risk that, by (1 + the Performance Cap Rate limiting factor).Segment Maturity Date, the Index might have declined to a point more than 25% below what it was at the Segment Start Date. (Please see examples II and IV in Appendix I for further information.) This charge would generally be less than it would be under the circumstances in 2a. and 2b. above.

 

Overview of the Purposes and Impacts of the Calculation

Fair Value of Hypothetical Fixed Instruments.  The Segment Interim Value formula includes an element designed to compensate us for the fact that when we have to pay out account value related to a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date, we forgo the opportunity to earn interest on the Segment Investment from the date of withdrawal or surrender until the Segment Maturity Date. We accomplish this estimate by calculating the present value of the Segment Investment using a risk-free swap interest rate widely used in derivative markets.

Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives.  For Standard and Choice Segments we use hypothetical put and call options that are designated for each Segment to estimate the market value, at the time the Segment Interim Value is calculated, of the risk of loss and the possibility of gain at the end of the Segment. This calculation reflects the value of the downside protection that would be provided at maturity by the Segment Buffer as well as the upper limit that would be placed on gains at maturity dueIn addition to the Performance Cap Rate. For Choice Segments only,consequences discussed in 2. above, the calculationEDA also provides forhas the applicationeffect of pro rating the Choice cost to the purchase of call options with higher strike prices. This allows us to declare higher Performance Cap Rates for those Segments. For Annual Lock Segments, we useVariable Index Benefit Charge. As discussed further below, this means that you in effect would receive a hypothetical derivatives contract where the final payout equals the compounded Annual Lock Yearly Rate of Return (i.e., the Index Performance Rate for each successive Annual Lock Period, subject to the Performance Cap Rate and Segment Buffer), to estimate the market value of the Segment at the time the Segment Interim Value is calculated. This hypothetical derivatives contract reflects the value of the downside protection that would be provided at each Annual Lock Anniversary by the Segment Buffer as well as the upper limit that would be placed on gains at each Annual Lock Anniversary due to the Performance Cap Rate. When valuing the hypothetical Derivatives as part of the Segment Interim Value calculation, we use inputs that are consistent with market prices that reflect the estimated cost of exiting the hypothetical Derivatives before Segment maturity. See the “Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives” in “Detailed Descriptions of Specific Inputs to the Calculation” below. Our fair market value methodology, including the market standard model we use to calculate the fair value of the hypothetical Derivatives for each particular Segment, may result in a fair value that is higher or lower than the fair value other methodologies and models would produce. Our fair value may also be higher or lower than the actual market price of the identical derivatives. As a result, the Segment Interim Value you receive may be higher or lower than what other methodologies and models would produce.

III-1


At the time the Segment Interim Value is determined, the Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives for Standard and Choice Segments is calculated using three different hypothetical options. These hypothetical options are designated for each Segment and are described in more detail later in this Appendix.

At-the-Money Standard Segment Call Option (strike price equals the index value at Segment inception).  For Standard Segments, the potential for gain is estimated using the valueproportionate refund of this hypothetical option.

Out-of-the-MoneyChoice SegmentCall Option (strike price equals the index value at Segment inception increased by the Choice cost). For Choice Segments, the potentialcharge for gain is estimated using the value of this hypothetical option.

The Choice cost is not deducted directly from the Segment Interim Value of a Choice Segment. Rather, the Choice cost is built in to the Segment Interim Value for Choice Segments through the use of the Out-of-the-Money Choice Segment Call Option. The value of the Out-of-the-Money Choice Segment Call Option is always lower than the value of the corresponding At-the-Money Standard Segment Call Option, which results in a lower amount for the Fair Value of Derivatives component of the Segment Interim Value formula. The actual amount of the Choice cost reflected in a Segment Interim Value calculation is not a prorated amount, and depends on the value of the Out-of-the-Money Choice Segment Call Option on the calculation date.

Out-of-the-Money Call Option (strike price equals the index increased by the Performance Cap Rate established at Segment inception).  The potential for gain in excess of the Performance Cap Rate is estimated using the value of this hypothetical option.

For Standard Segments, the net amount of theAt-the-Money Standard Segment Call Option less the value of theOut-of-the-Money Call Option is an estimate of the market value of the possibility of gain at the end of the Segment as limited by the Performance Cap Rate.

For Choice Segments, the net amount of the Out-the-Money Choice Segment Call Option less the value of the Out-of-the-Money Call Option is an estimate of the market value of the possibility of gain at the end of the Segment as limited by the Performance Cap Rate.

Out-of-the-Money Put Option (strike price equals the index decreased by the Segment Buffer).  The risk of loss is estimated using the value of this hypothetical option.

It is important to note that this put option value will almost always reduce the principal you receive, even where the Index is higher at the time of the withdrawal than at the time of the original investment. This is because the risk that the Index could have been lower at the end of a Segment is present to some extent whether or not the Index has increased at the earlier point in time that the Segment Interim Value is calculated.

Cap Calculation Factor.  In setting the Performance Cap Rate, we take into account that we incur expenses in connection with a contract, including insurance and administrative expenses. The Segment Interim Value formula includes item (A)(3) above, the Cap Calculation Factor, which is designed to reflect the fact that we will not incur those expenses for the entire duration of the Segment if you withdraw your investment prior to the Segment Maturity Date. Therefore, the Cap Calculation Factor is always positive and declines during the course of the Segment.

Performance Cap Rate limiting factor.  The formula provides that the Segment Interim Value is never greater than (B) above, which is the portion of the Performance Cap Rate corresponding to the portion of the Segment DurationTerm that has elapsed. This limitation is imposedfollows the early surrender, loan, policy distribution, or charge deduction that caused us to discourage owners from withdrawing fromapply the EDA. In limited circumstances, this refund may cause the total EDA to be positive.

For the reasons discussed above, the Early Distribution Adjustment to the Segment Account Value will usually reduce the amount you would receive when you surrender your policy prior to a Segment beforeMaturity Date. For loans and charge deductions, the Early Distribution Adjustment would usually further reduce the account value remaining in the Segment Account Value and therefore decrease the Segment Maturity Date where there may have been significant increases in the relevant Index early inValue.

Additional Detail

For purposes of determining the Segment Duration (or Annual Lock Period). Although the Performance Cap Rate limiting factorpro-rates the upside potential on amounts withdrawn early, there is no similar adjustmentDistribution Value prior topro-rate the downside protection.This means, if you surrender or cancel your contract, die or make a withdrawal from a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date, the EDA is:

(a)

the Put Option Factor multiplied by the Segment Account Value

-minus-

(b)

a pro rata portion of the 0.75% Variable Index Benefit Charge attributable to the Segment Account Value. (Please see “Charges” earlier in this Prospectus for an explanation of this charge.)

The Put Option Factor multiplied by the Segment BufferAccount Value represents, at any time during the Segment Term, the estimated market value of your potential exposure to negative S&P 500 Price Return index performance that is worse than-25%. The Put Option Factor, on any date, represents the estimated value on that date of a hypothetical “put option” (as described below) on the Index having a notional value equal to $1 and strike price at Segment Maturity equal to $0.75 ($1 plus the Downside Protection which is currently-25%). The strike price of the option ($0.75) is the difference between a 100% loss in the S&P 500 Price Return index at Segment Maturity and the 25% loss at Segment Maturity that would be absorbed by the Downside Protection feature of the MSO (please see “Growth

Cap Rate” earlier in this Prospectus for an explanation of the Downside Protection.) In a put option on an index, the seller will not necessarily applypay the buyer, at the maturity of the option, the difference between the strike price — which was set at issue — and the underlying index closing price, in the event that the closing price is below the strike price. Prior to the extent it would onmaturity of the Segment Maturity Date (or each Annual Lock Anniversary), and any upside performanceput option, its value generally will be limited to a percentage lower than the Performance Cap Rate.

Detailed Descriptions of Specific Inputs to the Calculation

(A)(1)Fair Value of Hypothetical Fixed Instruments.  The Fair Value of Hypothetical Fixed Instrument in a Segment is based on the swap rate associatedhave an inverse relationship with the Segment’s remaining time to maturity. Swap rates are the risk-free interest rates widely used in derivative markets. There is no standard quote for swap rates. However, because of their high liquidity and popularity, swap rate quotes from different dealers generally fall within a close range, the differences among which are not meaningful. Swap ratesindex. The notional value can be obtained from inter-dealer systems or financial data vendors who have feeds from swap dealers. For example, “Bloomberg Composite” swap rates aredescribed as the weighted averageprice of swap rates provided bythe underlying index at inception of the contract. Using a numbernotional value of dealers to Bloomberg. Individual dealers and brokers also publish swap rates$1 facilitates computation of their own on Bloomberg or Reuters. We may,the percentage change in the future, utilize exchange traded swaps that become available. These exchange traded swaps would have a standard quote associated with them. The Fair Value of Hypothetical Fixed Instruments is defined as its present value, as expressed inIndex and the following formula:

(Segment Investment)/(1 + swap rate)(time to maturity)put option factor.

 

The time to maturity is expressed as a fraction, in which the numerator is the number of days remaining in the Segment Duration and the denominator is the average number of days in each year of the Segment Duration for that Segment.

(A)(2)Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives.  WeCompany will utilize a fair market value methodology to determine the Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives.

III-2


For each Standard and Choice Segment, we designate and value three hypothetical options, each of which is tied to the performance of the Index underlying the Segment in which you are invested. For Standard Segments, these are: (1) theAt-the-Money Standard Segment Call Option, (2) theOut-of-the-Money Call Option and (3) theOut-of-the-Money Put Option. For Choice Segments, these are: (1) the Out of-the-Money Choice Segment Call Option, (2) the Out-of-the-Money Call Option and (3) the Out-of-the-Money Put Option. (As described elsewhere in this Prospectus, in certain circumstances we may waive the Choice cost for a Choice Segment, in which case we would reference the At-the-Money Standard Segment Call Option rather than the Out of-the-Money Choice Segment Call Option for that Segment.) At Segment maturity, the Put Option is designed to value the loss below the buffer, while the call options are designed to provide gains up to the Performance Cap Rate. These options are described in more detail below. For each Annual Lock Segment, we designate and value a hypothetical derivatives contract which is tied to the compounded performance of the Index underlying the Segment in which you are invested.Factor.

In addition to the inputs discussed above, the Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives is also affected by the time remaining until the Segment Maturity Date (or each remaining Annual Lock Anniversary). More information about the designated hypothetical options is set forth below:

(1)

At-the-Money Standard Segment Call Option:  This is an option to buy a position in the relevant Index equal to the Segment Investment on the scheduled Segment Maturity Date, at the price of the Index on the Segment Start Date. At any time during the Segment Duration, the fair value of the Standard SegmentAt-the-Money Call Option represents the market value of the potential to receive an amount in excess of the Segment Investment on the Segment Maturity Date equal to the percentage growth in the Index between the Segment Start Date and the Segment Maturity Date, multiplied by the Segment Investment.

(2)

Out of-the-Money Choice Segment Call Option:  This is an option to buy a position in the relevant Index equal to the Segment Investment on the scheduled Segment Maturity Date, at the price of the Index on the Segment Start Date increased by the applicable Choice cost for that Segment. At any time during the Segment Duration, the fair value of the Out-of-the-Money Choice Segment Call Option represents the market value of the potential to receive an amount in excess of the Segment Investment on the Segment Maturity Date equal to (a) the percentage growth in the Index between the Segment Start Date and the Segment Maturity Date less the Choice cost, multiplied by (b) the Segment Investment.

(3)

Out-of-the-Money Call Option:  This is an option to sell a position in the relevant Index equal to the Segment Investment on the scheduled Segment Maturity Date, at the price of the Index on the Segment Start Date increased by a percentage equal to the Performance Cap Rate. At any time during the Segment Duration, the fair value of theOut-of-the-Money Call Option represents the market value of the potential to receive an amount in excess of the Segment Investment equal to the percentage growth in the Index between the Segment Start Date and the Segment Maturity Date in excess of the Performance Cap Rate, multiplied by the Segment Investment. The value of this option is used to offset the value of theAt-the-Money Standard Segment Call Option (for Standard Segments) or the Out of-the-Money Choice Segment Call Option (for Choice Segments), thus recognizing in the Interim Segment Value a ceiling on gains at Segment maturity imposed by the Performance Cap Rate.

(4)

Out-of-the-Money Put Option:  This is an option to sell a position in the relevant Index equal to the Segment Investment on the scheduled Segment Maturity Date, at the price of the Index on the Segment Start Date decreased by a percentage equal to the Segment Buffer. At any time during the Segment Duration, the fair value of theOut-of-the-Money Put Option represents the market value of the potential to receive an amount equal to the excess of the negative return of the Index between the Segment Start Date and the Segment Maturity Date beyond the Segment Buffer, multiplied by the Segment Investment. The value of this option reduces the Interim Segment Value, as it reflects losses that may be incurred in excess of the Segment Buffer at Segment maturity.

 

For Standard Segments,this purpose, we use the Fair Value of Derivatives is equal to (1) minus (3) minus (4), as defined above. For Choice Segments, the Fair Value of Derivatives is equal to (2) minus (3) minus (4), as defined above.

We determine the fair value of each of the three designated hypothetical options for a Standard or Choice Segment using a market standard modelBlack Scholes formula for valuing a European put option on the Index,S&P 500 Price Return index, assuming a continuous dividend yield, or net convenience value, with inputs that are consistent with current market prices that reflect the estimated cost of exiting the hypothetical Derivatives prior to Segment maturity (e.g., the estimated ask price). If we did not take into account the estimated exit price, your Segment Interim Value would be greater. In addition the estimated fair value price used in the Segment Interim Value calculation may vary higher or lower from other estimated prices and from what the actual selling price of identical derivatives would be at any time during each Segment. If our estimated fair value price is lower than the price under other fair market estimates or for actual transactions, then your Segment Interim Value will be less than if we used those other prices when calculating your Segment Interim Value. Any variance between our estimated fair value price and other estimated or actual prices may be different from Segment Type to Segment Type and may also change from day to day. Each hypothetical option has a notional value on the Segment Start Date equalprices.

The inputs to the Segment Investment on that date. The notional value is the price of the underlying Index at the inception of the contract. In the event that a number of options, or a fractional number of options, are being valued, the notional value would be the number of hypothetical options multiplied by the price of the Index at inception. For an Annual Lock Segment we determine the fair value of the hypothetical derivatives contract tied to the compounded performance of the Index underlying the Annual Lock Segment using a market standardBlack Scholes model for valuing an extended exotic option that periodically settles and resets its strike price on the Index using the assumptions, inputs and values discussed above but applied to the hypothetical derivatives contract instead of the hypothetical options.

We use the following model inputs:include:

 

(1)

Implied Volatility of the Index — This input varies with (i) how much time remains until the Segment Maturity Date of the Segment from which an early distribution is being made, which is determined by using an expiration date for the designatedhypothetical put option that corresponds to that time remaining and (ii) the relationship between the strike price of thatthe hypothetical put option and the level of the IndexS&P 500 Price Return index at the time of the calculation (includingearly distribution. This relationship is referred to as the potential“moneyness” of the hypothetical put option described above, and is calculated as the ratio of the $0.75 strike price of that hypothetical put option to what the level of the S&P 500 Price Return index would be at the time of the early distribution if the Index had been $1 at the beginning of the Segment. Direct market data for resets each Annual Lock Period).these inputs for any given early distribution are generally not available, because put options on the Index that actually trade in the market have specific maturity dates and moneyness values that are unlikely to correspond precisely to the Maturity Date and moneyness of the hypothetical put option that we use for purposes of calculating the EDA.

III-3


This relationship is referred to as the “moneyness” of the option described above, and is calculated as the ratio of current price to the strike price. Direct market data for these inputs for any given early distribution are generally not available, because options on the Index that actually trade in the market have specific maturity dates and moneyness values that are unlikely to correspond precisely to the Segment Maturity Date (or remaining Annual Lock Periods) and moneyness of the designated option that we use for purposes of the calculation.

 

Accordingly, we use the following method to estimate the implied volatility of the Index. We usereceive daily quotes of implied volatility from independent third-partiesbanks using the same Black Scholes model described above and based on the market prices for certain S&P 500 Price Return put options. Specifically, implied volatility quotes are obtained for put options with the closest maturities above and below the actual time remaining in the Segment at the time of the calculationearly distribution and, for each maturity, for those put options having the closest moneyness value above and below the actual moneyness of the designatedhypothetical put option described above, given the level of the IndexS&P 500 Price Return index at the time of the calculation.early distribution. In calculating the Segment Interim Value,Put Option Factor, we will derive a volatility input for your Segment’s time to maturity (including each remaining Annual Lock Period time to maturity) and strike price by linearly interpolating between the implied volatility quotes that are based on the actual adjacent maturities and moneyness values described above, as follows:

 

 (a)

We first determine the implied volatility of ana put option that has the same moneyness as the designatedhypothetical put option but

14


with the closest available time to maturity shorter than your Segment’s remaining time to maturity (including each remaining Annual Lock Period time to maturity).maturity. This volatility is derived by linearly interpolating between the implied volatilities of put options having the times to the applicable maturitymoneyness values that are above and below the moneyness value of the hypothetical put option.

 

 (b)

We then determine the implied volatility of ana put option that has the same moneyness as the designatedhypothetical put option but with the closest available time to maturity longer than your Segment’s remaining time to the applicable maturity (including each remaining Annual Lock Period time to maturity).maturity. This volatility is derived by linearly interpolating between the implied volatilities of put options having the times to maturitymoneyness values that are above and below the moneyness value of the designatedhypothetical put option.

 

 (c)

The volatility input for your Segment’s time to maturity (including each remaining Annual Lock Period time to maturity) will then be determined by linearly interpolating between the volatilities derived in steps (a) and (b).

 

(2)

SwapLIBOR Rate — We use key derivative swapKey duration LIBOR rates obtainedwill be retrieved from information provided by independent third-parties which area recognized financial reporting vendors. Swapvendor. LIBOR rates are obtainedwill be retrieved for maturities adjacent to the actual time remaining in the Segment at the time of the early distribution. We will use linear interpolation to derive the exact remaining duration rate needed as the input.

 

(3)

Index Dividend Yield — On a daily basis we usewill get the projected annual dividend yield across the entire Index obtained from information provided by independent third-party financial institutions.Index. This value is a widely used assumption and is readily available from recognized financial reporting vendors.

 

Generally, a put optionIn general, the Put Option Factor has an inverse relationship with its underlying Index, while a call option has a direct relationship.the S&P 500 Price Return index. In addition to the inputsfactors discussed above, the Fair Value of DerivativesPut Option Factor is also affectedinfluenced by the time to Segment Maturity. We determine Put Option Factors at the end of each business day. Generally, a business day is any day the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading. If any inputs to the Black Scholes formula are unavailable on a business day, we would use the value of the input from the most recent preceding business day. The Put Option Factor that applies to a transaction or valuation made on a business day will be the Factor for that day. The Put Option Factor that applies to a transaction or valuation made on anon-business day will be the Factor for the next business day.

Appendix I at the end of this Prospectus provides examples of how the Early Distribution Adjustment is calculated.

Transfers

There is no charge to transfer into and out of the MSO Holding Account and you can make a transfer at any time to or from the investment options available under your policy subject to any transfer restrictions within your policy. You may not transfer into the MSO Holding Account while the Extended No Lapse Guarantee Rider is in effect with your policy, if applicable. You must terminate the Extended No Lapse Guarantee Rider before electing MSO. Any restrictions applicable to transfers between the MSO Holding Account and such investment options would be the same transfer restrictions applicable to transfers between the investment options available under your policy. However, once policy account value has been swept from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment, transfers into or out of that Segment before its

Segment Maturity Date will not be permitted. Please note that while a Segment is in effect, before the Segment Maturity Date, (includingthe amount available for transfers from the Unloaned GIO will be limited to avoid reducing the Unloaned GIO below the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Thus the amount available for transfers from the Unloaned GIO will not be greater than any excess of the Unloaned GIO over the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Please also refer to the appropriate life insurance policy prospectus for more information.

Withdrawals

Once policy account value has been swept from the MSO Holding Account into a Segment, you will not be allowed to withdraw the account value out of a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date unless you surrender your policy. You may also take a loan; please see “Loans” later in this Prospectus for more information. Any account value taken out of a Segment before the Segment Maturity Date will generate an Early Distribution Adjustment. Please note that while a Segment is in effect, before the Segment Maturity Date, the amount available for withdrawals from the Unloaned GIO will be limited to avoid reducing the Unloaned GIO below the Charge Reserve Amount. Thus, if there is any policy account value in a Segment, the amount which would otherwise be available to you for a partial withdrawal of net cash surrender value will be reduced, by the amount (if any) by which the sum of your Segment Distribution Values and the Charge Reserve Amount exceeds the policy surrender charge.

If the policy owner does not indicate or if we cannot allocate the withdrawal as requested due to insufficient funds, we will allocate the withdrawal proportionately from your values in the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and your values in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account.

Cash Surrender Value, Net Cash Surrender Value and Loan Value

If you have amounts allocated to MSO Segments, the Segment Distribution Values will be used in place of the Segment Account Values in calculating the amount of any cash surrender value, net cash surrender value and maximum amount available for loans (please refer to your base variable life insurance policy prospectus for a further explanation of these latter terms). This means an EDA would apply to those amounts. Please see Appendix I for more information.

Guideline Premium Force-outs

For policies that use the Guideline Premium Test, a new Segment will not be established or created if we determine, when we process your election, that a distribution from the policy will be required to maintain its qualification as life insurance under federal tax law at any time during the Segment Term.

However, during a Segment Term if a distribution becomes necessary under theforce-out rules of Section 7702 of the Internal Revenue Code, it will be deducted proportionately from the values in the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and in any variable investment option, including any value in the MSO Holding Account but excluding any Segment Account Values.

15


If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and variable investment options, including any value in the MSO Holding Account, are insufficient to cover theforce-out in its entirety, any remaining amount required to be forced out will be taken from the individual Segments proportionately, based on the current Segment Distribution Values.

Any portion of aforce-out distribution taken from an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the remaining Charge Reserve Amount), together with the variable investment options including any value in the MSO Holding Account, and the Segment Distribution Values, is still insufficient to cover theforce-out in its entirety, the remaining amount of theforce-out will be allocated to the Unloaned GIO and reduce or eliminate any remaining Charge Reserve Amount under the Unloaned GIO.

Loans

Please refer to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for information regarding policy loan provisions.

You may specify how your loan is to be allocated among the MSO, the variable investment options and the Unloaned GIO. Any portion of a requested loan allocated to the MSO will be redeemed from the individual Segments and the MSO Holding Account proportionately, based on the value of the MSO Holding Account and the current Segment Distribution Values of each Annual Lock Period remainingSegment. Any portion allocated to maturity)an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value and be subject to a higher guaranteed maximum loan spread (2% for policies with a contract state of New York and 5% for all other policies).

 

(A)(3)Cap Calculation Factor.  In setting the Performance Cap Rate, we take into account that we incur expenses in connection with a contract, including insurance and administrative expenses. If you withdrawdo not specify or if we cannot allocate the loan according to your specifications, we will allocate the loan proportionately from your values in the Unloaned GIO (excluding the Charge Reserve Amount) and your values in the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the remaining amount of the Charge Reserve Amount), together with the variable investment options including any value in the MSO Holding Account, are insufficient to cover the loan in its entirety, the remaining amount of the loan will be allocated to the individual Segments proportionately, based on current Segment Distribution Values.

Any portion of a loan allocated to an individual Segment will generate a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value and be subject to a higher guaranteed maximum loan spread.

If the Unloaned GIO (excluding the remaining amount of the Charge Reserve Amount), together with the variable investment options including any value in the MSO Holding Account and the Segment Distribution Values, are still insufficient to cover the loan in its entirety, the remaining amount of the loan will be allocated to the Unloaned GIO and will reduce or eliminate the remaining Charge Reserve Amount.

Loan interest is due on each policy anniversary. If the interest is not paid when due, it will be added to your outstanding loan and allocated on the same basis as monthly deductions. See “How we deduct policy monthly charges during a Segment Term.”

Whether or not any Segment is in effect and has not yet reached its Segment Maturity Date, loan repayments will first reduce any loaned amounts that are subject to the higher maximum loan interest spread. Loan repayments will first be used to restore any amounts that, before being designated as loan collateral, had been in the Unloaned GIO. Any portion of an additional loan repayment allocated to the MSO at the policy owner’s direction (or according to premium allocation percentages) will be transferred to the MSO Holding Account to await the next available Segment Start Date and will be subject to the same conditions described earlier in this Prospectus.

Impact of MSO Election on Other Policy Riders and/or Services

If you elect to allocate any policy account value to the MSO, other riders and/or services under your policy may be impacted as described in detail in Appendix II later in this Prospectus. Please also refer to your variable life insurance policy prospectus for additional information.

Requested Face Amount Increases

Please refer to the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus for conditions that will apply for a requested face amount increase.

If you wish to make a face amount increase during a Segment Term, the MSO requires that a minimum amount of policy account value be available to be transferred into the Unloaned GIO (if not already present in the Unloaned GIO), and that the balance after deduction of monthly charges remain there during the longest remaining Segment Term subject to any loans as described above. This minimum amount will be any amount necessary to supplement the existing Charge Reserve Amount so as to be projected to be sufficient to cover all monthly deductions during the longest remaining Segment Term. Such amount will be determined assuming at the time such calculation is made that no interest or investment performance is credited to or charged against the policy account value, and that no further policy changes or additional premium payments are made.

Any necessary transfers to supplement the amount already present in the Unloaned GIO in order to meet this minimum requirement will take effect on the effective date of the face amount increase. There will be no charge for this transfer. Any transfer from the variable investment options including the MSO Holding Account will be made in accordance with your directions. Your transfer instructions will be requested as part of the process for requesting the face amount increase. If the requested allocation is not possible due to insufficient funds, the required amount will be transferred proportionately from the variable investment options, as well as the MSO Holding Account. If such transfers are not possible due to insufficient funds, your requested face amount increase will be declined.

Your right to cancel within a certain number of days

Please refer to the appropriate variable insurance policy prospectus for more information regarding your right to cancel your policy within a certain number of days and the Investment Start Date, which is the business day your investment first begins to earn a return for you.

However, the policy prospectus provisions that address when amounts will be allocated to the investment options do not apply to amounts allocated to the MSO.

16


In those states that require us to return your premium without adjustment for investment performance within a certain number of days, we will initially put all amounts which you have allocated to the MSO into our EQ/Money Market investment option. In this case, if we have received all necessary requirements for your policy as of the day your policy is issued, on the first business day following the later of the twentieth day after your policy is issued or the Investment Start Date (30th day in most states if your policy is issued as the result of a replacement 60th day in New York), we will reallocate those amounts to the MSO Holding Account where they will remain until the next available Segment Start Date, at which time such amounts will be transferred to a new Segment of the MSO subject to meeting the conditions described in this Prospectus. However, if we have not received all necessary requirements for your policy as of the day your policy is issued, we willre-allocate those amounts to the MSO Holding Account on the 20th day (longer if your policy is issued as the result of a replacement) following the date we receive all necessary requirements to put your policy in force at our Administrative Office. Your financial professional can provide further information on what requirements may apply to your policy.

In all other states, any amounts allocated to the MSO will first be allocated to the MSO Holding Account where they will remain for 20 days (unless the policy is issued as the result of a replacement, in which case amounts in the MSO Holding Account will remain there for 30 days (45 days in Pennsylvania)). Thereafter, such amounts will be transferred to a new Segment of the MSO on the next available Segment Start Date, subject to meeting the conditions described in this Prospectus.

Segment Maturity GIO Limitation

Upon advance notification, we reserve the right to limit the amount of your Segment Maturity Value that may be allocated to the guaranteed interest option. However, that limitation will never be less than 5% of your Segment Maturity Value. We will transfer any portion of your Segment Maturity Value that is allocated to the guaranteed interest option in excess of the Segment Maturity GIO Limitation to the EQ/Money Market variable investment option unless we receive your instructions prior to the Segment Maturity Date wethat the Segment Maturity Value should be allocated to the MSO Holding Account or to any other available variable investment option.

As of November 18, 2013, the Company will not incur expensesexercise its right to limit the amounts that may be allocated and or transferred to the guaranteed interest option (“policy guaranteed interest option limitation”). All references to the policy guaranteed interest option limitation in your prospectus, and/or in your policy and/or in the endorsements to your policy, are not applicable. See “Appendix II: Impact of MSO Election on Other Policy Riders and/or Services”.

Right to Discontinue and Limit Amounts Allocated to the MSO

We reserve the right to restrict or terminate future allocations to the MSO at any time. If this right were ever to be exercised by us, all Segments outstanding as of the effective date of the restriction would be guaranteed to continue uninterrupted until the Segment Maturity Date. As each such Segment matured, the balance would be reallocated to the Unloaned GIO and/or variable investment options per your instructions, or to the EQ/Money Market investment option if no

instructions are received. We may also temporarily suspend offering Segments at any time and for any reason including emergency conditions as determined by the Securities and Exchange Commission. We also reserve the right to establish a maximum amount for any single policy that can be allocated to the MSO.

About Separate Account No. 67

Amounts allocated to the MSO are held in a “non-unitized” separate account we have established under the New York Insurance Law. We own the assets of the separate account, as well as any favorable investment performance on those assets. You do not participate in the performance of the assets held in this separate account. We may, subject to state law that applies, transfer all assets allocated to the separate account to our general account. These assets are also available to the insurer’s general creditors and an owner should look to the financial strength of the Company for its claims-paying ability.

We guarantee all benefits relating to your value in the MSO, regardless of whether assets supporting the MSO are held in a separate account or our general account.

Our current plans are to invest separate account assets in fixed-income obligations, including corporate bonds, mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, and government and agency issues. Futures, options and interest rate swaps may be used for hedging purposes.

Although the above generally describes our plans for investing the assets supporting our obligations under MSO, we are not obligated to invest those assets according to any particular plan except as we may be required to by state insurance laws.

17


5. Distribution of the policies

The MSO is only available only under certain variable life insurance policies issued by the Company. Extensive information about the arrangements for distributing the variable life insurance policies, including sales compensation, is included under “Distribution of the Policies” in the appropriate variable life insurance policy prospectus and in the statement of additional information that relates to that prospectus. All of that information applies regardless of whether you choose to use the MSO, and there is no additional plan of distribution or sales compensation with respect to the MSO. There is also no change to the information regarding the fact that the principal underwriter(s) is an affiliate or an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of the Company.

18


6.Incorporation of certain documents by reference

The Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the entire durationperiod ended December 31, 2019 (the “Annual Report”) is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it is incorporated by reference.

The Company files reports and other information with the SEC, as required by law. You may read and copy this information at the SEC’s public reference facilities at Room 1580, 100 F Street, NE, Washington, DC 20549, or by accessing the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. The public may obtain information on the operation of the Segment. Therefore, we providePublic Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. Under the Securities Act of 1933, the Company has filed with the SEC a positive adjustmentregistration statement relating to the Market Stabilizer Option® (the “Registration Statement”). This Prospectus has been filed as part of the calculation of Segment Interim Value, which we call the Cap Calculation Factor. The Cap Calculation Factor represents a return of estimated expenses for the portionRegistration Statement and does not contain all of the Segment Duration that has not elapsed. For example, if the estimated expenses for a one year Segment are calculated by us to be $10, then at the end of 146 days (with 219 days remaininginformation set forth in the Segment), the Cap Calculation Factor would be $6, because $10 x 219/365 = $6. A Segment is not a variable investment option with an underlying portfolio, and therefore the percentages we use in setting the performance caps do not reflect a daily charge against assets held on your behalf in a separate account.Registration Statement.

 

(B)Pro Rata ShareAfter the date of Performance Cap Rate.  In settingthis Prospectus and before we terminate the Performance Cap Rate,offering of the securities under the Registration Statement, all documents or reports we assume that you are going to holdfile with the Segment forSEC under the entire Segment Duration. If you hold a Segment until its Segment Maturity Date, the Segment ReturnSecurities Exchange Act of 1934 (“Exchange Act”), will be calculated subjectconsidered to the Performance Cap Rate. For Standard and Choice Segments, prior to the Segment Maturity Date, your Segment Interim Valuebecome part of this Prospectus because they are incorporated by reference.

Any statement contained in a document that is or becomes part of this Prospectus, will be limited by the portionconsidered changed or replaced for purposes of the Performance Cap Rate corresponding to the portion of the Segment Duration that has elapsed. For example,this Prospectus if the Performance Cap Rate for aone-year Standard Segment is 10%, then at the end of 146 days, the Pro Rata Share of the Performance Cap Rate would be 4%, because 10% x 146/365 = 4%; as a result, the Segment Interim Value at the end of the 146 days could not exceed 104% of the Segment Investment. Likewise, if the Performance Cap Rate for a 5-year Standard or Choice Segment is 40%, then at the end of 913 days, the Pro Rata Share of the Performance Cap Rate would be 20%, because 40% x 913/1826 = 20%; as a result, the Segment Interim Value and the end of 913 days could not exceed 120% of the Segment Investment. For Annual Lock Segments, prior to the Segment Maturity Date, your Segment Interim Value will be limited by the portion of the Performance Cap Rate corresponding to the portion of the current Annual Lock Period that has elapsed. For example, if the Performance Cap Rate for a five-year Annual Lock Segment is 10%, then at the end of 146 days in the third Annual Lock Period (913 days since the Segment Start Date), the Pro Rata Share of the Performance Cap Rate would be 4%, because 10% x 146/365 = 4%; as a result, the Interim Value at the end of the 146 days in the third Annual Lock Period could not exceed 104% of the third Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount.

III-4


Examples: Segment Interim Value — Standard Segments

Item 1-Year Segment 3-Year Segment 5-Year Segment 3-Year Segment  5-Year Segment
Segment Duration (in     months) 12 36 60 36  60
Valuation Date (Months     since Segment Start     Date) 9 9 9 33  57
Segment Investment $1,000 $1,000 $1,000 $1,000  $1,000
Segment Buffer -10% -20% -30% -20%  -30%
Performance Cap Rate 8% 20% 35% 20%  35%
Time to Maturity (in     months) 3 27 51 3  3

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is -40% (for example from 100.00 to 60.00)

 

Fair Value of     Hypothetical Fixed     Instrument $999.38 $972.29 $906.97 $999.38  $999.38
Fair Value of     Hypothetical     Derivatives ($302.86) ($225.26) ($150.24) ($203.38)  ($108.56)
Cap Calculation     Factor $4.50 $40.52 $76.54 $4.49  $4.49
Sum of above $701.02 $787.55 $833.27 $800.49  $895.30
Segment Investment     multiplied by prorated     Performance Cap     Rate $1,060.00 $1,049.91 $1,052.36 $1,183.36  $1,332.55
Segment Interim Value $701.02 $787.55 $833.27 $800.49  $895.30

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is -10% (for example from 100.00 to 90.00)

 

Fair Value of     Hypothetical Fixed     Instrument $999.38 $972.29 $906.97 $999.38  $999.38
Fair Value of     Hypothetical     Derivatives ($33.71) ($38.03) ($3.36) $ 0.70  $11.10
Cap Calculation Factor $4.50 $40.52 $76.54 $4.49  $4.49
Sum of above $970.17 $974.79 $980.15 $1,004.58  $1,014,97
Segment Investment     multiplied by prorated     Performance Cap     Rate $1,060.00 $1,049.91 $1,052.36 $1,183.36  $1,332.55
Segment Interim Value $970.17 $974.79 $980.15 $1,004.58  $1,014.97

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is 10% (for example from 100.00 to 110.00)

 

Fair Value of     Hypothetical Fixed     Instrument $999.38 $972.29 $906.97 $999.38  $999.38
Fair Value of     Hypothetical     Derivatives $51.91 $43.31 $68.28 $92.87  $109.64
Cap Calculation Factor $4.50 $40.52 $76.54 $4.49  $4.49
Sum of above $1,055.79 $1,056.13 $1,051.79 $1,096.74  $1,113.51
Segment Investment     multiplied by prorated     Performance Cap     Rate $1,060.00 $1,049.91 $1,052.36 $1,183.36  $1,332.55
Segment Interim Value $1,055.79 $1,049.91 $1,051.79 $1,096.74  $1,113.51

III-5


Assuming the change in the Index Value is 40% (for example from 100.00 to 140.00)

 

Fair Value of     Hypothetical Fixed     Instrument $999.38 $972.29 $906.97 $999.38  $999.38
Fair Value of     Hypothetical     Derivatives $79.18 $119.18 $147.45 $191.34  $297.12
Cap Calculation Factor $4.50 $40.52 $76.54 $4.49  $4.49
Sum of above $1,083.06 $1,132.00 $1,130.96 $1,195.22  $1,300.99
Segment Investment     multiplied by prorated     Performance Cap     Rate $1,060.00 $1,049.91 $1,052.36 $1,183.36  $1,332.55
Segment Interim Value $1,060.00 $1,049.91 $1,052.36 $1,183.36  $1,300.99

The input values to the market standard model that have been utilized to generate the hypothetical examples above are as follows:

(1)

Implied volatility of 20.7%, 24.1% and 26.1% is assumed for 1-year, 3-year and 5-year Segments, respectively.

(2)

Swap rate corresponding to remainder of Segment term of 0.25% (1-year, 3-year and 5-year with 3 months to maturity) 1.25% (3-year with 27 months to maturity) and 2.30% (5-year with 51 months to maturity).

(3)

Index dividend yield is assumed 1.95% annually.

(4)

One-half estimated Bid-Ask Spread of 5 bps, 7.5 bps and 15 bps is assumed for 1-year, 3-year and 5-year Segments, respectively.

Examples: Effect of Withdrawals on Segment Interim Value — Standard Segments

Item  1-Year Segment  3-Year Segment  5-Year Segment
Segment Duration (in months)  12  36  60
Valuation Date (Months since     Segment Start Date)  9  9  9
Segment Investment  $1,000  $1,000  $1,000
Segment Buffer  -10%  -20%  -30%
Performance Cap Rate  8%  20%  35%
Time to Maturity (in months)  3  27  51
Amount Withdrawn(1)  $100  $100  $100

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is -40% (for example from 100.00 to 60.00)

 

Segment Interim Value(2)  $701.02  $787.55  $833.27
Percent Withdrawn(3)  14.27%  12.70%  12.00%
New Segment Investment(4)  $857.35  $873.02  $879.99
New Segment Interim Value(5)  $601.02  $687.55  $733.27

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is -10% (for example from 100.00 to 90.00)

 

Segment Interim Value(2)  $970.17  $974.79  $980.15
Percent Withdrawn(3)  10.31%  10.26%  10.20%
New Segment Investment(4)  $896.93  $897.41  $897.97
New Segment Interim Value(5)  $870.17  $874.79  $880.15

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is 10% (for example from 100.00 to 110.00)

 

Segment Interim Value(2)  $1,055.79  $1,049.91  $1,051.79
Percent Withdrawn(3)  9.47%  9.52%  9.51%
New Segment Investment(4)  $905.28  $904.75  $904.92
New Segment Interim Value(5)  $955.79  $949.91  $951.79

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is 40% (for example from 100.00 to 140.00)

 

Segment Interim Value(2)  $1,060.00  $1,049.91  $1,052.36
Percent Withdrawn(3)  9.43%  9.52%  9.50%
New Segment Investment(4)  $905.66  $904.75  $904.98
New Segment Interim Value(5)  $960.00  $949.91  $952.36

(1)

Amount withdrawn is net of applicable withdrawal charge.

(2)

Segment Interim Value immediately before withdrawal.

(3)

Percent Withdrawn is equal to Amount Withdrawn divided by Segment Interim Value.

(4)

New Segment Investment is equal to the original Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by (1 – Percent Withdrawn).

(5)

New Segment Interim Value is equal to the calculated Segment Interim Value based on the new Segment Investment. It will also be equal to the Segment Interim Value multiplied by (1 – Percent Withdrawn).

III-6


Examples: Segment Interim Value — Choice Segments

Item  5-Year Segment  5-Year Segment
Segment Duration (in months)  60  60
Valuation Date (Months since Segment Start     Date)  9  57
Segment Investment  $1,000  $1,000
Segment Buffer  -25%  -25%
Performance Cap Rate  55%  55%
Time to Maturity (in months)  51  3

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is -40% (for example from 100.00 to 60.00)

 

Fair Value of Hypothetical Fixed Instrument  $906.97  $999.38
Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives  ($182.42)  ($155.38)
Cap Calculation Factor  $76.54  $4.49
Sum of above  $801.09  $848.49

Segment Investment multiplied by prorated Performance Cap Rate

  $1,082.27  $1,522.58
Segment Interim Value  $801.09  $848.49

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is -10% (for example from 100.00 to 90.00)

 

Fair Value of Hypothetical Fixed Instrument  $906.97  $999.38
Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives  ($13.71)  $1.15
Cap Calculation Factor  $76.54  $4.49
Sum of above  $969.80  $1,005.02

Segment Investment multiplied by prorated Performance Cap Rate

  $1,082.27  $1,522.58
Segment Interim Value  $969.80  $1,005.02

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is 10% (for example from 100.00 to 110.00)

 

Fair Value of Hypothetical Fixed Instrument  $906.97  $999.38
Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives  $75.14  $79.53
Cap Calculation Factor  $76.54  $4.49
Sum of above  $1,058.65  $1,083.40

Segment Investment multiplied by prorated Performance Cap Rate

  $1,082.27  $1,522.58
Segment Interim Value  $1,058.65  $1,083.40

 

Assuming the change in the Index Value is 40% (for example from 100.00 to 140.00)

 

Fair Value of Hypothetical Fixed Instrument  $906.97  $999.38
Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives  $180.33  $320.70
Cap Calculation Factor  $76.54  $4.49
Sum of above  $1,163.84  $1,324.56

Segment Investment multiplied by prorated Performance Cap Rate

  $1,082.27  $1,522.58
Segment Interim Value  $1,082.27  $1,324.56

The input values to the market standard model that have been utilized to generate the hypothetical examples above are as follows:

(1)

Implied volatility of 26.1% is assumed.

(2)

Swap rate corresponding to remainder of Segment term is assumed 0.25% (3 months to maturity) and 2.30% (51 months to maturity).

(3)

Index dividend yield is assumed 1.95% annually.

(4)

One-half estimated Bid-Ask Spread of 15 bps is assumed.

III-7


Examples: Effect of Withdrawals on Segment Interim Value — Choice Segments

Item5-Year Segment
Segment Duration (in months)60
Valuation Date (Months since Segment Start     Date)9
Segment Investment$1,000
Segment Buffer-25%
Performance Cap Rate55%
Time to Maturity (in months)51
Amount Withdrawn(1)$100

Assuming the change in the Index Value is -40% (for example from 100.00 to 60.00)

Segment Interim Value(2)$801.09
Percent Withdrawn(3)12.48%
New Segment Investment(4)$875.17
New Segment Interim Value(5)$701.09

Assuming the change in the Index Value is -10% (for example from 100.00 to 90.00)

Segment Interim Value(2)$969.80
Percent Withdrawn(3)10.31%
New Segment Investment(4)$896.89
New Segment Interim Value(5)$869.80

Assuming the change in the Index Value is 10% (for example from 100.00 to 110.00)

Segment Interim Value(2)$1,058.65
Percent Withdrawn(3)9.45%
New Segment Investment(4)$905.54
New Segment Interim Value(5)$958.65

Assuming the change in the Index Value is 40% (for example from 100.00 to 140.00)

Item5-Year Segment
Segment Interim Value(2)$1,082.27
Percent Withdrawn(3)9.24%
New Segment Investment(4)$907.60
New Segment Interim Value(5)$982.27

(1)

Amount withdrawn is net of applicable withdrawal charge.

(2)

Value immediately before withdrawal.

(3)

Percent Withdrawn is equal to Amount Withdrawn divided by Segment Interim Value.

(4)

New Segment Investment is equal to the original Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by (1 – Percent Withdrawn).

(5)

New Segment Interim Value is equal to the calculated Segment Interim Value based on the new Segment Investment. It will also be equal to the Segment Interim Value multiplied by (1 – Percent Withdrawn).

Example: Segment Interim Value — Annual Lock Segments

Item5-Year Segment
Segment Duration (in months)60
Valuation DateAnnual Lock Anniversary
Segment Investment$1,000
Segment Buffer-10%
Performance Cap Rate12%
Time to Maturity (in months)48

III-8


Assuming the change in the Index Value during the first Annual Lock Period the SIV calculation is occurring is 13% (for example from 100.00 to 113.00)

Fair Value of Hypothetical Fixed Instrument$901.00
Fair Value of Hypothetical Derivatives$127.00
Cap Calculation Factor$72.00
Sum of above$1,100.00

Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount multiplied by prorated Performance Cap Rate

$1,120.00
Segment Interim Value$1,100.00

The input values to the market standard model that have been utilized to generate the hypothetical examples above are as follows:

(1)

Implied volatility surface used for calibration of pricing model.

(2)

Swap rate corresponding to remainder of Segment term is assumed 1.553% annually at inception.

(3)

Index dividend yield is assumed 1.826% annually.

(4)

One-half estimated Bid-Ask Spread of 112.5 bps is assumed.

Examples: Effect of Withdrawals on Segment Interim Value, Segment Investment and Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount — Annual Lock Segments

Item  

1st Annual Lock

Anniversary

  

2nd Annual Lock

Anniversary

  

Withdrawal

Occurs

Segment Duration (in months)  60  60  60

Valuation Date (Months since Segment Start Date)

  12  24  30
Segment Investment  $1,000  $1,000  $1,000
Segment Buffer  -10%  -10%  -10%
Performance Cap Rate  12%  12%  12%
Time to Maturity (in months)  48  36  30
Amount Withdrawn(1)  $0  $0  $110
Change in Index Value  +13%  -5%  +2%
Segment Interim Value      $1,100.00(2)

Annual Lock Anniversary
Starting Amount

  $1,120.00  $1,120.00  
Percent Withdrawn(3)      10.00%
New Segment Investment(4)      $900.00
New Segment Interim Value(5)      $990.00

New Annual Lock Anniversary Starting Amount

  $1,008.00  $1,008.00   

(1)

Amount withdrawn is net of applicable withdrawal charge.

(2)

Value immediately before withdrawal.

(3)

Percent Withdrawn is equal to Amount Withdrawn divided by Segment Interim Value.

(4)

New Segment Investment is equal to the original Segment Investment ($1,000) multiplied by (1 – Percent Withdrawn).

(5)

New Segment Interim Value is equal to the calculated Segment Interim Value based on the new Segment Investment. It will also be equal to the Segment Interim Value multiplied by (1 – Percent Withdrawn).

III-9


Appendix IV: Index Publishers

The Structured Investment Option of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract tracks certain Securities Indices and Index Funds that are published by third parties. The Company uses these Securities Indices and Index Funds under license from the Indices’ and Index Funds respective publishers. The following information about the Indices and Index Funds is includedstatement contained in this Prospectus in accordance with the Company’s license agreements with the publishers of the Indices and Index Funds:

S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC requireschanges or is replaced. Any statement that the following disclaimer be included in the Prospectus:

The S&P 500 Price Return Index and the Dow Jones US Real Estate Index (the “Indexes”) are products of S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC (“SPDJI”), and have been licensed for use by the Company. Standard & Poor’s® and S&P® are registered trademarks of Standard & Poor’s Financial Services LLC (“S&P”); Dow Jones®is a registered trademark of Dow Jones Trademark Holdings LLC (“Dow Jones”); and these trademarks have been licensed for use by SPDJI and sublicensed for certain purposes by the Company. The Structured Capital Strategies® contract is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by SPDJI, Dow Jones, S&P or any of their respective affiliates (collectively, “S&P Dow Jones Indices”). S&P Dow Jones Indices makes no representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Structured Capital Strategies® contract particularly or the ability of the Indexes to track general market performance. S&P Dow Jones Indices’ only relationship to the Company with respect to the Indexes is the licensing of the Indexes and certain trademarks, service marks and/or trade names of S&P Dow Jones Indices and/or its licensors. The Indexes are determined, composed and calculated by S&P Dow Jones Indices without regard to the Company or the Structured Capital Strategies® contract. S&P Dow Jones Indices have no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the owners of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the Indexes. S&P Dow Jones Indices arenot responsible for and have not participated in the determination of the prices, and amount of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract or the timing of the issuance or sale of such contract or in the determination or calculation of the equation by which such contract is to be converted into cash, surrendered or redeemed, as the case may be. S&P Dow Jones Indices have no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Company’s products. There is no assurance that investment products based on the Indexes will accurately track index performance or provide positive investment returns. S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC is not an investment advisor. Inclusion of a security within an index is not a recommendation by S&P Dow Jones Indices to buy, sell, or hold such security, nor is it considered to be investment advice.a part of this Prospectus because of its incorporation will be considered changed or replaced for the purpose of this Prospectus if a statement contained in any other subsequently filed document that is considered to be part of this Prospectus changes or replaces that statement. After that, only the statement that is changed or replaced will be considered to be part of this Prospectus.

 

S&P DOW JONES INDICES DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY, TIMELINESS AND/OR THE COMPLETENESS OF THE INDEXES OR ANY DATA RELATED THERETO OR ANY COMMUNICATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ORAL OR WRITTEN COMMUNICATION (INCLUDING ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS) WITH RESPECT THERETO. S&P DOW JONES INDICES SHALL NOT BE SUBJECT TO ANY DAMAGES OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR DELAYS THEREIN. S&P DOW JONES INDICES MAKE NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE OR AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY THE COMPANY, OWNERS OF THE STRUCTURED CAPITAL STRATEGIES® CONTRACT, OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FROM THE USE OF THE INDEXES OR WITH RESPECT TO ANY DATA RELATED THERETO. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT WHATSOEVER SHALL S&P DOW JONES INDICES BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS, TRADING LOSSES, LOST TIME OR GOODWILL, EVEN IF THEY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. THERE ARE NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES OF ANY AGREEMENTS OR ARRANGEMENTS BETWEEN S&P DOW JONES INDICES AND THE COMPANY, OTHER THAN THE LICENSORS OF S&P DOW JONES INDICES.We file the Registration Statement and our Exchange Act documents and reports, including our Annual Report on Form 10-K and Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q, electronically according to EDGAR under CIK

No.0000727920. The SEC maintains a website that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC. The address of the site is www.sec.gov.

 

The name “S&P 500 Price Return Index”Upon written or oral request, we will provide, free of charge, to each person to whom this Prospectus is delivered, a trademarkcopy of Standard & Poor’s and has been licensed for use by the Company.

Frank Russell Company requires that the following disclosure be included in this Prospectus:

The Structured Capital Strategies® contract is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Frank Russell Company (“Russell”). Russell makes no representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Product(s) particularly or the ability of the Russell 2000® Price Return Index to track general stock market performance or a segment of the same. Russell’s publication of the Russell 2000® Price Return Index in no way suggests or implies an opinion by Russell as to the advisability of investment in any or all of the securities upon whichdocuments considered to be part of this Prospectus because they

are incorporated herein. In accordance with SEC rules, we will provide copies of any exhibits specifically incorporated by reference into the Russell 2000® Price Return Index is based. Russell’s only relationship to the Company is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of Russell andtext of the Russell 2000® Price Return Index which is determined, composed and calculated by Russell without regardExchange Act reports (but not any other exhibits). Requests for documents should be directed to theEquitable Financial Life Insurance Company, or the Structured Capital Strategies® contract. Russell is not responsible for and has not reviewed the Structured Capital Strategies® contract nor any associated literature or publications and Russell makes no representation or warranty express or implied as to their accuracy or completeness, or otherwise. Russell reserves the right, at any time and without notice, to alter, amend, terminate or in any way change the Structured Capital Strategies® contract. Russell has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading1290 Avenue of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract.Americas, New York, New York 10104. Attention: Corporate Secretary (telephone: (212) 554-1234). You can access our website at www.equitable.com for those outside the U.S.

RUSSELL DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY AND/OR THE COMPLETENESS OF THE RUSSELL 2000® PRICE RETURN INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN AND RUSSELL SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR INTERRUPTIONS THEREIN. RUSSELL MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY THE COMPANY, INVESTORS, OWNERS OF THE PRODUCT(S), OR

IV-1


ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FROM THE USE OF THE RUSSELL 2000® PRICE RETURN INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. RUSSELL MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE WITH RESPECT TO THE RUSSELL 2000® PRICE RETURN INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT SHALL RUSSELL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS), EVEN IF NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

MSCI Inc. requires that the following disclosure be included in this Prospectus:

THIS PRODUCT IS NOT SPONSORED, ENDORSED, SOLD OR PROMOTED BY MSCI INC. (“MSCI”), ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES, ANY OF ITS INFORMATION PROVIDERS OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY INVOLVED IN, OR RELATED TO, COMPILING, COMPUTING OR CREATING ANY MSCI INDEX (COLLECTIVELY, THE “MSCI PARTIES”). THE MSCI INDEXES ARE THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF MSCI. MSCI AND THE MSCI INDEX NAMES ARE SERVICE MARK(S) OF MSCI OR ITS AFFILIATES AND HAVE BEEN LICENSED FOR USE FOR CERTAIN PURPOSES BY LICENSEE. NONE OF THE MSCI PARTIES MAKES ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE ISSUER OR OWNERS OF THIS PRODUCT OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY REGARDING THE ADVISABILITY OF INVESTING IN PRODUCTS GENERALLY OR IN THIS PRODUCT PARTICULARLY OR THE ABILITY OF ANY MSCI INDEX TO TRACK CORRESPONDING STOCK MARKET PERFORMANCE. MSCI OR ITS AFFILIATES ARE THE LICENSORS OF CERTAIN TRADEMARKS, SERVICE MARKS AND TRADE NAMES AND OF THE MSCI INDEXES WHICH ARE DETERMINED, COMPOSED AND CALCULATED BY MSCI WITHOUT REGARD TO THIS PRODUCT OR THE ISSUER OR OWNERS OF THIS PRODUCT OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY. NONE OF THE MSCI PARTIES HAS ANY OBLIGATION TO TAKE THE NEEDS OF THE ISSUER OR OWNERS OF THIS PRODUCT OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY INTO CONSIDERATION IN DETERMINING, COMPOSING OR CALCULATING THE MSCI INDEXES. NONE OF THE MSCI PARTIES IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OR HAS PARTICIPATED IN THE DETERMINATION OF THE TIMING OF, PRICES AT, OR QUANTITIES OF THIS PRODUCT TO BE ISSUED OR IN THE DETERMINATION OR CALCULATION OF THE EQUATION BY OR THE CONSIDERATION INTO WHICH THIS PRODUCT IS REDEEMABLE. FURTHER, NONE OF THE MSCI PARTIES HAS ANY OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY TO THE ISSUER OR OWNERS OF THIS PRODUCT OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE ADMINISTRATION, MARKETING OR OFFERING OF THIS PRODUCT. ALTHOUGH MSCI SHALL OBTAIN INFORMATION FOR INCLUSION IN OR FOR USE IN THE CALCULATION OF THE MSCI INDEXES FROM SOURCES THAT MSCI CONSIDERS RELIABLE, NONE OF THE MSCI PARTIES WARRANTS OR GUARANTEES THE ORIGINALITY, ACCURACY AND/OR THE COMPLETENESS OF ANY MSCI INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. NONE OF THE MSCI PARTIES MAKES ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY THE ISSUER OF THE PRODUCT, OWNERS OF THE PRODUCT, OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY, FROM THE USE OF ANY MSCI INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. NONE OF THE MSCI PARTIES SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS OR INTERRUPTIONS OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY MSCI INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. FURTHER, NONE OF THE MSCI PARTIES MAKES ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, AND THE MSCI PARTIES HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO EACH MSCI INDEX AND ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT SHALL ANY OF THE MSCI PARTIES HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS) EVEN IF NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. No purchaser, seller or holder of this product, or any other person or entity, should use or refer to any MSCI trade name, trademark or service mark to sponsor, endorse, market or promote this security without first contacting MSCI to determine whether MSCI’s permission is required. Under no circumstances may any person or entity claim any affiliation with MSCI without the prior written permission of MSCI.Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

 

The Structured Capital Strategies® contract is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promotedconsolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules of Equitable Financial Life Insurance Company incorporated in this Prospectus by The NASDAQ OMX Group, Inc. or its affiliates (NASDAQ OMX, with its affiliates, are referredreference to as the “Corporations”). The CorporationsAnnual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2019 have not passedbeen so incorporated in reliance on the legality or suitabilityreport of, oran independent registered public accounting firm, given on the accuracy or adequacyauthority of descriptionssaid firm as experts in auditing and disclosures relating to, the Structured Capital Strategies® contract. The Corporations make no representation or warranty, express or implied to the owners of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Structured Capital Strategies® contract particularly, or the ability of theNASDAQ-100 Price Return Index to track general stock market performance. The Corporations’ only relationship to The Company (“Licensee”) is in the licensing of the NASDAQ®, OMX®, NASDAQ OMX® and NASDAQ-100 Price Return Index® registered trademarks, and certain trade names of the Corporations and the use of the NASDAQ-100 Price Return Index which is determined, composed and calculated by NASDAQ OMX without regard to Licensee or the Structured Capital Strategies® contract. NASDAQ OMX has no obligation to take the needs of the Licensee or the owners of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the NASDAQ-100 Price Return Index. The Corporations are not responsible for and have not participated in the determination of the timing of, prices at, or quantities of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract to be issued or in the determination or calculation of the equation by which the Structured Capital Strategies® contract is to be converted into cash. The Corporations have no liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Structured Capital Strategies® contract.accounting.

 

THE CORPORATIONS DO NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY AND/OR UNINTERRUPTED CALCULATION OF THE NASDAQ-100 PRICE RETURN INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. THE CORPORATIONS MAKE NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY LICENSEE, OWNERS OF THE STRUCTURED CAPITAL STRATEGIESprovides independent audit services and certain other®non-audit CONTRACT, OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FROM THE USE OF THE NASDAQ-100 PRICE RETURN INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. THE CORPORATIONS MAKE NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE WITH RESPECT TO THE NASDAQ-100 PRICE RETURN INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CORPORATIONS HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. services to the Company as permitted by the applicable SEC independence rules, and as disclosed in the Company’sForm 10-K.address is 300 Madison Avenue, New York, New York 10017.

 

IV-219


State Street Global Advisers requires that the following disclaimer be included in the Prospectus:

This Structured Capital Strategies® variable annuity is not sponsored, endorsed, authorized, sold or promoted by the Select Sector Trust or SSgA FM. Neither the Select Sector Trust nor SSgA FM makes any representations or warranties to purchasers of a Structured Capital Strategies® variable annuity contract or any member of the public regarding the advisability of purchasing a Structured Capital Strategies® variable annuity contract. Neither the Select Sector Trust nor SSgA FM has any obligation or liability in connection with the operation, marketing, trading or sale of Structured Capital Strategies® variable annuities.

Each Select Sector Index is based on equity securities of public companies that are components of the S&P 500, selected on the basis of general industrial classification, and included as constituent securities of a particular Select Sector Index by the Index Compilation Agent in consultation with S&P, a division of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. S&P acts as “Index Calculation Agent” (sometimes also referred to as the “Index Provider”) in connection with the calculation and dissemination of each Select Sector Index.

Select Sector SPDRs are not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by S&P. S&P makes no representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of the Select Sector SPDRs or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Select Sector SPDRs particularly or the ability of a Select Sector SPDR Fund to track the performance of the various sectors represented in the stock market. The stocks included in each Select Sector Index were selected by the Index Compilation Agent in consultation with S&P from a universe of companies represented by the S&P 500. The composition and weighting of stocks included in each Select Sector Index can be expected to differ from the composition and weighting of stocks included in the corresponding S&P 500 sector index that is published and disseminated by S&P. S&P’s only relationship to the Index Compilation Agent is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of S&P and of the S&P 500 which is determined, composed and calculated by S&P without regard to the Index Compilation Agent or any Select Sector SPDR Fund. S&P has no obligation to take the needs of the Index Compilation Agent, the Trust or the owners of Select Sector SPDRs into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the S&P 500. S&P is not responsible for and has not participated in any determination or calculation made with respect to issuance or redemption of the Select Sector SPDRs. S&P has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Select Sector SPDRs.

S&P does not guarantee the accuracy and/or completeness of the S&P 500, the Select Sector Indexes or any data included therein.

S&P makes no warranty, express or implied, as to results to be obtained by the Index Compilation Agent, the Trust, owners of the product, or any other person or entity from the use of the S&P 500, the Select Sector Indexes or any data included therein in connection with the rights licensed under the license agreement or for any other use. S&P makes no express or implied warranties, and hereby expressly disclaims all warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose with respect to the S&P 500, the Select Sector Indexes or any data included therein. Without limiting any of the foregoing, in no event shall S&P have any liability for any special, punitive, indirect or consequential damages (including lost profits), even if notified of the possibility of such damages.

The shares are not sponsored or promoted by either the Index Calculation Agent or the Index Compilation Agent.

Neither the Index Calculation Agent nor the Index Compilation Agent makes any representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of the shares of any Select Sector SPDR Fund or any member of the public regarding the ability of the indexes identified herein to track stock market performance. The Select Sector Indexes identified herein are determined, composed and calculated without regard to the shares of any Select Sector SPDR Fund or the issuer thereof. The Index Calculation Agent and the Index Compilation Agent are not responsible for, nor have they participated in, the determination of the timing of, prices of, or quantities of the shares of any Select Sector SPDR Fund to be issued, nor in the determination or calculation of the equation by which the shares are redeemable. The Index Calculation Agent and the Index Compilation Agent have no obligation or liability to owners of the shares of any Select Sector SPDR Fund in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the shares of any Select Sector SPDR Fund.

Although BofA Merrill Lynch — as the Index Compilation Agent — shall obtain and provide information to S&P — as the Index Calculation Agent — from sources which it considers reliable, the Index Compilation Agent and the Index Calculation Agent do not guarantee the accuracy and/or the completeness of any Select Sector Index or any data included therein. The Index Compilation Agent and the Index Calculation Agent make no warranty, express or implied, as to results to be obtained by the Trust as licensee, licensee’s customers and counterparties, owners of the shares, or any other person or entity from the use of the Select Sector Indexes or any data included therein in connection with the rights licensed as described herein or for any other use. The Index Compilation Agent and the Index Calculation Agent make no express or implied warranties, and each hereby expressly disclaims all warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose with respect to the Select Sector Indexes or any data included therein. Without limiting any of the foregoing, in no event shall the Index Compilation Agent and the Index Calculation Agent have any liability for any direct, indirect, special, punitive, consequential or any other damages (including lost profits) even if notified of the possibility of such damages.

IV-3


Appendix V: Segment Maturity Date and Segment Start Date examplesI: Early Distribution Adjustment Examples

The Segment Maturity Date for Segments maturing and the Segment Start Date for new corresponding Segments will generally be scheduled to occur on consecutive business days that are also Segment Business Days. However, as described earlier in this Prospectus, the Segment Maturity Date and Segment Start Date may sometimes occur on other dates.

Set forth below are representative examples of how the Segment Maturity Date and Segment Start Date may be moved to a different date due to holidays, which are not Segment Business Days.

Assume that the scheduled Segment Maturity Date falls on a holiday, and the preceding and following days are both Segment Business Days:

If the Scheduled Segment

Maturity Date is a holiday:

then the Segment

Maturity Date is:

and the corresponding Segment

Start Date is:

Wednesday the 16thTuesday the 15thThursday the 17th

Assume that the scheduled Segment Start Date falls on a holiday, and the preceding two days are both Segment Business Days:

If the Scheduled Segment

Start Date is a holiday:

then the Segment

Maturity Date is:

and the corresponding Segment

Start Date is:

Thursday the 1stWednesday the 31stno Segment will start until the next scheduled Segment Start Date
Thursday the 17thTuesday the 15thWednesday the 16th

V-1


Appendix VI: Purchase considerations for defined benefit and defined contribution plans

We offer the QP contract as a funding vehicle for defined benefit and defined contribution plans. In certain states the QP contract is not offered. In those states defined benefit and defined contribution plans may purchase NQ contracts as a plan funding vehicle. The plan and trust, if properly qualified, contain the requisite provisions of the Internal Revenue Code to maintain their tax exempt status. The most significant difference between the use of the QP contract and the NQ contract as a funding vehicle is that the QP contract may be converted into an IRA contract for the benefit of a plan participant under specified circumstances; an NQ contract cannot be so converted. The advantage of the IRA conversion feature is that the participant’s benefit amount remains invested: no amounts need to be withdrawn from Segments prior to maturity, the investment options remain available to the participant, and in the Series B contract, the aging of contributions for purposes of contingent withdrawal charges remains intact. If the plan’s funding vehicle is an NQ contract, a withdrawal must be made from the NQ contract in order for the plan to pay the rollover distribution to the plan participant for application to an IRA, or directly to an IRA provider at the direction of the plan participant.

Trustees who are considering the purchase of a Structured Capital Strategies® series contract as a plan funding vehicle should discuss with their tax and ERISA advisers whether such a contract is an appropriate investment vehicle for the employer’s plan. Whether the contract is a QP contract or an NQ contract in certain states, there are significant issues in the purchase of Structured Capital Strategies® series contract for a qualified plan. The QP contract (or the NQ contract in certain states) and this Prospectus should be reviewed in full, and the following factors, among others, should be noted. Trustees should consider whether the plan provisions permit the investment of plan assets in the QP or NQ contract, and the payment of death benefits in accordance with the requirements of the federal income tax rules. Assuming continued plan qualification and operation, earnings on qualified plan assets will accumulate value on a tax-deferred basis even if the plan is not funded by Structured Capital Strategies® series QP or NQ contract, or any other annuity contract. Therefore, plan trusts should purchase a Structured Capital Strategies® series QP or NQ contract to fund a plan for the contract’s features and benefits and not for tax deferral, after considering the relative costs and benefits of annuity contracts and other types of arrangements and funding vehicles. Trustees should consider the liquidity needs of the plan (defined contribution or defined benefit) because Segments in the Structured Investment Option may not be mature at the time plan benefits or required minimum distributions must be paid. Finally, because of the method of purchasing the contract, including the large initial contribution and the requirement that contributions may only be in the form of transfers from existing funds of the qualified plan trust, plan trustees should discuss with their advisers whether the purchase of the QP contract would cause the plan to engage in prohibited discrimination in contributions, benefits or otherwise.

Pooling Plan Assets

We do not permit plans to pool plan assets attributable to the benefits of multiple plan participants in one Structured Capital Strategies® QP contract, because of the IRA conversion possibility for the QP contract noted in the first paragraph of this Appendix. Therefore we require that a separate QP contract be purchased for each covered plan participant. In states where only the NQ contract is available as a funding vehicle, defined benefit plans and defined contribution plans may invest plan assets attributable to the benefits of multiple plan participants in one Structured Capital Strategies® NQ contract. There is no requirement to apply for multiple Structured Capital Strategies® NQ contracts.

Contributions

We accept only transfer contributions from the existing funds of the qualified plan trust, regardless of the type of contract used as the funding vehicle. No contributions will be accepted directly from the employer sponsoring the plan. We will not accept ongoing payroll contributions. For 401(k) plans, no employee after-tax contributions are accepted. A “designated Roth contribution account” is not available in either the QP contract or the NQ contract in certain states. Checks written on accounts held in the name of the employer instead of the plan or the trust will not be accepted. Except for NQ contracts, only one additional transfer contribution may be made per contract year.If amounts attributable to an excess or mistaken contribution must be withdrawn, withdrawal charges may apply.

Payments

Trustees considering the purchase of a Structured Capital Strategies® contract as a qualified plan funding vehicle should also consider the following:

There is no loan feature offered under the Structured Capital Strategies® contracts (whether the funding vehicle is a QP contract or an NQ contract in certain states), so if the plan provides for loans and a participant takes a loan from the plan, other plan assets must be used as the source of the loan and any loan repayments must be credited to other investment vehicles and/or accounts available under the plan. If the plan’s other funding vehicle has insufficient assets to make any loan, amounts withdrawn from the NQ or QP contract will be subject to the Segment Interim Value calculation and in the Series B contracts, may be subject to contingent withdrawal charges.

The plan trust must be designated as the beneficiary and payment of death benefits from the contract must be distributed in accordance with the requirements of the federal income tax rules. Under a QP contract (but not under an NQ contract in certain states) after the plan participant’s death, but before the death benefit is paid, the plan may substitute the beneficiary under the plan at death as the beneficiary under the contract.

All payments under an NQ contract will be made to the plan trust owner. All payments under a QP contract will be made to the plan trust owner until such time as the plan trust owner changes ownership to the plan participant as part of an IRA conversion.

VI-1


Considerations for Defined Benefit Plan Purchases

Split Funding Requirement.The maximum percentage of the value of the plan’s total assets that should be invested in a Structured Capital Strategies® contract at any time is 80%. Whether the funding vehicle is a QP contract or an NQ contract in certain states, at least 20% of the plan’s assets should be invested in one or more other funding vehicles to provide liquidity for the plan because Segments in the Structured Investment Option may not be mature at the time plan benefits become payable.

If the defined benefit plan purchases a QP contract.In order to purchase the QP contract for a defined benefit plan, the plan’s actuary will be required to determine a current dollar value of each plan participant’s accrued benefit so that individual contracts may be established for each plan participant. We do not permit defined benefit plans to pool plan assets attributable to the accrued benefits of multiple plan participants.

The value under a QP contract may at any time be more or less than the lump sum actuarial equivalent of the accrued benefit for a defined benefit plan participant. The Company does not guarantee that the account value under a QP contract will at any time equal the actuarial value of 80% of a participant/employee’s accrued benefit. If amounts attributable to an excess or mistaken contribution must be withdrawn, withdrawal charges may apply. If in a defined benefit plan the plan’s actuary determines that an overfunding in the QP contract has occurred, then any transfers from the QP contract may also result in withdrawal charges.

The plan’s fiduciaries are responsible for ensuring that the plan has enough liquidity to pay benefits when required and should discuss anticipated liquidity needs with the plan’s actuary. Any withdrawal from the Structured Capital Strategies® QP contract to pay benefits, or to address plan overfunding, excess or mistaken contributions, any required minimum distribution requirement, or for any other plan or benefit purpose will be treated as a normal withdrawal for purposes of withdrawal charges and all other contractual provisions.

While the contract is owned by the plan trust, all payments under the contract will be made to the plan trust owner. If the plan rolls over a contract into an IRA for the benefit of a former plan participant through a contract conversion, it is the plan’s responsibility to adjust the value of the contract to the actuarial equivalent of the participant’s benefit, prior to the contract conversion.

If the defined benefit plan purchases an NQ contract.Defined benefit plans may pool plan assets attributable to the accrued benefits of multiple plan participants in one NQ contract. The Structured Capital Strategies® contract is merely a funding vehicle and is not “benefit sensitive” like some contracts or other funding vehicles that may be offered to qualified plan sponsors.

The plan’s fiduciaries are responsible for ensuring that the plan has enough liquidity to pay benefits when required and should discuss anticipated liquidity needs with the plan’s actuary. Amounts must be withdrawn from the contract or the contract must be liquidated to pay benefits; benefits payable under the plan cannot be satisfied through a transfer of ownership of the NQ contract to any person or entity. Any withdrawal from the Structured Capital Strategies® NQ contract to pay benefits, or to address plan overfunding, excess or mistaken contributions, any required minimum distribution requirement, or for any other plan or benefit purpose will be treated as a normal withdrawal for purposes of withdrawal charges and all other contractual provisions.

NQ contract as a funding vehicle in certain states

If the plan’s funding vehicle is an NQ contract, a withdrawal must be made from the NQ contract or the contract must be liquidated in order to roll over to an IRA or other eligible retirement plan. There may be significant tax consequences if the plan transfers ownership of the NQ contract to an employee after the employee separates from service.

Funding vehicle only

The Company’s only role is that of the issuer of the contract. The Company is not the plan administrator. The Company will not perform or provide any plan administrative, recordkeeping or actuarial valuation services with respect to plan assets invested in Structured Capital Strategies® contracts, whether QP (or NQ in certain states). The plan’s administrator will be solely responsible for performing or providing for all such services.

VI-2


Statement of additional information

 

 

 

TableHypothetical Early Distribution Adjustment Examples

A. Examples of contentsEarly Distribution Adjustment to determine Segment Distribution Value

The following examples represent a policy owner who has invested in both Segments 1 and 2. They are meant to show how much value is available to a policy owner when there is a full surrender of the policy by the policy owner or other full distribution from these Segments as well as the impact of Early Distribution Adjustments on these Segments. The date of such hypothetical surrender or distribution is the Valuation Date specified below and, on that date, the examples assume 9 months remain until Segment 1’s maturity date and 3 months remain until Segment 2’s maturity date.

Explanation of formulas and derivation of Put Option Factors is provided in notes(1)-(3) below.

Division of MSO into

Segments

  

Segment 1

(Distribution after 3 months)

  

Segment 2

(Distribution after 9 months)

  Total

Start Date

  3rd Friday of July, Calendar Year Y  3rd Friday of January, Calendar Year Y   
  

Maturity Date

  3rd Friday of July, Calendar Year Y+1  3rd Friday of January, Calendar Year Y+1   
  

Segment Term

  1 year  1 year   
  

Valuation Date

  3rd Friday of October, Calendar Year Y  3rd Friday of October, Calendar Year Y   

Initial Segment Account

  1,000  1,000  2,000
  

Variable Index Benefit Charge

  0.75%  0.75%   
  

Remaining Segment Term

  9 months / 12 months = 9/12 = 0.75  3 months / 12 months = 3/12 = 0.25   

Example I – The Index is down 10% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  –10%  –10%  Total

Put Option Factor

  0.020673  0.003425   
  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.020673 = 20.67

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

Total EDA:

20.67 – 5.67 = 15.00

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.003425 = 3.43

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

Total EDA:

3.43 – 1.89 = 1.54

  

Early Distribution Adjustment

        16.54

Segment Distribution Value

  1000 – 15.00 = 985.00  1000 – 1.54 = 998.46  1,983.46
% change in principal due to the Put Option Component  -2.067%  -0.343%   
% change in principal due to the Charge Refund Component  0.567%  0.189%   
Total % change in Segment Account Value due to the EDA  -1.50%  -0.15%   

I-1


Example II – The Index is up 10% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  10%  10%  Total

Put Option Factor

  0.003229  0.000037   
  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.003229 = 3.23

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

Total EDA:

3.23 – 5.67 = –2.44

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.000037 = 0.04

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

Total EDA:

0.04 – 1.89 = –1.85

  
  

Early Distribution Adjustment

        –4.29

Segment Distribution Value

  1000 – (–2.44) = 1002.44  1000 – (–1.85) = 1001.85  2,004.29
% change in principal due to the Put Option Component  -0.323%  -.004%   
% change in principal due to the Charge Refund Component  0.567%  0.189%   
Total % change in Segment Account Value due to the EDA  0.244%  0.185%   

Example III – The Index is down 40% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  –40%  –40%  Total

Put Option Factor

  0.163397  0.152132   
  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.163397 = 163.40

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

Total EDA:

163.40 – 5.67 = 157.73

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.152132 = 152.13

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

Total EDA:

152.13 – 1.89 = 150.24

  
  

Early Distribution Adjustment

        307.97

Segment Distribution Value

  1000 – 157.73 = 842.27  1000 – 150.24 = 849.76  1,692.03
% change in principal due to the Put Option Component  -16.34%  -15.213%   
% change in principal due to the Charge Refund Component  0.567%  0.189%   
Total % change in Segment Account Value due to the EDA  -15.773%  -15.024%   

Example IV – The Index is up 40% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  40%  40%  Total

Put Option Factor

  0.000140  0.000000   
  

Put Option Component:

1000 * 0.000140 = 0.14

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.75 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 5.67

Total EDA:

0.14 – 5.67 = –5.53

  

Put Option Component:

1000 * .000000 = 0.00

Charge Refund Component:

1000 * 0.25 * (0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075)) = 1.89

Total EDA:

0.00 – 1.89 = –1.89

  
  

Early Distribution Adjustment

        –7.42

Segment Distribution Value

  1000 – (–5.53) = 1005.53  1000 – (–1.89) = 1001.89  2,007.42
% change in principal due to the Put Option Component  -0.014%  0%   
% change in principal due to the Charge Refund Component  0.567%  0.189%   
Total % change in Segment Account Value due to the EDA  0.553%  0.189%   

I-2


(1)

Early Distribution Adjustment = (Segment Account Value) x [ (Put Option Factor) – (Number of days between Valuation Date and Maturity Date) /( Number of days between Start Date and Maturity Date) x ( 0.0075 / (1 – 0.0075) )]. The denominator of the charge refund component of this formula,i.e.,“(1-0.0075),” is an adjustment that is necessary in order for the pro rata refund of the Variable Index Benefit Charge to be based on the gross amount on which that charge was paid by the policy owner on the Segment Start Date.

(2)

Segment Distribution Value = (Segment Account Value) – (Early Distribution Adjustment).

(3)

Derivation of Put Option Factor: In practice, the Put Option Factor will be calculated based on a Black Scholes model, with input values which are consistent with current market prices. We will utilize implied volatility quotes – the standard measure used by the market to quote option prices – as an input to a Black Scholes model in order to derive the estimated market prices. The input values to the Black Scholes model that have been utilized to generate the hypothetical examples above are as follows: (1) Implied volatility – 25%; (2) Libor rate corresponding to remainder of segment term – 1.09% annually; (3) Index dividend yield – 2% annually.

B.

Example of an Early Distribution Adjustment corresponding to a loan allocated to Segments, for the Segment Distribution Values and Segment Account Values listed above for a change in Index Value of –40%

This example is meant to show the effect on a policy if, rather than a full distribution, you took a loan in the circumstances outlined in Example III above when the Index is down 40%. Thus the policy owner is assumed to have an initial Segment Account Value of 1,000 in each of Segment 1 and Segment 2. It is also assumed that 9 months remain until Segment 1’s maturity date and 3 months remain until Segment 2’s maturity date.

Loan Amount: 750

Loan Date: 3rd Friday of October, Calendar Year Y

Explanation of formulas is provided in notes(a)-(d) below.

The Index is down 40% at the time of the Early Distribution Adjustment

Change in Index Value  –40%  –40%  Total
Segment Account Value before Loan  1,000.00  1,000.00  2,000.00

Loan Allocation(a)

    373.34    376.66  750.00

Early Distribution Adjustment(b)

      69.91      66.59  136.55
Segment Account Value after Loan(c)    556.73    556.72  1,113.45
Segment Distribution Value after Loan(d)    468.93    473.10  942.03

(a)

When more than one Segment is being used, we would allocate the loan between the Segments proportionately to the Segment Distribution Value in each. We take the Segment Distribution Value of each Segment (shown in Example III above) and divide it by the total Segment Distribution Values for Segments 1 and 2. This gives us the proportionate amount of the loan that should be allocated to each Segment. For example, for Segment 1, that would be 750 x (842.27/1,692.03) = 373.34

(b)

This is the Early Distribution Adjustment that would be deducted from each Segment, as a result of the loan, based on the amount of the loan that is allocated to that Segment. It is equal to a percentage of the Early Distribution Adjustment that would apply if a full distribution from the Segment were being made, rather than only a partial distribution. This percentage would be 44.32545% for Segment 1 in this example: i.e., 373.34 (the amount of reduction in Segment Distribution Value as a result of the loan) divided by 842.27 (the Segment Distribution Value before the loan). Thus, the Early Distribution Adjustment that is deducted for Segment 1 due to the loan in this example would be 69.91 (i.e., 44.32545% of the 157.73 Early Distribution adjustment shown in Example III above that would apply if a full rather than only a partial distribution from the Segment were being made). Of this 69.91, 72.43 would be attributable to the Put Option Component and-2.51 would be attributable to the Charge Refund Component (which are calculated by applying 44.32545% to the 163.40 Put Option Component and the 5.67 Charge Refund Component shown in Example III). Similarly, the Early Distribution Adjustment deducted as a result of the loan from Segment 2 would be 66.59, of which 67.43 would be attributable to the Put Option Component and-0.84 would be attributable to the Charge Refund Component.

(c)

The Segment Account Value after Loan represents the Segment Account Value before Loan minus the Loan Allocation and the Early Distribution Adjustment. For example, for Segment 1, that would be 1,000 – 373.34 – 69.93 = 556.73.

(d)

Segment Distribution Value after Loan represents the amount a policy owner would receive from a Segment if they decided to surrender their policy immediately after this loan transaction. We would take thepre-loan Segment Distribution Value (shown in Example III above) and subtract the Loan Allocation. For example, for Segment 1, that would be 842.27 – 373.34 = 468.93.

I-3


Appendix II: Impact of MSO Election on Other Policy Riders and/or Services

If you elect to allocate any policy account value to the MSO, other riders and services under your policy (subject to state availability) may be impacted as described below. Please also refer to your variable life insurance policy prospectus for additional information.

 

Impact of MSO Election on the Asset Rebalancing Service PagePolicy(ies)
If you are invested in MSO, you may also elect the Asset Rebalancing Service. However, any amounts allocated to the MSO will not be included in the rebalance transactions. The Companyinvestment options available to your Asset Rebalancing Service do not include the MSO Holding Account or Segments. 2
Unit Values2
Custodian2
Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm2
Distribution of the contracts2
Financial statements2

How to obtain a Structured Capital Strategies® Statement of Additional Information for Separate Account No. 49

Send this request form to:

Retirement Service Solutions

P.O. Box 1547

Secaucus, NJ 07096-1547

Please send me a Structured Capital StrategiesIncentiveLife Legacy® Statement of Additional Information dated May 1, 2020.III,
Name
Address
CityStateZip

Corporate Owned Incentive Life®, Incentive Life® Legacy II, Incentive Life® ‘99, Incentive Life® 2000, Incentive Life® Plus, IncentiveLife Optimizer® III, VUL LegacySM and VUL OptimizerSM, COIL Institutional Series

Impact of MSO Election on the Enhanced Death Benefit Guarantee Rider Policy(ies)
If an enhanced death benefit guarantee rider is included with your policy, and if you allocate your net premiums or transfer amounts of your policy to the MSO, the enhanced no lapse guarantee rider must first be terminated. Once terminated, any such enhanced death benefit guarantee rider cannot be restored. #646174Incentive Life® ‘99
Impact of MSO Election on the Extended No Lapse Guarantee RiderPolicy(ies)
Please note that the MSO is not available while the Extended No Lapse Guarantee Rider is in effect. You must terminate the Extended No Lapse Guarantee Rider before electing MSO. The Extended No Lapse Guarantee guarantees that your policy will not terminate for a certain number of years, provided certain conditions are met.Incentive Life Legacy® II
Impact of MSO Election on the Face Amount Increase Endorsement, Term Insurance Riders, or Cost of Living RidersPolicy(ies)
If your policy has any of these endorsements or riders that schedule or permit an increase in the face amount of your policy (including Target Amount Increases) or the face amount of a term insurance rider, or any combination of the two, any such increase during a Segment Term will be subject to the “face amount increases” provision of the MSO rider for purposes of determining the sufficiency of your values in the investment options under your policy including the MSO Holding Account, and the Unloaned GIO, to cover the recalculated Charge Reserve Amount on the effective date of the increase. The same provision will govern the necessity for any transfers to supplement the amount in the Unloaned GIO. Please also see “Requested Face Amount Increases” under “Description of the Market Stabilizer Option®“ earlier in this Prospectus for more information.Incentive Life® ‘99, Incentive Life® Plus and Corporate Owned Incentive Life®, COIL Institutional Series
Impact of MSO Election on the Living Benefits Rider (also known as an “Accelerated Death Benefit Rider”)Policy(ies)
If a Living Benefits Rider or an accelerated death benefit rider (which may be referred to as a “total and permanent disability accelerated death benefit rider” or a “limited life expectancy accelerated death benefit rider”) is included with your policy, the portion of the cash surrender value that is on lien and is allocated to your values in the variable investment options under your policy and investment in the MSO will be transferred to and maintained as part of the Unloaned GIO. You may tell us how much of the accelerated payment is to be transferred from your value in each variable investment option and your value in the MSO. Units will be redeemed from each variable investment option sufficient to cover the amount of the accelerated payment that is allocated to it and transferred to the Unloaned GIO. Any portion of the payment allocated to the MSO based on your instructions will be deducted from any value in the MSO Holding Account and the individual Segments on a pro-rata basis, based on any value in the MSO Holding Account and the current Segment Distribution Value of each Segment, and transferred to the Unloaned GIO. Any portion of the payment allocated to an individual Segment will cause a corresponding Early Distribution Adjustment of the Segment Account Value. If you do not tell us how to allocate the payment, or if we cannot allocate it based on your directions, we will allocated it based on our rules then in effect. Allocation rules will be provided upon request. Such transfers will occur as of the date we approve an accelerated death benefit payment. There will be no charge for such transfers.

IncentiveLife Legacy® III,

Incentive Life Legacy® II,

Incentive Life® ‘99, Incentive Life® 2000, Incentive Life® Plus, IncentiveLife Optimizer® III, VUL LegacySM and VUL OptimizerSM

Impact of MSO Election on the Loan Extension EndorsementPolicy(ies)
We will include all Segment Values in determining whether the policy will go on to Loan Extension. If the Loan Extension goes into effect, all Segments will be terminated and you will forfeit any positive index performance and be subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment with respect to these amounts. In addition, MSO will no longer be available once you go on Loan Extension.

IncentiveLife Legacy® III,

Incentive Life Legacy® II,

IncentiveLife Optimizer® III, VUL LegacySM and VUL OptimizerSM

II-1


Impact of MSO Election on Long-Term Care ServicesSM RiderPolicy(ies)
If you elect the Long-Term Care ServicesSM Rider, after a period of coverage ends before coverage is continued as a Nonforfeiture Benefit, if any MSO Segments are in effect, they will be terminated with corresponding early distribution adjustments, and the MSO Segment values will be reallocated to the variable investment options and your GIO based on your premium allocations then in effect.

IncentiveLife Legacy® III,

Incentive Life Legacy® II, IncentiveLife Optimizer® III, VUL LegacySM and VUL OptimizerSM

Impact of MSO Election on the Paid Up Death Benefit GuaranteePolicy(ies)

The MSO is not available while the Paid Up Death Benefit Guarantee is in effect. The Paid Up Death Benefit Guarantee provides an opportunity to lock in all or a portion of your policy’s death benefit, provided certain conditions are met.

If a paid up death benefit guarantee (which may be referred to as a “paid up no lapse guarantee”) is included with your policy, and if you elect the paid up death benefit guarantee while any Segment is in effect, the Segment Distribution Value will be used in place of the Segment Account Value in the calculation of your policy account value for purposes of determining the paid up death benefit guarantee face amount. All Segments will be terminated on the effective date of the paid up death benefit guarantee with corresponding Early Distribution Adjustments, and the Segment Distribution Values will be reallocated to the variable investment options available with your policy and to the Unloaned GIO in accordance with your prior directions.

IncentiveLife Legacy® III,

Incentive Life Legacy® II and VUL LegacySM

Incentive Life® ‘99, Incentive Life® 2000 and Incentive Life® Plus

Impact of MSO Election on the Policy Continuation RiderPolicy(ies)
We will include all Segment Values in determining both your eligibility to go on Policy Continuation and your Policy Continuation Charge. If you elect to exercise the Policy Continuation Rider, if available with your policy, all Segments will be terminated subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment. You should carefully consider going on Policy Continuation if you have amounts invested in MSO, as you will forfeit any positive index performance and be subject to an Early Distribution Adjustment with respect to these amounts. In addition, MSO will no longer be available once you go on Policy Continuation.Corporate Owned Incentive Life®, COIL Institutional Series
Impact of MSO Election on the Guaranteed interest option (“GIO”) limitationPolicy(ies)

As of November 18, 2013, the Company will not exercise its right to limit the amounts that may be allocated and or transferred to the guaranteed interest option (“policy guaranteed interest option limitation”). All references to the policy guaranteed interest option limitation in your prospectus, and/or in your policy and/or in the endorsements to your policy, are not applicable.

If you purchased your policy between September 19, 2009 and November 17, 2013, any reference to the policy guaranteed interest option limitation is inapplicable.

Corporate Owned Incentive Life®,

Incentive Life Legacy II,

Incentive Life® ‘99, Incentive Life® 2000 and Incentive Life® Plus, COIL Institutional Series

II-2


PART II

INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

 

ITEM 14.

OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION

 

ITEM OF EXPENSE

  ESTIMATED
EXPENSE
 

Registration fees

  $[0

Federal taxes

   N/A 

State taxes and fees (based on 50 state average)

   N/A 

Trustees’ fees

   N/A 

Transfer agents’ fees

   N/A 

Printing and filing fees

  $50,000

Legal fees

   N/A 

Accounting fees

   N/A 

Audit fees

  $20,000

Engineering fees

   N/A 

Directors and officers insurance premium paid by Registrant

   N/A 

 

*

Estimated expense.

 

ITEM 15.

INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS

Theby-laws of AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (“AXA Equitable”) provide, in Article VII, as follows:

 

 7.4

Indemnification of Directors, Officers and Employees. (a) To the extent permitted by the law of the State of New York and subject to all applicable requirements thereof:

 

 (i)

any person made or threatened to be made a party to any action or proceeding, whether civil or criminal, by reason of the fact that he or she, or his or her testator or intestate, is or was a director, officer or employee of the Company shall be indemnified by the Company;

 

 (ii)

any person made or threatened to be made a party to any action or proceeding, whether civil or criminal, by reason of the fact that he or she, or his or her testator or intestate serves or served any other organization in any capacity at the request of the Company may be indemnified by the Company; and

 

 (iii)

the related expenses of any such person in any of said categories may be advanced by the Company.

(b) To the extent permitted by the law of the State of New York, the Company may provide for further indemnification or advancement of expenses by resolution of shareholders of the Company or the Board of Directors, by amendment of theseBy-Laws, or by agreement. {Business Corporation Law ss.ss.721-726; Insurance Law ss.1216}

The directors and officers of AXA Equitable are insured under policies issued by X.L.X. L. Insurance Company, Arch Insurance Company, Sompo (EnduranceEndurance Specialty Insurance Company),Company, U.S. Specialty Insurance, ACE, (Chubb), Chubb Insurance Company, AXIS Insurance Company and Zurich Insurance Company, AWAC (Allied World Assurance Company Ltd.), Aspen Bermuda XS, CNA, AIG, One Beacon, Nationwide, Berkley, Berkshire, SOMPO, CODA(Chubb) and ARGO Re Ltd.Company. The annual limit on such policies is $300$105 million, and the policies insure the officers and directors against certain liabilities arising out of their conduct in such capacities.


ITEM 16.

EXHIBITS

Exhibits No.

 

(1)

(a)

DistributionBroker-Dealer and General Agent Sales Agreement, dated as of January 1, 1998 among The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States (now AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company) for itself and as depositor on behalf of certain Separate Accounts, and Equitable Distributors, Inc. (now AXA Distributors, LLC), incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-64749), filed on August 5, 2011.Exhibit1-A(3)(b)

(i)

First Amendment dated January 1, 2001 to Distribution Agreement dated January 1, 1998, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File S-6, FileNo. 333-64749),333-17663, filed on August 5, 2011.

(ii)

Second Amendment dated January 1, 2012 to Distribution Agreement dated January 1, 1998, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-05593) filed on April 24, 2012.

(iii)

Third Amendment dated November 1, 2014 to Distribution Agreement dated January 1, 1998, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 2-30070) filed on April 19, 2016.

(iv)

Fourth Amendment dated as of August 1, 2015 to the Distribution Agreement dated as of January 1, 1998 between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company and AXA Distributors, LLC, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form S-3 (File No. 333-229588) filed on April 16, 2019.December 11, 1996.

 

 (b)

Distribution and Servicing Agreement dated as of May  1, 1994, among Equico Securities (now AXA Advisors, LLC), The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States, and Equitable Variable Life Insurance Company, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4 (FileNo. 2-30070), refiled electronically July 10, 1998.

(i)

Letter of Agreement dated April  20, 1998 for Distribution Agreement, among The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States and EQ Financial Consultants, Inc. (now AXA Advisors, LLC), Equitable and Equitable Variable dated as of May 1, 1994, incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit1-A(8) to Registration Statement (Fileon FormS-6, FileNo. 33-83750),333-17663, filed on May 1, 1998.December 11, 1996.

 

 (c)

Distribution Agreement for services by The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States to AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries dated January 1, 2000, incorporated herein by reference to ExhibitNo. 1-A(10)(c) to Registration Statement (File on FormS-6, FileNo.33-83750) 333-17663, filed on April 19, 2001.

 

 (d)

TransitionDistribution Agreement for services by AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries to The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States dated January 1, 2000, incorporated herein by reference to ExhibitNo. 1-A(10)(d) to Registration Statement (File on FormS-6, FileNo.33-83750) 333-17663, filed on April 19, 2001.

 

 (e)

Distribution Agreement, dated as of January 1, 1998 by and between The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States for itself and as depositor on behalf of the Equitable Life separate accounts and Equitable Distributors, Inc., incorporated herein by reference to the Registration Statement filed on Form N-4 (File No. 333-64749) filed on August 5, 2011.

(e)(i)

First Amendment dated as of January 1,  2001 to the Distribution Agreement dated as of January  1, 1998 between The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States for itself and as depositor on behalf of the Equitable Life separate accounts and Equitable Distributors, Inc., incorporated herein by reference to the Registration Statement filed on Form N-4 (File No. 333-127445) filed on August 11, 2005.

(e)(ii)

Second Amendment dated as of January 1, 2012 to the Distribution Agreement dated as of January 1, 1998 between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company and AXA Distributors LLC incorporated herein by reference to the Registration Statement filed on Form N-4 (File No. 333-05593) filed on April 24, 2012.

(f)

General Agent Sales Agreement dated January  1, 2000, between The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, previously filed with Registration StatementNo. 2-30070 on April  19, 2004, and incorporated herein by reference.

(f)(i)

First Amendment dated as of January 1, 2003 to General Agent Sales Agreement dated January 1, 2000, between The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4 (FileNo. 2-30070), filed333-05593) on April 19, 2004.24, 2012. and incorporated herein by reference.

 

 (i)

First Amendment dated January 1, 2003 to General Agent Sales Agreement dated January 1, 2000 between The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the

II-2


United States and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4, (File No. 333-05593), filed April 24, 2012.

(f)(ii)

Second Amendment dated as of January 1, 2004 to General Agent Sales Agreement dated January 1, 2000, between The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4 (File No. 333-05593), filedNo.333-05593) on April 24, 2012. and incorporated herein by reference.

 

 (f)(iii)

Third Amendment dated as of July 19, 2004 to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January 1, 2000 by and between The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4 (FileNo. 333-127445), filed on August 11, 2005.

 

 (f)(iv)

Fourth Amendment dated as of November 1, 2004 to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January 1, 2000 by and between The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4 (FileNo. 333-127445), filed on August 11, 2005.

 

 (f)(v)

Fifth Amendment dated as of November  1, 2006, to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January  1, 2000 by and between The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4 (File No.  333-05593), filed on April 24, 2012.

 

 (f)(vi)

Sixth Amendment dated as of February  15, 2008, to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January  1, 2000 by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4 (File No. 333-05593), filed on April 24, 2012.

 

 (f)(vii)

Seventh Amendment dated as of February  15, 2008, to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January  1, 2000 by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4 (FileNo.2-30070) to Exhibit 3(r), filed on April 20, 2009.

 

 (f)(viii)

Eighth Amendment dated as of November  1, 2008, to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January  1, 2000 by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on FormN-4 (FileNo.2-30070) to Exhibit 3(s), filed on April 20, 2009.

 

 (f)(ix)

Ninth Amendment dated as of November 1, 2011 to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January 1, 2000 by and between AXA Life Insurance Company (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries incorporated herein by reference to the Registration Statement filed on Form N-4 (File No. 333-05593) filed on April 24, 2012.

 

 (f)(x)

Tenth Amendment dated as of November 1, 2013, to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January 1, 2000, by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-178750) filed on October 16, 2014.

 

 (f)(xi)

Eleventh Amendment dated as of November 1, 2013, to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January 1, 2000, by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-178750) filed on October 16, 2014.

 

 (f)(xii)

Twelfth Amendment dated as of November 1, 2013, to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January 1, 2000, by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-178750) filed on October 16, 2014.

 

 (f)(xiii)

Thirteenth Amendment dated as of October 1, 2014 to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January 1, 2000, by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to the Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-202147), filed on September 9, 2015.

 

 (f)(xiv)

Fourteenth Amendment dated as of August 1, 2015 to General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January 1, 2000, by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC and its subsidiaries, incorporated herein by reference to thisthe Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 2-30070)No.2-30070), filed on April 19, 2016.

 

 (f)(xv)

Sixteenth Amendment dated May 1, 2016 to the General Agent Sales Agreement dated as of January 1, 2000 by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, (formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States) and AXA Network, LLC, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 2-30070) filed on April 18, 2017.

 

 (f)(xvi)

Seventeenth Amendment to General Agent Sales Agreement, dated as of August 1, 2016, by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States, (“AXA Equitable”), and AXA NETWORK, LLC, (“General Agent”) “) incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 2-30070) filed on April 17, 2018.

 

 (f)(xvii)

Eighteenth Amendment to General Agent Sales Agreement, dated as of March 1 2017, by and between AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, formerly known as The Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States, (“AXA Equitable”), and AXA NETWORK, LLC (“General Agent”) incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 2-30070)No.2-30070) filed on April 17, 2018.

 

 (f)(g)

Form of Brokerage General AgentBGA Sales Agreement with Schedulefor Fixed and Amendment to Brokerage General Agent Sales Agreement among [Brokerage General Agent]Variable Life Insurance and AXA Distributors, LLC, AXA Distributors Insurance Agency, LLC, AXA Distributors Insurance Agency of Alabama, LLC, and AXA Distributors Insurance Agency of Massachusetts, LLC,Annuity Products incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit (c)(iv)(e) to Registration Statement (File FileNo.333-05593) on FormN-4, 333-103202 filed on April 20, 2005.27, 2004.

 

 (i)(h)

Broker-Dealer and General Agent Sales Agreement dated asThe information concerning commissions included in the SAI forming part of March 15, 2016 between AXA Distributors, LLC, AXA Advisors, LLC and AXA Network, LLC,registration statement333-103199 under “Distribution of the policies” is incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form S-3 (File No. 333-229588) filed on April 16, 2019.reference.

(g)

Form of Wholesale Broker-Dealer Supervisory and Sales Agreement among [Broker-Dealer] and AXA Distributors, LLC, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement (FileNo. 333-05593) onForm N-4, filed on April 20, 2005.

 

II-3II-2


 (h)(i)

Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company (“AXA Equitable”), AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 is incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 25 to the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement onForm N-1A (File No. 333-17217)333-17217 and 811-07953), filed on February 7, 2003.

 

 (i)(i)

Amendment No. 1, dated May 2, 2003, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 28 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on February 10, 2004.

 

 (i)(ii)

Amendment No. 2, dated July 9, 2004, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 35 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on October 15, 2004.

 

 (i)(iii)

Amendment No. 3, dated October 1, 2004, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 35 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on October 15, 2004.

 

 (i)(iv)

Amendment No. 4, dated May 1, 2005, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 37 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on April 7, 2005.

 

 (i)(v)

Amendment No. 5, dated September 30, 2005, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 44 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on April 5, 2006.

 

 (i)(vi)

Amendment No. 6, dated August 1, 2006, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 51 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on February 2, 2007.

 

 (i)(vii)

Amendment No. 7, dated May 1, 2007, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 53 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on April 27, 2007.

 

 (i)(viii)

Amendment No. 8, dated January 1, 2008, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 56 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on December 27, 2007.

 

 (i)(ix)

Amendment No. 9, dated May 1, 2008, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 61 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on February 13, 2009.

 

 (i)(x)

Amendment No. 10, dated January 1, 2009, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 64 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on March 16, 2009.

 

 (i)(xi)

Amendment No. 11, dated May 1, 2009, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 67 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on April 15, 2009.

 

 (i)(xii)

Amendment No. 12, dated September 29, 2009, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 70 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on January 21, 2010.

 

II-4


 (i)(xiii)

Amendment No. 13, dated August 16, 2010, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 77 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on February 3, 2011.

 

 (i)(xiv)

Amendment No. 14, dated December 15, 2010, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 77 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on February 3, 2011.

 

 (i)(xv)

Amendment No. 15, dated June 7, 2011, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Distributors LLC and AXA Advisors dated July 15, 2002 incorporated herein by reference toand/or previously filed with Post-Effective Amendment No. 84 To the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on August 17, 2011.

 

 (i)(xvi)

Amendment No. 16, dated April 30, 2012, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisors Trust, AXA Equitable and AXA Distributors LLC dated July 15,200215, 2002 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 96 to the EQ Advisor’s Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-17217) on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on February 7, 2012.

 

 (h)(i)(a)

Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among the Trust, AXA Equitable, FMG LLC and AXA Distributors LLC dated May 23, 2012, incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on July 22, 2013.

 

 (i)(a)(i)

Amendment No. 1 dated as of June 4, 2013 to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among the Trust, AXA Equitable, FMG LLC and AXA Distributors LLC dated May 23, 2012, incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on July 22, 2013.

 

 (i)(a)(ii)

Amendment No. 2 dated as of October 21, 2013 to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among the Trust, AXA Equitable, FMG LLC and AXA Distributors LLC dated May 23, 2012, incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on July 22, 2013.

 

 (i)(a)(iii)

Amendment No. 3, dated as of April  4, 2014 (“Amendment No. 3”), to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May  23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”), by and among EQ Advisors Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”), incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on April 30, 2014.

 

 (i)(a)(iv)

Amendment No. 4, dated as of June  1, 2014 (“Amendment No. 4”), to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May  23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”), by and among EQ Advisors Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”), incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on April 30, 2014.

 

 (i)(a)(v)

Amendment No.  5, dated as of July 16, 2014 (“Amendment No. 5”), to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May  23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”), by and among EQ Advisors Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”) ”), incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on February 5, 2015.

 

 (i)(a)(vi)

Amendment No.6, dated as of April 30, 2015 (“Amendment No. 6”), to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May 23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”), by and among EQ Advisors Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”), incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217) filed on April 16, 2015.

 

 (i)(a)(vii)

Amendment No. 7, dated as of December 21, 2015 (“Amendment No. 7”), to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May 23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”), by and among EQ Advisors Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”) incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A485 (a) (File No. 333-17217) filed on February 11, 2016.

 

 (i)(a)(viii)

Amendment No. 8, dated as of December 9, 2016 (“Amendment No. 8”), to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May 23,3, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”), by and among EQ Advisors Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”) incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A485 (a) (File No. 333-17217) filed on January 31, 2017.

 

 (i)(a)(ix)

Amendment No. 9 dated as of May 1, 2017 (“Amendment No. 9”) to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May 23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”) by and among EQ Advisors Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”), incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217), filed on April 28, 2017.

 

 (i)(a)(x)

Amendment No. 10 dated as of November 1, 2017 (“Amendment No. 10”) to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May 23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”) by and among EQ Advisors Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”), incorporated herein by reference to EQ Advisors Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1A (File No. 333-17217), filed on October 27, 2017.

 

 (a)(xi)(j)

Participation Agreement among AXA Premier VIP Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Advisors, AXA Distributors and EDI dated as of December 3, 2001 incorporated herein by reference to and/or previously filed with Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to AXA Premier VIP Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-70754) on Form N-1A filed on December 10, 2001.

(j)(i)

Amendment No. 111, dated as of July 12, 2018August 1, 2003 to the Second Participation Agreement among AXA Premier VIP Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Advisors, AXA Distributors and EDI dated as of December 3, 2001 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 6 to AXA Premier VIP Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-70754) on Form N-1A filed on February 25, 2004.

(j)(ii)

Amendment No. 2, dated as of May 1, 2006 to the Participation Agreement among AXA Premier VIP Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Advisors, AXA Distributors and EDI dated as of December 3, 2001 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 16 to AXA Premier VIP Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-70754) on Form N-1A filed on June 1, 2006.

(j)(iii)

Amendment No. 3, dated as of May 25, 2007 to the Participation Agreement among AXA Premier VIP Trust, AXA Equitable, AXA Advisors, AXA Distributors and EDI dated as of December 3, 2001 incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 to AXA Premier VIP Trust Registration Statement (File No. 333-70754) on Form N-1A filed on February 5, 2008.

(j)(iv)

Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among EQ Advisor Trust,the Registrant, AXA Equitable, Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group,FMG LLC and AXA Distributors dated as of May 23, 2012, incorporated herein by reference to AXA Premier VIP Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1AN-1/A (File No. 333-17217)333-70754) filed on July 31, 2018.22, 2013.

 

 (a)(xii)(j)(v)

Amendment No. 121 dated December 6, 2018as of October  21, 2013, to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement among the Registrant, AXA Equitable, FMG LLC and AXA Distributors dated as of May  23, 2012, incorporated herein by reference to AXA Premier VIP Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1/A (File No. 333-70754) filed on October 2, 2013.

(j)(vi)

Amendment No. 2, dated as of April  18, 2014 (“Amendment No. 12”2”) to the Second Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May  23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”) by and among EQ AdvisorAXA Premier VIP Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”), incorporated herein by reference to AXA Premier VIP Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1AN-1/A (File No. 333-17217),333-70754) filed on April 26, 2019.January 12, 2015.

(j)(vii)

Amendment No. 3, dated as of July  8, 2014 (“Amendment No. 3”) to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May  23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”) by and among AXA Premier VIP Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”), incorporated herein by reference to AXA Premier VIP Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1/A (File No. 333-70754) filed on January 12, 2015.

(j)(viii)

Amendment No.  4, dated as of December 10, 2014 (“Amendment No. 4”), to the Amended and Restated Participation Agreement, dated as of May  23, 2012, as amended (“Agreement”), by and among AXA Premier VIP Trust (“Trust”), AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company, AXA Equitable Funds Management Group, LLC and AXA Distributors, LLC (collectively, the “Parties”), incorporated herein by reference to AXA Premier VIP Trust Registration Statement on Form N-1/A (File No. 333-70754) filed on January 12, 2015.

 

 (2)

Not applicable

 

            (4)

(4)(a)

Form of Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity Contract (ADV Share), 2016SCSBASE-I-ADV-A, incorporated herein by reference toPolicy Rider, previously filed with this Registration Statement, FileNo. 333-161963on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.March 10, 2010.

 

 (b)

Form of Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity Contract (ADV Share), 2016SCSBASE-I-ADV-B Rider Option Rider (ICC 09-R09-30), incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4S-1 (File No.333-207256) filedNo: 333-180068) Filed on December 23, 2015.March 13, 2012.

 

II-3


      (c)

Form of Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity Contract (B Share), 2016SCSBASE-I-B-A, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No.333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (d)

Form of Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity Contract (B Share), 2016SCSBASE-I-B-B, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No.333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (e)

Form of Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity Contract (C Share), 2016SCSBASE-I-C-A, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No.333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (f)

Form of Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity Contract (C Share), 2016SCSBASE-I-C-B, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No.333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (g)

Form of Data Pages, 2016SCS-DP-ADV incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (h)

Form of Data Pages, 2016SCS-DP-B incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (i)

Form of Data Pages, 2016SCS-DP-C, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (j)

Form of Endorsement Applicable to Traditional IRA, 2016IRA-SCS-I, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (k)

Form of Endorsement Applicable to Non-Qualified Contracts, 2016NQ-SCS-I incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (l)

Form of Endorsement Applicable to Qualified Defined Benefit Plans, 2016QPDB-SCS-I, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (m)

Form of Endorsement Applicable to Qualified Defined Contribution Plans, 2016QPDC-SCS-I, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (n)

Form of Endorsement Applicable to Roth IRA, 2016ROTH-SCS-I, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

     (o)

Form of The [Choice Segment] Rider, 2016CHOICE-I, incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form N-4 (File No. 333-207256) filed on December 23, 2015.

(5)

Opinion of Shane Daly, Vice President and Associate GeneralConsent of Counsel, filed herewith.

 

 (8)

Not applicable.applicable

 

 (12)

Not applicable.applicable

 

 (15)

Not applicable.applicable

 

 (23)

Consent of independent registered public accounting firm to be filed by amendment.

 

             (24)

(24)(a)

Powers of Attorney, filed herewith.

 

 (25)

Not applicable.applicable

 

 (26)

Not applicable.applicable

 

II-5II-4


ITEM 17.

UNDERTAKINGS

 

 (a)

The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes:

 

 (1)

To file, during any period in which offers or sales are being made, a post-effective amendment to this registration statement:

 

 (i)

to include any prospectus required by section 10(a)(3) of the Securities Act of 1933;

 

 (ii)

to reflect in the prospectus any facts or events arising after the effective date of the registration statement (or the most recent post-effective amendment thereof) which, individually or in the aggregate represent a fundamental change in the information set forth in the registration statement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any increase or decrease in volume of securities offered (if the total dollar value of securities offered would not exceed that which was registered) and any deviation from the low or high end of the estimated maximum offering range may be reflected in the form of prospectus filed with the Commission pursuant to Rule 424(b) if, in the aggregate, the changes in volume and price represent no more than 20% change in the maximum aggregate offering price set forth in the “Calculation of Registration Fee” table in the effective registration statement;

 

 (iii)

to include any material information with respect to the plan of distribution not previously disclosed in the registration statement or any material change to such information in the registration statement;

provided, however, that paragraphs (a)(1)(i), (a)(1)(ii) and (a)(1)(iii) do not apply if the information required to be included in a post-effective amendment by those paragraphs is contained in periodic reports filed with or furnished to the Commission by the registrant pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Securities Act of 1934 that are incorporated by reference in the registration statement, or is contained in a form of prospectus filed pursuant to Rule 424(b) that is part of this Registration Statement.

 

 (2)

That, for the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, each such post-effective amendment shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

 

 (3)

To remove from registration by means of a post-effective amendment any of the securities being registered which remain unsold at the termination of the offering.

 

 (4)

That, for the purpose of determining liability under the Securities Act of 1933 to any purchaser, each prospectus filed

 

II-6II-5


pursuant to Rule 424(b) as part of a registration statement relating to an offering, other than registration statements relying on Rule 430B or other than prospectuses filed in reliance on Rule 430A, shall be deemed to be part of and included in the registration statement as of the date it is first used after effectiveness. Provided, however, that no statement made in a registration statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statement or made in a document incorporated or deemed incorporated by reference into the registration statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statement will, as to a purchaser with a time of contract of sale prior to such first use, supersede or modify any statement that was made in the registration statement or prospectus that was part of the registration statement or made in any such document immediately prior to such date of first use.

pursuant to Rule 424(b) as part of a registration statement relating to an offering, other than registration statements relying on Rule 430B or other than prospectuses filed in reliance on Rule 430A, shall be deemed to be part of and included in the registration statement as of the date it is first used after effectiveness. Provided, however, that no statement made in a registration statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statement or made in a document incorporated or deemed incorporated by reference into the registration statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statement will, as to a purchaser with a time of contract of sale prior to such first use, supersede or modify any statement that was made in the registration statement or prospectus that was part of the registration statement or made in any such document immediately prior to such date of first use.

 

 (5)

That, for the purpose of determining liability of the Registrant under the Securities Act of 1933 to any purchaser in the initial distribution of the securities: The undersigned Registrant undertakes that in a primary offering of securities of the undersigned Registrant pursuant to this registration statement, regardless of the underwriting method used to sell the securities to the purchaser, if the securities are offered or sold to such purchaser by means of any of the following communications, the undersigned Registrant will be a seller to the purchaser and will be considered to offer or sell such securities to such purchaser: (i) Any preliminary prospectus or prospectus of the undersigned Registrant relating to the offering required to be filed pursuant to Rule 424; (ii) Any free writing prospectus relating to the offering prepared by or on behalf of the undersigned Registrant or used or referred to by the undersigned Registrant; (iii) The portion of any other free writing prospectus relating to the offering containing material information about the undersigned Registrant or its securities provided by or on behalf of the undersigned Registrant; and (iv) Any other communication that is an offer in the offering made by the undersigned Registrant to the purchaser.

(b) The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that, for purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, each filing of the registrant’s annual report pursuant to Section 13(a) or Section 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 that is incorporated by reference in the registration statement shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

 

II-7II-6


(c) Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

 

II-8II-7


SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the Registrant certifies that it has reasonable grounds to believe that it meets all of the requirements for filing on FormS-3 and has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City and State of New York, on this 14th day of February, 2020.

 

AXA EQUITABLE LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
 (Depositor)

(Registrant)

By:

 

/s/ Shane Daly

 

Shane Daly

 

Vice President and Associate General Counsel

 

AXA Equitable Life Insurance Company

As required by the Securities Act of 1933, this amendment to the Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the date indicated:

 

PRINCIPAL EXECUTIVE OFFICER:OFFICERS:  
*Mark Pearson  

Chief Executive Officer and Director

PRINCIPAL FINANCIAL OFFICER:  
*Anders B. Malmstrom  

Senior Executive Director and

and Chief Financial Officer

PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING OFFICER:  
*William Eckert  Managing Director, Chief Accounting Officer and Controller

 

*DIRECTORS:      

Mark Pearson

Daniel G. Kaye

Kristi A. Matus

Mark Pearson

Ramon de Oliveira

 

George Stansfield

Charles G.T. Stonehill

Bertram Scott

George Stansfield

Charles G.T. Stonehill

    

 

*By: 

/s/ Shane Daly

 Shane Daly
 Attorney-in-Fact
February 14, 2020

February 14, 2020